1. SOLICITATION NO.2. TYPE OF SOLICITATION3. DATE ...



1. SOLICITATION NO.2. TYPE OF SOLICITATION3. DATE ISSUEDPAGE OF PAGES4. CONTRACT NO.5. REQUISITION/PURCHASE REQUEST NO.6. PROJECT NO.7. ISSUED BYCODE8. ADDRESS OFFER TOA. NAMEB. TELEPHONE NO. (Include area code) (NO COLLECT CALLS)10. THE GOVERNMENT REQUIRES PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK DESCRIBED IN THESE DOCUMENTS (Title, identifying no., date):12A. THE CONTRACTOR MUST FURNISH ANY REQUIRED PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS? (If "YES," indicate within how many calendar days after award in Item 12B.)12B. CALENDAR DAYS13. ADDITIONAL SOLICITATION REQUIREMENTS:STANDARD FORM 1442 (REV. 4-85)STANDARD FORM 1442Prescribed by GSA YFAR (48 CFR) 52.236-1(d)NSN 7540-01-155-3212SOLICITATION, OFFER,AND AWARD(Construction, Alteration, or Repair)SOLICITATIONSOLICITATIONIMPORTANT - The "offer" section on the reverse must be fully completed by offeror.9. FOR INFORMATION CALL:NOTE: In sealed bid solicitations "offer" and "offeror" mean "bid" and "bidder".SEALED BID (IFB)NEGOTIATED (RFP)11. The Contractor shall begin performance within ____________ calendar days and complete it within ____________calendar days after receivingaward,notice to proceed. This performance period ismandatory,negotiable. (See _____________________________.)YESNOA.Sealed offers in original and ___________________copies to perform the work required are due at the place specified in Item 8 by _____________(hour) local time _____________________ (date). If this is a sealed bid solicitation, offers must be publicly opened at that time. Sealedenvelopes containing offers shall be marked to show the offeror's name and address, the solicitation number, the date and time offers are dueB.An offer guaranteeis,is not required.C.All offers are subject to the (1) work requirements, and (2) other provisions and clauses incorporated in the solicitation in full text or by reference .D.Offers providing less than _______________________ calendar days for Government acceptance after the date offers are due will not beconsidered and will be rejected. 1 of 837VA245-14-B-0001X11-07-13613-13-112Department of Veterans AffairsVAMC (613)VISN 5 Contract Satellite Office510 Butler Avenue, Building 308BMartinsburg WV 25405Same as Block 7________________________________________"THIS IS A 100% SERVICE DISABLEDVETERAN-OWNED SMALL BUSINESS SET-ASIDEPROCUREMENT". NAICS: 236220 $33.5M Siz e Std.Germaine Talbot304-263-0811 ext 3218ITEM NO. 1: Contractor shall provide all labor, material, equipment, tools, supervision and travel required torenovate 2A Wing for a new OEF/OIF Clinic at the VA Medical Center, 510 Butler Avenue, Martinsburg, WV 25405 inaccordance with the specifications and drawings. Contractor shall perform demolition of all existing walls, ceilings,mechanical, electrical and plumbing systems, as well as telecommunication devices and cabling. Fire suppressionsystem shall remain operational until the new system has been installed and tested. HAZMATs are present in thesuite and the abatement will be performed by a HAZMAT abatement contractor. Contractor shall provide new walls,finishes, ceilings, mechanical, electrical and plumbing systems, as well as new telecommunication devices and cabling.The new suite shall have the following space functions: reception and waiting area, group therapy room, two exam rooms(one of which will have an adjoining toilet), nine patient interview/staff offices, clean supply and soiled utilityroom, storage room, hospital swing space and a new women's public restroom accessed from the public corridor. Thegross square feet of the existing suite is approximately 3,400 GSF of which only 2,750 GSF will be used for thisproject and the remaining 650 GSF will be swing space. Completion time: 210 calendar days after receipt of the NTP.A single award will be made on Item No. 1, but in the event the bid exceeds the funds available, a single awardwill be made on Item No. 2 or Item No. 3, etc., in that order, based on available funding. Bidders should providea price on each item listed for bid to be responsive.ITEM NO. 2: Furnish all labor, material, equipment, tools, supervision and travel required to renovate 2A Wing for anew OEF/OIF clinic excluding the renovation and fit-out of swing space 2A-123. Completion time: 196 calendar daysafter receipt of the notice to proceed (NTP).ITEM NO. 3: Furnish all labor, material, equipment, tools, supervision and travel required to renovate 2A Wing for anew OEF/OIF clinic excluding the renovation and fit-out of swing space 2A-123 and reinstallation of the pneumatictube system. System shall be returned. Completion time: 196 calendar days after receipt of the notice to proceed (NTP).ITEM NO. 4: Furnish all labor, material, equipment, tools, supervision and travel required to renovate 2A Wing for anew OEF/OIF clinic excluding the items in Item No. 3 and excluding the glass door 2A-124B1 and side pletion time: 196 calendar days after receipt of the notice to proceed (NTP).ITEM NO. 5: Furnish all labor, material, equipment, tools, supervision and travel required to renovate 2A Wing for anew OEF/OIF clinic excluding items in Item No. 4 and excluding the push plate and handicap access controllerfor door 2A-124 suite entry. Completion time: 196 calendar days after receipt of the notice to proceed (NTP).PRE-BID SITE VISIT WILL BE HELD ON 11/21/13 AT 11 AM, VAMC, 510 BUTLER AVE, BLDG. 308B, MARTINSBURG, WV 25405.10*See pageX52.211-10X10 12:00 PM12-10-2013X120PART I - THE SCHEDULE 1SECTION A - SOLICITATION/CONTRACT FORM SF 1442 SOLICITATION, OFFER, AND AWARD (Construction, Alteration, or Repair)14. NAME AND ADDRESS OF OFFEROR15. TELEPHONE NO.16. REMITTANCE ADDRESSCODEFACILITY CODE17. The offeror agrees to perform the work required at the prices specified below in strict accordance with the terms of the solicitation, if this offer isaccepted by the Government in writing within __________ calendar days after the date offers are due.AMOUNTS18. The offeror agrees to furnish any required performance and payment bonds.19. ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF AMENDMENTSAMENDMENT NO.DATE20A. NAME AND TITLE OF PERSON AUTHORIZED TO SIGN OFFER20B. SIGNATURE20C. OFFER DATE21. ITEMS ACCEPTED:22. AMOUNT23. ACCOUNTING AND APPROPRIATION DATA24. SUBMIT INVOICES TO ADDRESS SHOWN INITEM25. OTHER THAN FULL AND OPEN COMPETITION PURSUANT TO10 U.S.C. 2304(c)( )41 U.S.C. 253(c) ( )26. ADMINISTERED BYCODE27. PAYMENT WILL BE MADE BYPHONE:FAX:28. NEGOTIATED AGREEMENT29. AWARDYourContractor agreesoffer on this solicitation, is hereby accepted as to the items listed. Thisto furnish and deliver all items or perform all work, requisitions identifiedaward consummates the contract. which consists of (a) the Governmenton this form and any continuation sheets for the consideration stated insolicitation and your offer, and (b) this contract award. No further cont-this contract. The rights and obligations of the parties to this contractractual document is necessary.shall be governed by (a) this contract award, (b) the solicitation, and (c)the clauses, representations, certifications, and specifications incorporatedby reference in or attached to this contract.30A. NAME AND TITLE OF CONTRACTOR OR PERSON AUTHORIZED31A. NAME OF CONTRACTING OFFICERTO SIGN30B. SIGNATURE30C. DATE31B. UNITED STATES OF AMERICABYOFFERAWARDSTANDARD FORM 1442(REV. 4-85)BACK(Include ZIP Code)(Include area code)(Include only if different than Item 14)(Insert any number equal to or greater thanthe minimum requirement stated in Item 13D. Failure to insert any number means the offeror accepts the minimum in Item 13D.)(The offeror acknowledges receipt of amendments to the solicitation - give number and date of each)(Type or print)(4 copies unless otherwise specified)(Type or print)(Type or print)(Contractor is required to sign thisdocument and return _______ copies to issuing office.)(Contractor is not required to sign this document.)(Must be fully completed by offeror)(To be completed by Government)CONTRACTING OFFICER WILL COMPLETE ITEM 28 OR 29 AS APPLICABLEITEM NO. 1: $______________________________ ITEM NO. 2: $___________________________________ITEM NO. 3: $______________________________ ITEM NO. 4: $___________________________________ITEM NO. 5: $_______________________________Department of Veterans AffairsVAMC (613)VISN 5 Contract Satellite Office510 Butler Avenue, Building 308BMartinsburg WV 25405Department of Veterans AffairsVAFSCAttn: East TeamPo Box 149971Austin TX 78714Germaine TalbotTABLE OF CONTENTS PAGEPART I - THE SCHEDULE…………………………………………………………………….……………………...… 1SECTION A - SOLICITATION/CONTRACT FORM………………………………………………………….…...…..1SF 1442 SOLICITATION, OFFER, AND AWARD (Construction, Alteration, or Repair)………………...…… .1INFORMATION REGARDING BIDDING MATERIAL, BID GUARANTEE AND BONDS…………….....……...8INSTRUCTIONS, CONDITIONS AND OTHER STATEMENTS TO BIDDERS/OFFERORS…………....…...…..9GENERAL PROVISIONS ………………………..……………………………………………….…………....………..17REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS……………………………………………….…………....………..24GENERAL CONDITIONS………………………………………………………………………………...…….……….29SECTION 01 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ……………………………………………….………………….65DAVIS-BACON WAGE DETERMINATION………………………………….……………………………….…….101SECTION 01 33 23 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES ……………………………….….108SECTION 01 42 19 REFERENCE STANDARDS ….……………………………….……………………………….112SECTION 01 58 16 TEMPORARY INTERIOR SIGNAGE ……………………….……………………………….121SECTION 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT ……………….……………………………….123SECTION 01 81 11 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ……………….……………………………….130SECTION 02 41 00 DEMOLITION ………………………………………………….…………………………….141SECTION 02 82 11 TRADITIONAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT..………………………….…………….……….144SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS ……………………..…………………………………...………….190SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY..………………………………………………………………….…….201SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY ..………………………….…………………………………………….209SECTION 07 21 13 THERMAL INSULATION ………………………………..…………………..……………….222SECTION 07 21 23 LOOSE-FILL INSULATION ………….…………………………..………….……………….228SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING .……………………………………………….…………...………………….232SECTION 07 92 00 SEALANTS AND CAULKING ……………………………………..………………...……….236SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES …………………………………….………….248SECTION 08 14 00 INTERIOR WOOD DOORS ….……………………………………………………………….256SECTION 08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES ……………………….……………………..…………….264SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STORE FRONTS …………….…………….269SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE .…………………………….…………………………………………….274SECTION 08 71 13 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS ..…………….………………………………………….303SECTION 08 71 13.11 LOW ENERGY POWER ASSIST DOOR OPERATORS ……………………………….309SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING ……………………………………………………………………………………….316SECTION 09 06 00 SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES ..………………………………………………………….…….325SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING ……………………………………………….….336SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD .……………………………….……………………………..……………...343SECTION 09 30 13 CERAMIC/PORCELAIN TILING ..……………………..………………………….………...351SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS …………………………………..……………………………..….367SECTION 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES ...........................................................................….377SECTION 09 65 19 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING …….……………………..…………………………….…….381SECTION 09 68 00 CARPETING ..……………………………………………...…………………..……………….387SECTION 09 91 00 PAINTING ..………………………………………………...……….………….……………….394SECTION 10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS ..……………………………...……….……………..………….417SECTION 10 26 00 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION ……………………………...…………………….…….420SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES ……………………………………….425SECTION 10 44 13 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS ………………………………………………………….435SECTION 12 36 00 COUNTERTOPS ……………………..………………………………………….….………….437SECTION 13 05 41 SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS ………………………………………………………………………………..446SECTION 14 50 00 PNEUMATIC TUBE SYSTEM ……………………………………………………….……….454SECTION 21 13 13 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS ..………………………………………………….…….457SECTION 22 05 11 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING ………………….……….……………….463SECTION 22 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING ……………….……………………….482SECTION 22 05 23 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING ………………….…………….….485SECTION 22 07 11 PLUMBING INSULATION ..……………………………….…………………………..…..….490SECTION 22 11 00 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION ………………………….………………………....….503SECTION 22 13 00 FACILITY SANITARY AND VENT PIPING ………………………………………………..511SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES ……………………………………………..…………………..…….521SECTION 23 05 11 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC.……………….…….…………………………...528SECTION 23 05 41 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT…….....548SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC …………………...…………….555SECTION 23 07 11 HVAC AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION ……………………………..……..………….565SECTION 23 09 23 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC …………….……...………..…..….580SECTION 23 54 46 HYDRONIC PIPING ….……………………………………………………………….……….614SECTION 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS ……………………………………………………………….630SECTION 23 36 00 AIR TERMINAL UNITS ………………...…………………………………………………….640SECTION 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS ..……………………………………………………………….644SECTION 23 82 00 CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS ……………………………………….647SECTION 26 05 11 REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS …………………………….... PAGEREF PARA_S0035_P00002 \*MERGEFORMAT Error! Bookmark not defined.SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES …….………658 SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ………………………....665SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS …………………………….….670SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROLS ….…………………………………………………..……………….679SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES ..………………………………………………..………………………….683SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING ..…………………………………………...………………………….689SECTION 27 05 11 REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS ………………………697SECTION 27 05 26 REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS …………..………….705SECTION 27 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS ……………………….710SECTION 27 41 41 MASTER ANTENNA TV EQUIPMENT……………………………………..……………….719SECTION 27 51 19 SOUND MASKING SYSTEMS…………………………………………..…………………….733SECTION 27 52 23 NURSE CALL………………………………………………..………………………………….740SECTION 28 05 11 REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC SECURITY………………………………....…….802SECTION 28 05 13 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY…………………………....808SECTION 28 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY……………………………....….812SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM …………………………………………...……………….822ATTACHMENTSCONTRACTOR EMERGENCY RESPONSE POSTURES ……………………………….……………………….832ICRA/LSM (PDF Attachment) SECTION 00 01 15LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS The drawings listed below accompanying this specification form a part of the contract. DRAWINGS FOR DEMOLITION WORK:DRAWING NUMBERTITLE GENERALGS-000Cover SheetGS-001General NotesAD-101Demolition PlanPD-101Bldg. 500 Second Floor –Plumbing – DemolitionMD-101Bldg. 500 Second Floor –Mechanical – DemolitionES-001Electrical Legend, Conventions, Abbreviations, and Demolition NotesED-101Bldg. 500 Second Floor –Electrical – DemolitionES-601Electrical One-Line DiagramES-602Electrical SchedulesES-603Electrical SchedulesDRAWINGS FOR RENOVATION WORK:DRAWING NUMBERTITLE GENERALGS-000Cover SheetGS-001General NotesGI-101Life Safety Plans - Second FloorARCHITECTURALAD-101Demolition PlanAP-101New Work PlanAP-201New Work RCPAP-301New Work Finish Floor PlanAP-302Finish ScheduleAP-303Equipment Plan & TableAS-101Interior ElevationsAS-102Bathroom DetailsAS-201Partition TypesAS-301DetailsAS-302DetailsAS-401Door Schedule & DetailsFIRE PROTECTIONFX-001Sprinkler System Notes and SymbolsFX-101Sprinkler System Second Floor - New Work PlanFX-501Sprinkler System DetailsFA-001Fire Alarm & Detection - Notes and SymbolsFA-101Fire Alarm - Second Floor - New Work Plan PLUMBINGPG-001Plumbing Legend, Abbreviations, Schedule and General NotesPD-101Bldg. 500 First Floor Interstitial Space – Plumbing – DemolitionPD-102Bldg. 500 Second Floor – Plumbing – DemolitionPD-103Bldg. 500 Second Floor – Interstitial Space – Plumbing DemolitionPL-101Bldg. 500 first Floor Interstitial Space – Plumbing – New WorkPL-102Bldg. 500 Second Floor – Plumbing – New WorkPL-103Bldg. 500 Second Floor Interstitial Space – Plumbing – New WorkPL-601Riser Diagrams and DetailMECHANICALMG-001Cover Sheet – MechanicalMD-101Bldg. 500 Second Floor – Mechanical – DemolitionMD-102Bldg. 500 Second Floor – Mechanical Piping – DemolitionMH-101Bldg. 500 Second Floor – Mechanical – New WorkMH-102Bldg. 500 Second Floor – Mechanical Piping – New WorkMH-501Mechanical DetailsMH-701Mechanical SchedulesELECTRICALEG-001 Electrical Legend, Conventions, and AbbreviationsEG-002Electrical General NotesED-101Bldg. 500 Second Floor – Electrical – DemolitionEL-101Bldg. 500 Second Floor – LightingEP-101Bldg. 500 Second Floor – Power and Specialty SystemsES-501Electrical DetailsES-502Electrical DetailsES-601Electrical One-Line Diagram and SchedulesES-602Electrical SchedulesES-603Electrical SchedulesTRANSPORTATIONQH-101Pneumatic Conveyor System Alteration E N D INFORMATION REGARDING BIDDING MATERIAL, BID GUARANTEE AND BONDS (a) Solicitation materials may be obtained at . Contractors are responsible for downloading all required documents. (b) Subcontractors, material firms and others interested in preparing subbids may view the interested parties list at to obtain a list of organizations, such as Builders Exchanges, Chambers of Commerce, Contractors and others, who have received bidding materials. (c) An bid/offer guarantee is required in an amount not less than 20 percent of the offer price but shall not exceed $3,000,000. Failure to furnish the required offer guarantee in the proper form and amount, by the time set for opening of proposals, will require rejection of the offer in all cases except those listed in FAR 28.101-4, and may be cause for rejection even then. (d) While no deposit will be necessary, return of the bidding material, postage prepaid, to the issuing office within 10 days after date of opening bids will be required. In case no bid is to be submitted, the return of the bidding material, as soon as this fact has been determined and before the date of opening bids, is requested. If you decide not to bid on this project, please advise the issuing office of your reasons (the contracting officer should modify accordingly if a deposit is required). (e) A bid guarantee is required in an amount not less than 20 percent of the bid price but shall not exceed $3,000,000. Failure to furnish the required bid guarantee in the proper form and amount, by the time set for opening of bids, will require rejection of the bid in all cases except those listed in FAR 28.101-4, and may be cause for rejection even then. (f) If the contract will exceed $100,000 (see FAR 28.102-1 for lesser amount), the bidder to whom award is made will be required to furnish two bonds, a Payment Bond, SF 25A, and a Performance Bond, SF 25, each in the penal sum as noted in the General Conditions of the Specification. Copies of SFs 25 and 25A may be obtained upon application to the issuing office.DESCRIPTION OF WORK: General Construction, work includes labor, materials, equipment, tools, travel, general construction, demolition, alterations mechanical and electrical work, utility systems, necessary removal of existing partitions and construction for the renovation to 2A Wing for OEF/OIF ClinicCost Range: $500,000.00 to $1,000,000.00.INSTRUCTIONS, CONDITIONS AND OTHER STATEMENTS TO BIDDERS/OFFERORS1. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Upon receipt of Notice of Award and prior to attending the pre-construction conference, the successful bidder shall have completed steps #1 and #2 of the enclosed Security Requirements document. This process includes completion and submission of Security Requirements Form #1 (Background Investigation Request Worksheet) to the VHA Service Center Personnel Security Office. Each contract employee is required to undergo a Special Agreement Check (SAC) background investigation which equates to being fingerprinted. Contract employees shall complete Security Requirements Form #2 (VHA Special Agreement Checks Memorandum) and follow instructions outlined in step #2 of the attached Security Requirements document to complete fingerprinting process. Upon successful completion of fingerprinting, all contract employees will be required to obtain a non-Personal Identity Verification (non-PIV) badge (see step #3 of attached Security Requirements document. Contractor staff working on site will be required to wear the badges at all times while on site. Contractor will be required to immediately notify the Contracting Officer of any changes in staff performing work on site. Upon completion of the contract all identification badges must be returned to the Contracting Officer before final payment can be made. 2. METRIC PRODUCTSIf a product is manufactured to metric dimensions and those dimensions exceed the tolerances specified in the inch-pound units, a request should be made to the Contracting Officer to determine if the product is acceptable. The Contracting Officer, in concert with the Contracting Officer Technical Representative (COTR), will accept or reject the product.3. INVOICING In order to comply with the Improper Payments Elimination Recovery Act of 2010 (IPERA), the VAFSC has expanded its electronic invoicing services through OB10 provided solutions. OB10 electronic invoicing services, including mapping/transaction fees, are free to VAFSC vendors. If you are not currently a member of the OB10 network, subscribing is simple.? There is no expensive hardware or software to install.? OB10 will handle all of the necessary technical and commercial steps needed to establish your account.? If you prefer, feel free to contact OB10 at va.registration@ or 1-877-752-0900 then select option 2.? To contact the Department of Veteran Affairs Financial Service Center (VAFSC) about this request visit or call the FSC e-Invoice Contact Information at (866) 372-1141. Contractor must provide the Contracting Officer a draft copy of all invoices at the time for approval before they are submitted to Austin, TX.4. SYSTEM FOR AWARD MANAGEMENT (SAMS), VETBIZ AND VET00 REGISTRATION: CONTRACTOR MUST BE registered in the System for Award Management (SAMS), VetBiz and the VETS100 database before contract award. SAMS can be accessed at , VetBiz can be accessed at and VETS100 can be accessed at SDVOSB/VOSB Firms currently verified in the Veterans Information Pages (VIP) at are eligible to submit bids/offers. SDVOSB Firms that submit bids on SDVOSB set-asides that are not listed on VIP will be deemed nonresponsive.5. GENDER Whenever the masculine gender is used in the solicitation and contract documents it shall be considered to include both masculine and feminine.6. HOURS OF WORK Work is to be performed between the hours of 8:00 a.m. through 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, excluding federal holidays and any other day specifically declared by the President of the United States to be a National Holiday.NOTE: FEDERAL HOLIDAYS: The ten holidays observed by the Federal Government are: New Year’s Day, Martin Luther King’s Birthday, Washington’s Birthday, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Columbus Day, Thanksgiving Day, Veterans Day, Christmas Day 7. CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE ASSESSMENT REPORTING SYSTEM (CPARS)This contract will require reporting in Contractor Performance Assessment Reporting System (CPARS); therefore, the contractor shall provide a POC to the contracting officer at time of award who will be responsible for managing reports/CPARs on this contract and will be assigned the role as “contractor representative” within CPARS. This system is used Federal-agency wide as a solution for the collection of Contractor Past Performance Information (PPI). This is being implemented throughout Veterans Health Administration (VHA) in an attempt to be in compliance with the requirements of FAR part 42 for documenting contractor performance assessments and evaluations. Past performance information is relevant information for future source selection purposes regarding a contractor’s actions under previously awarded contracts. It includes, for example, the contractor’s record of conforming to contract requirements and to standards of good workmanship; the contractor’s record of forecasting and controlling costs; the contractor’s adherence to contract schedules, including the administrative aspects of performance; the contractor’s history of reasonable and cooperative behavior and commitment to customer satisfaction; the contractor’s record of integrity and business ethics, and generally, the contractor’s business-like concern for the interest of the customer. Each contractor is required to register in the Contractor Performance Assessment Reporting System (CPARS) @ . The Contracting Officer/Contracting Officer Representative will evaluate the contractor's performance annually. The report shall be assigned in CPARS to the contractor's designated representative (contractor representative) for comment. The contractor representative will have thirty (30) days to submit any comments and then re-assign the report to the VA Contracting Officer acting as the Assessing Official within CPARS. Failure to register and respond within the thirty days will result in the Government's evaluation being placed on file in the database with a statement that the contractor failed to respond.8. GUIDE FOR VHA DIRECTIVE 2011-036VHA Directive 2011-036 SAFETY AND HEALTH DURING CONSTRUCTION, effective September 22, 2011, Safety or Environmental Violations and Experience Modification Rate“All Bidders/Offerors shall submit the following information pertaining to their past Safety and Environmental record. The information shall contain, at a minimum, a certification that the bidder/offeror has no more than three (3) serious, or one (1) repeat or one (1) willful OSHA or any EPA violation(s) in the past three years.All Bidders/Offerors shall submit information regarding their current Experience Modification Rate (EMR) equal to or less than 1.0. This information shall be obtained from the bidder’s/offeror’s insurance company and be furnished on the insurance carrier’s letterhead.Self insured contractors or other contractors that cannot provide their EMR rating on insurance letterhead must obtain a rating from the National Council on Compensation Insurance, Inc. (NCCI) by completing/submitting form ERM-6 and providing the rating on letterhead from NCCI.? Note: Self insured contractors or other contractors that cannot provide EMR rating on insurance letterhead from the states or territories of CA, DE, MI, NJ, ND, OH, PA, WA, WY, and PR shall obtain their EMR rating from their state run worker’s compensation insurance rating bureau.A Determination of Responsibility will be accomplished for the apparent awardee prior to processing the award. The above information, along with other information obtained from Government systems, such as the OSHA and EPA online inspection history databases will be used to make the Determination of Responsibility. Failure to affirm being within the guidelines above or submit this information will result in a determination of “Non-Responsibility” for the bidder/offeror. NOTE: Any information received by the Government that would cause for a negative Determination of Responsibility will make the bidder/offeror ineligible for award.This requirement is applicable to all subcontracting tiers, and prospective prime contractors are responsible for determining the responsibility of their prospective subcontractors. “9. BACKGROUND AND SECURITY REQUIREMENTSSpecial Agreement Checks (SAC) and issuance of Non-Personnel Identification Verification (Non- PIV) security badges for Contractor and Subcontractor Employees performing work under the contract All contractor employees who have access to VA sensitive information are subject to the same level of investigation as VA employees. Through the use of Appendix A of VA Handbook 6500.6, it has been determined that performance of this Construction requirement does not require any access to the VA Information Technology network; therefore; the inclusion of VAAR Security Clause 852.273-75 is not required. The level of background investigation commensurate with the level of access needed to perform the statement of work for this Construction requirement is a Special Agreement Check (SAC) investigation, which equates to fingerprinting. This level of investigation requires all contractor and subcontractor employees performing work under this requirement to be fingerprinted and to be issued an appropriate security badge. The Contractor is responsible for bearing the expense of all employee background investigations initiated, regardless of the final adjudication determination.? The VA facility will pay for investigations conducted by the Office of Personnel Management (OPM); however, the General/Prime Contractor is responsible for reimbursing the VA.? The following are estimated costs for each of the potential risk level background investigations.? ? SAC?(Fingerprints) Estimated $?? ? 24.95???????????? ?NACI?(Low Risk)Estimated $?? 231.00???MBI (Medium Risk)??????Estimated $?? 825.00????BI (High Risk)?????????? ????Estimated $ 3,465.00Where this guidance refers to “contractor employees” it is inclusive of all “subcontractor employees” performing under this contract as well.CONTRACTOR: Upon receipt of Notice of Award, Contractor shall comply with the following processes in order to be in compliance with contract security requirements. SPECIAL AGREEMENT CHECKS (SAC) AND NON-PERSONAL IDENTITY VERIFICATION – PIV (Security Badge) INSTRUCTIONSContractor POC will complete the Background Request Worksheet in its entirety, listing all employees that will be performing work under the construction requirement portion of this Construction project. Once completed, this form shall be submitted to the VHA Service Center (VSC) Personnel Security Office via password protected or encrypted email to VSCSecurity@ or faxed to (216)447-8020. NOTE: Due to the personal information contained in the Background Investigation Request Worksheet, the worksheet must be sent in a secure manner. Please DO NOT email a document containing social security numbers unless the email is encrypted. Process that occurs after VSC receives Form #1 for processing: Within five business days of receiving the Background Investigation Request Worksheet, the VSC Personnel Security Office will enter a background investigation request into the VA Security Investigation Center (SIC) Contractor Request Database (CRD) for each contractor employee. When the request is entered, an automated “initial” e-mail is sent to the contractor point of contact listed on the Background Investigation Request Worksheet. The automated e-mail identifies the background investigation level requested (SAC) and provides a website link with further instructions.If a contractor employee has a background investigation from another federal agency, it may be reciprocated as long as the background investigation meets the appropriate level designated in the current statement of work and has occurred within the last five years with a favorable adjudication and no break in service. Please be aware that any public trust case that is older than two years and does not have a favorable adjudication cannot be reciprocated unless it was a no issue case.VSC Personnel Security Office staff will coordinate with the VA Security and Investigations Center (SIC) staff to verify reciprocity. If the contractor employee receives the automated email from the VA SIC CRD and believes he/she may be eligible for reciprocity, please contact the VA SIC using the contact information in the e-mail received. Reciprocity is NOT automatic. If a background investigation can be reciprocated, the VA SIC will send an email notification to the contractor.Note: If contract personnel need to be added to perform work under this contract after the original Background Investigation Request Worksheet has been submitted, Contractor must update and submit another Background Investigation Request Worksheet to the VSC Personnel Security Office so that a background investigation can be initiated on each contract personnel added. When completing Form #1 for the additional contract employee, indicate next to the purchase order number field on Form #1 that this is an ADDITION. The additional contract employee cannot start work until all security requirements outlined in this guidance are completed.All contractor employees are required to be fingerprinted as part of the Special Agreement Check (SAC) requirement. Within five business days of Contractor receiving Notice of Award, each contract employee listed must take the VHA Special Agreement Checks (SAC) Memorandum and two forms of ID to their nearest VA facility to have their fingerprints submitted and the bottom portion of Form completed by a fingerprinting official. Appointments for fingerprints should be made through the Contracting Officer Technical Representative or the local VA facility. Completed SAC forms shall be faxed or mailed directly to the VSC Personnel Security Office the same day the contractor employee is fingerprinted. Forms can be faxed or mailed directly to:Personnel Security OfficeVHA Service Center (VSC)6100 Oak Tree Blvd #500Independence, Ohio 44131Fax: (216) 447-8025VSCSecurity@ Contractor shall inform the Contracting Officer Technical Representative (COTR)/Contracting Officer when fingerprinting has been completed for each contract employee. Each individual working on the contract or the contractor POC shall complete the VHA Service Center PIV Sponsorship Worksheet for each employee, in its entirety, and return to VSC Security Office as soon as possible, either via fax, encrypted email or password protected documents. Upon receipt of this form and final results of fingerprinting confirmation, the VHA Security Service Center will send an email notification to the Contractors point of contact and the Contracting Officer authoring contract employees to proceed with obtaining their required non-PIV security badge. NOTE: No Notice to Proceed will be issued until the fingerprinting requirement (SAC) has been met and the VHA Service Center PIV Sponsorship Worksheet has been forwarded and processed through the VSC Personnel Security Office. Security badges can and should be obtained at any VA Facility. Contact your Contracting Officer for a listing of all of the VA facility locations for fingerprinting and issuance of security badges. The same badge will be valid at all VA facilities throughout the contract period. IMPORTANT points for Contract Employees to follow for obtaining non-PIV badges: Contract employees shall work with the COTR or PIV Office at the VA facility to verify the physical location of the PIV Point of Contact (POC). Contract employees shall call ahead to make an appointment with the VA facility PIV office. Contract employees shall make sure they have two (2) forms of identification with them. Contract employees shall inform the COTR when badges have been received.Your security badge must be displayed in accordance with the local VA directives (must be visible at all times while working at any VA facility). In the event of a lost badge, contract employees must immediately contact their supervisor who in turn shall contact the COTR. They must also contact the VHA Service Center (VSC), Personnel Security Service, and the local PIV office to report the loss.These security badges are the Property of the United States Government; Contractor is REQUIRED to turn in all security badges at the last campus where work has been performed. After completion of the project, Contractor shall complete the Contractor Turn-In Inventory Report (Form #4) to verify that all badges have been collected and turned in to be destroyed. Any failure to collect, record and return security badges at the end of the contract performance period could result in a Poor Contractor Performance Rating in the Contractor Performance Assessment Rating System (CPARS). VA Card Types and Requirements (8/12)The determining factors to consider when chosing the appropriate VA ID for Applicants are the duration of access and access to sensitive data, information systems, and restricted areas. The card type issued is decided independent of VA employment position (Employee, contractor, or affiliate) or job description. It is ultimately the responsibility of the employees supervisor, along with an officially certified PIV Sponsor, to determine the appropriate card types. In addition, FIPS 201, along with OPM regulations (Title 5 Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 731 and 732), and Executive Order 10450, Security Requirements for Government Employment, provide that all federally employed personnel are subject to a background investigation. According to FIPS 201, the minimum requirement to be issued a PIV badge is a successfully adjudicated Special Agreement Check (SAC) and an initiated National Agency Check with Written Inquiries (NACI). The PIV Card is issued to VA Applicants who require unsupervised, full-time, logical and/or physical access for a continuous period more than six months. In accordance with OMB Directive M-05-24, the physical access requirement includes VA or other federally owned or leased space, whether for single or multi-tenant occupancy, and its grounds and approaches, all or any portion of which is under the jurisdiction, custody, or control or the VA or other Federal agency. There are individuals in the VA organization that will not qualify for the PIV card and will therefore be issued a Non-PIV card or Flash Badge. Non-PIV Card holders are typically employed for a period of 180 consecutive or aggregate days or less in a 365 day period, over a 3 year span. The Non-PIV card requires the Applicant to present 2 forms of ID (at least one must be a federally issued ID with a photo). Non-PIV Card will have a physical topography that is visually distinguishable from the PIV card. All cards must be turned into the PCI manager upon conclusion of the cardholders tour on the VA Medical Campus. The PCI Manager will assume responsibility for storing badges in a secure location consistent with current federal and/or PMO guidelines. The Flash Badge allows only common physical access to VA grounds and facilities. The Flash Badge requires the Applicant to present only one issued photo ID and does not require a SAC/NACI or higher level background investigation. The Flash Badge will appear topographically different from both the PIV and Non-PIV cards described above. The Flash Badge may be issued with an expiration date of up to one year. Issuance of a Flash Badge without a photo ID is not an option. While FIPS 201 does not mandate that Non-PIV Cards or Flash Badges have an expiration date, VA has determined that in some cases, some Non-PIV Card or Flash Badge holders may eventually be subject to HSPD-12 standards and as such will be required to obtain a PIV Card. The term length of three years for Non-PIV Cards and one year for Flash Badges will reduce the frequency for re-issuance of credentials for permanent Non-PIV Cards and Flash Badges.The following information describes the criteria for Applicants (employee, contractor, or affiliate) who will receive a PIV card, a Non-PIV card, or a Flash Badge. The criteria are based on the card Applicant's access requirements for physical and/or logical VA resources, as determined by the Applicant's job duties and/or employment duration. Specific background investigation and access requirements are identified for each of the types of ID cards. PIV Card ? Access Requirements: Unsupervised, full-time, logical and/or physical access for more than 6 months OR more than 180 aggregate days in a one year period. (IAW OMB M-05-24, VA Directive 0710, and Draft VA Handbook 0735) ? ID Requirements: Two IDs compliant with PIV Guidelines - Form I-9- Employment Eligibility Verification - Identity Documentation Criteria ? Background Investigation Requirements: Favorable SAC completion and NACI initiation Non-PIV Card ? Access Requirement: Unsupervised, logical and/or physical access for 180 consecutive or aggregate days in a 365 day period, over a 3 year period. (IAW OMB M-05-24, VA Directive 0710, and Draft VA Handbook 0735) ? ID Requirements: Two IDs compliant with PIV Guidelines - Form I-9- Employment Eligibility Verification - Identity Documentation Criteria ? Background Investigation Requirements: Favorable SAC completion Flash Badge ? Access Requirement: Limited physical access for a one year period. (IAW OMB M-05-24, VA Directive 0710, and Draft VA Handbook 0735) ? ID Requirements: One ID compliant with PIV Guidelines -Form I-9- Employment Eligibility Verification ? Background Investigation Requirements: None The following table is a matrix that depicts access and processing requirements for PIV, Non-PIV and Flash Badge card types:Table 1: Card Access and Process RequirementsPIV Card Access Requirements PIV Card Processing Requirements More than 6 months or more than 180 aggregate days in a one year periodLocal AccessSensitive Records AccessRestricted Physical AccessCommon Physical AccessNACI Initiation (or higher BI) RequiredSAC RequiredNumber of IDs RequiredVA E-Mail RequiredYesYesYesYesYesYes2YesNo?YesYesYesYesYes2No????????Non-PIV Card Access RequirementsNon-PIV Card Processing RequirementsLess than 6 months or less than 180 aggregate days in a one year periodLocal AccessSensitive Records AccessRestricted Physical AccessCommon Physical AccessNACI Initiation (or higher BI) RequiredSAC RequiredNumber of IDs RequiredVA E-Mail RequiredYesYesYesYesNo Yes2YesNo?YesYesYesNoYes2No????????Flash Badge Access RequirementsFlash Badge Processing RequirementsCommon physical access only for less than 6 months or less than 180 aggregate days in a one year periodLocal AccessSensitive Records AccessRestricted Physical AccessCommon Physical AccessNACI Initiation (or higher BI) RequiredSAC RequiredNumber of IDs RequiredVA E-Mail Required???Yes NoNo1; PCI Manager can waive required IDNo *An applicant may be issued a PIV card even though they do not require logical access.**Non-PIV Card and Flash Badge holders who become subject to HSPD-12 requirements during the 3 year term of the Non-PIV Card and the 1 year term of the Flash Badge will be required to obtain a PIV Card.GENERAL PROVISIONS2.1 52.204-7 SYSTEM FOR AWARD MANAGEMENT (JUL 2013) (a) Definitions. As used in this provision— Data Universal Numbering System (DUNS) number means the 9-digit number assigned by Dun and Bradstreet, Inc. (D&B) to identify unique business entities. Data Universal Numbering System +4 (DUNS+4) number means the DUNS number assigned by D&B plus a 4-character suffix that may be assigned by a business concern. (D&B has no affiliation with this 4-character suffix.) This 4-character suffix may be assigned at the discretion of the business concern to establish additional System for Award Management records for identifying alternative Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT) accounts (see the FAR at Subpart 32.11) for the same concern. Registered in the System for Award Management (SAM) database means that— (1) The offeror has entered all mandatory information, including the DUNS number or the DUNS+4 number, the Contractor and Government Entity (CAGE) code, as well as data required by the Federal Funding Accountability and Transparency Act of 2006 (see Subpart 4.14) into the SAM database; (2) The offeror has completed the Core, Assertions, and Representations and Certifications, and Points of Contact sections of the registration in the SAM database; (3) The Government has validated all mandatory data fields, to include validation of the Taxpayer Identification Number (TIN) with the Internal Revenue Service (IRS). The offeror will be required to provide consent for TIN validation to the Government as a part of the SAM registration process; and (4) The Government has marked the record “Active”. (b)(1) By submission of an offer, the offeror acknowledges the requirement that a prospective awardee shall be registered in the SAM database prior to award, during performance, and through final payment of any contract, basic agreement, basic ordering agreement, or blanket purchasing agreement resulting from this solicitation. (2) The offeror shall enter, in the block with its name and address on the cover page of its offer, the annotation "DUNS" or "DUNS +4" followed by the DUNS or DUNS +4 number that identifies the offeror's name and address exactly as stated in the offer. The DUNS number will be used by the Contracting Officer to verify that the offeror is registered in the SAM database. (c) If the offeror does not have a DUNS number, it should contact Dun and Bradstreet directly to obtain one. (1) An offeror may obtain a DUNS number— (i) Via the Internet at or if the offeror does not have internet access, it may call Dun and Bradstreet at 1-866-705-5711 if located within the United States; or (ii) If located outside the United States, by contacting the local Dun and Bradstreet office. The offeror should indicate that it is an offeror for a U.S. Government contract when contacting the local Dun and Bradstreet office. (2) The offeror should be prepared to provide the following information: (i) Company legal business. (ii) Tradestyle, doing business, or other name by which your entity is commonly recognized. (iii) Company Physical Street Address, City, State, and Zip Code. (iv) Company Mailing Address, City, State and Zip Code (if separate from physical). (v) Company Telephone Number. (vi) Date the company was started. (vii) Number of employees at your location. (viii) Chief executive officer/key manager. (ix) Line of business (industry). (x) Company Headquarters name and address (reporting relationship within your entity). (d) If the Offeror does not become registered in the SAM database in the time prescribed by the Contracting Officer, the Contracting Officer will proceed to award to the next otherwise successful registered Offeror. (e) Processing time, which normally takes 48 hours, should be taken into consideration when registering. Offerors who are not registered should consider applying for registration immediately upon receipt of this solicitation. (f) Offerors may obtain information on registration at .(End of Provision)2.2 852.211-72 TECHNICAL INDUSTRY STANDARDS (JAN 2008) The supplies or equipment required by this invitation for bid or request for proposal must conform to the standards of the NFPA, OSHA, UL, EPA, NEC, Joint Commission and as otherwise noted in the specifications . The successful bidder or offeror will be required to submit proof that the item(s) he/she furnishes conforms to this requirement. This proof may be in the form of a label or seal affixed to the equipment or supplies, warranting that they have been tested in accordance with and conform to the specified standards. Proof may also be furnished in the form of a certificate from one of the above listed organizations certifying that the item(s) furnished have been tested in accordance with and conform to the specified standards.(End of Provision)2.3 VAAR 852.214-70 CAUTION TO BIDDERS--BID ENVELOPES (JAN 2008) It is the responsibility of each bidder to take all necessary precautions, including the use of proper mailing cover, to insure that the bid price cannot be ascertained by anyone prior to bid opening. If a bid envelope is furnished with this invitation, the bidder is requested to use this envelope in submitting the bid. The bidder may, however, use any suitable envelope, identified by the invitation number and bid opening time and date. If an Optional Form (OF) 17, Sealed Bid Label, is furnished with this invitation in lieu of a bid envelope, the bidder is advised to complete and affix the OF 17 to the lower left corner of the envelope used in submitting the bid.(End of Provision)2.4 52.216-1 TYPE OF CONTRACT (APR 1984) The Government contemplates award of a Firm-Fixed-Price contract resulting from this solicitation.(End of Provision)2.5 52.222-5 DAVIS-BACON ACT--SECONDARY SITE OF THE WORK (JUL 2005) (a)(1) The offeror shall notify the Government if the offeror intends to perform work at any secondary site of the work, as defined in paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of the FAR clause at 52.222-6, Davis-Bacon Act, of this solicitation. (2) If the offeror is unsure if a planned work site satisfies the criteria for a secondary site of the work, the offeror shall request a determination from the Contracting Officer. (b)(1) If the wage determination provided by the Government for work at the primary site of the work is not applicable to the secondary site of the work, the offeror shall request a wage determination from the Contracting Officer. (2) The due date for receipt of offers will not be extended as a result of an offeror's request for a wage determination for a secondary site of the work.(End of Provision)2.6 52.222-23 NOTICE OF REQUIREMENT FOR AFFIRMATIVE ACTION TO ENSURE EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY FOR CONSTRUCTION (FEB 1999) (a) The offeror's attention is called to the Equal Opportunity clause and the Affirmative Action Compliance Requirements for Construction clause of this solicitation. (b) The goals for minority and female participation, expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate workforce in each trade on all construction work in the covered area, are as follows:Goals for minority participation for each tradeGoals for female participation for each trade25.2 %6.9 % These goals are applicable to all the Contractor's construction work performed in the covered area. If the Contractor performs construction work in a geographical area located outside of the covered area, the Contractor shall apply the goals established for the geographical area where the work is actually performed. Goals are published periodically in the Federal Register in notice form, and these notices may be obtained from any Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs office. (c) The Contractor's compliance with Executive Order 11246, as amended, and the regulations in 41 CFR 60-4 shall be based on (1) its implementation of the Equal Opportunity clause, (2) specific affirmative action obligations required by the clause entitled "Affirmative Action Compliance Requirements for Construction," and (3) its efforts to meet the goals. The hours of minority and female employment and training must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the contract, and in each trade. The Contractor shall make a good faith effort to employ minorities and women evenly on each of its projects. The transfer of minority or female employees or trainees from Contractor to Contractor, or from project to project, for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's goals shall be a violation of the contract, Executive Order 11246, as amended, and the regulations in 41 CFR 60-4. Compliance with the goals will be measured against the total work hours performed. (d) The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Deputy Assistant Secretary for Federal Contract Compliance, U.S. Department of Labor, within 10 working days following award of any construction subcontract in excess of $10,000 at any tier for construction work under the contract resulting from this solicitation. The notification shall list the-- (1) Name, address, and telephone number of the subcontractor; (2) Employer's identification number of the subcontractor; (3) Estimated dollar amount of the subcontract; (4) Estimated starting and completion dates of the subcontract; and (5) Geographical area in which the subcontract is to be performed. (e) As used in this Notice, and in any contract resulting from this solicitation, the "covered area" isMartinsburg, West Virginia.(End of Provision)2.7 52.225-10 NOTICE OF BUY AMERICAN ACT REQUIREMENT -- CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS (FEB 2009) (a) Definitions. "Commercially available off-the-shelf (COTS) item," "construction material," "domestic construction material," and "foreign construction material," as used in this provision, are defined in the clause of this solicitation entitled "Buy American Act--Construction Materials" (Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) clause 52.225-9). (b) Requests for determinations of inapplicability. An offeror requesting a determination regarding the inapplicability of the Buy American Act should submit the request to the Contracting Officer in time to allow a determination before submission of offers. The offeror shall include the information and applicable supporting data required by paragraphs (c) and (d) of the clause at FAR 52.225-9 in the request. If an offeror has not requested a determination regarding the inapplicability of the Buy American Act before submitting its offer, or has not received a response to a previous request, the offeror shall include the information and supporting data in the offer. (c) Evaluation of offers. (1) The Government will evaluate an offer requesting exception to the requirements of the Buy American Act, based on claimed unreasonable cost of domestic construction material, by adding to the offered price the appropriate percentage of the cost of such foreign construction material, as specified in paragraph (b)(3)(i) of the clause at FAR 52.225-9. (2) If evaluation results in a tie between an offeror that requested the substitution of foreign construction material based on unreasonable cost and an offeror that did not request an exception, the Contracting Officer will award to the offeror that did not request an exception based on unreasonable cost. (d) Alternate offers. (1) When an offer includes foreign solicitation in paragraph (b)(2) of the clause at FAR 52.225-9, the offeror also may submit an alternate offer based on use of equivalent domestic construction material. (2) If an alternate offer is submitted, the offeror shall submit a separate Standard Form 1442 for the alternate offer, and a separate price comparison table prepared in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of the clause at FAR 52.225-9 for the offer that is based on the use of any foreign construction material for which the Government has not yet determined an exception applies. (3) If the Government determines that a particular exception requested in accordance with paragraph (c) of the clause at FAR 52.225-9 does not apply, the Government will evaluate only those offers based on use of the equivalent domestic construction material, and the offeror shall be required to furnish such domestic construction material. An offer based on use of the foreign construction material for which an exception was requested-- (i) Will be rejected as nonresponsive if this acquisition is conducted by sealed bidding; or (ii) May be accepted if revised during negotiations.(End of Provision)2.8 52.228-1 BID GUARANTEE (SEP 1996) (a) Failure to furnish a bid guarantee in the proper form and amount, by the time set for opening of bids, may be cause for rejection of the bid. (b) The bidder shall furnish a bid guarantee in the form of a firm commitment, e.g., bid bond supported by good and sufficient surety or sureties acceptable to the Government, postal money order, certified check, cashier's check, irrevocable letter of credit, or, under Treasury Department regulations, certain bonds or notes of the United States. The Contracting Officer will return bid guarantees, other than bid bonds, (1) to unsuccessful bidders as soon as practicable after the opening of bids, and (2) to the successful bidder upon execution of contractual documents and bonds (including any necessary coinsurance or reinsurance agreements), as required by the bid as accepted.- (c) The amount of the bid guarantee shall be 20 percent of the bid price or $3 million, whichever is less.- (d) If the successful bidder, upon acceptance of its bid by the Government within the period specified for acceptance, fails to execute all contractual documents or furnish executed bond(s) within 10 days after receipt of the forms by the bidder, the Contracting Officer may terminate the contract for default. (e) In the event the contract is terminated for default, the bidder is liable for any cost of acquiring the work that exceeds the amount of its bid, and the bid guarantee is available to offset the difference.(End of Provision)2.9 VAAR 852.228-72 ASSISTING SERVICE-DISABLED VETERAN-OWNED AND VETERAN-OWNED SMALL BUSINESSES IN OBTAINING BONDS (DEC 2009) Prime contractors are encouraged to assist service-disabled veteran-owned and veteran-owned small business potential subcontractors in obtaining bonding, when required. Mentor firms are encouraged to assist protégé firms under VA's Mentor-Protégé Program in obtaining acceptable bid, payment, and performance bonds, when required, as a prime contractor under a solicitation or contract and in obtaining any required bonds under subcontracts.(End of Clause)2.10 52.233-2 SERVICE OF PROTEST (SEP 2006) Protests, as defined in section 33.101 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation, that are filed directly with an agency, and copies of any protests that are filed with the Government Accountability Office (GAO), shall be served on the Contracting Officer (addressed as follows) by obtaining written and dated acknowledgment of receipt from: Hand-Carried Address: Department of Veterans Affairs VAMC (613) Chief, Contracting (90C) 510 Butler Ave, Building 308B Martinsburg WV 25405 Mailing Address: Department of Veterans Affairs VAMC (613) Chief, Contracting (90C) 510 Butler Ave, Building 308B Martinsburg WV 25405 (b) The copy of any protest shall be received in the office designated above within one day of filing a protest with the GAO.(End of Provision)2.11 VAAR 852.233-70 PROTEST CONTENT/ALTERNATIVE DISPUTE RESOLUTION (JAN 2008) (a) Any protest filed by an interested party shall: (1) Include the name, address, fax number, and telephone number of the protester; (2) Identify the solicitation and/or contract number; (3) Include an original signed by the protester or the protester's representative and at least one copy; (4) Set forth a detailed statement of the legal and factual grounds of the protest, including a description of resulting prejudice to the protester, and provide copies of relevant documents; (5) Specifically request a ruling of the individual upon whom the protest is served; (6) State the form of relief requested; and (7) Provide all information establishing the timeliness of the protest. (b) Failure to comply with the above may result in dismissal of the protest without further consideration. (c) Bidders/offerors and contracting officers are encouraged to use alternative dispute resolution (ADR) procedures to resolve protests at any stage in the protest process. If ADR is used, the Department of Veterans Affairs will not furnish any documentation in an ADR proceeding beyond what is allowed by the Federal Acquisition Regulation.(End of Provision)2.12 VAAR 852.233-71 ALTERNATE PROTEST PROCEDURE (JAN 1998) As an alternative to filing a protest with the contracting officer, an interested party may file a protest with the Deputy Assistant Secretary for Acquisition and Materiel Management, Acquisition Administration Team, Department of Veterans Affairs, 810 Vermont Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20420, or for solicitations issued by the Office of Construction and Facilities Management, the Director, Office of Construction and Facilities Management, 810 Vermont Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20420. The protest will not be considered if the interested party has a protest on the same or similar issues pending with the contracting officer.(End of Provision) PLEASE NOTE: The correct mailing information for filing alternate protests is as follows:Deputy Assistant Secretary for Acquisition and Logistics,Risk Management Team, Department of Veterans Affairs810 Vermont Avenue, N.W.Washington, DC 20420 Or for solicitations issued by the Office of Construction and Facilities Management:Director, Office of Construction and Facilities Management811 Vermont Avenue, N.W.Washington, DC 204202.13 52.236-27 SITE VISIT (CONSTRUCTION) (FEB 1995) ALTERNATE I (FEB 1995) (a) The clauses at 52.236-2, Differing Site Conditions, and 52.236-3, Site Investigations and Conditions Affecting the Work, will be included in any contract awarded as a result of this solicitation. Accordingly, offerors or quoters are urged and expected to inspect the site where the work will be performed. (b) An organized site visit has been scheduled for- November 21, 2013 at 11:00 a.m. (c) Participants will meet at- 510 Butler Ave, Bldg. 308B, Martinsburg, WV 25405(End of Provision)2.14 VAAR 852.270-1 REPRESENTATIVES OF CONTRACTING OFFICERS (JAN 2008) The contracting officer reserves the right to designate representatives to act for him/her in furnishing technical guidance and advice or generally monitor the work to be performed under this contract. Such designation will be in writing and will define the scope and limitation of the designee's authority. A copy of the designation shall be furnished to the contractor.(End of Provision)2.15 LIMITATIONS ON SUBCONTRACTING-- MONITORING AND COMPLIANCE (JUN 2011) This solicitation includes VAAR 852.219-10 VA Notice of Total Service- Disabled Veteran-Owned Small Business Set-Aside. Accordingly, any contract resulting from this solicitation will include this clause. The contractor is advised in performing contract administration functions, the CO may use the services of a support contractor(s) retained by VA to assist in assessing the contractor's compliance with the limitations on subcontracting or percentage of work performance requirements specified in the clause. To that end, the support contractor(s) may require access to contractor's offices where the contractor's business records or other proprietary data are retained and to review such business records regarding the contractor's compliance with this requirement. All support contractors conducting this review on behalf of VA will be required to sign an “Information Protection and Non-Disclosure and Disclosure of Conflicts of Interest Agreement” to ensure the contractor's business records or other proprietary data reviewed or obtained in the course of assisting the CO in assessing the contractor for compliance are protected to ensure information or data is not improperly disclosed or other impropriety occurs. Furthermore, if VA determines any services the support contractor(s) will perform in assessing compliance are advisory and assistance services as defined in FAR 2.101, Definitions, the support contractor(s) must also enter into an agreement with the contractor to protect proprietary information as required by FAR 9.505-4, obtaining access to proprietary information, paragraph (b). The contractor is required to cooperate fully and make available any records as may be required to enable the CO to assess the contractor's compliance with the limitations on subcontracting or percentage of work performance requirement.(End of Clause)2.16 52.252-1 SOLICITATION PROVISIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE (FEB 1998) This solicitation incorporates one or more solicitation provisions by reference, with the same force and effect as if they were given in full text. Upon request, the Contracting Officer will make their full text available. The offeror is cautioned that the listed provisions may include blocks that must be completed by the offeror and submitted with its quotation or offer. In lieu of submitting the full text of those provisions, the offeror may identify the provision by paragraph identifier and provide the appropriate information with its quotation or offer. Also, the full text of a solicitation provision may be accessed electronically at this/these address(es): (End of Provision)FAR NumberTitleDate52.211-2AVAILABILITY OF SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARDS, AND DATA ITEM DESCRIPTIONS LISTED IN THE ACQUISITION STREAMLINING AND STANDARDIZATION INFORMATION SYSTEM (ASSIST)JAN 200652.214-3AMENDMENTS TO INVITATIONS FOR BIDSDEC 198952.214-4FALSE STATEMENTS IN BIDSAPR 198452.214-5SUBMISSION OF BIDSMAR 199752.214-6EXPLANATION TO PROSPECTIVE BIDDERSAPR 198452.214-7LATE SUBMISSIONS, MODIFICATIONS, AND WITHDRAWALS OF BIDSNOV 199952.214-18PREPARATION OF BIDS--CONSTRUCTIONAPR 198452.214-19CONTRACT AWARD--SEALED BIDDING--CONSTRUCTIONAUG 199652.214-34SUBMISSION OF OFFERS IN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGEAPR 199152.214-35SUBMISSION OF OFFERS IN U.S. CURRENCYAPR 1991REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS3.1 52.204-8 ANNUAL REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS (JUL 2013) (a)(1) The North American Industry Classification System (NAICS) code for this acquisition is 236220. (2) The small business size standard is $33.5 Million. (3) The small business size standard for a concern which submits an offer in its own name, other than on a construction or service contract, but which proposes to furnish a product which it did not itself manufacture, is 500 employees. (b)(1) If the provision at 52.204-7, System for Award Management, is included in this solicitation, paragraph (d) of this provision applies. (2) If the provision at 52.204-7 is not included in this solicitation, and the offeror is currently registered in the System for Award Management (SAM), and has completed the Representations and Certifications section of SAM electronically, the offeror may choose to use paragraph (d) of this provision instead of completing the corresponding individual representations and certifications in the solicitation. The offeror shall indicate which option applies by checking one of the following boxes: [ ] (i) Paragraph (d) applies. [ ] (ii) Paragraph (d) does not apply and the offeror has completed the individual representations and certifications in the solicitation. (c)(1) The following representations or certifications in SAM are applicable to this solicitation as indicated: (i) 52.203-2, Certificate of Independent Price Determination. This provision applies to solicitations when a firm-fixed-price contract or fixed-price contract with economic price adjustment is contemplated, unless— (A) The acquisition is to be made under the simplified acquisition procedures in Part 13; (B) The solicitation is a request for technical proposals under two-step sealed bidding procedures; or (C) The solicitation is for utility services for which rates are set by law or regulation. (ii) 52.203-11, Certification and Disclosure Regarding Payments to Influence Certain Federal Transactions. This provision applies to solicitations expected to exceed $150,000. (iii) 52.204-3, Taxpayer Identification. This provision applies to solicitations that do not include the provision at 52.204-7, System for Award Management. (iv) 52.204-5, Women-Owned Business (Other Than Small Business). This provision applies to solicitations that— (A) Are not set aside for small business concerns; (B) Exceed the simplified acquisition threshold; and (C) Are for contracts that will be performed in the United States or its outlying areas. (v) 52.209-2, Prohibition on Contracting with Inverted Domestic Corporations—Representation. This provision applies to solicitations using funds appropriated in fiscal years 2008, 2009, 2010, or 2012. (vi) 52.209-5, Certification Regarding Responsibility Matters. This provision applies to solicitations where the contract value is expected to exceed the simplified acquisition threshold. (vii) 52.214-14, Place of Performance—Sealed Bidding. This provision applies to invitations for bids except those in which the place of performance is specified by the Government. (viii) 52.215-6, Place of Performance. This provision applies to solicitations unless the place of performance is specified by the Government. (ix) 52.219-1, Small Business Program Representations (Basic & Alternate I). This provision applies to solicitations when the contract will be performed in the United States or its outlying areas. (A) The basic provision applies when the solicitations are issued by other than DoD, NASA, and the Coast Guard. (B) The provision with its Alternate I applies to solicitations issued by DoD, NASA, or the Coast Guard. (x) 52.219-2, Equal Low Bids. This provision applies to solicitations when contracting by sealed bidding and the contract will be performed in the United States or its outlying areas. (xi) 52.222-22, Previous Contracts and Compliance Reports. This provision applies to solicitations that include the clause at 52.222-26, Equal Opportunity. (xii) 52.222-25, Affirmative Action Compliance. This provision applies to solicitations, other than those for construction, when the solicitation includes the clause at 52.222-26, Equal Opportunity. (xiii) 52.222-38, Compliance with Veterans' Employment Reporting Requirements. This provision applies to solicitations when it is anticipated the contract award will exceed the simplified acquisition threshold and the contract is not for acquisition of commercial items. (xiv) 52.223-1, Biobased Product Certification. This provision applies to solicitations that require the delivery or specify the use of USDA-designated items; or include the clause at 52.223-2, Affirmative Procurement of Biobased Products Under Service and Construction Contracts. (xv) 52.223-4, Recovered Material Certification. This provision applies to solicitations that are for, or specify the use of, EPA-designated items. (xvi) 52.225-2, Buy American Act Certificate. This provision applies to solicitations containing the clause at 52.225-1. (xvii) 52.225-4, Buy American Act—Free Trade Agreements—Israeli Trade Act Certificate. (Basic, Alternates I, II, and III.) This provision applies to solicitations containing the clause at 52.225-3. (A) If the acquisition value is less than $25,000, the basic provision applies. (B) If the acquisition value is $25,000 or more but is less than $50,000, the provision with its Alternate I applies. (C) If the acquisition value is $50,000 or more but is less than $77,494, the provision with its Alternate II applies. (D) If the acquisition value is $77,494 or more but is less than $100,000, the provision with its Alternate III applies. (xviii) 52.225-6, Trade Agreements Certificate. This provision applies to solicitations containing the clause at 52.225-5. (xix) 52.225-20, Prohibition on Conducting Restricted Business Operations in Sudan—Certification. This provision applies to all solicitations. (xx) 52.225-25, Prohibition on Contracting with Entities Engaging in Certain Activities or Transactions Relating to Iran—Representation and Certifications. This provision applies to all solicitations. (xxi) 52.226-2, Historically Black College or University and Minority Institution Representation. This provision applies to— (A) Solicitations for research, studies, supplies, or services of the type normally acquired from higher educational institutions; and (B) For DoD, NASA, and Coast Guard acquisitions, solicitations that contain the clause at 52.219-23, Notice of Price Evaluation Adjustment for Small Disadvantaged Business Concerns. (2) The following certifications are applicable as indicated by the Contracting Officer: [](i) 52.219-22, Small Disadvantaged Business Status. [](A) Basic. [](B) Alternate I. [](ii) 52.222-18, Certification Regarding Knowledge of Child Labor for Listed End Products. [](iii) 52.222-48, Exemption from Application of the Service Contract Act to Contracts for Maintenance, Calibration, or Repair of Certain Equipment Certification. [](iv) 52.222-52 Exemption from Application of the Service Contract Act to Contracts for Certain Services—Certification. [](v) 52.223-9, with its Alternate I, Estimate of Percentage of Recovered Material Content for EPA-Designated Products (Alternate I only). [](vi) 52.227-6, Royalty Information. [](A) Basic. [](B) Alternate I. [](vii) 52.227-15, Representation of Limited Rights Data and Restricted Computer Software. (d) The offeror has completed the annual representations and certifications electronically via the SAM Web site accessed through . After reviewing the SAM database information, the offeror verifies by submission of the offer that the representations and certifications currently posted electronically that apply to this solicitation as indicated in paragraph (c) of this provision have been entered or updated within the last 12 months, are current, accurate, complete, and applicable to this solicitation (including the business size standard applicable to the NAICS code referenced for this solicitation), as of the date of this offer and are incorporated in this offer by reference (see FAR 4.1201); except for the changes identified below [offeror to insert changes, identifying change by clause number, title, date]. These amended representation(s) and/or certification(s) are also incorporated in this offer and are current, accurate, and complete as of the date of this offer.FAR Clause #TitleDateChange Any changes provided by the offeror are applicable to this solicitation only, and do not result in an update to the representations and certifications posted on SAM.(End of Provision)3.2 52.209-5 REPRESENTATION BY CORPORATIONS REGARDING AN UNPAID TAX LIABILITY OR A FELONY CONVICTION UNDER ANY FEDERAL LAW (DEVIATION)(MAR 2012) (a) In accordance with Division H, sections 8124 and 8125 of P.L. 112-74 and sections 738 and 739 of P.L. 112-55 none of the funds made available by either Act may be used to enter into a contract with any corporation that— (1) Has an unpaid federal tax liability, unless the agency has considered suspension or debarment of the corporation and the Suspension and Debarment Official has made a determination that this action is not necessary to protect the interests of the Government. (2) Has a felony criminal violation under any Federal or State law within the preceding 24 months, unless the agency has considered suspension or debarment of the corporation and Suspension and Debarment Official has made a determination that this action is not necessary to protect the interests of the Government. (b) The Offeror represents that— (1) The offeror does [ ] does not [ ] have any unpaid Federal tax liability that has been assessed and that is not being paid in a timely manner pursuant to an agreement with the authority responsible for collecting the tax liability. (2) The offeror, its officers or agents acting on its behalf have [ ] have not [ ] been convicted of a felony criminal violation under a Federal or State law within the preceding 24 months.(End of Provision)3.3 52.209-7 INFORMATION REGARDING RESPONSIBILITY MATTERS (JUL 2013) (a) Definitions. As used in this provision— "Administrative proceeding" means a non-judicial process that is adjudicatory in nature in order to make a determination of fault or liability (e.g., Securities and Exchange Commission Administrative Proceedings, Civilian Board of Contract Appeals Proceedings, and Armed Services Board of Contract Appeals Proceedings). This includes administrative proceedings at the Federal and State level but only in connection with performance of a Federal contract or grant. It does not include agency actions such as contract audits, site visits, corrective plans, or inspection of deliverables. "Federal contracts and grants with total value greater than $10,000,000" means— (1) The total value of all current, active contracts and grants, including all priced options; and (2) The total value of all current, active orders including all priced options under indefinite-delivery, indefinite-quantity, 8(a), or requirements contracts (including task and delivery and multiple-award Schedules). "Principal" means an officer, director, owner, partner, or a person having primary management or supervisory responsibilities within a business entity (e.g., general manager; plant manager; head of a division or business segment; and similar positions). (b) The offeror [ ] has [ ] does not have current active Federal contracts and grants with total value greater than $10,000,000. (c) If the offeror checked "has" in paragraph (b) of this provision, the offeror represents, by submission of this offer, that the information it has entered in the Federal Awardee Performance and Integrity Information System (FAPIIS) is current, accurate, and complete as of the date of submission of this offer with regard to the following information: (1) Whether the offeror, and/or any of its principals, has or has not, within the last five years, in connection with the award to or performance by the offeror of a Federal contract or grant, been the subject of a proceeding, at the Federal or State level that resulted in any of the following dispositions: (i) In a criminal proceeding, a conviction. (ii) In a civil proceeding, a finding of fault and liability that results in the payment of a monetary fine, penalty, reimbursement, restitution, or damages of $5,000 or more. (iii) In an administrative proceeding, a finding of fault and liability that results in— (A) The payment of a monetary fine or penalty of $5,000 or more; or (B) The payment of a reimbursement, restitution, or damages in excess of $100,000. (iv) In a criminal, civil, or administrative proceeding, a disposition of the matter by consent or compromise with an acknowledgment of fault by the Contractor if the proceeding could have led to any of the outcomes specified in paragraphs (c)(1)(i), (c)(1)(ii), or (c)(1)(iii) of this provision. (2) If the offeror has been involved in the last five years in any of the occurrences listed in (c)(1) of this provision, whether the offeror has provided the requested information with regard to each occurrence. (d) The offeror shall post the information in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) through (c)(1)(iv) of this provision in FAPIIS as required through maintaining an active registration in the System for Award Management database via (see 52.204-7).(End of Provision)3.4 52.225-20 PROHIBITION ON CONDUCTING RESTRICTED BUSINESS OPERATIONS IN SUDAN--CERTIFICATION (AUG 2009) (a) Definitions. As used in this provision-- "Business operations" means engaging in commerce in any form, including by acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing, or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, or any other apparatus of business or commerce. "Marginalized populations of Sudan" means-- (1) Adversely affected groups in regions authorized to receive assistance under section 8(c) of the Darfur Peace and Accountability Act (Pub. L. 109-344) (50 U.S.C. 1701 note); and (2) Marginalized areas in Northern Sudan described in section 4(9) of such Act. "Restricted business operations" means business operations in Sudan that include power production activities, mineral extraction activities, oil-related activities, or the production of military equipment, as those terms are defined in the Sudan Accountability and Divestment Act of 2007 (Pub. L. 110-174). Restricted business operations do not include business operations that the person (as that term is defined in Section 2 of the Sudan Accountability and Divestment Act of 2007) conducting the business can demonstrate- (1) Are conducted under contract directly and exclusively with the regional government of southern Sudan; (2) Are conducted pursuant to specific authorization from the Office of Foreign Assets Control in the Department of the Treasury, or are expressly exempted under Federal law from the requirement to be conducted under such authorization; (3) Consist of providing goods or services to marginalized populations of Sudan; (4) Consist of providing goods or services to an internationally recognized peacekeeping force or humanitarian organization; (5) Consist of providing goods or services that are used only to promote health or education; or (6) Have been voluntarily suspended. (b) Certification. By submission of its offer, the offeror certifies that the offeror does not conduct any restricted business operations in Sudan.(End of Provision)3.5 52.225-25 PROHIBITION ON CONTRACTING WITH ENTITIES ENGAGING IN CERTAIN ACTIVITIES OR TRANSACTIONS RELATING TO IRAN-- REPRESENTATION AND CERTIFICATIONS (DEC 2012) (a) Definitions. As used in this provision-- "Person"-- (1) Means-- (i) A natural person; (ii) A corporation, business association, partnership, society, trust, financial institution, insurer, underwriter, guarantor, and any other business organization, any other nongovernmental entity, organization, or group, and any governmental entity operating as a business enterprise; and (iii) Any successor to any entity described in paragraph (1)(ii) of this definition; and (2) Does not include a government or governmental entity that is not operating as a business enterprise. "Sensitive technology"-- (1) Means hardware, software, telecommunications equipment, or any other technology that is to be used specifically-- (i) To restrict the free flow of unbiased information in Iran; or (ii) To disrupt, monitor, or otherwise restrict speech of the people of Iran; and (2) Does not include information or informational materials the export of which the President does not have the authority to regulate or prohibit pursuant to section 203(b)(3) of the International Emergency Economic Powers Act (50 U.S.C. 1702(b)(3)). (b) The offeror shall email questions concerning sensitive technology to the Department of State at CISADA106@. (c) Except as provided in paragraph (d) of this provision or if a waiver has been granted in accordance with 25.703–4, by submission of its offer, the offeror— (1) Represents, to the best of its knowledge and belief, that the offeror does not export any sensitive technology to the government of Iran or any entities or individuals owned or controlled by, or acting on behalf or at the direction of, the government of Iran; (2) Certifies that the offeror, or any person owned or controlled by the offeror, does not engage in any activities for which sanctions may be imposed under section 5 of the Iran Sanctions Act. These sanctioned activities are in the areas of development of the petroleum resources of Iran, production of refined petroleum products in Iran, sale and provision of refined petroleum products to Iran, and contributing to Iran’s ability to acquire or develop certain weapons or technologies; and (3) Certifies that the offeror, and any person owned or controlled by the offeror, does not knowingly engage in any transaction that exceeds $3,000 with Iran’s Revolutionary Guard Corps or any of its officials, agents, or affiliates, the property and interests in property of which are blocked pursuant to the International Emergency Economic Powers Act (50 U.S.C. 1701 et seq.) (see OFAC’s Specially Designated Nationals and Blocked Persons List at ). (d) Exception for trade agreements. The representation requirement of paragraph (c)(1) and the certification requirements of paragraphs (c)(2) and (c)(3) of this provision do not apply if-- (1) This solicitation includes a trade agreements notice or certification (e.g., 52.225-4, 52.225-6, 52.225-12, 52.225-24, or comparable agency provision); and (2) The offeror has certified that all the offered products to be supplied are designated country end products or designated country construction material.(End of Provision)GENERAL CONDITIONS4.1 VAAR 852.203-70 COMMERCIAL ADVERTISING (JAN 2008) The bidder or offeror agrees that if a contract is awarded to him/her, as a result of this solicitation, he/she will not advertise the award of the contract in his/her commercial advertising in such a manner as to state or imply that the Department of Veterans Affairs endorses a product, project or commercial line of endeavor.(End of Clause)4.2 52.209-9 UPDATES OF PUBLICLY AVAILABLE INFORMATION REGARDING RESPONSIBILITY MATTERS (JUL 2013) (a) The Contractor shall update the information in the Federal Awardee Performance and Integrity Information System (FAPIIS) on a semi-annual basis, throughout the life of the contract, by posting the required information in the System for Award Management database via . (b) As required by section 3010 of the Supplemental Appropriations Act, 2010 (Pub. L. 111-212), all information posted in FAPIIS on or after April 15, 2011, except past performance reviews, will be publicly available. FAPIIS consists of two segments— (1) The non-public segment, into which Government officials and the Contractor post information, which can only be viewed by— (i) Government personnel and authorized users performing business on behalf of the Government; or (ii) The Contractor, when viewing data on itself; and (2) The publicly-available segment, to which all data in the non-public segment of FAPIS is automatically transferred after a waiting period of 14 calendar days, except for— (i) Past performance reviews required by subpart 42.15; (ii) Information that was entered prior to April 15, 2011; or (iii) Information that is withdrawn during the 14-calendar-day waiting period by the Government official who posted it in accordance with paragraph (c)(1) of this clause. (c) The Contractor will receive notification when the Government posts new information to the Contractor's record. (1) If the Contractor asserts in writing within 7 calendar days, to the Government official who posted the information, that some of the information posted to the nonpublic segment of FAPIIS is covered by a disclosure exemption under the Freedom of Information Act, the Government official who posted the information must within 7 calendar days remove the posting from FAPIIS and resolve the issue in accordance with agency Freedom of Information procedures, prior to reposting the releasable information. The contractor must cite 52.209-9 and request removal within 7 calendar days of the posting to FAPIIS. (2) The Contractor will also have an opportunity to post comments regarding information that has been posted by the Government. The comments will be retained as long as the associated information is retained, i.e., for a total period of 6 years. Contractor comments will remain a part of the record unless the Contractor revises them. (3) As required by section 3010 of Pub. L. 111-212, all information posted in FAPIIS on or after April 15, 2011, except past performance reviews, will be publicly available. (d) Public requests for system information posted prior to April 15, 2011, will be handled under Freedom of Information Act procedures, including, where appropriate, procedures promulgated under E.O. 12600.(End of Clause)4.3 52.211-10 COMMENCEMENT, PROSECUTION, AND COMPLETION OF WORK (APR 1984) The Contractor shall be required to (a) commence work under this contract within 10 calendar days after the date the Contractor receives the notice to proceed, (b) prosecute the work diligently, and (c) complete the entire work ready for use not later than *See page 1 for number of calendar days after receipt of award. The time stated for completion shall include final cleanup of the premises.(End of Clause)4.4 VAAR 852.211-73 BRAND NAME OR EQUAL (JAN 2008) (Note: as used in this clause, the term "brand name" includes identification of products by make and model.) (a) If items called for by this invitation for bids have been identified in the schedule by a "brand name or equal" description, such identification is intended to be descriptive, but not restrictive, and is to indicate the quality and characteristics of products that will be satisfactory. Bids offering "equal" products (including products of the brand name manufacturer other than the one described by brand name) will be considered for award if such products are clearly identified in the bids and are determined by the Government to meet fully the salient characteristics requirements listed in the invitation. (b) Unless the bidder clearly indicates in the bid that the bidder is offering an "equal" product, the bid shall be considered as offering a brand name product referenced in the invitation for bids. (c)(1) If the bidder proposes to furnish an "equal" product, the brand name, if any, of the product to be furnished shall be inserted in the space provided in the invitation for bids, or such product shall be otherwise clearly identified in the bid. The evaluation of bids and the determination as to equality of the product offered shall be the responsibility of the Government and will be based on information furnished by the bidder or identified in his/her bid as well as other information reasonably available to the purchasing activity. CAUTION TO BIDDERS. The purchasing activity is not responsible for locating or securing any information that is not identified in the bid and reasonably available to the purchasing activity. Accordingly, to insure that sufficient information is available, the bidder must furnish as a part of his/her bid all descriptive material (such as cuts, illustrations, drawings or other information) necessary for the purchasing activity to: (i) Determine whether the product offered meets the salient characteristics requirement of the Invitation for Bids, and (ii) Establish exactly what the bidder proposes to furnish and what the Government would be binding itself to purchase by making an award. The information furnished may include specific references to information previously furnished or to information otherwise available to the purchasing activity. (2) If the bidder proposes to modify a product so as to make it conform to the requirements of the Invitation for Bids, he/she shall: (i) Include in his/her bid a clear description of such proposed modifications, and (ii) Clearly mark any descriptive material to show the proposed modifications. (3) Modifications proposed after bid opening to make a product conform to a brand name product referenced in the Invitation for Bids will not be considered. The clause entitled "Brand name or equal" applies only to the following line items: pneumatic tube system, BACnet and as otherwise noted herein.(End of Clause)4.5 VAAR 852.219-10 VA NOTICE OF TOTAL SERVICE-DISABLED VETERAN-OWNED SMALL BUSINESS SET-ASIDE (DEC 2009) (a) Definition. For the Department of Veterans Affairs, "Service-disabled veteran-owned small business concern": (1) Means a small business concern: (i) Not less than 51 percent of which is owned by one or more service-disabled veterans or, in the case of any publicly owned business, not less than 51 percent of the stock of which is owned by one or more service-disabled veterans (or eligible surviving spouses); (ii) The management and daily business operations of which are controlled by one or more service-disabled veterans (or eligible surviving spouses) or, in the case of a service-disabled veteran with permanent and severe disability, the spouse or permanent caregiver of such veteran; (iii) The business meets Federal small business size standards for the applicable North American Industry Classification System (NAICS) code identified in the solicitation document; and (iv) The business has been verified for ownership and control and is so listed in the Vendor Information Pages database, (). (2) "Service-disabled veteran" means a veteran, as defined in 38 U.S.C. 101(2), with a disability that is service-connected, as defined in 38 U.S.C. 101(16). (b) General. (1) Offers are solicited only from service-disabled veteran-owned small business concerns. Offers received from concerns that are not service-disabled veteran-owned small business concerns shall not be considered. (2) Any award resulting from this solicitation shall be made to a service-disabled veteran-owned small business concern. (c) Agreement. A service-disabled veteran-owned small business concern agrees that in the performance of the contract, in the case of a contract for: (1) Services (except construction), at least 50 percent of the cost of personnel for contract performance will be spent for employees of the concern or employees of other eligible service-disabled veteran-owned small business concerns; (2) Supplies (other than acquisition from a nonmanufacturer of the supplies), at least 50 percent of the cost of manufacturing, excluding the cost of materials, will be performed by the concern or other eligible service-disabled veteran-owned small business concerns; (3) General construction, at least 15 percent of the cost of the contract performance incurred for personnel will be spent on the concern's employees or the employees of other eligible service-disabled veteran-owned small business concerns; or (4) Construction by special trade contractors, at least 25 percent of the cost of the contract performance incurred for personnel will be spent on the concern's employees or the employees of other eligible service-disabled veteran-owned small business concerns. (d) A joint venture may be considered a service-disabled veteran owned small business concern if-- (1) At least one member of the joint venture is a service-disabled veteran-owned small business concern, and makes the following representations: That it is a service-disabled veteran-owned small business concern, and that it is a small business concern under the North American Industry Classification Systems (NAICS) code assigned to the procurement; (2) Each other concern is small under the size standard corresponding to the NAICS code assigned to the procurement; and (3) The joint venture meets the requirements of paragraph 7 of the explanation of Affiliates in 19.101 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation. (4) The joint venture meets the requirements of 13 CFR 125.15(b). (e) Any service-disabled veteran-owned small business concern (non-manufacturer) must meet the requirements in 19.102(f) of the Federal Acquisition Regulation to receive a benefit under this program.(End of Clause)4.6 52.219-28 POST-AWARD SMALL BUSINESS PROGRAM REREPRESENTATION (JUL 2013) (a) Definitions. As used in this clause- Long-term contract means a contract of more than five years in duration, including options. However, the term does not include contracts that exceed five years in duration because the period of performance has been extended for a cumulative period not to exceed six months under the clause at 52.217-8, Option to Extend Services, or other appropriate authority. Small business concern means a concern, including its affiliates, that is independently owned and operated, not dominant in the field of operation in which it is bidding on Government contracts, and qualified as a small business under the criteria in 13 CFR part 121 and the size standard in paragraph (c) of this clause. Such a concern is "not dominant in its field of operation" when it does not exercise a controlling or major influence on a national basis in a kind of business activity in which a number of business concerns are primarily engaged. In determining whether dominance exists, consideration shall be given to all appropriate factors, including volume of business, number of employees, financial resources, competitive status or position, ownership or control of materials, processes, patents, license agreements, facilities, sales territory, and nature of business activity. (b) If the Contractor represented that it was a small business concern prior to award of this contract, the Contractor shall rerepresent its size status according to paragraph (e) of this clause or, if applicable, paragraph (g) of this clause, upon the occurrence of any of the following: (1) Within 30 days after execution of a novation agreement or within 30 days after modification of the contract to include this clause, if the novation agreement was executed prior to inclusion of this clause in the contract. (2) Within 30 days after a merger or acquisition that does not require a novation or within 30 days after modification of the contract to include this clause, if the merger or acquisition occurred prior to inclusion of this clause in the contract. (3) For long-term contracts- (i) Within 60 to 120 days prior to the end of the fifth year of the contract; and (ii) Within 60 to 120 days prior to the date specified in the contract for exercising any option thereafter. (c) The Contractor shall rerepresent its size status in accordance with the size standard in effect at the time of this rerepresentation that corresponds to the North American Industry Classification System (NAICS) code assigned to this contract. The small business size standard corresponding to this NAICS code can be found at . (d) The small business size standard for a Contractor providing a product which it does not manufacture itself, for a contract other than a construction or service contract, is 500 employees. (e) Except as provided in paragraph (g) of this clause, the Contractor shall make the representation required by paragraph (b) of this clause by validating or updating all its representations in the Representations and Certifications section of the System for Award Management (SAM) and its other data in SAM, as necessary, to ensure that they reflect the Contractor's current status. The Contractor shall notify the contracting office in writing within the timeframes specified in paragraph (b) of this clause that the data have been validated or updated, and provide the date of the validation or update. (f) If the Contractor represented that it was other than a small business concern prior to award of this contract, the Contractor may, but is not required to, take the actions required by paragraphs (e) or (g) of this clause. (g) If the Contractor does not have representations and certifications in SAM, or does not have a representation in SAM for the NAICS code applicable to this contract, the Contractor is required to complete the following rerepresentation and submit it to the contracting office, along with the contract number and the date on which the rerepresentation was completed: The Contractor represents that it [ ] is, [ ] is not a small business concern under NAICS Code 236220 assigned to contract number ____________________________.[Contractor to sign and date and insert authorized signer's name and title].(End of Clause)4.7 52.222-1 NOTICE TO THE GOVERNMENT OF LABOR DISPUTES (FEB 1997) If the Contractor has knowledge that any actual or potential labor dispute is delaying or threatens to delay the timely performance of this contract, the Contractor shall immediately give notice, including all relevant information, to the Contracting Officer.(End of Clause)4.8 52.222-4 CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT--OVERTIME COMPENSATION (JUL 2005) (a) Overtime requirements. No Contractor or subcontractor employing laborers or mechanics (see Federal Acquisition Regulation 22.300) shall require or permit them to work over 40 hours in any workweek unless they are paid at least 1 and 1/2 times the basic rate of pay for each hour worked over 40 hours. (b) Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages. The responsible Contractor and subcontractor are liable for unpaid wages if they violate the terms in paragraph (a) of this clause. In addition, the Contractor and subcontractor are liable for liquidated damages payable to the Government. The Contracting Officer will assess liquidated damages at the rate of $10 per affected employee for each calendar day on which the employer required or permitted the employee to work in excess of the standard workweek of 40 hours without paying overtime wages required by the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. (c) Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. The Contracting Officer will withhold from payments due under the contract sufficient funds required to satisfy any Contractor or subcontractor liabilities for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. If amounts withheld under the contract are insufficient to satisfy Contractor or subcontractor liabilities, the Contracting Officer will withhold payments from other Federal or Federally assisted contracts held by the same Contractor that are subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. (d) Payrolls and basic records. (1) The Contractor and its subcontractors shall maintain payrolls and basic payroll records for all laborers and mechanics working on the contract during the contract and shall make them available to the Government until 3 years after contract completion. The records shall contain the name and address of each employee, social security number, labor classifications, hourly rates of wages paid, daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made, and actual wages paid. The records need not duplicate those required for construction work by Department of Labor regulations at 29 CFR 5.5(a)(3) implementing the Davis-Bacon Act. (2) The Contractor and its subcontractors shall allow authorized representatives of the Contracting Officer or the Department of Labor to inspect, copy, or transcribe records maintained under paragraph (d)(1) of this clause. The Contractor or subcontractor also shall allow authorized representatives of the Contracting Officer or Department of Labor to interview employees in the workplace during working hours. (e) Subcontracts. The Contractor shall insert the provisions set forth in paragraphs (a) through (d) of this clause in subcontracts that may require or involve the employment of laborers and mechanics and require subcontractors to include these provisions in any such lower tier subcontracts. The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower-tier subcontractor with the provisions set forth in paragraphs (a) through (d) of this clause.(End of Clause)4.9 52.222-6 DAVIS-BACON ACT (JUL 2005) (a) Definition.--"Site of the work"-- (1) Means-- (i) The primary site of the work. The physical place or places where the construction called for in the contract will remain when work on it is completed; and (ii) The secondary site of the work, if any. Any other site where a significant portion of the building or work is constructed, provided that such site is-- (A) Located in the United States; and (B) Established specifically for the performance of the contract or project; (2) Except as provided in paragraph (3) of this definition, includes any fabrication plants, mobile factories, batch plants, borrow pits, job headquarters, tool yards, etc., provided-- (i) They are dedicated exclusively, or nearly so, to performance of the contract or project; and (ii) They are adjacent or virtually adjacent to the "primary site of the work" as defined in paragraph (a)(1)(i), or the "secondary site of the work" as defined in paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this definition; (3) Does not include permanent home offices, branch plant establishments, fabrication plants, or tool yards of a Contractor or subcontractor whose locations and continuance in operation are determined wholly without regard to a particular Federal contract or project. In addition, fabrication plants, batch plants, borrow pits, job headquarters, yards, etc., of a commercial or material supplier which are established by a supplier of materials for the project before opening of bids and not on the Project site, are not included in the "site of the work." Such permanent, previously established facilities are not a part of the "site of the work" even if the operations for a period of time may be dedicated exclusively or nearly so, to the performance of a contract. (b)(1) All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR part 3)), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, or as may be incorporated for a secondary site of the work, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the Contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Any wage determination incorporated for a secondary site of the work shall be effective from the first day on which work under the contract was performed at that site and shall be incorporated without any adjustment in contract price or estimated cost. Laborers employed by the construction Contractor or construction subcontractor that are transporting portions of the building or work between the secondary site of the work and the primary site of the work shall be paid in accordance with the wage determination applicable to the primary site of the work. (2) Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under section 1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of paragraph (e) of this clause; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such period. (3) Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid not less than the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits in the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in the clause entitled Apprentices and Trainees. Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein; provided that the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. (4) The wage determination (including any additional classifications and wage rates conformed under paragraph (c) of this clause) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the Contractor and its subcontractors at the primary site of the work and the secondary site of the work, if any, in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. (c)(1) The Contracting Officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The Contracting Officer shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefor only when all the following criteria have been met: (i) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination. (ii) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry. (iii) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. (2) If the Contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and the Contracting Officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the Contracting Officer to the Administrator of the: Wage and Hour Division Employment Standards Administration U.S. Department of Labor Washington, DC 20210 The Administrator or an authorized representative will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the Contracting Officer or will notify the Contracting Officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (3) In the event the Contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification, or their representatives, and the Contracting Officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the Contracting Officer shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the Contracting Officer, to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise the Contracting Officer or will notify the Contracting Officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (4) The wage rate (including fringe benefits, where appropriate) determined pursuant to paragraphs (c)(2) and (c)(3) of this clause shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. (d) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the Contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. (e) If the Contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the Contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program; provided, That the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the Contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the Contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program.(End of Clause)4.10 52.222-7 WITHHOLDING OF FUNDS (FEB 1988) The Contracting Officer shall, upon his or her own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor, withhold or cause to be withheld from the Contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same Prime Contractor, or any other Federally assisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same Prime Contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of the work, all or part of the wages required by the contract, the Contracting Officer may, after written notice to the Contractor, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased.(End of Clause)4.11 52.222-8 PAYROLLS AND BASIC RECORDS (JUN 2010) (a) Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the Contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of 3 years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work. Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such work, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made, and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found, under paragraph (d) of the clause entitled Davis-Bacon Act, that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the Contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. (b)(1) The Contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to the Contracting Officer. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under paragraph(a) of this clause, except that full social security numbers and home addresses shall not be included on weekly transmittals. Instead the payrolls shall only need to include an individually identifying number for each employee (e.g., the last four digits of the employee's social security number). The required weekly payroll information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH-347 is available for this purpose and may be obtained from the U.S. Department of Labor Wage and Hour Division website at . The Prime Contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. Contractors and subcontractors shall maintain the full social security number and current address of each covered worker, and shall provide them upon request to the Contracting Officer, the Contractor, or the Wage and Hour Division of the Department of Labor for purposes of an investigation or audit of compliance with prevailing wage requirements. It is not a violation of this section for a Prime Contractor to require a subcontractor to provide addresses and social security numbers to the Prime Contractor for its own records, without weekly submission to the Contracting Officer. (2) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a "Statement of Compliance." signed by the Contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify-- (i) that the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be maintained under paragraph (a) of this clause and that such information is correct and complete: (ii) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in the Regulations, 29 CFR Part 3; and (iii) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract. (3) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WHs-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the "Statement of Compliance" required by subparagraph (b)(2) of this clause. (4) The falsification of any of the certifications in this clause may subject the Contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under Section 1001 of Title 18 and Section 3729 of title 31 of the United States Code. (c) The Contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph (a) of this clause available for inspection, copying, or transcription by the Contracting Officer or authorized representatives of the Contracting Officer or the Department of Labor. The Contractor or subcontractor shall permit the Contracting Officer or representatives of the Contracting Officer or the Department of Labor to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the Contractor or subcontractor fails to submit required records or to make them available, the Contracting Officer may, after written notice to the Contractor, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12.(End of Clause)4.12 52.222-9 APPRENTICES AND TRAINEES (JUL 2005) (a) Apprentices. (1) An apprentice will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed when employed-- (i) Pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer, and Labor Services (OATELS) or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the OATELS; or (ii) In the first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, even though not individually registered in the program, if certified by the OATELS or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. (2) The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the Contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. (3) Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated in paragraph (a)(1) of this clause, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. (4) Where a Contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the Contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. (5) Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. (6) In the event OATELS, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by OATELS, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the Contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (b) Trainees. (1) Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer, and Labor Services (OATELS). The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by OATELS. (2) Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed in the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate in the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the OATELS shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate in the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate in the wage determination for the work actually performed. (3) In the event OATELS withdraws approval of a training program, the Contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (c) Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees, and journeymen under this clause shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, and 29 CFR Part 30.(End of Clause)4.13 52.222-11 SUBCONTRACTS (LABOR STANDARDS) (JUL 2005) (a) Definition. Construction, alteration or repair, as used in this clause, means all types of work done by laborers and mechanics employed by the construction Contractor or construction subcontractor on a particular building or work at the site thereof, including without limitation-- (1) Altering, remodeling, installation (if appropriate) on the site of the work of items fabricated off-site; (2) Painting and decorating; (3) Manufacturing or furnishing of materials, articles, supplies, or equipment on the site of the building or work; (4) Transportation of materials and supplies between the site of the work within the meaning of paragraphs (a)(1)(i) and (ii) of the ``site of the work'' as defined in the FAR clause at 52.222-6, Davis-Bacon Act of this contract, and a facility which is dedicated to the construction of the building or work and is deemed part of the site of the work within the meaning of paragraph (2) of the ``site of work'' definition; and (5) Transportation of portions of the building or work between a secondary site where a significant portion of the building or work is constructed, which is part of the ``site of the work'' definition in paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of the FAR clause at 52.222-6, Davis-Bacon Act, and the physical place or places where the building or work will remain (paragraph (a)(1)(i) of the FAR clause at 52.222-6, in the ``site of the work'' definition). (b) The Contractor shall insert in any subcontracts for construction, alterations and repairs within the United States the clauses entitled-- (1) Davis-Bacon Act; (2) Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act--Overtime Compensation (if the clause is included in this contract); (3) Apprentices and Trainees; (4) Payrolls and Basic Records; (5) Compliance with Copeland Act Requirements; (6) Withholding of Funds; (7) Subcontracts (Labor Standards); (8) Contract Termination--Debarment; (9) Disputes Concerning Labor Standards; (10) Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act Regulations; and (11) Certification of Eligibility. (c) The prime Contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor performing construction within the United States with all the contract clauses cited in paragraph (b). (d)(1) Within 14 days after award of the contract, the Contractor shall deliver to the Contracting Officer a completed Standard Form (SF) 1413, Statement and Acknowledgment, for each subcontract for construction within the United States, including the subcontractor's signed and dated acknowledgment that the clauses set forth in paragraph (b) of this clause have been included in the subcontract. (2) Within 14 days after the award of any subsequently awarded subcontract the Contractor shall deliver to the Contracting Officer an updated completed SF 1413 for such additional subcontract. (e) The Contractor shall insert the substance of this clause, including this paragraph (e) in all subcontracts for construction within the United States.(End of Clause)4.14 52.222-40 NOTIFICATION OF EMPLOYEE RIGHTS UNDER THE NATIONAL LABOR RELATIONS ACT (DEC 2010) (a) During the term of this contract, the Contractor shall post an employee notice, of such size and in such form, and containing such content as prescribed by the Secretary of Labor, in conspicuous places in and about its plants and offices where employees covered by the National Labor Relations Act engage in activities relating to the performance of the contract, including all places where notices to employees are customarily posted both physically and electronically, in the languages employees speak, in accordance with 29 CFR 471.2(d) and (f). (1) Physical posting of the employee notice shall be in conspicuous places in and about the Contractor's plants and offices so that the notice is prominent and readily seen by employees who are covered by the National Labor Relations Act and engage in activities related to the performance of the contract. (2) If the Contractor customarily posts notices to employees electronically, then the Contractor shall also post the required notice electronically by displaying prominently, on any Web site that is maintained by the Contractor and is customarily used for notices to employees about terms and conditions of employment, a link to the Department of Labor's Web site that contains the full text of the poster. The link to the Department's Web site, as referenced in (b)(3) of this section, must read, "Important Notice about Employee Rights to Organize and Bargain Collectively with Their Employers." (b) This required employee notice, printed by the Department of Labor, may be- (1) Obtained from the Division of Interpretations and Standards, Office of Labor-Management Standards, U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW., Room N-5609, Washington, DC 20210, (202) 693-0123, or from any field office of the Office of Labor-Management Standards or Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs; (2) Provided by the Federal contracting agency if requested; (3) Downloaded from the Office of Labor-Management Standards Web site at ; or (4) Reproduced and used as exact duplicate copies of the Department of Labor's official poster. (c) The required text of the employee notice referred to in this clause is located at Appendix A, Subpart A, 29 CFR Part 471. (d) The Contractor shall comply with all provisions of the employee notice and related rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor. (e) In the event that the Contractor does not comply with the requirements set forth in paragraphs (a) through (d) of this clause, this contract may be terminated or suspended in whole or in part, and the Contractor may be suspended or debarred in accordance with 29 CFR 471.14 and subpart 9.4. Such other sanctions or remedies may be imposed as are provided by 29 CFR part 471, which implements Executive Order 13496 or as otherwise provided by law. (f) Subcontracts. (1) The Contractor shall include the substance of this clause, including this paragraph (f), in every subcontract that exceeds $10,000 and will be performed wholly or partially in the United States, unless exempted by the rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to section 3 of Executive Order 13496 of January 30, 2009, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor. (2) The Contractor shall not procure supplies or services in a way designed to avoid the applicability of Executive Order 13496 or this clause. (3) The Contractor shall take such action with respect to any such subcontract as may be directed by the Secretary of Labor as a means of enforcing such provisions, including the imposition of sanctions for noncompliance. (4) However, if the Contractor becomes involved in litigation with a subcontractor, or is threatened with such involvement, as a result of such direction, the Contractor may request the United States, through the Secretary of Labor, to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States.(End of Clause)4.15 52.223-2 AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT OF BIOBASED PRODUCTS UNDER SERVICE AND CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS (SEP 2013) (a) In the performance of this contract, the contractor shall make maximum use of biobased products that are United States Department of Agriculture (USDA)-designated items unless-- (1) The product cannot be acquired-- (i) Competitively within a time frame providing for compliance with the contract performance schedule; (ii) Meeting contract performance requirements; or (iii) At a reasonable price. (2) The product is to be used in an application covered by a USDA categorical exemption (see 7 CFR 3201.3(e)). For example, all USDA-designated items are exempt from the preferred procurement requirement for the following: (i) Spacecraft system and launch support equipment. (ii) Military equipment, i.e., a product or system designed or procured for combat or combat-related missions. (b) Information about this requirement and these products is available at . (c) In the performance of this contract, the Contractor shall-- (1) Report to , with a copy to the Contracting Officer, on the product types and dollar value of any USDA-designated biobased products purchased by the Contractor during the previous Government fiscal year, between October 1 and September 30; and (2) Submit this report no later than-- (i) October 31 of each year during contract performance; and (ii) At the end of contract performance.(End of Clause)4.16 52.223-3 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION AND MATERIAL SAFETY DATA (JAN 1997) ALTERNATE I (JUL 1995) (a) "Hazardous material," as used in this clause, includes any material defined as hazardous under the latest version of Federal Standard No. 313 (including revisions adopted during the term of the contract). (b) The offeror must list any hazardous material, as defined in paragraph (a) of this clause, to be delivered under this contract. The hazardous material shall be properly identified and include any applicable identification number, such as National Stock Number or Special Item Number. This information shall also be included on the Material Safety Data Sheet submitted under this contract.Material (If none, insert “None”)Identification No. (c) This list must be updated during performance of the contract whenever the Contractor determines that any other material to be delivered under this contract is hazardous. (d) The apparently successful offeror agrees to submit, for each item as required prior to award, a Material Safety Data Sheet, meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200(g) and the latest version of Federal Standard No. 313, for all hazardous material identified in paragraph (b) of this clause. Data shall be submitted in accordance with Federal Standard No. 313, whether or not the apparently successful offeror is the actual manufacturer of these items. Failure to submit the Material Safety Data Sheet prior to award may result in the apparently successful offeror being considered nonresponsible and ineligible for award. (e) If, after award, there is a change in the composition of the item(s) or a revision to Federal Standard No. 313, which renders incomplete or inaccurate the data submitted under paragraph (d) of this clause, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Contracting Officer and resubmit the data. (f) Neither the requirements of this clause nor any act or failure to act by the Government shall relieve the Contractor of any responsibility or liability for the safety of Government, Contractor, or subcontractor personnel or property. (g) Nothing contained in this clause shall relieve the Contractor from complying with applicable Federal, State, and local laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations (including the obtaining of licenses and permits) in connection with hazardous material. (h) The Government's rights in data furnished under this contract with respect to hazardous material are as follows: (1) To use, duplicate and disclose any data to which this clause is applicable. The purposes of this right are to-- (i) Apprise personnel of the hazards to which they may be exposed in using, handling, packaging, transporting, or disposing of hazardous materials; (ii) Obtain medical treatment for those affected by the material; and (iii) Have others use, duplicate, and disclose the data for the Government for these purposes. (2) To use, duplicate, and disclose data furnished under this clause, in accordance with subparagraph (h)(1) of this clause, in precedence over any other clause of this contract providing for rights in data. (3) The Government is not precluded from using similar or identical data acquired from other sources. (i) Except as provided in paragraph (i)(2) the Contractor shall prepare and submit a sufficient number of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS's), meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200(g) and the latest version of Federal Standard No. 313, for all hazardous materials identified in paragraph (b) of this clause. (1) For items shipped to consignees, the Contractor shall include a copy of the MSDS with the packing list or other suitable shipping document which accompanies each shipment. Alternatively, the Contractor is permitted to transmit MSDS's to consignees in advance of receipt of shipments by consignees, if authorized in writing by the Contracting Officer. (2) For items shipped to consignees identified by mailing address as agency depots, distribution centers or customer supply centers, the Contractor shall provide one copy of the MSDS's in or on each shipping container. If affixed to the outside of each container, the MSDS must be placed in a weather resistant envelope.(End of Clause)4.17 52.225-9 BUY AMERICAN ACT--CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS (SEP 2010) (a) Definitions. As used in this clause-- "Commercially available off-the-shelf (COTS) item"-- (1) Means any item of supply (including construction material) that is-- (i) A commercial item (as defined in paragraph (1) of the definition at FAR 2.101); (ii) Sold in substantial quantities in the commercial marketplace; and (iii) Offered to the Government, under a contract or subcontract at any tier, without modification, in the same form in which it is sold in the commercial marketplace; and (2) Does not include bulk cargo, as defined in section 3 of the Shipping Act of 1984 (46 U.S.C. App. 1702), such as agricultural products and petroleum products. "Component" means any article, material, or supply incorporated directly into construction material. "Construction material" means an article, material, or supply brought to the construction site by the Contractor or a subcontractor for incorporation into the building or work. The term also includes an item brought to the site preassembled from articles, materials, or supplies. However, emergency life safety systems, such as emergency lighting, fire alarm, and audio evacuation systems, that are discrete systems incorporated into a public building or work and that are produced as complete systems, are evaluated as a single and distinct construction material regardless of when or how the individual parts or components of those systems are delivered to the construction site. Materials purchased directly by the Government are supplies, not construction material. "Cost of components" means-- (1) For components purchased by the Contractor, the acquisition cost, including transportation costs to the place of incorporation into the end product (whether or not such costs are paid to a domestic firm), and any applicable duty (whether or not a duty-free entry certificate is issued); or (2) For components manufactured by the Contractor, all costs associated with the manufacture of the component, including transportation costs as described in paragraph (1) of this definition, plus allocable overhead costs, but excluding profit. Cost of components does not include any costs associated with the manufacture of the construction material. "Domestic construction material" means-- (1) An unmanufactured construction material mined or produced in the United States; (2) A construction material manufactured in the United States, if-- (i) The cost of its components mined, produced, or manufactured in the United States exceeds 50 percent of the cost of all its components. Components of foreign origin of the same class or kind for which nonavailability determinations have been made are treated as domestic; or (ii) The construction material is a COTS item. "Foreign construction material" means a construction material other than a domestic construction material. "United States" means the 50 States, the District of Columbia, and outlying areas. (b) Domestic preference. (1) This clause implements the Buy American Act (41 U.S.C. 10a-10d) by providing a preference for domestic construction material. In accordance with 41 U.S.C. 431, the component test of the Buy American Act is waived for construction material that is a COTS item (See FAR 12.505(a)(2)). The Contractor shall use only domestic construction material in performing this contract, except as provided in paragraphs (b)(2) and (b)(3) of this clause. (2) This requirement does not apply to information technology that is a commercial item or to the construction materials or components listed by the Government as follows: Lead Glass (3) The Contracting Officer may add other foreign construction material to the list in paragraph (b)(2) of this clause if the Government determines that-- (i) The cost of domestic construction material would be unreasonable. The cost of a particular domestic construction material subject to the requirements of the Buy American Act is unreasonable when the cost of such material exceeds the cost of foreign material by more than 6 percent; (ii) The application of the restriction of the Buy American Act to a particular construction material would be impracticable or inconsistent with the public interest; or (iii) The construction material is not mined, produced, or manufactured in the United States in sufficient and reasonably available commercial quantities of a satisfactory quality. (c) Request for determination of inapplicability of the Buy American Act. (1)(i) Any Contractor request to use foreign construction material in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this clause shall include adequate information for Government evaluation of the request, including-- (A) A description of the foreign and domestic construction materials; (B) Unit of measure; (C) Quantity; (D) Price; (E) Time of delivery or availability; (F) Location of the construction project; (G) Name and address of the proposed supplier; and (H) A detailed justification of the reason for use of foreign construction materials cited in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this clause. (ii) A request based on unreasonable cost shall include a reasonable survey of the market and a completed price comparison table in the format in paragraph (d) of this clause. (iii) The price of construction material shall include all delivery costs to the construction site and any applicable duty (whether or not a duty-free certificate may be issued). (iv) Any Contractor request for a determination submitted after contract award shall explain why the Contractor could not reasonably foresee the need for such determination and could not have requested the determination before contract award. If the Contractor does not submit a satisfactory explanation, the Contracting Officer need not make a determination. (2) If the Government determines after contract award that an exception to the Buy American Act applies and the Contracting Officer and the Contractor negotiate adequate consideration, the Contracting Officer will modify the contract to allow use of the foreign construction material. However, when the basis for the exception is the unreasonable price of a domestic construction material, adequate consideration is not less than the differential established in paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this clause. (3) Unless the Government determines that an exception to the Buy American Act applies, use of foreign construction material is noncompliant with the Buy American Act. (d) Data. To permit evaluation of requests under paragraph (c) of this clause based on unreasonable cost, the Contractor shall include the following information and any applicable supporting data based on the survey of suppliers:FOREIGN AND DOMESTIC CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS PRICE COMPARISONConstruction Material DescriptionUnit of MeasureQuantityPrice (Dollars)*Item 1:Foreign Construction MaterialDomestic Construction MaterialItem 2:Foreign Construction MaterialDomestic Construction Material[List name, address, telephone number, and contact for suppliers surveyed Attach copy of response; if oral, attach summary.][Include other applicable supporting information.][*Include all delivery costs to the construction site and any applicable duty (whether or not a duty-free entry certificate is issued).](End of Clause)4.18 VAAR 852.236-89 BUY AMERICAN ACT (JAN 2008) (a) Reference is made to the clause entitled "Buy American Act--Construction Materials," FAR 52.225-9. (b) Notwithstanding a bidder's right to offer identifiable foreign construction material in its bid pursuant to FAR 52.225-9, VA does not anticipate accepting an offer that includes foreign construction material. (c) If a bidder chooses to submit a bid that includes foreign construction material, that bidder must provide a listing of the specific foreign construction material he/she intends to use and a price for said material. Bidders must include bid prices for comparable domestic construction material. If VA determines not to accept foreign construction material and no comparable domestic construction material is provided, the entire bid will be rejected. (d) Any foreign construction material proposed after award will be rejected unless the bidder proves to VA's satisfaction: (1) it was impossible to request the exemption prior to award, and (2) said domestic construction material is no longer available, or (3) where the price has escalated so dramatically after the contract has been awarded that it would be unconscionable to require performance at that price. The determinations required by (1), (2), and (3) of this paragraph shall be made in accordance with Subpart 825.2 and FAR 25.2. (e) By signing this bid, the bidder declares that all articles, materials and supplies for use on the project shall be domestic unless specifically set forth on the Bid Form or addendum thereto.(End of Clause)4.19 52.228-2 ADDITIONAL BOND SECURITY (OCT 1997) The Contractor shall promptly furnish additional security required to protect the Government and persons supplying labor or materials under this contract if-- (a) Any surety upon any bond, or issuing financial institution for other security, furnished with this contract becomes unacceptable to the Government; (b) Any surety fails to furnish reports on its financial condition as required by the Government; or (c) The contract price is increased so that the penal sum of any bond becomes inadequate in the opinion of the Contracting Officer. (d) An irrevocable letter of credit (ILC) used as security will expire before the end of the period of required security. If the Contractor does not furnish an acceptable extension or replacement ILC, or other acceptable substitute, at least 30 days before an ILC's scheduled expiration, the Contracting officer has the right to immediately draw on the ILC.(End of Clause)4.20 52.228-5 INSURANCE - WORK ON A GOVERNMENT INSTALLATION (JAN 1997) (a) The Contractor shall, at its own expense, provide and maintain during the entire performance of this contract, at least the kinds and minimum amounts of insurance required in the Schedule or elsewhere in the contract. (b) Before commencing work under this contract, the Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer in writing that the required insurance has been obtained. The policies evidencing required insurance shall contain an endorsement to the effect that any cancellation or any material change adversely affecting the Government's interest shall not be effective-- (1) For such period as the laws of the State in which this contract is to be performed prescribe; or (2) Until 30 days after the insurer or the Contractor gives written notice to the Contracting Officer, whichever period is longer. (c) The Contractor shall insert the substance of this clause, including this paragraph (c), in subcontracts under this contract that require work on a Government installation and shall require subcontractors to provide and maintain the insurance required in the Schedule or elsewhere in the contract. The Contractor shall maintain a copy of all subcontractors' proofs of required insurance, and shall make copies available to the Contracting Officer upon request.(End of Clause)4.20A SUPPLEMENTAL INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS In accordance with FAR 28.307-2 and FAR 52.228-5, the following minimum coverage shall apply to this contract: (a) Workers' compensation and employers liability: Contractors are required to comply with applicable Federal and State workers' compensation and occupational disease statutes. If occupational diseases are not compensable under those statutes, they shall be covered under the employer's liability section of the insurance policy, except when contract operations are so commingled with a Contractor's commercial operations that it would not be practical to require this coverage. Employer's liability coverage of at least $100,000 is required, except in States with exclusive or monopolistic funds that do not permit workers' compensation to be written by private carriers. (b) General Liability: $500,000.00 per occurrences. (c) Automobile liability: $200,000.00 per person; $500,000.00 per occurrence and $20,000.00 property damage. (d) The successful bidder must present to the Contracting Officer, prior to award, evidence of general liability insurance without any exclusionary clauses for asbestos that would void the general liability coverage.(End of Clause)4.21 52.228-15 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS-- CONSTRUCTION (OCT 2010) (a) Definitions. As used in this clause-- "Original contract price" means the award price of the contract; or, for requirements contracts, the price payable for the estimated total quantity; or, for indefinite-quantity contracts, the price payable for the specified minimum quantity. Original contract price does not include the price of any options, except those options exercised at the time of contract award. (b) Amount of required bonds. Unless the resulting contract price is $150,000 or less, the successful offeror shall furnish performance and payment bonds to the Contracting Officer as follows: (1) Performance bonds (Standard Form 25). The penal amount of performance bonds at the time of contract award shall be 100 percent of the original contract price. (2) Payment Bonds (Standard Form 25-A). The penal amount of payment bonds at the time of contract award shall be 100 percent of the original contract price. (3) Additional bond protection. (i) The Government may require additional performance and payment bond protection if the contract price is increased. The increase in protection generally will equal 100 percent of the increase in contract price. (ii) The Government may secure the additional protection by directing the Contractor to increase the penal amount of the existing bond or to obtain an additional bond. (c) Furnishing executed bonds. The Contractor shall furnish all executed bonds, including any necessary reinsurance agreements, to the Contracting Officer, within the time period specified in the Bid Guarantee provision of the solicitation, or otherwise specified by the Contracting Officer, but in any event, before starting work. (d) Surety or other security for bonds. The bonds shall be in the form of firm commitment, supported by corporate sureties whose names appear on the list contained in Treasury Department Circular 570, individual sureties, or by other acceptable security such as postal money order, certified check, cashier's check, irrevocable letter of credit, or, in accordance with Treasury Department regulations, certain bonds or notes of the United States. Treasury Circular 570 is published in the Federal Register or may be obtained from the:U.S. Department of TreasuryFinancial Management ServiceSurety Bond Branch3700 East West Highway, Room 6F01Hyattsville, MD 20782.Or via the internet at . (e) Notice of subcontractor waiver of protection (40 U.S.C. 3133(c)). Any waiver of the right to sue on the payment bond is void unless it is in writing, signed by the person whose right is waived, and executed after such person has first furnished labor or material for use in the performance of the contract.(End of Clause)4.22 VAAR 852.228-70 BOND PREMIUM ADJUSTMENT (JAN 2008) When net changes in original contract price affect the premium of a Corporate Surety Bond by $5 or more, the Government, in determining the basis for final settlement, will provide for bond premium adjustment computed at the rate shown in the bond.(End of Clause)4.23 52.232-5 PAYMENTS UNDER FIXED-PRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS (SEP 2002) (a) Payment of price. The Government shall pay the Contractor the contract price as provided in this contract. (b) Progress payments. The Government shall make progress payments monthly as the work proceeds, or at more frequent intervals as determined by the Contracting Officer, on estimates of work accomplished which meets the standards of quality established under the contract, as approved by the Contracting Officer. (1) The Contractor's request for progress payments shall include the following substantiation: (i) An itemization of the amounts requested, related to the various elements of work required by the contract covered by the payment requested. (ii) A listing of the amount included for work performed by each subcontractor under the contract. (iii) A listing of the total amount of each subcontract under the contract. (iv) A listing of the amounts previously paid to each such subcontractor under the contract. (v) Additional supporting data in a form and detail required by the Contracting Officer. (2) In the preparation of estimates, the Contracting Officer may authorize material delivered on the site and preparatory work done to be taken into consideration. Material delivered to the Contractor at locations other than the site also may be taken into consideration if-- (i) Consideration is specifically authorized by this contract; and (ii) The Contractor furnishes satisfactory evidence that it has acquired title to such material and that the material will be used to perform this contract. (c) Contractor certification. Along with each request for progress payments, the Contractor shall furnish the following certification, or payment shall not be made: (However, if the Contractor elects to delete paragraph (c)(4) from the certification, the certification is still acceptable.) I hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge and belief, that-- (1) The amounts requested are only for performance in accordance with the specifications, terms, and conditions of the contract; (2) All payments due to subcontractors and suppliers from previous payments received under the contract have been made, and timely payments will be made from the proceeds of the payment covered by this certification, in accordance with subcontract agreements and the requirements of chapter 39 of Title 31, United States Code; (3) This request for progress payments does not include any amounts which the prime contractor intends to withhold or retain from a subcontractor or supplier in accordance with the terms and conditions of the subcontract; and (4) This certification is not to be construed as final acceptance of a subcontractor's performance.-----------------------------------------------------------(Name)-----------------------------------------------------------(Title)-----------------------------------------------------------(Date) (d) Refund of unearned amounts. If the Contractor, after making a certified request for progress payments, discovers that a portion or all of such request constitutes a payment for performance by the Contractor that fails to conform to the specifications, terms, and conditions of this contract (hereinafter referred to as the "unearned amount"), the Contractor shall -- (1) Notify the Contracting Officer of such performance deficiency; and (2) Be obligated to pay the Government an amount (computed by the Contracting Officer in the manner provided in paragraph (j) of this clause) equal to interest on the unearned amount from the 8th day after the date of receipt of the unearned amount until-- (i) The date the Contractor notifies the Contracting Officer that the performance deficiency has been corrected; or (ii) The date the Contractor reduces the amount of any subsequent certified request for progress payments by an amount equal to the unearned amount. (e) Retainage. If the Contracting Officer finds that satisfactory progress was achieved during any period for which a progress payment is to be made, the Contracting Officer shall authorize payment to be made in full. However, if satisfactory progress has not been made, the Contracting Officer may retain a maximum of 10 percent of the amount of the payment until satisfactory progress is achieved. When the work is substantially complete, the Contracting Officer may retain from previously withheld funds and future progress payments that amount the Contracting Officer considers adequate for protection of the Government and shall release to the Contractor all the remaining withheld funds. Also, on completion and acceptance of each separate building, public work, or other division of the contract, for which the price is stated separately in the contract, payment shall be made for the completed work without retention of a percentage. (f) Title, liability, and reservation of rights. All material and work covered by progress payments made shall, at the time of payment, become the sole property of the Government, but this shall not be construed as-- (1) Relieving the Contractor from the sole responsibility for all material and work upon which payments have been made or the restoration of any damaged work; or (2) Waiving the right of the Government to require the fulfillment of all of the terms of the contract. (g) Reimbursement for bond premiums. In making these progress payments, the Government shall, upon request, reimburse the Contractor for the amount of premiums paid for performance and payment bonds (including coinsurance and reinsurance agreements, when applicable) after the Contractor has furnished evidence of full payment to the surety. The retainage provisions in paragraph (e) of this clause shall not apply to that portion of progress payments attributable to bond premiums. (h) Final Payment. The Government shall pay the amount due the Contractor under this contract after-- (1) Completion and acceptance of all work; (2) Presentation of a properly executed voucher; and (3) Presentation of release of all claims against the Government arising by virtue of this contract, other than claims, in stated amounts, that the Contractor has specifically excepted from the operation of the release. A release may also be required of the assignee if the Contractor's claim to amounts payable under this contract has been assigned under the Assignment of Claims Act of 1940 (31 U.S.C. 3727 and 41 U.S.C. 15). (i) Limitation because of undefinitized work. Notwithstanding any provision of this contract, progress payments shall not exceed 80 percent on work accomplished on undefinitized contract actions. A "contract action" is any action resulting in a contract, as defined in FAR Subpart 2.1, including contract modifications for additional supplies or services, but not including contract modifications that are within the scope and under the terms of the contract, such as contract modifications issued pursuant to the Changes clause, or funding and other administrative changes. (j) Interest computation on unearned amounts. In accordance with 31 U.S.C. 3903(c)(1), the amount payable under subparagraph (d)(2) of this clause shall be-- (1) Computed at the rate of average bond equivalent rates of 91- day Treasury bills auctioned at the most recent auction of such bills prior to the date the Contractor receives the unearned amount; and (2) Deducted from the next available payment to the Contractor.(End of Clause)4.24 VAAR 852.236-82 PAYMENTS UNDER FIXED-PRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS (WITHOUT NAS) (APR 1984) (a) Retainage: (1) The contracting officer may retain funds: (i) Where performance under the contract has been determined to be deficient or the contractor has performed in an unsatisfactory manner in the past; or (ii) As the contract nears completion, to ensure that deficiencies will be corrected and that completion is timely. (2) Examples of deficient performance justifying a retention of funds include, but are not restricted to, the following: (i) Unsatisfactory progress as determined by the contracting officer; (ii) Failure to meet schedule in Schedule of Work Progress; (iii) Failure to present submittals in a timely manner; or (iv) Failure to comply in good faith with approved subcontracting plans, certifications, or contract requirements. (3) Any level of retention shall not exceed 10 percent either where there is determined to be unsatisfactory performance, or when the retainage is to ensure satisfactory completion. Retained amounts shall be paid promptly upon completion of all contract requirements, but nothing contained in this subparagraph shall be construed as limiting the contracting officer's right to withhold funds under other provisions of the contract or in accordance with the general law and regulations regarding the administration of Government contracts. (b) The contractor shall submit a schedule of cost to the contracting officer for approval within 30 calendar days after date of receipt of notice to proceed. Such schedule will be signed and submitted in triplicate. The approved cost schedule will be one of the bases for determining progress payments to the contractor for work completed. This schedule shall show cost by the branches of work for each building or unit of the contract, as instructed by the resident engineer. (1) The branches shall be subdivided into as many sub-branches as are necessary to cover all component parts of the contract work. (2) Costs as shown on this schedule must be true costs and, should the resident engineer so desire, he/she may require the contractor to submit the original estimate sheets or other information to substantiate the detailed makeup of the schedule. (3) The sum of the sub-branches, as applied to each branch, shall equal the total cost of such branch. The total cost of all branches shall equal the contract price. (4) Insurance and similar items shall be prorated and included in the cost of each branch of the work. (5) The cost schedule shall include separate cost information for the systems listed in the table in this paragraph (b)(5). The percentages listed below are proportions of the cost listed in the contractor's cost schedule and identify, for payment purposes, the value of the work to adjust, correct and test systems after the material has been installed. Payment of the listed percentages will be made only after the contractor has demonstrated that each of the systems is substantially complete and operates as required by the contract.VALUE OF ADJUSTING, CORRECTING, AND TESTING SYSTEMSystemPercentPneumatic tube system10Incinerators (medical waste and trash)5Sewage treatment plant equipment5Water treatment plant equipment5Washers (dish, cage, glass, etc.)5Sterilizing equipment5Water distilling equipment5Prefab temperature rooms (cold, constant temperature)5Entire air-conditioning system (Specified under 600 Sections)5Entire boiler plant system (Specified under 700 Sections)5General supply conveyors10Food service conveyors10Pneumatic soiled linen and trash system10Elevators and dumbwaiters10Materials transport system10Engine-generator system5Primary switchgear5Secondary switchgear5Fire alarm system5Nurse call system5Intercom system5Radio system5TV (entertainment) system5 (c) In addition to this cost schedule, the contractor shall submit such unit costs as may be specifically requested. The unit costs shall be those used by the contractor in preparing his/her bid and will not be binding as pertaining to any contract changes. (d) The contracting officer will consider for monthly progress payments material and/or equipment procured by the contractor and stored on the construction site, as space is available, or at a local approved location off the site, under such terms and conditions as such officer approves, including but not limited to the following: (1) The material or equipment is in accordance with the contract requirements and/or approved samples and shop drawings. (2) Only those materials and/or equipment as are approved by the resident engineer for storage will be included. (3) Such materials and/or equipment will be stored separately and will be readily available for inspection and inventory by the resident engineer. (4) Such materials and/or equipment will be protected against weather, theft and other hazards and will not be subjected to deterioration. (5) All of the other terms, provisions, conditions and covenants contained in the contract shall be and remain in full force and effect as therein provided. (6) A supplemental agreement will be executed between the Government and the contractor with the consent of the contractor's surety for off-site storage. (e) The contractor, prior to receiving a progress or final payment under this contract, shall submit to the contracting officer a certification that the contractor has made payment from proceeds of prior payments, or that timely payment will be made from the proceeds of the progress or final payment then due, to subcontractors and suppliers in accordance with the contractual arrangements with them. (f) The Government reserves the right to withhold payment until samples, shop drawings, engineer's certificates, additional bonds, payrolls, weekly statements of compliance, proof of title, nondiscrimination compliance reports, or any other things required by this contract, have been submitted to the satisfaction of the contracting officer.(End of Clause)4.25 52.232-99 PROVIDING ACCELERATED PAYMENT TO SMALL BUSINESS SUBCONTRACTORS (DEVIATION) (AUG 2012) This clause implements the temporary policy provided by OMB Policy Memorandum M-12-16, Providing Prompt Payment to Small Business Subcontractors, dated July 11, 2012. (a) Upon receipt of accelerated payments from the Government, the contractor is required to make accelerated payments to small business subcontractors to the maximum extent practicable after receipt of a proper invoice and all proper documentation from the small business subcontractor. (b) Include the substance of this clause, including this paragraph (b), in all subcontracts with small business concerns. (c) The acceleration of payments under this clause does not provide any new rights under the Prompt Payment Act.(End of Clause)4.26 852.232-72 ELECTRONIC SUBMISSION OF PAYMENT REQUESTS (NOV 2012) (a) Definitions. As used in this clause— (1) Contract financing payment has the meaning given in FAR 32.001. (2) Designated agency office has the meaning given in 5 CFR 1315.2(m). (3) Electronic form means an automated system transmitting information electronically according to the Accepted electronic data transmission methods and formats identified in paragraph (c) of this clause. Facsimile, email, and scanned documents are not acceptable electronic forms for submission of payment requests. (4) Invoice payment has the meaning given in FAR 32.001. (5) Payment request means any request for contract financing payment or invoice payment submitted by the contractor under this contract. (b) Electronic payment requests. Except as provided in paragraph (e) of this clause, the contractor shall submit payment requests in electronic form. Purchases paid with a Government-wide commercial purchase card are considered to be an electronic transaction for purposes of this rule, and therefore no additional electronic invoice submission is required. (c) Data transmission. A contractor must ensure that the data transmission method and format are through one of the following: (1) VA’s Electronic Invoice Presentment and Payment System. (See Web site at .) (2) Any system that conforms to the X12 electronic data interchange (EDI) formats established by the Accredited Standards Center (ASC) and chartered by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI). The X12 EDI Web site () includes additional information on EDI 810 and 811 formats. (d) Invoice requirements. Invoices shall comply with FAR 32.905. (e) Exceptions. If, based on one of the circumstances below, the contracting officer directs that payment requests be made by mail, the contractor shall submit payment requests by mail through the United States Postal Service to the designated agency office. Submission of payment requests by mail may be required for: (1) Awards made to foreign vendors for work performed outside the United States; (2) Classified contracts or purchases when electronic submission and processing of payment requests could compromise the safeguarding of classified or privacy information; (3) Contracts awarded by contracting officers in the conduct of emergency operations, such as responses to national emergencies; (4) Solicitations or contracts in which the designated agency office is a VA entity other than the VA Financial Services Center in Austin, Texas; or (5) Solicitations or contracts in which the VA designated agency office does not have electronic invoicing capability as described above.(End of Clause)4.27 52.236-2 DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS (APR 1984) (a) The Contractor shall promptly, and before the conditions are disturbed, give a written notice to the Contracting Officer of (1) subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site which differ materially from those indicated in this contract, or (2) unknown physical conditions at the site, of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inhering in work of the character provided for in the contract. (b) The Contracting Officer shall investigate the site conditions promptly after receiving the notice. If the conditions do materially so differ and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or the time required for, performing any part of the work under this contract, whether or not changed as a result of the conditions, an equitable adjustment shall be made under this clause and the contract modified in writing accordingly. (c) No request by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment to the contract under this clause shall be allowed, unless the Contractor has given the written notice required; provided, that the time prescribed in (a) above for giving written notice may be extended by the Contracting Officer. (d) No request by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment to the contract for differing site conditions shall be allowed if made after final payment under this contract.(End of Clause)4.28 52.236-3 SITE INVESTIGATION AND CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE WORK (APR 1984) (a) The Contractor acknowledges that it has taken steps reasonably necessary to ascertain the nature and location of the work, and that it has investigated and satisfied itself as to the general and local conditions which can affect the work or its cost, including but not limited to (1) conditions bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling, and storage of materials; (2) the availability of labor, water, electric power, and roads; (3) uncertainties of weather, river stages, tides, or similar physical conditions at the site; (4) the conformation and conditions of the ground; and (5) the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during work performance. The Contractor also acknowledges that it has satisfied itself as to the character, quality, and quantity of surface and subsurface materials or obstacles to be encountered insofar as this information is reasonably ascertainable from an inspection of the site, including all exploratory work done by the Government, as well as from the drawings and specifications made a part of this contract. Any failure of the Contractor to take the actions described and acknowledged in this paragraph will not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty and cost of successfully performing the work, or for proceeding to successfully perform the work without additional expense to the Government. (b) The Government assumes no responsibility for any conclusions or interpretations made by the Contractor based on the information made available by the Government. Nor does the Government assume responsibility for any understanding reached or representation made concerning conditions which can affect the work by any of its officers or agents before the execution of this contract, unless that understanding or representation is expressly stated in this contract.(End of Clause)4.29 52.236-5 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP (APR 1984) (a) All equipment, material, and articles incorporated into the work covered by this contract shall be new and of the most suitable grade for the purpose intended, unless otherwise specifically provided in this contract. References in the specifications to equipment, material, articles, or patented processes by trade name, make, or catalog number, shall be regarded as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. The Contractor may, at its option, use any equipment, material, article, or process that, in the judgment of the Contracting Officer, is equal to that named in the specifications, unless otherwise specifically provided in this contract. (b) The Contractor shall obtain the Contracting Officer's approval of the machinery and mechanical and other equipment to be incorporated into the work. When requesting approval, the Contractor shall furnish to the Contracting Officer the name of the manufacturer, the model number, and other information concerning the performance, capacity, nature, and rating of the machinery and mechanical and other equipment. When required by this contract or by the Contracting Officer, the Contractor shall also obtain the Contracting Officer's approval of the material or articles which the Contractor contemplates incorporating into the work. When requesting approval, the Contractor shall provide full information concerning the material or articles. When directed to do so, the Contractor shall submit samples for approval at the Contractor's expense, with all shipping charges prepaid. Machinery, equipment, material, and articles that do not have the required approval shall be installed or used at the risk of subsequent rejection. (c) All work under this contract shall be performed in a skillful and workmanlike manner. The Contracting Officer may require, in writing, that the Contractor remove from the work any employee the Contracting Officer deems incompetent, careless, or otherwise objectionable.(End of Clause)4.30 52.236-6 SUPERINTENDENCE BY THE CONTRACTOR (APR 1984) At all times during performance of this contract and until the work is completed and accepted, the Contractor shall directly superintend the work or assign and have on the work a competent superintendent who is satisfactory to the Contracting Officer and has authority to act for the Contractor.(End of Clause)4.31 52.236-7 PERMITS AND RESPONSIBILITIES (NOV 1991) The Contractor shall, without additional expense to the Government, be responsible for obtaining any necessary licenses and permits, and for complying with any Federal, State, and municipal laws, codes, and regulations applicable to the performance of the work. The Contractor shall also be responsible for all damages to persons or property that occur as a result of the Contractor’s fault or negligence. The Contractor shall also be responsible for all materials delivered and work performed until completion and acceptance of the entire work, except for any completed unit of work which may have been accepted under the contract.(End of Clause)4.32 52.236-8 OTHER CONTRACTS (APR 1984) The Government may undertake or award other contracts for additional work at or near the site of the work under this contract. The Contractor shall fully cooperate with the other contractors and with Government employees and shall carefully adapt scheduling and performing the work under this contract to accommodate the additional work, heeding any direction that may be provided by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall not commit or permit any act that will interfere with the performance of work by any other contractor or by Government employees.(End of Clause)4.33 52.236-9 PROTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, UTILITIES, AND IMPROVEMENTS (APR 1984) (a) The Contractor shall preserve and protect all structures, equipment, and vegetation (such as trees, shrubs, and grass) on or adjacent to the work site, which are not to be removed and which do not unreasonably interfere with the work required under this contract. The Contractor shall only remove trees when specifically authorized to do so, and shall avoid damaging vegetation that will remain in place. If any limbs or branches of trees are broken during contract performance, or by the careless operation of equipment, or by workmen, the Contractor shall trim those limbs or branches with a clean cut and paint the cut with a tree-pruning compound as directed by the Contracting Officer. (b) The Contractor shall protect from damage all existing improvements and utilities (1) at or near the work site and (2) on adjacent property of a third party, the locations of which are made known to or should be known by the Contractor. The Contractor shall repair any damage to those facilities, including those that are the property of a third party, resulting from failure to comply with the requirements of this contract or failure to exercise reasonable care in performing the work. If the Contractor fails or refuses to repair the damage promptly, the Contracting Officer may have the necessary work performed and charge the cost to the Contractor.(End of Clause)4.34 52.236-10 OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS (APR 1984) (a) The Contractor shall confine all operations (including storage of materials) on Government premises to areas authorized or approved by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall hold and save the Government, its officers and agents, free and harmless from liability of any nature occasioned by the Contractor's performance. (b) Temporary buildings (e.g., storage sheds, shops, offices) and utilities may be erected by the Contractor only with the approval of the Contracting Officer and shall be built with labor and materials furnished by the Contractor without expense to the Government. The temporary buildings and utilities shall remain the property of the Contractor and shall be removed by the Contractor at its expense upon completion of the work. With the written consent of the Contracting Officer, the buildings and utilities may be abandoned and need not be removed. (c) The Contractor shall, under regulations prescribed by the Contracting Officer, use only established roadways, or use temporary roadways constructed by the Contractor when and as authorized by the Contracting Officer. When materials are transported in prosecuting the work, vehicles shall not be loaded beyond the loading capacity recommended by the manufacturer of the vehicle or prescribed by any Federal, State, or local law or regulation. When it is necessary to cross curbs or sidewalks, the Contractor shall protect them from damage. The Contractor shall repair or pay for the repair of any damaged curbs, sidewalks, or roads.(End of Clause)4.35 52.236-11 USE AND POSSESSION PRIOR TO COMPLETION (APR 1984) (a) The Government shall have the right to take possession of or use any completed or partially completed part of the work. Before taking possession of or using any work, the Contracting Officer shall furnish the Contractor a list of items of work remaining to be performed or corrected on those portions of the work that the Government intends to take possession of or use. However, failure of the Contracting Officer to list any item of work shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for complying with the terms of the contract. The Government's possession or use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work under the contract. (b) While the Government has such possession or use, the Contractor shall be relieved of the responsibility for the loss of or damage to the work resulting from the Government's possession or use, notwithstanding the terms of the clause in this contract entitled "Permits and Responsibilities." If prior possession or use by the Government delays the progress of the work or causes additional expense to the Contractor, an equitable adjustment shall be made in the contract price or the time of completion, and the contract shall be modified in writing accordingly.(End of Clause)4.36 52.236-12 CLEANING UP (APR 1984) The Contractor shall at all times keep the work area, including storage areas, free from accumulations of waste materials. Before completing the work, the Contractor shall remove from the work and premises any rubbish, tools, scaffolding, equipment, and materials that are not the property of the Government. Upon completing the work, the Contractor shall leave the work area in a clean, neat, and orderly condition satisfactory to the Contracting Officer.(End of Clause)4.37 52.236-13 ACCIDENT PREVENTION (NOV 1991) (a) The Contractor shall provide and maintain work environments and procedures which will-- (1) Safeguard the public and Government personnel, property, materials, supplies, and equipment exposed to Contractor operations and activities; (2) Avoid interruptions of Government operations and delays in project completion dates; and (3) Control costs in the performance of this contract. (b) For these purposes on contracts for construction or dismantling, demolition, or removal of improvements, the Contractor shall-- (1) Provide appropriate safety barricades, signs, and signal lights; (2) Comply with the standards issued by the Secretary of Labor at 29 CFR Part 1926 and 29 CFR Part 1910; and (3) Ensure that any additional measures the Contracting Officer determines to be reasonably necessary for the purposes are taken. (c) If this contract is for construction or dismantling, demolition or removal of improvements with any Department of Defense agency or component, the Contractor shall comply with all pertinent provisions of the latest version of U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Safety and Health Requirements Manual, EM 385-1-1, in effect on the date of the solicitation. (d) Whenever the Contracting Officer becomes aware of any noncompliance with these requirements or any condition which poses a serious or imminent danger to the health or safety of the public or Government personnel, the Contracting Officer shall notify the Contractor orally, with written confirmation, and request immediate initiation of corrective action. This notice, when delivered to the Contractor or the Contractor's representative at the work site, shall be deemed sufficient notice of the noncompliance and that corrective action is required. After receiving the notice, the Contractor shall immediately take corrective action. If the Contractor fails or refuses to promptly take corrective action, the Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any equitable adjustment of the contract price or extension of the performance schedule on any stop work order issued under this clause. (e) The Contractor shall insert this clause, including this paragraph (e), with appropriate changes in the designation of the parties, in subcontracts.(End of Clause)4.38 VAAR 852.236-87 ACCIDENT PREVENTION (SEP 1993) The Resident Engineer on all assigned construction projects, or other Department of Veterans Affairs employee if designated in writing by the Contracting Officer, shall serve as Safety Officer and as such has authority, on behalf of the Contracting Officer, to monitor and enforce Contractor compliance with FAR 52.236-13, Accident Prevention. However, only the Contracting Officer may issue an order to stop all or part of the work while requiring satisfactory or corrective action to be taken by the Contractor.(End of Clause)4.39 52.236-14 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES (APR 1984) (a) The Government shall make all reasonably required amounts of utilities available to the Contractor from existing outlets and supplies, as specified in the contract. Unless otherwise provided in the contract, the amount of each utility service consumed shall be charged to or paid for by the Contractor at prevailing rates charged to the Government or, where the utility is produced by the Government, at reasonable rates determined by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall carefully conserve any utilities furnished without charge. (b) The Contractor, at its expense and in a workmanlike manner satisfactory to the Contracting Officer, shall install and maintain all necessary temporary connections and distribution lines, and all meters required to measure the amount of each utility used for the purpose of determining charges. Before final acceptance of the work by the Government, the Contractor shall remove all the temporary connections, distribution lines, meters, and associated paraphernalia.(End of Clause)4.40 52.236-15 SCHEDULES FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS (APR 1984) (a) The Contractor shall, within five days after the work commences on the contract or another period of time determined by the Contracting Officer, prepare and submit to the Contracting Officer for approval three copies of a practicable schedule showing the order in which the Contractor proposes to perform the work, and the dates on which the Contractor contemplates starting and completing the several salient features of the work (including acquiring materials, plant, and equipment). The schedule shall be in the form of a progress chart of suitable scale to indicate appropriately the percentage of work scheduled for completion by any given date during the period. If the Contractor fails to submit a schedule within the time prescribed, the Contracting Officer may withhold approval of progress payments until the Contractor submits the required schedule. (b) The Contractor shall enter the actual progress on the chart as directed by the Contracting Officer, and upon doing so shall immediately deliver three copies of the annotated schedule to the Contracting Officer. If, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, the Contractor falls behind the approved schedule, the Contractor shall take steps necessary to improve its progress, including those that may be required by the Contracting Officer, without additional cost to the Government. In this circumstance, the Contracting Officer may require the Contractor to increase the number of shifts, overtime operations, days of work, and/or the amount of construction plant, and to submit for approval any supplementary schedule or schedules in chart form as the Contracting Officer deems necessary to demonstrate how the approved rate of progress will be regained. (c) Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of the Contracting Officer under this clause shall be grounds for a determination by the Contracting Officer that the Contractor is not prosecuting the work with sufficient diligence to ensure completion within the time specified in the contract. Upon making this determination, the Contracting Officer may terminate the Contractor's right to proceed with the work, or any separable part of it, in accordance with the default terms of this contract.(End of Clause)4.41 VAAR 852.236-84 SCHEDULE OF WORK PROGRESS (NOV 1984) (a) The contractor shall submit with the schedule of costs, a progress schedule that indicates the anticipated installation of work versus the elapsed contract time, for the approval of the contracting officer. The progress schedule time shall be represented in the form of a bar graph with the contract time plotted along the horizontal axis. The starting date of the schedule shall be the date the contractor receives the "Notice to Proceed." The ending date shall be the original contract completion date. At a minimum, both dates shall be indicated on the progress schedule. The specific item of work, i.e., "Excavation", "Floor Tile", "Finish Carpentry", etc., should be plotted along the vertical axis and indicated by a line or bar at which time(s) during the contract this work is scheduled to take place. The schedule shall be submitted in triplicate and signed by the contractor. (b) The actual percent completion will be based on the value of installed work divided by the current contract amount. The actual completion percentage will be indicated on the monthly progress report. (c) The progress schedule will be revised when individual or cumulative time extensions of 15 calendar days or more are granted for any reason. The revised schedule should indicate the new contract completion date and should reflect any changes to the installation time(s) of the items of work affected. (d) The revised progress schedule will be used for reporting future scheduled percentage completion.(End of Clause)4.42 52.236-17 LAYOUT OF WORK (APR 1984) The Contractor shall lay out its work from Government-established base lines and bench marks indicated on the drawings, and shall be responsible for all measurements in connection with the layout. The Contractor shall furnish, at its own expense, all stakes, templates, platforms, equipment, tools, materials, and labor required to lay out any part of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for executing the work to the lines and grades that may be established or indicated by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall also be responsible for maintaining and preserving all stakes and other marks established by the Contracting Officer until authorized to remove them. If such marks are destroyed by the Contractor or through its negligence before their removal is authorized, the Contracting Officer may replace them and deduct the expense of the replacement from any amounts due or to become due to the Contractor.(End of Clause)4.43 52.236-21 SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR CONSTRUCTION (FEB 1997) ALTERNATE I (APR 1984) (a) The Contractor shall keep on the work site a copy of the drawings and specifications and shall at all times give the Contracting Officer access thereto. Anything mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the drawings, or shown on the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both. In case of difference between drawings and specifications, the specifications shall govern. In case of discrepancy in the figures, in the drawings, or in the specifications, the matter shall be promptly submitted to the Contracting Officer, who shall promptly make a determination in writing. Any adjustment by the Contractor without such a determination shall be at its own risk and expense. The Contracting Officer shall furnish from time to time such detailed drawings and other information as considered necessary, unless otherwise provided. (b) Wherever in the specifications or upon the drawings the words "directed," "required," "ordered," "designated," "prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the "direction," "requirement," "order," "designation," or "prescription," of the Contracting Officer is intended and similarly the words "approved," "acceptable," "satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean "approved by," or "acceptable to," or "satisfactory to" the Contracting Officer, unless otherwise expressly stated. (c) Where "as shown," "as indicated," "as detailed," or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that the reference is made to the drawings accompanying this contract unless stated otherwise. The word "provided" as used herein shall be understood to mean "provide complete in place," that is "furnished and installed." (d) Shop drawings means drawings, submitted to the Government by the Contractor, subcontractor, or any lower tier subcontractor pursuant to a construction contract, showing in detail (1) the proposed fabrication and assembly of structural elements and (2) the installation (i.e., form, fit, and attachment details) of materials of equipment. It includes drawings, diagrams, layouts, schematics, descriptive literature, illustrations, schedules, performance and test data, and similar materials furnished by the Contractor to explain in detail specific portions of the work required by the contract. The Government may duplicate, use, and disclose in any manner and for any purpose shop drawings delivered under this contract. (e) If this contract requires shop drawings, the Contractor shall coordinate all such drawings, and review them for accuracy, completeness, and compliance with contract requirements and shall indicate its approval thereon as evidence of such coordination and review. Shop drawings submitted to the Contracting Officer without evidence of the Contractor's approval may be returned for resubmission. The Contracting Officer will indicate an approval or disapproval of the shop drawings and if not approved as submitted shall indicate the Government's reasons therefor. Any work done before such approval shall be at the Contractor's risk. Approval by the Contracting Officer shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for any errors or omissions in such drawings, nor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of this contract, except with respect to variations described and approved in accordance with (f) below. (f) If shop drawings show variations from the contract requirements, the Contractor shall describe such variations in writing, separate from the drawings, at the time of submission. If the Contracting Officer approves any such variation, the Contracting Officer shall issue an appropriate contract modification, except that, if the variation is minor or does not involve a change in price or in time of performance, a modification need not be issued. (g) The Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Officer for approval four copies (unless otherwise indicated) of all shop drawings as called for under the various headings of these specifications. Three sets (unless otherwise indicated) of all shop drawings, will be retained by the Contracting Officer and one set will be returned to the Contractor. Upon completing the work under this contract, the Contractor shall furnish a complete set of all shop drawings as finally approved. These drawings shall show all changes and revisions made up to the time the equipment is completed and accepted.(End of Clause)4.44 VAAR 852.236-71 SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR CONSTRUCTION (JUL 2002) The clause entitled "Specifications and Drawings for Construction" in FAR 52.236-21 is supplemented as follows: (a) The contracting officer's interpretation of the drawings and specifications will be final, subject to the disputes clause. (b) Large scale drawings supersede small scale drawings. (c) Dimensions govern in all cases. Scaling of drawings may be done only for general location and general size of items. (d) Dimensions shown of existing work and all dimensions required for work that is to connect with existing work shall be verified by the contractor by actual measurement of the existing work. Any work at variance with that specified or shown in the drawings shall not be performed by the contractor until approved in writing by the contracting officer.(End of Clause)4.45 52.236-26 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE (FEB 1995) If the Contracting Officer decides to conduct a preconstruction conference, the successful offeror will be notified and will be required to attend. The Contracting Officer's notification will include specific details regarding the date, time, and location of the conference, any need for attendance by subcontractors, and information regarding the items to be discussed.(End of Clause)4.46 VAAR 852.236-76 CORRESPONDENCE (APR 1984) All correspondence relative to this contract shall bear Specification Number, Project Number, Department of Veterans Affairs Contract Number, title of project and name of facility.(End of Clause)4.47 VAAR 852.236-77 REFERENCE TO "STANDARDS" (JUL 2002) Any materials, equipment, or workmanship specified by references to number, symbol, or title of any specific Federal, Industry or Government Agency Standard Specification shall comply with all applicable provisions of such standard specifications, except as limited to type, class or grade, or modified in contract specifications. Reference to "Standards" referred to in the contract specifications, except as modified, shall have full force and effect as though printed in detail in specifications.(End of Clause)4.48 VAAR 852.236-78 GOVERNMENT SUPERVISION (APR 1984) (a) The work will be under the direction of the Department of Veterans Affairs contracting officer, who may designate another VA employee to act as resident engineer at the construction site. (b) Except as provided below, the resident engineer's directions will not conflict with or change contract requirements. (c) Within the limits of any specific authority delegated by the contracting officer, the resident engineer may, by written direction, make changes in the work. The contractor shall be advised of the extent of such authority prior to execution of any work under the contract.(End of Clause)4.49 VAAR 852.236-79 DAILY REPORT OF WORKERS AND MATERIAL (APR 1984) The contractor shall furnish to the resident engineer each day a consolidated report for the preceding work day in which is shown the number of laborers, mechanics, foremen/forewomen and pieces of heavy equipment used or employed by the contractor and subcontractors. The report shall bear the name of the firm, the branch of work which they perform such as concrete, plastering, masonry, plumbing, sheet metal work, etc. The report shall give a breakdown of employees by crafts, location where employed, and work performed. The report shall also list materials delivered to the site on the date covered by the report.(End of Clause)4.50 VAAR 852.236-80 SUBCONTRACTS AND WORK COORDINATION (APR 1984) (a) Nothing contained in this contract shall be construed as creating any contractual relationship between any subcontractor and the Government. Divisions or sections of specifications are not intended to control the contractor in dividing work among subcontractors, or to limit work performed by any trade. (b) The contractor shall be responsible to the Government for acts and omissions of his/her own employees, and of the subcontractors and their employees. The contractor shall also be responsible for coordination of the work of the trades, subcontractors, and material suppliers. (c) The Government or its representatives will not undertake to settle any differences between the contractor and subcontractors or between subcontractors. (d) The Government reserves the right to refuse to permit employment on the work or require dismissal from the work of any subcontractor who, by reason of previous unsatisfactory work on Department of Veterans Affairs projects or for any other reason, is considered by the contracting officer to be incompetent or otherwise objectionable.(End of Clause)4.51 VAAR 852.236-85 SUPPLEMENTARY LABOR STANDARDS PROVISIONS (APR 1984) (a) The wage determination decision of the Secretary of Labor is set forth in section GR, General Requirements, of this contract. It is the result of a study of wage conditions in the locality and establishes the minimum hourly rates of wages and fringe benefits for the described classes of labor in accordance with applicable law. No increase in the contract price will be allowed or authorized because of payment of wage rates in excess of those listed. (b) The contractor shall submit the required copies of payrolls to the contracting officer through the resident engineer or engineer officer, when acting in that capacity. Department of Labor Form WH- 347, Payroll, available from the Superintendent of Documents, Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402, may be used for this purpose. If, however, the contractor or subcontractor elects to use an individually composed payroll form, it shall contain the same information shown on Form WH-347, and in addition be accompanied by Department of Labor Form WH-348, Statement of Compliance, or any other form containing the exact wording of this form.(End of Clause)4.52 VAAR 852.236-86 WORKER'S COMPENSATION (JAN 2008) Public Law 107-217 (40 U.S.C. 3172) authorizes the constituted authority of States to apply their workers compensation laws to all lands and premises owned or held by the United States.(End of Clause)4.53 VAAR 852.236-90 RESTRICTION ON SUBMISSION AND USE OF EQUAL PRODUCTS (NOV 1986)This clause applies to the following items: NoneNotwithstanding the "Material and Workmanship" clause of this contract, FAR 52.236-5(a), nor any other contractual provision, "equal" products will not be considered by the Department of Veterans Affairs and may not be used.(End of Clause)4.54 VAAR 852.236-91 SPECIAL NOTES (JUL 2002) (a) Signing of the bid shall be deemed to be a representation by the bidder that: (1) Bidder is a construction contractor who owns, operates, or maintains a place of business, regularly engaged in construction, alteration, or repair of buildings, structures, and communications facilities, or other engineering projects, including furnishing and installing of necessary equipment; or (2) If newly entering into a construction activity, bidder has made all necessary arrangements for personnel, construction equipment, and required licenses to perform construction work; and (3) Upon request, prior to award, bidder will promptly furnish to the Government a statement of facts in detail as to bidder's previous experience (including recent and current contracts), organization (including company officers), technical qualifications, financial resources and facilities available to perform the contemplated work. (b) Unless otherwise provided in this contract, where the use of optional materials or construction is permitted, the same standard of workmanship, fabrication and installation shall be required irrespective of which option is selected. The contractor shall make any change or adjustment in connecting work or otherwise necessitated by the use of such optional material or construction, without additional cost to the Government. (c) When approval is given for a system component having functional or physical characteristics different from those indicated or specified, it is the responsibility of the contractor to furnish and install related components with characteristics and capacities compatible with the approved substitute component as required for systems to function as noted on drawings and specifications. There shall be no additional cost to the Government. (d) In some instances it may have been impracticable to detail all items in specifications or on drawings because of variances in manufacturers' methods of achieving specified results. In such instances the contractor will be required to furnish all labor, materials, drawings, services and connections necessary to produce systems or equipment which are completely installed, functional, and ready for operation by facility personnel in accordance with their intended use. (e) Claims by the contractor for delay attributed to unusually severe weather must be supported by climatological data covering the period and the same period for the 10 preceding years. When the weather in question exceeds in intensity or frequency the 10-year average, the excess experienced shall be considered "unusually severe." Comparison shall be on a monthly basis. Whether or not unusually severe weather in fact delays the work will depend upon the effect of weather on the branches of work being performed during the time under consideration.(End of Clause)4.55 52.243-4 CHANGES (JUNE 2007) (a) The Contracting Officer may, at any time, without notice to the sureties, if any, by written order designated or indicated to be a change order, make changes in the work within the general scope of the contract, including changes-- (1) In the specifications (including drawings and designs); (2) In the method or manner of performance of the work; (3) In the Government-furnished property or services; or (4) Directing acceleration in the performance of the work. (b) Any other written or oral order (which, as used in this paragraph (b), includes direction, instruction, interpretation, or determination) from the Contracting Officer that causes a change shall be treated as a change order under this clause; Provided, that the Contractor gives the Contracting Officer written notice stating-- (1) The date, circumstances, and source of the order; and (2) That the Contractor regards the order as a change order. (c) Except as provided in this clause, no order, statement, or conduct of the Contracting Officer shall be treated as a change under this clause or entitle the Contractor to an equitable adjustment. (d) If any change under this clause causes an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or the time required for, the performance of any part of the work under this contract, whether or not changed by any such order, the Contracting Officer shall make an equitable adjustment and modify the contract in writing. However, except for an adjustment based on defective specifications, no adjustment for any change under paragraph (b) of this clause shall be made for any costs incurred more than 20 days before the Contractor gives written notice as required. In the case of defective specifications for which the Government is responsible, the equitable adjustment shall include any increased cost reasonably incurred by the Contractor in attempting to comply with the defective specifications. (e) The Contractor must assert its right to an adjustment under this clause within 30 days after (1) receipt of a written change order under paragraph (a) of this clause or (2) the furnishing of a written notice under paragraph (b) of this clause, by submitting to the Contracting Officer a written statement describing the general nature and amount of proposal, unless this period is extended by the Government. The statement of proposal for adjustment may be included in the notice under paragraph (b) of this clause. (f) No proposal by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment shall be allowed if asserted after final payment under this contract.(End of Clause)4.56 VAAR 852.236-88 CONTRACT CHANGES--SUPPLEMENT (JUL 2002) (a) Paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(4) apply to proposed contract changes costing over $500,000. (1) When requested by the contracting officer, the contractor shall submit proposals for changes in work to the resident engineer. Proposals, to be submitted as expeditiously as possible but within 30 calendar days after receipt of request, shall be in legible form, original and two copies, with an itemized breakdown that will include material, quantities, unit prices, labor costs (separated into trades), construction equipment, etc. (Labor costs are to be identified with specific material placed or operation performed.) The contractor must obtain and furnish with a proposal an itemized breakdown as described above, signed by each subcontractor participating in the change regardless of tier. When certified cost or pricing data are required under FAR Subpart 15.403, the cost or pricing data shall be submitted in accordance with FAR 15.403-5. (2) When the necessity to proceed with a change does not allow sufficient time to negotiate a modification or because of failure to reach an agreement, the contracting officer may issue a change order instructing the contractor to proceed on the basis of a tentative price based on the best estimate available at the time, with the firm price to be determined later. Furthermore, when the change order is issued, the contractor shall submit a proposal, which includes the information required by paragraph (a)(1), for cost of changes in work within 30 calendar days. (3) The contracting officer will consider issuing a settlement by determination to the contract if the contractor's proposal required by paragraphs (a)(1) or (a)(2) of this clause is not received within 30 calendar days or if agreement has not been reached. (4) Bond premium adjustment, consequent upon changes ordered, will be made as elsewhere specified at the time of final settlement under the contract and will not be included in the individual change. (b) Paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(11) apply to proposed contract changes costing $500,000 or less: (1) When requested by the contracting officer, the contractor shall submit proposals for changes in work to the resident engineer. Proposals, to be submitted as expeditiously as possible but within 30 calendar days after receipt of request, shall be in legible form, original and two copies, with an itemized breakdown that will include material, quantities, unit prices, labor costs (separated into trades), construction equipment, etc. (Labor costs are to be identified with specific material placed or operation performed.) The contractor must obtain and furnish with a proposal an itemized breakdown as described above, signed by each subcontractor participating in the change regardless of tier. When certified cost or pricing data or information other than cost or pricing data are required under FAR 15.403, the data shall be submitted in accordance with FAR 15.403-5. No itemized breakdown will be required for proposals amounting to less than $1,000. (2) When the necessity to proceed with a change does not allow sufficient time to negotiate a modification or because of failure to reach an agreement, the contracting officer may issue a change order instructing the contractor to proceed on the basis of a tentative price based on the best estimate available at the time, with the firm price to be determined later. Furthermore, when the change order is issued, the contractor shall submit within 30 calendar days, a proposal that includes the information required by paragraph (b)(1) for the cost of the changes in work. (3) The contracting officer will consider issuing a settlement by determination to the contract if the contractor's proposal required by paragraphs (b)(1) or (b)(2) of this clause is not received within 30 calendar days, or if agreement has not been reached. (4) Allowances not to exceed 10 percent each for overhead and profit for the party performing the work will be based on the value of labor, material, and use of construction equipment required to accomplish the change. As the value of the change increases, a declining scale will be used in negotiating the percentage of overhead and profit. Allowable percentages on changes will not exceed the following: 10 percent overhead and 10 percent profit on the first $20,000; 7-1/2 percent overhead and 7-1/2 percent profit on the next $30,000; 5 percent overhead and 5 percent profit on balance over $50,000. Profit shall be computed by multiplying the profit percentage by the sum of the direct costs and computed overhead costs. (5) The prime contractor's or upper-tier subcontractor's fee on work performed by lower-tier subcontractors will be based on the net increased cost to the prime contractor or upper-tier subcontractor, as applicable. Allowable fee on changes will not exceed the following: 10 percent fee on the first $20,000; 7-1/2 percent fee on the next $30,000; and 5 percent fee on balance over $50,000. (6) Not more than four percentages, none of which exceed the percentages shown above, will be allowed regardless of the number of tiers of subcontractors. (7) Where the contractor's or subcontractor's portion of a change involves credit items, such items must be deducted prior to adding overhead and profit for the party performing the work. The contractor's fee is limited to the net increase to contractor of subcontractors' portions cost computed in accordance herewith. (8) Where a change involves credit items only, a proper measure of the amount of downward adjustment in the contract price is the reasonable cost to the contractor if he/she had performed the deleted work. A reasonable allowance for overhead and profit are properly includable as part of the downward adjustment for a deductive change. The amount of such allowance is subject to negotiation. (9) Cost of Federal Old Age Benefit (Social Security) tax and of Worker's Compensation and Public Liability insurance appertaining to changes are allowable. While no percentage will be allowed thereon for overhead or profit, prime contractor's fee will be allowed on such items in subcontractors' proposals. (10) Overhead and contractor's fee percentages shall be considered to include insurance other than mentioned herein, field and office supervisors and assistants, security police, use of small tools, incidental job burdens, and general home office expenses and no separate allowance will be made therefore. Assistants to office supervisors include all clerical, stenographic and general office help. Incidental job burdens include, but are not necessarily limited to, office equipment and supplies, temporary toilets, telephone and conformance to OSHA requirements. Items such as, but not necessarily limited to, review and coordination, estimating and expediting relative to contract changes are associated with field and office supervision and are considered to be included in the contractor's overhead and/or fee percentage. (11) Bond premium adjustment, consequent upon changes ordered, will be made as elsewhere specified at the time of final settlement under the contract and will not be included in the individual change.(End of Clause)4.57 52.246-12 INSPECTION OF CONSTRUCTION (AUG 1996) (a) Definition. "Work" includes, but is not limited to, materials, workmanship, and manufacture and fabrication of components. (b) The Contractor shall maintain an adequate inspection system and perform such inspections as will ensure that the work performed under the contract conforms to contract requirements. The Contractor shall maintain complete inspection records and make them available to the Government. All work shall be conducted under the general direction of the Contracting Officer and is subject to Government inspection and test at all places and at all reasonable times before acceptance to ensure strict compliance with the terms of the contract. (c) Government inspections and tests are for the sole benefit of the Government and do not - (1) Relieve the Contractor of responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; (2) Relieve the Contractor of responsibility for damage to or loss of the material before acceptance; (3) Constitute or imply acceptance; or (4) Affect the continuing rights of the Government after acceptance of the completed work under paragraph (i) below. (d) The presence or absence of a Government inspector does not relieve the Contractor from any contract requirement, nor is the inspector authorized to change any term or condition of the specification without the Contracting Officer's written authorization. (e) The Contractor shall promptly furnish, at no increase in contract price, all facilities, labor, and material reasonably needed for performing such safe and convenient inspections and tests as may be required by the Contracting Officer. The Government may charge to the Contractor any additional cost of inspection or test when work is not ready at the time specified by the Contractor for inspection or test, or when prior rejection makes reinspection or retest necessary. The Government shall perform all inspections and tests in a manner that will not unnecessarily delay the work. Special, full size, and performance tests shall be performed as described in the contract. (f) The Contractor shall, without charge, replace or correct work found by the Government not to conform to contract requirements, unless in the public interest the Government consents to accept the work with an appropriate adjustment in contract price. The Contractor shall promptly segregate and remove rejected material from the premises. (g) If the Contractor does not promptly replace or correct rejected work, the Government may (1) by contract or otherwise, replace or correct the work and charge the cost to the Contractor or (2) terminate for default the Contractor's right to proceed. (h) If, before acceptance of the entire work, the Government decides to examine already completed work by removing it or tearing it out, the Contractor, on request, shall promptly furnish all necessary facilities, labor, and material. If the work is found to be defective or nonconforming in any material respect due to the fault of the Contractor or its subcontractors, the Contractor shall defray the expenses of the examination and of satisfactory reconstruction. However, if the work is found to meet contract requirements, the Contracting Officer shall make an equitable adjustment for the additional services involved in the examination and reconstruction, including, if completion of the work was thereby delayed, an extension of time. (i) Unless otherwise specified in the contract, the Government shall accept, as promptly as practicable after completion and inspection, all work required by the contract or that portion of the work the Contracting Officer determines can be accepted separately. Acceptance shall be final and conclusive except for latent defects, fraud, gross mistakes amounting to fraud, or the Government's rights under any warranty or guarantee.(End of Clause)4.58 VAAR 852.236-74 INSPECTION OF CONSTRUCTION (JUL 2002) The clause entitled "Inspection of Construction" in FAR 52.246-12 is supplemented as follows: (a) Inspection of materials and articles furnished under this contract will be made at the site by the resident engineer, unless otherwise provided for in the specifications. (b) Final inspection will not be made until the contract work is ready for beneficial use or occupancy. The contractor shall notify the contracting officer, through the resident engineer, fifteen (15) days prior to the date on which the work will be ready for final inspection.(End of Clause)4.59 52.252-2 CLAUSES INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE (FEB 1998) This contract incorporates one or more clauses by reference, with the same force and effect as if they were given in full text. Upon request, the Contracting Officer will make their full text available. Also, the full text of a clause may be accessed electronically at this/these address(es): (End of Clause)FAR NumberTitleDate52.202-1DEFINITIONSJAN 201252.203-3GRATUITIESAPR 198452.203-5COVENANT AGAINST CONTINGENT FEESAPR 198452.203-6RESTRICTIONS ON SUBCONTRACTOR SALES TO THE GOVERNMENTSEP 200652.203-7ANTI-KICKBACK PROCEDURESOCT 201052.203-8CANCELLATION, RESCISSION, AND RECOVERY OF FUNDS FOR ILLEGAL OR IMPROPER ACTIVITYJAN 199752.203-10PRICE OR FEE ADJUSTMENT FOR ILLEGAL OR IMPROPER ACTIVITYJAN 199752.203-1252.203-17LIMITATION ON PAYMENTS TO INFLUENCE CERTAIN FEDERAL TRANSACTIONSCONTRACTOR EMPLOYEE WHISTLEBLOWER RIGHTS& REQUIREMENT TO INFORM EMPLOYEES OF WHISTLEBLOWER RIGHTSOCT 2010SEP 201352.204-4PRINTED OR COPIED DOUBLE-SIDED ON RECYCLED PAPERMAY 201152.204-9PERSONAL IDENTITY VERIFICATION OF CONTRACTOR PERSONNELJAN 201152.204-10REPORTING EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION AND FIRST-TIER SUBCONTRACT AWARDSJUL 201352.204-12DATA UNIVERSAL NUMBERING SYSTEM NUMBER MAINTENANCEDEC 201252.204-13SYSTEM FOR AWARD MANAGEMENT MAINTENANCEJUL 201352.209-6PROTECTING THE GOVERNMENT'S INTEREST WHEN SUBCONTRACTING WITH CONTRACTORS DEBARRED, SUSPENDED, OR PROPOSED FOR DEBARMENTAUG 201352.211-6BRAND NAME OR EQUALAUG 199952.214-26AUDIT AND RECORDS--SEALED BIDDINGOCT 201052.214-27PRICE REDUCTION FOR DEFECTIVE CERTIFIED COST OR PRICING DATA--MODIFICATIONS-- SEALED BIDDINGAUG 201152.214-28SUBCONTRACTOR CERTIFIED COST OR PRICING DATA--MODIFICATIONS--SEALED BIDDINGOCT 201052.219-8UTILIZATION OF SMALL BUSINESS CONCERNSJUL 201352.222-3CONVICT LABORJUN 200352.222-10COMPLIANCE WITH COPELAND ACT REQUIREMENTSFEB 198852.222-12CONTRACT TERMINATION - DEBARMENTFEB 198852.222-13COMPLIANCE WITH DAVIS-BACON AND RELATED ACT REGULATIONSFEB 198852.222-14DISPUTES CONCERNING LABOR STANDARDSFEB 198852.222-15CERTIFICATION OF ELIGIBILITYFEB 198852.222-21PROHIBITION OF SEGREGATED FACILITIESFEB 199952.222-26EQUAL OPPORTUNITYMAR 200752.222-27AFFIRMATIVE ACTION COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTIONFEB 199952.222-35EQUAL OPPORTUNITY FOR VETERANSSEP 201052.222-36AFFIRMATIVE ACTION FOR WORKERS WITH DISABILITIESOCT 201052.222-37EMPLOYMENT REPORTS ON VETERANSSEP 201052.222-50COMBATING TRAFFICKING IN PERSONSFEB 200952.222-54EMPLOYMENT ELIGIBILITY VERIFICATIONAUG 201352.223-5POLLUTION PREVENTION AND RIGHT-TO-KNOW INFORMATION ALTERNATE I (MAY 2011) AND ALTERNATE II (MAY 2011)MAY 201152.223-6DRUG-FREE WORKPLACEMAY 200152.223-15ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN ENERGY-CONSUMING PRODUCTSDEC 200752.223-17AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT OF EPA-DESIGNATED ITEMS IN SERVICE AND CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTSMAY 200852.223-18ENCOURAGING CONTRACTOR POLICIES TO BAN TEXT MESSAGING WHILE DRIVINGAUG 201152.225-13RESTRICTIONS ON CERTAIN FOREIGN PURCHASESJUN 200852.227-1AUTHORIZATION AND CONSENTDEC 200752.227-2NOTICE AND ASSISTANCE REGARDING PATENT AND COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENTDEC 200752.227-4PATENT INDEMNITY--CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTSDEC 200752.228-11PLEDGES OF ASSETSJAN 201252.228-12PROSPECTIVE SUBCONTRACTOR REQUESTS FOR BONDSOCT 199552.228-14IRREVOCABLE LETTER OF CREDITDEC 199952.229-3FEDERAL, STATE, AND LOCAL TAXESFEB 201352.232-17INTERESTOCT 201052.232-1852.232-23AVAILABILITY OF FUNDSASSIGNMENT OF CLAIMSAPR 1984JAN 198652.232-27PROMPT PAYMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTSJUL 201352.232-3452.232-39PAYMENT BY ELECTRONIC FUNDS TRANSFER--OTHER THAN SYSTEM FOR AWARD MANAGEMENTUNEFORCEABILITY OF UNAUTHORIZED OBLIGATIONSJUL 2013JUN 201352.233-1DISPUTES ALTERNATE I (DEC 1991)JUL 200252.233-3PROTEST AFTER AWARDAUG 199652.233-4APPLICABLE LAW FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT CLAIMOCT 200452.242-13BANKRUPTCYJUL 199552.242-14SUSPENSION OF WORKAPR 198452.245-1GOVERNMENT PROPERTYAPR 201252.245-2GOVERNMENT PROPERTY INSTALLATION OPERATION SERVICESAPR 201252.245-9USE AND CHARGESAPR 201252.244-6SUBCONTRACTS FOR COMMERCIAL ITEMSJUL 201352.246-21WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION ALTERNATE I (APR 1984)MAR 1994852.246-74SPECIAL WARRANTIESJAN 200852.248-3VALUE ENGINEERING--CONSTRUCTION ALTERNATE I (APR 1984)OCT 201052.249-2TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE OF THE GOVERNMENT (FIXED PRICE) ALTERNATE I (SEPT 1996)APR 201252.249-10DEFAULT (FIXED-PRICE CONSTRUCTION)APR 198452.253-1COMPUTER GENERATED FORMSJAN 1991SECTION 01 00 00GENERAL REQUIREMENTS1.1 GENERAL INTENTION A.Contractor shall completely prepare site for building operations, including demolition and removal of existing structures, and furnish labor and materials and perform work for Renovate 2A Wing for OEF/OIF Clinic – Building 500, as required by drawings and specifications. B.Visits to the site by Bidders may be made only by appointment with the Medical Center Engineering Officer. C.Offices of EBA Ernest Bland Associates, P.C., as ArchitectEngineers, will render certain technical services during construction. Such services shall be considered as advisory to the Government and shall not be construed as expressing or implying a contractual act of the Government without affirmations by Contracting Officer or his duly authorized representative. D.Before placement and installation of work subject to tests by testing laboratory retained by Department of Veterans Affairs, the Contractor shall notify the COTR in sufficient time to enable testing laboratory personnel to be present at the site in time for proper taking and testing of specimens and field inspection. Such prior notice shall be not less than three work days unless otherwise designated by the COTR.E.All employees of general contractor and subcontractors shall comply with VA security management program and obtain permission of the VA police, be identified by project and employer, and restricted from unauthorized access.F.Prior to commencing work, general contractor shall provide proof that a OSHA certified “competent person” (CP) (29 CFR 1926.20(b)(2) will maintain a presence at the work site whenever the general or subcontractors are present.G.Training:1.All employees of general contractor or subcontractors shall have the 10-hour OSHA certified Construction Safety course and /or other relevant competency training, as determined by VA CP with input from the ICRA team. 2. Superintendent shall have 30-hour OSHA training.3.Submit training records of all such employees for approval before the start of work.1.2 STATEMENT OF BID ITEM(S) A.ITEM I, GENERAL CONSTRUCTION: Work includes labor, materials, equipment, tools, travel, general construction, alterations mechanical and electrical work, utility systems, necessary removal of existing partitions and construction for the renovation to 2A Wing for OEF/OIF ClinicB.ALT DEDUCTS:1. ALTERNATE NO.1: Renovation and fit out of swing space 2A-123 (196 calendar days).2. ALTERNATE NO.2: Renovation and fit out of swing space 2A-123.Reinstallation pneumatic tube system.? System shall be returned to VA COTR (196 calendar days).3. ALTERNATE NO.3: Renovation and fit out of swing space 2A-123.Reinstallation pneumatic tube system.? System shall be returned to VA COTR. Glass Door 2A-124B1 & Side Light (196 calendar days).4. ALTERNATE NO.4: Renovation and fit out of swing space 2A-123. Reinstallation pneumatic tube system.? System shall be returned to VA COTR. Glass Door 2A-124B1 & Side Light. Push Plate & Handicap Access Controller for Door 2A-124 Suite Entry (196 calendar days).1.3 SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR CONTRACTORA.AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT, no sets of specifications and drawings will be furnished. Specifications and drawings may be downloaded from B.Additional sets of drawings may be made by the Contractor, at Contractor's expense.1.4 construction security requirementsA.Security Plan:1.The security plan defines both physical and administrative security procedures that will remain effective for the entire duration of the project.2.The General Contractor is responsible for assuring that all sub-contractors working on the project and their employees also comply with these regulations.B.Security Procedures:1.General Contractor’s employees shall not enter the project site without appropriate badge. They may also be subject to inspection of their personal effects when entering or leaving the project site.2.For working outside the “regular hours” as defined in the contract, The General Contractor shall give 3 days notice to the Contracting Officer so that security arrangements can be provided for the employees. This notice is separate from any notices required for utility shutdown described later in this section.3.No photography of VA premises is allowed without written permission of the Contracting Officer.4.VA reserves the right to close down or shut down the project site and order General Contractor’s employees off the premises in the event of a national emergency. The General Contractor may return to the site only with the written approval of the Contracting Officer.C.Key Control:1.The General Contractor shall provide duplicate keys and lock combinations to the COTR for the purpose of security inspections of every area of project including tool boxes and parked machines and take any emergency action.2.The General Contractor shall turn over all permanent lock cylinders to the VA locksmith for permanent installation. See Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE and coordinate.D.Document Control:1.Before starting any work, the General Contractor/Sub Contractors shall submit an electronic security memorandum describing the approach to following goals and maintaining confidentiality of “sensitive information”.2.The General Contractor is responsible for safekeeping of all drawings, project manual and other project information. This information shall be shared only with those with a specific need to accomplish the project.3.Certain documents, sketches, videos or photographs and drawings may be marked “Law Enforcement Sensitive” or “Sensitive Unclassified”. Secure such information in separate containers and limit the access to only those who will need it for the project. Return the information to the Contracting Officer upon request.4.These security documents shall not be removed or transmitted from the project site without the written approval of Contracting Officer.5.All paper waste or electronic media such as CD’s and diskettes shall be shredded and destroyed in a manner acceptable to the VA.6.Notify Contracting Officer and Site Security Officer immediately when there is a loss or compromise of “sensitive information”.7.All electronic information shall be stored in specified location following VA standards and procedures using an Engineering Document Management Software (EDMS).a.Security, access and maintenance of all project drawings, both scanned and electronic shall be performed and tracked through the EDMS system.b.“Sensitive information” including drawings and other documents may be attached to e-mail provided all VA encryption procedures are followed.E.Motor Vehicle Restrictions1.Vehicle authorization request shall be required for any vehicle entering the site and such request shall be submitted 24 hours before the date and time of access. Access shall be restricted to picking up and dropping off materials and supplies.2.Separate permits shall be issued for General Contractor and its employees for parking in designated areas only.1.5 FIRE SAFETYA.Applicable Publications: Publications listed below form part of this Article to extent referenced. Publications are referenced in text by basic designations only. 1.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):E84-2009Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials2.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):10-2010Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers30-2008Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code51B-2009Standard for Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting and Other Hot Work70-2011National Electrical Code241-2009Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations3.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):29 CFR 1926Safety and Health Regulations for ConstructionFire Safety Plan: Establish and maintain a fire protection program in accordance with 29 CFR 1926. Prior to start of work, prepare a plan detailing project-specific fire safety measures, including periodic status reports, and submit to COTR for review for compliance with contract requirements in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES Prior to any worker for the contractor or subcontractors beginning work, they shall undergo a safety briefing provided by the general contractor’s competent person per OSHA requirements. This briefing shall include information on the construction limits, VAMC safety guidelines, means of egress, break areas, work hours, locations of restrooms, use of VAMC equipment, etc. Documentation shall be provided to the COTR that individuals have undergone contractor’s safety briefing.C.Site and Building Access: Maintain free and unobstructed access to facility emergency services and for fire, police and other emergency response forces in accordance with NFPA 241.D.Separate temporary facilities, such as trailers, storage sheds, and dumpsters, from existing buildings and new construction by distances in accordance with NFPA 241. For small facilities with less than 6 m (20 feet) exposing overall length, separate by 3m (10 feet).E.Temporary Construction Partitions: 1.Install and maintain temporary construction partitions to provide smoke-tight separations between construction areas. Construct partitions of gypsum board or treated plywood (flame spread rating of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84) on both sides of fire retardant treated wood or metal steel studs. Extend the partitions through suspended ceilings to floor slab deck or roof. Seal joints and penetrations. At door openings, install Class C, ? hour fire/smoke rated doors with self-closing devices.2.Install one-hour fire-rated temporary construction partitions as shown on drawings to maintain integrity of existing exit stair enclosures, exit passageways, fire-rated enclosures of hazardous areas, horizontal exits, smoke barriers, vertical shafts and openings enclosures.3.Close openings in smoke barriers and fire-rated construction to maintain fire ratings. Seal penetrations with listed through-penetration firestop materials in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.F.Temporary Heating and Electrical: Install, use and maintain installations in accordance with 29 CFR 1926, NFPA 241 and NFPA 70.G.Means of Egress: Do not block exiting for occupied buildings, including paths from exits to roads. Minimize disruptions and coordinate with COTR.H.Egress Routes for Construction Workers: Maintain free and unobstructed egress. Inspect daily and report findings and corrective actions weekly to COTR.I.Fire Extinguishers: Provide and maintain extinguishers in construction areas and temporary storage areas in accordance with 29 CFR 1926, NFPA 241 and NFPA 10. J.Flammable and Combustible Liquids: Store, dispense and use liquids in accordance with 29 CFR 1926, NFPA 241 and NFPA 30. K.Sprinklers: Install, test and activate new automatic sprinklers prior to removing existing sprinklers. L.Existing Fire Protection: Do not impair automatic sprinklers, smoke and heat detection, and fire alarm systems, except for portions immediately under construction, and temporarily for connections. Provide fire watch for impairments more than 4 hours in a 24-hour period. Request interruptions in accordance with Article, OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS, and coordinate with COTR. All existing or temporary fire protection systems (fire alarms, sprinklers) located in construction areas shall be tested as coordinated with the medical center. Parameters for the testing and results of any tests performed shall be recorded by the medical center and copies provided to the COTR.M.Smoke Detectors: Prevent accidental operation. Remove temporary covers at end of work operations each day. Coordinate with COTR.N.Hot Work: Perform and safeguard hot work operations in accordance with NFPA 241 and NFPA 51B. Coordinate with Resident Engineer at least ____ 24 hours in advance. Designate contractor's responsible project-site fire prevention program manager to permit hot work. O.Fire Hazard Prevention and Safety Inspections: Inspect entire construction areas weekly. Coordinate with, and report findings and corrective actions weekly to COTR.P.Smoking: Smoking is prohibited in and adjacent to construction areas inside existing buildings and additions under construction. In separate and detached buildings under construction, smoking is prohibited except in designated smoking rest areas.Q.Dispose of waste and debris in accordance with NFPA 241. Remove from buildings daily.R.Perform other construction, alteration and demolition operations in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.S.If required, submit documentation to the COTR that personnel have been trained in the fire safety aspects of working in areas with impaired structural or compartmentalization features.1.6 OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS A.The Contractor shall confine all operations (including storage of materials) on Government premises to areas authorized or approved by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall hold and save the Government, its officers and agents, free and harmless from liability of any nature occasioned by the Contractor's performance.B.Temporary buildings (e.g., storage sheds, shops, offices) and utilities may be erected by the Contractor only with the approval of the Contracting Officer and shall be built with labor and materials furnished by the Contractor without expense to the Government. The temporary buildings and utilities shall remain the property of the Contractor and shall be removed by the Contractor at its expense upon completion of the work. With the written consent of the Contracting Officer, the buildings and utilities may be abandoned and need not be removed. C.The Contractor shall, under regulations prescribed by the Contracting Officer, use only established roadways, or use temporary roadways constructed by the Contractor when and as authorized by the Contracting Officer. When materials are transported in prosecuting the work, vehicles shall not be loaded beyond the loading capacity recommended by the manufacturer of the vehicle or prescribed by any Federal, State, or local law or regulation. When it is necessary to cross curbs or sidewalks, the Contractor shall protect them from damage. The Contractor shall repair or pay for the repair of any damaged curbs, sidewalks, or roads. (FAR 52.23610)D.Working space and space available for storing materials shall be as determined by the COTR. E.Workmen are subject to rules of Medical Center applicable to their conduct. F.Execute work so as to interfere as little as possible with normal functioning of Medical Center as a whole, including operations of utility services, fire protection systems and any existing equipment, and with work being done by others. Use of equipment and tools that transmit vibrations and noises through the building structure, are not permitted in buildings that are occupied, during construction, jointly by patients or medical personnel, and Contractor's personnel, except as permitted by COTR where required by limited working space. 1.Do not store materials and equipment in other than assigned areas. 2.Schedule delivery of materials and equipment to immediate construction working areas within buildings in use by Department of Veterans Affairs in quantities sufficient for not more than two work days. Provide unobstructed access to Medical Center areas required to remain in operation. 3.Where access by Medical Center personnel to vacated portions of buildings is not required, storage of Contractor's materials and equipment will be permitted subject to fire and safety requirements.G.Phasing: To insure such executions, Contractor shall furnish the COTR with a schedule of approximate phasing dates on which the Contractor intends to accomplish work in each specific area of site, building or portion thereof. In addition, Contractor shall notify the COTR two weeks in advance of the proposed date of starting work in each specific area of site, building or portion thereof. Arrange such phasing dates to insure accomplishment of this work in successive phases mutually agreeable to Medical Center Director, COTR and Contractor, as follows: Phase I: Demolition Phase II: OEF/OIF fitoutH.Building 500 2A Wing will be vacated by Government in accordance with above phasing beginning immediately after date of receipt of Notice to Proceed and turned over to Contractor. I.Building(s) No.(s) 500 2A Wing will be occupied during performance of work ; but immediate areas of alterations will be vacated. J.When a building is turned over to Contractor, Contractor shall accept entire responsibility therefore. 1.Contractor shall maintain a minimum temperature of 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) at all times, except as otherwise specified. 2.Contractor shall maintain in operating condition existing fire protection and alarm equipment. In connection with fire alarm equipment, Contractor shall make arrangements for preinspection of site with Fire Department or Company (Department of Veterans Affairs or municipal) whichever will be required to respond to an alarm from Contractor's employee or watchman. K.Utilities Services: Maintain existing utility services for Medical Center at all times. Provide temporary facilities, labor, materials, equipment, connections, and utilities to assure uninterrupted services. Where necessary to cut existing water, steam, gases, sewer or air pipes, or conduits, wires, cables, etc. of utility services or of fire protection systems and communications systems (including telephone), they shall be cut and capped at suitable places where shown; or, in absence of such indication, where directed by COTR. 1.No utility service such as water, gas, steam, sewers or electricity, or fire protection systems and communications systems may be interrupted without prior approval of COTR. Electrical work shall be accomplished with all affected circuits or equipment de-energized. When an electrical outage cannot be accomplished, work on any energized circuits or equipment shall not commence without the Medical Center Director’s prior knowledge and written approval. Refer to specification Sections 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS and 27 05 11 REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS for additional requirements.2.Contractor shall submit a request to interrupt any such services to COTR, in writing, 48 hours in advance of proposed interruption. Request shall state reason, date, exact time of, and approximate duration of such interruption. 3.Contractor will be advised (in writing) of approval of request, or of which other date and/or time such interruption will cause least inconvenience to operations of Medical Center. Interruption time approved by Medical Center may occur at other than Contractor's normal working hours. 4.Major interruptions of any system must be requested, in writing, at least 15 calendar days prior to the desired time and shall be performed as directed by the COTR. 5.In case of a contract construction emergency, service will be interrupted on approval of COTR. Such approval will be confirmed in writing as soon as practical. 6.Whenever it is required that a connection fee be paid to a public utility provider for new permanent service to the construction project, for such items as water, sewer, electricity, gas or steam, payment of such fee shall be the responsibility of the Government and not the Contractor. L.Abandoned Lines: All service lines such as wires, cables, conduits, ducts, pipes and the like, and their hangers or supports, which are to be abandoned but are not required to be entirely removed, shall be sealed, capped or plugged. The lines shall not be capped in finished areas, but shall be removed and sealed, capped or plugged in ceilings, within furred spaces, in unfinished areas, or within walls or partitions; so that they are completely behind the finished surfaces. M.To minimize interference of construction activities with flow of Medical Center traffic, comply with the following: 1.Keep roads, walks and entrances to grounds, to parking and to occupied areas of buildings clear of construction materials, debris and standing construction equipment and vehicles. Wherever excavation for new utility lines cross existing roads, at least one lane must be open to traffic at all times. 2.Method and scheduling of required cutting, altering and removal of existing roads, walks and entrances must be approved by the COTR. N.Coordinate the work for this contract with other construction operations as directed by COTR. This includes the scheduling of traffic and the use of roadways, as specified in Article, USE OF ROADWAYS. 1.7 ALTERATIONS A.Survey: Before any work is started, the Contractor shall make a thorough survey with the COTR and a representative of VA Supply Service, of buildings, and areas of buildings in which alterations occur and areas all three, to the Contracting Officer. This report shall list by rooms and spaces:1.Existing condition and types of resilient flooring, doors, windows, walls and other surfaces not required to be altered throughout affected areas of the building. 2.Existence and conditions of items such as plumbing fixtures and accessories, electrical fixtures, equipment, venetian blinds, shades, etc., required by drawings to be either reused or relocated, or both.3.Shall note any discrepancies between drawings and existing conditions at site. 4.Shall designate areas for working space, materials storage and routes of access to areas within buildings where alterations occur and which have been agreed upon by Contractor and COTR. B.Any items required by drawings to be either reused or relocated or both, found during this survey to be nonexistent, or in opinion of COTR and/or Supply Representative, to be in such condition that their use is impossible or impractical, shall be furnished and/or replaced by Contractor with new items in accordance with specifications which will be furnished by Government. Provided the contract work is changed by reason of this subparagraph B, the contract will be modified accordingly, under provisions of clause entitled "DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS" (FAR 52.2362) and "CHANGES" (FAR 52.2434 and VAAR 852.23688). C.ReSurvey: Thirty days before expected partial or final inspection date, the Contractor and COTR together shall make a thorough resurvey of the areas of buildings involved. They shall furnish a report on conditions then existing, of resilient flooring, doors, windows, walls and other surfaces as compared with conditions of same as noted in first condition survey report: 1.Resurvey report shall also list any damage caused by Contractor to such flooring and other surfaces, despite protection measures; and, will form basis for determining extent of repair work required of Contractor to restore damage caused by Contractor's workmen in executing work of this contract. D.Protection: Provide the following protective measures: 1.Temporary protection against damage for portions of existing structures and grounds where work is to be done, materials handled and equipment moved and/or relocated. 2.Protection of interior of existing structures at all times, from damage, dust and weather inclemency. Wherever work is performed, floor surfaces that are to remain in place shall be adequately protected prior to starting work, and this protection shall be maintained intact until all work in the area is completed. 1.8 DISPOSAL AND RETENTIONA.Materials and equipment accruing from work removed and from demolition of buildings or structures, or parts thereof, shall be disposed of as follows: 1.Reserved items which are to remain property of the Government are identified by attached tags or noted on drawings or in specifications as items to be stored. Items that remain property of the Government shall be removed or dislodged from present locations in such a manner as to prevent damage which would be detrimental to reinstallation and reuse. Store such items where directed by COTR. 2.Items not reserved shall become property of the Contractor and be removed by Contractor from Medical Center.3.Items of portable equipment and furnishings located in rooms and spaces in which work is to be done under this contract shall remain the property of the Government. When rooms and spaces are vacated by the Department of Veterans Affairs during the alteration period, such items which are NOT required by drawings and specifications to be either relocated or reused will be removed by the Government in advance of work to avoid interfering with Contractor's operation. 4.PCB Transformers and Capacitors: The Contractor shall be responsible for disposal of the Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB) transformers and capacitors. The transformers and capacitors shall be taken out of service and handled in accordance with the procedures of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and the Department of Transportation (DOT) as outlined in Code of Federal Regulation (CFR), Titled 40 and 49 respectively. The EPA's Toxic Substance Control Act (TSCA) Compliance Program Policy Nos. 6PCB6 and 6PCB7 also apply. Upon removal of PCB transformers and capacitors for disposal, the "originator" copy of the Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest (EPA Form 870022), along with the Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest Continuation Sheet (EPA Form 870022A) shall be returned to the Contracting Officer who will annotate the contract file and transmit the Manifest to the Medical Center's Chief. a.Copies of the following listed CFR titles may be obtained from the Government Printing Office:40 CFR 261Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste 40 CFR 262Standards Applicable to Generators of Hazardous Waste 40 CFR 263Standards Applicable to Transporters of Hazardous Waste 40 CFR 761PCB Manufacturing, Processing, Distribution in Commerce, and use Prohibitions49 CFR 172Hazardous Material tables and Hazardous Material Communications Regulations 49 CFR 173Shippers General Requirements for Shipments and Packaging 49 CRR 173Subpart A General 49 CFR 173Subpart B Preparation of Hazardous Material for Transportation 49 CFR 173Subpart J Other Regulated Material; Definitions and Preparation TSCACompliance Program Policy Nos. 6PCB6 and 6PCB7 1.9 PROTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, UTILITIES, AND IMPROVEMENTS A.The Contractor shall preserve and protect all structures, equipment, and vegetation (such as trees, shrubs, and grass) on or adjacent to the work site, which are not to be removed and which do not unreasonably interfere with the work required under this contract. The Contractor shall only remove trees when specifically authorized to do so, and shall avoid damaging vegetation that will remain in place. If any limbs or branches of trees are broken during contract performance, or by the careless operation of equipment, or by workmen, the Contractor shall trim those limbs or branches with a clean cut and paint the cut with a treepruning compound as directed by the Contracting Officer. B.The Contractor shall protect from damage all existing improvements and utilities at or near the work site and on adjacent property of a third party, the locations of which are made known to or should be known by the Contractor. The Contractor shall repair any damage to those facilities, including those that are the property of a third party, resulting from failure to comply with the requirements of this contract or failure to exercise reasonable care in performing the work. If the Contractor fails or refuses to repair the damage promptly, the Contracting Officer may have the necessary work performed and charge the cost to the Contractor. (FAR 52.2369)C.Refer to FAR clause 52.236-7, "Permits and Responsibilities," which is included in General Conditions. A National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit is required for this project. The Contractor is considered an "operator" under the permit and has extensive responsibility for compliance with permit requirements. VA will make the permit application available at the (appropriate medical center) office. The apparent low bidder, contractor and affected subcontractors shall furnish all information and certifications that are required to comply with the permit process and permit requirements. Many of the permit requirements will be satisfied by completing construction as shown and specified. Some requirements involve the Contractor's method of operations and operations planning and the Contractor is responsible for employing best management practices. The affected activities often include, but are not limited to the following:-Designating areas for equipment maintenance and repair;-Providing waste receptacles at convenient locations and provide regular collection of wastes;-Locating equipment wash down areas on site, and provide appropriate control of wash-waters;-Providing protected storage areas for chemicals, paints, solvents, fertilizers, and other potentially toxic materials; and-Providing adequately maintained sanitary facilities.1.10 RESTORATION A.Remove, cut, alter, replace, patch and repair existing work as necessary to install new work. Except as otherwise shown or specified, do not cut, alter or remove any structural work, and do not disturb any ducts, plumbing, steam, gas, or electric work without approval of the COTR. Existing work to be altered or extended and that is found to be defective in any way, shall be reported to the COTR before it is disturbed. Materials and workmanship used in restoring work, shall conform in type and quality to that of original existing construction, except as otherwise shown or specified. B.Upon completion of contract, deliver work complete and undamaged. Existing work (walls, ceilings, partitions, floors, mechanical and electrical work, lawns, paving, roads, walks, etc.) disturbed or removed as a result of performing required new work, shall be patched, repaired, reinstalled, or replaced with new work, and refinished and left in as good condition as existed before commencing work. C.At Contractor's own expense, Contractor shall immediately restore to service and repair any damage caused by Contractor's workmen to existing piping and conduits, wires, cables, etc., of utility services or of fire protection systems and communications systems (including telephone) which are indicated on drawings and which are not scheduled for discontinuance or abandonment. D.Expense of repairs to such utilities and systems not shown on drawings or locations of which are unknown will be covered by adjustment to contract time and price in accordance with clause entitled "CHANGES" (FAR 52.2434 and VAAR 852.23688) and "DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS" (FAR 52.2362). 1.11 PHYSICAL DATA (NOT USED)1.12 LAYOUT OF WORK A.The Contractor shall lay out the work from Government established base lines and bench marks, indicated on the drawings, and shall be responsible for all measurements in connection with the layout. The Contractor shall furnish, at Contractor's own expense, all stakes, templates, platforms, equipment, tools, materials, and labor required to lay out any part of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for executing the work to the lines and grades that may be established or indicated by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall also be responsible for maintaining and preserving all stakes and other marks established by the Contracting Officer until authorized to remove them. If such marks are destroyed by the Contractor or through Contractor's negligence before their removal is authorized, the Contracting Officer may replace them and deduct the expense of the replacement from any amounts due or to become due to the Contractor. (FAR 52.23617)1.13 As-Built DrawingsA.The contractor shall maintain two full size sets of as-built drawings which will be kept current during construction of the project, to include all contract changes, modifications and clarifications.B.All variations shall be shown in the same general detail as used in the contract drawings. To insure compliance, as-built drawings shall be made available for the COTR's review, as often as requested.C.Contractor shall deliver two approved completed sets of as-built drawings to the COTR within 15 calendar days after each completed phase and after the acceptance of the project by the COTR.D.Paragraphs A, B, & C shall also apply to all shop drawings.1.14 USE OF ROADWAYSA.For hauling, use only established public roads and roads on Medical Center property and, when authorized by the COTR, such temporary roads which are necessary in the performance of contract work. Temporary roads shall be constructed by the Contractor at Contractor's expense. When necessary to cross curbing, sidewalks, or similar construction, they must be protected by wellconstructed bridges.B.When certain buildings (or parts of certain buildings) are required to be completed in advance of general date of completion, all roads leading thereto must be completed and available for use at time set for completion of such buildings or parts thereof. 1.15 TEMPORARY USE OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A.Use of new installed mechanical and electrical equipment to provide heat, ventilation, plumbing, light and power will be permitted subject to compliance with the following provisions: 1.Permission to use each unit or system must be given by COTR. If the equipment is not installed and maintained in accordance with the following provisions, the COTR will withdraw permission for use of the equipment. 2.Electrical installations used by the equipment shall be completed in accordance with the drawings and specifications to prevent damage to the equipment and the electrical systems, i.e. transformers, relays, circuit breakers, fuses, conductors, motor controllers and their overload elements shall be properly sized, coordinated and adjusted. Voltage supplied to each item of equipment shall be verified to be correct and it shall be determined that motors are not overloaded. The electrical equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned before using it and again immediately before final inspection including vacuum cleaning and wiping clean interior and exterior surfaces. 3.Units shall be properly lubricated, balanced, and aligned. Vibrations must be eliminated. 4.Automatic temperature control systems for preheat coils shall function properly and all safety controls shall function to prevent coil freezeup damage. 5.The air filtering system utilized shall be that which is designed for the system when complete, and all filter elements shall be replaced at completion of construction and prior to testing and balancing of system.6.All components of heat production and distribution system, metering equipment, condensate returns, and other auxiliary facilities used in temporary service shall be cleaned prior to use; maintained to prevent corrosion internally and externally during use; and cleaned, maintained and inspected prior to acceptance by the Government. Boilers, pumps, feedwater heaters and auxiliary equipment must be operated as a complete system and be fully maintained by operating personnel. Boiler water must be given complete and continuous chemical treatment. B.Prior to final inspection, the equipment or parts used which show wear and tear beyond normal, shall be replaced with identical replacements, at no additional cost to the Government. C.This paragraph shall not reduce the requirements of the mechanical and electrical specifications sections. 1.16 TEMPORARY USE OF EXISTING ELEVATORS A'.Use of existing elevators for handling building materials and Contractor's personnel will be permitted subject to following provisions: 1.Contractor makes all arrangements with the COTR for use of elevators. The COTR will ascertain that elevators are in proper condition. Personnel for operating elevators will not be provided by the Department of Veterans Affairs. 2.Contractor covers and provides maximum protection of following elevator components: a.Entrance jambs, heads soffits and threshold plates. b.Entrance columns, canopy, return panels and inside surfaces of car enclosure walls. c.Finish flooring. ernment will accept hoisting ropes of elevator and rope of each speed governor if they are worn under normal operation. However, if these ropes are damaged by action of foreign matter such as sand, lime, grit, stones, etc., during temporary use, they shall be removed and replaced by new hoisting ropes. 4.If brake lining of elevators are excessively worn or damaged during temporary use, they shall be removed and replaced by new brake lining. 5.All parts of main controller, starter, relay panel, selector, etc., worn or damaged during temporary use shall be removed and replaced with new parts, if recommended by elevator inspector after elevator is released by Contractor. 6.Place elevator in condition equal, less normal wear, to that existing at time it was placed in service of Contractor as approved by Contracting Officer. 1.17 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES A.The Government shall make all reasonably required amounts of utilities available to the Contractor from existing outlets and supplies, as specified in the contract. The Contractor shall carefully conserve any utilities furnished without charge. B.The Contractor, at Contractor's expense and in a workmanlike manner satisfactory to the Contracting Officer, shall install and maintain all necessary temporary connections and distribution lines. Before final acceptance of the work by the Government, the Contractor shall remove all the temporary connections, distribution lines, meters, and associated paraphernalia. C.Heat: Furnish temporary heat necessary to prevent injury to work and materials through dampness and cold. Use of open salamanders or any temporary heating devices which may be fire hazards or may smoke and damage finished work, will not be permitted. Maintain minimum temperatures as specified for various materials: 1.Obtain heat by connecting to Medical Center heating distribution system. a.Steam is available at no cost to Contractor. D.Electricity (for Construction and Testing): Furnish all temporary electric services. 1.Obtain electricity by connecting to the Medical Center electrical distribution system. Electricity for all other uses is available at no cost to the Contractor. E.Water (for Construction and Testing): Furnish temporary water service.1.Obtain water by connecting to the Medical Center water distribution system. Provide reduced pressure backflow preventer at each connection. Water is available at no cost to the Contractor. 2.Maintain connections, pipe, fittings and fixtures and conserve wateruse so none is wasted. Failure to stop leakage or other wastes will be cause for revocation (at COTR's discretion) of use of water from Medical Center's system. 1.18 NEW TELEPHONE EQUIPMENTThe contractor shall coordinate with the work of installation of telephone equipment by others. This work shall be completed before the building is turned over to VA.1.19 TESTS A.Pretest mechanical and electrical equipment and systems and make corrections required for proper operation of such systems before requesting final tests. Final test will not be conducted unless pretested. B.Conduct final tests required in various sections of specifications in presence of an authorized representative of the Contracting Officer. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, instruments, and forms, to conduct and record such tests. C.Mechanical and electrical systems shall be balanced, controlled and coordinated. A system is defined as the entire complex which must be coordinated to work together during normal operation to produce results for which the system is designed. For example, air conditioning supply air is only one part of entire system which provides comfort conditions for a building. Other related components are return air, exhaust air, steam, chilled water, refrigerant, hot water, controls and electricity, etc. Another example of a complex which involves several components of different disciplines is a boiler installation. Efficient and acceptable boiler operation depends upon the coordination and proper operation of fuel, combustion air, controls, steam, feedwater, condensate and other related components. D.All related components as defined above shall be functioning when any system component is tested. Tests shall be completed within a reasonably short period of time during which operating and environmental conditions remain reasonably constant. E.Individual test result of any component, where required, will only be accepted when submitted with the test results of related components and of the entire system. 1.20 INSTRUCTIONS A.Contractor shall furnish Maintenance and Operating manuals and verbal instructions when required by the various sections of the specifications and as hereinafter specified. B.Manuals: Maintenance and operating manuals (four copies each) for each separate piece of equipment shall be delivered to the COTR coincidental with the delivery of the equipment to the job site. Manuals shall be complete, detailed guides for the maintenance and operation of equipment. They shall include complete information necessary for starting, adjusting, maintaining in continuous operation for long periods of time and dismantling and reassembling of the complete units and subassembly components. Manuals shall include an index covering all component parts clearly crossreferenced to diagrams and illustrations. Illustrations shall include "exploded" views showing and identifying each separate item. Emphasis shall be placed on the use of special tools and instruments. The function of each piece of equipment, component, accessory and control shall be clearly and thoroughly explained. All necessary precautions for the operation of the equipment and the reason for each precaution shall be clearly set forth. Manuals must reference the exact model, style and size of the piece of equipment and system being furnished. Manuals referencing equipment similar to but of a different model, style, and size than that furnished will not be accepted. C.Instructions: Contractor shall provide qualified, factorytrained manufacturers' representatives to give detailed instructions to assigned Department of Veterans Affairs personnel in the operation and complete maintenance for each piece of equipment. All such training will be at the job site. These requirements are more specifically detailed in the various technical sections. Instructions for different items of equipment that are component parts of a complete system, shall be given in an integrated, progressive manner. All instructors for every piece of component equipment in a system shall be available until instructions for all items included in the system have been completed. This is to assure proper instruction in the operation of interrelated systems. All instruction periods shall be at such times as scheduled by the COTR and shall be considered concluded only when the COTR is satisfied in regard to complete and thorough coverage. The Department of Veterans Affairs reserves the right to request the removal of, and substitution for, any instructor who, in the opinion of the COTR, does not demonstrate sufficient qualifications in accordance with requirements for instructors above. 1.21 RELOCATED EQUIPMENT & ITEMS A.Contractor shall disconnect, dismantle as necessary, remove and reinstall in new location, all existing equipment and items indicated by symbol "R" or otherwise shown to be relocated by the Contractor. B.Perform relocation of such equipment or items at such times and in such a manner as directed by the COTR. C.Suitably cap existing service lines, such as steam, condensate return, water, drain, gas, air, vacuum and/or electrical, whenever such lines are disconnected from equipment to be relocated. Remove abandoned lines in finished areas and cap as specified herein before under paragraph "Abandoned Lines". D.Provide all mechanical and electrical service connections, fittings, fastenings and any other materials necessary for assembly and installation of relocated equipment; and leave such equipment in proper operating condition. E.All service lines such as noted above for relocated equipment shall be in place at point of relocation ready for use before any existing equipment is disconnected. Make relocated existing equipment ready for operation or use immediately after reinstallation. 1.22 SAFETY SIGN A.Provide a Safety Sign where directed by COTR. Face of sign shall be 19 mm (3/4 inch) thick exterior grade plywood. Provide two 100 mm by 100 mm (four by four inch) posts extending full height of sign and 900 mm (three feet) into ground. Set bottom of sign level at 1200 mm (four feet) above ground. B.Paint all surfaces of Safety Sign and posts with one prime coat and two coats of white gloss paint. Letters and design shall be painted with gloss paint of colors noted. C.Maintain sign and remove it when directed by COTR. D.Standard Detail Drawing Number SD10000-02(Found on VA TIL) of safety sign showing required legend and other characteristics of sign is shown on the drawings. E.Post the number of accident free days on a daily basis. 1.23 photographic documentation A.During the construction period through completion, provide photographic documentation of construction progress and at selected milestones including electronic indexing, navigation, storage and remote access to the documentation, as per these specifications. The commercial photographer or the subcontractor used for this work shall meet the following qualifications: 1.Demonstrable minimum experience of three (3) years in operation providing documentation and advanced indexing/navigation systems including a representative portfolio of construction projects of similar type, size, duration and complexity as the Project.2. Demonstrable ability to service projects throughout North America, which shall be demonstrated by a representative portfolio of active projects of similar type, size, duration and complexity as the Project.B.Photographic documentation elements:1.Each digital image shall be taken with a professional grade camera with minimum size of 6 megapixels (MP) capable of producing 200x250mm (8 x 10 inch) prints with a minimum of 2272 x 1704 pixels and 400x500mm (16 x 20 inch) prints with a minimum 2592 x 1944 pixels. 2. Indexing and navigation system shall utilize actual AUTOCAD construction drawings, making such drawings interactive on an on-line interface. For all documentation referenced herein, indexing and navigation must be organized by both time (date-stamped) and location throughout the project.3. Documentation shall combine indexing and navigation system with inspection-grade digital photography designed to capture actual conditions throughout construction and at critical milestones. Documentation shall be accessible on-line through use of an internet connection. Documentation shall allow for secure multiple-user access, simultaneously, on-line.4. Construction progress for all trades shall be tracked at pre-determined intervals, but not less than once every thirty (30) calendar days (“Progressions”). Progression documentation shall track both the exterior and interior construction of the building. Exterior Progressions shall track 360 degrees around the site and each building. Interior Progressions shall track interior improvements beginning when stud work commences and continuing until Project completion.5. As-built conditions of mechanical, electrical, plumbing and all other systems shall be documented post-inspection and pre-insulation, sheet rock or dry wall installation. This process shall include all finished systems located in the walls and ceilings of all buildings at the Project. Overlapping photographic techniques shall be used to insure maximum coverage. Indexing and navigation accomplished through interactive architectural drawings.6. NOT USED.7. As-built finished conditions of the interior of each building including floors, ceilings and walls shall be documented at certificate of occupancy or equivalent, or just prior to occupancy, or both, as directed by the COTR. Overlapping photographic techniques shall be used to insure maximum coverage. Indexing and navigation accomplished through interactive architectural drawings.8. Miscellaneous events that occur during any Contractor site visit, or events captured by the Department of Veterans Affairs independently, shall be dated, labeled and inserted into a Section in the navigation structure entitled “Slideshows,” allowing this information to be stored in the same “place” as the formal scope.9. Customizable project-specific digital photographic documentation of other details or milestones. Indexing and navigation accomplished through interactive architectural plans.10. NOT USED.11. Weekly (21 Max) Site Progressions - Photographic documentation capturing the project at different stages of construction. These progressions shall capture underground utilities, excavation, grading, backfill, landscaping and road construction throughout the duration of the project.12. Regular (8 max) interior progressions of all walls of the entire project to begin at time of substantial framed or as directed by the COTR through to completion.13. NOT USED.14. Detailed Interior exact built overlapping photos of the entire building to include documentation of all mechanical, electrical and plumbing systems in every wall and ceiling, to be conducted after rough-ins are complete, just prior to insulation and or drywall, or as directed by COTR.15. Finished detailed Interior exact built overlapping photos of all walls, ceilings, and floors to be scheduled by COTR prior to occupancy.16. In event a greater or lesser number of images than specified above are required by the COTR, adjustment in contract price will be made in accordance with clause entitled "CHANGES" (FAR 52.2434 and VAAR 852.23688). C.Images shall be taken by a commercial photographer and must show distinctly, at as large a scale as possible, all parts of work embraced in the picture.D.Coordination of photo shoots is accomplished through COTR. Contractor shall also attend construction team meetings as necessary. Contractor’s operations team shall provide regular updates regarding the status of the documentation, including photo shoots concluded, the availability of new Progressions or Exact-Builts viewable on-line and anticipated future shoot dates.E. Contractor shall provide all on-line domain/web hosting, security measures, and redundant server back-up of the documentation.F. Contractor shall provide technical support related to using the system or service. G.Upon completion of the project, final copies of the documentation (the “Permanent Record”) with the indexing and navigation system embedded (and active) shall be provided in an electronic media format, typically a DVD or external hard-drive. 1.24 FINAL ELEVATION Digital Images (NOT USED)1.25 Construction safety Requirements REFERENCESThe publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)ASSE/SAFE A10.32 (2004) Fall ProtectionASSE/SAFE A10.3 (2001; R 2005) Protection of the Public on or Adjacent to Construction SitesASSE/SAFE Z359.1 (2007) Safety Requirements for Personal Fall Arrest Systems, Subsystems and ComponentsASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)ASME B30.22 Articulating Boom CranesASME B30.3 (2004) Construction Tower CranesASME B30.5 (2007) Mobile and Locomotive CranesNATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)NFPA 10 (2007; Errata 2007; AMD 1 2007) Standard for Portable Fire ExtinguishersNFPA 241 (2009) Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition OperationsNFPA 306 (2009) Standard for Control of Gas Hazards in VesselsNFPA 51B (2009) Standard for Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot WorkNFPA 70 (2008; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical Code - 2008 EditionNFPA 70E (2009; Errata 2009) Standard for Electrical Safety in the WorkplaceU.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)10 CFR 20 Standards for Protection Against Radiation29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards29 CFR 1910.146 Permit-required Confined Spaces29 CFR 1919 Gear Certification29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction29 CFR 1926.500 Fall ProtectionVHA Construction Safety Guide: web link ()SAFETY PLANSafety plan must be submitted and approved prior to starting any and all work activities.Safety Plan must include the following:Preconstruction SubmittalsAccident Prevention Plan (APP)Job Hazard Analysis (JHA)Crane Critical Lift PlanProof of qualification for Crane OperatorsWest Virginia Crane Operators LicenseTest ReportsOSHA 10 and 30 Hour CardsREPORTSSubmit reports as their incidence occurs, in accordance with the requirements of the paragraph entitled, "Reports."Accident ReportsCrane ReportsConfined Space Entry PermitHot work permitSmoke/Fire Wall Penetration PermitTrenching PermitLicense CertificatesCertificate of Compliance (Crane): Submit one copy of each permit/certificate attached to each Daily Quality Control Report.Machinery & Mechanized Equipment Certification FormDEFINITIONSCompetent Person for Fall Protection. A person who is capable of identifying hazardous or dangerous conditions in the personal fall arrest system or any component thereof, as well as their application and use with related equipment, and has the authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate the hazards of falling.High Visibility Accident. Any mishap which may generate publicity and/or high visibility.Medical Treatment. Treatment administered by a physician or by registered professional personnel under the standing orders of a physician. Medical treatment does not include first aid treatment even through provided by a physician or registered personnel.Recordable Injuries or Illnesses. Any work-related injury or illness that results in:Death, regardless of the time between the injury and death, or the length of the illness; Days away from work (any time lost after day of injury/illness onset);Restricted work;Transfer to another job;Medical treatment beyond first aid;Loss of consciousness; orA significant injury or illness diagnosed by a physician or other licensed health care professional, even if it did not result in (1) through (6) above.REGULATORY REQUIREMENTSIn addition to the detailed requirements included in the provisions of this contract, comply with the most recent addition of the VHA Construction Safety Guidebook, and federal, state, and local, laws, ordinances, criteria, rules and regulations. Submit matters of interpretation of standards to the appropriate administrative agency for resolution before starting work. Where the requirements of this specification, applicable laws, criteria, ordinances, regulations, and referenced documents vary, the most stringent requirements govern.SITE QUALIFICATIONS, DUTIES AND MEETINGSSite Safety and Health Officer (SSHO): The contractor shall provide a Safety oversight team that includes a minimum of one (1) Competent Person at each project site to function as the Safety and Health Officer (SSHO). The SSHO shall be at the work site at all times, unless specified differently in the contract, to perform safety and occupational health management, surveillance, inspections, and safety enforcement for the Contractor, and their training, experience, and qualifications shall be as required by VHA Construction Safety Guide. A Competent Personal shall be provided for all of the hazards identified in the Contractor's Safety and Health Program in accordance with the accepted Accident Prevention Plan, and shall be on-site at all times when the work that presents the hazards associated with their professional expertise is being performed. The credentials of the Competent Persons(s) shall be approved by the Contracting Officer in consultation with the Safety Office.The Contractor Quality Control (QC) person can be the SSHO on this project.The SSHO, as a minimum, must have completed the 30-hour OSHA Construction Safety class. The SSHO is also required to have five (5) years of construction industry safety experience or three (3) years of construction safety experience if in possession of a Certified Safety Profession (CSP) or safety and health petent Person for Confined Space Entry. Provide a competent person for confined space meeting the definition and requirements of VHA Construction Safety Guide. All confined space and enclosed space work shall comply with 1.6F.3.Crane Operators. Meet the crane operators’ requirements in the VHA Construction Safety Guide. In addition, for mobile cranes with Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) rated capacitates of 50,000 pounds or greater, designate crane operators as qualified by a source that qualifies crane operators (i.e., union, a government agency, or/and organization that tests and qualifies crane operators). Provide proof of current qualification.Personnel DutiesSite Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)Conduct daily safety and health inspections and maintain a written log which includes area/operation inspected, date of inspection, identified hazards, recommended corrective actions, estimated and actual dates of corrections. Attach safety inspection logs to the Contractors' daily quality control report.Conduct mishap investigations and complete required reports. Maintain the OSHA Form 300 and Daily Production reports for prime and sub-contractors.Maintain applicable safety reference material on the job site.Attend the pre-construction conference, pre-work meetings including preparatory inspection meeting, and periodic in-progress meetings.Implement and enforce accepted APPS and JHAs.Maintain a safety and health deficiency tracking system that monitors outstanding deficiencies until resolution. Post a list of unresolved safety and health deficiencies on the safety bulletin board.Maintain a list of hazardous chemicals on site and their material safety data sheets.ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP)Use a qualified person to prepare the written site-specific APP. Prepare the APP in accordance with the format and requirements of the VHA Construction Safety Guide and as supplemented herein. Cover all paragraph and subparagraph elements in the VHA Construction Safety Guide.Specific requirements for some of the APP elements are described below. The APP shall be job-specific and address any unusual or unique aspects of the project or activity for which it is written. The APP shall interface with the Contractor's overall safety and health program. Include any portions of the Contractor’s overall safety and health program referenced in the APP in the applicable APP element and made site-specific. The Government considers the Prime Contractor to be the "controlling authority" for all work site safety and health of the subcontractors. Contractors are responsible for informing their subcontractors of the safety provisions under the terms of the contract and the penalties for noncompliance, coordinating the work to prevent one craft from interfering with or creating hazardous working conditions for other crafts, and inspecting subcontractor operations to ensure that accident prevention responsibilities are being carried out. The APP shall be signed by the person and firm (senior person) preparing the APP, the Contractor, the on-site superintendent, the designated site safety and health officer, the Contractor Quality control Manager, and any designated CSP and /or CIH. Submit the APP to the Contracting Officer 15 calendar days prior to the date of the preconstruction conference for acceptance. Work cannot proceed without an accepted APP. Once accepted by the Contracting Officer, the APP and attachments will be enforced as part of the contract. Disregarding the provisions of this contract or the accepted APP will be cause for stopping of work, at the discretion of the Contracting Officer, until the matter has been rectified.Once work begins, changes to the accepted APP shall be made with the knowledge and concurrence of the Contracting Officer, project superintendent, SSHO and quality control manager. Should any severe hazard exposure, i.e. imminent danger, become evident, stop work in the area, secure the area, and develop a plan to remove the exposure and control the hazard. Notify the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of discovery. Eliminate/remove the hazard. In the interim, take all necessary action to restore and maintain safe working conditions in order to safeguard onsite personnel, visitors, the public (as defined by ASSE/SAFE A10.34) and the environment.Copies of the accepted plan will be maintained at the Contracting Officer's office and at the job site. Continuously reviewed and amended the APP, as necessary, throughout the life of the contract. Incorporate unusual or high-hazard activities not identified in the original APP as they are discovered.VHA Construction Safety Guide Contents: In addition to the requirements outlined in the VHA Construction Safety Guide, the following is required:Names and qualifications (resumes including education, training, experience and certifications) of all site safety and health personnel designated to perform work on this project to include the designated site safety and health officer and other competent and qualified personnel to be used such as CSPs, CIHs, STSs, CHSTs. Specify the duties of each position.Qualifications of competent and of qualified persons. As a minimum, designate and submit qualifications of competent persons for each of the following major areas: excavation; scaffolding; fall protection; hazardous energy; confined space; health hazard recognition, evaluation and control of chemical, physical and biological agents; personal protective equipment and clothing to include selection, use and maintenance.Confined Space Entry Plan. Develop a confined and/or enclosed space entry plan in accordance with VHA Construction Safety Guide, applicable OSHA standards, 29 CFR 1910, 29 CFR 1915, and 29 CFR 1926, OSHA Directive 2.100, and any other federal, state and local regulatory requirements identified in this contract. Identify the qualified person's name and qualifications, training, and experience. Delineate the qualified person’s authority to direct work stoppage in the event of hazardous conditions. Include procedure for rescue by contractor personnel and the coordination with emergency responders. (If there is no confined space work, include a statement that no confined space work exists and none will be created.)Crane Critical Lift Plan. Prepare and sign weight handling critical lift plans for lifts over 75 percent of the capacity of the crane or hoist (or lifts over 50 percent of the capacity of a barge mounted mobile crane’s hoists) at any radius of lift; lifts involving more than one crane or hoist; lifts of personnel; and lifts involving non-routine rigging or operation, sensitive equipment, or unusual safety risks. Submit 15 calendar days prior to on-site work and include the requirements of VHA Construction Safety Guide, and the following:For lifts of personnel, demonstrate compliance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.550(g.Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Program Documentation. The program documentation shall be site specific and address all fall hazards in the work place and during different phases of construction. Address how to protect and prevent workers from falling to lower levels when they are exposed to fall hazards above 6 feet. A qualified person for fall protection shall prepare and sign the program documentation. Include fall protection and prevention systems, equipment and methods employed for every phase of work, responsibilities, assisted rescue, self-rescue and evacuation procedures, training requirements, and monitoring methods. Revise the Fall Protection and Prevention Program documentation every six months, reflecting any changes during the course of construction due to changes in personnel, equipment, systems or work habits. Keep and maintain the accepted Fall Protection and Prevention Program documentation at the job site for the duration of the project. Include the Fall Protection and Prevention Program documentation in the Accident Prevention Plan (APP).Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan. The safety and health aspects of asbestos work, prepared in accordance with Section 02 82 11, TRADITIONAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENTSite Demolition Plan. The safety and health aspects prepared in accordance with Section 02 41 00, DEMOLITION and referenced sources. Include engineering survey as applicable.JOB HAZARD ANALYSIS (JHA) The Job Hazard Analysis (JHA) format shall be performed in accordance with OSHA 3071 (R2002) () and the requirements of chapters 2 through 17 of the VHA Construction Safety Guide. Submit the JHA for review at least 15 calendar days prior to the start of each phase. Format subsequent JHAs as amendments to the APP. The analysis should be used during daily inspections to ensure the implementation and effectiveness of the activity's safety and health controls. The JHA list will be reviewed periodically (at least monthly) at the Contractor supervisory safety meeting and updated as necessary when procedures, scheduling, or hazards change.Develop the activity hazard analyses using the project schedule as the basis for the activities performed. Any activities listed on the project schedule may require a JHA. The JHAs will be developed by the contractor, supplier or subcontractor and provided to the prime contractor for submittal to the Contracting Officer. A JHA shall be prepared for all activities comprising:Jobs with the highest injury or illness rates;Jobs with potential to cause severe or disabling injuries or illness, even if no previous history of accidents;Jobs in which one simple human error could lend to severe accident or injury;Jobs that are new to operators or have undergone changes in procedures and processes;All jobs applicable from VHA Construction Safety Guide for which MAJOR OSHA VIOLATIONS as noted in the Guide text.CONSTRUCTION AND/OR OTHER WORKComply with VHA Construction Safety Guide, NFPA 241, the APP, the AHA, Federal and/or State OSHA regulations, and other related submittals and activity fire and safety regulations. The most stringent standard prevails.Hazardous Material UseEach hazardous material must receive approval from the Contracting Office or their designated representative prior to being brought onto the job site or prior to any other use in connection with this contract. Allow a minimum of 10 working days for processing of the request for use of a hazardous material.Hazardous Material ExclusionsNotwithstanding any other hazardous material used in this contract, radioactive materials or instruments capable of producing ionizing/non-ionizing radiation (with the exception of radioactive material and devices used in accordance with VHA Construction Safety Guide, such as nuclear density meters for compaction testing and laboratory equipment with radioactive sources) as well as materials which contain asbestos, mercury or polychlorinated biphenyls, di-isocynates, lead-based paint are prohibited. The Contracting Officer, upon written request by the Contractor, may consider exceptions to the use of any of the above excluded materials. The Radiation Safety Officer (RSO) must be notified prior to excepted items of radioactive material and devices being brought on base.Unforeseen Hazardous MaterialThe design should have identified materials such as PCB, lead paint, and friable and non-friable asbestos and other OSHA regulated chemicals (i.e. 29 CFR Part 1910.1000). If [additional] material, not indicated, that may be hazardous to human health upon disturbance during construction operations is encountered, stop that portion of work and notify the Contracting Officer immediately. Within 14 calendar days the Government will determine if the material is hazardous. If material is not hazardous or poses no danger, the Government will direct the Contractor to proceed without change. If the material is hazardous and handling of the material is necessary to accomplish the work, the Government will issue a modification pursuant to "FAR 52.243-4, Changes" and "FAR 52.236-2, Differing Site Conditions."WORK IN CONFINED SPACESComply with the requirements of the VHA Construction Safety Guide, OSHA 29 CFR 1910.146 and OSHA 29 CFR 1926.21(b)(6). Any potential for a hazard in the confined space requires a permit system to be used. NOTE: The Contractor shall submit documentation, before starting work, that Contractor employees entering confined spaces have received confined space training or re-training within the last 12 months.Entry Procedures.Obtain confined space entry permit from the VA Fire Department 1.26 DAVIS-BACON WAGE DETERMINATION:The following Department of Labor wage determination shall apply to this Solicitation and any resultant contract: WV130035 dated 1/4/13. - E N D General Decision Number: WV130035 01/04/2013 WV35Superseded General Decision Number: WV20120041State: West VirginiaConstruction Type: BuildingCounty: Berkeley County in West Virginia.Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/04/2013 ASBE0024-003 10/01/2010 Rates FringesASBESTOS WORKER/HEAT & FROST INSULATOR......................................................$ 31.79 14.73------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ BOIL0667-005 10/01/2011 Rates FringesBOILERMAKER..................................................$ 36.91 19.64------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BRWV0009-007 12/01/2011 Rates FringesTILE SETTER........................................................$ 28.17 17.56------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BRWV0015-007 12/01/2011 Rates FringesBRICKLAYER……………………………….......................$ 25.58 14.84------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BRWV0015-011 12/01/2011 Rates FringesMASON - STONE……………………………...................$ 25.58 14.84---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BRWV0015-014 12/01/2011 Rates FringesTILE FINISHER....................................................$ 21.01 13.86------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ CARP1024-007 05/01/2012 Rates FringesCARPENTER (Including Drywall Finishing/Taping, Drywall Hanging and Form Work).................................$ 25.95 13.35----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- CARP1024-012 05/01/2012 Rates FringesMILLWRIGHT.....................................................$ 26.55 13.35------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ ELEC0307-012 06/03/2012 Rates FringesELECTRICIAN (Including Low Voltage Wiring)...............................................$ 30.00 15.05---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ELEV0100-001 01/01/2012 Rates FringesELEVATOR MECHANIC......................................$ 39.70 23.535+a+bPAID HOLIDAYS: a. New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Vetern's Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving, and Christmas Day. b. Employer contributes 8% of regular hourly rate to vacation pay credit for employee who has worked in business more than 5 years; 6% for less than 5 years' service.----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ENGI0132-009 12/01/2012 Rates FringesPOWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR: GROUP 1......................................................$ 34.01 17.98 GROUP 2......................................................$ 33.66 17.98 GROUP 3......................................................$ 32.66 17.98 GROUP 4......................................................$ 22.16 17.98 GROUP 1: All Friction Cranes, Tower Cranes and all Cranes with 180 ft. or more of boom including mast and jibs or lifting capacity of 100 tons or more and hoists with 30,000 pound line pull or more, Mechanics with tools with 3/4 inch drive and below GROUP 2: Operating Cranes and Tower Cranes with a lifting capacity of 15 tons and over GROUP 3: Bulldozer, Forklift, Non-Farm Type Tractor, all other Cranes, all other Mechanics GROUP 4: Bobcat/Skid Steer/Skid Loader, Farm Type Tractor, Loader---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- IRON0549-007 12/01/2012 Rates FringesIRONWORKER (Ornamental and Reinforcing)......................................................$ 30.00 16.49---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- IRON0568-011 05/01/2012 Rates FringesIRONWORKER (Sheeting and Structural)........................................................$ 26.78 15.47---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LABO0379-009 12/01/2012 Rates FringesLABORER Group 1.........................................................$ 20.58 13.45 Group 2.........................................................$ 20.94 13.45 Group 3.........................................................$ 21.37 13.45LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Carpenter Tender, Common or General, Demolition GROUP 2: Concrete Saw (Hand held/Walk Behind), Mason Tender-Brick, Mason Tender-Cement/Concrete, Mortar Mixer, Scaffold Builder (Brick and Masonry), Skytrak Forklift OperatorGROUP 3: Pipelayer---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LABO9999-009 09/06/2012 Rates FringesLABORER Power Tool Operator...................................$ 22.73 13.07---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- PLAS0039-002 07/01/2012 Rates FringesCEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER………..$ 25.53 12.35---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- PLUM0486-009 04/01/2012 Rates FringesPLUMBER...........................................................$ 36.425 16.09---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ROOF0034-003 05/01/2007 Rates FringesROOFER..............................................................$ 19.35 7.75---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- SHEE0100-006 07/01/2011 Rates FringesSHEET METAL WORKER (Includes HVAC Duct Installation) 0-40 miles from City Hall, Cumberland, Maryland...............................$ 24.06 16.07 41-65 miles from City Hall, Cumberland, Maryland…………………....$ 25.76 16.12 66+ miles from City Hall, Cumberland, Maryland........................$ 26.73 16.15---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- SUWV2012-032 08/13/2012 Rates FringesGLAZIER...................................................$ 23.20 4.02 OPERATOR: Backhoe............................$ 21.60 7.66 OPERATOR: Excavator.........................$ 23.27 11.95 PAINTER: Brush, Roller and Spray.......................................................$ 22.33 9.95 PIPEFITTER............................................$ 25.76 19.46 SPRINKLER FITTER (Fire Sprinklers)..............................................$ 30.96 15.81---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- TEAM0175-005 10/01/2012 Rates FringesTruck drivers: GROUP 2............................................$ 24.98 14.04 GROUP 3............................................$ 25.13 14.04TRUCK DRIVER CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 2 - Dump Truck (Up to 5 cu. yds.), Water Tank Truck (Straight) GROUP 3 - Dump Truck (5 cu. yds. & over), Tractor Haul Truck, Water Tank Truck (Semi)----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental.=================================================================================== Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)).----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is union or non-union.Union IdentifiersAn identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" denotes that the union classification and rate have found to be prevailing for that classification. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2011. The first four letters , PLUM, indicate the international union and the four-digit number, 0198, that follows indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable , i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. The date, 07/01/2011, following these characters is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate/collective bargaining agreement which would be July 1, 2011 in the above example.Union prevailing wage rates will be updated to reflect any changes in the collective bargaining agreements governing the rates.0000/9999: weighted union wage rates will be published annually each January.Non-Union IdentifiersClassifications listed under an "SU" identifier were derived from survey data by computing average rates and are not union rates; however, the data used in computing these rates may include both union and non-union data. Example: SULA2004-007 5/13/2010. SU indicates the rates are not union majority rates, LA indicates the State of Louisiana; 2004 is the year of the survey; and 007 is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. A 1993 or later date, 5/13/2010, indicates the classifications and rates under that identifier were issued as a General Wage Determination on that date.Survey wage rates will remain in effect and will not change until a new survey is conducted. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be:* an existing published wage determination* a survey underlying a wage determination* a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter* a conformance (additional classification and rate) rulingOn survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed.With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 202102.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue.3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 202104.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final.================================================================END OF GENERAL DECISIONSECTION 01 33 23SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 1-1.Refer to Articles titled SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR CONSTRUCTION (FAR 52.23621) and, SPECIAL NOTES (VAAR 852.236-91), in GENERAL CONDITIONS.1-2.For the purposes of this contract, samples, test reports, certificates, and manufacturers' literature and data shall also be subject to the previously referenced requirements. The following text refers to all items collectively as SUBMITTALS.1-3.Submit for approval, all of the items specifically mentioned under the separate sections of the specification, with information sufficient to evidence full compliance with contract requirements. Materials, fabricated articles and the like to be installed in permanent work shall equal those of approved submittals. After an item has been approved, no change in brand or make will be permitted unless:A.Satisfactory written evidence is presented to, and approved by Contracting Officer, that manufacturer cannot make scheduled delivery of approved item or;B.Item delivered has been rejected and substitution of a suitable item is an urgent necessity or;C.Other conditions become apparent which indicates approval of such substitute item to be in best interest of the Government.1-4.Forward submittals in sufficient time to permit proper consideration and approval action by Government. Submission shall be timed to assure adequate lead time for procurement of contract required items. Delays attributable to untimely and rejected submittals will not serve as a basis for extending contract time for completion.1-5.Submittals will be reviewed for compliance with contract requirements by ArchitectEngineer, and action thereon will be taken by COTR on behalf of the Contracting Officer.1-6.Upon receipt of submittals, ArchitectEngineer will assign a file number thereto. Contractor, in any subsequent correspondence, shall refer to this file and identification number to expedite replies relative to previously approved or disapproved submittals.1-7.The Government reserves the right to require additional submittals, whether or not particularly mentioned in this contract. If additional submittals beyond those required by the contract are furnished pursuant to request therefor by Contracting Officer, adjustment in contract price and time will be made in accordance with Articles titled CHANGES (FAR 52.2434) and CHANGES SUPPLEMENT (VAAR 852.23688) of the GENERAL CONDITIONS.1-8.Schedules called for in specifications and shown on shop drawings shall be submitted for use and information of Department of Veterans Affairs and ArchitectEngineer. However, the Contractor shall assume responsibility for coordinating and verifying schedules. The Contracting Officer and Architect Engineer assumes no responsibility for checking schedules or layout drawings for exact sizes, exact numbers and detailed positioning of items.1-9.Submittals must be submitted by Contractor only and shipped prepaid. Contracting Officer assumes no responsibility for checking quantities or exact numbers included in such submittals. A.Submit samples required by Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES, in quadruplicate. Submit other samples in single units unless otherwise specified. Submit shop drawings, schedules, manufacturers' literature and data, and certificates in quadruplicate, except where a greater number is specified.B.Submittals will receive consideration only when covered by a transmittal letter signed by Contractor. Letter shall be sent via first class mail and shall contain the list of items, name of Medical Center, name of Contractor, contract number, applicable specification paragraph numbers, applicable drawing numbers (and other information required for exact identification of location for each item), manufacturer and brand, ASTM or Federal Specification Number (if any) and such additional information as may be required by specifications for particular item being furnished. In addition, catalogs shall be marked to indicate specific items submitted for approval.1.A copy of letter must be enclosed with items, and any items received without identification letter will be considered "unclaimed goods" and held for a limited time only.2.Each sample, certificate, manufacturers' literature and data shall be labeled to indicate the name and location of the Medical Center, name of Contractor, manufacturer, brand, contract number and ASTM or Federal Specification Number as applicable and location(s) on project.3.Required certificates shall be signed by an authorized representative of manufacturer or supplier of material, and by Contractor. C.If submittal samples have been disapproved, resubmit new samples as soon as possible after notification of disapproval. Such new samples shall be marked "Resubmitted Sample" in addition to containing other previously specified information required on label and in transmittal letter.D.Approved samples will be kept on file by the COTR at the site until completion of contract, at which time such samples will be delivered to Contractor as Contractor's property. Where noted in technical sections of specifications, approved samples in good condition may be used in their proper locations in contract work. At completion of contract, samples that are not approved will be returned to Contractor only upon request and at Contractor's expense. Such request should be made prior to completion of the contract. Disapproved samples that are not requested for return by Contractor will be discarded after completion of contract.E.Submittal drawings (shop, erection or setting drawings) and schedules, required for work of various trades, shall be checked before submission by technically qualified employees of Contractor for accuracy, completeness and compliance with contract requirements. These drawings and schedules shall be stamped and signed by Contractor certifying to such check.1.For each drawing required, submit one legible photographic paper or vellum reproducible.2.Reproducible shall be full size.3.Each drawing shall have marked thereon, proper descriptive title, including Medical Center location, project number, manufacturer's number, reference to contract drawing number, detail Section Number, and Specification Section Number.4.A space 120 mm by 125 mm (43/4 by 5 inches) shall be reserved on each drawing to accommodate approval or disapproval stamp.5.Submit drawings, ROLLED WITHIN A MAILING TUBE, fully protected for shipment.6.One reproducible print of approved or disapproved shop drawings will be forwarded to Contractor.7.When work is directly related and involves more than one trade, shop drawings shall be submitted to ArchitectEngineer under one cover.1-10.Samples ,shop drawings, test reports, certificates and manufacturers' literature and data, shall be submitted for approval to EBA Ernest Bland Associates, P.C. (ArchitectEngineer) 802 Sligo Avenue(A/E P.O. Address)Silver Spring, MD 20910(City, State and Zip Code)1-11.At the time of transmittal to the Architect-Engineer, the Contractor shall also send a copy of the complete submittal directly to the Contracting Officer and COR.1-12.Samples for approval shall be sent to ArchitectEngineer, in care of Contracting Officer at: VA Medical Center,510 Butler Avenue, Bldg. 308BMartinsburg, WV 25405 E N D SECTION 01 42 19REFERENCE STANDARDS PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONThis section specifies the availability and source of references and standards specified in the project manual under paragraphs APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS and/or shown on the drawings.1.2 AVAILABILITY OF SPECIFICATIONS LISTED IN THE GSA INDEX OF FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARDS AND COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS FPMR PART 101-29 (FAR?52.211-1) (AUG?1998)A.The GSA Index of Federal Specifications, Standards and Commercial Item Descriptions, FPMR Part 101-29 and copies of specifications, standards, and commercial item descriptions cited in the solicitation may be obtained for a fee by submitting a request to – GSA Federal Supply Service, Specifications Section, Suite 8100, 470 East L’Enfant Plaza, SW, Washington, DC 20407, Telephone (202) 619-8925, Facsimile (202) 619-8978.B.If the General Services Administration, Department of Agriculture, or Department of Veterans Affairs issued this solicitation, a single copy of specifications, standards, and commercial item descriptions cited in this solicitation may be obtained free of charge by submitting a request to the addressee in paragraph (a) of this provision. Additional copies will be issued for a fee.1.3 AVAILABILITY FOR EXAMINATION OF SPECIFICATIONS NOT LISTED IN THE GSA INDEX OF FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARDS AND COMMERCIAL ITEM descriptions (FAR?52.211-4) (JUN?1988)The specifications and standards cited in this solicitation can be examined at the following location:DEPARMENT OF VETERANS AFFAIRSOffice of Construction & Facilities ManagementFacilities Quality Service (00CFM1A)425 Eye Street N.W, (sixth floor)Washington, DC 20001Telephone Numbers: (202) 632-5249 or (202) 632-5178Between 9:00 AM - 3:00 PM1.4 AVAILABILITY OF SPECIFICATIONS NOT LISTED IN THE GSA INDEX OF FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARDS AND COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS (FAR?52.211-3) (JUN?1988)The specifications cited in this solicitation may be obtained from the associations or organizations listed below.AAAluminum Association Inc. Air Balance Council Architectural Manufacturer's Association Nursery and Landscape Association Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists Concrete Institute Concrete Pipe Association Concrete Pressure Pipe Association Diffusion Council Gas Association General Contractors of America Gear Manufacturers Association, Inc. of Home Appliance Manufacturers Institute of Steel Construction Iron and Steel Institute Institute of Timber Construction Movement and Control Association, Inc. Nursery & Landscape Association National Standards Institute, Inc. Engineered Wood Association and Refrigeration Institute Society of Agricultural Engineers Society of Civil Engineers Society of Heating, Refrigerating, andAir-Conditioning Engineers Society of Mechanical Engineers Society of Sanitary Engineering Society for Testing and Materials Woodwork Institute Welding Society Water Works Association Hardware Manufacturers Association Institute of America Air and Gas Institute Gas Association, Inc. Chlorine Institute, Inc. and Interior Systems Construction Association Iron Soil Pipe Institute Link Fence Manufacturers Institute Plant Manufacturers Bureau Redwood Association Reinforcing Steel Institute Technology Institute and Hardware Institute Generating Systems Association Electric Institute Protection Agency Testing Laboratories, Inc. Aviation Administration Communications Commission Forest Products Society Association of North America Mutual Insurance Association Services Administration Institute Plywood & Veneer Association Conference of Building Officials Cable Engineers Association Inc.\ICACInstitute of Clean Air Companies of Electrical and Electronics Engineers\IMSAInternational Municipal Signal Association Power Cable Engineers AssociationNBMAMetal Buildings Manufacturers Association Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers Contractors Association Bureau of StandardsSee - NISTNBBPVINational Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors Electric CodeSee - NFPA National Fire Protection AssociationNEMANational Electrical Manufacturers Association Fire Protection Association Hardwood Lumber Association Institute of Health Institute of Standards and Technology Lumber Manufacturers Association, Inc. Particleboard Association18928 Premiere CourtGaithersburg, MD 20879(301) 670-0604NSFNational Sanitation Foundation and Door Manufacturers Association Safety and Health AdministrationDepartment of Labor Cement Association Prestressed Concrete Institute Plastic Pipe Institute Enamel Institute, Inc. Institute Resilient Floor Covering Institute Inspection ServiceSee - CRARMARubber Manufacturers Association, Inc. Cypress Manufacturers Association Door Institute Glass Manufacturers Alliance Joist Institute Metal and Air-Conditioning ContractorsNational Association, Inc. Society for Protective Coatings Tank Institute Window Institute Council of America, Inc. Exchange Manufacturers Association Plate Institute, Inc.583 D'Onofrio Drive; Suite 200Madison, WI 53719(608) 833-5900UBCThe Uniform Building CodeSee ICBOULUnderwriters' Laboratories Incorporated' Laboratories of Canada Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau6980 SW Varns Road, P.O. Box 23145Portland, OR 97223(503) 639-0651WRCLAWestern Red Cedar Lumber AssociationP.O. Box 120786New Brighton, MN 55112(612) 633-4334WWPAWestern Wood Products Association - - E N D - - -SECTION 01 58 16TEMPORARY INTERIOR SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERALDESCRIPTIONThis section specifies temporary interior signs.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 TEMPORARY SIGNSA.Fabricate from 50 Kg (110 pound) mat finish white paper.B.Cut to 100 mm (4-inch) wide by 300 mm (12 inch) long size tag.C.Punch 3 mm (1/8-inch) diameter hole centered on 100 mm (4-inch) dimension of tag. Edge of Hole spaced approximately 13 mm (1/2-inch) from one end on tag.D.Reinforce hole on both sides with gummed cloth washer or other suitable material capable of preventing tie pulling through paper edge.E.Ties: Steel wire 0.3 mm (0.0120-inch) thick, attach to tag with twist tie, leaving 150 mm (6-inch) long free ends.PART 3 EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Install temporary signs attached to room door frame or room door knob, lever, or pull for doors on corridor openings.B.Mark on signs with felt tip marker having approximately 3 mm (1/8-inch) wide stroke for clearly legible numbers or letters.C.Identify room with numbers as designated on floor plans.3.2 LOCATIONA.Install on doors that have room, corridor, and space numbers shown.B.Doors that do not require signs are as follows:1.Corridor barrier doors (cross-corridor) in corridor with same number.2.Folding doors or partitions.3.Toilet or bathroom doors within and between rooms.municating doors in partitions between rooms with corridor entrance doors.5.Closet doors within rooms.C.Replace missing, damaged, or illegible signs.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 01 74 19CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 1 – GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies the requirements for the management of non-hazardous building construction and demolition waste.B.Waste disposal in landfills shall be minimized to the greatest extent possible. Of the inevitable waste that is generated, as much of the waste material as economically feasible shall be salvaged, recycled or reused.C.Contractor shall use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators, and facilitate their salvage and recycle not limited to the following:1.Waste Management Plan development and implementation.2.Techniques to minimize waste generation.3.Sorting and separating of waste materials.4.Salvage of existing materials and items for reuse or resale.5.Recycling of materials that cannot be reused or sold.D.At a minimum the following waste categories shall be diverted from landfills:1.Soil.2.Inerts (eg, concrete, masonry and asphalt).3.Clean dimensional wood and palette wood.4.Green waste (biodegradable landscaping materials).5.Engineered wood products (plywood, particle board and I-joists, etc).6.Metal products (eg, steel, wire, beverage containers, copper, etc).7.Cardboard, paper and packaging.8.Bitumen roofing materials.9.Plastics (eg, ABS, PVC).10.Carpet and/or pad.11.Gypsum board.12.Insulation.13.Paint.14.Fluorescent lamps.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Section 02 41 00, DEMOLITION.B.Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Contractor shall practice efficient waste management when sizing, cutting and installing building products. Processes shall be employed to ensure the generation of as little waste as possible. Construction /Demolition waste includes products of the following:1.Excess or unusable construction materials.2.Packaging used for construction products.3.Poor planning and/or layout.4.Construction error.5.Over ordering.6.Weather damage.7.Contamination.8.Mishandling.9.Breakage.B.Establish and maintain the management of non-hazardous building construction and demolition waste set forth herein. Conduct a site assessment to estimate the types of materials that will be generated by demolition and construction.C.Contractor shall develop and implement procedures to recycle construction and demolition waste to a minimum of 50 percent.D.Contractor shall be responsible for implementation of any special programs involving rebates or similar incentives related to recycling. Any revenues or savings obtained from salvage or recycling shall accrue to the contractor.E.Contractor shall provide all demolition, removal and legal disposal of materials. Contractor shall ensure that facilities used for recycling, reuse and disposal shall be permitted for the intended use to the extent required by local, state, federal regulations. The Whole Building Design Guide website provides a Construction Waste Management Database that contains information on companies that haul, collect, and process recyclable debris from construction projects.F.Contractor shall assign a specific area to facilitate separation of materials for reuse, salvage, recycling, and return. Such areas are to be kept neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination or mixing of materials.G.Contractor shall provide on-site instructions and supervision of separation, handling, salvaging, recycling, reuse and return methods to be used by all parties during waste generating stages.H.Record on daily reports any problems in complying with laws, regulations and ordinances with corrective action taken.1.4 TERMINOLOGY A.Class III Landfill: A landfill that accepts non-hazardous resources such as household, commercial and industrial waste resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations. B.Clean: Untreated and unpainted; uncontaminated with adhesives, oils, solvents, mastics and like products.C.Construction and Demolition Waste: Includes all non-hazardous resources resulting from construction, remodeling, alterations, repair and demolition operations.D.Dismantle: The process of parting out a building in such a way as to preserve the usefulness of its materials and components.E.Disposal: Acceptance of solid wastes at a legally operating facility for the purpose of land filling (includes Class III landfills and inert fills).F.Inert Backfill Site: A location, other than inert fill or other disposal facility, to which inert materials are taken for the purpose of filling an excavation, shoring or other soil engineering operation.G.Inert Fill: A facility that can legally accept inert waste, such as asphalt and concrete exclusively for the purpose of disposal.H.Inert Solids/Inert Waste: Non-liquid solid resources including, but not limited to, soil and concrete that does not contain hazardous waste or soluble pollutants at concentrations in excess of water-quality objectives established by a regional water board, and does not contain significant quantities of decomposable solid resources.I.Mixed Debris: Loads that include commingled recyclable and non-recyclable materials generated at the construction site.J.Mixed Debris Recycling Facility: A solid resource processing facility that accepts loads of mixed construction and demolition debris for the purpose of recovering re-usable and recyclable materials and disposing non-recyclable materials.K.Permitted Waste Hauler: A company that holds a valid permit to collect and transport solid wastes from individuals or businesses for the purpose of recycling or disposal.L.Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating, and reconstituting materials for the purpose of using the altered form in the manufacture of a new product. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating or thermally destroying solid waste.1.On-site Recycling – Materials that are sorted and processed on site for use in an altered state in the work, i.e. concrete crushed for use as a sub-base in paving.2.Off-site Recycling – Materials hauled to a location and used in an altered form in the manufacture of new products.M.Recycling Facility: An operation that can legally accept materials for the purpose of processing the materials into an altered form for the manufacture of new products. Depending on the types of materials accepted and operating procedures, a recycling facility may or may not be required to have a solid waste facilities permit or be regulated by the local enforcement agency.N.Reuse: Materials that are recovered for use in the same form, on-site or off-site.O.Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit.P.Salvage: To remove waste materials from the site for resale or re-use by a third party.Q.Source-Separated Materials: Materials that are sorted by type at the site for the purpose of reuse and recycling.R.Solid Waste: Materials that have been designated as non-recyclable and are discarded for the purposes of disposal.S.Transfer Station: A facility that can legally accept solid waste for the purpose of temporarily storing the materials for re-loading onto other trucks and transporting them to a landfill for disposal, or recovering some materials for re-use or recycling.1.5 SUBMITTALS A.In accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES, furnish the following:B.Prepare and submit to the COTR a written demolition debris management plan. The plan shall include, but not be limited to, the following information:1.Procedures to be used for debris management.2.Techniques to be used to minimize waste generation.3.Analysis of the estimated job site waste to be generated:a.List of each material and quantity to be salvaged, reused, recycled.b.List of each material and quantity proposed to be taken to a landfill.4.Detailed description of the Means/Methods to be used for material handling. a.On site: Material separation, storage, protection where applicable.b.Off site: Transportation means and destination. Include list of materials.1)Description of materials to be site-separated and self-hauled to designated facilities.2)Description of mixed materials to be collected by designated waste haulers and removed from the site.c.The names and locations of mixed debris reuse and recycling facilities or sites.d.The names and locations of trash disposal landfill facilities or sites.e.Documentation that the facilities or sites are approved to receive the materials.C.Designated Manager responsible for instructing personnel, supervising, documenting and administer over meetings relevant to the Waste Management Plan.D.Monthly summary of construction and demolition debris diversion and disposal, quantifying all materials generated at the work site and disposed of or diverted from disposal through recycling.1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSAPublications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced by the basic designation only. In the event that criteria requirements conflict, the most stringent requirements shall be met.B.U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC):LEED Green Building Rating System for New Construction1.7 RECORDSMaintain records to document the quantity of waste generated; the quantity of waste diverted through sale, reuse, or recycling; and the quantity of waste disposed by landfill or incineration. Records shall be kept in accordance with the LEED Reference Guide and LEED Template. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALSA.List of each material and quantity to be salvaged, recycled, reused.B.List of each material and quantity proposed to be taken to a landfill.C.Material tracking data: Receiving parties, dates removed, transportation costs, weight tickets, tipping fees, manifests, invoices, net total costs or savings.PART 3 EXECUTION3.1 COLLECTIONA.Provide all necessary containers, bins and storage areas to facilitate effective waste management.B.Clearly identify containers, bins and storage areas so that recyclable materials are separated from trash and can be transported to respective recycling facility for processing.C.Hazardous wastes shall be separated, stored, disposed of according to local, state, federal regulations.3.2 DISPOSAL A.Contractor shall be responsible for transporting and disposing of materials that cannot be delivered to a source-separated or mixed materials recycling facility to a transfer station or disposal facility that can accept the materials in accordance with state and federal regulations.B.Construction or demolition materials with no practical reuse or that cannot be salvaged or recycled shall be disposed of at a landfill or incinerator.3.3 REPORT A.With each application for progress payment, submit a summary of construction and demolition debris diversion and disposal including beginning and ending dates of period covered.B.Quantify all materials diverted from landfill disposal through salvage or recycling during the period with the receiving parties, dates removed, transportation costs, weight tickets, manifests, invoices. Include the net total costs or savings for each salvaged or recycled material.C.Quantify all materials disposed of during the period with the receiving parties, dates removed, transportation costs, weight tickets, tipping fees, manifests, and invoices. Include the net total costs for each disposal.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 01 81 11SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY This Section describes general requirements and procedures to comply with the Guiding Principles for Leadership in High Performance and Sustainable Buildings Memorandum of Understanding incorporated in the Executive Orders 13423 and 13514; Energy Policy Act of 2005 (EPA 2005) and the Energy Independence and Security Act of 2007 (EISA 2007). 1.2 OBJECTIVES A.To maximize resource efficiency and reduce the environmental impacts of construction and operation, the Contractor during the construction phase of this project shall implement the following procedures: 1.Select products that minimize consumption of energy, water and non-renewable resources, while minimizing the amounts of pollution resulting from the production and employment of building technologies. It is the intent of this project to conform with EPA’s Five Guiding Principles on environmentally preferable purchasing. The five principles are: a.Include environmental considerations as part of the normal purchasing process. b.Emphasize pollution prevention early in the purchasing process. c.Examine multiple environmental attributes throughout a product’s or service’s life cycle. pare relevant environmental impacts when selecting products and services. e.Collect and base purchasing decisions on accurate and meaningful information about environmental performance. 2.Control sources for potential Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) pollutants by controlled selection of materials and processes used in project construction in order to attain superior IAQ. 3.Products and processes that achieve the above objectives to the extent currently possible and practical have been selected and included in these Construction Documents. The Contractor is responsible to maintain and support these objectives in developing means and methods for performing the work of this Contract and in proposing product substitutions and/or changes to specified processes. 4.Use building practices that ensure construction debris and particulates do not contaminate or enter duct work prior to system startup and turn over. 1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Section 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANANGEMENT 1.4 DEFINITIONS A.Agrifiber Products: Composite panel products derived from agricultural fiber B.Biobased Product: As defined in the 2002 Farm Bill, a product determined by the Secretary to be a commercial or industrial product (other than food or feed) that is composed, in whole or in significant part, of biological products or renewable domestic agricultural materials (including plant, animal, and marine materials) or forestry materials C.Biobased Content: The weight of the biobased material divided by the total weight of the product and expressed as a percentage by weight D.Certificates of Chain-of-Custody: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that wood used to make products has been tracked through its extraction and fabrication to ensure that is was obtained from forests certified by a specified certification program posite Wood: A product consisting of wood fiber or other plant particles bonded together by a resin or binder F.Construction and Demolition Wast.e: Includes solid wastes, such as building materials, packaging, rubbish, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations. A construction waste management plan is to be provided by the Contractor as defined in Section 01 74 19. G.Third Party Certification: Certification of levels of environmental achievement by nationally recognized sustainability rating system.H.Light Pollution: Light that extends beyond its source such that the additional light is wasted in an unwanted area or in an area where it inhibits view of the night sky I.Recycled Content Materials: Products that contain pre-consumer or post-consumer materials as all or part of their feedstock J.Post-Consumer Recycled Content: The percentage by weight of constituent materials that have been recovered or otherwise diverted from the solid-waste stream after consumer use K.Pre-Consumer Recycled Content: Materials that have been recovered or otherwise diverted from the solid-waste stream during the manufacturing process. Pre-consumer content must be material that would not have otherwise entered the waste stream as per Section 5 of the FTC Act, Part 260 “Guidelines for the Use of Environmental Marketing Claims”: bcp/grnrule/guides980427 L.Regional Materials: Materials that are extracted, harvested, recovered, and manufactured within a radius of 250 miles (400 km) from the Project site M.Salvaged or Reused Materials: Materials extracted from existing buildings in order to be reused in other buildings without being manufactured N.Sealant: Any material that fills and seals gaps between other materials O.Type 1 Finishes: Materials and finishes which have a potential for short-term levels of off gassing from chemicals inherent in their manufacturing process, or which are applied in a form requiring vehicles or carriers for spreading which release a high level of particulate matter in the process of installation and/or curing. P.Type 2 Finishes: “Fuzzy" materials and finishes which are woven, fibrous, or porous in nature and tend to adsorb chemicals offgasQ.Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs): Any compound of carbon, excluding carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, carbonic acid, metallic carbides or carbonates, and ammonium carbonate, which participates in atmospheric photochemical reactions. Compounds that have negligible photochemical reactivity, listed in EPA 40 CFR 51.100(s), are also excluded from this regulatory definition. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A.Sustainable Design Submittals: 1.Water Conserving Fixtures: Submittals must include manufacturer’s cut sheets for all water-consuming plumbing fixtures and fittings (toilets, urinals, faucets, showerheads, etc.) highlighting maximum flow rates and/or flush rates. Include cut sheets for any automatic faucet-control devices. 2.Elimination of CFCs AND HCFCs: Provide manufacturer’s cut sheets for all cooling equipment with manufacturer’s product data, highlighting refrigerants; provide manufacturer’s cut sheets for all fire-suppression equipment, highlighting fire-suppression agents; provide manufacturer’s cut-sheets for all polystyrene insulation (XPS) and closed-cell spray foam polyurethane insulation, highlighting the blowing agent(s). 3.Appliances and Equipment: Provide copies of manufacturer’s product data for all Energy Star eligible equipment and appliances, including office equipment, computers and printers, electronics, and commercial food service equipment (excluding HVAC and lighting components), verifying compliance with EPA’s Energy Star program. 4.On-Site Renewable Energy Systems: Provide cut sheets and manufacturer’s product data for all on-site renewable energy generating components and equipment, including documentation of output capacity. 5.Measurement and Verification Systems: Provide cut sheets and manufacturer’s product data for all controls systems, highlighting electrical metering and trending capability components. 6.Salvaged or Reused Materials: Provide documentation that lists each salvaged or reused material, the source or vendor of the material, the purchase price, and the replacement cost if greater than the purchase price. 7.Recycled Content: Submittals for all materials with recycled content (excluding MEP systems equipment and components) must include the following documentation: Manufacturer’s product data, product literature, or a letter from the manufacturer verifying the percentage of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content (by weight) of each material or product An electronic spreadsheet that tabulates the Project’s total materials cost and combined recycled content value (defined as the sum of the post-consumer recycled content value plus one-half of the pre-consumer recycled content value) expressed as a percentage of total materials cost. This spreadsheet shall be submitted every third month with the Contractor’s Certificate and Application for Payment. It should indicate, on an ongoing basis, line items for each material, including cost, pre-consumer recycled content, post-consumer recycled content, and combined recycled content value. 8.Regional Materials: Submittals for all products or materials expected to contribute to the regional calculation (excluding MEP systems equipment and components) must include the following documentation:a.Cost of each material or product, excluding cost of labor and equipment for installation b.Location of product manufacture and distance from point of manufacture to the Project Site c.Location of point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material in each product and distance from the point of extraction, harvest, or recovery to the Project Site d.Manufacturer’s product data, product literature, or a letter from the manufacturer verifying the location and distance from the Project Site to the point of manufacture for each regional material e.Manufacturer’s product data, product literature, or a letter from the manufacturer verifying the location and distance from the Project Site to the point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each regional material or product, including, at a minimum, gravel and fill, planting materials, concrete, masonry, and GWB f.An electronic spreadsheet that tabulates the Project’s total materials cost and regional materials value, expressed as a percentage of total materials cost. This spreadsheet shall be submitted every third month with the Contractor’s Certificate and Application for Payment. It should indicate on an ongoing basis, line items for each material, including cost, location of manufacture, distance from manufacturing plant to the Project Site, location of raw material extraction, and distance from extraction point to the Project Site. 9.Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring: Provide manufacturer’s cut sheets highlighting the installed carbon dioxide monitoring system components and sequence of controls shop drawing documentation, including CO2 differential set-points and alarm capabilities. 10.Interior Adhesives and Sealants: Submittals for all field-applied adhesives and sealants, which have a potential impact on indoor air, must include manufacturer’s MSDSs or other Product Data highlighting VOC content. a.Provide manufacturers’ documentation verifying all adhesives used to apply laminates, whether shop-applied or field-applied, contain no urea-formaldehyde. 11.Interior Paints and Coatings: Submittals for all field-applied paints and coatings, which have a potential impact on indoor air, must include manufacturer’s MSDSs or other Product Data highlighting VOC content 12.Floor coverings: a.Carpet Systems: Submittals for all carpet must include the following: 1)A copy of an assessment from the Building for Environmental and Economic Sustainability (BEES) software model, either Version 3.0 or 4.0, with parameters of the model set as described by this specification section. 2)Manufacturer’s product data verifying that all carpet systems meet or exceed the testing and product requirements of the Carpet and Rug Institute Green Label Plus program. b.Engineered Wood Flooring: Submittals for all engineered wood flooring must include manufacturer’s product data verifying certification under either the Greenguard or FloorScore indoor emissions testing program. posite Wood and Agrifiber Binders: Submittals for all composite wood and agrifiber products (including but not limited to particleboard, wheatboard, strawboard, agriboard products, engineered wood components, solid-core wood doors, OSB, MDF, and plywood products) must include manufacturer’s product data verifying that these products contain no urea-formaldehyde resins. 14.Air Filtration: Provide manufacturer’s cut sheets and product data highlighting the following: a.Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) for filtration media in all air handling units (AHUs) per ASHRAE HVAC Design Manual for Hospitals and Clinics.b.Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) for filtration media installed at return air grilles during construction if permanently installed AHUs are used during construction. See above for requirements15.Mercury in Lighting: Provide manufacturer’s cut sheets or product data for all fluorescent or HID lamps highlighting mercury content. 16.Lighting Controls: Provide manufacturer’s cut sheets and shop drawing documentation highlighting all lighting controls systems components. 17.Thermal Comfort Controls: Provide manufacturer’s cut sheets and shop drawing documentation highlighting all thermal comfort-control systems components. 18.Gypsum Wall Board: Provide manufacturer’s cut sheets or product data verifying that all gypsum wallboard products are moisture and mold-resistant. 19.Fiberglass Insulation: Provide manufacturer’s cut sheets or product data verifying that fiberglass batt insulation contains no urea-formaldehyde. 20.Duct Acoustical Insulation: Provide manufacturer’s cut sheets or product data verifying that mechanical sound insulation materials in air distribution ducts consists of an impervious, non-porous coatings that prevent dust from accumulating in the insulating materials. 21.Green Housekeeping: Provide documentation that all cleaning products and janitorial paper products meet the VOC limits and content requirements of this specification section. B.Project Materials Cost Data: Provide a spreadsheet in an electronic file indicating the total cost for the Project and the total cost of building materials used for the Project, as follows: 1.Not more than 60 days after the Preconstruction Meeting, the General Contractor shall provide to the Owner and Architect a preliminary schedule of materials costs for all materials used for the Project organized by specification section. Exclude labor costs and all mechanical, electrical, and plumbing (MEP) systems materials and labor costs. Include the following: a.Identify each reused or salvaged material, its cost, and its replacement value. b.Identify each recycled-content material, its post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content as a percentage the product’s weight, its cost, its combined recycled content value (defined as the sum of the post-consumer recycled content value plus one-half of the pre-consumer recycled content value), and the total combined recycled content value for all materials as a percentage of total materials costs. c.Identify each regional material, its cost, its manufacturing location, the distance of this location from the Project site, the source location for each raw material component of the material, the distance of these extraction locations from the Project site, and the total value of regional materials as a percentage of total materials costs. d.Identify each biobased material, its source, its cost, and the total value of biobased materials as a percentage of total materials costs. Also provide the total value of rapidly renewable materials (materials made from plants that are harvested in less than a 10-year cycle) as a percentage of total materials costs. e.Identify each wood-based material, its cost, the total wood-based materials cost, each FSC Certified wood material, its cost, and the total value of Certified wood as a percentage of total wood-based materials costs. 2.Provide final versions of the above spreadsheets to the Owner and Architect not more than 14 days after Substantial Completion. C.Construction Waste Management: See Section 01 74 19 “Construction Waste Management” for submittal requirements. D.Construction Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management: Submittals must include the following: 1.Not more than 30 days after the Preconstruction Meeting, prepare and submit for the Architect and Owner’s approval, an electronic copy of the draft Construction IAQ Management Plan in an electronic file including, but not limited to, descriptions of the following: 2.Instruction procedures for meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction, 1995, Chapter 3, including procedures for HVAC Protection, Source Control, Pathway Interruption, Housekeeping, and Scheduling a.Instruction procedures for protecting absorptive materials stored on-site or installed from moisture damage b.Schedule of submission to Architect of photographs of on-site construction IAQ management measures such as protection of ducts and on-site stored oil installed absorptive materials c.Instruction procedures if air handlers must be used during construction, including a description of filtration media to be used at each return air grille d.Instruction procedure for replacing all air-filtration media immediately prior to occupancy after completion of construction, including a description of filtration media to be used at each air handling or air supply unit 3.Not more than 30 days following receipt of the approved draft CIAQMP, submit an electronic copy of the approved CIAQMP in an electronic file, along with the following: a.Manufacturer’s cut sheets and product data highlighting the Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) for all filtration media to be installed at return air grilles during construction if permanently installed AHUs are used during construction. b.Manufacturer’s cut sheets and product data highlighting the Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) for filtration media in all air handling units (AHUs). 4.Not more than 14 days after Substantial Completion provide the following: a.Documentation verifying required replacement of air filtration media in all air handling units (AHUs) after the completion of construction and prior to occupancy and, if applicable, required installation of filtration during construction. b.Minimum of 18 Construction photographs: Six photographs taken on three different occasions during construction of the SMACNA approaches employed, along with a brief description of each approach, documenting implementation of the IAQ management measures, such as protection of ducts and on-site stored or installed absorptive materials. c.A copy of the report from testing and inspecting agency documenting the results of IAQ testing, demonstrating conformance with IAQ testing procedures and requirements defined in Section 01 81 09 “Testing for Indoor Air Quality.” E.Sustainable Design Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit reports for the following: 1.Construction Waste Management: Waste reduction progress reports and logs complying with the requirements of Section 01 74 19 ”Construction Waste Management.” 2.Construction IAQ Management: See details below under Section 3.2 Construction Indoor Air Quality Management for Construction IAQ management progress report requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Preconstruction Meeting: After award of Contract and prior to the commencement of the Work, schedule and conduct meeting with Owner, Architect, and all Subcontractors to discuss the Construction Waste Management Plan, the required Construction Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan, and all other Sustainable Design Requirements. The purpose of this meeting is to develop a mutual understanding of the Project’s Sustainable Design Requirements and coordination of the Contractor’s management of these requirements with the Contracting Officer and the Construction Quality Manager. B.Construction Job Conferences: The status of compliance with the Sustainable Design Requirements of these specifications will be an agenda item at all regular job meetings conducted during the course of work at the site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Do not burn rubbish, organic matter, etc. or any material on the site. Dispose of legally in accordance with Specifications Sections 01 74 19, CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT. B.Water-Conserving Fixtures: Plumbing fixtures and fittings shall use in aggregate at least 20% less water than the water use baseline calculated for the building after meeting the Energy Policy Act of 1992 fixture performance requirements. Flow and flush rates shall not exceed the following: 1.Toilets: no more than 1.3 gallons per flush, otherwise be dual flush 1.6/0.8 gallons per flush, and have documented bowl evacuation capability per MaP testing of at least 400 grams 3.Lavatory Faucets: 0.5 gpm with automatic faucet controls C.Elimination of CFCs AND HCFCs: 1.Ozone Protection and Greenhouse Gas Reduction: Base building cooling equipment shall contain no refrigerants other than the following: HCFC-123, HFC-134a, HFC-245fa, HFC-407c, or HFC 410a. 2.Fire suppression systems may not contain ozone-depleting substances such as halon 1301 and 1211.3.Extruded polystyrene insulation (XPS) and closed-cell spray foam polyurethane insulation shall not be manufactured with hydrochlorofluorocarbon (HCFC) blowing agents. D.Appliances and Equipment: All materials and equipment being installed that falls under the Energy Star or FEMP programs must be Energy Star or FEMP-rated. Eligible equipment includes refrigerators, motors, laundry equipment, office equipment and more. Refer to each program’s website for a complete list.E.HVAC Distribution Efficiency: 1.All duct systems shall be constructed of aluminum, stainless steel or galvanized sheet metal, as deemed appropriate based on the application requirements. No fiberglass duct board shall be permitted. 2.All medium- and high-pressure ductwork systems shall be pressure-tested in accordance with the current SMACNA standards. 3.All ductwork shall be externally insulated. No interior duct liner shall be permitted. 4.Where possible, all air terminal connections shall be hard-connected with sheet metal ductwork. If flexible ductwork is used, no flexible duct extension shall be more than six feet in length. 5.All HVAC equipment shall be isolated from the ductwork system with flexible duct connectors to minimize the transmittance of vibration. 6.All supply and return air branch ducts shall include the appropriate style of volume damper. Air terminal devices such as grilles, registers, and diffusers shall be balanced at duct branch dampers, not at terminal face. F.Measurement and Verification: Install controls and monitoring devices as required by MEP divisions order to comply with International Performance Measurement & Verification Protocol (IPMVP), Volume III: Concepts and Options for Determining Energy Savings in New Construction, April 2003, Option D. 1.The IPMVP provides guidance on situation-appropriate application of measurement and verification strategies. G.Salvaged or Reused materials: There shall be no substitutions for specified salvaged and reused materials and products. 1.Salvaged materials: Use of salvaged materials reduces impacts of disposal and manufacturing of replacements. H.Recycled Content of Materials: 1.Provide building materials with recycled content such that post-consumer recycled content value plus half the pre-consumer recycled content value constitutes a minimum of 30% of the cost of materials used for the Project, exclusive of all MEP equipment, labor, and delivery costs. The Contractor shall make all attempts to maximize the procurement of materials with recycled content. a.e post-consumer recycled content value of a material shall be determined by dividing the weight of post-consumer recycled content by the total weight of the material and multiplying by the cost of the material. b.Do not include mechanical and electrical components in the calculations. c.Do not include labor and delivery costs in the calculations. d.Recycled content of materials shall be defined according to the Federal Trade Commission’s “Guide for the Use of Environmental Marketing Claims,” 16 CFR 260.7 (e). e.Utilize all on-site existing paving materials that are scheduled for demolition as granulated fill, and include the cost of this material had it been purchased in the calculations for recycled content value. f.The materials in the following list must contain the minimum recycled content indicated: Category Minimum Recycled Content Steel Fabrications 60% combined Steel Studs 30% combined Aluminum Fabrications 35% combined Rigid Insulation 20% pre-consumer Batt insulation 30% combined - - - E N D - - - SECTION 02 41 00DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION:This section specifies demolition and removal of buildings, portions of buildings, utilities, other structures and debris from trash dumps shown. 1.2 RELATED WORK:A.Safety Requirements: GENERAL CONDITIONS Article, ACCIDENT PREVENTION.B.Disconnecting utility services prior to demolition: Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.C.Reserved items that are to remain the property of the Government: Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.D.Asbestos Removal: Section 02 82 11, TRADITIONAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT.E.Construction Waste Management: Section 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT.F.Infectious Control: Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article 1.7, INFECTION PREVENTION MEASURES.1.3 PROTECTION:A.Perform demolition in such manner as to eliminate hazards to persons and property; to minimize interference with use of adjacent areas, utilities and structures or interruption of use of such utilities; and to provide free passage to and from such adjacent areas of structures. Comply with requirements of GENERAL CONDITIONS Article, ACCIDENT PREVENTION.B.Provide enclosed dust chutes with control gates from each floor to carry debris to truck beds and govern flow of material into truck. Provide overhead bridges of tight board or prefabricated metal construction at dust chutes to protect persons and property from falling debris.C.Prevent spread of flying particles and dust. Sprinkle rubbish and debris with water to keep dust to a minimum. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable condition such as, but not limited to; ice, flooding, or pollution. Vacuum and dust the work area daily.D.In addition to previously listed fire and safety rules to be observed in performance of work, include following:1.No wall or part of wall shall be permitted to fall outwardly from structures.2.Maintain at least one stairway in each structure in usable condition to highest remaining floor. Keep stairway free of obstructions and debris until that level of structure has been removed.3.Wherever a cutting torch or other equipment that might cause a fire is used, provide and maintain fire extinguishers nearby ready for immediate use. Instruct all possible users in use of fire extinguishers.4.Keep hydrants clear and accessible at all times. Prohibit debris from accumulating within a radius of 4500 mm (15 feet) of fire hydrants.E.Before beginning any demolition work, the Contractor shall survey the site and examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work. The contractor shall take necessary precautions to avoid damages to existing items to remain in place, to be reused, or to remain the property of the Medical Center; any damaged items shall be repaired or replaced as approved by the COTR. The Contractor shall coordinate the work of this section with all other work and shall construct and maintain shoring, bracing, and supports as required. The Contractor shall ensure that structural elements are not overloaded and shall be responsible for increasing structural supports or adding new supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, or demolition work performed under this contract. Do not overload structural elements. Provide new supports and reinforcement for existing construction weakened by demolition or removal works. Repairs, reinforcement, or structural replacement must have COTR’s approval. F.The work shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article 1.7 INFECTION PREVENTION MEASURES.1.4 UTILITY SERVICES:A.Demolish and remove outside utility service lines shown to be removed.B.Remove abandoned outside utility lines that would interfere with installation of new utility lines and new construction.PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)PART 3 – EXECUTION3.1 DEMOLITION:A.Remove and legally dispose of all materials from any trash dumps shown. Materials removed shall become property of contractor and shall be disposed of in compliance with applicable federal, state or local permits, rules and/or regulations be hauled to VA specified disposal site. The removal of hazardous material shall be referred to Hazardous Materials specifications.B.Remove existing utilities as indicated or uncovered by work and terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the specific utility and approved by the COTR. When Utility lines are encountered that are not indicated on the drawings, the COTR shall be notified prior to further work in that area. 3.2 CLEANUP:On completion of work of this section and after removal of all debris, leave site in clean condition satisfactory to COTR. Cleanup shall include off the Medical Center disposal of all items and materials not required to remain property of the Government as well as all debris and rubbish resulting from demolition operations. E N D SECTION 02 82 11TRADITIONAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENTPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SUMMARY OF THE WORK1.1.1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND RELATED REQUIREMENTSDrawings, general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and other Division 01 specifications, shall apply to the work of this section. The contract documents show the work to be done under the contract and related requirements and conditions impacting the project. Related requirements and conditions include applicable codes and regulations, notices and permits, existing site conditions and restrictions on use of the site, requirements for partial owner occupancy during the work, coordination with other work and the phasing of the work. In the event the Asbestos Abatement Contractor discovers a conflict in the contract documents and/or requirements or codes, the conflict must be brought to the immediate attention of the Contracting Officer for resolution. Whenever there is a conflict or overlap in the requirements, the most stringent shall apply. Any actions taken by the Contractor without obtaining guidance from the Contracting Officer shall become the sole risk and responsibility of the Asbestos Abatement Contractor. All costs incurred due to such action are also the responsibility of the Asbestos Abatement Contractor.1.1.2 EXTENT OF WORKA.Below is a brief description of the estimated quantities of asbestos containing materials to be abated. These quantities are for informational purposes only and are based on the best information available at the time of the specification preparation. The Contractor shall satisfy himself as the actual quantities to be abated. Nothing in this section may be interpreted as limiting the extent of work otherwise required by this contract and related documents. B.Removal, clean-up and disposal of asbestos containing materials (ACM) and asbestos/waste contaminated elements in an appropriate regulated area for the following approximate quantities;Asbestos Containing Black Floor Tile Mastic – 1,300 SFAsbestos Containing Ductwork seam sealant 340 LFAsbestos Containing Ductwork Insulation Mastic – 3,000 SF1.1.3 RELATED WORKA.Section 02 41 00, DEMOLITION.1.1.4 TASKSThe work tasks are summarized briefly as follows:A.Pre-abatement activities including pre-abatement meeting(s), inspection(s), notifications, permits, submittal approvals, regulated area preparations, emergency procedures arrangements, and standard operating procedures for asbestos abatement work.B.Abatement activities including removal clean-up and disposal of ACM waste, recordkeeping, security, monitoring, and inspections.C.Cleaning and decontamination activities including final visual inspection, air monitoring and certification of decontamination.1.1.5 CONTRACTORS USE OF PREMISESA.The Contractor and Contractor's personnel shall cooperate fully with the VA representative/consultant to facilitate efficient use of buildings and areas within buildings. The Contractor shall perform the work in accordance with the VA specifications, drawings, phasing plan and in compliance with any/all applicable Federal, State and Local regulations and requirements.B.The Contractor shall use the existing facilities in the building strictly within the limits indicated in contract documents as well as the approved VA Design and Construction Procedures. VA Design and Construction Procedures drawings of partially occupied buildings will show the limits of regulated areas; the placement of decontamination facilities; the temporary location of bagged waste ACM; the path of transport to outside the building; and the temporary waste storage area for each building/regulated area. Any variation from the arrangements shown on drawings shall be secured in writing from the VA representative through the pre-abatement plan of action. The following limitations of use shall apply to existing facilities shown on drawings:1.2 VARIATIONS IN QUANTITYThe quantities and locations of ACM as indicated on the drawings and the extent of work included in this section are estimated which are limited by the physical constraints imposed by occupancy of the buildings and accessibility to ACM. Accordingly, minor variations (+/- 5%) in quantities of ACM within the regulated area are considered as having no impact on contract price and time requirements of this contract. Where additional work is required beyond the above variation, the contractor shall provide unit prices for newly discovered ACM and those prices shall be used for additional work required under the contractor.1.3 STOP ASBESTOS REMOVALIf the Contracting Officer; their field representative; (the facility Safety Officer/Manager or their designee, or the VA Professional Industrial Hygienist/Certified Industrial Hygienist (VPIH/CIH) presents a verbal Stop Asbestos Removal Order, the Contractor/Personnel shall immediately stop all asbestos removal and maintain HEPA filtered negative pressure air flow in the containment and adequately wet any exposed ACM. If a verbal Stop Asbestos Removal Order is issued, the VA shall follow-up with a written order to the Contractor as soon as it is practicable. The Contractor shall not resume any asbestos removal activity until authorized to do so in writing by the VA Contracting Officer. A stop asbestos removal order may be issued at any time the VA Contracting Officer determines abatement conditions/activities are not within VA specification, regulatory requirements or that an imminent hazard exists to human health or the environment. Work stoppage will continue until conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the VA. Standby time and costs for corrective actions will be borne by the Contractor, including the VPIH/CIH time. The occurrence of any of the following events shall be reported immediately by the Contractor’s competent person to the VA Contracting Office or field representative using the most expeditious means (e.g., verbal or telephonic), followed up with written notification to the Contracting Officer as soon as practical. The Contractor shall immediately stop asbestos removal/disturbance activities and initiate fiber reduction activities:A.Airborne PCM analysis results equal to or greater than 0.01 f/cc outside a regulated area or >0.05 f/cc inside a regulated area;B.breach or break in regulated area containment barrier(s);C.less than –0.02” WCG pressure in the regulated area;D.serious injury/death at the site; E.fire/safety emergency at the site;F.respiratory protection system failure;G.power failure or loss of wetting agent; orH.any visible emissions observed outside the regulated area.1.4 DEFINITIONS1.4.1 GENERALDefinitions and explanations here are neither complete nor exclusive of all terms used in the contract documents, but are general for the work to the extent they are not stated more explicitly in another element of the contract documents. Drawings must be recognized as diagrammatic in nature and not completely descriptive of the requirements indicated therein.1.4.2 GLOSSARYAbatement - Procedures to control fiber release from asbestos-containing materials. Includes removal, encapsulation, enclosure, demolition, and renovation activities related to asbestos containing materials (ACM).Aerosol - Solid or liquid particulate suspended in air.Adequately wet - Sufficiently mixed or penetrated with liquid to prevent the release of particulates. If visible emissions are observed coming from the ACM, then that material has not been adequately wetted.Aggressive method - Removal or disturbance of building material by sanding, abrading, grinding, or other method that breaks, crumbles, or disintegrates intact ACM.Aggressive sampling - EPA AHERA defined clearance sampling method using air moving equipment such as fans and leaf blowers to aggressively disturb and maintain in the air residual fibers after abatement.AHERA - Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act. Asbestos regulations for schools issued in 1987.Aircell - Pipe or duct insulation made of corrugated cardboard which contains asbestos.Air monitoring - The process of measuring the fiber content of a known volume of air collected over a specified period of time. The NIOSH 7400 Method, Issue 2 is used to determine the fiber levels in air. For personal samples and clearance air testing using Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM) analysis. NIOSH Method 7402 can be used when it is necessary to confirm fibers counted by PCM as being asbestos. The AHERA TEM analysis may be used for background, area samples and clearance samples when required by this specification, or at the discretion of the VPIH/CIH as appropriate.Air sample filter - The filter used to collect fibers which are then counted. The filter is made of mixed cellulose ester membrane for PCM (Phase Contrast Microscopy) and polycarbonate for TEM (Transmission Electron Microscopy)Amended water - Water to which a surfactant (wetting agent) has been added to increase the penetrating ability of the liquid.Asbestos - Includes chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite, tremolite asbestos, anthophyllite asbestos, actinolite asbestos, and any of these minerals that have been chemically treated or altered. Asbestos also includes PACM, as defined below.Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan (AHAP) - Asbestos work procedures required to be submitted by the contractor before work begins.Asbestos-containing material (ACM) - Any material containing more than one percent of asbestos.Asbestos contaminated elements (ACE) - Building elements such as ceilings, walls, lights, or ductwork that are contaminated with asbestos.Asbestos-contaminated soil (ACS) – Soil found in the work area or in adjacent areas such as crawlspaces or pipe tunnels which is contaminated with asbestos-containing material debris and cannot be easily separated from the material.Asbestos-containing waste (ACW) material - Asbestos-containing material or asbestos contaminated objects requiring disposal.Asbestos Project Monitor – Some sates require that any person conducting asbestos abatement clearance inspections and clearance air sampling be licensed as an asbestos project monitor.Asbestos waste decontamination facility - A system consisting of drum/bag washing facilities and a temporary storage area for cleaned containers of asbestos waste. Used as the exit for waste and equipment leaving the regulated area. In an emergency, it may be used to evacuate personnel.Authorized person - Any person authorized by the VA, the Contractor, or government agency and required by work duties to be present in regulated areas.Authorized visitor - Any person approved by the VA; the contractor; or any government agency representative having jurisdiction over the regulated area (e.g., OSHA, Federal and State EPA.Barrier - Any surface the isolates the regulated area and inhibits fiber migration from the regulated area.Containment Barrier - An airtight barrier consisting of walls, floors, and/or ceilings of sealed plastic sheeting which surrounds and seals the outer perimeter of the regulated area.Critical Barrier - The barrier responsible for isolating the regulated area from adjacent spaces, typically constructed of plastic sheeting secured in place at openings such as doors, windows, or any other opening into the regulated area.Primary Barrier – Plastic barriers placed over critical barriers and exposed directly to abatement work.Secondary Barrier - Any additional plastic barriers used to isolate and provide protection from debris during abatement work.Breathing zone - The hemisphere forward of the shoulders with a radius of about 150 - 225 mm (6 - 9 inches) from the worker's nose. Bridging encapsulant - An encapsulant that forms a layer on the surface of the ACM.Building/facility owner - The legal entity, including a lessee, which exercises control over management and recordkeeping functions relating to a building and/or facility in which asbestos activities take place.Bulk testing - The collection and analysis of suspect asbestos containing materials.Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH) - A person certified in the comprehensive practice of industrial hygiene by the American Board of Industrial Hygiene.Class I asbestos work - Activities involving the removal of Thermal System Insulation (TSI) and surfacing ACM and Presumed Asbestos Containing Material (PACM).Class II asbestos work - Activities involving the removal of ACM which is not thermal system insulation or surfacing material. This includes, but is not limited to, the removal of asbestos-containing wallboard, floor tile and sheeting, roofing and siding shingles, and construction mastic.Clean room/Changing room - An uncontaminated room having facilities for the storage of employee's street clothing and uncontaminated materials and equipment.Clearance sample - The final air sample taken after all asbestos work has been done and visually inspected. Performed by the VA's professional industrial hygiene consultant/Certified Industrial Hygienist (VPIH/CIH).Closely resemble - The major workplace conditions which have contributed to the levels of historic asbestos exposure, are no more protective than conditions of the current petent person - In addition to the definition in 29 CFR 1926.32(f), one who is capable of identifying existing asbestos hazards in the workplace and selecting the appropriate control strategy for asbestos exposure, who has the authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them, as specified in 29 CFR 1926.32(f); in addition, for Class I and II work who is specially trained in a training course which meets the criteria of EPA's Model Accreditation Plan (40 CFR 763) for supervisor.Contractor's Professional Industrial Hygienist (CPIH/CIH) - The asbestos abatement contractor's industrial hygienist. The industrial hygienist must meet the qualification requirements of a PIH and may be a certified industrial hygienist (CIH).Count - Refers to the fiber count or the average number of fibers greater than five microns in length with a length-to-width (aspect) ratio of at least 3 to 1, per cubic centimeter of air.Crawlspace – An area which can be found either in or adjacent to the work area. This area has limited access and egress and may contain asbestos materials and/or asbestos contaminated soil.Decontamination area/unit - An enclosed area adjacent to and connected to the regulated area and consisting of an equipment room, shower room, and clean room, which is used for the decontamination of workers, materials, and equipment that are contaminated with asbestos.Demolition - The wrecking or taking out of any load-supporting structural member and any related razing, removing, or stripping of asbestos products. VA Total – means a building or substantial part of the building is completely removed, torn or knocked down, bulldozed, flattened, or razed, including removal of building debris. Disposal bag - Typically 6 mil thick sift-proof, dustproof, leak-tight container used to package and transport asbestos waste from regulated areas to the approved landfill. Each bag/container must be labeled/marked in accordance with EPA, OSHA and DOT requirements.Disturbance - Activities that disrupt the matrix of ACM or PACM, crumble or pulverize ACM or PACM, or generate visible debris from ACM or PACM. Disturbance includes cutting away small amounts of ACM or PACM, no greater than the amount that can be contained in one standard sized glove bag or waste bag in order to access a building component. In no event shall the amount of ACM or PACM so disturbed exceed that which can be contained in one glove bag or disposal bag which shall not exceed 60 inches in length or width.Drum - A rigid, impermeable container made of cardboard fiber, plastic, or metal which can be sealed in order to be sift-proof, dustproof, and leak-tight.Employee exposure - The exposure to airborne asbestos that would occur if the employee were not wearing respiratory protection equipment.Encapsulant - A material that surrounds or embeds asbestos fibers in an adhesive matrix and prevents the release of fibers.Encapsulation - Treating ACM with an encapsulant.Enclosure - The construction of an air tight, impermeable, permanent barrier around ACM to control the release of asbestos fibers from the material and also eliminate access to the material. Equipment room - A contaminated room located within the decontamination area that is supplied with impermeable bags or containers for the disposal of contaminated protective clothing and equipment.Fiber - A particulate form of asbestos, 5 microns or longer, with a length to width (aspect) ratio of at least 3 to 1.Fibers per cubic centimeter (f/cc) - Abbreviation for fibers per cubic centimeter, used to describe the level of asbestos fibers in air.Filter - Media used in respirators, vacuums, or other machines to remove particulate from air.Firestopping - Material used to close the open parts of a structure in order to prevent a fire from spreading.Friable asbestos containing material - Any material containing more than one (1) percent or asbestos as determined using the method specified in appendix A, Subpart F, 40 CFR 763, section 1, Polarized Light Microscopy, that, when dry, can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure.Glovebag - Not more than a 60 x 60 inch impervious plastic bag-like enclosure affixed around an asbestos-containing material, with glove-like appendages through which materials and tools may be handled.High efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter – An ASHRAE MERV 17 filter capable of trapping and retaining at least 99.97 percent of all mono-dispersed particles of 0.3 micrometers in diameter.HEPA vacuum - Vacuum collection equipment equipped with a HEPA filter system capable of collecting and retaining asbestos fibers.Homogeneous area - An area of surfacing, thermal system insulation or miscellaneous ACM that is uniform in color, texture and date of application.HVAC - Heating, Ventilation and Air ConditioningIndustrial hygienist (IH) - A professional qualified by education, training, and experience to anticipate, recognize, evaluate and develop controls for occupational health hazards. Meets definition requirements of the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA).Industrial hygienist technician (IH Technician) - A person working under the direction of an IH or CIH who has special training, experience, certifications and licenses required for the industrial hygiene work assigned. Some states require that an industrial hygienist technician conducting asbestos abatement clearance inspection and clearance air sampling be licensed as an asbestos project monitor.Intact - The ACM has not crumbled, been pulverized, or otherwise deteriorated so that the asbestos is no longer likely to be bound with its matrix.Lockdown - Applying encapsulant, after a final visual inspection, on all abated surfaces at the conclusion of ACM removal prior to removal of critical barriers.National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) - EPA's rule to control emissions of asbestos to the environment (40 CFR part 61, Subpart M).Negative initial exposure assessment - A demonstration by the employer which complies with the criteria in 29 CFR 1926.1101 (f)(2)(iii), that employee exposure during an operation is expected to be consistently below the PEL.Negative pressure - Air pressure which is lower than the surrounding area, created by exhausting air from a sealed regulated area through HEPA equipped filtration units. OSHA requires maintaining -0.02" water column gauge inside the negative pressure enclosure.Negative pressure respirator - A respirator in which the air pressure inside the facepiece is negative during inhalation relative to the air pressure outside the respirator facepiece.Non-friable ACM - Material that contains more than 1 percent asbestos but cannot be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand anic vapor cartridge - The type of cartridge used on air purifying respirators to remove organic vapor hazardous air contaminants.Outside air - The air outside buildings and structures, including, but not limited to, the air under a bridge or in an open ferry dock.Owner/operator - Any person who owns, leases, operates, controls, or supervises the facility being demolished or renovated or any person who owns, leases, operates, controls, or supervises the demolition or renovation operation, or both.Penetrating encapsulant - Encapsulant that is absorbed into the ACM matrix without leaving a surface layer.Personal sampling/monitoring - Representative air samples obtained in the breathing zone for one or workers within the regulated area using a filter cassette and a calibrated air sampling pump to determine asbestos exposure. Permissible exposure limit (PEL) - The level of exposure OSHA allows for an 8 hour time weighted average. For asbestos fibers, the eight (8) hour time weighted average PEL is 0.1 fibers per cubic centimeter (0.1 f/cc) of air and the 30-minute Excursion Limit is 1.0 fibers per cubic centimeter (1 f/cc).Personal protective equipment (PPE) – equipment designed to protect user from injury and/or specific job hazard. Such equipment may include protective clothing, hard hats, safety glasses, and respirators. Pipe tunnel – An area, typically located adjacent to mechanical spaces or boiler rooms in which the pipes servicing the heating system in the building are routed to allow the pipes to access heating elements. These areas may contain asbestos pipe insulation, asbestos fittings, or asbestos-contaminated soil.Polarized light microscopy (PLM) - Light microscopy using dispersion staining techniques and refractive indices to identify and quantify the type(s) of asbestos present in a bulk sample.Polyethylene sheeting - Strong plastic barrier material 4 to 6 mils thick, semi-transparent, flame retardant per NFPA 241.Positive/negative fit check - A method of verifying the seal of a facepiece respirator by temporarily occluding the filters and breathing in (inhaling) and then temporarily occluding the exhalation valve and breathing out (exhaling) while checking for inward or outward leakage of the respirator respectively.Presumed ACM (PACM) - Thermal system insulation, surfacing, and flooring material installed in buildings prior to 1981. If the building owner has actual knowledge, or should have known through the exercise of due diligence that other materials are ACM, they too must be treated as PACM. The designation of PACM may be rebutted pursuant to 29 CFR 1926.1101 (b).Professional IH - An IH who meets the definition requirements of AIHA; meets the definition requirements of OSHA as a "Competent Person" at 29 CFR 1926.1101 (b); has completed two specialized EPA approved courses on management and supervision of asbestos abatement projects; has formal training in respiratory protection and waste disposal; and has a minimum of four projects of similar complexity with this project of which at least three projects serving as the supervisory IH. The PIH may be either the VA’s PIH (VPIH) or Contractor’s PIH (CPIH/CIH).Project designer - A person who has successfully completed the training requirements for an asbestos abatement project designer as required by 40 CFR 763 Appendix C, Part I; (B)(5).Assigned protection factor - A value assigned by OSHA/NIOSH to indicate the expected protection provided by each respirator class, when the respirator is properly selected and worn correctly. The number indicates the reduction of exposure level from outside to inside the respirator facepiece.Qualitative fit test (QLFT) - A fit test using a challenge material that can be sensed by the wearer if leakage in the respirator occurs.Quantitative fit test (QNFT) - A fit test using a challenge material which is quantified outside and inside the respirator thus allowing the determination of the actual fit factor. Regulated area - An area established by the employer to demarcate where Class I, II, III asbestos work is conducted, and any adjoining area where debris and waste from such asbestos work may accumulate; and a work area within which airborne concentrations of asbestos exceed, or there is a reasonable possibility they may exceed the PEL.Regulated ACM (RACM) - Friable ACM; Category I non-friable ACM that has become friable; Category I non-friable ACM that will be or has been subjected to sanding, grinding, cutting, or abrading or; Category II non-friable ACM that has a high probability of becoming or has become crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by the forces expected to act on the material in the course of the demolition or renovation operation.Removal - All operations where ACM, PACM and/or RACM is taken out or stripped from structures or substrates, including demolition operations.Renovation - Altering a facility or one or more facility components in any way, including the stripping or removal of asbestos from a facility component which does not involve demolition activity.Repair - Overhauling, rebuilding, reconstructing, or reconditioning of structures or substrates, including encapsulation or other repair of ACM or PACM attached to structures or substrates.Shower room - The portion of the PDF where personnel shower before leaving the regulated area. Supplied air respirator (SAR) - A respiratory protection system that supplies minimum Grade D respirable air per ANSI/Compressed Gas Association Commodity Specification for Air, G-7.1-1989.Surfacing ACM - A material containing more than 1 percent asbestos that is sprayed, troweled on or otherwise applied to surfaces for acoustical, fireproofing and other purposes.Surfactant - A chemical added to water to decrease water's surface tension thus making it more penetrating into ACM.Thermal system ACM - A material containing more than 1 percent asbestos applied to pipes, fittings, boilers, breeching, tanks, ducts, or other structural components to prevent heat loss or gain.Transmission electron microscopy (TEM) - A microscopy method that can identify and count asbestos fibers.VA Professional Industrial Hygienist (VPIH/CIH) – The Department of Veterans Affairs Professional Industrial Hygienist must meet the qualifications of a PIH, and may be a Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH).VA Representative - The VA official responsible for on-going project work.Visible emissions - Any emissions, which are visually detectable without the aid of instruments, coming from ACM/PACM/RACM/ACS or ACM waste material.Waste/Equipment decontamination facility (W/EDF) – The area in which equipment is decontaminated before removal from the regulated area.Waste generator - Any owner or operator whose act or process produces asbestos-containing waste material.Waste shipment record - The shipping document, required to be originated and signed by the waste generator, used to track and substantiate the disposition of asbestos-containing waste material.Wet cleaning - The process of thoroughly eliminating, by wet methods, any asbestos contamination from surfaces or objects. 4.3 REFERENCED STANDARDS ORGANIZATIONSThe following acronyms or abbreviations as referenced in contract/specification documents are defined to mean the associated names. Names and addresses may be subject to change.VA Department of Veterans Affairs810 Vermont Avenue, NWWashington, DC 20420AIHA American Industrial Hygiene Association2700 Prosperity Avenue, Suite 250Fairfax, VA 22031703-849-8888ANSI American National Standards Institute1430 BroadwayNew York, NY 10018212-354-3300ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials1916 Race St.Philadelphia, PA 19103215-299-5400CFR Code of Federal RegulationsGovernment Printing OfficeWashington, DC 20420CGA Compressed Gas Association1235 Jefferson Davis HighwayArlington, VA 22202703-979-0900CS Commercial Standard of the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)U. S. Department of CommerceGovernment Printing OfficeWashington, DC 20420EPA Environmental Protection Agency401 M St., SWWashington, DC 20460202-382-3949MIL-STD Military Standards/Standardization DivisionOffice of the Assistant Secretary of DefenseWashington, DC 20420NIST National Institute for Standards and TechnologyU. S. Department of CommerceGaithersburg, MD 20234301-921-1000NEC National Electrical Code (by NFPA)NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association2101 L Street, N.W.Washington, DC 20037NFPA National Fire Protection Association1 Batterymarch ParkP.O. Box 9101Quincy, MA 02269-9101800-344-3555NIOSH National Institutes for Occupational Safety and Health4676 Columbia ParkwayCincinnati, OH 45226513-533-8236OSHA Occupational Safety and Health AdministrationU.S. Department of LaborGovernment Printing OfficeWashington, DC 20402UL Underwriters Laboratory333 Pfingsten Rd.Northbrook, IL 60062312-272-88001.5 APPLICABLE CODES AND REGULATIONS1.5.1 GENERAL APPLICABILITY OF CODES, REGULATIONS, AND STANDARDSA.All work under this contract shall be done in strict accordance with all applicable Federal, State, and local regulations, standards and codes governing asbestos abatement, and any other trade work done in conjunction with the abatement. All applicable codes, regulations and standards are adopted into this specification and will have the same force and effect as this specification.B.The most recent edition of any relevant regulation, standard, document or code shall be in effect. Where conflict among the requirements or with these specifications exists, the most stringent requirement(s) shall be utilized.C.Copies of all standards, regulations, codes and other applicable documents, including this specification and those listed in Section 1.5 shall be available at the worksite in the clean change area of the worker decontamination system.1.5.2 Asbestos Abatement CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITYThe Asbestos Abatement Contractor (Contractor) shall assume full responsibility and liability for compliance with all applicable Federal, State and Local regulations related to any and all aspects of the asbestos abatement project. The Contractor is responsible for providing and maintaining training, accreditations, medical exams, medical records, personal protective equipment (PPE) including respiratory protection including respirator fit testing, as required by applicable Federal, State and Local regulations. The Contractor shall hold the VA and VPIH/CIH consultants harmless for any Contractor’s failure to comply with any applicable work, packaging, transporting, disposal, safety, health, or environmental requirement on the part of himself, his employees, or his subcontractors. The Contractor will incur all costs of the CPIH/CIH, including all sampling/analytical costs to assure compliance with OSHA/EPA/State requirements related to failure to comply with the regulations applicable to the work.1.5.3 FEDERAL REQUIREMENTSFederal requirements which govern of asbestos abatement include, but are not limited to, the following regulations. A.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)1.Title 29 CFR 1926.1101 - Construction Standard for Asbestos2.Title 29 CFR 1910 Subpart I - Personal Protective Equipment3.Title 29 CFR 1910.134 - Respiratory Protection4.Title 29 CFR 1926 - Construction Industry Standards5.Title 29 CFR 1910.1020 - Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records6.Title 29 CFR 1910.1200 - Hazard Communication7.Title 29 CFR 1910 Subpart K - Medical and First AidB.Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):1.40 CFR 61 Subpart A and M (Revised Subpart B) - National Emission Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants - Asbestos.2.40 CFR 763.80 - Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA)C.Department of Transportation (DOT)Title 49 CFR 100 - 185 – Transportation1.5.4 STATE REQUIREMENTSWest Virginia State requirements apply to the asbestos abatement work, disposal and clearance. 1.5.5 LOCAL REQUIREMENTSIf local requirements are more stringent than federal or state standards, the local standards are to be followed.1.5.6 STANDARDSA.Standards which govern asbestos abatement activities include, but are not limited to, the following:1.American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z9.2-79 - Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems and ANSI Z88.2 - Practices for Respiratory Protection.2.Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 586-90 - UL Standard for Safety of HEPA Filter Units, 7th Edition.B.Standards which govern encapsulation work include, but are not limited to the following:1.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)C.Standards which govern the fire and safety concerns in abatement work include, but are not limited to, the following:1.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations.2.NFPA 701 - Standard Methods for Fire Tests for Flame Resistant Textiles and Film.3.NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code1.5.7 EPA GUIDANCE DOCUMENTSA.EPA guidance documents which discuss asbestos abatement work activities are listed below. These documents are made part of this section by reference. EPA publications can be ordered from (800) 424-9065.B.Guidance for Controlling ACM in Buildings (Purple Book) EPA 560/5-85-024C.Asbestos Waste Management Guidance EPA 530-SW-85-007D.A Guide to Respiratory Protection for the Asbestos Abatement Industry EPA-560-OPTS-86-001E.Guide to Managing Asbestos in Place (Green Book) TS 799 20T July 19901.5.8 NOTICESA.State and Local agencies: Send written notification as required by state and local regulations including the local fire department prior to beginning any work on ACM as follows:B.Copies of notifications shall be submitted to the VA for the facility's records in the same time frame notification are given to EPA, State, and Local authorities.1.5.9 PERMITS/LICENSESA.The contractor shall apply for and have all required permits and licenses to perform asbestos abatement work as required by Federal, State, and Local regulations.1.5.10 POSTING AND FILING OF REGULATIONSA.Maintain two (2) copies of applicable federal, state, and local regulations. Post one copy of each in the clean room at the regulated area where workers will have daily access to the regulations and keep another copy in the Contractor's office.1.5.11 VA RESPONSIBILITIESPrior to commencement of work:A.Notify occupants adjacent to regulated areas of project dates and requirements for relocation, if needed. Arrangements must be made prior to starting work for relocation of desks, files, equipment and personal possessions to avoid unauthorized access into the regulated area. Note: Notification of adjacent personnel is required by OSHA in 29 CFR 1926.1101 (k) to prevent unnecessary or unauthorized access to the regulated area.B.Submit to the Contractor results of background air sampling; including location of samples, person who collected the samples, equipment utilized, calibration data and method of analysis. During abatement, submit to the Contractor, results of bulk material analysis and air sampling data collected during the course of the abatement. This information shall not release the Contractor from any responsibility for OSHA compliance.1.5.12 EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN AND ARRANGEMENTSA.An Emergency Action Plan shall be developed prior to commencing abatement activities and shall be agreed to by the Contractor and the VA. The Plan shall meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.38 (a);(b).B.Emergency procedures shall be in written form and prominently posted in the clean room and equipment room of the decontamination unit. Everyone, prior to entering the regulated area, must read and sign these procedures to acknowledge understanding of the regulated area layout, location of emergency exits and emergency procedures.C.Emergency planning shall include written notification of police, fire, and emergency medical personnel of planned abatement activities; work schedule; layout of regulated area; and access to the regulated area, particularly barriers that may affect response capabilities.D.Emergency planning shall include consideration of fire, explosion, hazardous atmospheres, electrical hazards, slips/trips and falls, confined spaces, and heat stress illness. Written procedures for response to emergency situations shall be developed and employee training in procedures shall be provided.E.Employees shall be trained in regulated area/site evacuation procedures in the event of workplace emergencies.1.For non life-threatening situations - employees injured or otherwise incapacitated shall decontaminate following normal procedures with assistance from fellow workers, if necessary, before exiting the regulated area to obtain proper medical treatment.2.For life-threatening injury or illness, worker decontamination shall take least priority after measures to stabilize the injured worker, remove them from the regulated area, and secure proper medical treatment.F.Telephone numbers of any/all emergency response personnel shall be prominently posted in the clean room, along with the location of the nearest telephone.G.The Contractor shall provide verification of first aid/CPR training for personnel responsible for providing first aid/CPR. OSHA requires medical assistance within 3-4 minutes of a life-threatening injury/illness. Bloodborne Pathogen training shall also be verified for those personnel required to provide first aid/CPR.H.The Emergency Action Plan shall provide for a Contingency Plan in the event that an incident occurs that may require the modification of the standard operating procedures during abatement. Such incidents include, but are not limited to, fire; accident; power failure; negative pressure failure; and supplied air system failure. The Contractor shall detail procedures to be followed in the event of an incident assuring that asbestos abatement work is stopped and wetting is continued until correction of the problem.1.5.13 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETINGPrior to commencing the work, the Contractor shall meet with the VA Certified Industrial Hygienist (VPCIH) to present and review, as appropriate, the items following this paragraph. The Contractor's Competent Person(s) who will be on-site shall participate in the pre-start meeting. The pre-start meeting is to discuss and determine procedures to be used during the project. At this meeting, the Contractor shall provide:A.Proof of Contractor licensing.B.Proof the Competent Person(s) is trained and accredited and approved for working in this State. Verification of the experience of the Competent Person(s) shall also be presented.C.A list of all workers who will participate in the project, including experience and verification of training and accreditation.D.A list of and verification of training for all personnel who have current first-aid/CPR training. A minimum of one person per shift must have adequate training.E.Current medical written opinions for all personnel working on-site meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1101 (m).F.Current fit-tests for all personnel wearing respirators on-site meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1101 (h) and Appendix C. G.A copy of the Contractor's Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan. In these procedures, the following information must be detailed, specific for this project.1.Regulated area preparation procedures;2.Notification requirements procedure of Contractor as required in 29 CFR 1926.1101 (d);3.Decontamination area set-up/layout and decontamination procedures for employees;4.Abatement methods/procedures and equipment to be used;5.Personal protective equipment to be used;H.At this meeting the Contractor shall provide all submittals as required.I.Procedures for handling, packaging and disposal of asbestos waste.J.Emergency Action Plan and Contingency Plan Procedures.1.6 PROJECT COORDINATIONThe following are the minimum administrative and supervisory personnel necessary for coordination of the work.1.6.1 PERSONNELA.Administrative and supervisory personnel shall consist of a qualified Competent Person(s) as defined by OSHA in the Construction Standards and the Asbestos Construction Standard; Contractor Professional Industrial Hygienist and Industrial Hygiene Technicians. These employees are the Contractor's representatives responsible for compliance with these specifications and all other applicable requirements.B.Non-supervisory personnel shall consist of an adequate number of qualified personnel to meet the schedule requirements of the project. Personnel shall meet required qualifications. Personnel utilized on-site shall be pre-approved by the VA representative. A request for approval shall be submitted for any person to be employed during the project giving the person's name; social security number; qualifications; accreditation card with color picture; Certificate of Worker's Acknowledgment; and Affidavit of Medical Surveillance and Respiratory Protection and current Respirator Fit Test.C.Minimum qualifications for Contractor and assigned personnel are:1.The Contractor has conducted within the last three (3) years, three (3) projects of similar complexity and dollar value as this project; has not been cited and penalized for serious violations of federal (and state as applicable) EPA and OSHA asbestos regulations in the past three (3) years; has adequate liability/occurrence insurance for asbestos work as required by the state; is licensed in applicable states; has adequate and qualified personnel available to complete the work; has comprehensive standard operating procedures for asbestos work; has adequate materials, equipment and supplies to perform the work.2.The Competent Person has four (4) years of abatement experience of which two (2) years were as the Competent Person on the project; meets the OSHA definition of a Competent Person; has been the Competent Person on two (2) projects of similar size and complexity as this project within the past three (3) years; has completed EPA AHERA/OSHA/State/Local training requirements/accreditation(s) and refreshers; and has all required OSHA documentation related to medical and respiratory protection.3.The Contractor Professional Industrial Hygienist/CIH (CPIH/CIH) shall have five (5) years of monitoring experience and supervision of asbestos abatement projects; has participated as senior IH on five (5) abatement projects, three (3) of which are similar in size and complexity as this project; has developed at least one complete standard operating procedure for asbestos abatement; has trained abatement personnel for three (3) years; has specialized EPA AHERA/OSHA training in asbestos abatement management, respiratory protection, waste disposal and asbestos inspection; has completed the NIOSH 582 Course or equivalent, Contractor/Supervisor course; and has appropriate medical/respiratory protection records/documentation.4.The Abatement Personnel shall have completed the EPA AHERA/OSHA abatement worker course; have training on the standard operating procedures of the Contractor; has one year of asbestos abatement experience within the past three (3) years of similar size and complexity; has applicable medical and respiratory protection documentation; has certificate of training/current refresher and State accreditation/license.All personnel should be in compliance with OSHA construction safety training as applicable and submit certification.1.7 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION1.7.1 GENERAL - RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAMThe Contractor shall develop and implement a written Respiratory Protection Program (RPP) which is in compliance with the January 8, 1998 OSHA requirements found at 29 CFR 1926.1101 and 29 CFR 1910.Subpart I;134. ANSI Standard Z88.2-1992 provides excellent guidance for developing a respiratory protection program. All respirators used must be NIOSH approved for asbestos abatement activities. The written RPP shall, at a minimum, contain the basic requirements found at 29 CFR 1910.134 (c)(1)(i - ix) - Respiratory Protection Program.1.7.2 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM COORDINATORThe Respiratory Protection Program Coordinator (RPPC) must be identified and shall have two (2) years experience coordinating RPP of similar size and complexity. The RPPC must submit a signed statement attesting to the fact that the program meets the above requirements.1.7.3 SELECTION AND USE OF RESPIRATORSThe procedure for the selection and use of respirators must be submitted to the VA as part of the Contractor's qualifications. The procedure must written clearly enough for workers to understand. A copy of the Respiratory Protection Program must be available in the clean room of the decontamination unit for reference by employees or authorized visitors.1.7.4 MINIMUM RESPIRATORY PROTECTIONMinimum respiratory protection shall be a full face powered air purifying respirator when fiber levels are maintained consistently at or below 0.5 f/cc. A higher level of respiratory protection may be provided or required, depending on fiber levels. Respirator selection shall meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1101 (h); Table 1, except as indicated in this paragraph. Abatement personnel must have a respirator for their exclusive use.1.7.5 MEDICAL WRITTEN OPINIONNo employee shall be allowed to wear a respirator unless a physician or other licensed health care professional has provided a written determination they are medically qualified to wear the class of respirator to be used on the project while wearing whole body impermeable garments and subjected to heat or cold stress.1.7.6 RESPIRATOR FIT TESTAll personnel wearing respirators shall have a current qualitative/quantitative fit test which was conducted in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.134 (f) and Appendix A. Quantitative fit tests shall be done for PAPRs which have been put into a motor/blower failure mode.1.7.7 RESPIRATOR FIT CHECKThe Competent Person shall assure that the positive/negative pressure user seal check is done each time the respirator is donned by an employee. Head coverings must cover respirator head straps. Any situation that prevents an effective facepiece to face seal as evidenced by failure of a user seal check shall preclude that person from wearing a respirator inside the regulated area until resolution of the problem. 1.7.8 MAINTENANCE AND CARE OF RESPIRATORSThe Respiratory Protection Program Coordinator shall submit evidence and documentation showing compliance with 29 CFR 1910.134 (h) Maintenance and Care of Respirators.1.7.9 SUPPLIED AIR SYSTEMSIf a supplied air system is used, the system shall meet all requirements of 29 CFR 1910.134 and the ANSI/Compressed Gas Association (CGA) Commodity Specification for Air current requirements for Type 1 - Grade D breathing air. Low pressure systems are not allowed to be used on asbestos abatement projects. Supplied Air respirator use shall be in accordance with EPA/NIOSH publication EPA-560-OPTS-86-001 "A Guide to Respiratory Protection for the Asbestos Abatement Industry". The competent person on site will be responsible for the supplied air system to ensure the safety of the worker.1.8 WORKER PROTECTION1.8.1 TRAINING OF ABATEMENT PERSONNELPrior to beginning any abatement activity, all personnel shall be trained in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 (k)(9) and any additional State/Local requirements. Training must include, at a minimum, the elements listed at 29 CFR 1926.1101 (k)(9)(viii). Training shall have been conducted by a third party, EPA/State approved trainer meeting the requirements of EPA 40 CFR 763 Appendix C (AHERA MAP). Initial training certificates and current refresher and accreditation proof must be submitted for each person working at the site.1.8.2 MEDICAL EXAMINATIONSMedical examinations meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1101 (m) shall be provided for all personnel working in the regulated area, regardless of exposure levels. A current physician's written opinion as required by 29 CFR 1926.1101 (m)(4) shall be provided for each person and shall include in the medical opinion the person has been evaluated for working in a heat and cold stress environment while wearing personal protective equipment (PPE) and is able to perform the work without risk of material health impairment.1.8.3 REGULATED AREA ENTRY PROCEDUREThe Competent Person shall ensure that each time workers enter the regulated area; they remove ALL street clothes in the clean room of the decontamination unit and put on new disposable coveralls, head coverings, a clean respirator, and then proceed through the shower room to the equipment room where they put on non-disposable required personal protective equipment.1.8.4 DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURE The Competent Person shall require all personnel to adhere to following decontamination procedures whenever they leave the regulated area.A.When exiting the regulated area, remove disposable coveralls, and ALL other clothes, disposable head coverings, and foot coverings or boots in the equipment room.B.Still wearing the respirator and completely naked, proceed to the shower. Showering is MANDATORY. Care must be taken to follow reasonable procedures in removing the respirator to avoid inhaling asbestos fibers while showering. The following procedure is required as a minimum:1.Thoroughly wet body including hair and face. If using a PAPR hold blower above head to keep filters dry.2.With respirator still in place, thoroughly decontaminate body, hair, respirator face piece, and all other parts of the respirator except the blower and battery pack on a PAPR. Pay particular attention to cleaning the seal between the face and respirator facepiece and under the respirator straps.3.Take a deep breath, hold it and/or exhale slowly, completely wetting hair, face, and respirator. While still holding breath, remove the respirator and hold it away from the face before starting to breathe.C.Carefully decontaminate the facepiece of the respirator inside and out. If using a PAPR, shut down using the following sequence: a) first cap inlets to filters; b) turn blower off to keep debris collected on the inlet side of the filter from dislodging and contaminating the outside of the unit; c) thoroughly decontaminate blower and hoses; d) carefully decontaminate battery pack with a wet rag being cautious of getting water in the battery pack thus preventing destruction. (THIS PROCEDURE IS NOT A SUBSTITUTE FOR RESPIRATOR CLEANING!)D.Shower and wash body completely with soap and water. Rinse thoroughly. E.Rinse shower room walls and floor to drain prior to exiting.F.Proceed from shower to clean room; dry off and change into street clothes or into new disposable work clothing.1.8.5 REGULATED AREA REQUIREMENTSThe Competent Person shall meet all requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1101 (o) and assure that all requirements for regulated areas at 29 CFR 1926.1101 (e) are met. All personnel in the regulated area shall not be allowed to eat, drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, apply cosmetics, or in any way interfere with the fit of their respirator.1.9 DECONTAMINATION FACILITIES1.9.1 DESCRIPTIONProvide each regulated area with separate personnel decontamination facilities (PDF) and waste/equipment decontamination facilities (W/EDF). Ensure that the PDF are the only means of ingress and egress to the regulated area and that all equipment, bagged waste, and other material exit the regulated area only through the W/EDF. 1.9.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTSAll personnel entering or exiting a regulated area must go through the PDF and shall follow the requirements at 29 CFR 1926.1101 (j)(1) and these specifications. All waste, equipment and contaminated materials must exit the regulated area through the W/EDF and be decontaminated in accordance with these specifications. Walls and ceilings of the PDF and W/EDF must be constructed of a minimum of 3 layers of 6 mil opaque fire retardant polyethylene sheeting and be securely attached to existing building components and/or an adequate temporary framework. A minimum of 3 layers of 6 mil poly shall also be used to cover the floor under the PDF and W/EDF units. Construct doors so that they overlap and secure to adjacent surfaces. Weight inner doorway sheets with layers of duct tape so that they close quickly after release. Put arrows on sheets so they show direction of travel and overlap. If the building adjacent area is occupied, construct a solid barrier on the occupied side(s) to protect the sheeting and reduce potential for non-authorized personnel entering the regulated area.1.9.3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES TO THE PDF and W/EDFThe Competent Person shall provide temporary water service connections to the PDF and W/EDF. Backflow prevention must be provided at the point of connection to the VA system. Water supply must be of adequate pressure and meet requirements of 29 CFR 1910.141(d)(3). Provide adequate temporary overhead electric power with ground fault circuit interruption (GFCI) protection. Provide a sub-panel equipped with GFCI protection for all temporary power in the clean room. Provide adequate lighting to provide a minimum of 50 foot candles in the PDF and W/EDF. Provide temporary heat, if needed, to maintain 70oF throughout the PDF and W/EDF. 1.9.4 PERSONNEL DECONTAMINATION FACILITY (PDF)The Competent Person shall provide a PDF consisting of shower room which is contiguous to a clean room and equipment room which is connected to the regulated area. The PDF must be sized to accommodate the number of personnel scheduled for the project. The shower room, located in the center of the PDF, shall be fitted with as many portable showers as necessary to insure all employees can complete the entire decontamination procedure within 15 minutes. The PDF shall be constructed of opaque poly for privacy. The PDF shall be constructed to eliminate any parallel routes of egress without showering.1.Clean Room: The clean room must be physically and visually separated from the rest of the building to protect the privacy of personnel changing clothes. The clean room shall be constructed of at least 3 layers of 6 mil opaque fire retardant poly to provide an air tight room. Provide a minimum of 2 - 900 mm (3 foot) wide 6 mil poly opaque fire retardant doorways. One doorway shall be the entry from outside the PDF and the second doorway shall be to the shower room of the PDF. The floor of the clean room shall be maintained in a clean, dry condition. Shower overflow shall not be allowed into the clean room. Provide 1 storage locker per person. A portable fire extinguisher, minimum 10 pounds capacity, Type ABC, shall be provided in accordance with OSHA and NFPA Standard 10. All persons entering the regulated area shall remove all street clothing in the clean room and dress in disposable protective clothing and respiratory protection. Any person entering the clean room does so either from the outside with street clothing on or is coming from the shower room completely naked and thoroughly washed. Females required to enter the regulated area shall be ensured of their privacy throughout the entry/exit process by posting guards at both entry points to the PDF so no male can enter or exit the PDF during her stay in the PDF.2.Shower Room: The Competent Person shall assure that the shower room is a completely water tight compartment to be used for the movement of all personnel from the clean room to the equipment room and for the showering of all personnel going from the equipment room to the clean room. Each shower shall be constructed so water runs down the walls of the shower and into a drip pan. Install a freely draining smooth floor on top of the shower pan. The shower room shall be separated from the rest of the building and from the clean room and equipment room using air tight walls made from at least 3 layers of 6 mil opaque fire retardant poly. The shower shall be equipped with a shower head and controls, hot and cold water, drainage, soap dish and continuous supply of soap, and shall be maintained in a sanitary condition throughout its use. The controls shall be arranged so an individual can shower without assistance. Provide a flexible hose shower head, hose bibs and all other items shown on Shower Schematic. Waste water will be pumped to a drain after being filtered through a minimum of a 100 micron sock in the shower drain; a 20 micron filter; and a final 5 micron filter. Filters will be changed a minimum of daily or more often as needed. Filter changes must be done in the shower to prevent loss of contaminated water. Hose down all shower surfaces after each shift and clean any debris from the shower pan. Residue is to be disposed of as asbestos waste.3.Equipment Room: The Competent Person shall provide an equipment room which shall be an air tight compartment for the storage of work equipment/tools, reusable personal protective equipment, except for a respirator and for use as a gross decontamination area for personnel exiting the regulated area. The equipment room shall be separated from the regulated area by a minimum 3 foot wide door made with 2 layers of 6 mil opaque fire retardant poly. The equipment room shall be separated from the regulated area, the shower room and the rest of the building by air tight walls and ceiling constructed of a minimum of 3 layers of 6 mil opaque fire retardant poly. Damp wipe all surfaces of the equipment room after each shift change. Provide an additional loose layer of 6 mil fire retardant poly per shift change and remove this layer after each shift. If needed, provide a temporary electrical sub-panel equipped with GFCI in the equipment room to accommodate any equipment required in the regulated area.4.The PDF shall be as follows: Clean room at the entrance followed by a shower room followed by an equipment room leading to the regulated area. Each doorway in the PDF shall be a minimum of 2 layers of 6 mil opaque fire retardant poly.1.9.5 WASTE/EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION FACILITY (W/EDF)The Competent Person shall provide an W/EDF consisting of a wash room, holding room, and clean room for removal of waste, equipment and contaminated material from the regulated area. Personnel shall not enter or exit the W/EDF except in the event of an emergency. Clean debris and residue in the W/EDF daily. All surfaces in the W/EDF shall be wiped/hosed down after each shift and all debris shall be cleaned from the shower pan. The W/EDF shall consist of the following:1.Wash Down Station: Provide an enclosed shower unit in the regulated area just outside the Wash Room as an equipment bag and container cleaning station.2.Wash Room: Provide a wash room for cleaning of bagged or containerized asbestos containing waste materials passed from the regulated area. Construct the wash room using 50 x 100 mm (2" x 4") wood framing and 3 layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly. Locate the wash room so that packaged materials, after being wiped clean, can be passed to the Holding Room. Doorways in the wash room shall be constructed of 2 layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly.3.Holding Room: Provide a holding room as a drop location for bagged materials passed from the wash room. Construct the holding room using 50 x 100 mm (2" x 4") wood framing and 3 layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly. The holding room shall be located so that bagged material cannot be passed from the wash room to the clean room unless it goes through the holding room. Doorways in the holding room shall be constructed of 2 layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly.4.Clean Room: Provide a clean room to isolate the holding room from the exterior of the regulated area. Construct the clean room using 2 x 4 wood framing and 2 layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly. The clean room shall be located so as to provide access to the holding room from the building exterior. Doorways to the clean room shall be constructed of 2 layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly. When a negative pressure differential system is used, a rigid enclosure separation between the W/EDF clean room and the adjacent areas shall be provided.5.The W/EDF shall be as follows: Wash Room leading to a Holding Room followed by a Clean Room leading to outside the regulated area. See diagram.1.9.6 WASTE/EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURESAt the washdown station in the regulated area, thoroughly wet clean contaminated equipment and/or sealed polyethylene bags and pass into Wash Room after visual inspection. When passing anything into the Wash Room, close all doorways of the W/EDF, other than the doorway between the washdown station and the Wash Room. Keep all outside personnel clear of the W/EDF. Once inside the Wash Room, wet clean the equipment and/or bags. After cleaning and inspection, pass items into the Holding Room. Close all doorways except the doorway between the Holding Room and the Clean Room. Workers from the Clean Room/Exterior shall enter the Holding Room and remove the decontaminated/cleaned equipment/bags for removal and disposal. These personnel will not be required to wear PPE. At no time shall personnel from the clean side be allowed to enter the Wash Room.PART 2 - PRODUCTS, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT2.1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Prior to the start of work, the contractor shall provide and maintain a sufficient quantity of materials and equipment to assure continuous and efficient work throughout the duration of the project. Work shall not start unless the following items have been delivered to the site and the CPIH/CIH has submitted verification to the VA's representative.A.All materials shall be delivered in their original package, container or bundle bearing the name of the manufacturer and the brand name (where applicable).B.Store all materials subject to damage off the ground, away from wet or damp surfaces and under cover sufficient enough to prevent damage or contamination. Flammable and combustible materials cannot be stored inside buildings. Replacement materials shall be stored outside of the regulated area until abatement is completed.C.The Contractor shall not block or hinder use of buildings by patients, staff, and visitors to the VA in partially occupied buildings by placing materials/equipment in any unauthorized location.D.The Competent Person shall inspect for damaged, deteriorating or previously used materials. Such materials shall not be used and shall be removed from the worksite and disposed of properly.E.Polyethylene sheeting for walls in the regulated area shall be a minimum of 4-mils. For floors and all other uses, sheeting of at least 6-mil shall be used in widths selected to minimize the frequency of joints. Fire retardant poly shall be used throughout.F.The method of attaching polyethylene sheeting shall be agreed upon in advance by the Contractor and the VA and selected to minimize damage to equipment and surfaces. Method of attachment may include any combination of moisture resistant duct tape furring strips, spray glue, staples, nails, screws, lumber and plywood for enclosures or other effective procedures capable of sealing polyethylene to dissimilar finished or unfinished surfaces under both wet and dry conditions.G.Polyethylene sheeting utilized for the PDF shall be opaque white or black in color, 6 mil fire retardant poly.H.Installation and plumbing hardware, showers, hoses, drain pans, sump pumps and waste water filtration system shall be provided by the Contractor.I.An adequate number of HEPA vacuums, scrapers, sprayers, nylon brushes, brooms, disposable mops, rags, sponges, staple guns, shovels, ladders and scaffolding of suitable height and length as well as meeting OSHA requirements, fall protection devices, water hose to reach all areas in the regulated area, airless spray equipment, and any other tools, materials or equipment required to conduct the abatement project. All electrically operated hand tools, equipment, electric cords shall be connected to GFCI protection.J.Special protection for objects in the regulated area shall be detailed (e.g., plywood over carpeting or hardwood floors to prevent damage from scaffolds, water and falling material).K.Disposal bags – 2 layers of 6 mil poly for asbestos waste shall be pre-printed with labels, markings and address as required by OSHA, EPA and DOT regulations.L.The VA shall be provided an advance copy of the MSDS as required for all hazardous chemicals under OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1200 - Hazard Communication in the pre-start meeting submittal. Chlorinated compounds shall not be used with any spray adhesive, mastic remover or other product. Appropriate encapsulant(s) shall be provided.M.OSHA DANGER demarcation signs, as many and as required by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101(k)(7) shall be provided and placed by the Competent Person. All other posters and notices required by Federal and State regulations shall be posted in the Clean Room.N.Adequate and appropriate PPE for the project and number of personnel/shifts shall be provided. All personal protective equipment issued must be based on a written hazard assessment conducted under 29 CFR 1910.132(d).2.2 MONITORING, INSPECTION AND TESTING2.2.1 GENERALA.Perform throughout abatement work monitoring, inspection and testing inside and around the regulated area in accordance with the OSHA requirements and these specifications. OSHA requires that the employee exposure to asbestos must not exceed 0.1 fiber per cubic centimeter (f/cc) of air, averaged over an 8-hour work shift. The CPIH/CIH is responsible for and shall inspect and oversee the performance of the Contractor IH Technician. The IH Technician shall continuously inspect and monitor conditions inside the regulated area to ensure compliance with these specifications. In addition, the CPIH/CIH shall personally manage air sample collection, analysis, and evaluation for personnel, regulated area, and adjacent area samples to satisfy OSHA requirements. Additional inspection and testing requirements are also indicated in other parts of this specification.B.The VA will employ an independent industrial hygienist (VPIH/CIH) consultant and/or use its own IH to perform various services on behalf of the VA. The VPIH/CIH will perform the necessary monitoring, inspection, testing, and other support services to ensure that VA patients, employees, and visitors will not be adversely affected by the abatement work, and that the abatement work proceeds in accordance with these specifications, that the abated areas or abated buildings have been successfully decontaminated. The work of the VPIH/CIH consultant in no way relieves the Contractor from their responsibility to perform the work in accordance with contract/specification requirements, to perform continuous inspection, monitoring and testing for the safety of their employees, and to perform other such services as specified. The cost of the VPIH/CIH and their services will be borne by the VA except for any repeat of final inspection and testing that may be required due to unsatisfactory initial results. Any repeated final inspections and/or testing, if required, will be paid for by the Contractor.C.If fibers counted by the VPIH/CIH during abatement work, either inside or outside the regulated area, utilizing the NIOSH 7400 air monitoring method, exceed the specified respective limits, the Contractor shall stop work. The Contractor may request confirmation of the results by analysis of the samples by TEM. Request must be in writing and submitted to the VA's representative. Cost for the confirmation of results will be borne by the Contractor for both the collection and analysis of samples and for the time delay that may/does result for this confirmation. Confirmation sampling and analysis will be the responsibility of the CPIH with review and approval of the VPIH/CIH. An agreement between the CPIH/CIH and the VPIH/CIH shall be reached on the exact details of the confirmation effort, in writing, including such things as the number of samples, location, collection, quality control on-site, analytical laboratory, interpretation of results and any follow-up actions. This written agreement shall be co-signed by the IH's and delivered to the VA's representative.2.2.2 SCOPE OF SERVICES OF THE VPIH/CIH CONSULTANTA.The purpose of the work of the VPIH/CIH is to: assure quality; adherence to the specification; resolve problems; prevent the spread of contamination beyond the regulated area; and assure clearance at the end of the project. In addition, their work includes performing the final inspection and testing to determine whether the regulated area or building has been adequately decontaminated. All air monitoring is to be done utilizing PCM/TEM. The VPIH/CIH will perform the following tasks:1.Task 1: Establish background levels before abatement begins by collecting background samples. Retain samples for possible TEM analysis.2.Task 2: Perform continuous air monitoring, inspection, and testing outside the regulated area during actual abatement work to detect any faults in the regulated area isolation and any adverse impact on the surroundings from regulated area activities.3.Task 3: Perform unannounced visits to spot check overall compliance of work with contract/specifications. These visits may include any inspection, monitoring, and testing inside and outside the regulated area and all aspects of the operation except personnel monitoring. 4.Task 4: Provide support to the VA representative such as evaluation of submittals from the Contractor, resolution of conflicts, interpret data, etc.5.Task 5: Perform, in the presence of the VA representative, final inspection and testing of a decontaminated regulated area at the conclusion of the abatement to certify compliance with all regulations and VA requirements/specifications.6.Task 6: Issue certificate of decontamination for each regulated area and project report.B.All documentation, inspection results and testing results generated by the VPIH/CIH will be available to the Contractor for information and consideration. The Contractor shall cooperate with and support the VPIH/CIH for efficient and smooth performance of their work.C.The monitoring and inspection results of the VPIH/CIH will be used by the VA to issue any Stop Removal orders to the Contractor during abatement work and to accept or reject a regulated area or building as decontaminated.2.2.3 MONITORING, INSPECTION AND TESTING BY gOVERNMENT CPIH/CIHThe Governments’ CPIH/CIH is responsible for managing all monitoring, inspections, and testing required by these specifications, as well as any and all regulatory requirements adopted by these specifications. The CPIH/CIH is responsible for the continuous monitoring of all subsystems and procedures which could affect the health and safety of the Contractor’s personnel. Safety and health conditions and the provision of those conditions inside the regulated area for all persons entering the regulated area is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor/Competent Person. The person performing the personnel and area air monitoring inside the regulated area shall be an IH Technician, who shall be trained and shall have specialized field experience in sampling and analysis. The IH Technician shall have successfully completed a NIOSH 582 Course or equivalent and provide documentation. The IH Technician shall participate in the AIHA Asbestos Analysis Registry or participate in the Proficiency Analytic Testing program of AIHA for fiber counting quality control assurance. The IH Technician shall also be an accredited EPA AHERA/State Contractor/Supervisor or Abatement Worker and Building Inspector. The IH Technician shall have participated in five abatement projects collecting personal and area samples as well as responsibility for documentation on substantially similar projects in size and scope. The analytic laboratory used by the Contractor to analyze the samples shall be AIHA accredited for asbestos PAT and approved by the VA prior to start of the project. A daily log shall be maintained by the CPIH/CIH or IH Technician, documenting all OSHA requirements for air personal monitoring for asbestos in 29 CFR 1926.1101(f), (g) and Appendix A. This log shall be made available to the VA representative and the VPIH/CIH upon request. The log will contain, at a minimum, information on personnel or area samples, other persons represented by the sample, the date of sample collection, start and stop times for sampling, sample volume, flow rate, and fibers/cc. The CPIH/CIH shall collect and analyze samples for each representative job being done in the regulated area, i.e., removal, wetting, clean-up, and load-out. No fewer than two personal samples per shift shall be collected and one area sample per 1,000 square feet of regulated area where abatement is taking place and one sample per shift in the clean room area shall be collected. In addition to the continuous monitoring required, the CPIH/CIH will perform inspection and testing at the final stages of abatement for each regulated area as specified in the CPIH/CIH responsibilities. Additionally, the CPIH/CIH will monitor and record pressure readings within the containment daily with a minimum of two readings at the beginning and at the end of a shift, and submit the data in the daily report. 2.3 ASBESTOS hAZARD aBATEMENT pLANThe Contractor shall have established an Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan (AHAP) in printed form and loose leaf folder consisting of simplified text, diagrams, sketches, and pictures that establish and explain clearly the procedures to be followed during all phases of the work by the Contractor's personnel. The AHAP must be modified as needed to address specific requirements of this project and the specifications. The AHAP shall be submitted for review and approval to the VA prior to the start of any abatement work. The minimum topics and areas to be covered by the AHAPs are:A.Minimum Personnel QualificationsB.Emergency Action Plan/Contingency Plans and ArrangementsC.Security and Safety ProceduresD.Respiratory Protection/Personal Protective Equipment Program and TrainingE.Medical Surveillance Program and RecordkeepingF.Regulated Area Requirements - Containment Barriers/Isolation of Regulated AreaG.Decontamination Facilities and Entry/Exit Procedures (PDF and W/EDF)H.Negative Pressure Systems RequirementsI.Monitoring, Inspections, and Testing J.Removal Procedures for ACM K.Removal of Contaminated Soil (if applicable)L.Encapsulation Procedures for ACMM.Disposal of ACM waste/equipmentN.Regulated Area Decontamination/Clean-upO.Regulated Area Visual and Air ClearanceP.Project Completion/Closeout2.4 SUBMITTALS2.4.1 PRE-START MEETING SUBMITTALSSubmit to the VA a minimum of 14 days prior to the pre-start meeting the following for review and approval. Meeting this requirement is a prerequisite for the pre-start meeting for this project:A.Submit a detailed work schedule for the entire project reflecting contract documents and the phasing/schedule requirements from the CPM chart.B.Submit a staff organization chart showing all personnel who will be working on the project and their capacity/function. Provide their qualifications, training, accreditations, and licenses, as appropriate. Provide a copy of the "Certificate of Worker's Acknowledgment" and the "Affidavit of Medical Surveillance and Respiratory Protection" for each person.C.Submit Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan developed specifically for this project, incorporating the requirements of the specifications, prepared, signed and dated by the CPIH/CIH.D.Submit the specifics of the materials and equipment to be used for this project with manufacturer names, model numbers, performance characteristics, pictures/diagrams, and number available for the following:1.Supplied air system, negative air machines, HEPA vacuums, air monitoring pumps, calibration devices, pressure differential monitoring device and emergency power generating system.2.Waste water filtration system, shower system, containment barriers.3.Encapsulants, surfactants, hand held sprayers, airless sprayers, glovebags, and fire extinguishers.4.Respirators, protective clothing, personal protective equipment. 5.Fire safety equipment to be used in the regulated area.E.Submit the name, location, and phone number of the approved landfill; proof/verification the landfill is approved for ACM disposal; the landfill's requirements for ACM waste; the type of vehicle to be used for transportation; and name, address, and phone number of subcontractor, if used. Proof of asbestos training for transportation personnel shall be provided.F.Submit required notifications and arrangements made with regulatory agencies having regulatory jurisdiction and the specific contingency/emergency arrangements made with local health, fire, ambulance, hospital authorities and any other notifications/arrangements.G.Submit the name, location and verification of the laboratory and/or personnel to be used for analysis of air and/or bulk samples. Personal air monitoring must be done in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101(f) and Appendix A. Area or clearance air monitoring shall be conducted in accordance with EPA AHERA protocols.H.Submit qualifications verification: Submit the following evidence of qualifications. Make sure that all references are current and verifiable by providing current phone numbers and documentation.1.Asbestos Abatement Company: Project experience within the past 3 years; listing projects first most similar to this project: Project Name; Type of Abatement; Duration; Cost; Reference Name/Phone Number; Final Clearance; Completion Date2.List of project(s) halted by owner, A/E, IH, regulatory agency in the last 3 years: Project Name; Reason; Date; Reference Name/Number; Resolution3.List asbestos regulatory citations (e.g., OSHA), notices of violations (e.g., Federal and state EPA), penalties, and legal actions taken against the company including and of the company’s officers (including damages paid) in the last 3 years. Provide copies and all information needed for verification.I.Submit information on personnel: Provide a resume; address each item completely; copies of certificates, accreditations, and licenses. Submit an affidavit signed by the CPIH/CIH stating that all personnel submitted below have medical records in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101(m) and 29 CFR 1910.20 and that the company has implemented a medical surveillance program and written respiratory protection program, and maintains recordkeeping in accordance with the above regulations. Submit the phone number and doctor/clinic/hospital used for medical evaluations.1.CPIH/CIH and IH Technician: Name; years of abatement experience; list of projects similar to this one; certificates, licenses, accreditations for proof of AHERA/OSHA specialized asbestos training; professional affiliations; number of workers trained; samples of training materials; samples of AHAPs developed; medical opinion; and current respirator fit test.petent Person(s)/Supervisor(s): Number; names; social security numbers; years of abatement experience as Competent Person/Supervisor; list of similar projects in size/complexity as Competent Person/Supervisor; as a worker; certificates, licenses, accreditations; proof of AHERA/OSHA specialized asbestos training; maximum number of personnel supervised on a project; medical opinion (asbestos surveillance and respirator use); and current respirator fit test.3.Workers: Numbers; names; social security numbers; years of abatement experience; certificates, licenses, accreditations; training courses in asbestos abatement and respiratory protection; medical opinion (asbestos surveillance and respirator use); and current respirator fit test.J.Submit copies of State license for asbestos abatement; copy of insurance policy, including exclusions with a letter from agent stating in plain language the coverage provided and the fact that asbestos abatement activities are covered by the policy; copy of AHAPs incorporating the requirements of this specification; information on who provides your training, how often; who provides medical surveillance, how often; who performs and how is personal air monitoring of abatement workers conducted; a list of references of independent laboratories/IH's familiar with your air monitoring and standard operating procedures; and copies of monitoring results of the five referenced projects listed and analytical method(s) used.K. Rented equipment must be decontaminated prior to returning to the rental agency.L.Submit, before the start of work, the manufacturer's technical data for all types of encapsulants, all MSDS and application instructions.2.4.2 SUBMITTALS DURING ABATEMENTA.The Competent Person shall maintain and submit a daily log at the regulated area documenting the dates and times of the following: purpose, attendees and summary of meetings; all personnel entering/exiting the regulated area; document and discuss the resolution of unusual events such as barrier breeching, equipment failures, emergencies, and any cause for stopping work; and representative air monitoring and results/TWA's/EL's. Submit this information daily to the VPIH/CIH.B.The CPIH/CIH shall document and maintain the inspection and approval of the regulated area preparation prior to start of work and daily during work.1.Removal of any poly barriers.2.Visual inspection/testing by the CPIH/CIH or IH Technician prior to application of lockdown encapsulant.3.Packaging and removal of ACM waste from regulated area.4.Disposal of ACM waste materials; copies of Waste Shipment Records/landfill receipts to the VA's representative on a weekly basis.2.4.3 SUBMITTALS AT COMPLETION OF ABATEMENTThe CPIH/CIH shall submit a project report consisting of the daily log book requirements and documentation of events during the abatement project including Waste Shipment Records signed by the landfill's agent. It will also include information on the containment and transportation of waste from the containment with applicable Chain of Custody forms. The report shall include a certificate of completion, signed and dated by the CPIH/CIH, in accordance with Attachment #1. All clearance and perimeter area samples must be submitted. The VA Representative will retain the abatement report after completion of the project and provide copies of the abatement report to VAMC Office of Engineer and the Safety Office.2.5 ENCAPSULANTS2.5.1 TYPES OF ENCAPSULANTSA.The following four types of encapsulants, if used, must comply with comply with performance requirements as stated in paragraph 2.6.2:1.Removal encapsulant - used as a wetting agent to remove ACM.2.Bridging encapsulant - provides a tough, durable coating on ACM.3.Penetrating encapsulant - penetrates/encapsulates ACM at least 13 mm (1/2"). 4.Lockdown encapsulant - seals microscopic fibers on surfaces after ACM removal.2.5.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSEncapsulants shall meet the latest requirements of EPA; shall not contain toxic or hazardous substances; or solvents; and shall comply with the following performance requirements:A.General Requirements for all Encapsulants:1.ASTM E84: Flame spread of 25; smoke emission of 50.2.University of Pittsburgh Protocol: Combustion Toxicity; zero mortality.3.ASTM C732: Accelerated Aging Test; Life Expectancy - 20 years.4.ASTM E96: Permeability - minimum of 0.4 perms.B.Bridging/Penetrating Encapsulants:1.ASTM E736: Cohesion/Adhesion Test - 24 kPa (50 lbs/ft2).2.ASTM E119: Fire Resistance - 3 hours (Classified by UL for use on fibrous/cementitious fireproofing).3.ASTM D2794: Gardner Impact Test; Impact Resistance - minimum 11.5 kg-mm (43 in/lb).4.ASTM D522: Mandrel Bend Test; Flexibility - no rupture or cracking.C.Lockdown Encapsulants:1.ASTM E119: Fire resistance - 3 hours (tested with fireproofing over encapsulant applied directly to steel member).2.ASTM E736: Bond Strength - 48 kPa (100 lbs/ft2) (test compatibility with cementitious and fibrous fireproofing).3.In certain situations, encapsulants may have to be applied to hot pipes/equipment. The encapsulant must be able to withstand high temperatures without cracking or off-gassing any noxious vapors during application.2.5.3 CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCEThe Contractor shall submit to the VA representative certification from the manufacturer indicating compliance with performance requirements for encapsulants when applied according to manufacturer recommendations.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 REGULATED AREA PREPARATIONS3.1.1 Site securityA.Regulated area access is to be restricted only to authorized, trained/accredited and protected personnel. These may include the Contractor's employees, employees of Subcontractors, VA employees and representatives, State and local inspectors, and any other designated individuals. A list of authorized personnel shall be established prior to commencing the project and be posted in the clean room of the decontamination unit.B.Entry into the regulated area by unauthorized individuals shall be reported immediately to the Competent Person by anyone observing the entry. The Competent Person shall immediately require any unauthorized person to leave the regulated area and then notify the VA Contracting Officer or VA Representative using the most expeditious means.C.A log book shall be maintained in the clean room of the decontamination unit. Anyone who enters the regulated area must record their name, affiliation, time in, and time out for each entry.D.Access to the regulated area shall be through a single decontamination unit. All other access (doors, windows, hallways, etc.) shall be sealed or locked to prevent entry to or exit from the regulated area. The only exceptions for this requirement are the waste/equipment load-out area which shall be sealed except during the removal of containerized asbestos waste from the regulated area, and emergency exits. Emergency exits shall not be locked from the inside; however, they shall be sealed with poly sheeting and taped until needed. In any situation where exposure to high temperatures which may result in a flame hazard, fire retardant poly sheeting must be used.E.The Contractor's Competent Person shall control site security during abatement operations in order to isolate work in progress and protect adjacent personnel. A 24 hour security system shall be provided at the entrance to the regulated area to assure that all entrants are logged in/out and that only authorized personnel are allowed entrance.F.The Contractor will have the VA's assistance in notifying adjacent personnel of the presence, location and quantity of ACM in the regulated area and enforcement of restricted access by the VA's employees.G.The regulated area shall be locked during non-working hours and secured by VA Representative or Competent Person. The VA Police should be informed of asbestos abatement regulated areas to provide security checks during facility rounds and emergency response.3.1.2. SIGNAGE and power managementA.Post OSHA DANGER signs meeting the specifications of OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 at any location and approaches to the regulated area where airborne concentrations of asbestos may exceed the PEL. Signs shall be posted at a distance sufficiently far enough away from the regulated area to permit any personnel to read the sign and take the necessary measures to avoid exposure. Additional signs will be posted following construction of the regulated area enclosure.B.Shut down and lock out/tag out electric power to the regulated area. Provide temporary power and lighting. Insure safe installation including GFCI of temporary power sources and equipment by compliance with all applicable electrical code and OSHA requirements for temporary electrical systems. Electricity shall be provided by the VA.C.Shut down and lock out/tag out heating, cooling, and air conditioning system (HVAC) components that are in, supply or pass through the regulated area. Investigate the regulated area and agree on pre-abatement condition with the VA's representative. Seal all intake and exhaust vents in the regulated area with duct tape and 2 layers of 6-mil poly. Also, seal any seams in system components that pass through the regulated area. Remove all contaminated HVAC system filters and place in labeled 6-mil polyethylene disposal bags for staging and eventual disposal as asbestos waste.3.1.3NEGATIVE PRESSURE FILTRATION SYSTEMThe Contractor shall provide enough HEPA negative air machines to effect > - 0.02” WCG pressure. The Competent Person shall determine the number of units needed for the regulated area by dividing the cubic feet in the regulated area by 15 and then dividing that result by the cubic feet per minute (CFM) for each unit to determine the number of units needed to effect > - 0.02” WCG pressure. Provide a standby unit in the event of machine failure and/or emergency in an adjacent area.NIOSH has done extensive studies and has determined that negative air machines typically operate at ~50% efficiency. The contractor shall consider this in their determination of number of units needed to provide > - 0.02” WCG pressure. The contractor shall use double the number of machines, based on their calculations, or submit proof their machines operate at stated capacities, at a 2" pressure drop across the filters.3.1.3.1 DESIGN AND LAYOUTA.Before start of work submit the design and layout of the regulated area and the negative air machines. The submittal shall indicate the number of, location of and size of negative air machines. The point(s) of exhaust, air flow within the regulated area, anticipated negative pressure differential, and supporting calculations for sizing shall be provided. In addition, submit the following:1.Method of supplying power to the units and designation/location of the panels.2.Description of testing method(s) for correct air volume and pressure differential. 3.If auxiliary power supply is to be provided for the negative air machines, provide a schematic diagram of the power supply and manufacturer's data on the generator and switch.3.1.3.2 NEGATIVE AIR MACHINES (HEPA UNITS)A.Negative Air Machine Cabinet: The cabinet shall be constructed of steel or other durable material capable of withstanding potential damage from rough handling and transportation. The width of the cabinet shall be less than 30" in order to fit in standard doorways. The cabinet must be factory sealed to prevent asbestos fibers from being released during use, transport, or maintenance. Any access to and replacement of filters shall be from the inlet end. The unit must be on casters or wheels.B.Negative Air Machine Fan: The rating capacity of the fan must indicate the CFM under actual operating conditions. Manufacturer's typically use "free-air" (no resistance) conditions when rating fans. The fan must be a centrifugal type fan.C.Negative Air Machine Final Filter: The final filter shall be a HEPA filter. The filter media must be completely sealed on all edges within a structurally rigid frame. The filter shall align with a continuous flexible gasket material in the negative air machine housing to form an air tight seal. Each HEPA filter shall be certified by the manufacturer to have an efficiency of not less than 99.97%. Testing shall have been done in accordance with Military Standard MIL-STD-282 and Army Instruction Manual 136-300-175A. Each filter must bear a UL586 label to indicate ability to perform under specified conditions. Each filter shall be marked with the name of the manufacturer, serial number, air flow rating, efficiency and resistance, and the direction of test air flow.D.Negative Air Machine Pre-filters: The pre-filters, which protect the final HEPA filter by removing larger particles, are required to prolong the operating life of the HEPA filter. Two stages of pre-filtration are required. A first stage pre-filter shall be a low efficiency type for particles 10 ?m or larger. A second stage pre-filter shall have a medium efficiency effective for particles down to 5 ?m or larger. Pre-filters shall be installed either on or in the intake opening of the NAM and the second stage filter must be held in place with a special housing or clamps.E.Negative Air Machine Instrumentation: Each unit must be equipped with a gauge to measure the pressure drop across the filters and to indicate when filters have become loaded and need to be changed. A table indicating the cfm for various pressure readings on the gauge shall be affixed near the gauge for reference or the reading shall indicate at what point the filters shall be changed, noting cfm delivery. The unit must have an elapsed time meter to show total hours of operation.F.Negative Air Machine Safety and Warning Devices: An electrical/ mechanical lockout must be provided to prevent the fan from being operated without a HEPA filter. Units must be equipped with an automatic shutdown device to stop the fan in the event of a rupture in the HEPA filter or blockage in the discharge of the fan. Warning lights are required to indicate normal operation; too high a pressure drop across filters; or too low of a pressure drop across filters.G.Negative Air Machine Electrical: All electrical components shall be approved by the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) and Underwriters Laboratories (UL). Each unit must be provided with overload protection and the motor, fan, fan housing, and cabinet must be grounded.H.It is essential that replacement HEPA filters be tested using an “in-line” testing method, to ensure the seal around the periphery was not damaged during replacement. Damage to the outer HEPA filter seal could allow contaminated air to bypass the HEPA filter and be discharged to an inappropriate location. Contractor will provide written documentation of test results for negative air machine units with HEPA filters changed by the contractor or documentation when changed and tested by the contractor filters3.1.3.3 PRESSURE DIFFERENTIALThe fully operational negative air system within the regulated area shall continuously maintain a pressure differential of -0.02" water column gauge. Before any disturbance of any asbestos material, this shall be demonstrated to the VA by use of a pressure differential meter/manometer as required by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101(e)(5)(i). The Competent Person shall be responsible for providing, maintaining, and documenting the negative pressure and air changes as required by OSHA and this specification.3.1.3.4 MONITORINGThe pressure differential shall be continuously monitored and recorded between the regulated area and the area outside the regulated area with a monitoring device that incorporates a strip chart recorder. The strip chart recorder shall become part of the project log and shall indicate at least -0.02" water column gauge for the duration of the project.3.1.3.5 AUXILIARY GENERATORIf the building is occupied during abatement, provide an auxiliary gasoline/diesel generator located outside the building in an area protected from the weather. In the event of a power failure of the general power grid and the VAMC emergency power grid, the generator must automatically start and supply power to a minimum of 50% of the negative air machines in operation.3.1.3.6SUPPLEMENTAL MAKE-UP AIR INLETSProvide, as needed for proper air flow in the regulated area, in a location approved by the VA, openings in the plastic sheeting to allow outside air to flow into the regulated area. Auxiliary makeup air inlets must be located as far from the negative air machines as possible, off the floor near the ceiling, and away from the barriers that separate the regulated area from the occupied clean areas. Cover the inlets with weighted flaps which will seal in the event of failure of the negative pressure system. 3.1.3.7 TESTING THE SYSTEMThe negative pressure system must be tested before any ACM is disturbed in any way. After the regulated area has been completely prepared, the decontamination units set up, and the negative air machines installed, start the units up one at a time. Demonstrate and document the operation and testing of the negative pressure system to the VA using smoke tubes and a negative pressure gauge. Verification and documentation of adequate negative pressure differential across each barrier must be done at the start of each work shift. 3.1.3.8 DEMONSTRATION OF THE NEGATIVE PRESSURE Filtration SYSTEMThe demonstration of the operation of the negative pressure system to the VA shall include, but not be limited to, the following:A.Plastic barriers and sheeting move lightly in toward the regulated area.B.Curtains of the decontamination units move in toward regulated area.C.There is a noticeable movement of air through the decontamination units. Use the smoke tube to demonstrate air movement from the clean room to the shower room to the equipment room to the regulated area.D.Use smoke tubes to demonstrate air is moving across all areas in which work is to be done. Use a differential pressure gauge to indicate a negative pressure of at least -0.02" across every barrier separating the regulated area from the rest of the building. Modify the system as necessary to meet the above requirements. 3.1.3.9 USE OF THE NEGATIVE PRESSURE FILTRATION SYSTEM DURING ABATEMENT OPERATIONSA.Start units before beginning any disturbance of ACM occurs. After work begins, the units shall run continuously, maintaining 4 actual air changes per hour at a negative pressure differential of -0.02" water column gauge, for the duration of the work until a final visual clearance and final air clearance has been successfully completed. No negative air units shall be shut down at any time unless authorized by the VA Contracting Officer, verbally and in writing.B.Pre-cleaning of ACM contaminated items shall be performed after the enclosure has been erected and negative pressure has been established in the work area. After items have been pre-cleaned and decontaminated, they may be removed from the work area for storage until the completion of abatement in the work area.C.Abatement work shall begin at a location farthest from the units and proceed towards them. If an electric failure occurs, the Competent Person shall stop all abatement work and immediately begin wetting all exposed asbestos materials for the duration of the power outage. Abatement work shall not resume until power is restored and all units are operating properly again.D.The negative air machines shall continue to run after all work is completed and until a final visual clearance and a final air clearance has been successfully completed for that regulated area.3.1.3.10 DISMANTLING THE SYSTEMAfter completion of the final visual and final air clearance has been obtained by the VPIH/CIH, the units may be shut down. The unit exterior surfaces shall have been completely decontaminated; pre-filters are not to be removed and the units inlet/outlet sealed with 2 layers of 6 mil poly immediately after shut down. No filter removal shall occur at the VA site following successful completion of site clearance. OSHA/EPA/DOT asbestos shall be attached to the units.3.1.4 CONTAINMENT BARRIERS AND COVERINGS IN THE REGULATED AREA3.1.4.1 GENERALSeal off the perimeter to the regulated area to completely isolate the regulated area from adjacent spaces. All surfaces in the regulated area must be covered to prevent contamination and to facilitate clean-up. Should adjacent areas become contaminated as a result of the work, shall immediately stop work and clean up the contamination at no additional cost to the VA. Provide firestopping and identify all fire barrier penetrations due to abatement work as specified in Section 3.1.4.8; FIRESTOPPING.3.1.4.2 PREPARATION PRIOR TO SEALING THE REGULATED AREAPlace all tools, scaffolding, materials and equipment needed for working in the regulated area prior to erecting any plastic sheeting. All uncontaminated removable furniture, equipment and/or supplies shall be removed by the VA from the regulated area before commencing work. Any objects remaining in the regulated area shall be completely covered with 2 layers of 6-mil fire retardant poly sheeting and secured with duct tape. Lock out and tag out any HVAC/electrical systems in the regulated area.3.1.4.3 CONTROLLING ACCESS TO THE REGULATED AREAAccess to the regulated area is allowed only through the personnel decontamination facility (PDF). All other means of access shall be eliminated and OSHA DANGER demarcation signs posted as required by OSHA. If the regulated area is adjacent to, or within view of an occupied area, provide a visual barrier of 6 mil opaque fire retardant poly to prevent building occupant observation. If the adjacent area is accessible to the public, the barrier must be solid and capable of withstanding the negative pressure.3.1.4.4 CRITICAL BARRIERSCompletely separate any operations in the regulated area from adjacent areas using 2 layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly and duct tape. Individually seal with 2 layers of 6 mil poly and duct tape all HVAC openings into the regulated area. Individually seal all lighting fixtures, clocks, doors, windows, convectors, speakers, or any other objects/openings in the regulated area. Heat must be shut off any objects covered with poly.3.1.4.5 PRIMARY BARRIERSA.Cover the regulated area with two layers of 6 mil fire retardant poly on the floors and two layers of 4 mil, fire retardant poly on the walls, unless otherwise directed in writing by the VA representative. Floor layers must form a right angle with the wall and turn up the wall at least 300 mm (12"). Seams must overlap at least 1800 mm (6') and must be spray glued and taped. Install sheeting so that layers can be removed independently from each other. Carpeting shall be covered with three layers of 6 mil poly. Corrugated cardboard sheets must be placed between the bottom and middle layers of poly. Mechanically support and seal with duct tape and glue all wall layers.B.If stairs and ramps are covered with 6 mil plastic, two layers must be used. Provide 19 mm (3/4") exterior grade plywood treads held in place with duct tape/glue on the plastic. Do not cover rungs or rails with any isolation materials.3.1.4.6 SECONDARY BARRIERSA loose layer of 6 mil shall be used as a drop cloth to protect the primary layers from debris generated during the abatement. This layer shall be replaced as needed during the work and at a minimum once per work day.3.1.4.7 EXTENSION OF THE REGULATED AREAIf the enclosure of the regulated area is breached in any way that could allow contamination to occur, the affected area shall be included in the regulated area and constructed as per this section. Decontamination measures must be started immediately and continue until air monitoring indicates background levels are met.3.1.4.8 FIRESTOPPINGA.Through penetrations caused by cables, cable trays, pipes, sleeves, conduits, etc. must be firestopped with a fire-rated firestop system providing an air tight seal.B.Firestop materials that are not equal to the wall or ceiling penetrated shall be brought to the attention of the VA Representative. The contractor shall list all areas of penetration, the type of sealant used, and whether or not the location is fire rated. Any discovery of penetrations during abatement shall be brought to the attention of the VA representative immediately. All walls, floors and ceilings are considered fire rated unless otherwise determined by the VA Representative or Fire Marshall.C.Any visible openings whether or not caused by a penetration shall be reported by the Contractor to the VA Representative for a sealant system determination. Firestops shall meet ASTM E814 and UL 1479 requirements for the opening size, penetrant, and fire rating needed.3.1.5 Sanitary facilitiesThe Contractor shall provide sanitary facilities for abatement personnel and maintain them in a clean and sanitary condition throughout the abatement project.3.1.6 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENTProvide whole body clothing, head coverings, gloves and foot coverings and any other personal protective equipment as determined by conducting the hazard assessment required by OSHA at 29 CFR 1910.132 (d). The Competent Person shall ensure the integrity of personal protective equipment worn for the duration of the project. Duct tape shall be used to secure all suit sleeves to wrists and to secure foot coverings at the ankle.3.1.7 Pre-cleaningThe VA will provide water for abatement purposes. The Contractor shall connect to the existing VA system. The service to the shower(s) shall be supplied with backflow prevention.Pre-cleaning of ACM contaminated items shall be performed after the enclosure has been erected and negative pressure has been established in the work area. All workers performing pre-cleaning activities must don appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE), as specified throughout this document and as approved in the Contractor’s work plan. After items have been pre-cleaned and decontaminated, they may be removed from the work area for storage until the completion of abatement in the work area.Pre-clean all movable objects within the regulated area using a HEPA filtered vacuum and/or wet cleaning methods as appropriate. After cleaning, these objects shall be removed from the regulated area and carefully stored in an uncontaminated location. Drapes, clothing, upholstered furniture and other fabric items should be disposed of as asbestos contaminated waste. Cleaning these asbestos contaminated items utilizing HEPA vacuum techniques and off-premises steam cleaning is very difficult and cannot guarantee decontamination. Carpeting will be disposed of prior to abatement if in the regulated area. If ACM floor tile is attached to the carpet while the Contractor is removing the carpet that section of the carpet will be disposed of as asbestos waste.Pre-clean all fixed objects in the regulated area using HEPA filtered vacuums and/or wet cleaning techniques as appropriate. Careful attention must be paid to machinery behind grills or gratings where access may be difficult but contamination may be significant. Also, pay particular attention to wall, floor and ceiling penetration behind fixed items. After pre-cleaning, enclose fixed objects with 2 layers of 6-mil poly and seal securely in place with duct tape. Objects (e.g., permanent fixtures, shelves, electronic equipment, laboratory tables, sprinklers, alarm systems, closed circuit TV equipment and computer cables) which must remain in the regulated area and that require special ventilation or enclosure requirements should be designated here along with specified means of protection. Contact the manufacturer for special protection requirements.Pre-clean all surfaces in the regulated area using HEPA filtered vacuums and/or wet cleaning methods as appropriate. Do not use any methods that would raise dust such as dry sweeping or vacuuming with equipment not equipped with HEPA filters. Do not disturb asbestos-containing materials during this pre-cleaning phase.3.1.8 PRE-ABATEMENT ACTIVITIES3.1.8.1 PRE-ABATEMENT MeetingThe VA representative, upon receipt, review, and substantial approval of all pre-abatement submittals and verification by the CPIH/CIH that all materials and equipment required for the project are on the site, will arrange for a pre-abatement meeting between the Contractor, the CPIH/CIH, Competent Person(s), the VA representative(s), and the VPIH/CIH. The purpose of the meeting is to discuss any aspect of the submittals needing clarification or amplification and to discuss any aspect of the project execution and the sequence of the operation. The Contractor shall be prepared to provide any supplemental information/documentation to the VA's representative regarding any submittals, documentation, materials or equipment. Upon satisfactory resolution of any outstanding issues, the VA's representative will issue a written order to proceed to the Contractor. No abatement work of any kind described in the following provisions shall be initiated prior to the VA written order to proceed.3.1.8.2 PRE-ABATEMENT CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATIONSA.Perform all preparatory work for the first regulated area in accordance with the approved work schedule and with this specification.B.Upon completion of all preparatory work, the CPIH/CIH will inspect the work and systems and will notify the VA's representative when the work is completed in accordance with this specification. The VA's representative may inspect the regulated area and the systems with the VPIH/CIH and may require that upon satisfactory inspection, the Contractor's employees perform all major aspects of the approved AHAP(s), especially worker protection, respiratory systems, contingency plans, decontamination procedures, and monitoring to demonstrate satisfactory operation. The operational systems for respiratory protection and the negative pressure system shall be demonstrated for proper performance.C.The CPIH/CIH shall document the pre-abatement activities described above and deliver a copy to the VA's representative.D.Upon satisfactory inspection of the installation of and operation of systems the VA's representative will notify the Contractor in writing to proceed with the asbestos abatement work in accordance with this specification and all applicable regulations.3.1.8.3 PRE-ABATEMENT INSPECTIONS AND PREPARATIONSBefore any work begins on the construction of the regulated area, the Contractor will:A.Conduct a space-by-space inspection with an authorized VA representative and prepare a written inventory of all existing damage in those spaces where asbestos abatement will occur. Still or video photography may be used to supplement the written damage inventory. Document will be signed and certified as accurate by both parties.B.The VA Representative, the Contractor, and the VPIH/CIH must be aware of VA A/E Quality Alert 07/09 indicating the failure to identify asbestos in the areas listed as well as common issues when preparing specifications and contract documents. This is especially critical when demolition is planned, because AHERA surveys are non-destructive, and ACM may remain undetected. A NESHAPS (destructive) ACM inspection should be conducted on all building structures that will be demolished. Ensure the following areas are inspected on the project: lay-in ceilings concealing ACM; ACM behind walls/windows from previous renovations; inside utility chases/walls; transite piping/ductwork/sheets; behind radiators; lab fume hoods; transite lab countertops; roofing materials; below window sills; water/sewer lines; electrical conduit coverings; crawlspaces (previous abatement contamination); flooring/mastic covered by carpeting/new flooring; exterior insulated wall panels; on underground fuel tanks; and steam line trench coverings. C.Ensure that all furniture, machinery, equipment, curtains, drapes, blinds, and other movable objects required to be removed from the regulated area have been cleaned and removed or properly protected from contamination.D.If present and required, remove and dispose of carpeting from floors in the regulated area.E.Inspect existing firestopping in the regulated area. Correct as needed.3.2 REMOVAL OF ACM 3.2.1 WETTING acm A.Use amended water for the wetting of ACM prior to removal. The Competent Person shall assure the wetting of ACM meets the definition of "adequately wet" in the EPA NESHAP regulation and OSHA’s “wet methods” for the duration of the project. A removal encapsulant may be used instead of amended water with written approval of the VA's representative.B.Amended Water: Provide water to which a surfactant has been added shall be used to wet the ACM and reduce the potential for fiber release during disturbance of ACM. The mixture must be equal to or greater than the wetting provided by water amended by a surfactant consisting one ounce of 50% polyoxyethylene ester and 50% polyoxyethylene ether mixed with 5 gallons (19L) of water.C.Removal Encapsulant: When authorized by VA, provide a penetrating encapsulant designed specifically for the removal of ACM. The material must, when used, result in adequate wetting of the ACM and retard fiber release during removal. 3.2.2 SECONDARY BARRIER AND WALKWAYSA.Install as a drop cloth a 6 mil poly sheet at the beginning of each work shift where removal is to be done during that shift. Completely cover floors and any walls within 10 feet (3 meters) of the area where work is to done. Secure the secondary barrier with duct tape to prevent it from moving or debris from getting behind it. Remove the secondary barrier at the end of the shift or as work in the area is completed. Keep residue on the secondary barrier wetted. When removing, fold inward to prevent spillage and place in a disposal bag.B.Install walkways using 6 mil black poly between the regulated area and the decontamination facilities (PDF and W/EDF) to protect the primary layers from contamination and damage. Install the walkways at the beginning of each shift and remove at the end of each shift.3.2.3 WET REMOVAL OF ACMA.Adequately and thoroughly wet the ACM to be removed prior to removal with amended water or when authorized by VA, removal encapsulant to reduce/prevent fiber release to the air. Adequate time (at a minimum two hours) must be allowed for the amended water or removal encapsulant to saturate the ACM. Abatement personnel must not disturb dry ACM. Use a fine spray of amended water or removal encapsulant. Saturate the material sufficiently to wet to the substrate without causing excessive dripping. The material must be sprayed repeatedly/continuously during the removal process in order to maintain adequately wet conditions. Removal encapsulants must be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Perforate or carefully separate, using wet methods, an outer covering that is painted or jacketed in order to allow penetration and wetting of the material. Where necessary, carefully remove covering while wetting to minimize fiber release. In no event shall dry removal occur except when authorized in writing by the VPIH/CIH and VA when a greater safety hazard (e.g., electricity) is present. B.If ACM does not wet well with amended water due to composition, coating or jacketing, remove as follows:1.Mist work area continuously with amended water whenever necessary to reduce airborne fiber levels.2.Remove saturated ACM in small sections. Do not allow material to dry out. As material is removed, bag material, while still wet into disposal bags. Twist the bag neck tightly, bend over (gooseneck) and seal with a minimum of three tight wraps of duct tape. Clean /decontaminate the outside of the bag of any residue and move to washdown station adjacent to W/EDF.3.Fireproofing or Architectural Finish on Scratch Coat: Spray with a fine mist of amended water or removal encapsulant. Allow time for saturation to the substrate. Do not over saturate causing excess dripping. Scrape material from substrate. Remove material in manageable quantities and control falling to staging or floor. If the falling distance is over 20 feet (6M), use a drop chute to contain material through descent. Remove residue remaining on the scratch coat after scraping is done using a stiff bristle hand brush. If a removal encapsulant is used, remove residue completely before the encapsulant dries. Periodically re-wet the substrate with amended water as needed to prevent drying of the material before the residue is removed from the substrate.4.Fireproofing or Architectural Finish on Wire Lath: Spray with a fine mist of amended water or removal encapsulant. Allow time to completely saturate the material. Do not over saturate causing excess dripping. If the surface has been painted or otherwise coated, cut small holes as needed and apply amended water or removal encapsulant from above. Cut saturated wire lath into 2' x 6' (50mm x 150mm) sections and cut hanger wires. Roll up complete with ACM, cover in burlap and hand place in disposal bag. Do not drop to floor. After removal of lath/ACM, remove any overspray on decking and structure using stiff bristle nylon brushes. Depending on hardness of overspray, scrapers may be needed for removal.5.Pipe/Tank/Vessel/Boiler Insulation: Remove the outer layer of wrap while spraying with amended water in order to saturate the ACM. Spray ACM with a fine mist of amended water or removal encapsulant. Allow time to saturate the material to the substrate. Cut bands holding pre-formed pipe insulation sections. Slit jacketing at the seams, remove and hand place in a disposal bag. Do not allow dropping to the floor. Remove molded fitting insulation/mud in large pieces and hand place in a disposal bag. Remove any residue on pipe or fitting with a stiff bristle nylon brush. In locations where pipe fitting insulation is removed from fibrous glass or other non-asbestos insulated straight runs of pipe, remove fibrous material at least 6" from the point it contacts the ACM.3.2.4 WET REMOVAL OF AMOSITEA.The following areas shown on drawings indicate locations of amosite ACM which will require local exhaust ventilation and collection as described below, in addition to wet removal. Provide specific description /locations/ drawings.B.Provide local exhaust ventilation and collection systems to assure collection of amosite fibers at the point of generation. A 300 mm (12") flexible rigid non-collapsing duct shall be shall be located no more than 600 mm (2') from any scraping/brushing activity. Primary filters must be replaced every 30 minutes on the negative air machines. Each scraping/brushing activity must have a negative air machine devoted to it. For pre-molded pipe insulation or cutting wire lathe attach a 1200 mm (4') square flared end piece on the intake of the duct. Support the duct horizontally at a point 600 mm (2') below the work to effect capture. One person in the crew shall be assigned to operate the duct collection system on a continual basis. C.Amosite does not wet well with amended water. Submit full information/documentation on the wetting agent proposed prior to start for review and approval by the VPIH/CIH and VA Contracting Officer. Insure that the material is worked on in small sections and is thoroughly and continuously wetted. Package as soon as possible while wet. Remove as required. 3.2.5 REMOVAL OF ACM/DIRT FLOORS AND OTHER SPECIAL PROCEDURESA.MAJOR ABATEMENT ON DIRT FLOORS:When working on dirt floors, remove all visible asbestos debris using wet methods after set-up of PDF, W/EDF, negative air systems as required. Perform work and decontaminate/clean-up; perform lockdown as needed and complete work as required in these specifications. The asbestos contaminated soil (ACS) shall be removed and/or enclosed.Options for abatement of asbestos contaminated soil include: Removal of top 6 inches of soil; encapsulated the soil using shotcrete or other spray applied concrete materials. Considerations for which option to be used will be made by the VA representative. Factors which may affect which option to be used may include: access to the work area; height of the area (such as is there sufficient height to use concrete materials in the area, etc.) Soils covered with permanent barriers MUST HAVE PERMANENT SIGNAGE INSTALLED TO WARN AGAINST PENETRATION ASSOCIATED WITH POTENTIAL DISTURBANCE OF ASBESTOS.1.Remove ACS as shown on drawings to a minimum depth of 6 using wet methods. After wetting with amended water to minimize dust, shovel dirt into disposal bags. The CPIH/CIH shall closely monitor work conditions and take appropriate action to protect workers from over exposure to asbestos and heat stress. The minimum number of air changes per hour shall be six using negative air machines. Use special vacuum truck equipped with HEPA filtration to remove soil2.Enclosure of ACS using a concrete layer of 4” over the entire surface may also be done. Thoroughly dampen soil first with amended water before pouring concrete. Personnel shall be proficient in concrete finishing as well as asbestos trained.3.3 LOCKDOWN ENCAPSULATION3.3.1 GENERALLockdown encapsulation is an integral part of the ACM removal. At the conclusion of ACM removal and before removal of the primary barriers, the contractor shall encapsulate all surfaces with a bridging encapsulant.3.3.2 DELIVERY AND STORAGEDeliver materials to the job site in original, new and unopened containers bearing the manufacturer's name and label as well as the following information: name of material, manufacturer's stock number, date of manufacture, thinning instructions, application instructions and the MSDS for the material.3.3.3 WORKER PROTECTIONBefore beginning work with any material for which an MSDS has been submitted, provide workers with any required personal protective equipment. The required personal protective equipment shall be used whenever exposure to the material might occur. In addition to OSHA/specification requirements for respiratory protection, a paint pre-filter and an organic vapor cartridge, at a minimum, shall used in addition to the HEPA filter when an organic solvent based encapsulant is used. The CPIH/CIH shall be responsible for provision of adequate respiratory protection. Note: Flammable and combustible encapsulants shall not be used, unless authorized in writing by the VA.3.3.4 ENCAPSULATION OF SCRATCH COAT PLASTER OR PIPINGA.Apply two coats of lockdown encapsulant to the scratch coat plaster or piping after all ACM has been removed. Apply in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Any deviation from the instructions must be approved by the VA's representative in writing prior to commencing the work.B.Apply the lockdown encapsulant with an airless sprayer at a pressure and using a nozzle orifice as recommended by the manufacturer. Apply the first coat while the while the scratch coat is still damp from the asbestos removal process, after passing the visual inspection. If the surface has been allowed to dry, wet wipe or HEPA vacuum prior to spraying with encapsulant. Apply a second coat over the first coat in strict conformance with the manufacturer's instructions. Color the lockdown encapsulant and contrast the color in the second coat so that visual confirmation of completeness and uniform coverage of each coat is possible. Adhere to the manufacturer's instructions for coloring. At the completion of the encapsulation, the surface must be a uniform third color produced by the mixture.3.3.5 SEALING EXPOSED EDGESSeal edges of ACM exposed by removal work which is inaccessible, such as a sleeve, wall penetration, etc., with two coats of bridging encapsulant. Prior to sealing, permit the exposed edges to dry completely to permit penetration of the bridging encapsulant. Apply in accordance with 3.3.4 (B).3.4 DISPOSAL OF ACM WASTE MATERIALS3.4.1 GENERALDispose of waste ACM and debris which is packaged in accordance with these specifications, OSHA, EPA and DOT. The landfill requirements for packaging must also be met. Transport will be in compliance with 49 CFR 100–185 regulations. Disposal shall be done at an approved landfill. Disposal of non-friable ACM shall be done in accordance with applicable regulations.3.4.2 PROCEDURESA. The VA must be notified at least 24 hours in advance of any waste removed from the containment.B.Asbestos waste shall be packaged and moved through the W/EDF into a covered transport container in accordance with procedures is this specification. Waste shall be double-bagged and wetted with amended water prior to disposal. Wetted waste can be very heavy. Bags shall not be overfilled. Bags shall be securely sealed to prevent accidental opening and/or leakage. The top shall be tightly twisted and goose necked prior to tightly sealing with at least three wraps of duct tape. Ensure that unauthorized persons do not have access to the waste material once it is outside the regulated area. All transport containers must be covered at all times when not in use. NESHAP signs must be on containers during loading and unloading. Material shall not be transported in open vehicles. If drums are used for packaging, the drums shall be labeled properly and shall not be re-used.Waste Load Out: Waste load out shall be done in accordance with the procedures in W/EDF Decontamination Procedures. Sealed waste bags shall be decontaminated on exterior surfaces by wet cleaning and/or HEPA vacuuming before being placed in the second waste bag and sealed, which then must also be wet wiped or HEPA vacuumed.Asbestos waste with sharp edged components, i.e., nails, screws, lath, strapping, tin sheeting, jacketing, metal mesh, etc., which might tear poly bags shall be wrapped securely in burlap before packaging and, if needed, use a poly lined fiber drum as the second container, prior to disposal.3.5 PROJECT DECONTAMINATION3.5.1 GENERALA.The entire work related to project decontamination shall be performed under the close supervision and monitoring of the CPIH/CIH.B.If the asbestos abatement work is in an area which was contaminated prior to the start of abatement, the decontamination will be done by cleaning the primary barrier poly prior to its removal and cleanings of the surfaces of the regulated area after the primary barrier removal.C.If the asbestos abatement work is in an area which was uncontaminated prior to the start of abatement, the decontamination will be done by cleaning the primary barrier poly prior to its removal, thus preventing contamination of the building when the regulated area critical barriers are removed.3.5.2 REGULATED AREA CLEARANCEClearance air testing and other requirements which must be met before release of the Contractor and re-occupancy of the regulated area space are specified in Final Testing Procedures.3.5.3 WORK DESCRIPTIONDecontamination includes the clearance air testing in the regulated area and the decontamination and removal of the enclosures/facilities installed prior to the abatement work including primary/critical barriers, PDF and W/EDF facilities, and negative pressure systems.3.5.4 PRE-DECONTAMINATION CONDITIONSA.Before decontamination starts, all ACM waste from the regulated area shall be collected and removed, and the loose 6 mil layer of poly removed while being adequately wetted with amended water and disposed of along with any gross debris generated by the work.B.At the start of decontamination, the following shall be in place:1.Primary barriers consisting of 2 layers of 6 mil poly on the floor and 4 mil poly on the walls.2.Critical barriers consisting of 2 layers of 6 mil poly which is the sole barrier between the regulated area and openings to the rest of the building or outside.4.Decontamination facilities for personnel and equipment in operating condition and the negative pressure system in operation.3.5.5 FIRST CLEANINGCarry out a first cleaning of all surfaces of the regulated area including items of remaining poly sheeting, tools, scaffolding, ladders/staging by wet methods and/or HEPA vacuuming. Do not use dry dusting/sweeping/air blowing methods. Use each surface of a wetted cleaning cloth one time only and then dispose of as contaminated waste. Continue this cleaning until there is no visible residue from abated surfaces or poly or other surfaces. Remove all filters in the air handling system and dispose of as ACM waste in accordance with these specifications. The negative pressure system shall remain in operation during this time. Additional cleaning(s) may be needed as determined by the CPIH/VPIH/CIH.3.5.6 PRE-CLEARANCE INSPECTION AND TESTINGThe CPIH/CIH and VPIH/CIH will perform a thorough and detailed visual inspection at the end of the cleaning to determine whether there is any visible residue in the regulated area. If the visual inspection is acceptable, the CPIH/CIH will perform pre-clearance sampling using aggressive clearance as detailed in 40 CFR 763 Subpart E (AHERA) Appendix A (III)(B)(7)(d). If the sampling results show values below 0.01 f/cc, then the Contractor shall notify the VA's representative of the results with a brief report from the CPIH/CIH documenting the inspection and sampling results and a statement verifying that the regulated area is ready for lockdown encapsulation. The VA reserves the right to utilize their own VPIH/CIH to perform a pre-clearance inspection and testing for verification.3.5.7 LOCKDOWN ENCAPSULATION OF ABATED SURFACESWith the express written permission of the VA's representative, perform lockdown encapsulation of all surfaces from which asbestos was abated in accordance with the procedures in this specification. Negative pressure shall be maintained in the regulated area during the lockdown application.3.6 FINAL VISUAL INSPECTION AND AIR CLEARANCE TESTING3.6.1 GENERALNotify the VA representative 24 hours in advance for the performance of the final visual inspection and testing. The final visual inspection and testing will be performed by the VPIH/CIH starting after the final cleaning.3.6.2 FINAL VISUAL INSPECTIONFinal visual inspection will include the entire regulated area, the PDF, all poly sheeting, seals over HVAC openings, doorways, windows, and any other openings. If any debris, residue, dust or any other suspect material is detected, the final cleaning shall be repeated at no cost to the VA. Dust/material samples may be collected and analyzed at no cost to the VA at the discretion of the VPIH/CIH to confirm visual findings. When the regulated area is visually clean the final testing can be done.3.6.3 FINAL AIR CLEARANCE TESTINGA.After an acceptable final visual inspection by the VPIH/CIH and VA Representative, the VPIH/CIH will perform the final clearance testing. Air samples will be collected and analyzed in accordance with procedures for AHERA in this specification. If work is less than 260 lf/160 sf/35 cf, 5 PCM samples shall be collected for clearance and a minimum of one field blank. If work is equal to or more than 260 lf/160 sf/35 cf, AHERA TEM sampling shall be performed for clearance. TEM analysis shall be done in accordance with procedures for EPA AHERA in this specification. If the release criteria are not met, the Contractor shall repeat the final cleaning and continue decontamination procedures until clearance is achieved. All Additional inspection and testing costs will be borne by the Contractor.B.If release criteria are met, proceed to perform the abatement closeout and to issue the certificate of completion in accordance with these specifications.3.6.4 FINAL AIR CLEARANCE PROCEDURESContractor's Release Criteria: Work in a regulated area is complete when the regulated area is visually clean and airborne fiber levels have been reduced to or below 0.01 f/cc as measured by the AHERA PCM protocol, or 70 AHERA structures per square millimeter (s/mm2) by AHERA TEM.B.Air Monitoring and Final Clearance Sampling: To determine if the elevated airborne fiber counts encountered during abatement operations have been reduced to the specified level, the VPIH/CIH will secure samples and analyze them according to the following procedures:Fibers Counted: “Fibers” referred to in this section shall be either all fibers regardless of composition as counted in the NIOSH 7400 PCM method or asbestos fibers counted using the AHERA TEM method.Aggressive Sampling: All final air testing samples shall be collected using aggressive sampling techniques except where soil is not encapsulated or enclosed. Samples will be collected on 0.8 MCE filters for PCM analysis and 0.45 Polycarbonate filters for TEM. A minimum of 1200 Liters of using calibrated pumps shall be collected for clearance samples. Before pumps are started, initiate aggressive air mixing sampling as detailed in 40 CFR 763 Subpart E (AHERA) Appendix A (III)(B)(7)(d). Air samples will be collected in areas subject to normal air circulation away from corners, obstructed locations, and locations near windows, doors, or vents. After air sampling pumps have been shut off, circulating fans shall be shut off. The negative pressure system shall continue to operate.Final clearance for soil that is not encapsulated, samples will be collected on 0.8? MCE filters for PCM analysis and 0.45? Polycarbonate filters for TEM. A minimum of 1200 Liters of using calibrated pumps shall be collected for clearance samples. Air clearance of work areas where contaminated soil has been removed is in addition to the requirement for clearance by bulk sample analysis discussed within these specifications. There will be no aggressive air sampling for the clearance of soil due to the fact that aggressive air sampling may overload the cassettes. Random samples shall be collected from areas of soil which have been abated to ensure that the soil has been properly decontaminated. The total number of samples to be collected from the soil areas shall be; <1000 SF of soil – 3 samples; >1000 to <5000 SF of soil – 5 samples; and >5000 SF of soil – 7 samples. The soil samples shall be collected in a statistically random manner and shall be analyzed by PLM method. The clearance level to determine the soil clean is <1% asbestos by weight as analyzed by PLM method. If this level is achieved, the soil areas shall be considered clear. If the levels are >1% asbestos, the areas shall be re-cleaned until the sample results are <1%.3.6.5 CLEARANCE SAMPLING USING PCM – LESS THAN 260LF/160SF:A.The VPIH/CIH will perform clearance samples as indicated by the specification.B.The NIOSH 7400 PCM method will be used for clearance sampling with a minimum collection volume of 1200 Liters of air. A minimum of 5 PCM clearance samples shall be collected. All samples must be equal to or less than 0.01 f/cc to clear the regulated area.C.Random samples shall be collected from areas of soil which have been abated to ensure that the soil has been properly decontaminated. The total number of samples to be collected from the soil areas shall be; <1000 SF of soil – 3 samples; >1000 to <5000 SF of soil – 5 samples; and >5000 SF of soil – 7 samples. The soil samples shall be collected in a statistically random manner and shall be analyzed by PLM method. The clearance level to determine the soil clean is <1% asbestos by weight as analyzed by PLM method. If this level is achieved, the soil areas shall be considered clear. If the levels are >1% asbestos, the areas shall be re-cleaned until the sample results are <1%.3.6.6 CLEARANCE SAMPLING USING TEM – EQUAL TO OR MORE THAN 260LF/160SF: TEM A.Clearance requires 13 samples be collected; 5 inside the regulated area; 5 outside the regulated area; and 3 field blanks.B.The TEM method will be used for clearance sampling with a minimum collection volume of 1200 Liters of air. A minimum of 13 clearance samples shall be collected. All samples must be equal to or less than 70 AHERA structures per square millimeter (s/mm2) AHERA TEM.3.6.7 LABORATORY TESTING OF PCM CLEARANCE SAMPLESThe services of an AIHA accredited laboratory will be employed by the VA to perform analysis for the PCM air samples. The accredited laboratory shall be successfully participating in the AIHA Proficiency Analytical Testing (PAT) program. Samples will be sent daily by the VPIH/CIH so that verbal/faxed reports can be received within 24 hours. A complete record, certified by the laboratory, of all air monitoring tests and results will be furnished to the VA’s representative and the Contractor.3.6.8 LABORATORY TESTING OF TEM SAMPLESSamples shall be sent by the VPIH/CIH to a NIST accredited laboratory for analysis by TEM. The laboratory shall be successfully participating in the NIST Airborne Asbestos Analysis (TEM) program. Verbal/faxed results from the laboratory shall be available within 24 hours after receipt of the samples. A complete record, certified by the laboratory, of all TEM results shall be furnished to the VA's representative and the Contractor.3.6.9 LABORATORY TESTING OF BULK SAMPLESSamples shall be sent by the VPIH/CIH or CPIH/CIH to a NIST accredited laboratory for analysis by PLM. The laboratory shall be successfully participating in the NIST Bulk Asbestos Analysis (PLM) program. Verbal/faxed results from the laboratory shall be available within 24 hours after receipt of the samples. A complete record, certified by the laboratory, of all TEM results shall be furnished to the VA's representative and the Contractor.3.7 ABATEMENT CLOSEOUT AND CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE3.7.1 COMPLETION OF ABATEMENT WORKAfter thorough decontamination, seal negative air machines with 2 layers of 6 mil poly and duct tape to form a tight seal at the intake/outlet ends before removal from the regulated area. Complete asbestos abatement work upon meeting the regulated area visual and air clearance criteria and fulfilling the following:A.Remove all equipment and materials from the project area.B. Dispose of all packaged ACM waste as required.C.Repair or replace all interior finishes damaged during the abatement work, as required.D.Fulfill other project closeout requirements as required in this specification.3.7.2 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION BY CONTRACTORThe CPIH/CIH shall complete and sign the "Certificate of Completion" in accordance with Attachment 1 at the completion of the abatement and decontamination of the regulated area.3.7.3 WORK SHIFTSAll work shall be done during administrative hours (8:00 AM to 4:30 PM) Monday -Friday excluding Federal Holidays. Any change in the work schedule must be approved in writing by the VA Representative. 3.7.4 RE-INSULATIONIf required as part of the contract, replace all asbestos containing insulation/fire-proofing with suitable non-asbestos material. Provide MSDS’s for all replacement materials in advance of installation for VA approval. Refer to Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION.ATTACHMENT #1CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETIONDATE: VA Project #:PROJECT NAME:Abatement Contractor:VAMC/ADDRESS:1.I certify that I have personally inspected, monitored and supervised the abatement work of (specify regulated area or Building):which took place from / / to / /2.That throughout the work all applicable requirements/regulations and the VA's specifications were met.3.That any person who entered the regulated area was protected with the appropriate personal protective equipment and respirator and that they followed the proper entry and exit procedures and the proper operating procedures for the duration of the work.4.That all employees of the Abatement Contractor engaged in this work were trained in respiratory protection, were experienced with abatement work, had proper medical surveillance documentation, were fit-tested for their respirator, and were not exposed at any time during the work to asbestos without the benefit of appropriate respiratory protection.5.That I performed and supervised all inspection and testing specified and required by applicable regulations and VA specifications.6.That the conditions inside the regulated area were always maintained in a safe and healthy condition and the maximum fiber count never exceeded 0.5 f/cc, except as described below.7. That all abatement work was done in accordance with OSHA requirements and the manufacturer’s recommendations. CPIH/CIH Signature/Date:CPIH/CIH Print Name:Abatement Contractor Signature/Date:Abatement Contractor Print Name:ATTACHMENT #2CERTIFICATE OF WORKER'S ACKNOWLEDGMENTPROJECT NAME:DATE:PROJECT ADDRESS:ABATEMENT CONTRACTOR'S NAME:WORKING WITH ASBESTOS CAN BE HAZARDOUS TO YOUR HEALTH. INHALING ASBESTOS HAS BEEN LINKED WITH VARIOUS TYPES OF CANCERS. IF YOU SMOKE AND INHALE ASBESTOS FIBERS, YOUR CHANCES OF DEVELOPING LUNG CANCER IS GREATER THAN THAT OF THE NON-SMOKING PUBLIC.Your employer's contract with the owner for the above project requires that: You must be supplied with the proper personal protective equipment including an adequate respirator and be trained in its use. You must be trained in safe and healthy work practices and in the use of the equipment found at an asbestos abatement project. You must receive/have a current medical examination for working with asbestos. These things shall be provided at no cost to you. By signing this certificate you are indicating to the owner that your employer has met these obligations.RESPIRATORY PROTECTION: I have been trained in the proper use of respirators and have been informed of the type of respirator to be used on the above indicated project. I have a copy of the written Respiratory Protection Program issued by my employer. I have been provided for my exclusive use, at no cost, with a respirator to be used on the above indicated project.TRAINING COURSE: I have been trained by a third party, State/EPA accredited trainer in the requirements for an AHERA/OSHA Asbestos Abatement Worker training course, 32 hours minimum duration. I currently have a valid State accreditation certificate. The topics covered in the course include, as a minimum, the following:Physical Characteristics and Background Information on AsbestosPotential Health Effects Related to Exposure to AsbestosEmployee Personal Protective EquipmentEstablishment of a Respiratory Protection ProgramState of the Art Work PracticesPersonal HygieneAdditional Safety HazardsMedical MonitoringAir MonitoringRelevant Federal, State and Local Regulatory Requirements, Procedures, andStandardsAsbestos Waste DisposalMEDICAL EXAMINATION: I have had a medical examination within the past 12 months which was paid for by my employer. This examination included: health history, occupational history, pulmonary function test, and may have included a chest x-ray evaluation. The physician issued a positive written opinion after the examination.Signature:Printed Name:Social Security Number:Witness:ATTACHMENT #3AFFIDAVIT OF MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE, RESPIRATORY PROTECTION AND TRAINING/ACCREDITATIONVA PROJECT NAME AND NUMBER:VA MEDICAL FACILITY:ABATEMENT CONTRACTOR'S NAME AND ADDRESS:1.I verify that the following individualName:Social Security Number:who is proposed to be employed in asbestos abatement work associated with the above project by the named Abatement Contractor, is included in a medical surveillance program in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101(m), and that complete records of the medical surveillance program as required by 29 CFR 1926.1101(m)(n) and 29 CFR 1910.20 are kept at the offices of the Abatement Contractor at the following address.Address:2.I verify that this individual has been trained, fit-tested and instructed in the use of all appropriate respiratory protection systems and that the person is capable of working in safe and healthy manner as expected and required in the expected work environment of this project.3.I verify that this individual has been trained as required by 29 CFR 1926.1101(k). This individual has also obtained a valid State accreditation certificate. Documentation will be kept on-site.4.I verify that I meet the minimum qualifications criteria of the VA specifications for a CPIH.Signature of CPIH/CIH:Date:Printed Name of CPIH/CIH:Signature of Contractor:Date:Printed Name of Contractor:ATTACHMENT #4ABATEMENT CONTRACTOR/COMPETENT PERSON(S) REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE VA’S ASBESTOS SPECIFICATIONSVA Project Location: VA Project #:VA Project Description:This form shall be signed by the Asbestos Abatement Contractor Owner and the Asbestos Abatement Contractor’s Competent Person(s) prior to any start of work at the VA related to this Specification. If the Asbestos Abatement Contractor’s/Competent Person(s) has not signed this form, they shall not be allowed to work on-site.I, the undersigned, have read VA’s Asbestos Specification regarding the asbestos abatement requirements. I understand the requirements of the VA’s Asbestos Specification and agree to follow these requirements as well as all required rules and regulations of OSHA/EPA/DOT and State/Local requirements. I have been given ample opportunity to read the VA’s Asbestos Specification and have been given an opportunity to ask any questions regarding the content and have received a response related to those questions. I do not have any further questions regarding the content, intent and requirements of the VA’s Asbestos Specification.At the conclusion of the asbestos abatement, I will certify that all asbestos abatement work was done in accordance with the VA’s Asbestos Specification and all ACM was removed properly and no fibrous residue remains on any abated surfaces.Abatement Contractor Owner’s SignatureDateAbatement Contractor Competent Person(s)DateSECTION 05 50 00METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies items and assemblies fabricated from structural steel shapes and other materials as shown and specified.B.Items specified.1.Support for Wall and Ceiling Mounted Items: (12, 14A, 14C)1.2 RELATED WORKA.Colors, finishes, and textures: Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.B.Prime and finish painting: Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Shop Drawings:1.Each item specified, showing complete detail, location in the project, material and size of components, method of joining various components and assemblies, finish, and location, size and type of anchors.2.Mark items requiring field assembly for erection identification and furnish erection drawings and instructions.3.Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.C.Design Calculations for specified live loads including dead loads.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA.Each manufactured product shall meet, as a minimum, the requirements specified, and shall be a standard commercial product of a manufacturer regularly presently manufacturing items of type specified.B.Each product type shall be the same and be made by the same manufacturer.C.Assembled product to the greatest extent possible before delivery to the site.D.Include additional features, which are not specifically prohibited by this specification, but which are a part of the manufacturer's standard commercial product.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):B18.6.1-97Wood ScrewsB18.2.2-87(R2005)Square and Hex NutsC.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A36/A36M-08Structural SteelA47-99(R2009)Malleable Iron CastingsA48-03(R2008)Gray Iron CastingsA53-10Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and SeamlessA123-09Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel ProductsA167-99(R2009)Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and StripA269-10Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General ServiceA307-10Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile StrengthA312/A312M-09Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel PipesA391/A391M-07Grade 80 Alloy Steel ChainA653/A653M-10Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip ProcessA786/A786M-09Rolled Steel Floor PlateB221-08Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and TubesB456-03(R2009)Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus ChromiumB632-08Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread PlateC1107-08Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)D3656-07Insect Screening and Louver Cloth Woven from Vinyl-Coated Glass YarnsF436-10Hardened Steel WashersF468-10Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs for General UseF593-02(R2008)Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and StudsF1667-11Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes and StaplesD.American Welding Society (AWS):D1.1-10Structural Welding Code SteelD1.2-08Structural Welding Code AluminumD1.3-08Structural Welding Code Sheet SteelE.National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)AMP 521-01Pipe Railing Manual AMP 500-06Metal Finishes ManualMBG 531-09Metal Bar Grating ManualMBG 532-09Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating ManualF.Structural Steel Painting Council (SSPC)/Society of Protective Coatings:SP 1-04No. 1, Solvent CleaningSP 2-04No. 2, Hand Tool CleaningSP 3-04No. 3, Power Tool CleaningG.Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec):RR-T-650ETreads, Metallic and Nonmetallic, NonskidPART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALSA.Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 302 or 304.B.Aluminum, Extruded: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5 unless otherwise specified. For structural shapes use alloy 6061-T6 and alloy 6061-T4511.C.Primer Paint: As specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.D.Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, type 302 or 304.E.Modular Channel Units:1.Factory fabricated, channel shaped, cold formed sheet steel shapes, complete with fittings bolts and nuts required for assembly.2.Form channel within turned pyramid shaped clamping ridges on each side.3.Provide case hardened steel nuts with serrated grooves in the top edges designed to be inserted in the channel at any point and be given a quarter turn so as to engage the channel clamping ridges. Provide each nut with a spring designed to hold the nut in place.4.Factory finish channels and parts with oven baked primer when exposed to view. Channels fabricated of ASTM A525, G90 galvanized steel may have primer omitted in concealed locations. Finish screws and nuts with zinc coating.5.Fabricate snap-in closure plates to fit and close exposed channel openings of not more than 0.3 mm (0.0125 inch) thick stainless steel.2.2 HARDWAREA.Rough Hardware:1.Furnish rough hardware with a standard plating, applied after punching, forming and assembly of parts; galvanized, cadmium plated, or zinc-coated by electro-galvanizing process. Galvanized G-90 where specified.2.Use G90 galvanized coating on ferrous metal for exterior work unless non-ferrous metal or stainless is used.B.Fasteners:1.Bolts with Nuts: a.ASME B18.2.2.b.ASTM A307 for 415 MPa (60,000 psi) tensile strength bolts.c.ASTM F468 for nonferrous bolts.d.ASTM F593 for stainless steel.2.Screws: ASME B18.6.1.3.Washers: ASTM F436, type to suit material and anchorage.4.Nails: ASTM F1667, Type I, style 6 or 14 for finish work.2.3 FABRICATION GENERALA.Material1.Use material as specified. Use material of commercial quality and suitable for intended purpose for material that is not named or its standard of quality not specified.2.Use material free of defects which could affect the appearance or service ability of the finished product.B.Size:1.Size and thickness of members as shown.2.When size and thickness is not specified or shown for an individual part, use size and thickness not less than that used for the same component on similar standard commercial items or in accordance with established shop methods.C.Connections1.Except as otherwise specified, connections may be made by welding, riveting or bolting.2.Field riveting will not be approved.3.Design size, number and placement of fasteners, to develop a joint strength of not less than the design value.4.Holes, for rivets and bolts: Accurately punched or drilled and burrs removed.5.Size and shape welds to develop the full design strength of the parts connected by welds and to transmit imposed stresses without permanent deformation or failure when subject to service loadings.6.Use Rivets and bolts of material selected to prevent corrosion (electrolysis) at bimetallic contacts. Plated or coated material will not be approved.7.Use stainless steel connectors for removable members machine screws or bolts.D.Fasteners and Anchors1.Use methods for fastening or anchoring metal fabrications to building construction as shown or specified.2.Where fasteners and anchors are not shown, design the type, size, location and spacing to resist the loads imposed without deformation of the members or causing failure of the anchor or fastener, and suit the sequence of installation.3.Use material and finish of the fasteners compatible with the kinds of materials which are fastened together and their location in the finished work.4.Fasteners for securing metal fabrications to new construction only, may be by use of threaded or wedge type inserts or by anchors for welding to the metal fabrication for installation before the concrete is placed or as masonry is laid.5.Fasteners for securing metal fabrication to existing construction or new construction may be expansion bolts, toggle bolts, power actuated drive pins, welding, self drilling and tapping screws or bolts.E.Workmanship1.General:a.Fabricate items to design shown.b.Furnish members in longest lengths commercially available within the limits shown and specified.c.Fabricate straight, true, free from warp and twist, and where applicable square and in same plane.d.Provide holes, sinkages and reinforcement shown and required for fasteners and anchorage items.e.Provide openings, cut-outs, and tapped holes for attachment and clearances required for work of other trades.f.Prepare members for the installation and fitting of hardware.g.Cut openings in gratings and floor plates for the passage of ducts, sumps, pipes, conduits and similar items. Provide reinforcement to support cut edges.h.Fabricate surfaces and edges free from sharp edges, burrs and projections which may cause injury.2.Welding:a.Weld in accordance with AWS.b.Welds shall show good fusion, be free from cracks and porosity and accomplish secure and rigid joints in proper alignment.c.Where exposed in the finished work, continuous weld for the full length of the members joined and have depressed areas filled and protruding welds finished smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.d.Finish welded joints to match finish of adjacent surface.3.Joining:a.Miter or butt members at corners.b.Where frames members are butted at corners, cut leg of frame member perpendicular to surface, as required for clearance.4.Anchors:a.Where metal fabrications are shown to be preset in concrete, weld 32 x 3 mm (1-1/4 by 1/8 inch) steel strap anchors, 150 mm (6 inches) long with 25 mm (one inch) hooked end, to back of member at 600 mm (2 feet) on center, unless otherwise shown.b.Where metal fabrications are shown to be built into masonry use 32 x 3 mm (1-1/4 by 1/8 inch) steel strap anchors, 250 mm (10 inches) long with 50 mm (2 inch) hooked end, welded to back of member at 600 mm (2 feet) on center, unless otherwise shown.5.Cutting and Fitting:a.Accurately cut, machine and fit joints, corners, copes, and miters.b.Fit removable members to be easily removed.c.Design and construct field connections in the most practical place for appearance and ease of installation.d.Fit pieces together as required.e.Fabricate connections for ease of assembly and disassembly without use of special tools.f.Joints firm when assembled.g.Conceal joining, fitting and welding on exposed work as far as practical.h.Do not show rivets and screws prominently on the exposed face.i.The fit of components and the alignment of holes shall eliminate the need to modify component or to use exceptional force in the assembly of item and eliminate the need to use other than common tools.F.Finish:1.Finish exposed surfaces in accordance with NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual.2.Aluminum: NAAMM AMP 501.a.Mill finish, AA-M10, as fabricated, use unless specified otherwise.b.Clear anodic coating, AA-C22A41, chemically etched medium matte, with Architectural Class 1, 0.7 mils or thicker.c.Painted: AA-C22R10.3.Steel and Iron: NAAMM AMP 504.a.Zinc coated (Galvanized): ASTM A123, G90 unless noted otherwise.b.Surfaces exposed in the finished work:1)Finish smooth rough surfaces and remove projections.2)Fill holes, dents and similar voids and depressions with epoxy type patching compound.c.Shop Prime Painting:1)Surfaces of Ferrous metal:a)Items not specified to have other coatings.b)Galvanized surfaces specified to have prime paint.c)Remove all loose mill scale, rust, and paint, by hand or power tool cleaning as defined in SSPC-SP2 and SP3.d)Clean of oil, grease, soil and other detrimental matter by use of solvents or cleaning compounds as defined in SSPC-SP1.e)After cleaning and finishing apply one coat of primer as specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.2)Non ferrous metals: Comply with MAAMM-500 series. 4.Stainless Steel: NAAMM AMP-504 Finish No. 4.G.Protection:1.Insulate aluminum surfaces that will come in contact with concrete, masonry, plaster, or metals other than stainless steel, zinc or white bronze by giving a coat of heavy-bodied alkali resisting bituminous paint or other approved paint in shop.2.Spot prime all abraded and damaged areas of zinc coating which expose the bare metal, using zinc rich paint on hot-dip zinc coat items and zinc dust primer on all other zinc coated items.2.4 SUPPORTSA.For Wall Mounted Items:1.For items supported by metal stud partitions.2.Steel strip or hat channel minimum of 1.5 mm (0.0598 inch) thick.3.Steel strip minimum of 150 mm (6 inches) wide, length extending one stud space beyond end of item supported.4.Steel hat channels where shown. Flange cut and flatted for anchorage to stud.5.Structural steel tube or channel for grab bar at water closets floor to structure above with clip angles or end plates formed for anchors.6.Use steel angles for thru wall counters. Drill angle for fasteners at ends and not over 100 mm (4 inches) on center between ends.B.For Trapeze Bars: 1.Construct assembly above ceilings as shown and design to support not less than a 340 kg (750 pound) working load at any point.2.Fabricate trapeze supports as shown, with all exposed members, including screws, nuts, bolts and washers, fabricated of stainless steel.3.Fabricate concealed components of structural steel shapes unless shown otherwise.4.Stainless steel ceiling plate drilled for eye bolt.5.Continuously weld connections where welds shown.6.Use modular channel where shown with manufacturers bolts and fittings.a.Weld ends of steel angle braces to steel plates and secure to modular channel units as shown. Drill plates for anchor bolts.b.Fabricate eye bolt, special clamp bolt, and plate closure full length of modular channel at ceiling line and secure to modular channel unit with manufacturers standard fittings.2.5 SCREENED ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMESA.Galvanized ASTM A123, G-90 after fabrication.B.Wall frame:1.Fabricate frame from steel angles or channels as shown.2.Continuously weld 38 x 13 mm (1-1/2 x 1/2 inch) steel channel door stop to angle frame. Cut out lock strike opening in channel.3.Miter and weld channel frame at corners. Reinforce corner with 3 mm (1/8 inch) plate angle.4.Reinforce channel frame with 3 x 150 mm (1/8 x 6 inch) long steel plate at channel back to cutout for latch. Cutout lock strike opening in channel face. Drill and tap for hinge anchorage.5.Drill jambs for 6 mm (1/4 inch) bolt anchors at top and bottom and not over 450 mm (18 inches) between top and bottom.6.Fabricate frame for door to sit flush with face of frame.C.Doors1.Fabricate door using steel channel frame with 3 mm (1/8 inch) angle plate reinforcing at corners.2.Miter and weld corners.3.Fabricate lock box of 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) plate and weld to channel surround.4.Provide wire mesh constructed of 3.5 mm (0.135 inch) diameter galvanized steel wire crimped and woven into 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) diamond mesh pattern. Fasten the wire mesh to door frames by bending the ends of each strand of wire over through channel clinched and welded to channel door frame.5.Weld steel plate back-bands to channel door frame at hinge stiles only.6.Screen on doors in exterior walls.a.Fabricate rewirable frame for screen from either extruded or tubular aluminum.b.Design to allow for removing or replacement frame and screening or adjoining items without damage.c.Use aluminum insect screening specified.d.Use stainless steel fasteners for securing screen to door.D.Hardware:1.Install hinged door to fixed frame with two 63 mm (2-1/2 inch) brass or bronze hinges.2.Install lock or latch specified in Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE in lockbox.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERALA.Set work accurately, in alignment and where shown, plumb, level, free of rack and twist, and set parallel or perpendicular as required to line and plane of surface.B.Field weld in accordance with AWS.1.Design and finish as specified for shop welding.2.Use continuous weld unless specified otherwise.C.Install anchoring devices and fasteners as shown and as necessary for securing metal fabrications to building construction as specified. Power actuated drive pins may be used except for removable items and where members would be deformed or substrate damaged by their use.D.Spot prime all abraded and damaged areas of zinc coating as specified and all abraded and damaged areas of shop prime coat with same kind of paint used for shop priming.E.Isolate aluminum from dissimilar metals and from contact with concrete and masonry materials as required to prevent electrolysis and corrosion.F.Secure escutcheon plate with set screw.3.2 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTSA.Anchorage to structure.1.Secure angles or channels and clips to overhead structural steel by continuous welding unless bolting is shown.2.Secure supports to concrete inserts by bolting or continuous welding as shown.3.Secure supports to mid height of concrete beams when inserts do not exist with expansion bolts and to slabs, with expansion bolts. unless shown otherwise.4.Secure steel plate or hat channels to studs as detailed.B.Supports for Wall Mounted items:1.Locate center of support at anchorage point of supported item.2.Locate support at top and bottom of wall hung cabinets.3.Locate support at top of floor cabinets and shelving installed against walls.4.Locate supports where required for items shown.3.3 OTHER FRAMESA.Set frame flush with surface unless shown otherwise.B.Anchor frames at ends and not over 450 mm (18 inches) on centers unless shown otherwise.C.Set in formwork before concrete is placed.3.4 SCREENED ACCESS DOORA.Set frame in opening so that clearance at jambs is equal and secure with expansion bolts.B.Use shims at bolts to prevent deformation of frame members in prepared openings.C.Set frame in mortar bed and build in anchors as the masonry work progresses.D.Grout jambs solid with mortar.E.Secure insect screen to inside of door with stainless steel fasteners on doors in exterior walls.3.5 STEEL COMPONENTS FOR MILLWORK ITEMSCoordinate and deliver to Millwork fabricator for assembly where millwork items are secured to metal fabrications.3.6 CLEAN AND ADJUSTINGA.Adjust movable parts including hardware to operate as designed without binding or deformation of the members centered in the opening or frame and, where applicable, contact surfaces fit tight and even without forcing or warping the components.B.Clean after installation exposed prefinished and plated items and items fabricated from stainless steel, aluminum and copper alloys, as recommended by the metal manufacture and protected from damage until completion of the project.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 06 10 00ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTION:Section specifies wood blocking, framing, sheathing, furring, nailers, sub-flooring, rough hardware, and light wood construction.1.2 RELATED WORK:A.Milled woodwork: Section 06 20 00, FINISH CARPENTRY.B.Gypsum sheathing: Section 09 29 00, GYPSUM BOARD.1.3 SUMBITTALS:A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Shop Drawings showing framing connection details, fasteners, connections and dimensions.1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:A.Protect lumber and other products from dampness both during and after delivery at site.B.Pile lumber in stacks in such manner as to provide air circulation around surfaces of each piece.C.Stack plywood and other board products so as to prevent warping.D.Locate stacks on well drained areas, supported at least 150 mm (6 inches) above grade and cover with well ventilated sheds having firmly constructed over hanging roof with sufficient end wall to protect lumber from driving rain. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:A.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.B.American Forest and Paper Association (AFPA):National Design Specification for Wood ConstructionNDS-05Conventional Wood Frame ConstructionC.American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC):A190.1-07Structural Glued Laminated TimberD.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):B18.2.1-96(R2005)Square and Hex Bolts and ScrewsB18.2.2-87Square and Hex NutsB18.6.1-97Wood ScrewsB18.6.4-98(R2005)Thread Forming and Thread Cutting Tapping Screws and Metallic Drive ScrewsE.American Plywood Association (APA):E30-07Engineered Wood Construction GuideF.American Society for Testing And Materials (ASTM):A47-99(R2009)Ferritic Malleable Iron CastingsA48-03(R2008)Gray Iron CastingsA653/A653M-10Steel Sheet Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip ProcessC954-10Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 inch (2.24 mm) to 0.112-inch (2.84 mm) in thicknessC1002-07Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Metal StudsD143-09Small Clear Specimens of Timber, Method of TestingD1760-01Pressure Treatment of Timber ProductsD2559-10Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for Use Under Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure ConditionsD3498-11Adhesives for Field-Gluing Plywood to Lumber Framing for Floor SystemsF844-07Washers, Steel, Plan (Flat) Unhardened for General UseF1667-08Nails, Spikes, and StaplesG.Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):MM-L-736CLumber; HardwoodCommercial Item Description (CID):A-A-55615Shield, Expansion (Wood Screw and Lag Bolt Self Threading Anchors)I.Military Specification (Mil. Spec.):MIL-L-19140ELumber and Plywood, Fire-Retardant TreatedJ.Truss Plate Institute (TPI):TPI-85Metal Plate Connected Wood TrussesK.U.S. Department of Commerce Product Standard (PS)PS 1-95Construction and Industrial PlywoodPS 20-05American Softwood Lumber StandardPART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 LUMBER:A.Unless otherwise specified, each piece of lumber bear grade mark, stamp, or other identifying marks indicating grades of material, and rules or standards under which produced. 1.Identifying marks in accordance with rule or standard under which material is produced, including requirements for qualifications and authority of the inspection organization, usage of authorized identification, and information included in the identification. 2.Inspection agency for lumber approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, to grade species used.B.Lumber Other Than Structural:1.Unless otherwise specified, species graded under the grading rules of an inspection agency approved by Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee.2.Furring, blocking, nailers and similar items 100 mm (4 inches) and narrower Standard Grade; and, members 150 mm (6 inches) and wider, Number 2 Grade.C.Sizes:1.Conforming to Prod. Std., PS20.2.Size references are nominal sizes, unless otherwise specified, actual sizes within manufacturing tolerances allowed by standard under which produced.D.Moisture Content:1.At time of delivery and maintained at the site.2.Boards and lumber 50 mm (2 inches) and less in thickness: 19 percent or less.3.Lumber over 50 mm (2 inches) thick: 25 percent or less.E.Fire Retardant Treatment:1.Mil Spec. MIL-L-19140 with piece of treated material bearing identification of testing agency and showing performance rating.2.Treatment and performance inspection, by an independent and qualified testing agency that establishes performance ratings.F.Preservative Treatment:1.Do not treat Heart Redwood and Western Red Cedar.2.Treat wood members and plywood exposed to weather or in contact with plaster, masonry or concrete, including framing of open roofed structures; sills, sole plates, furring, and sleepers that are less than 600 mm (24 inches) from ground; nailers, edge strips, blocking, crickets, curbs, cant, vent strips and other members used in connection with roofing and flashing materials.3.Treat other members specified as preservative treated (PT).4.Preservative treat by the pressure method complying with ASTM D1760, except any process involving the use of Chromated Copper arsenate (CCA) for pressure treating wood is not permitted.2.2 ply with Prod. Std., PS 1.B.Bear the mark of a recognized association or independent inspection agency that maintains continuing control over quality of plywood which identifies compliance by veneer grade, group number, span rating where applicable, and glue type.2.3 ROUGH HARDWARE AND ADHESIVES:A.Anchor Bolts:1.ASME B18.2.1 and ANSI B18.2.2 galvanized, 13 mm (1/2 inch) unless shown otherwise.2.Extend at least 200 mm (8 inches) into masonry or concrete with ends bent 50 mm (2 inches).B.Miscellaneous Bolts: Expansion Bolts: C1D, A-A-55615; lag bolt, long enough to extend at least 65 mm (2-1/2 inches) into masonry or concrete. Use 13 mm (1/2 inch) bolt unless shown otherwise.C.Washers1.ASTM F844.2.Use zinc or cadmium coated steel or cast iron for washers exposed to weather.D.Screws:1.Wood to Wood: ANSI B18.6.1 or ASTM C1002.2.Wood to Steel: ASTM C954, or ASTM C1002.E.Nails:1.Size and type best suited for purpose unless noted otherwise. Use aluminum-alloy nails, plated nails, or zinc-coated nails, for nailing wood work exposed to weather and on roof blocking.2.ASTM F1667:mon: Type I, Style 10.b.Concrete: Type I, Style 11.c.Barbed: Type I, Style 26.d.Underlayment: Type I, Style 25.e.Masonry: Type I, Style 27.f.Use special nails designed for use with ties, strap anchors, framing connectors, joists hangers, and similar items. Nails not less than 32 mm (1-1/4 inches) long, 8d and deformed or annular ring shank.F.Adhesives:1.For field-gluing plywood to lumber framing floor or roof systems: ASTM D3498.2.For structural laminated Wood: ASTM D2559.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATION OF FRAMING AND MISCELLANEOUS WOOD MEMBERS:A.Conform to applicable requirements of the following:1.AFPA National Design Specification for Wood Construction for timber connectors.2.AITC Timber Construction Manual for heavy timber construction.3.AFPA WCD-number 1, Manual for House Framing for nailing and framing unless specified otherwise.4.APA for installation of plywood or structural use panels.5.ASTM F 499 for wood underlayment.6.TPI for metal plate connected wood trusses.B.Fasteners:1.Nails.a.Nail in accordance with the Recommended Nailing Schedule as specified in AFPA Manual for House Framing where detailed nailing requirements are not specified in nailing schedule. Select nail size and nail spacing sufficient to develop adequate strength for the connection without splitting the members.b.Use special nails with framing connectors.c.For sheathing and subflooring, select length of nails sufficient to extend 25 mm (1 inch) into supports.d.Use eight penny or larger nails for nailing through 25 mm (1 inch) thick lumber and for toe nailing 50 mm (2 inch) thick lumber.e.Use 16 penny or larger nails for nailing through 50 mm (2 inch) thick lumber.2.Bolts:a.Fit bolt heads and nuts bearing on wood with washers.b.Countersink bolt heads flush with the surface of nailers.c.Embed in concrete and solid masonry or use expansion bolts. Special bolts or screws designed for anchor to solid masonry or concrete in drilled holes may be used.d.Use toggle bolts to hollow masonry or sheet metal.e.Use bolts to steel over 2.84 mm (0.112 inch, 11 gage) in thickness. Secure wood nailers to vertical structural steel members with bolts, placed one at ends of nailer and 600 mm (24 inch) intervals between end bolts. Use clips to beam flanges.3.Drill Screws to steel less than 2.84 mm (0.112 inch) thick.a.ASTM C1002 for steel less than 0.84 mm (0.033 inch) thick.b.ASTM C 954 for steel over 0.84 mm (0.033 inch) thick.4.Power actuated drive pins may be used where practical to anchor to solid masonry, concrete, or steel.5.Do not anchor to wood plugs or nailing blocks in masonry or concrete. Use metal plugs, inserts or similar fastening.6.Screws to Join Wood:a.Where shown or option to nails.b.ASTM C1002, sized to provide not less than 25 mm (1 inch) penetration into anchorage member.c.Spaced same as nails.C.Cut notch, or bore in accordance with NFPA Manual for House-Framing for passage of ducts wires, bolts, pipes, conduits and to accommodate other work. Repair or replace miscut, misfit or damaged work.D.Blocking Nailers, and Furring:1.Install furring, blocking, nailers, and grounds where shown.2.Use longest lengths practicable.3.Use fire retardant treated wood blocking where shown at openings and where shown or specified.4.Layers of Blocking or Plates:a.Stagger end joints between upper and lower pieces.b.Nail at ends and not over 600 mm (24 inches) between ends.c.Stagger nails from side to side of wood member over 125 mm (5 inches) in width.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 06 20 00FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies exterior and interior millwork.B.Items specified.-Counter or Work Tops-Mounting Strips, Shelves, and Rods-Moldings and Staff Beads1.2 RELATED WORKA.Fabricated Metal brackets, bench supports and countertop legs: Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS.B.Framing, furring and blocking: Section 06 10 00, ROUGH CARPENTRY.D.Color and texture of finish: Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.E.Other Countertops: Division 11, EQUIPMENT and Division 12, FURNISHINGS.F.Electrical light fixtures and duplex outlets: Division 26, ELECTRICAL.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Shop Drawings:1.Millwork items – Half full size scale for sections and details 1:50 (1/4-inch) for elevations and plans.2.Show construction and installation.C.Samples:Plastic laminate finished plywood or particleboard, 150 mm by 300 mm (six by twelve inches).D.Certificates:1.Indicating fire retardant treatment of materials meet the requirements specified.2.Indicating moisture content of materials meet the requirements specified.E.List of acceptable sealers for fire retardant and preservative treated materials.F.Manufacturer's literature and data:1.Finish hardware2.Sinks with fittings3.Electrical components1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGA.Protect lumber and millwork from dampness, maintaining moisture content specified both during and after delivery at site.B.Store finishing lumber and millwork in weathertight well ventilated structures or in space in existing buildings designated by COTR. Store at a minimum temperature of 210C (700F) for not less than 10 days before installation.C.Pile lumber in stacks in such manner as to provide air circulation around surfaces of each piece.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):A36/A36M-08Structural SteelA53-12Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and SeamlessA167-99 (R2009)Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and StripB26/B26M-09Aluminum-Alloy Sand CastingsB221-08Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and TubesE84-10Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsC.American Hardboard Association (AHA):A135.4-04Basic HardboardD.Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA):A156.9-03Cabinet HardwareA156.11-10Cabinet LocksA156.16-08Auxiliary HardwareE.Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association (HPVA):HP1-09Hardwood and Decorative PlywoodF.National Particleboard Association (NPA):A208.1-09Wood ParticleboardG.American Wood-Preservers’ Association (AWPA):AWPA C1-03All Timber Products – Preservative Treatment by Pressure ProcessesH.Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI):AWI-09Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards and Quality Certification ProgramI.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):LD 3-05High-Pressure Decorative LaminatesJ.U.S. Department of Commerce, Product Standard (PS):PS20-10American Softwood Lumber StandardK.Military Specification (Mil. Spec):MIL-L-19140ELumber and Plywood, Fire-Retardant TreatedL.Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):A-A-1922AShield ExpansionA-A-1936Contact AdhesiveFF-N-836DNut, Square, Hexagon Cap, Slotted, CastleFF-S-111D(1)Screw, WoodMM-L-736(C)Lumber, HardwoodPART 2 – PRODUCTS2.1 BIO-BASED MATERIAL:Bio-based Materials: For products designated by the USDA’s Bio-Preferred program, provide products that meet or exceed USDA recommendations for bio-based content, so long as products meet all performance requirements in this specification section. For more information regarding the product categories covered by the Bio-Preferred program, visit LUMBERA.Grading and Marking:1.Lumber shall bear the grade mark, stamp, or other identifying marks indicating grades of material.2.Such identifying marks on a material shall be in accordance with the rule or standard under which the material is produced, including requirements for qualifications and authority of the inspection organization, usage of authorized identification, and information included in the identification.3.The inspection agency for lumber shall be approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, to grade species used.B.Sizes:1.Lumber Size references, unless otherwise specified, are nominal sizes, and actual sizes shall be within manufacturing tolerances allowed by the standard under which product is produced.2.Millwork, standing and running trim, and rails: Actual size as shown or specified.C.Hardwood: MM-L-736, species as specified for each item.D.Softwood: PS-20, exposed to view appearance grades:1.Use C select or D select, vertical grain for transparent finish including stain transparent finish.2.Use Prime for painted or opaque finish.E.Use edge grain Wood members exposed to weather.2.3 PLYWOODA.Softwood Plywood:1.Prod. Std.2.Grading and Marking:a.Each sheet of plywood shall bear the mark of a recognized association or independent inspection agency that maintains continuing control over the quality of the plywood.b.The mark shall identify the plywood by species group or identification index, and shall show glue type, grade, and compliance with PS1.3.Plywood, 13 mm (1/2 inch) and thicker; not less than five ply construction, except 32 mm (1-1/4 inch) thick plywood not less than seven ply.4.Plastic Laminate Plywood Cores:a.Exterior Type, and species group.b.Veneer Grade: A-C.5.Shelving Plywood:a.Interior Type, any species group.b.Veneer Grade: A-B or B-C.6.Other: As specified for item.B.Hardwood Plywood:1.HPVA: HP.12.Species of face veneer shall be as shown or as specified in connection with each particular item.3.Inside of Building:a.Use Type II (interior) A grade veneer for transparent finish.b.Use Type II (interior) Sound Grade veneer for paint finish.4.On Outside of Building:a.Use Type I, (exterior) A Grade veneer for natural or stained and varnish finish.b.Use Type I, (exterior) Sound Grade veneer for paint finish.5.Use plain sliced rotary cut white birch unless specified otherwise.2.4 PARTICLEBOARDA.NPA A208.1B.Plastic Laminate Particleboard Cores:1.Use Type 1, Grade 1-M-3, or Type 2, Grade 2-M-2, unless otherwise specified.2.Use Type 2, Grade 2-M-2, exterior bond, for tops with sinks.C.General Use: Type 1, Grade 1-M-3 or Type 2, Grade 2-M-2.2.5 PLASTIC LAMINATEA.NEMA LD-3.B.Exposed decorative surfaces including countertops, both sides of cabinet doors, and for items having plastic laminate finish. General Purpose, Type HGL.C.Cabinet Interiors including Shelving: Both of following options to comply with NEMA, CLS as a minimum.1.Plastic laminate clad plywood or particle board.2.Resin impregnated decorative paper thermally fused to particle board.D.Backing sheet on bottom of plastic laminate covered wood tops: Backer, Type HGP.E.Post Forming Fabrication, Decorative Surfaces: Post forming, Type HGP.2.6 ADHESIVEA.For Plastic Laminate: Fed. Spec. A-A-1936.B.For Interior Millwork: Unextended urea resin, unextended melamine resin, phenol resin, or resorcinol resin.C.For Exterior Millwork: Unextended melamine resin, phenol resin, or resorcinol resin.2.7 STAINLESS STEELASTM A167, Type 302 or 304.2.8 ALUMINUM CASTASTM B262.9 ALUMINUM EXTRUDEDASTM B2212.10 HARDWAREA.Rough Hardware:1.Furnish rough hardware with a standard plating, applied after punching, forming and assembly of parts; galvanized, cadmium plated, or zinc-coated by electric-galvanizing process. Galvanized where specified.2.Use galvanized coating on ferrous metal for exterior work unless non-ferrous metals or stainless is used.3.Fasteners:a.Bolts with Nuts: FF-N-836.b.Expansion Bolts: A-A-1922A.c.Screws: Fed. Spec. FF-S-111.B.Finish Hardware1.Cabinet Hardware: ANSI A156.9.a.Door/Drawer Pulls: B02011. Door in seismic zones: B03182.b.Drawer Slides: B05051 for drawers over 150 mm (6 inches) deep, B05052 for drawers 75 mm to 150 mm 3 to 6 inches) deep, and B05053 for drawers less than 75 mm (3 inches) deep.c.Sliding Door Tracks: B07063.d.Adjustable Shelf Standards: B4061 with shelf rest B04083.e.Concealed Hinges: B1601, minimum 110 degree opening.f.Butt Hinges: B01361, for flush doors, B01381 for inset lipped doors, and B01521 for overlay doors.g.Cabinet Door Catch: B0371 or B03172.h.Vertical Slotted Shelf Standard: B04103 with shelf brackets B04113, sized for shelf depth.2.Cabinet Locks: ANSI A156.11.a.Drawers and Hinged Door: E07262.b.Sliding Door: E07162.3.Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI A156.16.a.Shelf Bracket: B04041, japanned or enameled finish.bination Garment rod and Shelf Support: B04051 japanned or enamel finish.c.Handrail Brackets: L03081 or L03101.1)Cast Aluminum, satin polished finish.2)Cast Malleable Iron, japanned or enamel finish.4.Edge Strips Moldings:a.Driven type "T" shape with serrated retaining stem; vinyl plastic to match plastic laminate color, stainless steel, or 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick extruded aluminum.b.Stainless steel or extruded aluminum channels.c.Stainless steel, number 4 finish; aluminum, mechanical applied medium satin finish, clear anodized 0.1 mm (0.4 mils) thick.5.Rubber or Vinyl moldinga.Rubber or vinyl standard stock and in longest lengths practicable.b.Design for closures at joints with walls and adhesive anchorage.c.Adhesive as recommended by molding manufacturer.6.Primers: Manufacturer's standard primer for steel providing baked enamel finish.2.11 MOISTURE CONTENTA.Moisture content of lumber and millwork at time of delivery to site.1.Interior finish lumber, trim, and millwork 32 mm (1-1/4 inches) or less in nominal thickness: 12 percent on 85 percent of the pieces and 15 percent on the remainder.2.Exterior treated or untreated finish lumber and trim 100 mm (4 inches) or less in nominal thickness: 15 percent.3.Moisture content of other materials shall be in accordance with the standards under which the products are produced.2.12 FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENTA.Where wood members and plywood are specified to be fire retardant treated, the treatment shall be in accordance with Mil. Spec. MIL-L19140.B.Treatment and performance inspection shall be by an independent and qualified testing agency that establishes performance ratings.C.Each piece of treated material shall bear identification of the testing agency and shall indicate performance in accordance with such rating of flame spread and smoke developed.D.Treat wood for maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 25.E.Fire Resistant Softwood Plywood:1.Use Grade A, Exterior, plywood for treatment.2.Meet the following requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.a.Flame spread: 0 to 25.b.Smoke developed: 100 maximumF.Fire Resistant Hardwood Plywood:1.Core: Fire retardant treated softwood plywood.2.Hardwood face and back veneers untreated,3.Factory seal panel edges, to prevent loss of fire retardant salts.2.13 ACOUSTICAL PANELA.Performance criteria:1.NRC 19 mm (3/4 inch) adhesive mounting direct to substrate.posite flame spread: ASTM E84, 25 or less.3.Smoke developed: ASTM E84, 140 or less.B.Glass fiber panel covered with fabric.1.Glass fiber panel one inch thick minimum, self supporting of density required for minimum NRC.2.Fabric covering treated to resist stains and soil, bonded directly to the glass fiber panel face, flat bonded directly to the glass fiber panel face, flat wrinkle-free surface.C.Adhesive: As recommended by panel manufacturers.2.14 FABRICATIONA.General:1.Except as otherwise specified, use AWI Custom Grade for architectural woodwork and interior millwork.2.Finish woodwork shall be free from pitch pockets.3.Except where special profiles are shown, trim shall be standard stock molding and members of the same species.4.Plywood shall be not less than 13 mm (1/2 inch), unless otherwise shown or specified.5.Edges of members in contact with concrete or masonry shall have a square corner caulking rebate.6.Fabricate members less than 4 m (14 feet) in length from one piece of lumber, back channeled and molded a shown.7.Interior trim and items of millwork to be painted may be fabricated from jointed, built-up, or laminated members, unless otherwise shown on drawings or specified.8.Plastic Laminate Work:a.Factory glued to either a plywood or a particle board core, thickness as shown or specified.b.Cover exposed edges with plastic laminate, except where aluminum, stainless steel, or plastic molded edge strips are shown or specified. Use plastic molded edge strips on 19 mm (3/4-inch) molded thick or thinner core material.c.Provide plastic backing sheet on underside of countertops, vanity tops, thru-wall counter and sills, including back splashes and end splashes of countertops.d.Use backing sheet on concealed large panel surface when decorative face does not occur.B.Mounting Strips, Shelves and Rods:1.Cut mounting strips from 25 mm by 100 mm (1 by 4 inches) softwood stock, with exposed edge slightly rounded.2.Cut wood shelf from softwood 1 inch stock, of width shown, exposed edge slightly rounded. Option: Use 19 mm (3/4 inch) thick plywood with 19 mm (3/4 inch) softwood edge nosing on exposed edge, slightly rounded.3.Plastic laminate covered, 19 mm (3/4 inch) thick plywood or particle board core with edges and ends having plastic molded edge strips. Size, finish and number as shown.C.Pegboard:1.Perforated hardboard sheet size as shown.2.Spacing strip: 13 mm by 13 mm (1/2 by 1/2 inch); glued to hardboard sheet.a.Locate at perimeter of sheet edge.b.Locate material intermediate spacing strips at 800 mm (32 inches) o.c.3.Use 19 mm (3/4 inch) one quarter round edge trim to cover exposed edge and finish flush with hardboard surface. Glue to spacing strip and hard board.D.Counter or Work Tops:1.Fabrication with plastic laminate over 32 mm (1-1/4 inch) thick core unless shown otherwise.a.Use decorative laminate for exposed edges of tops 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) wide and on back splash and end splash. Use plastic or metal edges for top edges less than 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) wide.b.Assemble back splash and end splash to counter top.c.Use one piece counters for straight runs.d.Miter corners for field joints with overlapping blocking on underside of joint.2.Fabricate wood counter for work benches as shown.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTSA.Maintain work areas and storage areas to a minimum temperature of 210C (700F) for not less than 10 days before and during installation of interior millwork.B.Do not install finish lumber or millwork in any room or space where wet process systems such as concrete, masonry, or plaster work is not complete and dry.3.2 INSTALLATIONA.General:1.Millwork receiving transparent finish shall be primed and back-painted on concealed surfaces. Set no millwork until primed and back-painted.2.Secure trim with fine finishing nails, screws, or glue as required.3.Set nails for putty stopping. Use washers under bolt heads where no other bearing plate occurs.4.Seal cut edges of preservative and fire retardant treated wood materials with a certified acceptable sealer.5.Coordinate with plumbing and electrical work for installation of fixtures and service connections in millwork items.6.Plumb and level items unless shown otherwise.7.Nail finish at each blocking, lookout, or other nailer and intermediate points; toggle or expansion bolt in place where nails are not suitable.8.Exterior Work: Joints shall be close fitted, metered, tongue and grooved, rebated, or lapped to exclude water and made up in thick white lead paste in oil.B.Pegboard or Perforated Hardboard:1.Install board with chromium plated steel round-head toggle bolts or other fasteners capable of supporting board when loaded at 122 kg/m2 (25 psf) of board.2.Install board with spacers to allow hooks and accessories to be inserted and removed.3.Install 6 mm (1/4 inch) round trim at perimeter to finish flush with face of board and close space between wall and hardboard.C.Shelves:1.Install mounting strip at back wall and end wall for shelves in closets where shown secured with toggle bolts at each end and not over 600 mm (24 inch) centers between ends.a.Nail Shelf to mounting strip at ends and to back wall strip at not over 900 mm (36 inches) on center.b.Install metal bracket, ANSI A156.16, B04041, not over 1200 mm (4 feet) centers when shelves exceed 1800 mm (6 feet) in length.c.Install metal bracket, ANSI A156.16, B04051, not over 1200 mm (4 feet) on centers where shelf length exceeds 1800 mm (6 feet) in length with metal rods, clothes hanger bars ANSI A156.16, L03131, of required length, full length of shelf.2.Install vertical slotted shelf standards, ANSI A156.9, B04103 to studs with toggle bolts through each fastener opening. Double slotted shelf standards may be used where adjacent shelves terminate.a.Install brackets ANSI A156.9, B04113, providing supports for shelf not over 900 mm (36 inches) on center and within 13 mm (1/2 inch) of shelf end unless shown otherwise.b.Install shelves on brackets so front edge is restrained by bracket.D.Handrails:1.Install in one piece and one length when practical.2.Where rails change slope or direction, install special curved sections and ends of rails to return to wall, glue all field joints.3.Install brackets within 300 mm (12 inches) of ends of handrails and at every spaced intervals between not exceeding 1500 mm (5 feet) on centers at intervals between as shown. Anchor brackets as detailed and rails to brackets with screws.E.Install with butt joints in straight runs and miter at corners.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 07 21 13THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTION:A.This section specifies thermal and acoustical insulation for buildings.B.Acoustical insulation is identified by thickness and words "Acoustical Insulation". 1.2 RELATED WORK ASafing insulation: Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. 1.3 SUBMITTALS:A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Insulation, each type used 2.Adhesive, each type used. 3.Tape C.Certificates: Stating the type, thickness and "R" value (thermal resistance) of the insulation to be installed. 1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING:A.Store insulation materials in weathertight enclosure. B.Protect insulation from damage from handling, weather and construction operations before, during, and after installation. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):C270-10Mortar for Unit Masonry C516-08Vermiculite Loose Fill Thermal Insulation C549-06Perlite Loose Fill Insulation C552-07Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.C553-08Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial ApplicationsC578-10Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation C591-09Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocynurate Thermal InsulationC612-10Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation C665-06Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured HousingC728-05 (R2010)Perlite Thermal Insulation BoardC954-10Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Base to Steel Studs From 0.033 (0.84 mm) inch to 0.112 inch (2.84 mm) in thicknessC1002-07Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel StudsD312-00(R2006)Asphalt Used in RoofingE84-10Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsF1667-11Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes and Staples.PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION – GENERAL:A.Where thermal resistance ("R" value) is specified or shown for insulation, the thickness shown on the drawings is nominal. Use only insulation with actual thickness that is not less than that required to provide the thermal resistance specified. B.Where "R" value is not specified for insulation, use the thickness shown on the drawings. C.Where more than one type of insulation is specified, the type of insulation for each use is optional, except use only one type of insulation in any particular area. D.Insulation Products shall comply with following minimum content standards for recovered materials:Material Type Percent by WeightPerlite composite board23 percent post consumer recovered paperPolyisocyanurate/polyurethaneRigid foam9 percent recovered materialFoam-in-place5 percent recovered materialGlass fiber reinforced6 percent recovered materialPhenolic rigid foam5 percent recovered materialRock wool material75 percent recovered materialThe minimum-content standards are based on the weight (not the volume) of the material in the insulating core only.2.2 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION:A.Mineral Fiber boards: ASTM C553, Type II, flexible, or Type III, semirigid (4.5 pound nominal density). B.Mineral Fiber Batt or Blankets: ASTM C665. Maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke development of 450 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. C.Thickness as shown; of widths and lengths to fit tight against framing. 2.3 SOUND DEADENING BOARD:A.Mineral Fiber Board: ASTM C612, Type IB, 13 mm (1/2 inch thick).2.4 RIGID INSULATION:A.On the inside face of exterior walls, spandrel beams, floors, bottom of slabs, and where shown. B.Mineral Fiber Board: ASTM C612, Type IB or 2. 2.5 FASTENERS:A.Staples or Nails: ASTM F1667, zinccoated, size and type best suited for purpose. B.Screws: ASTM C954 or C1002, size and length best suited for purpose with washer not less than 50 mm (two inches) in diameter.C.Impaling Pins: Steel pins with head not less than 50 mm (two inches) in diameter with adhesive for anchorage to substrate. Provide impaling pins of length to extend beyond insulation and retain cap washer when washer is placed on the pin. 2.6 ADHESIVE:A.As recommended by the manufacturer of the insulation. B.Asphalt: ASTM D312, Type III or IV. C.Mortar: ASTM C270, Type 0. 2.7 TAPE:A.Pressure sensitive adhesive on one face. B.Perm rating of not more than 0.50. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION GENERALA.Install insulation with the vapor barrier facing the heated side, unless specified otherwise. B.Install rigid insulating units with joints close and flush, in regular courses and with cross joints broken. C.Install batt or blanket insulation with tight joints and filling framing void completely. Seal cuts, tears, and unlapped joints with tape. D.Fit insulation tight against adjoining construction and penetrations, unless specified otherwise. 3.2 PERIMETER INSULATION:A.Vertical insulation: 1.Fill joints of insulation with same material used for bonding. 2.Bond polystyrene board to surfaces with adhesive and applied in accordance with recommendations of insulation manufacturer. 3.Bond cellular glass insulation to surfaces with hot asphalt or adhesive cement.3.3 EXTERIOR FRAMING OR FURRING BLANKET INSULATION:A.Pack insulation around door frames and windows and in building expansion joints, door soffits and other voids. Pack behind outlets around pipes, ducts, and services encased in walls. Open voids are not permitted. Hold insulation in place with pressure sensitive tape.B.Lap vapor retarder flanges together over face of framing for continuous surface. Seal all penetrations through the insulation. C.Fasten blanket insulation between metal studs or framing and exterior wall furring by continuous pressure sensitive tape along flanged edges.D.Fasten blanket insulation between wood studs or framing with nails or staples through flanged edges on face of stud. Space fastenings not more than 150 mm (six inches) apart. E.Ceiling Insulation and Soffit Insulation: 1.Fasten blanket insulation between joist with nails or staples through flanged edges of insulation. 2.At metal framing or ceilings suspension systems, install blanket insulation above suspended ceilings or metal framing at right angles to the main runners or framing. Tape insulation tightly together so no gaps occur and metal framing members are covered by insulation. 3.In areas where suspended ceilings adjoin areas without suspended ceilings, install either blanket, batt, or mineral fiberboard extending from the suspended ceiling to underside of deck or slab above. Secure in place to prevent collapse or separation of hung blanket, batt, or board insulation and maintain in vertical position. Secure blanket or batt with continuous cleats to structure above. 3.4 RIGID INSULATION ON SURFACE OF EXTERIOR WALLS, FLOORS, AND UNDERSIDE OF FLOORS:A.On the interior face of solid masonry and concrete walls, beams, beam soffits, underside of floors, and to the face of studs for interior wall finish where shown. B.Bond to solid vertical surfaces with adhesive as recommended by insulation manufacturer. Fill joints with adhesive cement. C.Use impaling pins for attachment to underside of horizontal surfaces. Space fastenings as required to hold insulation in place and prevent sagging. D.Fasten board insulation to face of studs with screws, nails or staples. Space fastenings not more than 300 mm (12 inches) apart. Stagger fasteners at joints of boards. Install at each corner. 3.5 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION:A.Fasten blanket insulation between metal studs and wall furring with continuous pressure sensitive tape along edges or adhesive. B.Pack insulation around door frames and windows and in cracks, expansion joints, control joints, door soffits and other voids. Pack behind outlets, around pipes, ducts, and services encased in wall or partition. Hold insulation in place with pressure sensitive tape or adhesive. C.Do not compress insulation below required thickness except where embedded items prevent required thickness. D.Where acoustical insulation is installed above suspended ceilings install blanket at right angles to the main runners or framing. Extend insulation over wall insulation systems not extending to structure above.E.Where semirigid insulation is used which is not full thickness of cavity, adhere to one side of cavity maintaining continuity of insulation and covering penetrations or embedments in insulation. F.Where sound deadening board is shown, secure with screws to metal framing. Secure sufficiently in place until subsequent cover is installed. Seal all cracks with caulking. E N D SECTION 07 21 23LOOSE-FILL INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.This section covers loose fill insulation, and all necessary blocking to install insulation over ceilings and where shown. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B.Samples: 1.Loose fill insulation in pint size containers 2.Blocking: 150 mm (6-inch) long strips 3.Vapor Retarder: 150 mm x 150 mm (6-inch by 6-inch) pieces C.Manufacture's Literature: 1.Submit current copies of the insulation manufacturer's printed fact sheet literature, including descriptive data, insulation characteristics, and instructions for installation and protection of insulation. 2.Submit copy of "Bag Label". 1.3 DELIVERYA.Deliver materials to the site in the original sealed containers or packages bearing the manufacturer's name and brand designation. B.The containers or packages of insulation shall bear the referenced specification number, type and class as applicable, recommended method of installation (pneumatic or pouring), minimum net weight of insulation, coverage charts, "R" values, and required warning statements. 1.4 STORAGEA.Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage and unload and store with a minimum of handling. B.Storage spaces shall be dry locations, not subject to open flames or sparks, and permitting easy access for inspection and handling.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): C612-10Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation C728-05 (R2010)Perlite Thermal Insulation BoardC739-08Cellulosic Fiber (Wood-Base) Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation C764-07Mineral Fiber Loose Fill Thermal Insulation C1015-06Installation of Cellulosic and Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal InsulationD4397-10Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agriculture ApplicationsE84-10Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsC.Federal Regulations:Code of Federal Regulations 29 CFR 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).D.National Fire Protection Associations (NFPA):211-10Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel Burning AppliancesPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LOOSE FILL INSULATION A.Cellulosic or Wood Fiber Loose Fill: ASTM C739. B.Mineral Fiber Loose Fill: ASTM C764, Type I or II.2.2 BLOCKING A.Wood, metal, mineral fiber or perlite boards or other materials approved by the COTR. B.Mineral Fiber Board: ASTM C612, Type IB. C.Perlite Board: ASTM C728. 2.3 RECOVERED MATERIALA.Insulation products shall comply with following minimum content standards for recovered materials:Material TypePercent by WeightCellulose Loose-fill and spray-on75 percent post-consumer recovered paperPerlite composite board23 percent post-consumerRock wool material75 percent recovered materialB.The minimum-content standards are based on the weight (not the volume) of the material in the insulating core only.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A.Where possible, inspect ceiling(s) to receive insulation for conditions which will adversely affect the execution of the work or create a safety hazard. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the COTR. B.Do not install insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.C.Follow ASTM C1015. The inspection shall include checking for the following: 1.Defects in electrical fixtures, equipment, wiring, junction boxes, receptacles, and switches that will cause hazards. 2.Openings through which the loose fill insulation material may escape. 3.Air ducts which appear to have joints that are not secure or sealed. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Prior to the installation of insulation, provide blocking as specified herein and in accordance with ASTM C1015. B.Install blocking around ceiling access-panel(s), if the level to which the unsettled insulation will be installed exceeds their height. C.Install blocking around heat producing devices with minimum clearances as specified herein. 1.Install blocking 50 mm (two inches) above the height of the finished insulation installation and in a manner that ensures that devices which may require maintenance or servicing remain accessible after the insulation is installed. 3.3 INSTALLATION A.Insulation:1.Install insulation in accordance with ASTM C1015 and the requirements specified. 2.Do not install insulation until the requirements specified in the INSPECTION and PREPARATION paragraphs have been carried out and any defects which were identified have been corrected and their cause eliminated. 3.Pneumatic installation of thermal insulation shall comply with OSHA. Supply and utilize the personnel protective equipment and engineering controls necessary for a safe effective installation. Use only pneumatic equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.4.Install the insulation allowing it to settle to its natural density. Do not tamp or rod the insulation. 5.Install insulation in sufficient depth to provide the thermal value specified after settlement of the insulation. 6.For pneumatic installations, use the least air pressure meeting the manufacturer's instructions. 7.Do not blow the insulation into electrical devices and vents which open into the attic and other spaces to be insulated. B.Post Installation Procedures:1.In accordance with ASTM C1015. 2.Remove temporary blockings over vent openings in attic(s). E N D SECTION 07 84 00FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.Closures of openings in walls, floors, and roof decks against penetration of flame, heat, and smoke or gases in fire resistant rated construction.B.Closure of openings in walls against penetration of gases or smoke in smoke partitions.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Sealants and application: Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.B.Fire and smoke damper assemblies in ductwork: Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Section 23 37 00, AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturers literature, data, and installation instructions for types of firestopping and smoke stopping used.C.List of FM, UL, or WH classification number of systems installed.D.Certified laboratory test reports for ASTM E814 tests for systems not listed by FM, UL, or WH proposed for use.1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGEA.Deliver materials in their original unopened containers with manufacturer’s name and product identification. B.Store in a location providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements.1.5 warrantyFirestopping work subject to the terms of the Article “Warranty of Construction”, FAR clause 52.246-21, except extend the warranty period to five years.1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCEFM, UL, or WH or other approved laboratory tested products will be acceptable.1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):E84-10Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsE814-11Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire StopsC.Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FM):Annual Issue Approval Guide Building MaterialsD.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):Annual Issue Building Materials DirectoryAnnual Issue Fire Resistance Directory1479-10Fire Tests of Through-Penetration FirestopsE.Warnock Hersey (WH):Annual Issue Certification ListingsPART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 FIRESTOP SYSTEMSA.Use either factory built (Firestop Devices) or field erected (through-Penetration Firestop Systems) to form a specific building system maintaining required integrity of the fire barrier and stop the passage of gases or smoke.B.Through-penetration firestop systems and firestop devices tested in accordance with ASTM E814 or UL 1479 using the "F" or "T" rating to maintain the same rating and integrity as the fire barrier being sealed. "T" ratings are not required for penetrations smaller than or equal to 100 mm (4 in) nominal pipe or 0.01 m2 (16 sq. in.) in overall cross sectional area.C.Products requiring heat activation to seal an opening by its intumescence shall exhibit a demonstrated ability to function as designed to maintain the fire barrier.D.Firestop sealants used for firestopping or smoke sealing shall have following properties:1.Contain no flammable or toxic solvents.2.Have no dangerous or flammable out gassing during the drying or curing of products.3.Water-resistant after drying or curing and unaffected by high humidity, condensation or transient water exposure.4.When used in exposed areas, shall be capable of being sanded and finished with similar surface treatments as used on the surrounding wall or floor surface. E.Firestopping system or devices used for penetrations by glass pipe, plastic pipe or conduits, unenclosed cables, or other non-metallic materials shall have following properties:1.Classified for use with the particular type of penetrating material used.2.Penetrations containing loose electrical cables, computer data cables, and communications cables protected using firestopping systems that allow unrestricted cable changes without damage to the seal.3.Intumescent products which would expand to seal the opening and act as fire, smoke, toxic fumes, and, water sealant.F.Maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke development of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.G.FM, UL, or WH rated or tested by an approved laboratory in accordance with ASTM E814.H.Materials to be asbestos free.2.2 SMOKE STOPPING IN SMOKE PARTITIONSA.Use silicone sealant in smoke partitions as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS. B.Use mineral fiber filler and bond breaker behind sealant.C.Sealants shall have a maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50 when tested in accordance with E84.D.When used in exposed areas capable of being sanded and finished with similar surface treatments as used on the surrounding wall or floor surface.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 EXAMINATIONSubmit product data and installation instructions, as required by article, submittals, after an on site examination of areas to receive firestopping.3.2 PREPARATIONA.Remove dirt, grease, oil, loose materials, or other substances that prevent adherence and bonding or application of the firestopping or smoke stopping materials.B.Remove insulation on insulated pipe for a distance of 150 mm (six inches) on either side of the fire rated assembly prior to applying the firestopping materials unless the firestopping materials are tested and approved for use on insulated pipes.3.3 INSTALLATIONA.Do not begin work until the specified material data and installation instructions of the proposed firestopping systems have been submitted and approved.B.Install firestopping systems with smoke stopping in accordance with FM, UL, WH, or other approved system details and installation instructions.C.Install smoke stopping seals in smoke partitions.3.4 CLEAN-UP AND ACCEPTANCE OF WORKA.As work on each floor is completed, remove materials, litter, and debris.B.Do not move materials and equipment to the next-scheduled work area until completed work is inspected and accepted by the COTR.C.Clean up spills of liquid type materials.- - - E N D - - - SECTION 07 92 00JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTION:Section covers all sealant and caulking materials and their application, wherever required for complete installation of building materials or systems.1.2 RELATED WORK:A.Firestopping penetrations: Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. B.Glazing: Section 08 80 00, GLAZING. C.Sound rated gypsum partitions/sound sealants: Section 09 29 00, GYPSUM BOARD. D.Mechanical Work: Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING, and Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC.1.3 QUALITY CONTROL:A.Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance.B.Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.C.Product Testing: Obtain test results from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 12-month period.1.Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C1021.2.Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.3.Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard specifications and test methods.D.VOC: Acrylic latex and Silicon sealants shall have less than 50g/l VOC content.1.4 SUBMITTALS:A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's installation instructions for each product used.C.Cured samples of exposed sealants for each color where required to match adjacent material.D.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Caulking compound 2.Primers 3.Sealing compound, each type, including compatibility when different sealants are in contact with each other.1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS:A.Environmental Limitations: 1.Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under following conditions:a.When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 4.4 C (40 F).b.When joint substrates are wet.B.Joint-Width Conditions:1.Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.C.Joint-Substrate Conditions:1.Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.1.6 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE:A.Deliver materials in manufacturers' original unopened containers, with brand names, date of manufacture, shelf life, and material designation clearly marked thereon.B.Carefully handle and store to prevent inclusion of foreign materials.C.Do not subject to sustained temperatures exceeding 32 C (90 F) or less than 5 C (40 F).1.7 DEFINITIONS:A.Definitions of terms in accordance with ASTM C717 and as specified.B.Backup Rod: A type of sealant backing.C.Bond Breakers: A type of sealant backing.D.Filler: A sealant backing used behind a back-up rod.1.8 warranty:A.Warranty exterior sealing against leaks, adhesion, and cohesive failure, and subject to terms of "Warranty of Construction", FAR clause 52.246-21, except that warranty period shall be extended to two years.B.General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Government of other rights Government may have under other provisions of Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of Contract Documents.1.9 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:A.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):C509-06Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material.C612-10Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. C717-10Standard Terminology of Building Seals and Sealants.C834-10Latex Sealants.C919-08.Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications.C920-10Elastomeric Joint Sealants.C1021-08Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants.C1193-09Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.C1330-02 (R2007)Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid Applied Sealants.D1056-07Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials—Sponge or Expanded Rubber.E84-09Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.C.Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute (SWRI). The Professionals’ GuidePART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SEALANTS:A.S-1: 1.ASTM C920, polyurethane or polysulfide. 2.Type M. 3.Class 25. 4.Grade NS. 5.Shore A hardness of 20-40 B.S-2: 1.ASTM C920, polyurethane or polysulfide. 2.Type M. 3.Class 25. 4.Grade P. 5.Shore A hardness of 25-40. C.S3: 1.ASTM C920, polyurethane or polysulfide. 2.Type S. 3.Class 25, joint movement range of plus or minus 50 percent. 4.Grade NS. 5.Shore A hardness of 15-25. 6.Minimum elongation of 700 percent.D.S-4: 1.ASTM C920 polyurethane or polysulfide. 2.Type S. 3.Class 25. 4.Grade NS. 5.Shore A hardness of 25-40.E.S-5: 1.ASTM C920, polyurethane or polysulfide. 2.Type S. 3.Class 25. 4.Grade P. 5.Shore hardness of 15-45.F.S-6: 1.ASTM C920, silicone, neutral cure. 2.Type S. 3.Class: Joint movement range of plus 100 percent to minus 50 percent. 4.Grade NS. 5.Shore A hardness of 15-20. 6.Minimum elongation of 1200 percent.G.S-7: 1.ASTM C920, silicone, neutral cure. 2.Type S. 3.Class 25. 4.Grade NS. 5.Shore A hardness of 25-30.6.Structural glazing application.H.S-8: 1.ASTM C920, silicone, acetoxy cure. 2.Type S. 3.Class 25. 4.Grade NS. 5.Shore A hardness of 25-30.6.Structural glazing application.I.S-9: 1.ASTM C920 silicone. 2.Type S. 3.Class 25. 4.Grade NS. 5.Shore A hardness of 25-30. 6.Non-yellowing, mildew resistant.J.S-10:1.ASTMC C920, coal tar extended fuel resistance polyurethane. 2.Type M/S. 3.Class 25. 4.Grade P/NS. 5.Shore A hardness of 15-20.K.S-11:1.ASTM C920 polyurethane. 2.Type M/S. 3.Class 25. 4.Grade P/NS. 5.Shore A hardness of 35 to 50.L.S-12:1.ASTM C920, polyurethane. 2.Type M/S. 3.Class 25, joint movement range of plus or minus 50 percent. 4.Grade P/NS. 5.Shore A hardness of 25 to 50.2.2 CAULKING COMPOUND:A.C-1: ASTM C834, acrylic latex.B.C-2: One component acoustical caulking, non drying, non hardening, synthetic rubber.2.3 COLOR:A.Sealants used with exposed masonry shall match color of mortar joints.B.Sealants used with unpainted concrete shall match color of adjacent concrete.C.Color of sealants for other locations shall be light gray or aluminum, unless specified otherwise.D.Caulking shall be light gray or white, unless specified otherwise.2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING:A.General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.B.Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:1.Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin.C.Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 32 C (minus 26 F). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.D.Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.2.5 FILLER:A.Mineral fiber board: ASTM C612, Class 1.B.Thickness same as joint width.C.Depth to fill void completely behind back-up rod. 2.6 PRIMER:A.As recommended by manufacturer of caulking or sealant material. B.Stain free type.2.7 CLEANERS-NON POUROUS SURFACES:seq level0 \h \r0 seq level1 \h \r0 seq level2 \h \r0 seq level3 \h \r0 seq level4 \h \r0 seq level5 \h \r0 seq level6 \h \r0 seq level7 \h \r0 Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturer of sealants and sealant backing material, free of oily residues and other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent non-porous surfaces and formulated to promote adhesion of sealant and substrates.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSPECTION:A.Inspect substrate surface for bond breaker contamination and unsound materials at adherent faces of sealant.B.Coordinate for repair and resolution of unsound substrate materials. C.Inspect for uniform joint widths and that dimensions are within tolerance established by sealant manufacturer.3.2 PREPARATIONS:A.Prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and SWRI.B.Clean surfaces of joint to receive caulking or sealants leaving joint dry to the touch, free from frost, moisture, grease, oil, wax, lacquer paint, or other foreign matter that would tend to destroy or impair adhesion.1.Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. 2.Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following:a.Concrete.b.Masonry.c.Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.3.Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.4.Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.a.Metal.b.Glass.c.Porcelain enamel.d.Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.C.Do not cut or damage joint edges.D.Apply masking tape to face of surfaces adjacent to joints before applying primers, caulking, or sealing compounds.1.Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.2.Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.3.Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.E.Apply primer to sides of joints wherever required by compound manufacturer's printed instructions. 1.Apply primer prior to installation of back-up rod or bond breaker tape. 2.Use brush or other approved means that will reach all parts of joints.F.Take all necessary steps to prevent three sided adhesion of sealants.3.3 BACKING INSTALLATION:A.Install back-up material, to form joints enclosed on three sides as required for specified depth of sealant.B.Where deep joints occur, install filler to fill space behind the back-up rod and position the rod at proper depth.C.Cut fillers installed by others to proper depth for installation of back-up rod and sealants.D.Install back-up rod, without puncturing the material, to a uniform depth, within plus or minus 3 mm (1/8 inch) for sealant depths specified.E.Where space for back-up rod does not exist, install bond breaker tape strip at bottom (or back) of joint so sealant bonds only to two opposing surfaces.F.Take all necessary steps to prevent three sided adhesion of sealants.3.4 SEALANT DEPTHS AND GEOMETRY:A.At widths up to 6 mm (1/4 inch), sealant depth equal to width.B.At widths over 6 mm (1/4 inch), sealant depth 1/2 of width up to 13 mm (1/2 inch) maximum depth at center of joint with sealant thickness at center of joint approximately 1/2 of depth at adhesion surface.3.5 INSTALLATION:A.General: 1.Apply sealants and caulking only when ambient temperature is between 5 C and 38 C (40 and 100 F). 2.Do not use polysulfide base sealants where sealant may be exposed to fumes from bituminous materials, or where water vapor in continuous contact with cementitious materials may be present. 3.Do not use sealant type listed by manufacture as not suitable for use in locations specified. 4.Apply caulking and sealing compound in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 5.Avoid dropping or smearing compound on adjacent surfaces. 6.Fill joints solidly with compound and finish compound smooth. 7.Tool joints to concave surface unless shown or specified otherwise. 8.Finish paving or floor joints flush unless joint is otherwise detailed. 9.Apply compounds with nozzle size to fit joint width. 10.Test sealants for compatibility with each other and substrate. Use only compatible sealant. B.For application of sealants, follow requirements of ASTM C1193 unless specified otherwise. C.Where gypsum board partitions are of sound rated, fire rated, or smoke barrier construction, follow requirements of ASTM C919 only to seal all cut-outs and intersections with the adjoining construction unless specified otherwise. 1.Apply a 6 mm (1/4 inch) minimum bead of sealant each side of runners (tracks), including those used at partition intersections with dissimilar wall construction.2.Coordinate with application of gypsum board to install sealant immediately prior to application of gypsum board.3.Partition intersections: Seal edges of face layer of gypsum board abutting intersecting partitions, before taping and finishing or application of veneer plaster-joint reinforcing. 4.Openings: Apply a 6 mm (1/4 inch) bead of sealant around all cut-outs to seal openings of electrical boxes, ducts, pipes and similar penetrations. To seal electrical boxes, seal sides and backs. 5.Control Joints: Before control joints are installed, apply sealant in back of control joint to reduce flanking path for sound through control joint.3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:A.Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field adhesion test log. B.Inspect tested joints and report on following:1.Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate.pare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer’s field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.3.Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free from voids.4.Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements.D.Record test results in a field adhesion test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. E.Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used to originally seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and new sealant contacts original sealant. F.Evaluation of Field-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.7 CLEANING:A.Fresh compound accidentally smeared on adjoining surfaces: Scrape off immediately and rub clean with a solvent as recommended by the caulking or sealant manufacturer.B.After filling and finishing joints, remove masking tape.C.Leave adjacent surfaces in a clean and unstained condition.3.8 LOCATIONS:A.Sanitary Joints:1.Walls to Plumbing Fixtures: Type S-92.Counter Tops to Walls: Type S-93.Pipe Penetrations: Type S-9B.Interior Caulking:1.Typical Narrow Joint 6 mm, (1/4 inch) or less at Walls and Adjacent Components: Types C-1 and C-2.4.Perimeter of Lead Faced Control Windows and Plaster or Gypsum Wallboard Walls: Types C-1 and C-2.5.Exposed Isolation Joints at Top of Full Height Walls: Types C-1 and C-2.6.Exposed Acoustical Joint at Sound Rated Partitions Type C-2.7.Concealed Acoustic Sealant Types S-4, C-1 and C-2. E N D SECTION 08 11 13HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies steel doors, steel frames and related components.B.Terms relating to steel doors and frames as defined in ANSI A123.1 and as specified.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Frames fabricated of structural steel: Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS.B.Aluminum frames entrance work: Section 08 41 13, ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS.C.Door Hardware: Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE.1.3 TESTINGAn independent testing laboratory shall perform testing.1.4 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturers Literature and Data:1.Fire rated doors and frames, showing conformance with NFPA 80 and Underwriters Laboratory, Inc., or Intertek Testing Services or Factory Mutual fire rating requirements.2.Sound rated doors, including test report from Testing Laboratory.1.5 SHIPMENT A.Prior to shipment label each door and frame to show location, size, door swing and other pertinent information.B.Fasten temporary steel spreaders across the bottom of each door frame.1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLINGA.Store doors and frames at the site under cover. B.Protect from rust and damage during storage and erection until completion.1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):L-S-125BScreening, Insect, NonmetallicC.Door and Hardware Institute (DHI):A115 SeriesSteel Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware, Series A115.1 through A115.17 (Dates Vary)D.Steel Door Institute (SDI):113-01 (R2006)Thermal Transmittance of Steel Door and Frame Assemblies 128-09Acoustical Performance for Steel Door and Frame AssembliesE.American National Standard Institute:A250.8-2003 (R2008)Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and FramesF.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A167-99(R2009)Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and StripA568/568-M-11Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-RolledA1008-10Steel, sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High Strength Low Alloy and High Strength Low Alloy with Improved FormabilityB209/209M-10Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and PlateB221/221M-12Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and TubesD1621-10Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular PlasticsD3656-07Insect Screening and Louver Cloth Woven from Vinyl Coated Glass YarnsE90-09Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions G.The National Association Architectural Metal Manufactures (NAAMM): Metal Finishes Manual (AMP 500-06)H.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 80-13Fire Doors and Fire WindowsI.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Fire Resistance DirectoryJ.Intertek Testing Services (ITS): Certifications Listings…Latest EditionK.Factory Mutual System (FM): Approval GuidePART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALSA.Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 302 or 304; finish, NAAMM Number 4.B.Sheet Steel: ASTM A1008, coldrolled for panels (face sheets) of doors.C.Anchors, Fastenings and Accessories: Fastenings anchors, clips connecting members and sleeves from zinc coated steel. D.Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209/209M.E.Aluminum, Extruded: ASTM B221/221M.F.Prime Paint: Paint that meets or exceeds the requirements of A250.8.2.2 FABRICATION GENERALA.GENERAL:1.Follow ANSI A250.8 for fabrication of standard steel doors, except as specified otherwise. Doors to receive hardware specified in Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE. Tolerances as per ANSI A250.8. Thickness, 44 mm (1-3/4 inches), unless otherwise shown.2.Close top edge of exterior doors flush and seal to prevent water intrusion.3.When vertical steel stiffeners are used for core construction, fill spaces between stiffeners with mineral fiber insulation.B.Standard Duty Doors: ANSI A250.8, Level 1, Full flush seamless design of size and design shown. Use for interior locations only. Do not use for stairwell doors, security doors and detention doors.C.Heavy Duty Doors: ANSI A250.8, Level 2, Full flush seamless design of size and design shown. Core construction types a, d, or f, for interior doors, and, types b, c, e, or f, for exterior doors.D.Extra Heavy Duty Doors: ANSI A250.8, Level 3, Full flush seamless design of size and design shown. Core construction Types d or f, for interior doors, and Types b, c, e, or f, for exterior doors. Use for detention doors, stairwell doors and security doors. See additional requirements for detention doors, under paragraph “Custom Hollow Metal Doors.Core Construction TypeDoor Core DescriptionaKraft honeycombbPolyurethanecPolystyrenedUnitized steel grideMineral fiberboardfVertical steel stiffeners??E.Smoke Doors:1.Close top and vertical edges flush.2.Provide seamless vertical edges.3.Apply Steel astragal to the meeting style at the active leaf of pair of doors or double egress doors.4.Provide clearance at head, jamb and sill as specified in NFPA 80.F.Fire Rated Doors (Labeled):1.Conform to NFPA 80 when tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Inchcape Testing Services, or Factory Mutual for the class of door or door opening shown.2.Fire rated labels of metal, with raised or incised markings of approving laboratory shall be permanently attached to doors.3.Close top and vertical edges of doors flush. Vertical edges shall be seamless. Apply steel astragal to the meeting stile of the active leaf of pairs of fire rated doors, except where vertical rod exit devices are specified for both leaves swinging in the same direction.4.Construct fire rated doors in stairwell enclosures for maximum transmitted temperature rise of 230 C (450 F) above ambient temperature at end of 30 minutes of fire exposure when tested in accordance with ASTM E152.G.Sound Rated Doors: 1.SDI 114, except as specified otherwise. 2.Sound Transmission Class minimum of 45 when tested in accordance with ASTM E90. 3.Doors complete with integral spring type automatic door bottom seal and with integral continuous gaskets on the frames. Applied spring type automatic door bottom seal and applied continuous gaskets for the frames for doors that are not sound rated but sealed for flanking noises are specified in Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE. 4.Fabricate vision panels to receive double glazing where shown. 2.3 METAL FRAMES A.General: 1.ANSI A250.8, 1.3 mm (0.053 inch) thick sheet steel, types and styles as shown or scheduled. 2.Frames for exterior doors: Fabricate from 1.7 mm (0.067 inch) thick galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A525.3.Frames for labeled fire rated doors.ply with NFPA 80. Test by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Inchcape Testing Services, or Factory Mutual.b.Fire rated labels of approving laboratory permanently attached to frames as evidence of conformance with these requirements. Provide labels of metal or engraved stamp, with raised or incised markings.4.Frames for doors specified to have automatic door operators; Security doors (Type 36); service window: minimum 1.7 mm (0.067 inch) thick.5.Knockeddown frames are not acceptable. B.Reinforcement and Covers: 1.ANSI A250.8 for, minimum thickness of steel reinforcement welded to back of frames.2.Provide mortar guards securely fastened to back of hardware reinforcements except on lead-lined frames. C.Terminated Stops: ANSI A250.8.D.Glazed Openings: a.Integral stop on exterior, corridor, or secure side of door. b.Design rabbet width and depth to receive glazing material or panel shown or specified. E.Two piece frames: a.One piece unequal leg finished rough buck subframes as shown, drilled for anchor bolts. b.Unequal leg finished frames formed to fit subframes and secured to subframe legs with countersunk, flat head screws, spaced 300 mm (12 inches) on center at head and jambs on each side. c.Preassemble at factory for alignment. F.Frame Anchors: 1.Floor anchors: a.Where floor fills occur, provide extension type floor anchors to compensate for depth of fill. b.At bottom of jamb use 1.3 mm (0.053 inch) thick steel clip angles welded to jamb and drilled to receive two 6 mm (1/4 inch) floor bolts. Use 50 mm x 50 mm (2 inch by 2 inch) 9 mm by (3/8 inch) clip angle for lead lined frames, drilled for 9 mm (3/8 inch) floor bolts. c.Where mullions occur, provide 2.3 mm (0.093 inch) thick steel channel anchors, drilled for two 6 mm (1/4 inch) floor bolts and frame anchor screws. d.Where sill sections occur, provide continuous 1 mm (0.042 inch) thick steel rough bucks drilled for 6 mm (1/4 inch) floor bolts and frame anchor screws. Space floor bolts at 50 mm (24 inches) on center. 2.Jamb anchors: a.Locate anchors on jambs near top and bottom of each frame, and at intermediate points not over 600 mm (24 inches) apart, except for fire rated frames space anchors as required by labeling authority. b.Form jamb anchors of not less than 1 mm (0.042 inch) thick steel unless otherwise specified. c.Anchors for stud partitions: Either weld to frame or use lockin snapin type. Provide tabs for securing anchor to the sides of the studs.d.Anchors for frames set in prepared openings: 1)Steel pipe spacers with 6 mm (1/4 inch) inside diameter welded to plate reinforcing at jamb stops or hat shaped formed strap spacers, 50 mm (2 inches) wide, welded to jamb near stop. 2)Drill jamb stop and strap spacers for 6 mm (1/4 inch) flat head bolts to pass thru frame and spacers. 3)Two piece frames: Subframe or rough buck drilled for 6 mm (1/4 inch) bolts. e.Anchors for observation windows and other continuous frames set in stud partitions. 1)In addition to jamb anchors, weld clip anchors to sills and heads of continuous frames over 1200 mm (4 feet) long. 2)Anchors spaced 600 mm (24 inches) on centers maximum. f.Modify frame anchors to fit special frame and wall construction and provide special anchors where shown or required. 2.4 SHOP PAINTINGANSI A250.8. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Plumb, align and brace frames securely until permanent anchors are set. 1.Use triangular bracing near each corner on both sides of frames with temporary wood spreaders at midpoint. 2.Use wood spreaders at bottom of frame if the shipping spreader is removed. 3.Protect frame from accidental abuse. 4.Where construction will permit concealment, leave the shipping spreaders in place after installation, otherwise remove the spreaders after the frames are set and anchored. 5.Remove wood spreaders and braces only after the walls are built and jamb anchors are secured. B.Floor Anchors: 1.Anchor the bottom of door frames to floor with two 6 mm (1/4 inch) diameter expansion bolts. Use 9 mm (3/8 inch) bolts on lead lined frames. 2.Power actuated drive pins may be used to secure frame anchors to concrete floors. C.Jamb Anchors: 1.Secure anchors to sides of studs with two fasteners through anchor tabs. Use steel drill screws to steel studs. D.Install anchors for labeled fire rated doors to provide rating as required.E.Frames for Sound Rated Doors: Coordinate to line frames for sound rated doors with insulation.3.2 INSTALLATION OF DOORS AND APPLICATION OF HARDWAREInstall doors and hardware as specified in Sections Section 08 11 13, HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Section 08 14 00, INTERIOR WOOD DOORS, and Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE. E N D SECTION 08 14 00Interior WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies interior flush doors with prefinish, prefit option.B.Section includes fire rated doors, sound retardant doors, and smoke doors.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Metal door frames: Section 08 11 13, HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES.B.Door hardware including hardware location (height): Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE.C.Installation of doors and hardware: Section 08 11 13, HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES, Section 08 14 00, INTERIOR WOOD DOORS, or Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE.D.Finish: Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Samples:1.Veneer sample 200 mm (8 inch) by 275 mm (11 inch) by 6 mm (1/4 inch) showing specified wood species sanded to receive a transparent finish. Factory finish veneer sample where the prefinished option is accepted. C.Shop Drawings:1.Show every door in project and schedule location in building.2.Indicate type, grade, finish and size; include detail of glazing, sound gasketing and pertinent details.3.Provide information concerning specific requirements not included in the manufacturer's literature and data submittal.D.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:1.Sound rated doors, including test report indicating STC rating per ASTM E90 from test laboratory. 2.Labeled fire rated doors showing conformance with NFPA 80.E.Laboratory Test Reports:1.Screw holding capacity test report in accordance with WDMA T.M.10.2.Split resistance test report in accordance with WDMA T.M.5.3.Cycle/Slam test report in accordance with WDMA T.M.7.4.Hinge-Loading test report in accordance with WDMA T.M.8.1.4 WarrantyA.Doors are subject to terms of Article titled “Warranty of Construction”, FAR clause 52.246-21, except that warranty shall be as follows:1.For interior doors, manufacturer’s warranty for lifetime of original installation.1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGEA.Factory seal doors and accessories in minimum of 6 mill polyethylene bags or cardboard packages which shall remain unbroken during delivery and storage.B.Store in accordance with WDMA I.S.1-A, Job Site Information.C.Label package for door opening where used.1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.B.Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA):I.S.1A-11Architectural Wood Flush DoorsI.S.4-09Water-Repellent Preservative Non-Pressure Treatment for MillworkI.S.6A-11Architectural Wood Stile and Rail DoorsT.M.6-08Adhesive (Glue Bond) Durability Test MethodT.M.7-08Cycle-Slam Test MethodT.M.8-08Hinge Loading Test MethodT.M.10-08Screwholding Test MethodC.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):80-10Protection of Buildings from Exterior Fire252-08Fire Tests of Door AssembliesD.ASTM International (ASTM):E90-09Laboratory Measurements of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 FLUSH DOORSA.General:1.Meet requirements of WDMA I.S.1-A, Extra Heavy Duty.2.Adhesive: Type II3.Thickness: 45 mm (1-3/4 inches) unless otherwise shown or specified.B.Face Veneer:1.In accordance with WDMA I.S.1-A.2.One species throughout the project unless scheduled or otherwise shown.3.For transparent finishes: Premium Grade. rotary cut, white Birch.a.A grade face veneer standard optional.b.AA grade face veneer c.Match face veneers for doors for uniform effect of color and grain at joints.d.Door edges shall be same species as door face veneer except maple may be used for stile face veneer on birch doors. e.In existing buildings, where doors are required to have transparent finish, use wood species and grade of face veneers to match adjacent existing doors.4.For painted finishes: Custom Grade, mill option close grained hardwood, premium or medium density overlay. Do not use Lauan.5.Factory sand doors for finishing.C.Wood for stops and moldings of flush doors required to have transparent finish:1.Solid Wood of same species as face veneer, except maple may be used on birch doors.2.Glazing:a.On non-labeled doors use applied wood stops nailed tight on room side and attached on opposite side with flathead, countersunk wood screws, spaced approximately 125 mm (5 inches) on centers.b.Use stainless steel or dull chrome plated brass screws for exterior doors.D.Stiles and Rails:1.Option for wood stiles and rails:posite material having screw withdrawal force greater than minimum performance level value when tested in accordance with WDMA T.M.10.2.Provide adequate blocking for bottom of doors having mechanically operated door bottom seal meeting or exceeding the performance duty level per T.M.10 for horizontal door edge screw holding.E.Fire rated wood doors:1.Fire Performance Rating:a.“B” label, 1-1/2 hours.b.“C” label, 3/4 hour.2.Labels:a.Doors shall conform to the requirements of ASTM E2074, or NFPA 252, and, carry an identifying label from a qualified testing and inspection agency for class of door or opening shown designating fire performance rating.b.Metal labels with raised or incised markings. 3.Performance Criteria for Stiles of doors utilizing standard mortise leaf hinges:a.Hinge Loading: WDMA T.M.8. Average of 10 test samples for Extra Heavy Duty doors.b.Direct screw withdrawal: WDMA T.M.10 for Extra Heavy Duty doors. Average of 10 test samples using a steel, fully threaded #12 wood screw.c.Cycle Slam: 1,000,000 cycles with no loose hinge screws or other visible signs of failure when tested in accordance with WDMA T.M.7.4.Additional Hardware Reinforcement:a.Provide fire rated doors with hardware reinforcement blocking.b.Size of lock blocks as required to secure hardware specified., bottom and intermediate rail blocks shall measure not less than 125 mm (five inches) minimum by full core width.d.Reinforcement blocking in compliance with manufacturer's labeling requirements.e.Mineral material similar to core is not acceptable.5.Other Core Components: Manufacturer's standard as allowed by the labeling requirements.6.Provide steel frame approved for use in labeled doors for vision panels.7.Provide steel astragal on pair of doors.F.Smoke Barrier Doors:1.For glazed openings use steel frames approved for use in labeled doors.2.Provide a steel astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors, including double egress doors.G.Sound Rated Doors:1.Fabricated as specified for flush wood doors with additional construction requirements to meet specified sound transmission class (STC).2.STC Rating of the door assembly in place when tested in accordance with ASTM E90 by an independent nationally recognized acoustical testing laboratory not less than wall STC rating.3.Accessories:a.Frame Gaskets: Continuous closed cell sponge neoprene with stop adjusters.b.Automatic Door Bottom Seal:1)Steel spring operated, closed cell sponge neoprene metal mounted removable in extruded aluminum housing with a medium matte 0.1 mm (4.0 mil) thick clear Anodized finish.2)Concealed or Surface Mounted.2.2 STILE AND RAIL DOORSA.Meeting requirements of WDMA I.S.6AB.Ponderosa pine doors of size and design shown.C.Grade: Premium.D.Door Panels:1.Grain of face of panels parallel with longest dimensions of panel.2.Flat panels: Veneered composite core, not less than 6 mm (5/8 inch) thick.E.Stops and Molds:1.Solid sticking both sides, of same material as stiles and rails, coped at intersections.2.Glazed openings applied wood stops nailed on interior side of door.2.3 PREFINISH, PREFIT OPTIONA.Flush doors may be factory machined to receive hardware, bevels, undercuts, cutouts, accessories and fitting for frame.B.Factory fitting to conform to specification for shop and field fitting, including factory application of sealer to edge and routings.C.Flush doors to receive transparent finish (in addition to being prefit) may be factory finished as follows: 1.WDMA I.S.1-A Section F-3 specification for System TR-4, Conversion Varnish or System TR-5, Catalyzed Vinyl.2.Use stain when required to produce the finish specified in Section 09 06 00 SHEDULE FOR FINISHES.2.4 IDENTIFICATION MARK:A.On top edge of door.B.Either a stamp, brand or other indelible mark, giving manufacturer’s name, door’s trade name, construction of door, code date of manufacture and quality.C.Accompanied by either of the following additional requirements:1.An identification mark or a separate certification including name of inspection organization.2.Identification of standards for door, including glue type.3.Identification of veneer and quality certification.4.Identification of preservative treatment for stile and rail doors.2.5 SEALING:Give top and bottom edge of doors two coats of catalyzed polyurethane or water resistant sealer before sealing in shipping containers.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 DOOR PREPARATIONA.Field, shop or factory preparation: Do not violate the qualified testing and inspection agency label requirements for fire rated doors.B.Clearances between Doors and Frames and Floors:1.Maximum 3 mm (1/8 inch) clearance at the jambs, heads, and meeting stiles, and a 19 mm (3/4 inch) clearance at bottom, except as otherwise specified.2.Maximum clearance at bottom of sound rated doors, light-proofed doors, doors to operating rooms, and doors designated to be fitted with mechanical seal: 10 mm (3/8 inch).C.Provide cutouts for special details required and specified.D.Rout doors for hardware using templates and location heights specified in Section, 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE.E.Fit doors to frame, bevel lock edge of doors 3 mm (1/8 inch) for each 50 mm (two inches) of door thickness.F.Immediately after fitting and cutting of doors for hardware, seal cut edges of doors with two coats of water resistant sealer.G.Finish surfaces, including both faces, top and bottom and edges of the doors smooth to touch.H.Apply a steel astragal on the opposite side of active door on pairs of fire rated doors.I.Apply a steel astragal to meeting style of active leaf of pair of doors or double egress smoke doors.3.2 INSTALLATION OF DOORS APPLICATION OF HARDWAREInstall doors and hardware as specified in this Section.3.3 DOOR PROTECTIONA.As door installation is completed, place polyethylene bag or cardboard shipping container over door and tape in place.B.Provide protective covering over knobs and handles in addition to covering door. C.Maintain covering in good condition until removal is approved by Resident Engineer.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 08 31 13ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTION:Section specifies access doors or panels.1.2 RELATED WORK:A.Wire mesh and screen access doors: Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS.B.Lock Cylinders: Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE.C.Access doors in acoustical ceilings: Section 09 51 00, ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS.D.Locations of access doors for duct work cleanouts: Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS Section 23 37 00, AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS.1.3 SUBMITTALS:A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Shop Drawings: Access doors, each type, showing construction, location and installation details.C.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Access doors, each type.1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A167-99(R-2009)Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and StripA1008-10Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High Strength Low-AlloyC.American Welding Society (AWS):D1.3-08Structural Welding Code Sheet SteelD.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):80-10Fire Doors and WindowsE.The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): AMP 500 SeriesMetal Finishes ManualF.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):Fire Resistance DirectoryPART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 FABRICATION, GENERALA.Fabricate components to be straight, square, flat and in same plane where required. 1.Slightly round exposed edges and without burrs, snags and sharp edges. 2.Exposed welds continuous and ground smooth.3.Weld in accordance with AWS D1.3.B.Number of locks and non-continuous hinges as required to maintain alignment of panel with frame. For fire rated doors, use hinges and locks as required by fire test. C.Provide anchors or make provisions in frame for anchoring to adjacent construction. Provide size, number and location of anchors on four sides to secure access door in opening. Provide anchors as required by fire test. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS, FIRE RATED:A.Shall meet requirements for "B" label 1-1/2 hours with maximum temperature rise of 120 degree C (250 degrees F).ply with NFPA 80 and have Underwriters Laboratories Inc., or other nationally recognized laboratory label for Class B opening.C.Door Panel: Form of 0.9 mm (0.0359 inch) thick stainless steel sheet, insulated sandwich type construction.D.Frame: Form of 1.5 mm (0.0598 inch) thick steel sheet of depth and configuration to suit material and type of construction where installed. Provide frame flange at perimeter where installed in concrete masonry or gypsum board openings. 1.Weld exposed joints in flange and grind smooth.2.Provide frame flange at perimeter where installed in concrete masonry or gypsum board.E.Automatic Closing Device: Provide automatic closing device for door.F.Hinge: Continuous steel hinge with stainless steel pin.G.Lock: 1.Self-latching, with provision for fitting flush a standard screw-in type lock cylinder. Lock cylinder specified in Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE. 2.Provide latch release device operable from inside of door. Mortise case in door.2.3 ACCESS DOORS, FLUSH PANEL:A. Door Panel: 1.Form of 1.5 mm (0.0598 inch) thick stainless steel . 2.Reinforce to maintain flat surface.B.Frame: 1.Form of 1.5 mm (0.0598 inch) thick stainless steel sheet of depth and configuration to suit material and type of construction where installed.2.Provide surface mounted units having frame flange at perimeter where installed in concrete, masonry, or gypsum board construction. 3.Weld exposed joints in flange and grind smooth.C.Hinge: 1.Concealed spring hinge to allow panel to open 175 degrees. 2.Provide removable hinge pin to allow removal of panel from frame.D.Lock: 1.Flush, screwdriver operated cam lock. 2.Provide tamper proof screws (spanner head locks) for access panels in Psychiatric Areas. 2.4 ACCESS DOOR, RECESSED PANEL:A.Door Panel: 1.Form of 1.2 mm (0.0478 inch) thick stainless steel sheet to form a 25 mm (one inch) deep recessed pan to accommodate the installation of acoustical units, acoustical plaster, or other materials where shown in walls and ceiling.2. Reinforce as required to prevent sagging.B.Frame: 1.Form of 1.5 mm (0.0598 inch) thick steel sheet of depth and configuration to suit installation in suspension system of ceiling or wall framing. 2.Extend sides of frame to protect edge of acoustical units when panel is in open position. 3.Provide shims, bushings, clips and other devices necessary for installation.C.Hinge: Continuous steel hinge with stainless steel pin or concealed hinge.D.Lock: 1.Flush screwdriver operated cam lock. 2.Provide sleeve of plastic or stainless steel grommet to protect hole made in acoustical unit for screwdriver access to lock. 3.Provide tamper proof screws (spanner head locks) for access panels in Psychiatric Areas. 2.5 FINISH:A.Provide in accordance with NAAMM AMP 500 series on exposed surfaces.B.Steel Surfaces: Baked-on prime coat over a protective phosphate coating.C.Stainless Steel: No. 4 for exposed surfaces.2.6 SIZE:Minimum 600 mm (24 inches) square door unless otherwise shown or required to suit opening in suspension system of ceiling.PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LOCATION:A.Provide access panels or doors wherever any valves, traps, dampers, cleanouts, and other control items of mechanical, electrical and conveyor work are concealed in wall or partition, or are above ceiling of gypsum board or plaster.B.Use fire rated doors in fire rated partitions and ceilings.C.Use flush panels in partitions and gypsum board or plaster ceilings, except lay-in acoustical panel ceilings or upward access acoustical tile ceilings.3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL:A.Install access doors in openings to have sides vertical in wall installations, and parallel to ceiling suspension grid or side walls when installed in ceiling. B.Set frames so that edge of frames without flanges will finish flush with surrounding finish surfaces. C.Set frames with flanges to overlap opening and so that face will be uniformly spaced from the finish surface. D.Set recessed panel access doors recessed so that face of surrounding materials will finish on the same plane, when finish in door is installed.3.3 ANCHORAGE:A.Secure frames to adjacent construction using anchors attached to frames or by use of bolts or screws through the frame members. B.Type, size and number of anchoring device suitable for the material surrounding the opening, maintain alignment, and resist displacement during normal use of access door. C.Anchors for fire rated access doors shall meet requirements of applicable fire test.3.4 ADJUSTMENT:A.Adjust hardware so that door panel will open freely. B.Adjust door when closed so door panel is centered in the frame.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 08 41 13ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION:This section specifies aluminum entrance work including storefront construction, hung doors, and other components to make a complete assembly.1.2 RELATED WORK:A.Glass and Glazing: Section 08 80 00, GLAZING. B.Hardware: Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE. C.Automatic Door Operators: Section 08 71 13, AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS. D.Texture and color of finish: Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES. 1.3 SUBMITTALS:A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Shop Drawings: (1/2 full scale) showing construction, anchorage, reinforcement, and installation details.C.Manufacturer’s Literature and Data:1.Doors, each type.2.Entrance and Storefront construction.D.Samples:1.Door corner section, 450 mm x 450 mm (18 x 18 inches), of each door type specified, showing vertical and top hinge edges of flush panel door. 2.Two samples of anodized aluminum of each color showing finish and maximum shade range. E.Manufacturer's Certificates:1.Stating that aluminum has been given specified thickness of anodizing.2.Indicating manufacturer's qualifications specified.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:A.Approval by Contracting Officer is required of products of proposed manufacturer, or supplier, and will be based upon submission by Contractor certification.B.Certify manufacturer regularly and presently manufactures aluminum entrances and storefronts as one of their principal products.1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:A.Deliver aluminum entrance and storefront material to the site in packages or containers; labeled for identification with the manufacturer's name, brand and contents.B.Store aluminum entrance and storefront material in weather-tight and dry storage facility.C.Protect from damage from handling, weather and construction operations before, during and after installation.1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):B209-07Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and PlateB221-08Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and TubesE283-04Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the SpecimenE331-00(R2009)Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure DifferenceF468-10Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs for General UseF593-02(R2008)Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs C.National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):AMP 500 SeriesMetal Finishes ManualD.American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA):2604-10High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Aluminum Extrusions and PanelsE.American Welding Society (AWS):D1.2-08Structural Welding Code AluminumPART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALS:A.Aluminum, ASTM B209 and B221:1.Alloy 6063 temper T5 for doors, door frames, fixed glass sidelights and storefronts. 2.Alloy 6061 temper T6 for guide tracks for sliding doors and other extruded structural members.B.Fasteners:1.Aluminum: ASTM F468, Alloy 2024.2.Stainless Steel: ASTM F593, Alloy Groups 1, 2 and 3.2.2 FABRICATION:A.Fabricate doors, of extruded aluminum sections not less than 3 mm (0.125 inch) thick. Fabricate glazing beads of aluminum not less than 1.0 mm (0.050 inch) thick.B.Accurately form metal parts and accurately fit and rigidly assemble joints, except those joints designed to accommodate movement. Seal joints to prevent leakage of both air and water.C.Make welds in aluminum in accordance with the recommended practice AWA D1.2. Use electrodes and methods recommended by the manufacturers of the metals and alloys being welded. Make welds behind finished surfaces so as to cause no distortion or discoloration of the exposed side. Clean welded joints of welding flux and dress exposed and contact surfaces.D.Make provisions in doors and frames to receive the specified hardware and accessories. Coordinate schedule and template for hardware specified under Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE. Where concealed closers or other mechanisms are required, provide the necessary space, cutouts, and reinforcement for secure fastening. E.Fit and assemble the work at the manufacturer's plant. Mark work that cannot be permanently plant-assembled to assure proper assembly in the field.2.3 PROTECTION OF ALUMINUM:A.Isolate aluminum from contact with dissimilar metals other than stainless steel, white bronze, or zinc by any of the following:1.Coat the dissimilar metal with two coats of heavy-bodied alkali resistant bituminous paint.2.Place caulking compound, or non-absorptive tape, or gasket between the aluminum and the dissimilar metal.3.Paint aluminum in contact with mortar, concrete and plaster, with a coat of aluminum paint primer.2.4 FRAMES:A.Fabricate doors, frames, mullions, frames for fixed glass and similar members from extruded aluminum not less than 3 mm (0.125 inch) thick.B.Provide integral stops and glass rebates and applied snap-on type trim.C.Use concealed screws, bolts and other fasteners. Secure cover boxes to frames in back of all lock strike cutouts.2.5 STILE AND RAIL DOORS:A.Nominal 45 mm (1-3/4 inch) thick, with stile and head rail 90 mm (3-1/2 inches) wide, and bottom rail 250 mm (10 inches) wide.B.Bevel single-acting doors 3 mm (1/8 inch) at lock, hinge and meeting stile edges. Provide clearances of 2 mm (1/16 inch) at hinge stiles, 3 mm (1/8 inch) at lock stiles and top rails, and 5 mm (3/16 inch) at floors and thresholds. Form glass rebates integrally with stiles and rails. Glazing beads may be formed integrally with stiles and rails or applied type secured with fasteners at 150 mm (six inches) on centers.C.Construct doors with a system of welded joints or interlocking dovetail joints between stiles and rails. Clamp door together through top and bottom rails with 9 mm (3/8 inch) primed steel rod extending into the stiles, and having a self-locking nut and washer at each end. Reinforce stiles and rails to prevent door distortion when tie rods are tightened. Provide a compensating spring-type washer under each nut to take up any stresses that may develop. Construct joints between rails and stiles to remain rigid and tight when door is operated.2.6 FLUSH PANEL DOORS:A.Nominal 45 mm (1-3/4 inches) thick. Form from aluminum face sheets not less than 1.5 mm (0.060 inch) thick with internal impact reinforcement, laminated to the door edges and the core.B.Provide extruded aluminum tubular members to form the perimeter of the door. Reinforce doors internally with extruded tubular members welded in place, and extending full width of door at top, bottom, and intermediate points. C.Fill voids between tubular members with noncombustible mineral insulation.2.7 REINFORCEMENT FOR BUILDERS HARDWARE:A.Fabricate from stainless steel plates.B.Hinge and pivot reinforcing: 4.55 mm (0.1793 inch) thick.C.Reinforcing for lock face, flush bolts, concealed holders, concealed or surface mounted closers: 2.66 mm (0.1046 inch) thick.D.Reinforcing for all other surface mounted hardware: 1.5 mm (0.0598 inch) thick.2.8 FINISHA.In accordance with NAAMM AMP 500 series.B.Anodized Aluminum:1.Clear Finish: Chemically etched medium matte, with clear anodic coating, Class I Architectural, 7 mils thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATION:A.Allowable Installation Tolerances: Install work plumb and true, in alignment and in relation to lines and grades shown. Variation of 3?mm (1/8 inch) in 2400 mm (eight feet), non-accumulative, is maximum permissible for plumb, level, warp, bow and alignment.B.Anchor aluminum frames to adjoining construction at heads, jambs and bottom and to steel supports, and bracing. Anchor frames with stainless steel or aluminum countersunk flathead, expansion bolts or machine screws, as applicable. Use aluminum clips for internal connections of adjoining frame sections.C.Where work is installed within masonry or concrete openings, place no parts other than built-in anchors and provision for operating devices located in the floor, until after the masonry or concrete work is completed.D.Install hardware specified under Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE.3.2 ADJUSTING:After installation of entrance and storefront work is completed, adjust and lubricate operating mechanisms to insure proper performance.3.3 PROTECTION, CLEANING AND REPAIRING:Remove all mastic smears and other unsightly marks, and repair any damaged or disfiguration of the work. Protect the installed work against damage or abuse.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.Door hardware and related items necessary for complete installation and operation of doors. 1.2 RELATED WORKA.Caulking: Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.B.Application of Hardware: Section 08 14 00, INTERIOR WOOD DOORS, Section 08 11 13, HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES, Section 08 41 13, ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS, Section 08 71 13, AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS, and Section 08 71 13.11, LOW ENERGY DOOR OPERATORS C.Finishes: Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.D.Painting: Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.E.Electrical: Division 26, ELECTRICAL.F.Fire Detection: Section 28 31 00, FIRE DETECTION, AND ALARM.1.3 GENERALA.All hardware shall comply with UFAS, (Uniform Federal Accessible Standards) unless specified otherwise.B.Provide rated door hardware assemblies where required by most current version of the International Building Code (IBC).C.Hardware for Labeled Fire Doors and Exit Doors: Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 for labeled fire doors and to NFPA 101 for exit doors, as well as to other requirements specified. Provide hardware listed by UL, except where heavier materials, large size, or better grades are specified herein under paragraph HARDWARE SETS. In lieu of UL labeling and listing, test reports from a nationally recognized testing agency may be submitted showing that hardware has been tested in accordance with UL test methods and that it conforms to NFPA requirements.D.Hardware for application on metal and wood doors and frames shall be made to standard templates. Furnish templates to the fabricator of these items in sufficient time so as not to delay the construction. E.The following items shall be of the same manufacturer, except as otherwise specified: 1.Mortise locksets. 2.Hinges for hollow metal and wood doors. 3.Surface applied overhead door closers. 4.Exit devices. 5.Floor closers.1.4 WARRANTYA.Automatic door operators shall be subject to the terms of FAR Clause 52.246-21, except that the Warranty period shall be two years in lieu of one year for all items except as noted below:1.Locks, latchsets, and panic hardware: 5 years.2.Door closers and continuous hinges: 10 years.1.5 MAINTENANCE MANUALSA.In accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Article titled "INSTRUCTIONS", furnish maintenance manuals and instructions on all door hardware. Provide installation instructions with the submittal documentation.1.6 SUBMITTALSA.Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. Submit 6 copies of the schedule per Section 01 33 23. Submit 2 final copies of the final approved schedules to VAMC Locksmith as record copies (VISN Locksmith if the VAMC does not have a locksmith).B.Hardware Schedule: Prepare and submit hardware schedule in the following form:Hardware ItemQuantitySizeReference Publication Type No.FinishMfr. Name and Catalog No.Key Control SymbolsUL Mark (if fire rated and listed)ANSI/BHMA Finish DesignationC.Samples and Manufacturers' Literature: 1.Samples: All hardware items (proposed for the project) that have not been previously approved by Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association shall be submitted for approval. Tag and mark all items with manufacturer's name, catalog number and project number. 2.Samples are not required for hardware listed in the specifications by manufacturer's catalog number, if the contractor proposes to use the manufacturer's product specified.D.Certificate of Compliance and Test Reports: Submit certificates that hardware conforms to the requirements specified herein. Certificates shall be accompanied by copies of reports as referenced. The testing shall have been conducted either in the manufacturer's plant and certified by an independent testing laboratory or conducted in an independent laboratory, within four years of submittal of reports for approval.1.7 DELIVERY AND MARKINGA.Deliver items of hardware to job site in their original containers, complete with necessary appurtenances including screws, keys, and instructions. Tag one of each different item of hardware and deliver to COTR for reference purposes. Tag shall identify items by Project Specification number and manufacturer's catalog number. These items shall remain on file in COTR's office until all other similar items have been installed in project, at which time the COTR will deliver items on file to Contractor for installation in predetermined locations on the project.1.8 preinstallation meetingA.Convene a preinstallation meeting not less than 30 days before start of installation of door hardware. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including Contractor and Installer, Architect, Project Engineer and VA Locksmith, Hardware Consultant, and Hardware Manufacturer’s Representative. Review the following:1.Inspection of door hardware.2.Job and surface readiness.3.Coordination with other work. 4.Protection of hardware surfaces.5.Substrate surface protection.6.Installation.7.Adjusting.8.Repair.9.Field quality control.10. Cleaning.1.9 INSTRUCTIONSA.Hardware Set Symbols on Drawings: Except for protective plates, door stops, mutes, thresholds and the like specified herein, hardware requirements for each door are indicated on drawings by symbols. Symbols for hardware sets consist of letters (e.g., "HW") followed by a number. Each number designates a set of hardware items applicable to a door type. B. Keying: All cylinders shall be keyed into existing Great. Provide removable core cylinders that are removable only with a special key or tool without disassembly of knob or lockset. Cylinders shall be 7 pin IC Core type. Contractor shall 59A1 keyway large format cores. Keying information shall be furnished at a later date by the COTR.C.Keying: A new Great Grandmaster key shall be established for this project. The key system shall be small format (Best size and profile) removable core type as previously described. The key blanks shall be protected by a utility patent with a minimum seven years remaining on the patent from the start of construction, and protected by contract-controlled distribution. The manufacturer shall furnish code pattern listings in both paper and electronic formats so keys may be reproduced by code.; provide electronic format in file type required by project’s key control software. The manufacturer shall design the new key system with the capacity to rekey the existing system and also provide for 25 percent expansion capability beyond this requirement. Submit a keying chart for approval showing proposed keying layout and listing expansion capacity.1.Keying information will be furnished to the Contractor by the COTR.2.Supply information regarding key control of cylinder locks to manufacturers of equipment having cylinder type locks. Notify COTR immediately when and to whom keys or keying information is supplied. Return all such keys to the COTR. 1.10 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. In text, hardware items are referred to by series, types, etc., listed in such specifications and standards, except as otherwise specified. B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):F883-04Padlocks E2180-07................Standard Test Method for Determining the Activity of Incorporated Antimicrobial Agent(s) In Polymeric or Hydrophobic MaterialsC.American National Standards Institute/Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA):A156.106Butts and HingesA156.203Bored and Pre-assembled Locks and LatchesA156.308Exit Devices, Coordinators, and Auto Flush BoltsA156.408Door Controls (Closers) A156.501Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products A156.605Architectural Door Trim A156.805Door ControlsOverhead Stops and Holders A156.12-05 .............Interconnected Locks and LatchesA156.13-05Mortise Locks and Latches Series 1000 A156.14-07 .............Sliding and Folding Door HardwareA156.1506Release Devices-Closer Holder, Electromagnetic and ElectromechanicalA156.1608Auxiliary HardwareA156.17-04 .............Self-Closing Hinges and PivotsA156.1806Materials and Finishes A156.20-06 .............Strap and Tee Hinges, and HaspsA156.21-09ThresholdsA156.22-05Door Gasketing and Edge Seal SystemsA156.23-04Electromagnetic LocksA156.24-03Delayed Egress Locking SystemsA156.25-07 .............Electrified Locking DevicesA156.26-06Continuous HingesA156.28-07 .............Master Keying SystemsA156.29-07 .............Exit Locks and AlarmsA156.30-03 .............High Security CylindersA156.31-07 Electric Strikes and Frame Mounted ActuatorsA250.8-03Standard Steel Doors and FramesD.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 80-10Fire Doors and Fire Windows 101-09Life Safety CodeE.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Building Materials Directory (2008)PART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 BUTT HINGESA.ANSI A156.1. Provide only three-knuckle hinges, except five-knuckle where the required hinge type is not available in a three-knuckle version (e.g., some types of swing-clear hinges). The following types of butt hinges shall be used for the types of doors listed, except where otherwise specified:1.Exterior Doors: Type A2112/A5112 for doors 900 mm (3 feet) wide or less and Type A2111/A5111 for doors over 900 mm (3 feet) wide. Hinges for exterior outswing doors shall have nonremovable pins. Hinges for exterior fire-rated doors shall be of stainless steel material.2.Interior Doors: Type A8112/A5112 for doors 900 mm (3 feet) wide or less and Type A8111/A5111 for doors over 900 mm (3 feet) wide. Hinges for doors exposed to high humidity areas (shower rooms, toilet rooms, kitchens, janitor rooms, etc. shall be of stainless steel material.B.Provide quantity and size of hinges per door leaf as follows:Doors up to 1210 mm (4 feet) high: 2 hinges.Doors 1210 mm (4 feet) to 2260 mm (7 feet 5 inches) high: 3 hinges minimum.Doors greater than 2260 mm (7 feet 5 inches) high: 4 hinges.Doors up to 900 mm (3 feet) wide, standard weight: 114 mm x 114 mm (4-1/2 inches x 4-1/2 inches) hinges.Doors over 900 mm (3 feet) to 1065 mm (3 feet 6 inches) wide, standard weight: 127 mm x 114 mm (5 inches x 4-1/2 inches).Doors over 1065 mm (3 feet 6 inches) to 1210 mm (4 feet), heavy weight: 127 mm x 114 mm (5 inches x 4-1/2 inches).Provide heavy-weight hinges where specified.At doors weighing 330 kg (150 lbs.) or more, furnish 127 mm (5 inch) high hinges.C.See Articles "MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE" and "HARDWARE SETS" for pivots and hinges other than butts specified above and continuous hinges specified below.2.2 CONTINUOUS HINGESA.ANSI/BHMA?A156.26, Grade?1-600.1.Listed under Category?N in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory."B.General: Minimum 0.120-inch- (3.0-mm-) thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 4 inches (102 mm); fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with components finished after milling and drilling are completeC.Continuous, Barrel-Type Hinges: Hinge with knuckles formed around a Teflon-coated 6.35mm (0.25-inch) minimum diameter pin that extends entire length of hinge.1.Base Metal for Interior Hinges: Stainless steel.2.Base Metal for Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Stainless steel.3.Provide with non-removable pin (hospital tip option) at lockable outswing doors.4.Where required to clear adjacent casing, trim, and wall conditions and allow full door swing, provide wide throw hinges of minimum width required.5.Provide with manufacturer’s cut-outs for separate mortised power transfers and/or mortised automatic door bottoms where they occur.6.Where thru-wire power transfers are integral to the hinge, provide hinge with easily removable portion to allow easy access to wiring connections.7.Where models are specified that provide an integral wrap-around edge guard for the hinge edge of the door, provide manufacturer’s adjustable threaded stud and machine screw mechanism to allow the door to be adjusted within the wrap-around edge guard.2.3 DOOR CLOSING DEVICESA.Closing devices shall be products of one manufacturer. 2.4 OVERHEAD CLOSERSA.Conform to ANSI A156.4, Grade 1.B.Closers shall conform to the following: 1.The closer shall have minimum 50 percent adjustable closing force over minimum value for that closer and have adjustable hydraulic back check effective between 60 degrees and 85 degrees of door opening.2.Where specified, closer shall have hold-open feature. 3.Size Requirements: Provide multi-size closers, sizes 1 through 6, except where multi-size closer is not available for the required application.4.Material of closer body shall be forged or cast. 5.Arm and brackets for closers shall be steel, malleable iron or high strength ductile cast iron. 6.Where closers are exposed to the exterior or are mounted in rooms that experience high humidity, provide closer body and arm assembly of stainless steel material.7.Closers shall have full size metal cover; plastic covers will not be accepted.8.Closers shall have adjustable hydraulic backcheck, separate valves for closing and latching speed, adjustable back-check positioning valve, and adjustable delayed action valve. 9.Provide closers with any accessories required for the mounting application, including (but not limited to) drop plates, special soffit plates, spacers for heavy-duty parallel arm fifth screws, bull-nose or other regular arm brackets, longer or shorter arm assemblies, and special factory templating. Provide special arms, drop plates, and templating as needed to allow mounting at doors with overhead stops and/or holders.10. Closer arms or backcheck valve shall not be used to stop the door from overswing, except in applications where a separate wall, floor, or overhead stop cannot be used.11. Provide parallel arm closers with heavy duty rigid arm.12. Where closers are to be installed on the push side of the door, provide parallel arm type except where conditions require use of top jamb arm.13. Provide all surface closers with the same body attachment screw pattern for ease of replacement and maintenance.14. All closers shall have a 1 ?” (38mm) minimum piston diameter. 2.5 FLOOR CLOSERS AND FLOOR PIVOT ply with ANSI A156.4. Provide stainless steel floor plates for floor closers and floor pivots, except where metal thresholds occur. Provide cement case for all floor closers. Floor closers specified for fire doors shall comply with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., requirements for concealed type floor closers for classes of fire doors indicated on drawings. Holdopen mechanism, where required, shall engage when door is opened 105 degrees, except when door swing is limited by building construction or equipment, the holdopen feature shall engage when door is opened approximately 90 degrees. The hold-open mechanism shall be selectable on/off by turning a screw through the floor plate. Floor closers shall have adjustable hydraulic backcheck, adjustable close speed, and adjustable latch speed. Provide closers with delayed action where a hold-open mechanism is not required. Floor closers shall be multi-sized. Single acting floor closers shall also have built in dead stop. Where required, provide closers with special cement cases appropriate for shallow deck installation or where concrete joint lines run through the floor blockout. At offset-hung doors installed in deep reveals, provide special closer arm and spindle to allow for installation. Where stone or terrazzo is applied over the floor closer case, provide closer without floor plate and with extended spindle (length as required) and special cover pan (depth as required) to allow closer to be accessed without damaging the material applied over the closer. Pivots for nonlabeled doors shall be cast, forged or extruded brass or bronze. B.Where floor closer appears in hardware set provide the following as applicable. 1.Double Acting Floor Closers: Type C06012. 2.Single Acting Floor Closer: Type C06021 (center pivoted). (Intermediate pivot is not required). 3.Single Acting Floor Closers: Type C06041 (offset pivoted). 4.Single Acting Floor Closer for Labeled Fire Doors: Type C06051 (offset pivoted). 5.Single Acting Floor Closers For Lead Lined Doors: Type C06071 (offset pivoted).2.6 DOOR STOPSA.Conform to ANSI A156.16.B.Provide door stops wherever an opened door or any item of hardware thereon would strike a wall, column, equipment or other parts of building construction. For concrete, masonry or quarry tile construction, use lead expansion shields for mounting door stops. C.Where cylindrical locks with turn pieces or pushbuttons occur, equip wall bumpers Type L02251 (rubber pads having concave face) to receive turn piece or button. D.Provide floor stops (Type L02141 or L02161 in office areas; Type L02121 x 3 screws into floor elsewhere. Wall bumpers, where used, must be installed to impact the trim or the door within the leading half of its width. Floor stops, where used, must be installed within 4-inches of the wall face and impact the door within the leading half of its width.E.Where drywall partitions occur, use floor stops, Type L02141 or L02161 in office areas, Type L02121 elsewhere. F.Provide stop Type L02011, as applicable for exterior doors. At outswing doors where stop can be installed in concrete, provide stop mated to concrete anchor set in 76mm (3-inch) core-drilled hole and filled with quick-setting cement.G.Omit stops where floor mounted door holders are required and where automatic operated doors occur. H.Provide appropriate roller bumper for each set of doors (except where closet doors occur) where two doors would interfere with each other in swinging. I.Provide appropriate door mounted stop on doors in individual toilets where floor or wall mounted stops cannot be used. J.Provide overhead surface applied stop Type C02541, ANSI A156.8 on patient toilet doors in bedrooms where toilet door could come in contact with the bedroom door. K.Provide door stops on doors where combination closer magnetic holders are specified, except where wall stops cannot be used or where floor stops cannot be installed within 4-inches of the wall. L.Where the specified wall or floor stop cannot be used, provide concealed overhead stops (surface-mounted where concealed cannot be used).2.7 FLOOR DOOR HOLDERSA.Conform to ANSI Standard A156.16. Provide extension strikes for Types L01301 and L01311 holders where necessary.2.8 LOCKS AND LATCHESA.Conform to ANSI A156.2. Locks and latches for doors 45 mm (13/4 inch) thick or over shall have beveled fronts. Lock cylinders shall have not less than six pins. Cylinders for all locksets shall be removable core type. Cylinder shall be removable by special key or tool. Construct all cores so that they will be interchangeable into the core housings of all mortise locks, rim locks, cylindrical locks, and any other type lock included in the Great Grand Master Key System. Disassembly of lever or lockset shall not be required to remove core from lockset. All locksets or latches on double doors with fire label shall have latch bolt with 19 mm (3/4 inch) throw, unless shorter throw allowed by the door manufacturer’s fire label. Provide temporary keying device or construction core of allow opening and closing during construction and prior to the installation of final cores. B.In addition to above requirements, locks and latches shall comply with following requirements: 1.Mortise Lock and Latch Sets: Conform to ANSI/BHMA A156.13. Mortise locksets shall be series 1000, minimum Grade 2. All locksets and latchsets, except on designated doors in Psychiatric (Mental Health) areas, shall have lever handles fabricated from cast stainless steel. No substitute lever material shall be accepted. All locks and latchsets shall be furnished with 122.55 mm (4-7/8-inch) curved lip strike and wrought box. At outswing pairs with overlapping astragals, provide flat lip strip with 21mm (7/8-inch) lip-to-center dimension. Lock function F02 shall be furnished with emergency tools/keys for emergency entrance. All lock cases installed on lead lined doors shall be lead lined before applying final hardware finish. Furnish armored fronts for all mortise locks. Where mortise locks are installed in high-humidity locations or where exposed to the exterior on both sides of the opening, provide non-ferrous mortise lock case.2.Cylindrical Lock and Latch Sets: levers shall meet ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) requirements. Cylindrical locksets shall be series 4000 Grade I. All locks and latchsets shall be furnished with 122.55 mm (4-7/8-inch) curved lip strike and wrought box. At outswing pairs with overlapping astragals, provide flat lip strip with 21mm (7/8-inch) lip-to-center dimension. Provide lever design to match design selected by Architect or to match existing lever design. Where two turn pieces are specified for lock F76, turn piece on inside knob shall lock and unlock inside knob, and turn piece on outside knob shall unlock outside knob when inside knob is in the locked position. (This function is intended to allow emergency entry into these rooms without an emergency key or any special tool.) 3.Auxiliary locks shall be as specified under hardware sets and conform to ANSI A156.5. 4.Privacy locks in non-mental-health patient rooms shall have an inside thumbturn for privacy and an outside thumbturn for emergency entrance. Single occupancy patient privacy doors shall typically swing out; where such doors cannot swing out, provide center-pivoted doors with rescue hardware (see HW-2B).2.9 PUSH-BUTTON COMBINATION LOCKSA.ANSI/BHMA?A156.13, Grade?1. Battery operated pushbutton entry.B.Construction: Heavy duty mortise lock housing conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Grade 1. Lever handles and operating components in compliance with the UFAS and the ADA Accessibility Guidelines. Match lever handles of locks and latchsets on adjacent doors.C.Special Features: Key override to permit a master keyed security system and a pushbutton security code activated passage feature to allow access without using the entry code.D.Delayed-Egress Locks: BHMA?A156.241.Means of Egress Doors: Lock releases within 15 seconds after applying a force not more than 15 lbf (67?N) for not more than 3 seconds, as required by NFPA?101.2.Security Grade: Activated from secure side of door by initiating device.3.Movement Grade: Activated by door movement as initiating device.4.The lock housing shall not project more than 4-inches (101mm) from the underside of the frame head stop.2.10 ELECTRIC STRIKESA.ANSI/ BHMA?A156.31 Grade 1.B.General: Use fail-secure electric strikes at fire-rated doors.2.11 KEYSA.Stamp all keys with change number and key set symbol. Furnish keys in quantities as follows: Locks/KeysQuantityCylinder locks2 keys each Cylinder lock change key blanks100 each different key way Masterkeyed sets6 keys each Grand Master sets6 keys each Great Grand Master set5 keys Control key2 keys 2.12 KEY CABINETA.ANSI Standard A156.5. Provide key cabinet made of cold rolled, 1.2 mm (0.0478 inch) thick furniture steel electrowelded. Doors shall have "no sag" continuous brasspin piano type hinge and be equipped with chrome plated locking door handles, hook cam and mechanical pushbutton door lock. Key Cabinet and Key Control System shall accommodate all keys for this project plus 25 percent. Provide minimum number of multiple cabinets where a single cabinet of largest size will not accommodate the required number of keys.B.Key tags shall consist of two sets: Permanent selflocking and loan key snaphook type with tag colors as follows: Red fiber marker of the permanent selflocking type approximately 32 mm (11/4 inch) in diameter engraved with the legend "FILE KEY MUST NOT BE LOANED." Also furnish for each hook a white cloverleaf key marker with snaphooks engraved with the legend "LOAN KEY." C.The manufacturer of the lock cylinders and locks shall attach a key tag to keys of each lock cylinder and shall mark thereon the respective item number and key change number. Provide each group of keys in a key gathering envelope (supplied by Key Cabinet Manufacturer) in which the lock manufacturer shall include the following information: Item number, key change number and door number. The contractor shall furnish the Key Cabinet Manufacturer the hardware and keying schedules and change keys. D.The Key Cabinet Manufacturer shall set up a threeway cross index system, including master keys, listing the keys alphabetically, the hooks numerically and the key changes numerically on different colored index cards. Index cards shall be typewritten and inserted in a durable binder. Attach the keys to the two sets of numbered tags supplied with the cabinet. (The permanent tag and the loan key tag). Instruct the owner in proper use of the system. Install cabinet as directed by the COTR. 2.13 ARMOR PLATES, KICK PLATES, MOP PLATES AND DOOR EDGINGA.Conform to ANSI Standard A156.6.B.Provide protective plates as specified below: 1.Kick plates, mop plates and armor plates of metal, Type J100 series.2.Provide kick plates and mop plates where specified. Kick plates shall be 254 mm (10 inches) or 305 mm (12 inches) high. Mop plates shall be 152 mm (6 inches) high. Both kick and mop plates shall be minimum 1.27 mm (0.050 inches) thick. Provide kick and mop plates beveled on all 4 edges (B4E). On push side of doors where jamb stop extends to floor, make kick plates 38 mm (11/2 inches) less than width of door, except pairs of metal doors which shall have plates 25 mm (1 inch) less than width of each door. Extend all other kick and mop plates to within 6 mm (1/4 inch) of each edge of doors. Kick and mop plates shall butt astragals. For jamb stop requirements, see specification sections pertaining to door frames. 3.Kick plates and/or mop plates are not required on following door sides: a.Armor plate side of doors;b.Closet side of closet doors;c.Both sides of aluminum entrance doors. 4.Armor plates for doors are listed under Article "Hardware Sets". Armor plates shall be thickness as noted in the hardware set, 875 mm (35 inches) high and 38 mm (11/2 inches) less than width of doors, except on pairs of metal doors. Provide armor plates beveled on all 4 edges (B4E). Plates on pairs of metal doors shall be 25 mm (1 inch) less than width of each door. Where top of intermediate rail of door is less than 875 mm (35 inches) from door bottom, extend armor plates to within 13 mm (1/2 inch) of top of intermediate rail. On doors equipped with panic devices, extend armor plates to within 13 mm (1/2 inch) of panic bolt push bar.5.Provide stainless steel edge guards where so specified at wood doors. Provide mortised type instead of surface type except where door construction and/or ratings will not allow. Provide edge guards of bevel and thickness to match wood door. Provide edge guards with factory cut-outs for door hardware that must be installed through or extend through the edge guard. Provide full-height edge guards except where door rating does not allow; in such cases, provide edge guards to height of bottom of typical lockset armor front. Forward edge guards to wood door manufacturer for factory installation on doors.2.14 EXIT DEVICESA.Conform to ANSI Standard A156.3. Exit devices shall be Grade 1; type and function are specified in hardware sets. Provide flush with finished floor strikes for vertical rod exit devices in interior of building. Trim shall have cast satin stainless steel lever handles of design similar to locksets, unless otherwise specified. Provide key cylinders for keyed operating trim and, where specified, cylinder dogging.B.Surface vertical rod panics shall only be provided less bottom rod; provide fire pins as required by exit device and door fire labels. Do not provide surface vertical rod panics at exterior doors.C.Concealed vertical rod panics shall be provided less bottom rod at interior doors, unless lockable or otherwise specified; provide fire pins as required by exit device and door fire labels. Where concealed vertical rod panics are specified at exterior doors, provide with both top and bottom rods.D.Where removable mullions are specified at pairs with rim panic devices, provide mullion with key-removable feature.E.At non-rated openings with panic hardware, provide panic hardware with key cylinder dogging feature.F.Exit devices for fire doors shall comply with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., requirements for Fire Exit Hardware. Submit proof of compliance. 2.15 FLUSH BOLTS (LEVER EXTENSION)A.Conform to ANSI A156.16. Flush bolts shall be Type L24081 unless otherwise specified. Furnish proper dustproof strikes conforming to ANSI A156.16, for flush bolts required on lower part of doors. B.Lever extension manual flush bolts shall only be used at non-fire-rated pairs for rooms only accessed by maintenance personnel.C.Face plates for cylindrical strikes shall be rectangular and not less than 25 mm by 63 mm (1 inch by 21/2 inches). D.Frictionfit cylindrical dustproof strikes with circular face plate may be used only where metal thresholds occur.E.Provide extension rods for top bolt where door height exceeds 2184 mm (7 feet 2 inches). 2.16 FLUSH BOLTS (AUTOMATIC)A.Conform to ANSI A156.3. Dimension of flush bolts shall conform to ANSI A115. Bolts shall conform to Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., requirements for fire door hardware. Flush bolts shall automatically latch and unlatch. Furnish dustproof strikes conforming to ANSI A156.16 for bottom flushbolt. Face plates for dustproof strike shall be rectangular and not less than 38 mm by 90 mm (11/2 by 31/2 inches). B.At interior doors, provide auto flush bolts less bottom bolt, unless otherwise specified, except at wood pairs with fire-rating greater than 20 minutes; provide fire pins as required by auto flush bolt and door fire labels.2.17 DOOR PULLS with platesA.Conform to ANSI A156.6. Pull Type J401, 152 mm (6 inches) high by 19 mm (3/4 inches) diameter with plate Type J302, 90 mm by 350 mm (3-1/2 inches by 14 inches), unless otherwise specified. Provide pull with projection of 70 mm (2 3/4 inches) and a clearance of 51 mm (2 inches). Cut plates of door pull plate for cylinders, or turn pieces where required. 2.18 PUSH PLATESA.Conform to ANSI A156.6. Metal, Type J302, 200 mm (8 inches) wide by 350 mm (14 inches) high. Provide metal Type J302 plates 100 mm (4 inches wide by 350 mm (14 inches) high) where push plates are specified for doors with stiles less than 200 mm (8 inches) wide. Cut plates for cylinders, and turn pieces where required. 2.19 COMBINATION PUSH AND PULL PLATESA.Conform to ANSI 156.6. Type J303, stainless steel 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick, 80 mm (3-1/3 inches) wide by 800 mm (16 inches) high), top and bottom edges shall be rounded. Secure plates to wood doors with 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) long No. 12 wood screws. Cut plates for turn pieces, and cylinders where required. Pull shall be mounted down. 2.20 COORDINATORSA.Conform to ANSI A156.16. Coordinators, when specified for fire doors, shall comply with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., requirements for fire door hardware. Coordinator may be omitted on exterior pairs of doors where either door will close independently regardless of the position of the other door. Coordinator may be omitted on interior pairs of nonlabeled open where open back strike is used. Open back strike shall not be used on labeled doors. Paint coordinators to match door frames, unless coordinators are plated. Provide bar type coordinators, except where gravity coordinators are required at acoustic pairs. For bar type coordinators, provide filler bars for full width and, as required, brackets for push-side surface mounted closers, overhead stops, and vertical rod panic strikes.2.21 THRESHOLDSA.Conform to ANSI A156.21, mill finish extruded aluminum, except as otherwise specified. In existing construction, thresholds shall be installed in a bed of sealant with ?-20 stainless steel machine screws and expansion shields. In new construction, embed aluminum anchors coated with epoxy in concrete to secure thresholds. Furnish thresholds for the full width of the openings.B.For thresholds at elevators entrances see other sections of specifications.C.At exterior doors and any interior doors exposed to moisture, provide threshold with non-slip abrasive finish.D.Provide with miter returns where threshold extends more than 12 mm (0.5 inch) from fame face.2.22 AUTOMATIC DOOR BOTTOM SEAL AND RUBBER GASKET FOR LIGHT PROOF OR SOUND CONTROL DOORSA.Conform to ANSI A156.22. Provide mortise or under-door type, except where not practical. For mortise automatic door bottoms, provide type specific for door construction (wood or metal).2.23 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWAREA.Access Doors (including Sheet Metal, Screen and Woven Wire Mesh Types): Except for firerated doors and doors to Temperature Control Cabinets, equip each single or double metal access door with Lock Type E76213, conforming to ANSI A156.5. Key locks as directed. Ship lock prepaid to the door manufacturer. Hinges shall be provided by door manufacturer. B.Cylinders for Various Partitions and Doors: Key cylinders same as entrance doors of area in which partitions and door occur,. Provide cylinders to operate locking devices where specified for following partitions and doors: 1.Folding doors and partitions.2.Swingup doors.3.Firerated access doorsEngineer's key set.C.Mutes: Conform to ANSI A156.16. Provide door mutes or door silencers Type L03011 or L03021, depending on frame material, of white or light gray color, on each steel or wood door frame, except at fire-rated frames, frames for soundresistant doors. Furnish 3 mutes for single doors and 2 mutes for each pair of doors, except doubleacting doors. Provide 4 mutes or silencers for frames for each Dutch type door. Provide 2 mutes for each edge of sliding door which would contact door frame. 2.24 FINISHESA.Exposed surfaces of hardware shall have ANSI A156.18, finishes as specified below. Finishes on all hinges, pivots, closers, thresholds, etc., shall be as specified below under "Miscellaneous Finishes." For field painting (final coat) of ferrous hardware, see Section 09 91 00, PAINTING. B.626 or 630: All surfaces on interior of buildings, except where other finishes are specified.C.Miscellaneous Finishes: 1.Hinges --exterior doors: 626 or 630. 2.Hinges --interior doors: 652 or 630. 3.Pivots: Match door trim. 4.Door Closers: Factory applied paint finish. Dull or Satin Aluminum color. 5.Thresholds: Mill finish aluminum. 6.Cover plates for floor hinges and pivots: 630. 7.Other primed steel hardware: 600. D.Hardware Finishes for Existing Buildings: U.S. Standard finishes shall match finishes of hardware in (similar) existing spaces. E.Anti-microbial Coating: All hand-operated hardware (levers, pulls, push bars, push plates, paddles, and panic bars) shall be provided with an anti-microbial/anti-fungal coating that has passed ASTM E2180 tests. Coating to consist of ionic silver (Ag+). Silver ions surround bacterial cells, inhibiting growth of bacteria, mold, and mildew by blockading food and respiration supplies.2.25 BASE METALSA.Apply specified U.S. Standard finishes on different base metals as following: FinishBase Metal 652Steel 626Brass or bronze 630Stainless steel PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 HARDWARE HEIGHTS A.For existing buildings locate hardware on doors at heights to match existing hardware. The Contractor shall visit the site, verify location of existing hardware and submit locations to VA COTR for approval. B.Hardware Heights from Finished Floor: 1.Exit devices centerline of strike (where applicable) 1024 mm (405/16 inches). 2.Locksets and latch sets centerline of strike 1024 mm (405/16 inches). 3.Deadlocks centerline of strike 1219 mm (48 inches). 4.Hospital arm pull 1168 mm (46 inches) to centerline of bottom supporting bracket. 5.Centerline of door pulls to be 1016 mm (40 inches). 6.Push plates and pushpull shall be 1270 mm (50 inches) to top of plate.7.Pushpull latch to be 1024 mm (405/16 inches) to centerline of strike. 8.Locate other hardware at standard commercial heights. Locate push and pull plates to prevent conflict with other hardware.3.2 INSTALLATIONA.Closer devices, including those with holdopen features, shall be equipped and mounted to provide maximum door opening permitted by building construction or equipment. Closers shall be mounted on side of door inside rooms, inside stairs, and away from corridors. B.Hinge Size Requirements:Door ThicknessDoor WidthHinge Height45 mm (1-3/4 inch)900 mm (3 feet) and less113 mm (4-1/2 inches)45 mm (1-3/4 inch)Over 900 mm (3 feet) butnot more than 1200 mm (4 feet)125 mm (5 inches)35 mm (13/8 inch) (hollow core wood doors) Not over 1200 mm (4 feet)113 mm (4-1/2 inches)C.Hinge leaves shall be sufficiently wide to allow doors to swing clear of door frame trim and surrounding conditions. D.Where new hinges are specified for new doors in existing frames or existing doors in new frames, sizes of new hinges shall match sizes of existing hinges; or, contractor may reuse existing hinges provided hinges are restored to satisfactory operating condition as approved by COTR. Existing hinges shall not be reused on door openings having new doors and new frames. Coordinate preparation for hinge cutouts and screw-hole locations on doors and frames. E.Hinges Required Per Door: Doors 1500?mm (5?ft) or less in height 2 buttsDoors over 1500?mm (5?ft) high and not over 2280?mm (7?ft?6?in) high3 buttsDoors over 2280?mm (7?feet?6?inches) high4 buttsDutch type doors4 buttsDoors with spring hinges 1370?mm (4?feet?6?inches) high or less2 buttsDoors with spring hinges over 1370?mm (4?feet?6?inches)3 buttsF.Fastenings: Suitable size and type and shall harmonize with hardware as to material and finish. Provide machine screws and lead expansion shields to secure hardware to concrete, ceramic or quarry floor tile, or solid masonry. Fiber or rawl plugs and adhesives are not permitted. All fastenings exposed to weather shall be of nonferrous metal. G.After locks have been installed; show in presence of COTR that keys operate their respective locks in accordance with keying requirements. (All keys, Master Key level and above shall be sent Registered Mail to the Medical Center Director along with the bitting list. Also a copy of the invoice shall be sent to the COTR for his records.) Installation of locks which do not meet specified keying requirements shall be considered sufficient justification for rejection and replacement of all locks installed on project.3.3 FINAL INSPECTIONA.Installer to provide letter to VA COTR that upon completion, installer has visited the Project and has accomplished the following:1.Re-adjust hardware.2.Evaluate maintenance procedures and recommend changes or additions, and instruct VA personnel.3.Identify items that have deteriorated or failed.4.Submit written report identifying problems.3.4 DEMONSTRATIONA.Demonstrate efficacy of mechanical hardware and electrical and electronic hardware systems, including adjustment and maintenance procedures, to satisfaction of Resident/Project Engineer and VA Locksmith.3.5 HARDWARE SETSA.Following sets of hardware correspond to hardware symbols shown on drawings. Only those hardware sets that are shown on drawings will be required. Disregard hardware sets listed in specifications but not shown on drawings.B.Hardware Consultant working on a project will be responsible for providing additional information regarding these hardware sets. The numbers shown in the following sets come from BHMA standards. ELECTRIC HARDWARE ABBREVIATIONS LEGEND:ADO = Automatic Door OperatorEMCH = Electro-Mechanical Closer-HolderMHO = Magnetic Hold-Open (wall- or floor-mounted)SDO = Security Door OpeningsINTERIOR SINGLE DOORSHW-1Each Door to Have:NON-RATEDHingesQUANTITY & TYPE AS REQUIRED1Door Pull w/ PlateJ401 x J3021Push PlateJ3021Kick PlateJ1021Mop Plate (@ Inswing Doors)J1031CloserC02011/C02021 1Floor StopL02121 x 3 FASTENERS3SilencersL03011Electric StrikePER VA SDO STANDARDSCARD READER BY DIVISION 28.HW-1AEach Door to Have:RATEDHingesQUANTITY & TYPE AS REQUIRED X HOSPITAL TIPS @ INSWING DOORS1LatchsetF011CloserC02011/C02021 x INSTALL OUTSIDE ROOM1Kick PlateJ1021Mop Plate (@ Inswing Doors)J1031Floor StopL02121 x 3 FASTENERS1ThresholdJ32300 x 57 mm width (2-1/4 inches)1Auto Door BottomR0Y346 – HEAVY DUTY1Set SealsR0Y164HW-2CEach Door to Have:NON-RATEDHingesQUANTITY & TYPE AS REQUIRED1Privacy LockF02-MOD X OCCUPANCY INDICATOR1Kick PlateJ1021Mop Plate (@ Inswing Doors)J1031Wall StopL02101 CONVEX3SilencersL03011STONE THRESHOLD BY OTHER TRADES.HW-2GEach Door to Have:RATED/NON-RATEDHingesQUANTITY & TYPE AS REQUIRED1Keyed Privacy Indicator LockF13 x OCCUPANCY INDICATOR1CloserC02011/C020211Kick PlateJ1021Mop Plate (@ Inswing Doors)J1031Floor StopL02121 x 3 FASTENERS1Auto Door BottomR0Y346 – HEAVY DUTY2Set Self-Adhesive SealsR0Y154STONE THRESHOLD BY OTHER TRADES.HW-3GEach Door to Have:NON-RATEDHingesQUANTITY & TYPE AS REQUIRED1Office LockF041Floor StopL02121 x 3 FASTENERS1Coat HookL031211Door Viewer(Mental Health)L03221 – 190° (VIEW INTO CORRIDOR)1ThresholdJ32300 x 57 mm width (2-1/4 inches)1Auto Door BottomR0Y346 – HEAVY DUTY2Sets Self-Adhesive SealsR0Y154OMIT VIEWER IF DOOR PROVIDED WITH VISION LITE.OMIT COAT HOOK WHERE GLASS LITE PREVENTS INSTALLATION.HW-4BEach Door to Have:NON-RATED/RATEDHingesQUANTITY & TYPE AS REQUIRED1Public Restroom LockF091CloserC02011/C020211CloserCO2051/CO20611Kick PlateJ1021Mop Plate (@ Inswing Doors)J1031Floor Stop (@ Outswing Doors)L02121 x 3 FASTENERS1Wall Stop (@ Inswing Doors)L02101 CONVEX1ThresholdJ32300 x 57 mm width (2-1/4 inches)1Auto Door BottomR0Y346 – HEAVY DUTY2Sets Self-Adhesive SealsR0Y154PROVIDE NON-HOLD-OPEN CLOSER AT TOILET ROOMS.STONE THRESHOLD BY OTHER TRADES.HW-4GEach Door to Have:RATED/NON-RATEDHingesQUANTITY & TYPE AS REQUIRED 1Utility LockF091Closer (@ Rated Doors)C02011/C020211Kick PlateJ102 1Floor Stop L02121 x 3 FASTENERS1Set Self-Adhesive SealsR0Y154HW-4KEach Door to Have:NON-RATEDHingesQUANTITY & TYPE AS REQUIRED1Utility LockF091Armor PlateJ101 x 1.275 MM (0.050 INCH) THICKNESS1Edge Guard (@ Wood Doors)J208M / J211 (VERIFY), CUT: HARDWARE1Floor Stop L02121 x 3 FASTENERS1Set Self-Adhesive SealsR0Y154HW-4NEach Door to Have:RATED/NON-RATEDHingesQUANTITY & TYPE AS REQUIRED1Utility LockF091Closer (@ rated doors)C02011/C020211Kick PlateJ1021Edge Guard (@ Wood Doors)J208M / J211 (VERIFY), CUT: HARDWARE1Floor StopL02121 x 3 FASTENERS1ThresholdJ32300 x 57 mm width (2-1/4 inches)1Auto Door BottomR0Y346 – HEAVY DUTY2Sets Self-Adhesive SealsR0Y154HW-5DEach Door to Have:NON-RATEDHingesQUANTITY & TYPE AS REQUIRED1Storeroom LockF071Kick PlateJ102 (@ STORAGE, EVM, & HAC ROOMS ONLY)1Floor Stop (@ Inswing Doors)L02121 x 3 FASTENERS1Wall Stop (@ Outswing Doors)L02101 CONVEX3SilencersL03011SECURITY HARDWARE ABBREVIATIONS LEGEND:AC = Access Control Device (Card reader, biometric reader, keypad, etc.)ADO = Automatic Door OperatorDEML = Delayed Egress Magnetic LockDEPH = Delayed Egress Panic Exit DeviceDPS = Door Position Switch (Door or Alarm Contact)EL = Electric Lock or Electric Lever Exit DevicePB = Push-button Combination Lock (stand-alone)RR = Remote Release ButtonELR = Electric Latch Retraction Exit DeviceREX = Request-to-Exit Switch in Latching Device Inside TrimSDO = Security Door OpeningsINTERIOR SINGLE SECURITY DOORSHW-SH-3Each [AC, EL, REX, DPS] Door to Have: RATED/NON-RATEDHingesQUANTITY & TYPE AS REQUIRED1Transfer Hinge4-WIRE TYPE AS REQUIRED1Electrified LockF07 (E01-REX, E06) 24VDC1Power SupplyRegulated, Filtered, 24VDC, Amperage as required1CloserC02011/C020211Floor StopL02121 x 3 FASTENERS1ThresholdJ32300 x 57 mm width (2-1/4 inches)1Auto Door BottomR0Y346 – HEAVY DUTY2Sets Self-Adhesive SealsR0Y154Electric StrikePER VA SDO STANDARDS1Alarm Contact120VAC POWER, CONDUIT, AND WIRING BY DIVISION 26.CARD READER BY DIVISION 28.HW-SH-3CEach [PB] Door to Have: NON-RATED/RATEDHingesQUANTITY & TYPE AS REQUIRED1Push-button Combination LockN3 – A156.13 F07 G1 E061CloserC02011/C020211Armor PlateJ101 x 1.275 MM (0.050 INCH) THICKNESS1Edge Guard (@ Wood Doors)J208M / J211 (VERIFY), CUT: HARDWARE1Floor StopL02121 x 3 FASTENERS1Set Self-Adhesive SealsR0Y154HW-SH-3EEach [AC, EL, REX, DPS] Door to Have: RATEDHingesQUANTITY & TYPE AS REQUIRED1Transfer Hinge4-WIRE TYPE AS REQUIRED1Electrified Occupancy F13-MODIFIED (E01-REX, E06) 24VDC Indicator Lock X OCCUPANCY INDICATOR X KEY RETRACTS LATCHBOLT AND DEADBOLT X INTERNAL DEADBOLT MONITOR SWITCH1Power SupplyRegulated, Filtered, 24VDC, Amperage as required1CloserC02011/C020211Floor StopL02121 x 3 FASTENERS1ThresholdJ32300 x 57 mm width (2-1/4 inches)1Auto Door BottomR0Y346 – HEAVY DUTY2Sets Self-Adhesive SealsR0Y1541Alarm ContactElectric StrikePER VA SDO STANDARDINTERNAL DEADBOLT MONITOR SWITCH SHUNTS ACCESS CONTROL DEVICE WHEN DEADBOLT IS THROWN.120VAC POWER, CONDUIT, AND WIRING BY DIVISION 26.CARD READER BY DIVISION 28.- E N D SECTION 08 71 13AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies equipment, controls and accessories for automatic operation of swing and sliding doors.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Aluminum frames entrance work; Section 08 41 13, ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS.B.Door hardware; Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE.C.Glass and glazing of doors and frames; Section 08 80 00, GLAZING.D.Electric general wiring, connections and equipment requirements; Division 26, ELECTRICAL.E.Section 28 31 00, FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM.1.3 QUALIty AssuranceA.Automatic door operators, controls and other equipment shall be products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing such equipment for a minimum of three years.B.One type of automatic door equipment shall be used throughout the building. C.Equipment installer shall have specialized experience and shall be approved by the manufacturer.1.4 WARRANTYA.Automatic door operators shall be subject to the terms of the "Warranty of Construction", FAR clause 52.246-21, except that the Warranty period shall be two years in lieu of one year.1.5 MAINTENANCE MANUALSA.In accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Article titled "INSTRUCTIONS", furnish maintenance manuals and instructions on automatic door operators.1.6 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's literature and data describing operators, power units, controls, door hardware and safety devices. C.Shop Drawings:1.Showing location of controls and safety devices in relationship to each automatically operated door.2.Showing layout, profiles, product components, including anchorage, accessories, as applicable.3.Submit templates, wiring diagrams, fabrication details and other information to coordinate the proper installation of the automatic door operators. D.Submit in writing to COTR that items listed in Article 1.3 are in compliance.1.7 DESIGN CRITERIAA.As a minimum automatic door equipment shall comply with the requirements of BHMA 156.10. Except as otherwise noted on drawings, provide operators which will move the doors from the fully closed to fully opened position in seven seconds maximum time interval, when speed adjustment is at maximum setting.B.Equipment: Conforming to UL 325. Provide key operated power disconnect wall switch for each door installation.C.Electrical Wiring, Connections and Equipment: Provide all motor, starter, controls, associated devices, and interconnecting wiring required for the installation. Equipment and wiring shall be as specified in Division 26, ELECTRICAL. 1.8 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc. (BHMA):A156.10-05Power Operated Pedestrian Doors (BHMA 1601)C.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):101-09Life Safety CodeD.Underwriters Laboratory (UL):325-10Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems 1.9 delivery and storageA.Delivery shall be in factory’s original, unopened, undamaged container with identification labels attached.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 swing door OPERATORSA.General: Swing door operators shall be of institutional type, door panel size 600 mm to 1250 mm (2'-0" to 5'-0") width, weight not to exceed 300 kg (600 pounds), electric operated for overhead mounting within the header or transom. Furnish metal mounting supports, brackets and other accessories necessary for the installation of operators at the head of the door frames. The motor on automatic door operator shall be provided with an interlock so that the motor will not operate when doors are electrically locked from opening. B.Operators shall have checking mechanism providing cushioning action at last part of door travel, in both opening and closing cycle. Operators shall be capable of recycling doors instantaneously to full open position from any point in the closing cycle when control switch is activated. Operators shall, when automatic power is interrupted or shut-off, permit doors to easily open manually without damage to automatic operator system.C.Operator, enclosed in housing, shall open door by energizing motor and shall stop by electrically reducing voltage and stalling motor against mechanical stop. Door shall close by means of spring energy, and close force shall be controlled by gear system and motor being used as dynamic break without power, or controlled by hydraulic closer in electro-hydraulic operators. System shall operate as manual door control in event of power failure. Opening and closing speeds shall be adjustable:1.Operator Housing: Housing shall be a minimum of 112 mm (4-1/2 inches) wide by 140 mm (5.5 inches) high aluminum extrusions with enclosed end caps for application to 100 mm (4 inches) and larger frame systems. All structural sections shall have a minimum thickness of 3.2 mm (0.125 inch) and be fabricated of a minimum of 6063-T5 aluminum alloy.2.Power Operator: Completely assembled and sealed unit which shall include gear drive transmission, mechanical spring and bearings, all located in aluminum case and filled with special lubricant for extreme temperature conditions. Complete unit shall be rubber mounted with provisions for easy maintenance and replacement, without removing door from pivots or frame.3.Connecting hardware shall have drive arm attached to door with a pin linkage rotating in a self-lubricating bearing. Door shall not pivot on shaft of operator.4.Electrical Control: Operator shall have a self contained electrical control unit, including necessary transformers, relays, rectifiers, and other electronic components for proper operation and switching of power operator. All connecting harnesses shall have interlocking plugs. 2.2 microprcessor controlsA.The system shall include a multi-function microprocessor control providing adjustable hold open time (1–30 seconds), LED indications for sensor input signals and operator status and power assist close options. Control shall be capable of receiving activation signals from any device with normally open dry contact output. All activation modes shall provide fully adjustable opening speed:B.The door shall be held open by low voltage applied to the continuous duty motor. The control shall include an adjustable safety circuit that monitors door operation and stops the opening direction of the door if an obstruction is sensed. The motor shall include a recycle feature that reopens the door if an obstruction is sensed at any point during the closing cycle. The control shall include a standard three position key switch with functions for ON, OFF, and HOLD OPEN, mounted on operator enclosure, door frame, or wall, as indicated in the architectural drawings. 2.3 SLIDING door operatorsA.General: Sliding doors shall have electric operators, conforming to BHMA A156.10 and the following requirements as applicable. Assembly shall be single sliding doors as shown on drawings.B.Door Operation: Doors shall be opened by electric motor pulling door from closed to open position and shall stop door by electrically reducing voltage and stalling door against mechanical stop. System shall permit manual control of door in event of power failure. Opening and closing speeds shall be adjustable. In compliance with NFPA-101, all door panels shall allow "breakout" to the full open position to provide instant egress at any point in the door’s movement. C.Operators: Completely assembled and sealed electromechanical operating unit, all located in cast aluminum housing and filled with special lubricant for extreme conditions. Attached to transmission system shall be a minimum 1/8 Hp "DC" shunt-wound permanent magnet motor with sealed ball bearings. Complete unit shall be rubber mounted with provisions for easy maintenance and replacement. Operators shall have adjustable opening and closing cycle. Housing shall be minimum 6063T-5 alloy aluminum not less than .005 mm (125 inch) minimum thickness, 150 mm by 200 mm (6 inch wide by 8 inch high).D.Sliding Door Hardware Guide Rollers, Door Carrier: Top door carriers shall ride on steel or delrin rollers incorporating sealed bearings with each door having two support rollers and one anti-rise roller. Each roller shall have a minimum of 9 mm (3/8-inch) of vertical adjustment with positive mechanical locks. Each door shall also include two urethane covered oil impregnated bearing bottom rollers attached with 5 mm (3/16-inch) thick formed steel guide brackets. Each door carrier supporting a door leaf shall include a vertical steel reinforcing member to prevent sagging when door is swung under breakaway conditions. All carbon steel brackets and fittings shall be plated for corrosion resistance.E.Locking Hardware: Do not provide any locking hardware at interior doors not requiring physical security. Provide doors with flush concealed vertical rod panic hardware integrated into the doors where physical security is required and free egress is required at all times. Provide doors with manufacturers’ standard hookbolt lock (keyed both sides) where physical security is required and free egress is not required at all times. At doors with access control devices (card readers, etc.), provide doors with electronic deadbolt locking to prevent the doors from manually sliding open.F.Door Closers: Provide all breakout or swing-out panels with door closers concealed in the top rail of the door. 2.4 POwer UnitsEach power unit shall be self-contained, electric operated and independent of the door operator. Capacity and size of power circuits shall be in accordance with automatic door operator manufacturer's specifications and Division 26 – ELECTRICAL.2.5 DOOR CONTROLSA.Opening and closing actions of doors shall be actuated by controls and safety devices specified, and conform to ANSI 156.10. Controls shall cause doors to open instantly when control device is actuated; hold doors in open positions; then, cause doors to close, unless safety device or reactivated control interrupts operation.B.Manual Controls:1.Push Plate Wall Switch: Recess type, stainless steel push plate minimum 100 mm by 100 mm (four-inch by four-inch), with 13 mm (l/2-inch) high letters "To Operate Door--Push" engraved on face of plate.2.6 SAFETY DEVICESA.General: Area over which doors swing or slide shall be a safety section and anyone standing in path of door's movement shall be protected by a safety device.B.At sliding doors, provide two photoelectric beams mounted at heights of 600 mm (24 inches) and 1200 mm (48 inches) in the door frame on sliding doors. Provide overhead safety presence sensors at door head on each side of the opening. Beams shall parallel door openings to prevent doors from closing when anyone is in the center of the door or doors. When beams are activated, doors shall recycle to full open position. Actuation shall include a motion detector mounted on each side of the door for detection of traffic in each direction. C.Each swing door shall have installed on the pull side a presence sensor to detect any person standing in the door swing path and prevent the door from opening.D.Time delay switches shall be adjustable between 3 to 60 seconds and shall control closing cycle of doors.E.Decals with sign "In" or "Do Not Enter" shall be installed on both faces of each door where shown.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Coordinate installation of equipment with other related work. Manual controls and power disconnect switches shall be recessed or semi-flush mounted in partitions. Secure operator components to adjacent construction with suitable fastenings. Conceal conduits, piping, and electric equipment, in finish work.B.Install power units in locations shown. Where units are to be mounted on walls, provide metal supports or shelves for the units. All equipment, including time delay switches, shall be accessible for maintenance and adjustment.C.Operators shall be adjusted and must function properly for the type o? traffic (pedestrians, carts, stretchers and wheelchairs) expected to pass through doors. Each door leaf of pairs of doors shall open and close in synchronization. On pairs of doors, operators shall allow either door to be opened manually without the other door opening.D.Install controls at positions shown and make them convenient for particular traffic expected to pass through openings. Maximum height of push plate wall switches from finished floors shall be 40 inches unless otherwise approved by the COTR.3.2 instructions A.Following the installation and final adjustments of the door operators, the installer shall fully instruct VA personnel for 2 hours on the operating, servicing and safety requirements for the swing and sliding automatic door operators.B.Coordinate instruction to VA personnel with VA COTR.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 08 71 13.11LOW ENERGY POWER ASSIST DOOR OPERATORS PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONThis section specifies low energy power assisted automatic operation of swing doors. The door operator system shall be complete including operator, controls, door arm and operator enclosure (header and cover).1.2 RELATED WORKA.Sealants; Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.B.Steel doors; Section 08 11 13, HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES.C.Wood doors; Section 08 14 00, INTERIOR WOOD DOORS. D.Aluminum frames entrance work; Section 08 41 13, ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS.E.Door hardware; Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE.F.Glass and glazing of doors and frames; Section 08 80 00, GLAZING.G.Finish Color, Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.H.Smoke detectors for control of fire/smoke doors to be wired per Section 28 31 00, FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM.I.Electric general wiring, connections and equipment requirements; Division 26, ELECTRICAL.1.3 MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONSA.Power assisted door operators, controls and other equipment shall be products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing such equipment for a minimum of three years.B.One manufacturer of automatic door equipment shall be used throughout the project.1.4 warrantyPower assisted door operators, controls and other related equipment shall be subject to the terms of the "Warranty of Construction", FAR clause 52.246-21, except that the warranty period shall be two years in lieu of one year.1.5 MAINTENANCE MANUALSIn accordance with section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Article titled "INSTRUCTIONS," furnish two copies of maintenance manuals and instructions on automatic door operators.1.6 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's literature and data describing operators, power units, controls, door hardware and safety devices.C.Shop Drawings:Showing location of controls and safety devices in relationship to each automatically operated door. This includes templates, wiring diagrams, fabrication details, anchorage and other information to providers of related work to coordinate the proper installation of the door operators.1.7 DESIGN CRITERIAA.Power assisted automatic door equipment shall accommodate normal traffic as well as the weight of the doors.B.Equipment: UL approved and comply with applicable codes. Motors shall be rated minimum one-quarter horsepower and shall be single phase and 115 volts. C.Electrical Wiring; Provide wiring so that only a single power supply is required. Equipment and wiring shall be as specified in Division 26, ELECTRICAL.1.8 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American National Standards Institute (ANSI):ICC/ANSI A117.1-03Guideline for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities-Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People C.Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc. (BHMA):156.19-07Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 OPERATORSA.Automatic door operators shall be for commercial doors and shall be electromechanical and surface mounted above the door to the header or transom bar. The opening force shall be generated by a permanent magnet DC motor driving a combination spiral bevel/spur gear reducer and transmitted to the door through an arm linkage. Opening speed shall be adjustable and feature dual backcheck control allowing adjustment of backcheck speed and position. Closing shall be by spring force generated by a metal compression spring. The spring shall reduce manual opening force to not more than 67 N (15 lbf). The minimum diameter of spring wire shall be .007mm (172 in.). Under the specified design load of the door, the spring shall be capable of performing 2,000,000 cycles before fracture. Adjustable closing speed and fixed latch speed shall control the door in the closing cycle. The doors shall be operated manually at any time without damage to the operator or components.B.All operators shall have checking mechanism providing cushioning action at last part of door travel, in both opening and closing cycle. Operators shall recycle doors instantaneously to full open position from any point in closing cycle when control switch is reactivated. C.Operator shall be swinging type enclosed in housing. Operator shall open door by energizing motor and shall stop by electrically reducing voltage and stalling motor against mechanical stop. Door shall close by means of spring energy, and close force shall be controlled by gear system and motor being used as dynamic break without power. System shall operate as manual door control in event of power failure. Opening and closing speeds shall be adjustable:1.Swing Operator Housing: Housing shall be 140 mm (5-1/2 inches) wide by 150 mm (6 inches) high aluminum extrusions with enclosed end caps for application to 100 mm (4 inch) and larger frame systems. All structural sections shall have a minimum thickness of 3.7 mm (0.146 inch) and be fabricated of 6063-T5 aluminum alloy.2.Swing Power Operator: Completely assembled and sealed unit which shall include helical gear drive transmission, mechanical spring and bearings, all located in cast aluminum case and filled with special lubricant for extreme temperature conditions. A "DC" shunt-wound permanent magnet motor with sealed ball bearings shall be attached to transmission system. Complete unit shall be rubber mounted with provisions for easy maintenance and replacement, without removing door from pivots or frame.3.Connecting hardware for swing overhead concealed type power operator shall have drive arm attached to door with a pin linkage rotating in a self-lubricating bearing and adjustable slide block, traveling in an interconnected track and top pivot assembly. Top track and pivot assembly shall be fabricated of steel. Door shall not pivot on shaft of operator.4.Electrical Control: Operator shall have a self contained electrical control unit, including necessary transformers, relays, rectifiers, and other electronic components for proper operation and switching of power operator. Relays shall be plug-in type for individual replacement and all connecting harnesses shall have interlocking plugs. Control shall also include time delay for normal cycle. Swing door control shall include safe-swing circuit with optional switching which automatically limits power and slows door when approached from the doors swing area.5.On pairs of doors, operators shall allow either door to be opened manually without the other door opening.2.2 Microprocessor Controls A.The system shall include a multi-function microprocessor control providing adjustable hold open time (1 – 30 sec.), LED indications for actual position unknown, system status, open obstruction shutdown, activation signal, safety mat/sensor signal, Stop-and-Hold signal, and mode selector switches providing a means for easy field selection of the following functions: push-to-operate, latch assist and stack pressure. Control shall be capable of receiving activation signals from any device with normally open dry contact output. 1.With push-to-operate function enabled, the control shall provide a means of initiating a self-start activation circuit by slightly pushing the door open at any point in the door swing. 2.Latch Assist shall provide a two second impulse in the close direction to overcome restrictions with locking devices of pressure differentials, allowing the unit to operate in standard time delay mode, and permitting the door to close from the full open position after the hold time is satisfied. All activation modes shall provide fully adjustable opening speed.B.The door shall be held open by low voltage applied to the continuous duty motor. The control shall include an adjustable safety circuit that monitors door operation and shuts the motor off if an open obstruction is sensed. The control shall include a recycle feature the reopens the door if an obstruction is sensed at any point during its closing cycle. The control shall include a standard three position toggle switch with functions for ON, OFF, and HOLD OPEN.2.3 ENCLOSUREOperator shall be completely self-contained within an extruded aluminum housing (alloy 6063-T6) to conceal operator mechanism and mounting brackets and with removable access cover with an overall maximum size of 140 mm (5-1/2 inches) wide by 150 mm (6 inches) deep. Header color shall be integral color anodized/painted to match adjacent storefront/frame finish.2.4 ACTIVATION DEVICESA.Manual: Push-to-operate; manually pushing the door shall activate the automatic opening cycle. Door shall automatically close after timer delay expires.B.Opening and closing force, measured 25 mm (1 inch) out from the lock stile of the door, shall not exceed 67 N (15 lbf) to stop the door when operating in either direction or cycle.C.Opening Time: Doors shall be field adjusted so that opening time to back check or 80 degrees, whichever occurs first, shall be 3 seconds or longer as required in Table 1. Backcheck shall not occur before 60 degrees opening.Total opening time to fully open shall be as in Table II.D.Closing Time:Doors shall be field adjusted to close from 90 degrees to 10 degrees in 3 seconds or longer as required in Table 1.1.Doors shall be field adjusted to close from 10 degrees to fully close position in not less than 1.5 seconds.2.Doors shall be field adjusted to remain fully open for not less than 5 seconds.3.Table 1 provides speed settings for various widths and weights of doors for obtaining results complying with this paragraph.E.Cycle Tests:1.Low Energy Power Operated, Low Energy Power Open and Power Assist Operators shall be cycle tested for 300,000 cycles.2.Use the widest and heaviest door specified as a test specimen. Narrower or lighter doors of the same configurations shall then be considered to meet the cycle test requirements. Table 1Minimum Opening Time to Backcheck or 80 degrees, which ever occurs first and the Minimum Closing Time from 90 degrees to Latch Check or 10 degrees."D" Door Leaf Width- mm (inches) "W" Door Weight in kg (pounds)Matrix Values are in seconds(100) 45.4(56.7) 125(68.0) 150(79.4) 175(90.7) 200(762) 303.03.0 3.0 3.0 3.5 (914) 363.03.5 3.5 4.0 4.0 (1067) 423.54.0 4.0 4.5 4.5 Doors of other weights and widths can be calculated using the formula;T = DvW/133 in US units T = DvW/2260 in SI (metric) unitsWhere:T= Time, secondsD= Door width, mm (inches)W= Door weight, kg (lbs)The values for "T" time have been rounded up to the nearest half second. These values are based on a kinetic energy of (1.25 lbf-ft).Table IITotal Opening Time to Full Open PositionBackcheck at 60 degreesBackcheck at 70 degreesBackcheck at 80 degreesTable 1 plus 2 secondsTable 1 plus 1.5 secondsTable 1 plus 1 secondNote: To determine maximum times from close to full open, the operator shall be adjusted as shown in the chart. Backcheck occurring at a point between positions in Table II shall use the lowest setting. For example, if the backcheck occurs at 75 degrees, the full open shall be the time shown in Table 1 plus 1.5 seconds.2.5 POWER UNITSProvide separate self-contained electric circuits for automatic operators located on each floor of the building. Interruption or failure of power circuits for operators located on one floor of the building shall not interfere with continuous performance of automatic operated doors located on other floors. Capacity and size of power circuits shall be in accordance with automatic operator manufacturer's specifications.2.6 SAFETY DEVICESA.Time delay switches shall be adjustable between 5 to 60 seconds and shall control closing cycle of doors.B.Decals with sign "In" or "Do Not Enter" shall be installed on both faces of each door where shown and shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.19.C.Each swing door shall have installed a motion sensor to detect any person standing in the door swing path and prevent the door from opening.D.Motion sensors shall consist of detection modules, factory prepared to be attached to each side of the lock/strike stile, an armored flex link power cable and bracket assembly, factory prepared for attachment to the pivot stile; a logic board and a position encoder which shall mount to the operator. The detection modules shall contain transmitting and receiving diodes and sense multidimensional zones for detection of people and/or objects in the door area. Detection modules shall be high impact, shock resistant zinc castings with tinted lenses. The swing door sensor system shall provide complete operate and safety zone coverage. These zones shall be fully adjusted to meet specific jobsite conditions (sidewalls, adjacent panels, etc.) The system shall not be affected by ultrasonic, ambient light or radios frequencies within the vicinity of the swing door.E.Each swing door shall have installed a re-activation sensor mounted on the push-side door face near the top detect any person standing in the door swing path and prevent the door from closing. Wiring for the re-activation sensor between the door and frame shall be concealed in a power transfer device, hinge or pivot provided under Section 08 71 00; wire chase in door provided under door section.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Coordinate installation of equipment with other related work. Manual controls and power disconnect switches shall be recessed or semi-flush mounted in partitions. Secure operator components to adjacent construction with suitable fastenings. Conceal conduits, piping, and electric equipment in finish work.B.Install power units in locations shown. Where units are to be mounted on walls, provide metal supports or shelves for the units. All equipment, including time delay switches, shall be accessible for maintenance and adjustment.C.Operators shall be adjusted and must function properly for the type o? traffic (pedestrians) expected to pass through doors. Each door leaf of pairs of doors shall open and close in synchronization. On pairs of doors, operators shall allow either door to be opened manually without the other door opening.D.Install controls at positions shown and make them convenient for particular traffic expected to pass through openings. Maximum height of push plate wall switches from finished floors shall be 40 inches unless otherwise approved by the COTR.---- END ----SECTION 08 80 00GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONThis section specifies glass, plastic, related glazing materials and accessories. Glazing products specified apply to factory or field glazed items.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Factory glazed by manufacturer in following units:1.Sound resistant doors: Section 08 11 13, HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES, and Section 08 14 00, WOOD DOORS.2.Mirrors: Section 10 28 00, TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES.1.3 LABELSA.Temporary labels:1.Provide temporary label on each light of glass identifying manufacturer or brand and glass type, quality and nominal thickness.2.Label in accordance with NFRC (National Fenestration Rating Council) label requirements.3.Temporary labels shall remain intact until glass is approved by COTR.B.Permanent labels:1.Locate in corner for each pane.2.Label in accordance with ANSI Z97.1 and SGCC (Safety Glass Certification Council) label requirements.a.Tempered glass.b.Laminated glass or have certificate for panes without permanent label.1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Glass Thickness:1.Test in accordance with ASTM E 1300.2.Thicknesses listed are minimum. Coordinate thicknesses with framing system manufacturers.1.5 SUBMITTALS A.In accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Warranty: Submit written guaranty, conforming to General Condition requirements, and to “Warranty of Construction” Article in this Section.C.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:1.Glass, each kind required.2.Glazing cushion.3.Sealing compound.D.Samples:1.Size: 150 mm by 150 mm (6 inches by 6 inches).E.Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: Submit glazing sealant manufacturer’s test report indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials.1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGA.Delivery: Schedule delivery to coincide with glazing schedules so minimum handling of crates is required. Do not open crates except as required for inspection for shipping damage.B.Storage: Store cases according to printed instructions on case, in areas least subject to traffic or falling objects. Keep storage area clean and dry.C.Handling: Unpack cases following printed instructions on case. Stack individual windows on edge leaned slightly against upright supports with separators between each.1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONSField Measurements: Field measure openings before ordering tempered glass products. Be responsible for proper fit of field measured products.1.8 warrantyA.Warranty: Conform to terms of "Warranty of Construction", FAR clause 52.246-21, except extend warranty period for the following:1.Laminated glass units to remain laminated for 5 years.1.9 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.B.American National Standards Institute (ANSI):Z97.1-09Safety Glazing Material Used in Building Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.C.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):C542-05Lock-Strip GasketsC716-06Installing Lock-Strip Gaskets and Infill Glazing Materials.C794-10Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint SealantsC864-05Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and SpacersC920-11Elastomeric Joint SealantsC964-07Standard Guide for Lock-Strip Gasket GlazingC1036-06Flat GlassC1048-12Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.C1376-10Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat GlassD635-10Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastic in a Horizontal PositionD4802-10Poly (Methyl Methacrylate) Acrylic Plastic SheetE84-10Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsE119-10Standard Test Methods for Fire Test of Building Construction and MaterialE2190-10Insulating Glass mercial Item Description (CID):A-A-59502Plastic Sheet, PolycarbonateE.Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; 2010F.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):80-13Fire Doors and Windows.252-12Standard Method of Fire Test of Door Assemblies257-12Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block AssembliesG.National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC)H.Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) 2012:Certified Products Directory (Issued Semi-Annually).I.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):752-11Bullet-Resisting Equipment.J.Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC):4-010-01-2012DOD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for BuildingsK.Glass Association of North America (GANA):Glazing Manual (Latest Edition)Sealant Manual (2009)L.American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):ASCE 7-10Wind Load ProvisionsPART 2 PRODUCT2.1 GLASSA.Use thickness stated unless specified otherwise in assemblies.2.2 TEMPERED GLASSA.Clear Tempered Glass:1.ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3.2.Thickness, 6 mm (1/4 inch).2.3 COATED GLASSA.Ceramic Coated Vision Glass:1.ASTM C1048, Kind HS, Condition C, Type I, Class 1 , Quality q3 with ceramic coating applied by silk-screen process.2.Pattern as indicated in Drawings.3.Apply coating to second surface of laminated glass.4.Thickness, 6 mm (1/4 inch).2.4 LAMINATED GLASSA.Two or more lites of glass bonded with an interlayer material for use in building glazingB.Use 1.5 mm (0.060 inch) thick interlayer for:1.Horizontal or Sloped glazing.2.Acoustical glazing.3.Heat strengthened or fully tempered glass assembles.C.Use min. 0.75 mm (0.030 inch) thick interlayer for vertical glazing where 1.5 mm (0.060 inch) interlayer is not otherwise shown or required.2.5 FIRE RESISTANT GLASS WITHOUT WIRE MESHA.Type 1 (Transparent float glass), Class 1 (Clear).B.Fire-protective glass products used to protect against smoke and flames only shall be rated for 45 minutes as required by local building code and shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 252 (Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies) and NFPA 257 (Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies)C.Fire-resistive products used to protect against smoke, flame, and the transmission of radiant heat shall be rated for [60] [90] [120] minutes and shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 252, NFPA 257, and ASTM E119 (Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials).D.Fire-rated glass or glass assembly shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratory (UL), Intertek Testing Services- Warnock Hersey (ITS-WHI) or any other OSHA certified testing laboratory. All glass shall bear a permanent mark of classification in accordance with local building code.E.Maximum size is per the manufacturer’s test agency listing for doors, transoms, side lights, borrowed lights, and windows.F.Where safety glazing is required by local building code, fire-rated glass shall be tested in accordance with CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Category I or II and bear a permanent mark of classification.1.Category I products are limited to 0.84 m2 – 9 ft2 and tested to no less than 203 Nm-150 ft-lbs impact loading.2.Category II products are greater than 0.84 m2 – 9 ft2 and tested to no less than 542 Nm-400 ft-lbs impact loading. Category II products can be used in lieu of Category I products.2.6 GLAZING ACCESSORIESA.As required to supplement the accessories provided with the items to be glazed and to provide a complete installation. Ferrous metal accessories exposed in the finished work shall have a finish that will not corrode or stain while in service.B.Setting Blocks: ASTM C864:1.Channel shape; having 6 mm (1/4 inch) internal depth.2.Shore a hardness of 80 to 90 Durometer.3.Block lengths: 50 mm (two inches) except 100 to 150 mm (four to six inches) for insulating glass.4.Block width: Approximately 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) less than the full width of the rabbet.5.Block thickness: Minimum 4.8 mm (3/16 inch). Thickness sized for rabbet depth as required.C.Spacers: ASTM C864:1.Channel shape having a 6 mm (1/4 inch) internal depth.2.Flanges not less 2.4 mm (3/32 inch) thick and web 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick.3.Lengths: One to 25 to 76 mm (one to three inches).4.Shore a hardness of 40 to 50 Durometer.D.Sealing Tapes:1.Semisolid polymeric based material exhibiting pressuresensitive adhesion and withstanding exposure to sunlight, moisture, heat, cold, and aging.2.Shape, size and degree of softness and strength suitable for use in glazing application to prevent water infiltration.E.Spring Steel Spacer: Galvanized steel wire or strip designed to position glazing in channel or rabbeted sash with stops.F.Glazing Clips: Galvanized steel spring wire designed to hold glass in position in rabbeted sash without stops.G.Glazing Gaskets: ASTM C864:1.Firm dense wedge shape for locking in sash.2.Soft, closed cell with locking key for sash key.3.Flanges may terminate above the glazingbeads or terminate flush with top of beads.H.Lock-Strip Glazing Gaskets: ASTM C542, shape, size, and mounting as indicated.I.Glazing Sealants: ASTM C920, silicone neutral cure:1.Type S.PART 3 EXECUTION3.1 EXAMINATIONA.Verification of Conditions:1.Examine openings for glass and glazing units; determine they are proper size; plumb; square; and level before installation is started. 2.Verify that glazing openings conform with details, dimensions and tolerances indicated on manufacturer’s approved shop drawings.B.Advise Contractor of conditions which may adversely affect glass and glazing unit installation, prior to commencement of installation: Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.C.Verify that wash down of adjacent masonry is completed prior to erection of glass and glazing units to prevent damage to glass and glazing units by cleaning materials.3.2 PREPARATIONA.For sealant glazing, prepare glazing surfaces in accordance with GANA-02 Sealant Manual.B.Determine glazing unit size and edge clearances by measuring the actual unit to receive the glazing.C.Shop fabricate and cut glass with smooth, straight edges of full size required by openings to provide GANA recommended edge clearances.D.Verify that components used are compatible.E.Clean and dry glazing surfaces.F.Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERALA.Install in accordance with GANA-01 Glazing Manual and GANA-02 Sealant Manual unless specified otherwise.B.Glaze in accordance with recommendations of glazing and framing manufacturers, and as required to meet the Performance Test Requirements specified in other applicable sections of specifications.C.Set glazing without bending, twisting, or forcing of units.D.Do not allow glass to rest on or contact any framing member.E.Glaze doors and operable sash, in a securely fixed or closed and locked position, until sealant, glazing compound, or putty has thoroughly set.F.Tempered Glass: Install with roller distortions in horizontal position unless otherwise directed.G.Laminated Glass:1.Tape edges to seal interlayer and protect from glazing sealants.2.Do not use putty or glazing compounds.H.Fire Resistant Glass:1.Other fire resistant glass: Glaze in accordance with UL design requirements.3.4 INSTALLATION DRY METHOD (TAPE AND GASKET SPLINE GLAZING)A.Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting and sealing junctions with butyl sealant.B.Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 150 mm (6 inches) from corners.C.Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact.D.Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous contact.E.Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.F.Trim protruding tape edge.3.5 REPLACEMENT AND CLEANINGA.Clean new glass surfaces removing temporary labels, paint spots, and defacement after approval by COTR.B.Replace cracked, broken, and imperfect glass, or glass which has been installed improperly.C.Leave glass, putty, and other setting material in clean, whole, and acceptable condition. 3.6 PROTECTIONProtect finished surfaces from damage during erection, and after completion of work. Strippable plastic coatings on colored anodized finish are not acceptable.3.7 GLAZING SCHEDULEA.Fire Resistant Glass:1.Use Fire Resistant Glass without wire-mesh in the following:B.Tempered Glass:1.Install in full and half glazed doors unless indicated otherwise.2.Install in storefront, windows, and door sidelights adjacent to doors.C.Laminated Glass: Install as specified in doors, observation windows and interior pane of dual glazed windows where indicated.1.Provide laminated glass for all windows in Psychiatric Nursing Units, Alcohol Dependency Treatment Nursing Units, Drug Abuse Treatment Nursing Units and Security Bedrooms. Laminated glass shall be 7/16-in thick in locked patient units and security rooms, 5/16-in thick elsewhere.(min. 1.5 mm interlayer).- - - E N D - - -SECTION 09 06 00SCHEDULE FOR FINISHESPART 1 – GENERAL1.1 DESCRiPTIONThis section contains a coordinated system in which requirements for materials specified in other sections shown are identified by abbreviated material names and finish codes in the room finish schedule or shown for other locations.1.2 MANUFACTURERSManufacturer’s trade names and numbers used herein are only to identify colors, finishes, textures and patterns. Products of other manufacturer’s equivalent to colors, finishes, textures and patterns of manufacturers listed that meet requirements of technical specifications will be acceptable upon approval in writing by contracting officer for finish requirements. 1.3 SUBMITALSSubmit in accordance with SECTION 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES provide quadruplicate samples for color approval of materials and finishes specified in this section.1.4 applicable publicationsA.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.B.MASTER PAINTING INSTITUTE: (MPI)2001Architectural Painting Specification ManualPART 2- PRODUCTS2.1 DIGITAL COLOR PHOTOSA.Size 24 x 35 mm.B.Labeled for:1.Building name and Number.2.Room Name and Number.2.2 Division 05 – METALSA.SECTION 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATION ItemFinishModular Channel Units TBDChannel Door FramesTBD2.3 Division 06 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITESA.SECTION 06 10 00, ROUGH CARPENTRY (* See Specification Section)ItemFinishColor***B.SECTION 06 20 00, FINISH CARPENTRY 1. RECEPTION COUNTER PUBLIC OR PATIENT SIDE (* See Interior Elevations)Room No. and NameComponentMaterialSpeciesFinishColor2A-124ACountertopPlastic Laminate**TBDVertical Surface(s)Plastic Laminate* *TBDTrimPlastic Laminate**TBDRevealVinyl AcrylicKorogardTBDTBDBaseRubber BaseTBDTBDTBD2. VANITIES (TYPES S4, S4 M)Room No. and NameComponentFinish/ColorToilet Public Female (2A-126)CountertopTBDToilet Public Female (2A-126)TrimTBD3. WALL PANELING IN GROUP THERAPYRoom No. and NameComponentFinish2A-124B, Group TherapyPanelTBDTrimTBDBaseTBD4. WOOD HANDRAILSRoom No. and NameFinish2A-127, Corridor Korogard Vinyl, Finish TBDC.SECTION 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS (* See Specification Section)LocationColorManufacturerManufacturer Color****2.4 Division 08 - OPENINGSA.SECTION 08 11 13, HOLLOW METAL FRAMES Paint both sides of door and frames same color including ferrous metal louvers, & hardware attached to doorComponentColor of Paint Type and GlossFramesPainted Hollow Metal – Color TBDB.SECTION 08 14 00, INTERIOR WOOD DOORS ComponentFinish/ColorDoorsStained – Color TBDC.SECTION 08 31 13, ACCESS DOORS, AND FRAMES MaterialFinish/ColorSteelTBDD.SECTION 08 41 13, ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES, AND STOREFRONTS MaterialFinishManufacturerManufacturer Color Name/No.Aluminum Header & BottomTBDDoralco Architectural Metal SolutionsTBDGlassTemperedDoralco Architectural Metal SolutionsStyle PE.SECTION 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE (* See Specification Section)ItemMaterialFinishHinges*TBDDoor Closers*TBDFloor Closers*TBDFloor Pivot Sets*TBDCloser/ Holder*TBDFloor Stops*TBDDoor Holders*TBDLock/ Latches*TBDKey CabinetSteelTBDArmor PlatesMetalTBDKick Mop PlatesMetalTBDDoor Edging*TBDExit Device*TBDFlush Bolts*TBDDoor Pulls*TBDPush Plates*TBDCombination Push Pull Plate*TBDCoordinators*TBDLight Proof Seals*TBDThreshold*TBDF.SECTION 08 80 00, GLAZING Glazing TypeManufacturerMfg. Color Name/No.G-1TBDClear Tempered Glass2.5 Division 09 - FINISHESA.SECTION 09 30 13, CERAMIC TILING1. SECTION 09 30 13, CERAMIC TILING Finish codeManufacturerMfg. Color Name/NoCT-1Daltile TBDCT-2DaltileTBD2. SECTION 09 30 13, MARBLE THRESHOLDS Marble TypeManufacturerMfg. Color Name/No.TBDTBDMill Finish Aluminum3. SECTION 09 30 13, METAL DIVIDER STRIPS SizeMaterialManufacturerTBDMetalTBDB.SECTION 09 51 00, ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Finish CodeComponentColor PatternManufacturerMfg Name/No.TBDExposed Suspension SystemTBDArmstrongTBDTBDType 1White, Pattern-TBDArmstrongCirrus Sq. Lay-inAirguard CoatingType 2White, Pattern-TBDArmstrongUltimaMetal CeilingType 3Color-TBD, PerforatedArmstrongMetalworks Snap-In SeriesC.SECTION 09 65 19, RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Finish CodeSizeMaterial/ComponentManufacturerMfg Name/No.VP-14”x36”Vinyl PlanksRoppe TBDVP-24”x36”Vinyl PlanksRoppeTBDRT-112x12Rubber TileRoppeTBDRT-212x12Rubber TileRoppeTBDD.SECTION 09 68 00, CARPET MODULES (CPT) Finish CodeSizePattern directionManufacturerMfg. Color Name/No.CPT-1TBDTBDMohawkTBDCPT-2TBDTBDMohawkTBDCPT-3TBDTBDMohawkTBD1. SECTION 09 68 00, CARPET EDGE STRIP Finish CodeMaterialManufacturerMfg. Color Name/No.TBDMetalTBDTBDTBDVinylTBDTBDE.SECTION 09 91 00, PAINT AND COATINGS 1.MPI Gloss and Sheen StandardsGloss @60Sheen @85Gloss Level 1a traditional matte finish-flatmax 5 units, andmax 10 unitsGloss Level 2a high side sheen flat-“a velvet-like” max 10 units, andfinish10-35 unitsGloss Level 3a traditional “egg-shell like” finish10-25 units, and10-35 unitsGloss Level 4a “satin-like” finish20-35 units, andmin. 35 unitsGloss Level 5a traditional semi-gloss35-70 unitsGloss Level 6a traditional gloss70-85 unitsGloss level 7a high glossmore than 85 units1. Paint codeGlossManufacturerMfg. Color Name/No.P1TBDBenjamin MooreTBDP2TBDBenjamin MooreTBD2. Stain Code (S)Gloss and TransparencyManufacturerMfg. Color Name/No.STBDTBDTBD3. Clear coatings Code(CC)GlossManufacturerMfg. Color Name/TBDTBDTBDF.SECTION 09 72 31, POLYPROPYLENE FABRIC WALLCOVERING (PFW) Finish CodeManufacturerMfg. Color Name/No.Vinyl, W821-SeriesKorosealPattern Name-Wildwood, Look-TBDG.SECTION 09 72 31, EDGE GUARDS (PFW) Finish CodeManufacturerMfg. Color Name/No.Vinyl, To match W821-SeriesKorogardTBD2.6 Division 10 - SPECIALTIESA.SECTION 10 26 00, WALL GUARDS AND CORNER GUARDS ItemMaterialManufacturerMfg. Color Name/No.Corner GuardsVinylTBDTBDWall GuardVinylTBDTBDDoor Frame ProtectionVinylTBDTBDB.SECTION 10 28 00, MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALITIES Room No. and NameItemFinishManufacturerMfg. Color Name/No.HAC (2A-125)Mop racksTBDTBDTBDC.SECTION 10 28 00, TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES ItemMaterialManufacturerMfg. Color Name/No.Soap DispenserTBDTBDTBDToilet Tissue DispenserTBDTBDTBDHorizontal Grab BarsTBDTBDTBDVertical Grab BarsTBDTBDTBDWall MirrorTBDTBDTBDToilet Seat Cover DispenserTBDTBDTBDSanitary Napkin DisposalTBDTBDTBDD.SECTION 10 44 13, FIRE EXTNGUISHER CABINETS ComponentMaterialFinishCabinet BodySteelTBDFrame and DoorSteelTBD2.7 Division 12- FURNISHINGSA.SECTION 12 36 00, COUNTERTOPS, AND ACCESSORIES TypeFinish/ColorPlastic LaminateTBD2.8 Division 13- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTIONA.SECTION 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON STRUCTURAL COMPONENETS ItemLocationFinishColorArchitectural Elements: glazing; nonbearing partitions; suspended ceilings; shelves; and tackboards.TBDTBDTBDElectrical Elements: Power and lighting systems; selector and controller panels; fire protection and alarm systems; and telephone & communication systems.TBDTBDTBDMechanical Elements: Heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning systems; plumbing systems; sprinkler systems; boiler equipment and components.TBDTBDTBD2.9 Division 22 - PLUMBINGA.SECTION 22 40 00, PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM ItemColorWater ClosetTBDLavatoriesTBDService Sink CornerTBDService SinkTBDClinic Service SinkTBDPART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 FINISH SCHEDULES & MISCELLANEOUS ABBREVIATIONSATAcoustical Ceiling TilesCPCarpetCTCeramic TilesCBCeramic Base/Wainscoting GWBGypsum WallboardPPaintRBRubber BaseVPVinyl PlanksRTRubber Tiles/Resilient Rubber Flooring3.2 FINISH SCHEDULE SYMBOLSSymbol Definition**Same finish as adjoining walls-No color requiredEExistingXXTo match existingEFTRExisting finish to remainRMRemove3.3 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULEA.Match adjoining or existing similar surfaces colors, textures or patterns where disturbed or damaged by alterations or new work when not scheduled. INTERIOR COLOR AND ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ROOM No.ROOM NAMEFINISHESNOTESFloorBaseWallCeilingWainscot 2A-124Waiting AreaCPT-1 and VP-2RB-1P-1 and P-2ACT2A-124ACentral ReceptionCPT-1RB-1P-1ACTPerforated Metal Ceiling Tile2A-124BGroup Therapy RoomCPT-3RB-1P-1ACT2A-124CRN Care CoordinatorVP-1RB-1P-1ACT2A-124DClinical NurseCPT-2RB-1P-1ACT2A-124EPharmacistCPT-2RB-1P-1ACT2A-124FPhysicianCPT-2RB-1P-1ACT2A-124GNurse Care ManagerVP-1RB-1P-1ACT2A-125HACCT-2CT-2P-1GWBCT-2 2A-126Toilet Public FemaleCT-1CT-1P-1GWBCT-1 & CT-42A-127CorridorVP-1RB-1P-1ACT2A-127AMultipurpose Exam RoomRT-1RB-1P-1ACT2A-127BMultipurpose Exam RoomRT-1RB-1P-1ACT2A-127B1Toilet Patient Women’s HealthCT-1CT-1P-1GWBCT-1 & CT-32A-127CClean Supply RoomRT-2RB-1P-1ACT2A-127C1Crash CartVP-1RB-1P-2GWB2A-127DSoiled HoldingRT-2RB-1P-1ACT2A-127EStorage Copy Work AreaRT-2RB-1P-1ACT2A-127FProgram ManagerCPT-2RB-1P-1ACT2A-127GCombat Stress SpecialistCPT-2RB-1P-1ACT2A-127HSocial work Case ManagerCPT-2RB-1P-1ACT2A-127ITransitional Patient AdvocateCPT-2RB-1P-1ACT--- E N D---SECTION 09 22 16NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section specifies steel studs wall systems, shaft wall systems, ceiling or soffit suspended or furred framing, wall furring, fasteners, and accessories for the screw attachment of gypsum board, plaster bases or other building boards. 1.2 RELATED WORK A.Support for wall mounted items: Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS. B.Ceiling suspension systems for acoustical tile or panels and lay in gypsum board panels: Section 09 51 00, ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS, and Section 09 29 00, GYPSUM BOARD.1.3 TERMINOLOGY A.Description of terms shall be in accordance with ASTM C754, ASTM C11, ASTM C841 and as specified. B.Underside of Structure Overhead: In spaces where steel trusses or bar joists are shown, the underside of structure overhead shall be the underside of the floor or roof construction supported by beams, trusses, or bar joists. In interstitial spaces with walkon floors the underside of the walkon floor is the underside of structure overhead. C.Thickness of steel specified is the minimum bare (uncoated) steel thickness. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Studs, runners and accessories. 2.Hanger inserts. 3.Channels (Rolled steel). 4.Furring channels. 5.Screws, clips and other fasteners. C.Shop Drawings: 1.Typical ceiling suspension system. 2.Typical metal stud and furring construction system including details around openings and corner details. 4.Typical fire rated assembly and column fireproofing showing details of construction same as that used in fire rating test. D.Test Results: Fire rating test designation, each fire rating required for each assembly. 1.5 DELIVERY, IDENTIFICATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE In accordance with the requirements of ASTM C754. 1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) A123-09Zinc (Hot-dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel ProductsA653/A653M-09Steel Sheet, ZincCoated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the HotDip Process A64109ZincCoated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire C1110Terminology Relating to Gypsum and Related Building Materials and Systems C63507Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension System for Acoustical Tile and Layin Panel Ceilings C63606Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Layin Panels C64509NonStructural Steel Framing Members C75409Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive ScrewAttached Gypsum Panel Products C84103(R2008)Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring C954-07Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in ThicknessC100207Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel StudsE580-09Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Moderate Seismic Restraint.PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PROTECTIVE COATING Galvanize steel studs, runners (track), rigid (hat section) furring channels, "Z" shaped furring channels, and resilient furring channels, with coating designation of G-60 minimum, per ASTM 123.2.2 STEEL STUDS AND RUNNERS (TRACK) A.ASTM C645, modified for thickness specified and sizes as shown. 1.Use ASTM A525 steel, 0.8 mm (0.0329-inch) thick bare metal (33 mil). 2.Runners same thickness as studs. B.Provide not less than two cutouts in web of each stud, approximately 300 mm (12 inches) from each end, and intermediate cutouts on approximately 600 mm (24inch) centers. C.Doubled studs for openings and studs for supporting concrete backerboard.D.Studs 3600 mm (12 feet) or less in length shall be in one piece. 2.3 FURRING CHANNELS A.Rigid furring channels (hat shape): ASTM C645. B.Resilient furring channels: 1.Not less than 0.45 mm (0.0179inch) thick bare metal. 2.Semihat shape, only one flange for anchorage with channel web leg slotted on anchorage side, channel web leg on other side stiffens fastener surface but shall not contact anchorage surface other channel leg is attached to. C."Z" Furring Channels: 1.Not less than 0.45 mm (0.0179inch)thick bare metal, with 32 mm (11/4 inch) and 19 mm (3/4inch) flanges. 2.Web furring depth to suit thickness of insulation with slotted perforations. D.Rolled Steel Channels: ASTM C754, cold rolled; or, ASTM C841, cold rolled.2.4 FASTENERS, CLIPS, AND OTHER METAL ACCESSORIES A.ASTM C754, except as otherwise specified. B.For fire rated construction: Type and size same as used in fire rating test. C.Fasteners for steel studs thicker than 0.84 mm (0.033inch) thick. Use ASTM C954 steel drill screws of size and type recommended by the manufacturer of the material being fastened. D.Clips: ASTM C841 (paragraph 6.11), manufacturer’s standard items. Clips used in lieu of tie wire shall have holding power equivalent to that provided by the tie wire for the specific application. E.Concrete ceiling hanger inserts (anchorage for hanger wire and hanger straps): Steel, zinccoated (galvanized), manufacturers standard items, designed to support twice the hanger loads imposed and the type of hanger used. F.Tie Wire and Hanger Wire: 1.ASTM A641, soft temper, Class 1 coating. 2.Gage (diameter) as specified in ASTM C754 or ASTM C841.G.Attachments for Wall Furring: 1.Manufacturers standard items fabricated from zinccoated (galvanized) steel sheet. 2.For concrete or masonry walls: Metal slots with adjustable inserts or adjustable wall furring brackets. Spacers may be fabricated from 1 mm (0.0396inch) thick galvanized steel with corrugated edges. H.Power Actuated Fasteners: Type and size as recommended by the manufacturer of the material being fastened. 2.5 SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM FOR GYPSUM BOARD (OPTION) A.Conform to ASTM C635, heavy duty, with not less than 35 mm (13/8 inch) wide knurled capped flange face designed for screw attachment of gypsum board. B.Wall track channel with 35 mm (13/8 inch) wide flange.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION CRITERIA A.Where fire rated construction is required for walls, partitions, columns, beams and floorceiling assemblies, the construction shall be same as that used in fire rating test.B.Construction requirements for fire rated assemblies and materials shall be as shown and specified, the provisions of the Scope paragraph (1.2) of ASTM C754 and ASTM C841 regarding details of construction shall not apply.3.2 INSTALLING STUDS A.Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754, except as otherwise shown or specified. B.Space studs not more than 610 mm (24 inches) on center. C.Cut studs 6 mm to 9 mm (1/4 to 3/8inch) less than floor to underside of structure overhead when extended to underside of structure overhead. D.Where studs are shown to terminate above suspended ceilings, provide bracing as shown or extend studs to underside of structure overhead.E.Extend studs to underside of structure overhead for fire, rated partitions, smoke partitions, shafts, and sound rated partitions and insulated exterior wall furring. F.Openings: 1.Frame jambs of openings in stud partitions and furring with two studs placed back to back or as shown. 2.Fasten back to back studs together with 9 mm (3/8inch) long Type S pan head screws at not less than 600 mm (two feet) on center, staggered along webs. 3.Studs fastened flange to flange shall have splice plates on both sides approximately 50 X 75 mm (2 by 3 inches) screwed to each stud with two screws in each stud. Locate splice plates at 600 mm (24 inches) on center between runner tracks. G.Fastening Studs: 1.Fasten studs located adjacent to partition intersections, corners and studs at jambs of openings to flange of runner tracks with two screws through each end of each stud and flange of runner.2.Do not fasten studs to top runner track when studs extend to underside of structure overhead. 3.3 INSTALLING WALL FURRING FOR FINISH APPLIED TO ONE SIDE ONLY A.In accordance with ASTM C754, or ASTM C841 except as otherwise specified or shown. B.Wall furringStud System: 1.Framed with 63 mm (21/2 inch) or narrower studs, 600 mm (24 inches) on center. 2.Brace as specified in ASTM C754 for Wall FurringStud System or brace with sections or runners or studs placed horizontally at not less than three foot vertical intervals on side without finish. 3.Securely fasten braces to each stud with two Type S pan head screws at each bearing. C.Direct attachment to masonry or concrete; rigid channels or "Z" channels: 1.Install rigid (hat section) furring channels at 600 mm (24 inches) on center, horizontally or vertically. 2.Install "Z" furring channels vertically spaced not more than 600 mm (24 inches) on center. 3.At corners where rigid furring channels are positioned horizontally, provide mitered joints in furring channels. 4.Ends of spliced furring channels shall be nested not less than 200?mm (8 inches). 5.Fasten furring channels to walls with poweractuated drive pins or hardened steel concrete nails. Where channels are spliced, provide two fasteners in each flange. 6.Locate furring channels at interior and exterior corners in accordance with wall finish material manufacturers printed erection instructions. Locate "Z" channels within 100 mm (4 inches) of corner. D.Installing Wall FurringBracket System: Space furring channels not more than 400 mm (16 inches) on center. 3.4 INSTALLING SUPPORTS REQUIRED BY OTHER TRADES A.Provide for attachment and support of electrical outlets, plumbing, laboratory or heating fixtures, recessed type plumbing fixture accessories, access panel frames, wall bumpers, wood seats, toilet stall partitions, dressing booth partitions, urinal screens, chalkboards, tackboards, wallhung casework, handrail brackets, recessed fire extinguisher cabinets and other items like auto door buttons and auto door operators supported by stud construction. B.Provide additional studs where required. Install metal backing plates, or special metal shapes as required, securely fastened to metal studs. 3.5 INSTALLING FURRED AND SUSPENDED CEILINGS OR SOFFITS A.Install furred and suspended ceilings or soffits in accordance with ASTM C754 or ASTM C841 except as otherwise specified or shown for screw attached gypsum board ceilings and for plaster ceilings or soffits. 1.Space framing at 400 mm (16-inch) centers for metal lath anchorage.2.Space framing at 600 mm (24-inch) centers for gypsum board anchorage.B.Installing suspended ceiling system for gypsum board (ASTM C635 Option): 1.Install only for ceilings to receive screw attached gypsum board. 2.Install in accordance with ASTM C636. a.Install main runners spaced 1200 mm (48 inches) on center. b.Install 1200 mm (four foot) tees not over 600 mm (24 inches) on center; locate for edge support of gypsum board. c.Install wall track channel at perimeter. C.Installing Ceiling Bracing System: 1.Construct bracing of 38 mm (11/2 inch) channels for lengths up to 2400 mm (8 feet) and 50 mm (2 inch) channels for lengths over 2400 mm (8 feet) with ends bent to form surfaces for anchorage to carrying channels and over head construction. Lap channels not less than 600 mm (2 feet) at midpoint back to back. Screw or bolt lap together with two fasteners. 2.Install bracing at an approximate 45 degree angle to carrying channels and structure overhead; secure as specified to structure overhead with two fasteners and to carrying channels with two fasteners or wire ties. 3.Brace suspended ceiling or soffit framing in seismic areas in accordance with ASTM E580. 3.6 TOLERANCES A.Fastening surface for application of subsequent materials shall not vary more than 3 mm (1/8inch) from the layout line. B.Plumb and align vertical members within 3 mm (1/8inch.) C.Level or align ceilings within 3 mm (1/8inch.) E N D SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONThis section specifies installation and finishing of gypsum board.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Installation of steel framing members for walls, partitions, furring, soffits, and ceilings: Section 09 22 16, NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING.B.Sound deadening board: Section 07 21 13, THERMAL INSULATION.C.Acoustical Sealants: Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.D.Lay in gypsum board ceiling panels: Section 09 51 00, ACOUSTICAL CEILING.1.3 TERMINOLOGYA.Definitions and description of terms shall be in accordance with ASTM C11, C840, and as specified.B.Underside of Structure Overhead: In spaces where steel trusses or bar joists are shown, the underside of structure overhead shall be the underside of the floor or roof construction supported by the trusses or bar joists.C."Yoked": Gypsum board cut out for opening with no joint at the opening (along door jamb or above the door).1.4 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:1.Cornerbead and edge trim.2.Finishing materials.3.Laminating adhesive.4.Gypsum board, each type.C.Shop Drawings:1.Typical gypsum board installation, showing corner details, edge trim details and the like.2.Typical sound rated assembly, showing treatment at perimeter of partitions and penetrations at gypsum board.3.Typical fire rated assembly and column fireproofing, indicating details of construction same as that used in fire rating test.D.Samples:1.Cornerbead.2.Edge trim.3.Control joints.E.Test Results:1.Fire rating test, each fire rating required for each assembly.2.Sound rating test.1.5 DELIVERY, IDENTIFICATION, HANDLING AND STORAGEIn accordance with the requirements of ASTM C840.1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONSIn accordance with the requirements of ASTM C840.1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society for Testing And Materials (ASTM):C11-08Terminology Relating to Gypsum and Related Building Materials and SystemsC475-02Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum BoardC840-08Application and Finishing of Gypsum BoardC919-08Sealants in Acoustical ApplicationsC954-07Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Stud from 0.033 in. (0.84mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84mm) in thicknessC1002-07Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel StudsC1047-05Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer BaseC1177-06Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as SheathingC1658-06Glass Mat Gypsum PanelsC1396-06Gypsum BoardE84-08Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsC.Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):Latest EditionFire Resistance DirectoryD.Inchcape Testing Services (ITS):Latest EditionsCertification ListingsPART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 GYPSUM BOARDA.Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396, Type X, 16 mm (5/8 inch) thick unless shown otherwise. Shall contain a minimum of 20 percent recycled gypsum.B.Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C620, Type X, 16 mm (5/8 inch) thick.C.Gypsum cores shall contain maximum percentage of post industrial recycled gypsum content available in the area (a minimum of 95 percent post industrial recycled gypsum content). Paper facings shall contain 100 percent post-consumer recycled paper content.2.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING BOARDA.ASTM C1396, Type X, water-resistant core, 16 mm (5/8 inch) thick.B.ASTM C1177, Type X.2.3 ACCESSORIESA.ASTM C1047, except form of 0.39 mm (0.015 inch) thick zinc coated steel sheet or rigid PVC plastic.B.Flanges not less than 22 mm (7/8 inch) wide with punchouts or deformations as required to provide compound bond.2.4 FASTENERSA.ASTM C1002 and ASTM C840, except as otherwise specified.B.ASTM C954, for steel studs thicker than 0.04 mm (0.33 inch).C.Select screws of size and type recommended by the manufacturer of the material being fastened.D.For fire rated construction, type and size same as used in fire rating test.E.Clips: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; gypsum board manufacturer's standard items.2.5 FINISHING MATERIALS AND LAMINATING ADHESIVEASTM C475 and ASTM C840. Free of antifreeze, vinyl adhesives, preservatives, biocides and other VOC. Adhesive shall contain a maximum VOC content of 50 g/l.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 GYPSUM BOARD HEIGHTSA.Extend all layers of gypsum board from floor to underside of structure overhead on following partitions and furring:1.Two sides of partitions:a.Fire rated partitions.b.Smoke partitions.c.Sound rated partitions.d.Full height partitions shown (FHP).e.Corridor partitions.2.One side of partitions or furring:a.Inside of exterior wall furring or stud construction.b.Room side of room without suspended ceilings.c.Furring for pipes and duct shafts, except where fire rated shaft wall construction is shown.3.Extend all layers of gypsum board construction used for fireproofing of columns from floor to underside of structure overhead, unless shown otherwise.B.In locations other than those specified, extend gypsum board from floor to heights as follows:1.Not less than 100 mm (4 inches) above suspended acoustical ceilings.2.At ceiling of suspended gypsum board ceilings.3.At existing ceilings.3.2 INSTALLING GYPSUM BOARDA.Coordinate installation of gypsum board with other trades and related work.B.Install gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840, except as otherwise specified.C.Moisture and Mold–Resistant Assemblies: Provide and install moisture and mold-resistant glass mat gypsum wallboard products with moisture-resistant surfaces complying with ASTM C1658 where shown and in locations which might be subject to moisture exposure during construction. D.Use gypsum boards in maximum practical lengths to minimize number of end joints.E.Bring gypsum board into contact, but do not force into place.F.Ceilings:1.For single-ply construction, use perpendicular application.2.For two-ply assembles:a.Use perpendicular application.b.Apply face ply of gypsum board so that joints of face ply do not occur at joints of base ply with joints over framing members.G.Walls (Except Shaft Walls):1.When gypsum board is installed parallel to framing members, space fasteners 300 mm (12 inches) on center in field of the board, and 200 mm (8 inches) on center along edges.2.When gypsum board is installed perpendicular to framing members, space fasteners 300 mm (12 inches) on center in field and along edges.3.Stagger screws on abutting edges or ends.4.For single-ply construction, apply gypsum board with long dimension either parallel or perpendicular to framing members as required to minimize number of joints except gypsum board shall be applied vertically over "Z" furring channels.5.For two-ply gypsum board assemblies, apply base ply of gypsum board to assure minimum number of joints in face layer. Apply face ply of wallboard to base ply so that joints of face ply do not occur at joints of base ply with joints over framing members.6.For three-ply gypsum board assemblies, apply plies in same manner as for two-ply assemblies, except that heads of fasteners need only be driven flush with surface for first and second plies. Apply third ply of wallboard in same manner as second ply of two-ply assembly, except use fasteners of sufficient length enough to have the same penetration into framing members as required for two-ply assemblies.7.No offset in exposed face of walls and partitions will be permitted because of single-ply and two-ply or three-ply application requirements.8.Installing Two Layer Assembly Over Sound Deadening Board:a.Apply face layer of wallboard vertically with joints staggered from joints in sound deadening board over framing members.b.Fasten face layer with screw, of sufficient length to secure to framing, spaced 300 mm (12 inches) on center around perimeter, and 400 mm (16 inches) on center in the field.9.Control Joints ASTM C840 and as follows:a.Locate at both side jambs of openings if gypsum board is not "yoked". Use one system throughout.b.Not required for wall lengths less than 9000 mm (30 feet).c.Extend control joints the full height of the wall or length of soffit/ceiling membrane.H.Acoustical or Sound Rated Partitions, Fire and Smoke Partitions:1.Cut gypsum board for a space approximately 3 mm to 6 mm (1/8 to 1/4 inch) wide around partition perimeter.2.Coordinate for application of caulking or sealants to space prior to taping and finishing.3.For sound rated partitions, use sealing compound (ASTM C919) to fill the annular spaces between all receptacle boxes and the partition finish material through which the boxes protrude to seal all holes and/or openings on the back and sides of the boxes. STC minimum values as shown.I. Electrical and Telecommunications Boxes:1. Seal annular spaces between electrical and telecommunications receptacle boxes and gypsum board partitions.J.Accessories:1.Set accessories plumb, level and true to line, neatly mitered at corners and intersections, and securely attach to supporting surfaces as specified.2.Install in one piece, without the limits of the longest commercially available lengths.3.Corner Beads:a.Install at all vertical and horizontal external corners and where shown.b.Use screws only. Do not use crimping tool.4.Edge Trim (casings Beads):a.At both sides of expansion and control joints unless shown otherwise.b.Where gypsum board terminates against dissimilar materials and at perimeter of openings, except where covered by flanges, casings or permanently built-in equipment.c.Where gypsum board surfaces of non-load bearing assemblies abut load bearing members.d.Where shown.3.3 INSTALLING GYPSUM SHEATHINGA.Install in accordance with ASTM C840, except as otherwise specified or shown.B.Use screws of sufficient length to secure sheathing to framing.C.Space screws 9 mm (3/8 inch) from ends and edges of sheathing and 200 mm (8 inches) on center. Space screws a maximum of 200 mm (8 inches) on center on intermediate framing members.D.Apply 600 mm by 2400 mm (2 foot by 8 foot) sheathing boards horizontally with tongue edge up.E.Apply 1200 mm by 2400 mm or 2700 mm (4 ft. by 8 ft. or 9 foot) gypsum sheathing boards vertically with edges over framing.3.4 FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARDA.Finish joints, edges, corners, and fastener heads in accordance with ASTM C840. Use Level 4 finish for al finished areas open to public view.B.Before proceeding with installation of finishing materials, assure the following:1.Gypsum board is fastened and held close to framing or furring.2.Fastening heads in gypsum board are slightly below surface in dimple formed by driving tool.C.Finish joints, fasteners, and all openings, including openings around penetrations, on that part of the gypsum board extending above suspended ceilings to seal surface of non decorated smoke barrier, fire rated and sound rated gypsum board construction. After the installation of hanger rods, hanger wires, supports, equipment, conduits, piping and similar work, seal remaining openings and maintain the integrity of the smoke barrier, fire rated and sound rated construction. Sanding is not required of non decorated surfaces.3.5 REPAIRSA.After taping and finishing has been completed, and before decoration, repair all damaged and defective work, including nondecorated surfaces.B.Patch holes or openings 13 mm (1/2 inch) or less in diameter, or equivalent size, with a setting type finishing compound or patching plaster.C.Repair holes or openings over 13 mm (1/2 inch) diameter, or equivalent size, with 16 mm (5/8 inch) thick gypsum board secured in such a manner as to provide solid substrate equivalent to undamaged surface.D.Tape and refinish scratched, abraded or damaged finish surfaces including cracks and joints in non decorated surface to provide smoke tight construction fire protection equivalent to the fire rated construction and STC equivalent to the sound rated construction.3.6 unaccessible ceilingsAt Mental Health and Behavioral Nursing Units, areas accessible to patients and not continuously observable by staff (e.g., patient bedrooms, day rooms), ceilings should be a solid material such as gypsum board. This will limit patient access. Access doors are needed to access electrical and mechanical equipment above the ceiling. These doors should be locked to prevent unauthorized access and secured to ceiling using tamper resistant fasteners.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 09 30 13CERAMIC/porcelain TILING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section specifies ceramic, porcelain and quarry tile, marble thresholds, waterproofing membranes for thin-set applications, crack isolation membranes, tile backer board. 1.2 RELATED WORK A.Sealing of joints where specified: Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.B.Color, texture and pattern of field tile and trim shapes, size of field tile, trim shapes, and color of grout specified: Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.C.Metal and resilient edge strips at joints with new resilient flooring, and carpeting: Section 09 65 19, RESILIENT TILE FLOORING and Section 09 68 00, CARPETING.1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Samples:1.Base tile, each type, each color, each size.2.Porcelain tile, each type, color, patterns and size.3.Wall (or wainscot) tile, each color, size and pattern.4.Trim shapes, bullnose cap and cove including bullnose cap and base pieces at internal and external corners of vertical surfaces, each type, color, and size.C.Product Data:1.Ceramic and porcelain tile, marked to show each type, size, and shape required.2.Chemical resistant mortar and grout (Epoxy and Furan).3.Dryset Portland cement mortar and grout.4.Divider strip.5.Elastomeric membrane and bond coat.6.Reinforcing tape.7.Leveling compound.8.LatexPortland cement mortar and grout. mercial Portland cement grout.10.Slip resistant tile.11.Waterproofing isolation membrane.12.Fasteners.D.Certification:1.Master grade, ANSI A137.1.2.Manufacturer's certificates indicating that the following materials comply with specification requirements:a.Chemical resistant mortar and grout (epoxy and furan).b.Modified epoxy emulsion.mercial Portland cement grout.d.Cementitious backer unit.e.Dry-set Portland cement mortar and grout.f.Elastomeric membrane and bond coat.g.Reinforcing tape.h.LatexPortland cement mortar and grout.i.Leveling compound.anic adhesive.k.Waterproof isolation membrane.l.Factory mounted tile suitability for application in wet area specified under 2.1, A, 3 with list of successful in-service performance locations.1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A.Deliver materials in containers with labels legible and intact and gradeseals unbroken.B.Store material to prevent damage or contamination.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.B.American National Standards Institute (ANSI):A108.1A-11Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement MortarA108.1B-11Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with dry-Set or latex-Portland Cement MortarA108.1C-11Contractors Option; Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement MortarA137.1-08Ceramic TileAmerican Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM): A185-07Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcing C109/C109M-11Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2 inch. or [50-mm] Cube Specimens)C241-09Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot TrafficC348-08Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic-Cement MortarsC627-10Evaluating Ceramic Floor Tile Installation Systems Using the Robinson-Type Floor TesterC954-11Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board on Metal Plaster Base to Steel Studs from 0.033 in (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in (2.84 mm) in thicknessC979-10Pigments for Integrally Colored ConcreteC1002-07Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Panel ProductsC1027-09Determining “Visible Abrasion Resistance on Glazed Ceramic Tile”C1028-07Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull Meter MethodC1127-09Standard Guide for Use of High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane with an Integral Wearing SurfaceC1178/C1178M-11Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing PanelC1325-08Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cementitious Backer UnitsD4397-10Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial and Agricultural ApplicationsD5109-99(R2004)Standard Test Methods for Copper-Clad Thermosetting Laminates for Printed Wiring BoardsD.Marble Institute of America (MIA): Design Manual III-2007 E.Tile Council of America, Inc. (TCA):2007Handbook for Ceramic Tile InstallationPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TILE ply with ANSI A137.1, Standard Grade, except as modified:1.Inspection procedures listed under the Appendix of ANSI A137.1.2.Abrasion Resistance Classification:a.Tested in accordance with values listed in Table 1, ASTM C 1027.b.Class V, 12000 revolutions for floors in Corridors, Kitchens, Storage including Refrigerated Rooms c.Class IV, 6000 revolutions for remaining areas.3.Slip Resistant Tile for Floors:a.Coefficient of friction, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1028, required for level of performance:1)Not less than 0.7 (wet condition) for bathing areas.2)Not less than 0.8 on ramps for wet and dry conditions.3)Not less than 0.6, except 0.8 on ramps as stated above, for wet and dry conditions for other areas.b.Tile Having Abrasive Grains:1.Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Abrasive grains throughout body of the tile.4.Factory Blending: For tile with color variations, within the ranges selected during sample submittals blend tile in the factory and package so tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples.5.Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: a.Protect exposed face surfaces (top surface) of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by pre-coating with a continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot.b.Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.c.Pre-wax tiles set or grouted with furan or epoxy or latex modified mortars. B.Glazed Wall Tile: Cushion edges, glazing, as specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.C.Trim Shapes:1.Conform to applicable requirements of adjoining floor and wall tile.2.Use trim shapes sizes conforming to size of adjoining field wall tile unless detailed or specified otherwise in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.3.Internal and External Corners:a.Square internal and external corner joints are not acceptable.b.External corners including edges: Use bullnose shapes.c.Internal corners: Use cove shapes.d.Base to floor internal corners: Use special shapes providing integral cove vertical and horizontal joint.e.Base to floor external corners: Use special shapes providing bullnose vertical edge with integral cove horizontal joint. Use stop at bottom of openings having bullnose return to wall.f.Wall top edge internal corners: Use special shapes providing integral cove vertical joint with bullnose top edge.g.Wall top edge external corners: Use special shapes providing bullnose vertical and horizontal joint edge.h.For unglazed ceramic mosaic and glazed wall tile installed in Portland cement mortar setting bed, use cove and bullnose shapes as applicable. When ceramic mosaic wall and base tile is required, use C Series cove and bullnose shapes.i.For unglazed ceramic mosaic and glazed wall tile installed in dryset Portland cement mortar, latexPortland cement mortar, and organic adhesive (thin set methods), use cove and surface bullnose shapes as applicable.j.Provide cove and bullnose shapes where shown, and required to complete tile work.2.2 glass mat water resistant gypsum backer boardConfirm to ASTM C1178/C1178M, Optional System for Cementious Backer Units.2.3 SETTING MATERIALS OR BOND COATS A.Conform to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.B.Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1.C.LatexPortland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1.1.For wall applications, provide non-sagging, latex-Portland cement mortar complying with ANSI A108.1.2.Prepackaged Dry-Mortar Mix: Factory-prepared mixture of Portland cement; dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to which only water needs to be added at Project site.D.DrySet Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1. For wall applications, provide non-sagging, latex-Portland cement mortar complying with ANSI A108.4.anic Adhesives: ANSI A108.1, Type 1.F.ChemicalResistant Bond Coat:1.Epoxy Resin Type: ANSI A108.1.2.Furan Resin Type: ANSI A108.1.G.Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane and Bond Coat: 1.TCA F122-02.2.ANSI A108.1.3.One component polyurethane, liquid applied material having the following additional physical properties: a.Hardness: Shore "A" between 4060. b.Elongation: Between 300600 percent. c.Tensile strength: Between 4060 psig.d.No volatile compounds. 4.Coal tar modified urethanes are not acceptable.H.Waterproofing Isolation Membrane:1.Sheet System TCA F122-02.2.Optional System to elastomeric waterproof membrane.posite sheet consisting of ASTM D5109, Type II, Grade I Chlorinated Polyethylene (CM) sheet reinforced on both sides with a non-woven polyester fiber.4.Designed for use in wet areas as an isolation and positive waterproofing membranes for thin-set bonding of sheet to substrate and thin-set bonding of ceramic and porcelain tile or marble to sheet. Suited for both horizontal and vertical applications.5.Conform to the following additional physical properties:PropertyUnitsResultsTest MethodHardness Shore APoints70-80ASTM D2240 (10 Second Reading)ShrinkagePercent5 maximumASTM D1204BrittlenessNo crack remains flexible at temperature-37 degrees C (-25 degrees F)ASTM D2497 13 mm (1/2- inch) Mandrel BendRetention of Properties after Heat AgingPercent of original80 Tensile80 Breaking80 ElongationASTM D3045, 90 degrees C (194 degrees F) for 168 hours6.Manufacturer’s standard sheet size with prefabricated or preformed inside and outside corners.7.Sheet manufacturer’s solvent welding liquid or xylene and edge sealant.2.4 GROUTING MATERIALS A.Coloring Pigments: 1.Pure mineral pigments, limeproof and nonfading, complying with ASTM C979.2.Add coloring pigments to grout by the manufacturer. 3.Job colored grout is not acceptable.4.Use is required in Commercial Portland Cement Grout, DrySet Grout, and LatexPortland Cement Grout.B.White Portland Cement Grout: 1.ANSI A108.1.2.Use one part white Portland cement to one part white sand passing a number 30 screen.3.Color additive not permitted.mercial Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.1 color as specified.D.Dry-Set Grout: ANSI A108.1 color as specified.E.LatexPortland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.1 color as specified.1.Unsanded grout mixture for joints 3.2 mm (1/8 inch) and narrower.2.Sanded grout mixture for joints 3.2 mm (1/8 inch) and wider.F.ChemicalResistant Grout:1.Epoxy grout, ANSI A108.1.2.Furan grout, ANSI A108.1.2.5 PATCHING AND LEVELING COMPOUND A.Portland cement base, polymer-modified, self-leveling compound, manufactured specifically for resurfacing and leveling concrete floors. Products containing gypsum are not acceptable.B.Shall have minimum following physical properties: pressive strength 25 MPa (3500 psig) per ASTM C109/C109M.2.Flexural strength 7 MPa (1000 psig) per ASTM C348 (28 day value).3.Tensile strength - 600 psi per ANSI 118.7.4.Density – 1.9. C.Capable of being applied in layers up to 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) thick without fillers and up to 100 mm (four inches) thick with fillers, being brought to a feather edge, and being trowelled to a smooth finish.D.Primers, fillers, and reinforcement as required by manufacturer for application and substrate condition.E.Ready for use in 48 hours after application.2.6 MARBLEA.Soundness Classification in accordance with MIA Design Manual III Groups.B.Thresholds:1.Group A, Minimum abrasive hardness (Ha) of 10.0 per ASTM C241.2.Honed finish on exposed faces.3.Thickness and contour as shown.4.Fabricate from one piece without holes, cracks, or open seams; full depth of wall or frame opening by full width of wall or frame opening; 19 mm (3/4-inch) minimum thickness and 6 mm (1/4-inch) minimum thickness at beveled edge.5.Set not more than 13 mm (1/2-inch) above adjoining finished floor surfaces, with transition edges beveled on a slope of no greater than 1:2. On existing floor slabs provide 13 mm (1/2-inch) above ceramic tile surface with bevel edge joint top flush with adjacent floor.6.One piece full width of door opening. Notch thresholds to match profile of door jambs.2.7 METAL DIVIDER STRIPSA.Terrazzo type divider strips.B.Heavy top type strip with 5 mm (3/16 inch) wide top and 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) long leg.C.Embedded leg perforated and deformed for keying to mortar.D.Aluminum or brass as specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.2.8 WATER Clean, potable and free from salts and other injurious elements to mortar and grout materials.2.9 CLEANING COMPOUNDS A.Specifically designed for cleaning masonry and concrete and which will not prevent bond of subsequent tile setting materials including patching and leveling compounds and elastomeric waterproofing membrane and coat.B.Materials containing acid or caustic material not acceptable.2.10 FLOOR MORTAR BED REINFORCING ASTM A185 welded wire fabric without backing, MW3 x MW3 (2 x 2W0.5 x W0.5).2.11 POLYETHYLENE SHEET A.Polyethylene sheet conforming to ASTM D4397.B.Nominal thickness: 0.15 mm (six mils).C.Use sheet width to minimize joints.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A.Maintain ambient temperature of work areas at not less than 16 degree C (60 degrees F), without interruption, for not less than 24 hours before installation and not less than three days after installation.B.Maintain higher temperatures for a longer period of time where required by manufacturer's recommendation and ANSI Specifications for installation.C.Do not install tile when the temperature is above 38 degrees C (100 degrees F).D.Do not install materials when the temperature of the substrate is below 16 degrees C (60 degrees F).E.Do not allow temperature to fall below 10 degrees C (50 degrees F) after fourth day of completion of tile work.3.2 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCE A.Variation in plane of subfloor, including concrete fills leveling compounds and mortar beds:1.Not more than 1 in 500 (1/4 inch in 10 feet) from required elevation where Portland cement mortar setting bed is used.2.Not more than 1 in 1000 (1/8 inch in 10 feet) where dry-set Portland cement, and latex-Portland cement mortar setting beds and chemical-resistant bond coats are used.B.Variation in Plane of Wall Surfaces:1.Not more than 1 in 400 (1/4 inch in eight feet) from required plane where Portland cement mortar setting bed is used.2.Not more than 1 in 800 (1/8 inch in eight feet) where dryset or latexPortland cement mortar or organic adhesive setting materials is used.3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A.Patching and Leveling: 1.Mix and apply patching and leveling compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.2.Fill holes and cracks and align concrete floors that are out of required plane with patching and leveling compound.a.Thickness of compound as required to bring finish tile system to elevation shown.b.Float finish except finish smooth for elastomeric waterproofing. c.At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment.3.Apply leveling coats of material compatible with wall surface and tile setting material to wall surfaces, other than concrete and masonry that are out of required plane.B.Additional preparation of concrete floors for tile set with epoxy, or furanresin shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.C.Walls: 1.Apply patching and leveling compound to concrete and masonry surfaces that are out of required plane.2.Apply leveling coats of material compatible with wall surface and tile setting material to wall surfaces, other than concrete and masonry that are out of required plane.3.Apply metal lath to framing in accordance with ANSI A108.1:a.Use fasteners specified in paragraph "Fasteners." Use washers when lath opening is larger than screw head.b.Apply scratch and leveling coats to metal lath in accordance with ANSI A108.1.C.c.Total thickness of scratch and leveling coats: 1)Apply 9 mm to 16 mm (3/8 inch to 5/8 inch) thick over solid backing.2)16 mm to 19 mm (5/8 to 3/4 inch) thick on metal lath over studs.3)Where wainscots are required to finish flush with wall surface above, adjust thickness required for flush finish.d.Apply scratch and leveling coats more than 19 mm (3/4 inch) thick in two coats.D.Existing Floors and Walls:1.Remove existing composition floor finishes and adhesive. Prepare surface by grinding, chipping, self-contained power blast cleaning or other suitable mechanical methods to completely expose uncontaminated concrete or masonry surfaces. Follow safety requirements of ANSI A10.20.2.Remove existing concrete fill or topping to structural slab. Clean and level the substrate for new setting bed and waterproof membrane or cleavage membrane.3.Where new tile bases are required to finish flush with plaster above or where they are extensions of similar bases in conjunction with existing floor tiles cut channel in floor slab and expose rough wall construction sufficiently to accommodate new tile base and setting material.3.4 glass mat water-resistant gypsum backer boardA.Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. TCA Systems W245-01.B.Treat joints with tape and latex-Portland cement mortar or adhesive.3.5 MARBLE A.Secure thresholds in position with minimum of two stainless steel dowels.B.Set in dryset Portland cement mortar or latexPortland cement mortar bond coat.C.Set threshold to finish 12mm (1/2 inch) above ceramic tile floor unless shown otherwise, with bevel edge joint top flush with adjacent floor similar to TCA detail TR611-02.3.6 METAL DIVIDER STRIPS A.Install metal divider strips in floor joints between ceramic and quarry tile floors and between tile floors and adjacent flooring of other materials where the finish floors are flush unless shown otherwise.B.Set divider strip in mortar bed to line and level centered under doors or in openings.3.7 CERAMIC TILE GENERAL ply with ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards in "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" applicable to methods of installation.ply with TCA Installation Guidelines:C.Installing Mortar Beds for Floors:1.Install mortar bed to not damage cleavage or waterproof membrane; 32 mm (1-1/2 inch) minimum thickness.2.Install floor mortar bed reinforcing centered in mortar fill.3.Screed finish to level plane or slope to drains where shown, float finish.4.For thin set systems cure mortar bed not less than seven days. Do not use curing compounds or coatings.5.For tile set with Portland cement paste over plastic mortar bed coordinate to set tile before mortar bed sets.D.Setting Beds or Bond Coats:1.Set floor tile in elastomeric bond coat over elastomeric membrane ANSI 108. 13, TCA System F122 where scheduled,. 2.Set wall tile installed over Portland cement mortar bed on metal lath base in Portland cement paste over plastic mortar bed, or dryset Portland cement mortar or latexPortland cement mortar over a cured mortar bed, ANSI A108.1C, TCA System W231-02, W241-02.3.Set tile installed over gypsum board and gypsum plaster in organic adhesive, ANSI A108.1, TCA System W242-02. 4.Set trim shapes in same material specified for setting adjoining tile.E.Workmanship: 1.Lay out tile work so that no tile less than onehalf full size is used. Make all cuts on the outer edge of the field. 2.Set tile firmly in place with finish surfaces in true planes. Align tile flush with adjacent tile unless shown otherwise.2.Form intersections and returns accurately.3.Cut and drill tile neatly without marring surface.4.Cut edges of tile abutting penetrations, finish, or builtin items: a.Fit tile closely around electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and fittings, so that plates, escutcheons, collars and flanges will overlap cut edge of tile.b.Seal tile joints water tight as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS, around electrical outlets, piping fixtures and fittings before cover plates and escutcheons are set in place.pleted work shall be free from hollow sounding areas and loose, cracked or defective tile.6.Remove and reset tiles that are out of plane or misaligned.7.Floors:a.Extend floor tile beneath casework and equipment, except those units mounted in wall recesses.b.Align finish surface of new tile work flush with other and existing adjoining floor finish where shown.d.Shove and vibrate tiles over 200 mm (8 inches) square to achieve full support of bond coat.8.Walls:a.Cover walls and partitions, including pilasters, furred areas, and freestanding columns from floor to ceiling, or from floor to nominal wainscot heights shown with tile.b.Finish reveals of openings with tile, except where other finish materials are shown or specified.c.Finish wall surfaces behind and at sides of casework and equipment, except those units mounted in wall recesses, with same tile as scheduled for room proper. 9.Joints:a.Keep all joints in line, straight, level, perpendicular and of even width unless shown otherwise.b.Make joints 2 mm (1/16 inch) wide for glazed wall tile and mosaic tile work.10.Back Buttering: For installations indicated below, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI?A108 series of tile installation standards:a.Tile installed with chemical-resistant mortars and grouts.b.Tile wall installations composed of tiles 200 by 200 mm (8 by 8 inches or larger.3.8 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLED WITH PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR A.Mortar Mixes for Floor, Wall And Base Tile: ANSI A108.1.except specified otherwise.B.Installing Wall and Base Tile: ANSI A108.1, except specified otherwise.3.9 THIN SET CERAMIC and porcelain TILE INSTALLED WITH DRYSET PORTLAND CEMENT AND LATEX-PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR A.Installation of Tile: ANSI A108.1, except as specified otherwise. B.Slope tile work to drains not less than 1 in 100 (1/8 inch per foot). 3.10 THIN SET CERAMIC and porcelain TILE INSTALLED WITH ORGANIC ADHESIVE Installation of Tile: ANSI A108.1. 3.11 THIN SET CERAMIC and porcelain TILE INSTALLED WITH CHEMICALRESISTANT BOND COAT A.Epoxy Resin Type: Install tile in accordance with Installation of Tile with Epoxy Mortar; ANSI A108.1.B.Furan Resin Type: Proportion, mix and place in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Set tile in accordance with ANSI A108.1.3.12 CERAMIC and porcelain TILE INSTALLED WITH ELASTOMERIC BOND COAT A.Surface Preparation: Prepare surfaces as specified in paragraph 3.3G B.Installation of Elastomeric Membrane: ANSI A108.1 and TCA F122-02.1.Prime surfaces, where required, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.2.Install first coat of membrane material in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in thickness of 0.75 to 1.3 mm (30 to 50 mils).3.Extend material over flashing rings of drains and turn up vertical surfaces not less than 100 mm (four inches) above finish floor surface.4.When material has set, recoat areas with a second coat of elastomeric membrane material for a total thickness of 1.3 to 1.9 mm (50 to 75 mils).5.After curing test for leaks with 25 mm (one inch) of water for 24 hours.C.Installation of Tile in Elastomeric Membrane: 1.Spread no more material than can be covered with tile before material starts to set.2.Apply tile in second coat of elastomeric membrane material in accordance with the coating manufacturer's instructions in lieu at aggregate surfacing specified in ASTM C1127. Do not install top coat over tile.3.13 GROUTINGA.Grout Type and Location:1.Grout for glazed wall and base tile, paver tile and unglazed mosaic tile Portland cement grout, latex-Portland cement grout, dry-set grout, or commercial Portland cement grout.B.Workmanship: 1.Install and cure grout in accordance with the applicable standard.2.Portland Cement grout: ANSI A108.1.3.Epoxy Grout: ANSI A108.1.4.Furan and Commercial Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.1 and in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.5.Dry-set grout: ANSI A108.1.3.14 MOVEMENT JOINTSA.Prepare tile expansion, isolation, construction and contraction joints for installation of sealant. Refer to Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.B.TCA details EJ 171-02.D.Rake out grout at joints between tile, service sink, at toe of base, not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) deep. 3.15 CLEANING A.Thoroughly sponge and wash tile. Polish glazed surfaces with clean dry cloths.B.Methods and materials used shall not damage or impair appearance of tile surfaces.C.The use of acid or acid cleaners on glazed tile surfaces is prohibited.D.Clean tile grouted with epoxy, furan and commercial Portland cement grout and tile set in elastomeric bond coat as recommended by the manufacturer of the grout and bond coat.3.16 PROTECTION A.Keep traffic off tile floor, until grout and setting material is firmly set and cured.B.Where traffic occurs over tile floor, cover tile floor with not less than 9 mm (3/8 inch) thick plywood, wood particle board, or hardboard securely taped in place. Do not remove protective cover until time for final inspection. Clean tile of any tape, adhesive and stains.3.17 testing finish floorA.Test floors in accordance with ASTM C627 to show compliance with codes 1 through 10. E N D SECTION 09 51 00ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1- GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.Metal ceiling suspension system for acoustical ceilings.B.Acoustical units.C.Adhesive application.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Color, pattern, and location of each type of acoustical unit:Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.1.3 SUBMITTALA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Samples:1.Acoustical units, each type, with label indicating conformance to specification requirements. 2.Colored markers for units providing access.C.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:1.Ceiling suspension system, each type, showing complete details of installation 2.Acoustical units, each typeD.Manufacturer's Certificates: Acoustical units, each type, in accordance with specification requirements.1.4 DEFINITIONSA.Standard definitions as defined in ASTM C634.B.Terminology as defined in ASTM E1264.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A641/A641M-03Zinc-coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire A653/A653M-07Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip ProcessC423-07Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room MethodC634-02 (E2007)Standard Terminology Relating to Environmental AcousticsC635-04Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel CeilingsC636-06Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in PanelsE84-07Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsE119-07Fire Tests of Building Construction and MaterialsE413-04Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.E580-06Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic RestraintE1264-(R2005)Classification for Acoustical Ceiling ProductsPART 2- PRODUCTS2.1 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMA.ASTM C635, heavy-duty system, except as otherwise specified.1.Ceiling suspension system members may be fabricated from either of the following unless specified otherwise.a.Galvanized cold-rolled steel, bonderized.b.Extruded aluminum.c.Fire resistant plastic (glass fiber) having a flame spread and smoke developed rating of not more than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.2.Use same construction for cross runners as main runners. Use of lighter-duty sections for cross runners is not acceptable.3.Use aluminum suspension in kitchens and aluminum or fire resistant plastic in toilets adjacent to shower areas, hydrotherapy, and swimming pools.B.Exposed grid suspension system for support of lay-in panels:1.Exposed grid width not less than 22 mm (7/8 inch) with not less than 8 mm (5/16 inch) panel bearing surface.2.Fabricate wall molding and other special molding from the same material with same exposed width and finish as the exposed grid members.3.On exposed metal surfaces apply baked-on enamel flat texture finish in color to match adjacent acoustical units unless specified otherwise in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.C.Suspension system for support of Metal Type V, VI, and VII tiles: Concealed grid type having runners designed for the snap-in attachment of metal tile (pans).2.2 PERIMETER SEALA.Vinyl, polyethylene or polyurethane open cell sponge material having density of 1.3 plus or minus 10 percent, compression set less than 10 percent with pressure sensitive adhesive coating on one side.B.Thickness as required to fill voids between back of wall molding and finish wall.C.Not less than 9 mm (3/8 inch) wide strip.2.3 WIREA.ASTM A641.B.For wire hangers: Minimum diameter 2.68 mm (0.1055 inch).C.For bracing wires: Minimum diameter 3.43 mm (0.1350 inch).2.4 ANCHORS AND INSERTSA.Use anchors or inserts to support twice the loads imposed by hangers attached thereto.B.Hanger Inserts:1.Fabricate inserts from steel, zinc-coated (galvanized after fabrication).2.Nailing type option for wood forms:a.Upper portion designed for anchorage in concrete and positioning lower portion below surface of concrete approximately 25 mm (one inch).b.Lower portion provided with not less than 8 mm (5/16 inch) hole to permit attachment of hangers.3.Flush ceiling insert type:a.Designed to provide a shell covered opening over a wire loop to permit attachment of hangers and keep concrete out of insert recess.b.Insert opening inside shell approximately 16 mm (5/8 inch) wide by 9 mm (3/8 inch) high over top of wire.c.Wire 5 mm (3/16 inch) diameter with length to provide positive hooked anchorage in concrete.C.Clips:1.Galvanized steel.2.Designed to clamp to steel beam or bar joists, or secure framing member together.3.Designed to rigidly secure framing members together.4.Designed to sustain twice the loads imposed by hangers or items supported.D.Tile Splines: ASTM C635.2.5 CARRYING CHANNELS FOR SECONDARY FRAMINGA.Fabricate from cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel, black asphaltic paint finish, free of rust.B.Weighing not less than the following, per 300 m (per thousand linear feet):Size mmSizeInchesCold-rolledKgPoundHot-rolledKgPound381 1/2215.44755081120502267.6590571.512602.6 ADHESIVEA.ASTM D1779, having flame spread index of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.B.Developing minimum strength of 7 kg/m2 (one psi) of contact surface 48 hours after installation in temperature of 21 C (70 F).2.7 ACOUSTICAL UNITSA.General:1.Ceiling Tile shall meet minimum 37% bio-based content in accordance with USDA Bio-Preferred Product requirements.2.ASTM E1264, weighing 3.6 kg/m2 (3/4 psf) minimum for mineral fiber panels or tile.3.Class A Flame Spread: ASTM 844.Minimum NRC (Noise Reduction Coefficient): 0.55 unless specified otherwise: ASTM C423.5.Minimum CAC (Ceiling Attenuation Class): 40-44 range unless specified otherwise: ASTM E413.6.Manufacturers standard finish, minimum Light Reflectance (LR) coefficient of 0.75 on the exposed surfaces, except as specified otherwise in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES. a.Armstrong – Cirrus Square Lay-in7.Lay-in panels: Sizes as shown, with reveal edges.8.Perforated metal facing (pan); tile or panels:a.Tiles: Size of units optional, 300 by 300, 300 by 600, 300 by ?900, and 300 by 1200 mm (12 by 12, 12 by 24, 12 by 36, and 12 by 48 inches). Cross score units larger than 300 by 300 mm (12 by 12 inches) to simulate 300 by 300 mm (12 by 12 inch) units. Use beveled edge units. Design joints for snap-in attachment to suspension system.b.Panels: Sizes as shown with flat panel with square edges to finish flush with exposed grid suspension system. c.Sound absorbent element; either non-sifting mineral wool or glass fiber (free of formaldehyde)of density and thickness to provide specified noise reduction coefficient. Enclosure sound absorbent elements within plastic envelopes.d.Support sound absorbent elements on wire spacer about 6 mm (1/4 inch) high. Fit both the sound absorbent element and the spacer into the unit.9.Adhesive applied tile: 300 by 300 mm (12 by 12 inch) size, having beveled edges.B.Type III Units - Mineral base with water-based painted finish less than 10 g/l VOC, Form 2 - Water felted, minimum 16 mm (5/8 inch) thick. Mineral base to contain minimum 65 percent recycled content.C.Type IV Units - Mineral base with membrane-faced overlay, Form 2 - Water felted, minimum 16 mm (5/8 inch) thick. Apply over the paint coat on the face of the unit a poly (vinyl) chloride overspray having a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.D.Type VII Units - Perforated aluminum facing (pan) with mineral or glass fiber base backing.1.Fabricated from aluminum sheets not less than 0.635 mm (0.025 inch) thick.2.Apply two coats of baked-on enamel finish, free from gloss or sheen, on face and flanges.2.8 ACCESS IDENTIFICATIONA.Markers:1.Use colored markers with pressure sensitive adhesive on one side.2.Make colored markers of paper of plastic, 6 to 9 mm (1/4 to 3/8 inch) in diameter.B.Use markers of the same diameter throughout building.C.Color Code: Use following color markers for service identification:ColorServiceRedSprinkler System: Valves and ControlsGreenDomestic Water: Valves and ControlsYellowChilled Water and Heating WaterOrangeDuctwork: Fire DampersBlueDuctwork: Dampers and ControlsBlackGas: Laboratory, Medical, Air and VacuumPART 3 EXECUTION3.1 CEILING TREATMENTA.Treatment of ceilings shall include sides and soffits of ceiling beams, furred work 600 mm (24 inches) wide and over, and vertical surfaces at changes in ceiling heights unless otherwise shown. Install acoustic tiles after wet finishes have been installed and solvents have cured.B.Lay out acoustical units symmetrically about center lines of each room or space unless shown otherwise on reflected ceiling plan.C.Moldings:1.Install metal wall molding at perimeter of room, column, or edge at vertical surfaces.2.Install special shaped molding at changes in ceiling heights and at other breaks in ceiling construction to support acoustical units and to conceal their edges.D.Perimeter Seal:1.Install perimeter seal between vertical leg of wall molding and finish wall, partition, and other vertical surfaces.2.Install perimeter seal to finish flush with exposed faces of horizontal legs of wall molding.E.Existing ceiling:1.Where extension of existing ceilings occur, match existing.2.Where acoustical units are salvaged and reinstalled or joined, use salvaged units within a space. Do not mix new and salvaged units within a space which results in contrast between old and new acoustic units.ply with specifications for new acoustical units for new units required to match appearance of existing units.F.Fire-Rated System:1.Total assembly, consisting of the ceiling suspension system, acoustical units, penetrations, structural components and floor or roof construction above, shall have a 1 hour fire rating based on tests conducted in conformance with ASTM E119.2.Provide concealed fire protection around penetrations in ceilings for electric and mechanical work, and other penetrations as required to maintain the integrity of the fire-rated assembly.3.Install fire rated ceiling systems to conform to tested assembly. 3.2 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM INSTALLATIONA.General:1.Install metal suspension system for acoustical tile and lay-in panels in accordance with ASTM C636, except as specified otherwise.2.Use direct or indirect hung suspension system or combination thereof as defined in ASTM C635.3.Support a maximum area of 1.48 m2 (16 sf) of ceiling per hanger.4.Prevent deflection in excess of 1/360 of span of cross runner and main runner.5.Provide extra hangers, minimum of one hanger at each corner of each item of mechanical, electrical and miscellaneous equipment supported by ceiling suspension system not having separate support or hangers.6.Provide not less than 100 mm (4 inch) clearance from the exposed face of the acoustical units to the underside of ducts, pipe, conduit, secondary suspension channels, concrete beams or joists; and steel beam or bar joist unless furred system is shown,7.Use main runners not less than 1200 mm (48 inches) in length.8.Install hanger wires vertically. Angled wires are not acceptable except for seismic restraint bracing wires.B.Anchorage to Structure:1.Concrete:a.Install hanger inserts and wire loops required for support of hanger and bracing wire in concrete forms before concrete is placed. Install hanger wires with looped ends through steel deck if steel deck does not have attachment device.b.Use eye pins or threaded studs with screw-on eyes in existing or already placed concrete structures to support hanger and bracing wire. Install in sides of concrete beams or joists at mid height.2.Steel:a.When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels for attachment of hanger wires.(1)Size and space carrying channels to insure that the maximum deflection specified will not be exceeded.(2)Attach hangers to steel carrying channels, spaced four feet on center, unless area supported or deflection exceeds the amount specified.b.Attach carrying channels to the bottom flange of steel beams spaced not 1200 mm (4 feet) on center before fire proofing is installed. Weld or use steel clips to attach to beam to develop full strength of carrying channel.c.Attach hangers to bottom chord of bar joists or to carrying channels installed between the bar joists when hanger spacing prevents anchorage to joist. Rest carrying channels on top of the bottom chord of the bar joists, and securely wire tie or clip to joist.C.Direct Hung Suspension System:1.As illustrated in ASTM C635.2.Support main runners by hanger wires attached directly to the structure overhead.3.Maximum spacing of hangers, 1200 mm (4 feet) on centers unless interference occurs by mechanical systems. Use indirect hung suspension system where not possible to maintain hanger spacing.D.Indirect Hung Suspension System:1.As illustrated in ASTM C635.2.Space carrying channels for indirect hung suspension system not more than 1200 mm (4 feet) on center. Space hangers for carrying channels not more than 2400 mm (8 feet) on center or for carrying channels less than 1200 mm (4 feet) or center so as to insure that specified requirements are not exceeded.3.Support main runners by specially designed clips attached to carrying channels.E.Seismic Ceiling Bracing System:1.Construct system is accordance with ASTM E580.2.Connect bracing wires to structure above as specified for anchorage to structure and to main runner or carrying channels of suspended ceiling at bottom. 3.3 ACOUSTICAL UNIT INSTALLATIONA.Cut acoustic units for perimeter borders and penetrations to fit tight against penetration for joint not concealed by molding.B.Install lay-in acoustic panels in exposed grid with not less than 6?mm (1/4 inch) bearing at edges on supports.1.Install tile to lay level and in full contact with exposed grid.2.Replace cracked, broken, stained, dirty, or tile not cut for minimum bearing.C.Tile in concealed grid upward access suspension system:1.Install acoustical tile with joints close, straight and true to line, and with exposed surfaces level and flush at joints.2.Make corners and arises full, and without worn or broken places.3.Locate acoustical units providing access as specified under Article, ACCESS.D.Adhesive applied tile:1.Condition of surface shall be in accordance with ASTM D1779, Note 1, Cleanliness of Surface, and Note 4, Rigidity of Base Surface.2.Size or seal surface as recommended by manufacturer of adhesive and allow to dry before installing units.E.Markers:1.Install markers of color code specified to identify the various concealed piping, mechanical, and plumbing systems.2.Attach colored markers to exposed grid on opposite sides of the units providing access.3.Attach marker on exposed ceiling surface of upward access acoustical unit.3.4 CLEAN-UP AND COMPLETIONA.Replace damaged, discolored, dirty, cracked and broken acoustical units.B.Leave finished work free from defects.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 09 65 13RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONThis section specifies the installation of vinyl or rubber base and resilient stair treads with sheet rubber flooring on landings.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Color and texture: Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHESS.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:1.Description of each product.2.Base and stair material manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives.3.Application and installation instructions.C.Samples:1.Base: 150 mm (6 inches) long, each type and color.2.Adhesive: Literature indicating each type.1.4 DeliveryA.Deliver materials to the site in original sealed packages or containers, clearly marked with the manufacturer's name or brand, type and color, production run number and date of manufacture.B.Materials from containers which have been distorted, damaged or opened prior to installation will be rejected.1.5 STORAGEA.Store materials in weather tight and dry storage facility.B.Protect material from damage by handling and construction operations before, during, and after installation.1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publication listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):F1344-10Rubber Floor TileF1859-10Rubber Sheet Floor Covering without BackingF1860-10Rubber Sheet Floor Covering with BackingF1861-08Resilient Wall BaseC.Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):RR-T-650ETreads, Metallic and Non-Metallic, NonskidPART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 GENERALUse only products by the same manufacturer and from the same production run.2.2 RESILIENT BASEA.ASTM F1861, 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick, 100 mm (4 inches) high, Thermoplastics, Group 2-layered. Style B-cove.B.Where carpet occurs, use Style A-straight.C.Use only one type of base throughout.2.3 LEVELING COMPOUND (For Concrete Floors)A.Provide products with latex or polyvinyl acetate resins in the mix.2.4 ADHESIVESA.Use products recommended by the material manufacturer for the conditions of use.B.Use low-VOC adhesive during installation. Water based adhesive with low VOC is preferred over solvent based adhesive.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 PROJECT CONDITIONSA.Maintain temperature of materials above 21o C (70 F), for 48 hours before installation.B.Maintain temperature of rooms where work occurs, between 21o C and 27o C (70oF and 80oF) for at least 48 hours, before, during, and after installation.C.Do not install materials until building is permanently enclosed and wet construction is complete, dry, and cured.3.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTSA.The respective manufacturer's instructions for application and installation will be considered for use when approved by the COTR.B.Submit proposed installation deviation from this specification to the COTR indicating the differences in the method of installation.C.The COTR reserves the right to have test portions of material installation removed to check for non-uniform adhesion and spotty adhesive coverage.3.3 PREPARATIONA.Examine surfaces on which material is to be installed.B.Fill cracks, pits, and dents with leveling compound.C.Level to 3 mm (1/8 inch) maximum variations.D.Do not use adhesive for leveling or filling.E.Grind, sand, or cut away protrusions; grind high spots.F.Clean substrate area of oil, grease, dust, paint, and deleterious substances.G.Substrate area dry and cured. Perform manufacturer’s recommended bond and moisture test.H.Preparation of existing installation:1.Remove existing base and stair treads including adhesive.2.Do not use solvents to remove adhesives.3.Prepare substrate as specified.3.4 BASE INSTALLATIONA.Location:1.Unless otherwise specified or shown, where base is scheduled, install base over toe space of base of casework, lockers, laboratory, pharmacy furniture island cabinets and where other equipment occurs.2.Extend base scheduled for room into adjacent closet, alcoves, and around columns.B.Application:1.Apply adhesive uniformly with no bare spots.2.Set base with joints aligned and butted to touch for entire height.3.Before starting installation, layout base material to provide the minimum number of joints with no strip less than 600 mm (24 inches) length.a.Short pieces to save material will not be permitted.b.Locate joints as remote from corners as the material lengths or the wall configuration will permit.C.Form corners and end stops as follows:1.Score back of outside corner.2.Score face of inside corner and notch cove.D.Roll base for complete adhesion.3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA.Clean all exposed surfaces of base and adjoining areas of adhesive spatter before it sets.B.Keep traffic off resilient material for at least 72 hours after installation.C.Clean and polish materials in the following order:1.After two weeks, scrub resilient base with a minimum amount of water and a mild detergent. Leave surfaces clean and free of detergent residue. Polish resilient base to a gloss finish.D.When construction traffic is anticipated, cover tread materials with reinforced kraft paper and plywood or hardboard properly secured and maintained until removal is directed by the COTR.E.Where protective materials are removed and immediately prior to acceptance, replace damaged materials and re-clean resilient materials. Damaged materials are defined as having cuts, gouges, scrapes or tears and not fully adhered.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 09 65 19RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONThis section specifies the installation of solid vinyl tile flooring, vinyl composition tile flooring, rubber tile flooring, and accessories.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Color and pattern and location in room finish schedule: Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.B.Resilient Base: Section 09 65 13, RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:1.Description of each product.2.Resilient material manufacturers recommendations for adhesives, underlayment, primers and polish.3.Application and installation instructions.C.Samples:1.Tile: 300 mm by 300 mm (12 inches by 12 inches) for each type, pattern and color.2.Edge Strips: 150 mm (6 inches) long, each type.3.Feature Strips: 150 mm (6 inches) long.D.Shop Drawings:1.Layout of patterns shown on the drawings and in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.2.Edge strip locations showing types and detail cross sections.E.Test Reports:1.Abrasion resistance: Depth of wear for each tile type and color and volume loss of tile, certified by independent laboratory.2.Tested per ASTM F510.1.4 DELIVERYA.Deliver materials to the site in original sealed packages or containers, clearly marked with the manufacturer's name or brand, type and color, production run number and date of manufacture.B.Materials from containers which have been distorted, damaged or opened prior to installation will be rejected.1.5 STORAGEA.Store materials in weathertight and dry storage facility.B.Protect from damage from handling, water, and temperature.1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):D4078-02 (2008)Water Emulsion Floor FinishE648-10Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Energy SourceE662-09Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid MaterialsE1155-96 (R2008)Determining Floor Flatness and Floor Levelness NumbersF510-93 (R 2008)Resistance to Abrasion of Resilient Floor Coverings Using an Abrader with a Grit Feed MethodF710-08Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient FlooringF1066-04 (R2010)Vinyl Composition Floor TileF1344-10Rubber Floor TileF1700-04 (R2010)Solid Vinyl Floor TileC.Resilient Floor Covering Institute (RFCI):IP #2Installation Practice for Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT)Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):SS-T-312Tile Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl and Vinyl Composition PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 GENERALA.Furnish product type, materials of the same production run and meeting following criteria.B.Use adhesives, underlayment, primers and polish recommended by the floor resilient material manufacturer.C.Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more, Class I, per ASTM E 648.D.Smoke density: Less than 450 per ASTM E662.2.4 RUBBER TILEA.ASTM F1344, Class 1, homogenous rubber tile, B, through mottled, 300 mm (12 inches) square, 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick.B.Color and pattern uniformly distributed throughout tile.C.Molded pattern wearing surface base thickness 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick.D.Where rubber tile is used provide tiles with a minimum of 90% post consumer rubber.2.5 ply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials Green Seal (GS-36) for commercial adhesive.B.Use low-VOC adhesive during installation. Water based is preferred over solvent based adhesives.2.6 PRIMER (FOR CONCRETE SUBFLOORS)As recommended by the adhesive and tile manufacturer.2.7 LEVELING COMPOUND (For Concrete Floors)A.Provide cementitious products with latex or polyvinyl acetate resins in the mix.B.Determine the type of underlayment selected for use by the condition to be corrected.2.8 POLISH AND CLEANERSA.Cleaners RFCI CL-1.B.Polish: ASTM D4078.2.9 EDGE STRIPSA.28 mm (1-1/8 inch) wide unless shown otherwise.B.Bevel from maximum thickness to minimum thickness for flush joint unless shown otherwise.C.Extruded aluminum, mill finish, mechanically cleaned:1.Drill and counter sink edge strip for flat head screws.2.Space holes near ends and approximately 225 mm (9 inches) on center between.D.Resilient Edge Strip or Reducer Strip: Fed. Specs. SS-T-312, Solid vinyl.2.10 SCREWSStainless steel flat head screw.2.11 FEATURE STRIPSA.Use same material as floor tile.B.Sizes and shapes as shown.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 PROJECT CONDITIONSA.Maintain temperature of materials a minimum of 22 C (70 F,) for 48 hours before installation.B.Maintain temperature of rooms where work occurs between 21 C and 27 C (70 F and 80 F), for at least 48 hours, before, during and after installation.C.Do not install flooring until building is permanently enclosed and wet construction in or near areas to receive tile materials is complete, dry and cured.3.2 SUBFLOOR PREPARATIONA.Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F710. At existing slabs, determine levelness by F-number method in accordance with ASTM E1155. Overall value shall not exceed as follows:FF30/FL20B.Correct conditions which will impair proper installation.C.Fill cracks, joints and other irregularities in concrete with leveling compound:1.Do not use adhesive for filling or leveling purposes.2.Do not use leveling compound to correct imperfections which can be corrected by spot grinding.3.Trowel to smooth surface free of trowel marks, pits, dents, protrusions, cracks or joints.D.Clean floor of oil, paint, dust, and deleterious substances: Leave floor dry and cured free of residue from existing curing or cleaning agents.E.Concrete Subfloor Testing:Determine Adhesion and dryness of the floor by bond and moisture tests as recommended by RFCI manual MRP.F.Perform additional subfloor preparation to obtain satisfactory adherence of flooring if subfloor test patches allows easy removal of tile.G.Prime the concrete subfloor if the primer will seal slab conditions that would inhibit bonding, or if priming is recommended by the tile or adhesive manufacturers.H.Preparation of existing installation shall include the removal of existing resilient floor and existing adhesive. Do not use solvents to remove adhesives. 3.3 INSTALLATIONA.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for application and installation unless specified otherwise.B.Mix tile from at least two containers. An apparent line either of shades or pattern variance will not be accepted.C.Tile Layout:1.If layout is not shown on drawings, lay tile symmetrically about center of room or space with joints aligned.2.No tile shall be less than 150 mm (6 inches) and of equal width at walls.3.Place tile pattern in the same direction; do not alternate tiles.D.Trim tiles to touch for the length of intersections at pipes and vertical projections, seal joints at pipes with waterproof cement.E.Application:1.Apply adhesive uniformly with no bare spots.a.Conform to RFC1-TM-6 for joint tightness and for corner intersection unless layout pattern shows random corner intersection.b.More than 5 percent of the joints not touching will not be accepted.2.Roll tile floor with a minimum 45 kg (100 pound) roller. No exceptions.3.The COTR may have test tiles removed to check for non-uniform adhesion, spotty adhesive coverage, and ease of removal. Install new tile for broken removed tile.F.Installation of Edge Strips:1.Locate edge strips under center line of doors unless otherwise shown.2.Set resilient edge strips in adhesive. Anchor metal edge strips with anchors and screws specified.3.Where tile edge is exposed, butt edge strip to touch along tile edge.4.Where thin set ceramic tile abuts resilient tile, set edge strip against floor file and against the ceramic tile edge.3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA.Clean adhesive marks on exposed surfaces during the application of resilient materials before the adhesive sets. Exposed adhesive is not acceptable.B.Keep traffic off resilient material for a minimum 72 hours after installation.C.Clean and polish materials in the following order:1.For the first two weeks sweep and damp mopped only.2.After two weeks, scrub resilient materials with a minimum amount of water and a mild detergent. Leave surface clean and free of detergent residue.3.Apply polish to the floors in accordance with the polish manufacturer's instructions.D.When construction traffic occurs over tile, cover resilient materials with reinforced kraft paper properly secured and maintained until removal is directed by COTR. At entrances and where wheeled vehicles or carts are used, cover tile with plywood, hardboard, or particle board over paper, secured and maintained until removal is directed by COTR.E.When protective materials are removed and immediately prior to acceptance, replace any damage tile, re-clean resilient materials, lightly re-apply polish and buff floors.3.6 LOCATIONA.Unless otherwise specified or shown, install tile flooring, on floor under areas where casework, laboratory and pharmacy furniture and other equipment occurs, except where mounted in wall recesses.B.Extend tile flooring for room into adjacent closets and alcoves.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 09 68 00CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DescriptionSection specifies carpet, edge strips, adhesives, and other items required for complete installation.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Color and texture of carpet and edge strip: Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.B.Resilient wall base: Section 09 65 13, RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES.1.3 Quality assuranceA.Carpet installed by mechanics certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board.B.Certify and label the carpet that it has been tested and meets criteria of CRI IAQ Carpet Testing Program for indoor air quality.1.4 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Product Data:1.Manufacturer’s catalog data and printed documentation stating physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading and flame resistance characteristics for each type of carpet material and installation accessory.2.Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions for the carpet, including preparation of installation substrate, seaming techniques and recommended adhesives and tapes.3.Manufacturer’s certificate verifying carpet containing recycled materials include percentage of recycled materials as specified.C.Samples:1.Carpet: "Production Quality" samples 300 x 300 mm (12 x 12 inches) of carpets, showing quality, pattern and color specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.2.Floor Edge Strip (Molding): 150 mm (6 inches) long of each color and type specified.3.Base Edge Strip (Molding): 150 mm (6 inches) long of each color specified.D.Shop Drawings: Installers layout plan showing seams and cuts for sheet carpet and carpet module.E.Maintenance Data: Carpet manufacturer’s maintenance instructions describing recommended type of cleaning equipment and material, spotting and cleaning methods and cleaning cycles.1.5 delivery and storageA.Deliver carpet in manufacturer’s original wrappings and packages clearly labeled with manufacturer’s name, brand, name, size, dye lot number and related information.B.Deliver adhesives in containers clearly labeled with manufacturer’s name, brand name, number, installation instructions, safety instructions and flash points.C.Store in a clean, dry, well ventilated area, protected from damage and soiling. Maintain storage space at a temperature above 16 degrees C (60 degrees F) for 2 days prior to installation.1.6 environmental requirementsAreas in which carpeting is to be installed shall be maintained at a temperature above 16 degrees C (60 degrees F) for 2 days before installation, during installation and for 2 days after installation. A minimum temperature of 13 degrees C (55 degrees F) shall be maintained thereafter for the duration of the contract. Traffic or movement of furniture or equipment in carpeted area shall not be permitted for 24 hours after installation. Other work which would damage the carpet shall be completed prior to installation of carpet.1.7 warrantyCarpet and installation subject to terms of "Warranty of Construction" FAR clause 52.246-21, except that warranty period is extended to two years.1.8 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publication listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. Publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):ANSI/NSF 140-10Sustainable Carpet Assessment StandardC.American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC):AATCC 16-04Colorfastness to LightAATCC 129-10Colorfastness to Ozone in the Atmosphere under High HumiditiesAATCC 134-11Electric Static Propensity of CarpetsAATCC 165-08Colorfastness to Crocking: Textile Floor Conerings-AATCC Crockmeter MethodD.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):ASTM D1335-05Tuft Bind of Pile Yarn Floor CoveringsASTM D3278-96 (R2004)Flash Point of Liquids by Small Scale Closed-Cup ApparatusASTM D5116-10Determinations of Organic Emissions from Indoor Materials/ProductsASTM D5252-05Operation of the Hexapod Tumble Drum TesterASTM D5417-05Operation of the Vettermann Drum TesterASTM E648-10Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy SourceE.The Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI):CRI 104-11Installation of Commercial CarpetPART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 CARPETA.Physical Characteristics:1.Carpet free of visual blemishes, streaks, poorly dyed areas, fuzzing of pile yarn, spots or stains and other physical and manufacturing defects.2.Manufacturers standard construction commercial carpet:a.Modular Tile: 660 mm (24 inches) square tile.3.Provide static control to permanently control static build upto less than 2.0 kV when tested at 20 percent relative humidity and 21 degrees C (70 degrees F) in accordance with AATCC 134.4.Pile Height: Maximum 3.25 mm (0.10 inch).5.Pile Fiber: Nylon with recycled content 25 percent minimum branded (federally registered trademark).6.Pile Type: Level Loop.7.Backing materials: Manufacturer’s unitary backing designed for glue-down installation using recovered materials.8.Appearance Retention Rating (ARR): Carpet shall be tested and have the minimum 3.5-4.0 Severe ARR when tested in accordance with either the ASTM D 5252 (Hexapod) or ASTM D 5417 (Vettermann) test methods using the number of cycles for short and long term tests as specified.9.Tuft Bind: Minimum force of 40 N (10 lb) required to pull a tuft or loop free from carpet backing. Test per ASTM D1335.10.Colorfastness to Crocking: Dry and wet crocking and water bleed, comply with AATCC 165 Color Transference Chart for colors, minimum class 4 rating.11.Colorfastness to Ozone: Comply with AATCC 129, minimum rating of 4 on the AATCC color transfer chart.12.Delamination Strength: Minimum of 440 N/m (2.5 lb/inch) between secondary backing.13.Flammability and Critical Radiant Flux Requirements:a.Test Carpet in accordance with ASTM E 648.b.Class I: Not less than 0.45 watts per square centimeter.c.Class II: Not less than 0.22 watts per square centimeter.d. Carpet in corridors, exits and Medical Facilities: Class I.14.Density: Average Pile Yarn Density (APYD):a.Corridors, lobbies, entrances, common areas or multipurpose rooms, open offices, waiting areas and dining areas: Minimum APYD 6000.b.Other areas: Minimum APYD 4000.15.VOC Limits: Use carpet and carpet adhesive that comply with the following limits for VOC content when tested according to ASTM D 5116:a.Carpet, Total VOCs: 0.5 mg/sq.m x hr.b.Carpet, 4-PC (4-Phenylcyclohexene): 0.05 mg/sq.m x hr.c.Carpet, Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq.m x hr.d.Carpet, Styrene: 0.4 mg/sq.m x hr. e.Adhesive, Total VOCs: 10.00 mg/sq.m x hr.f.Adhesive, Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq.m x hr.g. Adhesive, 2-Ethyl-1-Hexanol: 3.00 mg/sq.m x hr.B.Shall meet platinum level of ANSI/NSF 140.C.Color, Texture, and Pattern: As specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.2.2 ADHESIVE AND CONCRETE PRIMERA.Waterproof, resistant to cleaning solutions, steam and water, nonflammable, complies with air-quality standards as specified. Adhesives flashpoint minimum 60 degrees C (140 degrees F), complies with ASTM D 3278.B.Seam Adhesives: Waterproof, non-flammable and non-staining.2.3 seaming tapeA.Permanently resistant to carpet cleaning solutions, steam, and water.B.Recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2.4 EDGE STRIPS (MOLDING)A.Metal:1.Hammered surface aluminum, pinless, clamp down type designed for the carpet being installed.2.Floor flange not less than 38 mm (1-/2 inches) wide, face not less than 16 mm (5/8 inch) wide.3.Finish: Clear anodic coating unless specified otherwise in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.B.Vinyl Edge Strip:1.Beveled floor flange minimum 50 mm (2 inches) wide.2.Beveled surface to finish flush with carpet for tight joint and other side to floor finish.3.Color as specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.Carpet Base Top Edge Strip:1.Vinyl "J" strip wall flange minimum of 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) wide with cap beveled from wall to finish flush with carpet being installed.2.Color as specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.2.5 leveling compound (for concrete floors)A.Provide Portland cement bases polymer modifier with latex or polyvinyl acetate resin manufactured specifically for resurfacing and leveling concrete floors. Products containing gypsum are not acceptable.B.Determine the type of underlayment selected for use by condition to be corrected.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 SURFACE PREPARATIONA.Examine surfaces on which carpeting is to be installed.B.Clean floor of oil, waxy films, paint, dust and deleterious substances that prevent adhesion, leave floor dry and cured, free of residue from curing or cleaning agents.C.Correct conditions which will impair proper installation, including trowel marks, pits, dents, protrusions, cracks or joints.D.Fill cracks, joints depressions, and other irregularities in concrete with leveling compound.1.Do not use adhesive for filling or leveling purposes.2.Do not use leveling compound to correct imperfections which can be corrected by spot grinding.3.Trowel to smooth surface free of trowel marks, pits, dents, protrusions, cracks or joint lines.E.Test new concrete subfloor prior to adhesive application for moisture and surface alkalinity per CRI 104 Section 6.3.1 or per ASTM E1907.3.2 CARPET installtionA.Do not install carpet until work of other trades including painting is complete and dry.B.Install in accordance with CRI 104 direct glue down installation.1.Relax carpet in accordance with Section 6.4.ply with indoor air quality recommendations noted in Section 6.5.3.Maintain temperature in accordance with Section 15.3.C.Secure carpet to subfloor of spaces with adhesive applied as recommended by carpet manufacturer. D.Follow carpet manufacturer's recommendations for matching pattern and texture directions.E.Cut openings in carpet where required for installing equipment, pipes, outlets, and penetrations.1.Bind or seal cut edge of sheet carpet and replace flanges or plates.2.Use additional adhesive to secure carpets around pipes and other vertical projections.F.Carpet Modules:1.Install per CRI 104, Section 13, Adhesive Application.2.Lay carpet modules with pile in same direction unless specified other wise in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.3.Install carpet modules so that cleaning methods and solutions do not cause dislocation of modules.4.Lay carpet modules uniformly to provide tight flush joints free from movement when subject to traffic.3.3 EDGE STRIPS installationA.Install edge strips over exposed carpet edges adjacent to uncarpeted finish flooring.B.Anchor metal strips to floor with suitable fasteners. Apply adhesive to edge strips, insert carpet into lip and press it down over carpet.C.Anchor vinyl edge strip to floor with adhesive apply adhesive to edge strip and insert carpet into lip and press lip down over carpet.3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANINGA.Remove waste, fasteners and other cuttings from carpet floors.B.Vacuum carpet and provide suitable protection. Do not use polyethylene film.C.Do not permit traffic on carpeted surfaces for at least 48 hours after installation. Protect the carpet in accordance with CRI 104.D.Do not move furniture or equipment on unprotected carpeted surfaces. E.Just before final acceptance of work, remove protection and vacuum carpet clean. - - - E N D - - -SECTION 09 91 00PAINTING PART 1-GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.Section specifies field painting.B.Section specifies prime coats which may be applied in shop under other sections.C.Painting includes shellacs, stains, varnishes, coatings specified, and striping or markers and identity markings.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Shop prime painting of steel and ferrous metals: Division 05 - METALS, Division 08 - OPENINGS, Division 10 - SPECIALTIES, Division 11 - EQUIPMENT, Division 12 - FURNISHINGS, Division 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION, Division 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT, Division 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION, Division 22 - PLUMBING, Division 23 – HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING, Division 26 - ELECTRICAL, Division 27 - COMMUNICATIONS, and Division 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY sections.B.Contractor option: Prefinished flush doors with transparent finishes: Section 08 14 00, INTERIOR WOOD DOORS.C.Type of Finish, Color, and Gloss Level of Finish Coat: Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:Before work is started, or sample panels are prepared, submit manufacturer's literature, the current Master Painters Institute (MPI) "Approved Product List" indicating brand label, product name and product code as of the date of contract award, will be used to determine compliance with the submittal requirements of this specification. The Contractor may choose to use subsequent MPI "Approved Product List", however, only one list may be used for the entire contract and each coating system is to be from a single manufacturer. All coats on a particular substrate must be from a single manufacturer. No variation from the MPI "Approved Product List" where applicable is acceptable. C.Sample Panels:1.After painters' materials have been approved and before work is started submit sample panels showing each type of finish and color specified.2.Panels to show color: Composition board, 100 by 250 by 3 mm (4 inch by 10 inch by 1/8 inch).3.Panel to show transparent finishes: Wood of same species and grain pattern as wood approved for use, 100 by 250 by 3 mm (4 inch by 10 inch face by 1/4 inch) thick minimum, and where both flat and edge grain will be exposed, 250 mm (10 inches) long by sufficient size, 50 by 50 mm (2 by 2 inch) minimum or actual wood member to show complete finish. 4.Attach labels to panel stating the following:a.Federal Specification Number or manufacturers name and product number of paints used.b.Specification code number specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.c.Product type and color.d.Name of project.5.Strips showing not less than 50 mm (2 inch) wide strips of undercoats and 100 mm (4 inch) wide strip of finish coat.D.Sample of identity markers if used.E.Manufacturers' Certificates indicating compliance with specified requirements:1.Manufacturer's paint substituted for Federal Specification paints meets or exceeds performance of paint specified.2.High temperature aluminum paint.3.Epoxy coating.4.Intumescent clear coating or fire retardant paint.5.Plastic floor coating.1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGEA.Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's sealed container marked to show following:1.Name of manufacturer.2.Product type.3.Batch number.4.Instructions for use.5.Safety precautions.B.In addition to manufacturer's label, provide a label legibly printed as following:1.Federal Specification Number, where applicable, and name of material.2.Surface upon which material is to be applied.3.If paint or other coating, state coat types; prime, body or finish.C.Maintain space for storage, and handling of painting materials and equipment in a neat and orderly condition to prevent spontaneous combustion from occurring or igniting adjacent items.D.Store materials at site at least 24 hours before using, at a temperature between 18 and 30 degrees C (65 and 85 degrees F).1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.B.American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH):ACGIH TLV-BKLT-2012Threshold Limit Values (TLV) for Chemical Substances and Physical Agents and Biological Exposure Indices (BEIs)ACGIH TLV-DOC-2012Documentation of Threshold Limit Values and Biological Exposure Indices, (Seventh Edition)C.American National Standards Institute (ANSI):A13.1-07Scheme for the Identification of Piping SystemsD.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):D260-86..........Boiled Linseed mercial Item Description (CID):A-A-1555Water Paint, Powder (Cementitious, White and Colors) (WPC) (cancelled)A-A-3120Paint, For Swimming Pools (RF) (cancelled)F.Federal Specifications (Fed Spec):TT-P-1411APaint, Copolymer-Resin, Cementitious (For Waterproofing Concrete and Masonry Walls) (CEP)G.Master Painters Institute (MPI):No. 1-12Aluminum Paint (AP)No. 4-12Interior/ Exterior Latex Block FillerNo. 5-12Exterior Alkyd Wood PrimerNo. 7-12Exterior Oil Wood PrimerNo. 8-12Exterior Alkyd, Flat MPI Gloss Level 1 (EO)No. 9-12Exterior Alkyd Enamel MPI Gloss Level 6 (EO)No. 10-12Exterior Latex, Flat (AE)No. 11-12Exterior Latex, Semi-Gloss (AE)No. 18-12Organic Zinc Rich PrimerNo. 22-12Aluminum Paint, High Heat (up to 590% - 1100F) (HR)No. 26-12Cementitious Galvanized Metal PrimerNo. 27-12Exterior / Interior Alkyd Floor Enamel, Gloss (FE)No. 31-12Polyurethane, Moisture Cured, Clear Gloss (PV)No. 36-12Knot SealerNo. 43-12Interior Satin Latex, MPI Gloss Level 4No. 44-12Interior Low Sheen Latex, MPI Gloss Level 2No. 45-12Interior Primer SealerNo. 46-12Interior Enamel UndercoatNo. 47-12Interior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5 (AK)No. 48-12Interior Alkyd, Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 6 (AK)No. 49-12Interior Alkyd, Flat, MPI Gloss Level 1 (AK)No. 50-12Interior Latex Primer SealerNo. 51-12Interior Alkyd, Eggshell, MPI Gloss Level 3No. 52-12Interior Latex, MPI Gloss Level 3 (LE)No. 53-12Interior Latex, Flat, MPI Gloss Level 1 (LE)No. 54-12Interior Latex, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5 (LE)No. 59-12Interior/Exterior Alkyd Porch & Floor Enamel, Low Gloss (FE)No. 60-12Interior/Exterior Latex Porch & Floor Paint, Low GlossNo. 66-12Interior Alkyd Fire Retardant, Clear Top-Coat (ULC Approved) (FC)No. 67-12Interior Latex Fire Retardant, Top-Coat (ULC Approved) (FR)No. 68-12Interior/ Exterior Latex Porch & Floor Paint, GlossNo. 71-12Polyurethane, Moisture Cured, Clear, Flat (PV)No. 74-12Interior Alkyd Varnish, Semi-GlossNo. 77-12Epoxy Cold Cured, Gloss (EC)No. 79-12Marine Alkyd Metal PrimerNo. 90-12Interior Wood Stain, Semi-Transparent (WS)No. 91-12Wood Filler PasteNo. 94-12Exterior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss (EO)No. 95-12Fast Drying Metal PrimerNo. 98-12High Build Epoxy CoatingNo. 101-12Epoxy Anti-Corrosive Metal PrimerNo. 108-12High Build Epoxy Coating, Low Gloss (EC)No. 114-12Interior Latex, Gloss (LE) and (LG)No. 119-12Exterior Latex, High Gloss (acrylic) (AE)No. 135-12Non-Cementitious Galvanized PrimerNo. 138-12Interior High Performance Latex, MPI Gloss Level 2 (LF)No. 139-12Interior High Performance Latex, MPI Gloss Level 3 (LL)No. 140-12Interior High Performance Latex, MPI Gloss Level 4No. 141-12Interior High Performance Latex (SG) MPI Gloss Level 5H.Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC):SSPC SP 1-04 (R2004)Solvent CleaningSSPC SP 2-04 (R2004)Hand Tool CleaningSSPC SP 3-04 (R2004)Power Tool CleaningPART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALSA.Wood Sealer: MPI 31 (gloss) or MPI 71 (flat) thinned with thinner recommended by manufacturer at rate of about one part of thinner to four parts of varnish.B.Plastic Tape:1.Pigmented vinyl plastic film in colors as specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES or specified.2.Pressure sensitive adhesive back.3.Widths as shown.C.Identity markers options:1.Pressure sensitive vinyl markers.2.Snap-on coil plastic markers.D.Aluminum Paint (AP): MPI 1.E.Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI 4.F.High Heat Resistant Coating (HR): MPI 22.G.Knot Sealer: MPI 36.H.Interior Satin Latex: MPI 43.I.Interior Low Sheen Latex: MPI 44.J.Interior Primer Sealer: MPI 45.K.Interior Enamel Undercoat: MPI 47.L.Interior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss (AK): MPI 47.M.Interior Alkyd, Gloss (AK): MPI 49.N.Interior Latex Primer Sealer: MPI 50.O.Interior Alkyd, Eggshell: MPI 51P.Interior Latex, MPI Gloss Level 3 (LE): MPI 52. Q.Interior Latex, Flat, MPI Gloss Level 1 (LE): MPI 53.AA.Interior Latex, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5 (LE): MPI 54.BB.Interior Alkyd Fire Retardant, Clear Top-Coat (ULC Approved) (FC): MPI .Interior Latex Fire Retardant, Top-Coat (ULC Approved) (FR): MPI 67.DD.Epoxy Cold Cured, Gloss (EC): MPI 77.EE.Interior Wood Stain, Semi-Transparent (WS): MPI 90.FF.Wood Filler Paste: MPI 91.GG.Fast Drying Metal Primer: MPI 95.HH.High Build Epoxy Coating: MPI 98.II.Epoxy Anti-Corrosive Metal Primer: MPI 101.JJ.Interior latex, Gloss (LE) and (LG): MPI 114.KK.Waterborne Galvanized Primer: MPI 134.LL.Non-Cementitious Galvanized Primer: MPI 135.MM.Interior High Performance Latex, MPI Gloss Level 2(LF): MPI 138.NN.Interior High Performance Latex, MPI Gloss Level 3 (LL): MPI 139.OO.Interior High Performance Latex, MPI Gloss Level 4: MPI 140.PP.Interior High Performance Latex (SG), MPI Gloss Level 5: MPI 141.2.2 PAINT PROPERTIESA.Use ready-mixed (including colors), except two component epoxies, polyurethanes, polyesters, paints having metallic powders packaged separately and paints requiring specified additives.B.Where no requirements are given in the referenced specifications for primers, use primers with pigment and vehicle, compatible with substrate and finish coats specified.2.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS/quality assuranceA.Paint materials shall conform to the restrictions of the local Environmental and Toxic Control jurisdiction.1.Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC): VOC content of paint materials shall not exceed 10g/l for interior latex paints/primers and 50g/l for exterior latex paints and primers.2.Lead-Base Paint:ply with Section 410 of the Lead-Based Paint Poisoning Prevention Act, as amended, and with implementing regulations promulgated by Secretary of Housing and Urban Development.b.Regulations concerning prohibition against use of lead-based paint in federal and federally assisted construction, or rehabilitation of residential structures are set forth in Subpart F, Title 24, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Housing and Urban Development.3.Asbestos: Materials shall not contain asbestos.4.Chromate, Cadmium, Mercury, and Silica: Materials shall not contain zinc-chromate, strontium-chromate, Cadmium, mercury or mercury compounds or free crystalline silica.5.Human Carcinogens: Materials shall not contain any of the ACGIH-BKLT and ACGHI-DOC confirmed or suspected human carcinogens.6.Use high performance acrylic paints in place of alkyd paints, where possible.7.VOC content for solvent-based paints shall not exceed 250g/l and shall not be formulated with more than one percent aromatic hydro carbons by weight.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 JOB CONDITIONSA.Safety: Observe required safety regulations and manufacturer's warning and instructions for storage, handling and application of painting materials.1.Take necessary precautions to protect personnel and property from hazards due to falls, injuries, toxic fumes, fire, explosion, or other harm.2.Deposit soiled cleaning rags and waste materials in metal containers approved for that purpose. Dispose of such items off the site at end of each days work.B.Atmospheric and Surface Conditions:1.Do not apply coating when air or substrate conditions are:a.Less than 3 degrees C (5 degrees F) above dew point.b.Below 10 degrees C (50 degrees F) or over 35 degrees C (95 degrees F), unless specifically pre-approved by the Contracting Officer and the product manufacturer. Under no circumstances shall application conditions exceed manufacturer recommendations.2.Maintain interior temperatures until paint dries hard.3.Do no exterior painting when it is windy and dusty.4.Do not paint in direct sunlight or on surfaces that the sun will soon warm.5.Apply only on clean, dry and frost free surfaces except as follows:a.Apply water thinned acrylic and cementitious paints to damp (not wet) surfaces where allowed by manufacturer's printed instructions.b.Dampened with a fine mist of water on hot dry days concrete and masonry surfaces to which water thinned acrylic and cementitious paints are applied to prevent excessive suction and to cool surface.6.Varnishing:a.Apply in clean areas and in still air.b.Before varnishing vacuum and dust area.c.Immediately before varnishing wipe down surfaces with a tack rag.3.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONA.Method of surface preparation is optional, provided results of finish painting produce solid even color and texture specified with no overlays.B.General:1.Remove prefinished items not to be painted such as lighting fixtures, escutcheon plates, hardware, trim, and similar items for reinstallation after paint is dried.2.Remove items for reinstallation and complete painting of such items and adjacent areas when item or adjacent surface is not accessible or finish is different.3.See other sections of specifications for specified surface conditions and prime coat.4.Clean surfaces for painting with materials and methods compatible with substrate and specified finish. Remove any residue remaining from cleaning agents used. Do not use solvents, acid, or steam on concrete and masonry.C.Wood:1.Sand to a smooth even surface and then dust off.2.Sand surfaces showing raised grain smooth between each coat.3.Wipe surface with a tack rag prior to applying finish.4.Surface painted with an opaque finish:a.Coat knots, sap and pitch streaks with MPI 36 (Knot Sealer) before applying paint.b.Apply two coats of MPI 36 (Knot Sealer) over large knots.5.After application of prime or first coat of stain, fill cracks, nail and screw holes, depressions and similar defects with wood filler paste. Sand the surface to make smooth and finish flush with adjacent surface. 6.Before applying finish coat, reapply wood filler paste if required, and sand surface to remove surface blemishes. Finish flush with adjacent surfaces.7.Fill open grained wood such as oak, walnut, ash and mahogany with MPI 91 (Wood Filler Paste), colored to match wood color.a.Thin filler in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for application.b.Remove excess filler, wipe as clean as possible, dry, and sand as specified. D.Ferrous Metals:1.Remove oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, flux and other detrimental foreign matter in accordance with SSPC-SP 1 (Solvent Cleaning).2.Remove loose mill scale, rust, and paint, by hand or power tool cleaning, as defined in SSPC-SP 2 (Hand Tool Cleaning) and SSPC-SP 3 (Power Tool Cleaning). Exception: where high temperature aluminum paint is used, prepare surface in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions.3.Fill dents, holes and similar voids and depressions in flat exposed surfaces of hollow steel doors and frames, access panels, roll-up steel doors and similar items specified to have semi-gloss or gloss finish with TT-F-322D (Filler, Two-Component Type, For Dents, Small Holes and Blow-Holes). Finish flush with adjacent surfaces.a.This includes flat head countersunk screws used for permanent anchors.b.Do not fill screws of item intended for removal such as glazing beads.4.Spot prime abraded and damaged areas in shop prime coat which expose bare metal with same type of paint used for prime coat. Feather edge of spot prime to produce smooth finish coat. 5.Spot prime abraded and damaged areas which expose bare metal of factory finished items with paint as recommended by manufacturer of item.E.Aluminum, Surfaces Specified Painted:1.Clean surfaces to remove grease, oil and other deterrents to paint adhesion in accordance with SSPC-SP 1 (Solvent Cleaning).2.Spot coat abraded and damaged areas of zinc-coating which expose base metal on hot-dip zinc-coated items with MPI 18 (Organic Zinc Rich Coating). Prime or spot prime with MPI 134 (Waterborne Galvanized Primer) or MPI 135 (Non- Cementitious Galvanized Primer) depending on finish coat compatibility.F.Gypsum Plaster and Gypsum Board:1.Remove efflorescence, loose and chalking plaster or finishing materials.2.Remove dust, dirt, and other deterrents to paint adhesion.3.Fill holes, cracks, and other depressions with CID-A-A-1272A [Plaster, Gypsum (Spackling Compound) finished flush with adjacent surface, with texture to match texture of adjacent surface. Patch holes over 25 mm (1-inch) in diameter as specified in Section for plaster or gypsum board.3.3 PAINT PREPARATIONA.Thoroughly mix painting materials to ensure uniformity of color, complete dispersion of pigment and uniform composition.B.Do not thin unless necessary for application and when finish paint is used for body and prime coats. Use materials and quantities for thinning as specified in manufacturer's printed instructions.C.Remove paint skins, then strain paint through commercial paint strainer to remove lumps and other particles.D.Mix two component and two part paint and those requiring additives in such a manner as to uniformly blend as specified in manufacturer's printed instructions unless specified otherwise.E.For tinting required to produce exact shades specified, use color pigment recommended by the paint manufacturer.3.4 APPLICATIONA.Start of surface preparation or painting will be construed as acceptance of the surface as satisfactory for the application of materials.B.Unless otherwise specified, apply paint in three coats; prime, body, and finish. When two coats applied to prime coat are the same, first coat applied over primer is body coat and second coat is finish coat.C.Apply each coat evenly and cover substrate completely.D.Allow not less than 48 hours between application of succeeding coats, except as allowed by manufacturer's printed instructions, and approved by COTR.E.Finish surfaces to show solid even color, free from runs, lumps, brushmarks, laps, holidays, or other defects.F.Apply by brush, roller or spray, except as otherwise specified.G.Do not spray paint in existing occupied spaces unless approved by COTR, except in spaces sealed from existing occupied spaces.1.Apply painting materials specifically required by manufacturer to be applied by spraying.2.In areas, where paint is applied by spray, mask or enclose with polyethylene, or similar air tight material with edges and seams continuously sealed including items specified in WORK NOT PAINTED, motors, controls, telephone, and electrical equipment, fronts of sterilizes and other recessed equipment and similar prefinished items.H.Do not paint in closed position operable items such as access doors and panels, window sashes, overhead doors, and similar items except overhead roll-up doors and shutters.3.5 PRIME PAINTINGA.After surface preparation prime surfaces before application of body and finish coats, except as otherwise specified.B.Spot prime and apply body coat to damaged and abraded painted surfaces before applying succeeding coats.C.Additional field applied prime coats over shop or factory applied prime coats are not required except for exterior exposed steel apply an additional prime coat.D.Prime rebates for stop and face glazing of wood, and for face glazing of steel.E.Wood and Wood Particleboard:1.Use same kind of primer specified for exposed face surface.a.Interior wood except for transparent finish: MPI 45 (Interior Primer Sealer) or MPI 46 (Interior Enamel Undercoat), thinned if recommended by manufacturer.b.Transparent finishes as specified under Transparent Finishes on Wood except Floors.2.Apply MPI 67 (Interior Latex Fire Retardant, Top-Coat (ULC Approved) (FR) to wood for fire retardant finish.F.Gypsum Board:1.Surfaces scheduled to have MPI 53 (Interior Latex, Flat), MPI Gloss Level 1 LE)) MPI 52 (Interior Latex, MPI Gloss Level 3 (LE)) MPI 54 (Interior Latex, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5 (LE)) MPI 114 (Interior Latex, Gloss (LE) and (LG)) finish: Use MPI 53 (Interior Latex, MPI Gloss Level 3 (LE)) MPI 52 (Interior Latex, MPI Gloss Level 3 (LE)) MPI 54 (Interior Latex, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5 (LE)) MPI 114 (Interior Latex, Gloss (LE) and (LG)) respectively.2.Primer: MPI 50(Interior Latex Primer Sealer) except use MPI 45 (Interior Primer Sealer) MPI 46 (Interior Enamel Undercoat) in bathrooms.3.Use MPI 101 (Cold Curing Epoxy Primer) for surfaces scheduled to receive MPI 77 (Epoxy Cold Cured, Gloss (EC)) MPI 98 (High Build Epoxy Coating) finish.3.6 INTERIOR FINISHESA.Apply following finish coats over prime coats in spaces or on surfaces specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.B.Metal Work:1.Apply to exposed surfaces.2.Omit body and finish coats on surfaces concealed after installation except electrical conduit containing conductors over 600 volts.3.Ferrous Metal, Galvanized Metal, and Other Metals Scheduled: a.Apply two coats of MPI 47 (Interior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss (AK)) unless specified otherwise.b.One coat of MPI 46 (Interior Enamel Undercoat) plus one coat of MPI 47 (Interior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss (AK)) on exposed interior surfaces of alkyd-amine enamel prime finished windows.C.Gypsum Board:1.One coat of MPI 45 (Interior Primer Sealer) plus one coat of MPI 139 (Interior High Performance Latex, MPI Gloss level 3 (LL)).D.Wood:1.Sanding:a.Use 220-grit sandpaper.b.Sand sealers and varnish between coats.c.Sand enough to scarify surface to assure good adhesion of subsequent coats, to level roughly applied sealer and varnish, and to knock off "whiskers" of any raised grain as well as dust particles.2.Sealers:a.Apply sealers specified except sealer may be omitted where pigmented, penetrating, or wiping stains containing resins are used.b.Allow manufacturer's recommended drying time before sanding, but not less than 24 hours or 36 hours in damp or muggy weather.c.Sand as specified.3.Paint Finish:a.One coat of MPI 45 (Interior Primer Sealer) plus one coat of MPI 47 (Interior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss (AK)) (SG).4.Transparent Finishes on Wood Except Floors.a.Natural Finish:1)One coat of sealer as written in 2.1 E.2)Two coats of MPI 71 (Polyurethane, Moisture Cured, Clear Flat (PV)//MPI 31 (Polyurethane, Moisture Cured, Clear Gloss (PV).b.Stain Finish:1)One coat of MPI 90 (Interior Wood Stain, Semi-Transparent (WS)).2)Use wood stain of type and color required to achieve finish specified. Do not use varnish type stains.3)One coat of sealer as written in 2.1 E.4)Two coats of MPI 71 (Polyurethane, Moisture Cured, Clear Flat (PV).c.Varnish Finish:1)One coat of sealer as written in 2.1 E.2)Two coats of MPI 71 (Polyurethane, Moisture Cured, Clear Flat (PV).d.MPI 66 (Interior Alkyd Fire Retardant, Clear Top-Coat(ULC Approved) (FC)) Intumescent Type, Fire Retardant Coating (FC) where scheduled: Two coats.E.Miscellaneous:1.Apply where specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.2.MPI 1 (Aluminum Paint): Two coats of aluminum paint.3.Gold Paint (GP): Two coats of gold paint.4.Existing acoustical units scheduled to be repainted except acoustical units with a vinyl finish:a.Clean units free of dust, dirt, grease, and other deterrents to paint adhesion.b.Mineral fiber units: One coat of MPI 53 (Interior Latex, Flat, MPI Gloss Level 1 (LE)).3.7 REFINISHING EXISTING PAINTED SURFACESA.Clean, patch and repair existing surfaces as specified under surface preparation.B.Remove and reinstall items as specified under surface preparation.C.Remove existing finishes or apply separation coats to prevent non compatible coatings from having contact.D.Patched or Replaced Areas in Surfaces and Components: Apply spot prime and body coats as specified for new work to repaired areas or replaced components.E.Except where scheduled for complete painting apply finish coat over plane surface to nearest break in plane, such as corner, reveal, or frame.F.In existing rooms and areas where alterations occur, clean existing stained and natural finished wood retouch abraded surfaces and then give entire surface one coat of MPI 31 (Polyurethane, Moisture Cured, Clear Gloss).G.Refinish areas as specified for new work to match adjoining work unless specified or scheduled otherwise.H.Coat knots and pitch streaks showing through old finish with MPI 36 (Knot Sealer) before refinishing.I.Sand or dull glossy surfaces prior to painting.J.Sand existing coatings to a feather edge so that transition between new and existing finish will not show in finished work.3.8 PAINT COLORA.Color and gloss of finish coats is specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES. B.For additional requirements regarding color see Articles, REFINISHING EXISTING PAINTED SURFACE and MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL FIELD PAINTING SCHEDULE.C.Coat Colors:1.Color of priming coat: Lighter than body coat.2.Color of body coat: Lighter than finish coat.3.Color prime and body coats to not show through the finish coat and to mask surface imperfections or contrasts.D.Painting, Caulking, Closures, and Fillers Adjacent to Casework:1.Paint to match color of casework where casework has a paint finish.2.Paint to match color of wall where casework is stainless steel, plastic laminate, or varnished wood.3.9 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK FIELD PAINTING SCHEDULEA.Field painting of mechanical and electrical consists of cleaning, touching-up abraded shop prime coats, and applying prime, body and finish coats to materials and equipment if not factory finished in space scheduled to be finished.B.In spaces not scheduled to be finish painted in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES paint as specified under paragraph H, colors.C.Paint various systems specified in Division 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS, Division 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION, Division 22 - PLUMBING, Division 23 – HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING, Division 26 - ELECTRICAL, Division 27 - COMMUNICATIONS, and Division 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY.D.Paint after tests have been completed.E.Omit prime coat from factory prime-coated items. F.Finish painting of mechanical and electrical equipment is not required when located in interstitial spaces, above suspended ceilings, in concealed areas such as pipe and electric closets, pipe basements, pipe tunnels, trenches, attics, roof spaces, shafts and furred spaces except on electrical conduit containing feeders 600 volts or more.G.Omit field painting of items specified in paragraph, Building and Structural WORK NOT PAINTED.H.Color:1.Paint items having no color specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES to match surrounding surfaces. 2.Paint colors as specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES except for following:a.White ....................Exterior unfinished surfaces of enameled plumbing fixtures. Insulation coverings on breeching and uptake inside boiler house, drums and drum-heads, oil heaters, condensate tanks and condensate piping. b.Gray: ......................Heating, ventilating, air conditioning and refrigeration equipment (except as required to match surrounding surfaces), and water and sewage treatment equipment and sewage ejection equipment.c.Aluminum Color: Ferrous metal on outside of boilers and in connection with boiler settings including supporting doors and door frames and fuel oil burning equipment, and steam generation system (bare piping, fittings, hangers, supports, valves, traps and miscellaneous iron work in contact with pipe).d.Federal Safety Red: Exposed fire protection piping hydrants, post indicators, electrical conducts containing fire alarm control wiring, and fire alarm equipment.e.Federal Safety Orange: .Entire lengths of electrical conduits containing feeders 600 volts or more.f.Color to match brickwork sheet metal covering on breeching outside of exterior wall of boiler house.I.Apply paint systems on properly prepared and primed surface as follows:1.Interior Locations:a.Apply two coats of MPI 47 (Interior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss (AK)) to following items:1)Metal under 94 degrees C (200 degrees F) of items such as bare piping, fittings, hangers and supports.2)Equipment and systems such as hinged covers and frames for control cabinets and boxes, cast-iron radiators, electric conduits and panel boards.3)Heating, ventilating, air conditioning, plumbing equipment, and machinery having shop prime coat and not factory finished.b.Ferrous metal exposed in hydrotherapy equipment room and chlorinator room of water and sewerage treatment plants: One coat of MPI 101 (Cold Curing Epoxy Primer) and one coat of MPI 77 (Epoxy Cold Cured, Gloss (EC).c.Paint electrical conduits containing cables rated 600 volts or more using two coats of MPI 9 (Exterior Alkyd Enamel (EO)) in the Federal Safety Orange color in exposed and concealed spaces full length of conduit.2.Other exposed locations:a.Metal surfaces, except aluminum, of cooling towers exposed to view, including connected pipes, rails, and ladders: Two coats of MPI 1 (Aluminum Paint (AP)).b.Cloth jackets of insulation of ducts and pipes in connection with plumbing, air conditioning, ventilating refrigeration and heating systems: One coat of MPI 50 (Interior Latex Primer Sealer) and one coat of MPI 10 (Exterior Latex, Flat (AE)).3.10 BUILDING AND STRUCTURAL WORK FIELD PAINTINGA.Painting and finishing of interior work except as specified under paragraph 3.11 B.1.Painting and finishing of new and existing work including colors and gloss of finish selected is specified in Finish Schedule, Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.2.Painting of disturbed, damaged and repaired or patched surfaces when entire space is not scheduled for complete repainting or refinishing.3.Painting of ferrous metal and galvanized metal.3.Identity painting and safety painting.B.Building and Structural Work not Painted:1.Prefinished items:a.Casework, doors, metal panels, wall covering, and similar items specified factory finished under other sections.b.Factory finished equipment.2.Finished surfaces:a.Hardware except ferrous metal.b.Anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plating, copper, and brass, except as otherwise specified.c.Signs, fixtures, and other similar items integrally finished.3.Concealed surfaces:a.Inside pneumatic tube station, interstitial spaces, above ceilings, except as otherwise specified.b.Inside walls or other spaces behind access doors or panels.c.Surfaces concealed behind permanently installed casework and equipment.4.Moving and operating parts:a.Shafts, chains, gears, mechanical and electrical operators, linkages, and sprinkler heads, and sensing devices.5.Labels:a.Code required label, such as Underwriters Laboratories Inc., Inchcape Testing Services, Inc., or Factory Mutual Research Corporation.b.Identification plates, instruction plates, performance rating, and nomenclature.6.Galvanized metal:a.Except where specifically specified to be painted.7.Gaskets. 8.Ceilings, walls, columns in interstitial spaces.3.11 IDENTITY PAINTING SCHEDULEA.Identify designated service in accordance with ANSI A13.1, unless specified otherwise, on exposed piping, piping above removable ceilings, piping in accessible pipe spaces, interstitial spaces, and piping behind access panels.1.Legend may be identified using 2.1 G options or by stencil applications.2.Apply legends adjacent to changes in direction, on branches, where pipes pass through walls or floors, adjacent to operating accessories such as valves, regulators, strainers and cleanouts a minimum of 12 000 mm (40 feet) apart on straight runs of piping. Identification next to plumbing fixtures is not required.3.Locate Legends clearly visible from operating position.4.Use arrow to indicate direction of flow.5.Identify pipe contents with sufficient additional details such as temperature, pressure, and contents to identify possible hazard. Insert working pressure shown on drawings where asterisk appears for High, Medium, and Low Pressure designations as follows:a.High Pressure - 414 kPa (60 psig) and above.b.Medium Pressure - 104 to 413 kPa (15 to 59 psig).c.Low Pressure - 103 kPa (14 psig) and below.6.Legend name in full or in abbreviated form as follows:PIPINGEXPOSED PIPINGBACKGROUNDLETTERSBBREVIATIONSBlow-off YellowBlackBlow-offBoiler FeedwaterYellowBlackBlr FeedA/C Condenser Water SupplyGreenWhiteA/C Cond Wtr SupA/C Condenser Water ReturnGreenWhiteA/C Cond Wtr RetChilled Water SupplyGreenWhiteCh. Wtr SupChilled Water ReturnGreenWhiteCh. Wtr RetShop Compressed AirYellowBlackShop AirAir-Instrument ControlsGreenWhiteAir-Inst ContDrain LineGreenWhiteDrainEmergency ShowerGreenWhiteEmg ShowerHigh Pressure SteamYellowBlackH.P. ______*High Pressure Condensate ReturnYellowBlackH.P. Ret ____*Medium Pressure Steam YellowBlackM. P. Stm ____*Medium Pressure Condensate ReturnYellowBlackM.P. Ret _____*Low Pressure Steam YellowBlackL.P. Stm _____*Low Pressure Condensate ReturnYellowBlackL.P. Ret _____*High Temperature Water SupplyYellowBlackH. Temp Wtr SupHigh Temperature Water ReturnYellowBlackH. Temp Wtr RetHot Water Heating SupplyYellowBlackH. W. Htg SupHot Water Heating ReturnYellowBlackH. W. Htg RetGravity Condensate ReturnYellowBlackGravity Cond RetPumped Condensate ReturnYellowBlackPumped Cond RetVacuum Condensate ReturnYellowBlackVac Cond RetFuel Oil - GradeGreenWhiteFuel Oil-Grade __*Boiler Water SamplingYellowBlackSampleChemical FeedYellowBlackChem FeedContinuous Blow-DownYellowBlackCont. B DPumped Condensate BlackPump Cond Pump Recirculating YellowBlackPump-Recirc.Vent LineYellowBlackVentAlkaliYellowBlackAlkBleachYellowBlackBleachDetergentYellowBlackDetLiquid SupplyYellowBlackLiq SupReuse WaterYellowBlackReuse WtrCold Water (Domestic)WhiteGreenWhiteC.W. DomHot Water (Domestic) SupplyWhiteYellowBlackH.W. Dom ReturnWhiteYellowBlackH.W. Dom Ret Tempered WaterWhiteYellowBlackTemp. WtrIce Water SupplyWhiteGreenWhiteIce Wtr ReturnWhiteGreenWhiteIce Wtr RetReagent Grade WaterGreenWhiteRGReverse OsmosisGreenWhiteROSanitary WasteGreenWhiteSan WasteSanitary VentGreenWhiteSan VentStorm DrainageGreenWhiteSt DrainPump DrainageGreenWhitePump DischChemical Resistant Pipe WasteYellowBlackAcid Waste VentYellowBlackAcid VentAtmospheric VentGreenWhiteATVSilver RecoveryGreenWhiteSilver RecOral EvacuationGreenWhiteOral EvacFuel GasYellowBlackGasFire Protection Water SprinklerRedWhiteAuto Spr StandpipeRedWhiteStand SprinklerRedWhiteDrainHot Water Supply Domestic/Solar WaterH.W. Sup Dom/SWHot Water Return Domestic/Solar WaterH.W. Ret Dom/SW7.Electrical Conduits containing feeders over 600 volts, paint legends using 50 mm (2 inch) high black numbers and letters, showing the voltage class rating. Provide legends where conduits pass through walls and floors and at maximum 6100 mm (20 foot) intervals in between. Use labels with yellow background with black border and words Danger High Voltage Class, 5000. 8.See Sections for methods of identification, legends, and abbreviations of the following:a.Conduits containing high voltage feeders over 600 volts: Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS / Section 27 05 33, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS / Section 28 05 33, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY.B.Fire and Smoke Partitions:1.Identify partitions above ceilings on both sides of partitions except within shafts in letters not less than 64 mm (2 1/2 inches) high.2.Stenciled message: "SMOKE BARRIER" or, "FIRE BARRIER" as applicable.3.Locate not more than 6100 mm (20 feet) on center on corridor sides of partitions, and with a least one message per room on room side of partition.4.Use semigloss paint of color that contrasts with color of substrate.3.12 PROTECTION CLEAN UP, AND TOUCH-UPA.Protect work from paint droppings and spattering by use of masking, drop cloths, removal of items or by other approved methods.B.Upon completion, clean paint from hardware, glass and other surfaces and items not required to be painted of paint drops or smears.C.Before final inspection, touch-up or refinished in a manner to produce solid even color and finish texture, free from defects in work which was damaged or discolored.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 10 21 13TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONThis section specifies metal toilet partitions.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Grab bars and toilet tissue holders: Section 10 28 00, TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Samples: Prime coat of paint on 150 mm (six-inch) square of metal panel with baked enamel finish coat over half of panel.C.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Specified items indicating all hardware and fittings, material, finish, and latching.D.Shop Drawings: Construction details at 1/2 scale, showing installation details, anchoring and leveling devices.E.Manufacturer's certificate, attesting that zinc-coatings conform to specified requirements.1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):FF-B-575CBolt, Hexagon and SquareC.Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):40 CFR 247Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines for Products Containing Recovered mercial Item Descriptions (CID):A-A-1925Shield, Expansion (Nail Anchors)A-A-60003Partitions, Toilet, CompletePART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 toilet partitions:A.Solid phenolic: water resistant; graffiti resistant; non-absorbent; contain a minimum 30 percent post consumer recycled plastic; Class C flame spread rating.B.Conform to Fed. CID A-A-60003, except as modified herein.C.Fabricate to dimensions shown or specified.D.Toilet Enclosures:1.Type 1, Style B A (Floor supported). 2.Reinforce panels shown to receive toilet tissue holders or grab bars.3.Upper pivots and lower hinges adjustable to hold doors open 30 degrees.4.Latching devices and hinges for handicap compartments shall comply with ADA requirements.5.Keeper:a.U-slot to engage bar of throw latch.bined with rubber bumper stop.6.Finish:a.Finish 3 (stainless steel) on panel of enclosure panels adjacent to urinals and on dividing partitions used in Spinal Cord Injury (SCI) Bowel Training Area.2.2 FASTENERSA.Partition Fasteners: CID A-A-60003.B.Use expansion bolts, CID A-A-60003, for anchoring to solid masonry or concrete.C.Use toggle bolts, CID A-A-60003, for anchoring to hollow masonry or stud framed walls.D.Use steel bolts FS-B-575, for anchoring pilasters to overhead steel supports.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA.General:1.Install in rigid manner, straight, plumb and with all horizontal lines level.2.Conceal evidence of drilling, cutting and fitting in finish work. 3.Use hex-bolts for through-bolting.4.Adjust hardware and leave in freely working order.5.Clean finished surfaces and leave free of imperfections.B.Panels and Pilasters:1.Support panels and pilaster abutting building walls near top and bottom by stirrup supports secured to partitions with through-bolts.2.Secure stirrups to walls with two suitable anchoring devices for each stirrup.3.Secure panels to faces of pilaster near top and bottom with stirrup supports, through-bolted to panels and machine screwed to each pilaster.4.Secure edges of panels to edges of pilasters near top and bottom with "U" shaped brackets.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 10 26 00WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section specifies wall guards (crash rails or bumper guards), handrail/wall guard combinations, corner guards and door/door frame protectors.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Structural steel corner guards: Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS.B.Armor plates and kick plates not specified in this section: Section 08 71 00, DOOR HARDWARE. C.Color and texture of aluminum and resilient material: Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES. 1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B.Shop Drawings: show design and installation details. C.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Handrail/Wall Guard Combinations.2.Wall Guards. 3.Corner Guards. 4.Door/Door Frame Protectors. D.Test Report: Showing that resilient material complies with specified fire and safety code requirements. 1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A.Deliver materials to the site in original sealed packages or containers marked with the name and brand, or trademark of the manufacturer. B.Protect from damage from handling and construction operations before, during and after installation. C.Store in a dry environment of approximately 21° C (70 degrees F) for at least 48 hours prior to installation.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced. publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A167-99(R2009)Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and StripB221-08Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and TubesD256-06Impact Resistance of Plastics D635-06Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal PositionE84-09Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsC.The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): AMP 500-06Metal Finishes ManualD.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):80-10Standard for Fire Doors and WindowsE.Society of American Automotive Engineers (SAE):J 1545-05Instrumental Color Difference Measurement for Exterior Finishes.F.Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):Annual IssueBuilding Materials Directory PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 302B.B.Resilient Material:1.Extruded and injection molded acrylic vinyl or extruded polyvinyl chloride meeting following requirements: a.Minimum impact resistance of 1197 ps (25 ft lbs per sq.ft) when tested in accordance with ASTM D256 (Izod impact, ft.lbs. per inch notch).b.Class 1 fire rating when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, having a maximum flame spread of 25 and a smoke developed rating of 450 or less.c.Rated self extinguishing when tested in accordance with ASTM D635.d.Material shall be labeled and tested by Underwriters Laboratories or other approved independent testing laboratory. e.Integral color with all colored components matched in accordance with SAE J 1545 to within plus or minus 1.0 on the CIELCH scales. f.Same finish on exposed surfaces. 2.2 CORNER GUARDSA.Resilient, ShockAbsorbing Corner Guards: Surface mounted formed to profile shown. 1.snapon corner guard formed from resilient material, minimum 2 mm (0.078inch) thick, free floating on a continuous 1.6 mm (0.063inch) thick extruded aluminum retainer. Provide appropriate mounting hardware, cushions and base plates as required. 2.Provide factory fabricated end closure caps at top and bottom of surface mounted corner guards. 3.Flush mounted corner guards installed on any fire rated wall shall maintain the fire rating of the wall. Provide fire test of proposed corner guard system to verify compliance. a.Where insulating materials are an integral part of the corner guard system, the insulating materials shall be provided by the manufacturer of the corner guard system. b.All exposed metal in fire rated assemblies shall have a paintable finish. B.Stainless Steel Corner Guards: Fabricate of 1.6 mm (0.0625inch) thick stainless steel. Form guards of dimensions and to contour shown. 2.3 WALL GUARDS AND HANDRAILS A.Resilient Wall Guards and Handrails:1.Handrail/Wall Guard Combination: Snap-on covers of resilient material, minimum 2 mm (0.078-inch) thick, shall be free-floated on a continuous, extruded aluminum retainer, minimum 1.8 mm (0.072-inch) thick, anchored to wall at maximum 760 mm (30 inches) on center.2.Wall Guards (Crash Rails): Snap-on covers of resilient material, minimum 2.8 mm (0.110-inch) thick, shall be free-floated over 50 mm (two-inch) wide aluminum retainer clips, minimum 2.3 mm (0.090-inch) thick, anchored to wall at maximum 600 mm (24 inches) on center, supporting a continuous aluminum retainer, minimum 1.6 mm (0.062-inch) thick; or, shall be free-floated over a continuous extruded aluminum retainer, minimum 2.3 (0.090-inch) thick anchored to wall at maximum 600 mm (24 inches) on center.3.Provide handrails and wall guards (crash rails) with prefabricated and closure caps, inside and outside corners, concealed splices, cushions, mounting hardware and other accessories as required. End caps and corners shall be field adjustable to assure close alignment with handrails and wall guards (crash rails). Screw or bolt closure caps to aluminum retainer.2.4 DOOR AND DOOR FRAME PROTECTIONA.Coordinate door protection material requirements with door and frame suppliers to insure fit for all components, and color as specified. B.Provide adhesive as recommended by resilient material manufacturer. 2.5 FASTENERS AND ANCHORSA.Provide fasteners and anchors as required for each specific type of installation. B.Where type, size, spacing or method of fastening is not shown or specified, submit shop drawings showing proposed installation details. 2.6 FINISH A.In accordance with NAAMM AMP 500 series.B.Aluminum:1.Concealed aluminum: Mill finish as fabricated, uniform in color and free from surface blemishes. C.Resilient Material: Embossed texture and color in accordance with SAE J 1545 and as specified in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES. PART 3 INSTALLATION 3.1 RESILIENT CORNER GUARDS Install corner guards on walls in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.3.2 RESILIENT HANDRAIL WALL GUARD COMBINATIONS Secure guards to walls with, mounting cushions, brackets and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's details and instructions. 3.3 DOOR, DOOR FRAME PROTECTION AND HIGH IMPACT WALL COVERINGA.Surfaces to receive protection shall be clean, smooth and free of obstructions.B.Install protectors after frames are in place but preceding installation of doors in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturers specific instructions. C.Apply with adhesive in controlled environment according to manufacture’s recommendations. D.Protection installed on fire rated doors and frames shall be installed according to NFPA 80 and installation procedures listed in UL Building Materials Directory; or, equal listing by other approved independent testing laboratory establishing the procedures. E N D SECTION 10 28 00TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies manufactured items usually used in dressing rooms, toilets, baths, locker rooms and at sinks in related spaces.B.Items Specified:1.Paper towel dispenser.bination paper towel dispenser and disposal unit.3.Waste receptacles.4.Toilet tissue dispenser.5.Grab Bars: (10800-1.DWG).6.Metal framed mirror: (10800-7.DWG). 7. Mop racks. 8.Stainless steel shelves, Type 44. (10801-1.DWG)C.This section also specifies custom fabricated items used in toilets and related spaces.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Color of finishes: Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHESB. Ceramic toilet and bath accessories: Section 09 30 13, CERAMIC TILINGC.Custom fabricated accessories: Section 10 28 00, TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES.D.Manufactured toilet and bath accessories: Section 10 28 00, TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Shop Drawings:1.Each product specified.2.Paper towel dispenser and combination dispenser and disposal units.3.Metal framed mirrors, showing shelf where required, fillers, and design and installation of units when installed on ceramic tile wainscots and offset surfaces.4.Grab bars, showing design and each different type of anchorage.5.Show material and finish, size of members, and details of construction, installation and anchorage of mop racks.C.Samples:1.One of each type of accessory specified.2.After approval, samples may be used in the work.D.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:1.All accessories specified.2.Show type of material, gages or metal thickness in inches, finishes, and when required, capacity of accessories.3.Show working operations of spindle for toilet tissue dispensers.4.Mop racks.E.Manufacturer's Certificates:1.Attesting that soap dispensers are fabricated of material that will not be affected by liquid soap or aseptic detergents, Phisohex and solutions containing hexachlorophene.2.Anodized finish as specified.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA.Each product shall meet, as a minimum, the requirements specified, and shall be a standard commercial product of a manufacturer regularly presently manufacturing items of type specified.B.Each accessory type shall be the same and be made by the same manufacturer.C.Each accessory shall be assembled to the greatest extent possible before delivery to the site.D.Include additional features, which are not specifically prohibited by this specification, but which are a part of the manufacturer's standard commercial product. 1.5 PACKAGING AND DELIVERYA.Pack accessories individually to protect finish.B.Deliver accessories to the project only when installation work in rooms is ready to receive them.C.Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site at appropriate time for building-in.D.Deliver products to site in sealed packages of containers; labeled for identification with manufacturer's name, brand, and contents.1.6 STORAGEA.Store products in weather-tight and dry storage facility.B.Protect from damage from handling, weather and construction operations before, during and after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A167-99(R2009)Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.A176-99(R2009)Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium Steel Plate, Sheet, and StripA269-10Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General ServiceA312/A312M-09Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel PipesA653/A653M-10Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip ProcessB221-08Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and TubesB456-03(R2009)Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus ChromiumC1036-06Flat GlassC1048-04Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated GlassD635-10Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal PositionF446-85(R2009)Consumer Safety Specification for Grab Bars and Accessories Installed in the Bathing Area.D3453-07Flexible Cellular Materials - Urethane for Furniture and Automotive Cushioning, Bedding, and Similar ApplicationsD3690-02(R2009)Vinyl-Coated and Urethane-Coated Upholstery FabricsC.The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):AMP 500 SeriesMetal Finishes ManualD.American Welding Society (AWS):D10.4-86 (R2000)Welding Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Piping and Tubing E.Federal Specifications (Fed. Specs.):A-A-3002Mirrors, GlassFF-S-107C (2)Screw, Tapping and DriveFF-S-107CScrew, Tapping and Drive.WW-P-541E(1)Plumbing Fixtures (Accessories, Land Use) Detail SpecificationPART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALSA.Aluminum: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5 and alloy 6463-T5.B.Glass:1.ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q2, for mirrors.2.ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type 1, Class 1 (use in Mental Health and Behavior Nursing Unit Psychiatric Patient Areas and Security Examination Rooms where mirrors and glass are specified). C.Foam Rubber: ASTM D3453, Grade BD, Type 2.D.Plywood: PS1, Grade CD.2.2 FASTENERSA.Exposed Fasteners: Stainless steel or chromium plated brass, finish to match adjacent surface.B.Concealed Fasteners: Steel, hot-dip galvanized (except in high moisture areas such as showers or bath tubs use stainless steel).C.Toggle Bolts: For use in hollow masonry or frame construction.D.Hex bolts: For through bolting on thin panels.E.Expansion Shields: Lead or plastic as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate for use in solid masonry or concrete.F.Screws: 1.ASME B18.6.4.2.Fed Spec. FF-S-107, Stainless steel Type A.G.Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer for products to be joined.2.3 FINISHA.In accordance with NAAMM AMP 500 series.B.AA-M32 Mechanical finish, medium satin. 1.Chromium Plating: ASTM B456, satin or bright as specified, Service Condition No. SC2.2.Stainless Steel: NAAMM AMP 503, finish number 4.3.Ferrous Metal:a.Shop Prime: Clean, pretreat and apply one coat of primer and bake.b.Finish: Over primer apply two coats of alkyd or phenolic resin enamel, and bake.4.Nylon Coated Steel: Nylon coating powder formulated for a fluidized bonding process to steel to provide a hard smooth, medium gloss finish, not less than 0.3 mm (0.012-inch) thick, rated as self-extinguishing when tested in accordance with ASTM D635.2.4 FABRICATION - GENERALA.Welding, AWS D10.4.B.Grind dress, and finish welded joints to match finish of adjacent surface.C.Form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints.D.Provide steel anchors and components required for secure installation.E.Form flat surfaces without distortion. Keep exposed surfaces free from scratches and dents. Reinforce doors to prevent warp or twist.F.Isolate aluminum from dissimilar metals and from contact with building materials as required to prevent electrolysis and corrosion.G.Hot-dip galvanized steel, except stainless steel, anchors and fastening devices.H.Shop assemble accessories and package with all components, anchors, fittings, fasteners and keys.I.Key items alike.J.Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.K.Round and deburr edges of sheets to remove sharp edges.2.5 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS A.Surface mounted type with sloping top.B.Dispensing capacity for 300 sheets of any type of paper toweling.C.Fabricate of stainless steel.D.Provide door with continuous hinge at bottom, and either spring tension cam lock or tumbler lock, keyed alike, at top and a refill sight slot in front.2.6 COMBINATION PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER AND DISPOSAL UNITSA.Semi-recessed type.B.Dispensing capacity for 400 sheets of any type of paper toweling.C.Fabricate of stainless steel.D.Form face frames, from one piece.E.Provide each door with continuous stainless steel piano hinge and tumbler lock, keyed alike.F.Provide removable waste receptacle approximately 40 liter (10.5 gallon) capacity, fabricated of 0.45 mm (0.018-inch) thick stainless steel.2.7 WASTE RECEPTACLESA.Semi-recessed type, without doors. Fed. Spec WW-P-541, Type II.B.Fabricate of stainless steel.C.Form face frame from one piece.D.Provide removable waste receptacle of approximately (12 gallon) capacity, fabricated of stainless steel.E.Waste receptacle key locked in place.2.8 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERSA.Double roll surface mounted type.B.Mount on continuous backplate.C.Removable spindle ABS plastic or chrome plated plastic.D.Wood rollers are not acceptable.2.9 GRAB BARSA.Fed. Spec WW-P-541/8B, Type IV, bars, surface mounted, Class 2, grab bars and ASTM F446.B.Fabricate of either stainless steel or nylon coated steel, except use only one type throughout the project:1.Stainless steel: Grab bars, flanges, mounting plates, supports, screws, bolts, and exposed nuts and washers.D.Bars:1.Fabricate from 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) outside diameter tubing.a.Stainless steel, minimum 1.2 mm (0.0478 inch) thick.b.Nylon coated bars, minimum 1.5 mm (0.0598 inch) thick.2.Fabricate in one continuous piece with ends turned toward walls.3.Continuous weld intermediate support to the grab bar.E.Flange for Concealed Mounting:1.Minimum of 2.65 mm (0.1046 inch) thick, approximately 75 mm (3 inch) diameter by 13 mm (1/2 inch) deep, with provisions for not less than three set screws for securing flange to back plate.2.Insert grab bar through center of the flange and continuously weld perimeter of grab bar flush to back side of flange.F.Back Plates:1.Minimum 2.65 mm (0.1046 inch) thick metal.2.Fabricate in one piece, approximately 6 mm (1/4 inch) deep, with diameter sized to fit flange. Provide slotted holes to accommodate anchor bolts.2.10 METAL FRAMED MIRRORSA.Fed. Spec. A-A-3002 metal frame; chromium finished steel, B.Mirror Glass:1.Minimum 6 mm (1/4 inch) thick.2.Set mirror in a protective vinyl glazing tape.3.Use tempered glass for mirrors in Mental Health and Behavioral Nursing units.C.Frames:1.Channel or angle shaped section with face of frame not less than 9 mm (3/8 inch) wide. Fabricate with square corners.2.Use either 0.9 mm (0.0359 inch) thick stainless steel, chrome finished steel, or extruded aluminum, with clear anodized finish 0.4 mils thick.3.Filler:a.Where mirrors are mounted on walls having ceramic tile wainscots not flush with wall above, provide fillers at void between back of mirror and wall surface.b.Fabricate fillers from same material and finish as the mirror frame, contoured to conceal the void behind the mirror at sides and top.D.Back Plate:1.Fabricate backplate for concealed wall hanging of either zinc-coated, or cadmium plated 0.9 mm (0.036 inch) thick sheet steel, die cut to fit face of mirror frame, and furnish with theft resistant concealed wall fastenings.2.Use set screw type theft resistant concealed fastening system for mounting mirrors.E.Mounting Bracket: 1.Designed to support mirror tight to wall.2.Designed to retain mirror with concealed set screw fastenings.2.11 MOP RACKSA.Minimum 1.0M (40 inches) long with five holders.B.Clamps:1.Minimum of 1.3 mm (0.050-inch) thick stainless steel bracket retaining channel with a hard rubber serrated cam; pivot mounted to channel.2.Clamps to hold handles from 13 mm (1/2-inch) minimum to 32 mm (1-1/4 inch) maximum diameter.C.Support:1.Minimum of 1 mm (0.0375 inch) thick stainless steel hat shape channel to hold clamps away from wall as shown. 2.Drill wall flange for 3 mm (1/8 inch) fasteners above and below clamp locations.D.Secure clamps to support with oval head machine screws or rivets into continuous reinforcing back of clamps.E.Finish on stainless Steel: AMP 503-No. 4.2.12 STAINLESS STEEL SHELVES (Type 44)A.Shelves:1.Fabricate shelves of 1.2 mm (0.0478-inch) thick sheet to size and design shown.2.Fabricate shelves of hollow metal type construction, forming a depression as shown, with closed fronts, backs, ends and bottoms. Reinforce shelves with 1.2 mm (0.0478-inch) thick sheet steel hat channel stiffeners, full depth, welded to underside of top at bracket locations.3.Miter cuts, where made at corners of shelves, continuously welding.B.Form brackets of 3 mm (1/8-inch) thick steel as shown. Drill brackets for 6 mm (1/4-inch) anchor bolts.C.Weld or Screw brackets to shelves.2.13 CLOTHES HOOKS-ROBE OR COATA.Fabricate hook units either of chromium plated brass with a satin finish, or stainless steel, using 6 mm (1/4 inch) minimum thick stock, with edges and corners rounded smooth to the thickness of the metal, or 3 mm (1/8 inch) minimum radius.B.Fabricate each unit as a double hook on a single shaft, integral with or permanently fastened to the wall flange, provided with concealed fastenings.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 PREPARATIONA.Before starting work notify COTR in writing of any conflicts detrimental to installation or operation of units.B.Verify with the COTR the exact location of accessories.3.2 INSTALLATIONA.Set work accurately, in alignment and where shown. Items shall be plumb, level, free of rack and twist, and set parallel or perpendicular as required to line and plane of surface.B.Toggle bolt to steel anchorage plates in frame partitions or hollow masonry. C.Install accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and ASTM F446.D.Install accessories plumb and level and securely anchor to substrate.E.Install accessories in a manner that will permit the accessory to function as designed and allow for servicing as required without hampering or hindering the performance of other devices.F.Position and install dispensers, and other devices in countertops, clear of drawers, permitting ample clearance below countertop between devices, and ready access for maintenance as needed.G.Align mirrors, dispensers and other accessories even and level, when installed in battery.H.Install accessories to prevent striking by other moving, items or interference with accessibility.I.Install wall mirrors in Mental Health and Behavioral Units with tamper resistant screws that are flush mounted so that they will not support a rope or material for hanging.3.3 CLEANINGAfter installation, clean as recommended by the manufacturer and protect from damage until completion of the project.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 10 44 13FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTIONThis section covers recessed fire extinguisher cabinets.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Acrylic glazing: Section 08 80 00, GLAZING.B.Field Painting: Section 09 91 00, PAINTING. 1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Fire extinguisher cabinet including installation instruction and rough opening required.1.4 APPLICATION PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):D4802-10Poly (Methyl Methacrylate) Acrylic Plastic SheetPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETRecessed type with flat trim of size and design shown. 2.2 FABRICATIONA.Form body of cabinet from 0.9 mm (0.0359 inch) thick sheet steel. B.Fabricate door and trim from 1.2 mm (0.0478 inch) thick sheet steel with all face joints fully welded and ground smooth.1.Glaze doors with 6 mm (1/4 inch) thick ASTM D4802, clear acrylic sheet, Category B-1, Finish 1.2.Design doors to open 180 degrees.3.Provide continuous hinge, pull handle, and adjustable roller catch.2.3 FINISHA.Finish interior of cabinet body with baked-on semigloss white enamel.B.Finish door, frame with manufacturer's standard baked-on prime coat suitable for field painting.PART 3 – EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Install fire extinguisher cabinets in prepared openings and secure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B.Install cabinet so that bottom of cabinet is 975 mm (39 inches) above finished floor.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 12 36 00COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies casework countertops with integral accessories.B.Integral accessories include:1.Sinks with traps and drains.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Color and patterns of plastic laminate: SECTION 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.B.DIVISION 22, PLUMBING.C.DIVISION 26, ELECTRICAL.D.Equipment Reference Manual for SECTION 12 36 00, COUNTERTOPS.1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with SECTION 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Shop Drawings1.Show dimensions of section and method of assembly.2.Show details of construction at 1/2 scale.C.Samples:1.150 mm (6 inch) square samples each top.2.Front edge, back splash, end splash and core with surface material and booking.1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Hardboard Association (AHA):A135.4-95Basic posite Panel Association (CPA):A208.1-09ParticleboardD.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):A112.18.1-12Plumbing Supply FittingsA112.1.2-12Air Gaps in Plumbing SystemA112.19.3-08(R2004)Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use)E.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A167-99 (R2009)Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and StripA1008-10Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High Strength, Low AlloyD256-10Pendulum Impact Resistance of PlasticD570-98(R2005)Water Absorption of PlasticsD638-10Tensile Properties of PlasticsD785-08Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and Electrical Insulating MaterialsD790-10Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating MaterialsD4690-99(2005)Urea-Formaldehyde Resin AdhesivesF.Federal Specifications (FS):A-A-1936Adhesive, Contact, Neoprene RubberG.U.S. Department of Commerce, Product Standards (PS):PS 1-95Construction and Industrial PlywoodH.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):LD 3-05High Pressure Decorative LaminatesPART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALSA.Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3.1.Concealed backing sheet Type BKL.2.Decorative surfaces:a.Flat components: Type GP-HGL.b.Post forming: Type PF-HGP.B.Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 304.C.Sheet Steel: ASTM A1008, cold rolled, Class 1 finish, stretcher leveled.D.Particleboard: CPA A208.1, Grade 2-M-2.E.Plywood: PS 1, Exterior type, veneer grade AC not less than five ply construction.F.Adhesive1.For plastic laminate FS A-A-1936.2.For Field Joints: a.Epoxy type, resistant to chemicals as specified for plastic laminate laboratory surfaces. b.Fungi resistant: ASTM G-21, rating of 0.G.Fasteners:1.Metals used for welding same metal as materials joined.2.Use studs, bolts, spaces, threaded rods with nuts or screws suitable for materials being joined with metal splice plates, channels or other supporting shape.H.Solid Polymer Material: 1.Filled Methyl Methacrylic Polymer.2.Performance properties required:PropertyResultTestElongation0.3% min.ASTM D638Hardness90 Rockwell MASTM D785Gloss (600 Gordon)5-20NEMA LD3.1Color stabilityNo changeNEMA LD3 except 200 hourAbrasion resistanceNo loss of pattern Max wear depth 0.0762 mm (0.003 in) - 10000 cyclesNEMA LD3Water absorption weight (5 max)24 hours 0.9ASTM D-570Izod impact14 N·m/m(0.25?ft-lb/in)ASTM D256 (Method A)Impact resistanceNo fractureNEMA LD-3 900?mm (36") drop 1 kg (2 lb.) ballBoiling water surface resistanceNo visible changeNEMA LD3High temperature resistanceSlight surface dullingNEMA LD33.Cast into sheet form.4.Color throughout with subtle veining through thickness.5.Joint adhesive and sealer: Manufacturers silicone adhesive and sealant for joining methyl methacrylic polymer sheet.6.Bio-based products will be preferred.I.Laminar Flow Control Device1.Smooth bright stainless steel or satin finish, chrome plated metal laminar flow device shall provide non-aeration, clear, coherent laminar flow that will not splash in basin. Device shall also have a flow control restrictor and have vandal resistant housing.2.Flow Control Restrictor:a.Capable of restricting flow of 7.5 to 8.5 Lpm (2.0 to 2.2 gpm) for sinks provided in paragraph 2.2D.pensates for pressure fluctuation maintaining flow rate specified above within 10 percent between 175 and 550 kPa (25 and 80 psi).c.Operates by expansion and contraction, eliminates mineral/sediment building up with self clearing action, and is capable of easy manual cleaning.2.2 SINKSA.Molded Resin:1.Cast or molded in one piece with interior corners 25 mm (one inch) minimum radius.2.Minimum thickness of sides and ends 13 mm (1/2 inch), bottom 16 mm (5/8 inch).3.Molded resin outlet for drain and standpipe overflow. 4.Provide clamping collar permitting connection to 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) or 50 mm (2 inch) waste outlet and trap, making sealed but not permanent connection.2.3 TRAPS AND FITTINGSA.Material as specified in DIVISION 22, PLUMBING.B.Plaster traps:1.Cast iron body with porcelain enamel exterior finish.2.50 mm (2 inch) female threaded side inlet and outlet.3.Removable galvanized cage having integral baffles and replaceable brass screens.4.Removable gasketed cover.5.Minimum overall dimensions: 350 x 350 x 400 mm high (14 x 14 x 16 inches) with 175 mm (7 inch) water seal. 6.Non-siphoning and easily accessible for cleaning.C.Air Gap Fittings: ASME A112.1.2.D.Methyl Methacrylic Polymer Sink Traps:1.Cast or wrought brass with flat grid strainer, off-set tail piece, adjustable 38 x 32 mm (1-1/2 x 1 1/4-inch) P trap.2.Chromium plated finish.2.4 WATER FAUCETS A.ASME A112.18.1.1.Cast or forged brass, compression type with replaceable seat and stem assembly or replaceable cartridge.2.Indexed lever handles either with or without head.3.Gooseneck minimum clearance above countertop of 190 mm (7-1/2 inches), bent 180 degrees for vertical discharge.4.Swing spouts elevated to clear handles.5.Exposed brass surfaces chromium plated.6.Cast combination hot and cold fixture with one piece body for multiple outlets.7.Adapter type connection which will permit field conversion of swing spouts to fixed or gooseneck grouts or vice versa.B.Laminar flow control device on spouts.C.Vanity or Lavatory Faucets in Methyl Methacrylic Polymer tops:1.Extra long center set single lever handle control.2.Cast or wrought copper alloy, vandal resistant.3.Stainless steel ball type with replaceable non-metallic seats, stainless steel lined sockets.4.Handle always returning to the neutral position or cartridge body construction.5.Provide laminar flow control device.2.5 FIXTURE IDENTIFICATIONA.Code fixtures with full view plastic index buttons.B.Use following colors and codes:SERVICECOLORCODECOLOR OF LETTERSCold WaterDark GreenCWWhiteHot WaterRedHWWhiteLaboratory AirOrangeAIRBlackFuel GasDark BlueGASWhiteLaboratory VacuumYellowVACBlackDistilled WaterWhiteDWBlackDeionized WaterWhiteDIBlackOxygenLight GreenOXYWhiteHydrogenPinkH BlackNitrogenGrayN BlackAll Other GasesLight BlueCHEM.SYM.Black2.6 ELECTRICAL RECEPTACLESA.Hospital grade per electrical specifications.2.7 COUNTERTOPSA.Fabricate in largest sections practicable.B.Fabricate with joints flush on top surface.C.Fabricate countertops to overhang front of cabinets and end of assemblies 25 mm (one inch) except where against walls or cabinets.D.Provide 1 mm (0.039 inch) thick metal plate connectors or fastening devices (except epoxy resin tops).E.Join edges in a chemical resistant waterproof cement or epoxy cement, except weld metal tops.F.Fabricate with end splashes where against walls or cabinets.G.Splash Backs and End Splashes:1.Not less than 19 mm (3/4 inch) thick.2.Height 100 mm (4 inches) unless noted otherwise.3.Laboratories and pharmacy heights or where fixtures or outlets occur: Not less than 150 mm (6 inches) unless noted otherwise.4.Fabricate epoxy splash back in maximum lengths practical of the same material.H.Drill or cutout for sinks, and penetrations.1.Accurately cut for size of penetration.2.Cutout for VL 81 photographic enlarger cabinet.a.Finish cutout to fit flush with vertical side of cabinet, allowing adjustable shelf to fit into cutout space of cabinet at counter top level. Finish cutout surface as an exposed edge.b.Provide braces under enlarger space to support not less than 45 kg (100 pounds) centered on opening side along backsplash.I.Plastic Laminate Countertops:1.Fabricate plastic laminate on five-ply plywood or particleboard core 19 mm (3/4 inch) thick with plastic laminate backing sheet.2.Front edge over cabinets not less than 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) thick except where plastic "T" insert is used, not less than 19 mm (3/4 inch) thick.3.Exposed Surface and edges of decorative laminated plastic or laboratory chemical resistant surface.a.Use chemical resistant surface on tops 6A, 6B, and 6C.b.Use decorative surface tops when noted plastic laminate, for tops 10A, 10B and 10C.J.Methyl Methacrylic Polymer Tops:1.Fabricate countertop of methyl methacrylic polymer cast sheet, 19 mm (3/4 inch) thick.2.Fabricate back splash and end splash to height shown.3.Fabricate skirt to depth shown.4.Fabricate with marine edge where sinks occur.5.Fabricate in one piece for full length from corner to corner up to 3600 mm (12 feet).6.Join pieces with adhesive sealant.7.Cut out countertop for lavatories, plumbing trim.8.Provide concealed fasteners and epoxy cement for anchorage of sinks to countertop.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Before installing countertops verify that wall surfaces have been finished as specified and that mechanical and electrical service locations are as required.B.Secure countertops to supporting rails of cabinets with metal fastening devices, or screws through pierced slots in rails.1.Where type, size or spacing of fastenings is not shown or specified, submit shop drawings showing proposed fastenings and method of installation.2.Use round head bolts or screws.3.Use epoxy or silicone to fasten the epoxy resin countertops to the cabinets.4.Use wood or sheet metal screws for wood or plastic laminate tops; minimum penetration into top 16 mm (5/8 inch), screw size No 8, or 10.C.Rubber Moldings:1.Where shown install molding with butt joints in horizontal runs and mitered joints at corners where ceramic tile occurs omit molding.2.Fasten molding to wall and to splashbacks and splashends with adhesive.D.Faucets, Fixtures, and Outlets:1.Seal opening between fixture and top.2.Secure to top with manufacturers standard fittings.E.Range Tops, Electrical Outlets, Film Viewer:1.Set in cutouts with manufacturers gasket sealing joint with top to prevent water leakage.2.Install control unit and electric outlets where shown. Seal escutcheon plate at lap if on counter or top to prevent water leakage. 3.2 PROTECTION AND CLEANINGA.Tightly cover and protect against dirt, water, and chemical or mechanical injury. B.Clean at completion of work. - - - E N D - - -SECTION 13 05 41SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS PART 1 – GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTION: A.Provide seismic restraint in accordance with the requirements of this section in order to maintain the integrity of nonstructural components of the building so that they remain safe and functional in case of seismic event.B.Definitions: Non-structural building components are components or systems that are not part of the building’s structural system whether inside or outside, above or below grade. Non-structural components of buildings include:1.Architectural Elements: Facades that are not part of the structural system and its shear resistant elements; cornices and other architectural projections and parapets that do not function structurally; glazing; nonbearing partitions; suspended ceilings; stairs isolated from the basic structure; cabinets; bookshelves; medical equipment; and storage racks.2.Electrical Elements: Power and lighting systems; substations; switchgear and switchboards; auxiliary engine-generator sets; transfer switches; motor control centers; motor generators; selector and controller panels; fire protection and alarm systems; special life support systems; and telephone and communication systems.3.Mechanical Elements: Heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning systems; medical gas systems; plumbing systems; sprinkler systems; pneumatic systems; boiler equipment and components.4.Transportation Elements: Mechanical, electrical and structural elements for transport systems, i.e., elevators and dumbwaiters, including hoisting equipment and counterweights.1.2 RELATED WORK:A.DIVISION 06, WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITESB.DIVISION 08, OPENINGSC.DIVISION 09, FINISHESD.DIVISION 10, SPECIALTIESE.DIVISION 12, FURNISHINGSF.DIVISION 23, HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)G.DIVISION 26, ELECTRICALH.DIVISION 27, COMMUNICATIONS1.3 QUALITY CONTROL:A.Shop-Drawing Preparation:1.Have seismic-force-restraint shop drawings and calculations prepared by a professional structural engineer experienced in the area of seismic force restraints. The professional structural engineer shall be registered in the state where the project is located.2.Submit design tables and information used for the design-force levels, stamped and signed by a professional structural engineer registered in the State where project is located.B.Coordination:1.Do not install seismic restraints until seismic restraint submittals are approved by the COTR.2.Coordinate and install trapezes or other multi-pipe hanger systems prior to pipe installation.C.Seismic Certification:In structures assigned to IBC Seismic Design Category C, D, E, or F, permanent equipments and components are to have Special Seismic Certification in accordance with requirements of section 13.2.2 of ASCE 7 except for equipment that are considered rugged as listed in section 2.2 OSHPD code application notice CAN No. 2-1708A.5, and shall comply with section 13.2.6 of ASCE 7. 1.4 SUBMITTALS:A.Submit a coordinated set of equipment anchorage drawings prior to installation including:1.Description, layout, and location of items to be anchored or braced with anchorage or brace points noted and dimensioned.2.Details of anchorage or bracing at large scale with all members, parts brackets shown, together with all connections, bolts, welds etc. clearly identified and specified.3.Numerical value of design seismic brace loads.4.For expansion bolts, include design load and capacity if different from those specified.B.Submit prior to installation, a coordinated set of bracing drawings for seismic protection of piping, with data identifying the various support-to-structure connections and seismic bracing structural connections, include:1.Single-line piping diagrams on a floor-by-floor basis. Show all suspended piping for a given floor on the same plain.2.Type of pipe (Copper, steel, cast iron, insulated, non-insulated, etc.).3.Pipe contents.4.Structural framing.5.Location of all gravity load pipe supports and spacing requirements.6.Numerical value of gravity load reactions.7.Location of all seismic bracing.8.Numerical value of applied seismic brace loads.9.Type of connection (Vertical support, vertical support with seismic brace etc.).10.Seismic brace reaction type (tension or compression): Details illustrating all support and bracing components, methods of connections, and specific anchors to be used.C.Submit prior to installation, bracing drawings for seismic protection of suspended ductwork and suspended electrical and communication cables, include:1.Details illustrating all support and bracing components, methods of connection, and specific anchors to be used.2.Numerical value of applied gravity and seismic loads and seismic loads acting on support and bracing components.3.Maximum spacing of hangers and bracing.4.Seal of registered structural engineer responsible for design.D.Submit design calculations prepared and sealed by the registered structural engineer specified above in paragraph 1.3A.E.Submit for concrete anchors, the appropriate ICBC evaluation reports, OSHPD pre-approvals, or lab test reports verifying compliance with OSHPD Interpretation of Regulations 28-6. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:A.The Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.B.American Concrete Institute (ACI):355.2-07Qualification for Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete and CommentaryC.American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):Load and Resistance Factor Design, Volume 1, Second EditionD.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A36/A36M-08Standard Specification for Carbon Structural SteelA53/A53M-10Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and SeamlessA307-10Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs; 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.A325-10Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile StrengthA325M-09Standard Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints [Metric]A490-10Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile StrengthA490M-10Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3, for Structural Steel Joints [Metric]A500/A500M-10Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and ShapesA501-07Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural TubingA615/A615M-09Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete ReinforcementA992/A992M-06Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building FramingA996/A996M-09Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axel-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete ReinforcementE488-96(R2003)Standard Test Method for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry ElementE.American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE 7) Latest Edition.F.International Building Code (IBC) Latest EditionG.VA Seismic Design Requirements, H-18-8, February 2011H.National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines (NUSIG)I.Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): Seismic Restraint Manual - Guidelines for Mechanical Systems, 1998 Edition and Addendum1.6 Regulatory Requirement: A.IBC 2003.B.Exceptions: The seismic restraint of the following items may be omitted:1.Equipment weighing less than 400 pounds, which is supported directly on the floor or roof.2.Equipment weighing less than 20 pounds, which is suspended from the roof or floor or hung from a wall.3.Gas and medical piping less than 2 ? inches inside diameter.4.Piping in boiler plants and equipment rooms less than 1 ? inches inside diameter.5.All other piping less than 2 ? inches inside diameter, except for automatic fire suppression systems.6.All piping suspended by individual hangers, 12 inches or less in length from the top of pipe to the bottom of the support for the hanger.7.All electrical conduits, less than 2 ? inches inside diameter.8. All rectangular air handling ducts less than six square feet in cross sectional area.9.All round air handling ducts less than 28 inches in diameter.10.All ducts suspended by hangers 12 inches or less in length from the top of the duct to the bottom of support for the hanger. PART 2 – PRODUCTS2.1 STEEL:A.Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B.B.Bolts & Nuts: ASTM A307.PART 3 – EXECUTION3.1 CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL:A.Provide equipment supports and anchoring devices to withstand the seismic design forces, so that when seismic design forces are applied, the equipment cannot displace, overturn, or become inoperable.B.Provide anchorages in conformance with recommendations of the equipment manufacturer and as shown on approved shop drawings and calculations.C.Construct seismic restraints and anchorage to allow for thermal expansion.D.Testing Before Final Inspection:1.Test 10-percent of anchors in masonry and concrete per ASTM E488, and ACI 355.2 to determine that they meet the required load capacity. If any anchor fails to meet the required load, test the next 20 consecutive anchors, which are required to have zero failure, before resuming the 10percent testing frequency.2.Before scheduling Final Inspection, submit a report on this testing indicating the number and location of testing, and what anchor-loads were obtained.3.2 EQUIPMENT RESTRAINT AND BRACING:A.See drawings for equipment to be restrained or braced.3.3 MECHANICAL DUCTWORK and piping; boiler plant stacks and breaching; electrical busways, conduits, and cable trays; and telecommunication wires and cable traysA.Support and brace mechanical ductwork and piping; electrical busways, conduits and cable trays; and telecommunication wires and cable trays including boiler plant stacks and breeching to resist directional forces (lateral, longitudinal and vertical).B.Brace duct and breeching branches with a minimum of 1 brace per branch.C.Provide supports and anchoring so that, upon application of seismic forces, piping remains fully connected as operable systems which will not displace sufficiently to damage adjacent or connecting equipment, or building members.D.Seismic Restraint of Piping:1.Design criteria:a.Piping resiliently supported: Restrain to support 120percent of the weight of the systems and components and contents.b.Piping not resiliently supported: Restrain to support 60percent of the weight of the system components and contents.E.Piping Connections: Provide flexible connections where pipes connect to equipment. Make the connections capable of accommodating relative differential movements between the pipe and equipment under conditions of earthquake shaking.3.4 PARTITIONSA.In buildings with flexible structural frames, anchor partitions to only structural element, such as a floor slab, and separate such partition by a physical gap from all other structural elements.B.Properly anchor masonry walls to the structure for restraint, so as to carry lateral loads imposed due to earthquake along with their own weight and other lateral forces.3.5 CEILINGS AND LIGHTING FIXTURESA.At regular intervals, laterally brace suspended ceilings against lateral and vertical movements, and provide with a physical separation at the walls.B.Independently support and laterally brace all lighting fixtures. Refer to applicable portion of lighting specification, Section 26 51 00, INTERIOR LIGHTING.3.6 STORAGE RACKS, CABINETS, AND BOOKCASESA.Install storage racks to withstand earthquake forces and anchored to the floor or laterally braced from the top to the structural elements.B.Anchor medical supply cabinets to the floor or walls and equip them with properly engaged, lockable latches.C.Anchor filing cabinets that are more than 2 drawers high to the floor or walls, and equip all drawers with properly engaged, lockable latches.D.Anchor bookcases that are more than 30 inches high to the floor or walls, and equip any doors with properly engaged, lockable latches.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 14 50 00PNEUMATIC TUBE SYSTEMSPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section covers the furnishing of all materials and performing all work, complete, for the relocation of one pneumatic tube station located in Building 500, VAMC Martinsburg, Martinsburg, West Virginia. For a complete description of work and performance criteria, refer to the remaining parts of this specification. See other contract documents for sequencing of work.B.The pneumatic tube system work includes but is not limited to the work described below:1.Remove existing station number 121 located in suite 2A-126. Protect and store unit for interim of space demolition and new build out. All equipment, specified to be retained, shall be reconditioned in “like new” condition.2.Furnish labor, materials, electrical wiring, data control wiring and supplies required to relocate the existing station.3.Station 121 shall be relocated as shown on Contract Drawing QH-101. 4.All materials and equipment specified to be replaced shall be provided new and at least equal in duty and size to existing unless otherwise stated.5.Reprogram existing control system to reflect the relocation of station 121 in all aspects.C.Coincidentally with the progress of relocating various systems, all reused material shall be checked, modified and repaired or replaced, if necessary, so each item is equal in condition to that of a new item.D.Everything required to satisfactorily complete station relocation as required by contract documents.E.Removal and disposal of existing equipment which is not reused or as specifically noted herein. 1.2 QUALITY CONTROLA.Qualifications:1.The installation shall be made by the Manufacture or his directly supervised authorized representatives.2.The total responsibility for materials, installation and warranty shall be directly with the Manufacture.1.3 SubmittalsA.Sufficient shop drawings shall be submitted to permit determination of compliance with these specifications.1.4 warrentyA.Material and workmanship shall be warranted by the Manufacturer to be free from defects, for a period of one year from the date of projects final acceptance.B.Any part provided for this station’s relocation which is proven defective shall be replaced at no charge.PART 2 – PRODUCTS2.1 CONDUIT Per NFPA 70 and national electric code necA.All conduit terminating in steel cabinets, junction boxes, wireways, switch boxes, outlet boxes and similar locations shall have approved insulation bushing. Install a steel locknut under the bushing if they are constructed completely of insulating materials. Protect the conductors at ends of conduits not terminating in steel cabinets or boxes by terminal fittings having an insulated opening for the conductors.B.Do not use set screws or indentations as a means of attachment or connection. Use compression fittings.C.Conduit size: 13mm (1/2”) minimum.2.2 wiringA.Power wiring shall be in accordance with the Manufacturers’ standards for the existing system.munication wiring shall be in accordance with the Manufacturers’ standards for the existing system.2.3 tubingA.Material and installation practices shall be in accordance with the Manufacturers’ standards for the existing system.munication wiring shall be in accordance with the Manufacturers’ standards for the existing system.PART 3 – EXECUTION3.1 PREPARATIONA.Prior to stating installation work, building conditions shall be inspected to verify that the station may be installed at said location in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contracting Officer shall be notified immediately of any discrepancy and installation shall not be undertaken until action regarding the discrepancy has been decided.3.2 INSTALLATIONA.The installation shall meet latest applicable ordinances, codes and regulation of the enforcing authority.B.The installation personnel shall organize their work and maintain orderly/clean conditions relating to the installation.3.3 CLEANINGA.Prior to final acceptance, remove protection from finished surfaces, and clean and polish surfaces with regard to type of material.3.4 WORKMANSHIP AND PROTECTIONA.All installations shall be made in a first class, neat and skillful manner by persons experienced in the trade involved. All details of the installation shall be mechanically and electrically correct. All materials and equipment shall be new and without imperfections.B.Recesses, cutouts, slots, holes, patching, grouting, refinishing to accommodate installation of equipment shall be included in the Contractor's work. All new holes in concrete shall be core drilled.C.No structural members shall be cut or altered. Work in place which is damaged or defaced shall be restored equal to original condition.D.Finished work shall be straight, level and plumb, with true, smooth surfaces and lines. All machinery and equipment shall be protected against dirt, water, or mechanical injury. At final completion, all work shall be thoroughly cleaned and delivered in perfect unblemished condition.3.7 TESTingA.Perform operational tests prior to turnover to owner.B.Verify that all station components are in full operating condition for carrier processing between all possible station combinations.C.Inspect system components with owner representative to verify all equipment is installed and operating in proper condition.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 21 13 13WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMSPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A.Design, installation and testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 except for specified exceptions.B.The design and installation of a hydraulically calculated automatic wet system complete and ready for operation, for the new OEF/OIF Renovation on Floor 2 of Building 500. C.Modification of the existing sprinkler system as indicated on the drawings and as further required by these specifications. 1.2 RELATED WORKA.Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING, Treatment of penetrations through rated enclosures.C.Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.D.Section 28 31 00, FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA.Installer Reliability: The installer shall possess a valid State of West Virginia fire sprinkler contractor's license. The installer shall have been actively and successfully engaged in the installation of commercial automatic sprinkler systems for the past ten years.B.Materials and Equipment: All equipment and devices shall be of a make and type listed by UL and approved by FM, or other nationally recognized testing laboratory for the specific purpose for which it is used. All materials, devices, and equipment shall be approved by the VA.C.Submittals: Submit as one package in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Prepare detailed working drawings that are signed by a NICET Level III or Level IV Sprinkler Technician or stamped by a Registered Professional Engineer practicing in the field of Fire Protection Engineering. As Government review is for technical adequacy only, the installer remains responsible for correcting any conflicts with other trades and building construction that arise during installation. Partial submittals will not be accepted. Material submittals shall be approved prior to the purchase or delivery to the job site. Suitably bind submittals in notebooks or binders and provide index referencing the appropriate specification section. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:1.Qualifications:a.Provide a copy of the installing contractor’s fire sprinkler and state contractor’s license. b.Provide a copy of the NICET certification for the NICET Level III or Level IV Sprinkler Technician who prepared and signed the detailed working drawings unless the drawings are stamped by a Registered Professional Engineer practicing in the field of Fire Protection Engineering.2.Drawings: Submit detailed 1:100 (1/8 inch) scale (minimum) working drawings conforming to NFPA 13. Include a plan showing the piping to the fire pump. 3.Manufacturers Data Sheets: a.Provide for materials and equipment proposed for use on the system. Include listing information and installation instructions in data sheets. Where data sheet describes items in addition to that item being submitted, clearly identify proposed item on the sheet.4.Calculation Sheets: Submit hydraulic calculation sheets in tabular form conforming to the requirements and recommendations of NFPA 13.5.Final Document Submittals: Provide as-built drawings, testing and maintenance instructions in accordance with the requirements in Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:a.One complete set of reproducible as-built drawings showing the installed system with the specific interconnections between the waterflow switch or pressure switch and the fire alarm equipment.plete, simple, understandable, step-by-step, testing instructions giving recommended and required testing frequency of all equipment, methods for testing all equipment, and a complete trouble shooting manual. Provide maintenance instructions on replacing any components of the system including internal parts, periodic cleaning and adjustment of the equipment and components with information as to the address and telephone number of both the manufacturer and the local supplier of each item.c.Material and Testing Certificate: Upon completion of the sprinkler system installation or any partial section of the system, including testing and flushing, provide a copy of a completed Material and Testing Certificate as indicated in NFPA 13.d.Certificates shall document all parts of the installation.e.Instruction Manual: Provide one copy of the instruction manual covering the system in a flexible protective cover and mount in an accessible location adjacent to the riser.D.Design Basis Information: Provide design, materials, equipment, installation, inspection, and testing of the automatic sprinkler system in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13. Recommendations in appendices shall be treated as requirements.1.Perform hydraulic calculations in accordance with NFPA 13 utilizing the Area/Density method. Do not restrict design area reductions permitted for using quick response sprinklers throughout by the required use of standard response sprinklers in the areas identified in this section.2.Sprinkler Protection: To determining spacing and sizing, apply the following coverage classifications:a.Light Hazard Occupancies: waiting, exam, and office areas.b.Ordinary Hazard Group 1 Occupancies: Storage rooms, clean and soiled linen rooms.3.Hydraulic Calculations: Calculated demand including hose stream requirements shall fall no less than 10 percent below the available water supply curve.4.Water Supply: Base water supply on flow test of the existing fire pump:a.Location Building 500 fire pump discharge flange in Basement Mechanical Roomb.Static pressure: 152 psi.c. 100%: 142 psi @ 500 gpmd.150%: 106 psi @ 750 gpme.Date: 5/22/2012 1.4 APPLICABLE PUIBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):13-2013Installation of Sprinkler Systems101-2012Life Safety Code170-2012Fire Safety SymbolsC.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):Fire Protection Equipment Directory – 2013D.Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM):Approval Guide – 2013E.International Building Code – 2012F. Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research-2005PART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 PIPING & FITTINGSA.Sprinkler systems in accordance with NFPA 13. 2.2 SPRINKLERSA.All sprinklers shall be FM approved. Provide quick response sprinklers in all areas, except where specifically prohibited by their listing or approval.B.Temperature Ratings: In accordance with NFPA 13.2.3 PIPE hangers and SUPPORTSSupports, hangers, etc., of an approved pattern placement to conform to NFPA 13. System piping shall be substantially supported to the building structure. The installation of hangers and supports shall adhere to the requirements set forth in NFPA 13, Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems. Materials used in the installation or construction of hangers and supports shall be listed and approved for such application. Hangers or supports not specifically listed for service shall be designed and bear the seal of a professional engineer. 2.4 WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATESProvide chrome plated steel escutcheon plates for exposed piping passing though walls, floors or ceilings.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Installation shall be accomplished by the licensed contractor. Provide a qualified technician, experienced in the installation and operation of the type of system being installed, to supervise the installation and testing of the system.B.Installation of Piping: Accurately cut pipe to measurements established by the installer and work into place without springing or forcing. In any situation where bending of the pipe is required, use a standard pipe-bending template. Install concealed piping in spaces that have finished ceilings. Where ceiling mounted equipment exists, such as in operating and radiology rooms, install sprinklers so as not to obstruct the movement or operation of the equipment. Sidewall heads may need to be utilized. C.Welding: Conform to the requirements and recommendations of NFPA 13.D.Sleeves: Provide for pipes passing through masonry or concrete. Provide space between the pipe and the sleeve in accordance with NFPA 13. Seal this space with a UL Listed through penetration fire stop material in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. Where core drilling is used in lieu of sleeves, also seal space. Seal penetrations of walls, floors and ceilings of other types of construction, in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.E.Firestopping shall comply with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.F.Repairs: Repair damage to the building or equipment resulting from the installation of the sprinkler system by the installer at no additional expense to the Government.G.Interruption of Service: There shall be no interruption of the existing sprinkler protection, water, electric, or fire alarm services without prior permission of the Contracting Officer. Contractor shall develop an interim fire protection program where interruptions involve in occupied spaces. Request in writing at least one week prior to the planned interruption. 3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTA.Preliminary Testing: Flush newly installed systems prior to performing hydrostatic tests in order to remove any debris which may have been left as well as ensuring piping is unobstructed. Hydrostatically test system, as specified in NFPA 13, in the presence of the Contracting Officers Technical Representative (COTR) or his designated representative. B.Final Inspection and Testing: Subject system to tests in accordance with NFPA 13, and when all necessary corrections have been accomplished, advise COTR to schedule a final inspection and test. Connection to the fire alarm system shall have been in service for at least ten days prior to the final inspection, with adjustments made to prevent false alarms. Furnish all instruments, labor and materials required for the tests and provide the services of the installation foreman or other competent representative of the installer to perform the tests. Correct deficiencies and retest system as necessary, prior to the final acceptance. Include the operation of all features of the systems under normal operations in test.3.3 INSTRUCTIONSFurnish the services of a competent instructor for not less than one hour for instructing personnel in the operation and maintenance of the system, on the dates requested by the COTR.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 22 05 11COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBINGPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.The requirements of this Section shall apply to all sections of Division 22. B.Definitions:1.Exposed: Piping and equipment exposed to view in finished rooms. 2.Option or optional: Contractor's choice of an alternate material or method. 1.2 RELATED WORK Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.Section 02 82 11, TRADITIONAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT. D.Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS. E.Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. F.Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS. G.Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.H.Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTSI.Section 22 07 11, PLUMBING INSULATION.J.Section 23 09 23, DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS FOR HVAC. K.Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONSL.Section 22 05 23, GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Products Criteria:1.Standard Products: Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least 3 years. However, digital electronics devices, software and systems such as controls, instruments, shall be the current generation of technology and basic design that has a proven satisfactory service record of at least three years.2.Equipment Service: There shall be permanent service organizations, authorized and trained by manufacturers of the equipment supplied, located within 160 km (100 miles) of the project. These organizations shall come to the site and provide acceptable service to restore operations within four hours of receipt of notification by phone, e-mail or fax in event of an emergency, such as the shut-down of equipment; or within 24 hours in a non-emergency. Names, mail and e-mail addresses and phone numbers of service organizations providing service under these conditions for (as applicable to the project): critical instrumentation, and programming shall be submitted for project record and inserted into the operations and maintenance manual. 3.All items furnished shall be free from defects that would adversely affect the performance, maintainability and appearance of individual components and overall assembly.4.The products and execution of work specified in Division 22 shall conform to the referenced codes and standards as required by the specifications. Local codes and amendments enforced by the local code official shall be enforced, if required by local authorities. If the local codes are more stringent, then the local code shall apply. Any conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Contracting Officers Technical Representative (COTR).5.Multiple Units: When two or more units of materials or equipment of the same type or class are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer.6.Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use components made by others, assume complete responsibility for the final assembled product.7.Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast integrally with equipment, stamped or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment.8.Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used.B.Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the COTR prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material. C.Execution (Installation, Construction) Quality:1.All items shall be applied and installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Conflicts between the manufacturer's instructions and the contract drawings and specifications shall be referred to the COTR for resolution. Written hard copies or computer files of manufacturer’s installation instructions shall be provided to the COTR at least two weeks prior to commencing installation of any item.plete layout drawings shall be required by Paragraph, SUBMITTALS. Construction work shall not start on any system until the layout drawings have been approved.D.Guaranty: Warranty of Construction, FAR clause 52.246-21.E.Plumbing Systems: IPC, International Plumbing Code.1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submittals shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES. rmation and material submitted under this section shall be marked "SUBMITTED UNDER SECTION 22 05 11, COMNON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING", with applicable paragraph identification.C.Contractor shall make all necessary field measurements and investigations to assure that the equipment and assemblies will meet contract requirements.D.If equipment is submitted which differs in arrangement from that shown, provide drawings that show the rearrangement of all associated systems. Approval will be given only if all features of the equipment and associated systems, including accessibility, are equivalent to that required by the contract.E.Prior to submitting shop drawings for approval, contractor shall certify in writing that manufacturers of all major items of equipment have each reviewed drawings and specifications, and have jointly coordinated and properly integrated their equipment and controls to provide a complete and efficient installation.F.Upon request by Government, lists of previous installations for selected items of equipment shall be provided. Contact persons who will serve as references, with telephone numbers and e-mail addresses shall be submitted with the references.G.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Manufacturer’s literature shall be submitted under the pertinent section rather than under this section. 1.Electric motor data shall be submitted with the driven equipment. 2.Equipment and materials identification. 3.Fire stopping materials. 4.Hangers, inserts, supports and bracing.5.Wall, floor, and ceiling plates. H.Coordination Drawings: plete consolidated and coordinated layout drawings shall be submitted for all new systems, and for existing systems that are in the same areas. The drawings shall include plan views, elevations and sections of all systems and shall be on a scale of not less than 1:32 (3/8-inch equal to one foot). Clearly identify and dimension the proposed locations of the principal items of equipment. The drawings shall clearly show the proposed location and adequate clearance for all equipment, piping, pumps, valves and other items. All valves, trap primer valves, water hammer arrestors, strainers, and equipment requiring service shall be provided with an access door sized for the complete removal of plumbing device, component, or equipment. Equipment foundations shall not be installed until equipment or piping until layout drawings have been approved. Detailed layout drawings shall be provided for all piping systems. In addition, details of the following shall be provided.a.Interstitial space.b.Hangers, inserts, supports, and bracing. c.Pipe sleeves. d.Equipment penetrations of floors, walls, ceilings, or roofs. 2.Work installed before coordinating with other trades or as to cause any interference with work of other trades shall be changed by the Contractor to correct the conditions at his expense.3.Drawings shall show existing services where clearances for access are to be maintained. 4. Relocate existing work or modify location of new work as required to maintain required clearances.I.Maintenance Data and Operating Instructions: 1.Maintenance and operating manuals in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, INSTRUCTIONS, for systems and equipment. 2.Listing of recommended replacement parts for keeping in stock supply, including sources of supply, for equipment shall be provided.1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Protection of Equipment: 1.Equipment and material placed on the job site shall remain in the custody of the Contractor until phased acceptance, whether or not the Government has reimbursed the Contractor for the equipment and material. The Contractor is solely responsible for the protection of such equipment and material against any damage.2.Damaged equipment shall be replaced with an identical unit as determined and directed by the COTR. Such replacement shall be at no additional cost to the Government.3.Interiors of new equipment and piping systems shall be protected against entry of foreign matter. Both inside and outside shall be cleaned before painting or placing equipment in operation. Do not use rags, wool, cotton, paper, waste, or similar materials for plugging.4.Existing equipment and piping being worked on by the Contractor shall be under the custody and responsibility of the Contractor and shall be protected as required for new work.B.Cleanliness of Piping and Equipment Systems:1.Care shall be exercised in the storage and handling of equipment and piping material to be incorporated in the work. Debris arising from cutting and threading of piping shall be removed.2.Piping systems shall be flushed, blown or pigged as necessary to deliver clean systems.3.All piping shall be tested in accordance with the specifications and the International Plumbing Code (IPC), latest edition. All strainers, fixture faucets shall be flushed of debris prior to final acceptance.4.Contractor shall be fully responsible for all costs, damage, and delay arising from failure to provide clean systems.1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below shall form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC): SEC IX-2010Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications. C.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A36/A36M-2008Standard Specification for Carbon Structural SteelA575-96 (R 2007)Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades R (2002)E84-2012Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials E1192012Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials D.Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc: SP5809Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design and Manufacture SP 69-2003 (R 2004)Pipe Hangers and Supports-Selection and ApplicationE.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):MG1-2011Motors and GeneratorsInternational Code Council, (ICC):IBC-2012International Building CodeIPC-2012International Plumbing CodePART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FACTORY-ASSEMBLED PRODUCTSA.Standardization of components shall be maximized to reduce spare part requirements.B.Manufacturers of equipment assemblies that include components made by others shall assume complete responsibility for final assembled unit.1.All components of an assembled unit need not be products of same manufacturer.2.Constituent parts that are alike shall be products of a single manufacturer.ponents shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for intended service.4.Contractor shall guarantee performance of assemblies of components, and shall repair or replace elements of the assemblies as required to deliver specified performance of the complete assembly.ponents of equipment shall bear manufacturer's name and trademark, model number, serial number and performance data on a name plate securely affixed in a conspicuous place, or cast integral with, stamped or otherwise permanently marked upon the components of the equipment.D.Major items of equipment, which serve the same function, shall be the same make and model2.2 COMPATIBILITY OF RELATED EQUIPMENT A.Equipment and materials installed shall be compatible in all respects with other items being furnished and with existing items so that the result will be a complete and fully operational system that conforms to contract requirements.2.7 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS IDENTIFICATION A.Use symbols, nomenclature and equipment numbers specified, shown on the drawings, or shown in the maintenance manuals. Identification for piping is specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING. D.Control Items: All temperature, pressure, and controllers shall be labeled and the component’s function identified. Identify and label each item as they appear on the control diagrams. E.Valve Tags and Lists: 1.Plumbing: All valves shall be provided with valve tags and listed on a valve list (Fixture stops not included). 2.Valve tags: Engraved black filled numbers and letters not less than 13 mm (1/2inch) high for number designation, and not less than 6.4 mm(1/4inch) for service designation on 19 gage, 38 mm (11/2 inches) round brass disc, attached with brass "S" hook or brass chain. 3.Valve lists: Valve lists shall be created using a word processing program and printed on plastic coated cards. The plastic coated valve list card(s), sized 216 mm (81/2 inches) by 280 mm (11 inches) shall show valve tag number, valve function and area of control for each service or system. The valve list shall be in a punched 3ring binder notebook. A copy of the valve list shall be mounted in picture frames for mounting to a wall.4.A detailed plan for each floor of the building indicating the location and valve number for each valve shall be provided. Each valve location shall be identified with a color coded sticker or thumb tack in ceiling.2.8 FIRE STOPPING A.Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING specifies an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases where penetrations occur for piping. Refer to Section 22 07 11, PLUMBING INSULATION, for pipe insulation. 2.9 GALVANIZED REPAIR COMPOUNDA.Mil. Spec. DODP21035B, paint. 2.10 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND RESTRAINTSA.In lieu of the paragraph which follows, suspended equipment support and restraints may be designed and installed in accordance with the International Building Code (IBC), latest edition, and SECTION 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS. Submittals based on the International Building Code (IBC), latest edition, SECTION 13 05 41 requirements, or the following paragraphs of this Section shall be stamped and signed by a professional engineer registered in a state where the project is located. The Support system of suspended equipment over 227 kg (500 pounds) shall be submitted for approval of the COTR in all cases. See these specifications for lateral force design requirements.B.Type Numbers Specified: MSS SP58. For selection and application refer to MSS SP69. Refer to Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS, for miscellaneous metal support materials and prime coat painting. C.For Attachment to Concrete Construction:1.Concrete insert: Type 18, MSS SP58. 2.Selfdrilling expansion shields and machine bolt expansion anchors: Permitted in concrete not less than 102 mm (4 inches) thick when approved by the COTR for each job condition.3.Powerdriven fasteners: Permitted in existing concrete or masonry not less than 102 mm (4 inches) thick when approved by the COTR for each job condition. D.For Attachment to Steel Construction: MSS SP58. 1.Welded attachment: Type 22. 2.Beam clamps: Types 20, 21, 28 or 29. Type 23 Cclamp may be used for individual copper tubing up to 23 mm (7/8inch) outside diameter. E.For Attachment to Wood Construction: Wood screws or lag bolts. F.Hanger Rods: Hotrolled steel, ASTM A36 or A575 for allowable load listed in MSS SP58. For piping, provide adjustment means for controlling level or slope. Types 13 or 15 turnbuckles shall provide 38 mm (11/2 inches) minimum of adjustment and incorporate locknuts. Allthread rods are acceptable. G.Multiple (Trapeze) Hangers: Galvanized, cold formed, lipped steel channel horizontal member, not less than 41 mm by 41 mm (15/8 inches by 15/8 inches), 2.7 mm (No. 12 gage), designed to accept special spring held, hardened steel nuts. 1.Allowable hanger load: Manufacturers rating less 91kg (200 pounds). 2.Guide individual pipes on the horizontal member of every other trapeze hanger with 6 mm (1/4inch) Ubolt fabricated from steel rod. Provide Type 40 insulation shield, secured by two 13 mm (1/2inch) galvanized steel bands, or insulated calcium silicate shield for insulated piping at each hanger. H.Pipe Hangers and Supports: (MSS SP58), use hangers sized to encircle insulation on insulated piping. Refer to Section 22 07 11, PLUMBING INSULATION for insulation thickness. To protect insulation, provide Type 39 saddles for roller type supports or insulated calcium silicate shields. Provide Type 40 insulation shield or insulated calcium silicate shield at all other types of supports and hangers including those for insulated piping.1.General Types (MSS SP58): a.Standard clevis hanger: Type 1; provide locknut. b.Riser clamps: Type 8. c.Wall brackets: Types 31, 32 or 33. d.Roller supports: Type 41, 43, 44 and 46. e.Saddle support: Type 36, 37 or 38. f.Turnbuckle: Types 13 or 15.g.Ubolt clamp: Type 24. h.Copper Tube: 1)Hangers, clamps and other support material in contact with tubing shall be painted with copper colored epoxy paint, plastic coated or taped with isolation tape to prevent electrolysis.2)For vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser clamps.3)For supporting tube to strut: Provide epoxy painted pipe straps for copper tube or plastic inserted vibration isolation clamps.4)Insulated Lines: Provide pre-insulated calcium silicate shields sized for copper tube.i.Supports for plastic piping: As recommended by the pipe manufacturer with black rubber tape extending one inch beyond steel support or clamp. 2.Plumbing Piping (Other Than General Types): a.Horizontal piping: Type 1, 5, 7, 9, and 10. b.Chrome plated piping: Chrome plated supports. c.Hangers and supports in pipe chase: Prefabricated system ABS selfextinguishing material, not subject to electrolytic action, to hold piping, prevent vibration and compensate for all static and operational conditions.d.Blocking, stays and bracing: Angle iron or preformed metal channel shapes, 1.3 mm (18 gage) minimum.J.Pre-insulated Calcium Silicate Shields:1.Provide 360 degree water resistant high density 965 kPa (140 psi) compressive strength calcium silicate shields encased in galvanized metal.2.Pre-insulated calcium silicate shields to be installed at the point of support during erection.3.Shield thickness shall match the pipe insulation.4.The type of shield is selected by the temperature of the pipe, the load it must carry, and the type of support it will be used with.a.Shields for supporting cold water shall have insulation that extends a minimum of one inch past the sheet metal.b.The insulated calcium silicate shield shall support the maximum allowable water filled span as indicated in MSS-SP 69. To support the load, the shields shall have one or more of the following features: structural inserts 4138 kPa (600 psi) compressive strength, an extra bottom metal shield, or formed structural steel (ASTM A36) wear plates welded to the bottom sheet metal jacket.Shields may be used on steel clevis hanger type supports, roller supports or flat surfaces.K.Seismic Restraint of Piping: Refer to Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS.2.11 PIPE PENETRATIONSA.Pipe penetration sleeves shall be installed for all pipe other than rectangular blocked out floor openings for risers in mechanical bays.B.Pipe penetration sleeve materials shall comply with all fire stopping requirements for each penetration.C.To prevent accidental liquid spills from passing to a lower level, provide the following: 1.For sleeves: Extend sleeve 25 mm (1 inch) above finished floor and provide sealant for watertight joint. 2.For blocked out floor openings: Provide 40 mm (11/2 inch) angle set in silicone adhesive around opening. 3.For drilled penetrations: Provide 40 mm (11/2 inch) angle ring or square set in silicone adhesive around penetration. D.Penetrations are not allowed through beams or ribs, but may be installed in concrete beam flanges. Any deviation from these requirements must receive prior approval of COTR. E.Sheet metal, plastic, or moisture resistant fiber sleeves shall be provided for pipe passing through floors, interior walls, and partitions, unless brass or steel pipe sleeves are specifically called for below.F.Galvanized steel or an alternate black iron pipe with asphalt coating sleeves shall be for pipe passing through concrete beam flanges, except where brass pipe sleeves are called for. A galvanized steel Sleeve shall be provided for pipe passing through floor of mechanical rooms. Except in mechanical rooms, sleeves shall be connected with a floor plate. G.Brass Pipe Sleeves shall be provided for pipe passing through quarry tile, terrazzo or ceramic tile floors. The sleeve shall be connected with a floor plate. H.Sleeve clearance through floors, walls, partitions, and beam flanges shall be 25 mm (1 inch) greater in diameter than external diameter of pipe. Sleeve for pipe with insulation shall be large enough to accommodate the insulation plus 25 mm (1 inch) in diameter. Interior openings shall be caulked tight with fire stopping material and sealant to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and gases. I.Sealant and Adhesives: Shall be as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS. 2.12 TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS A.Furnish, and turn over to the COTR, special tools not readily available commercially, that are required for disassembly or adjustment of equipment and machinery furnished. B.Grease Guns with Attachments for Applicable Fittings: One for each type of grease required for each motor or other equipment. C.Tool Containers: metal, permanently identified for intended service and mounted, or located, where directed by the COTR. D.Lubricants: A minimum of 0.95 L (1 quart) of oil, and 0.45 kg (1 pound) of grease, of equipment manufacturer's recommended grade and type, in unopened containers and properly identified as to use for each different application. 2.13 WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES A.Material and Type: Chrome plated brass or chrome plated steel, one piece or split type with concealed hinge, with set screw for fastening to pipe, or sleeve. Use plates that fit tight around pipes, cover openings around pipes and cover the entire pipe sleeve projection. B.Thickness: Not less than 2.4 mm (3/32inch) for floor plates. For wall and ceiling plates, not less than 0.64 mm (0.025-inch) for up to 80 mm (3 inch) pipe, 0.89 mm (0.035-inch) for larger pipe. C.Locations: Use where pipe penetrates floors, walls and ceilings in exposed locations, in finished areas only. Wall plates shall be used where insulation ends on exposed water supply pipe drop from overhead. A watertight joint shall be provided in spaces where brass or steel pipe sleeves are specified. 2.14 ASBESTOSMaterials containing asbestos are not permitted.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ARRANGEMENT AND INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING A.Location of piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, and equipment, access provisions shall be coordinated with the work of all trades. Piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, and equipment shall be located clear of windows, doors, openings, light outlets, and other services and utilities. Equipment layout drawings shall be prepared to coordinate proper location and personnel access of all facilities. The drawings shall be submitted for review.B.Manufacturer's published recommendations shall be followed for installation methods not otherwise specified. C.Operating Personnel Access and Observation Provisions: All equipment and systems shall be arranged to provide clear view and easy access, without use of portable ladders, for maintenance and operation of all devices including, but not limited to: all equipment items, valves, filters, strainers, transmitters, sensors, control devices. All gages and indicators shall be clearly visible by personnel standing on the floor or on permanent platforms. Maintenance and operating space and access provisions that are shown on the drawings shall not be changed nor reduced. D.Structural systems necessary for pipe and equipment support shall be coordinated to permit proper installation.E.Location of pipe sleeves and chases shall be accurately coordinated with equipment and piping locations.F.Cutting Holes:1.Holes through concrete and masonry shall be cut by rotary core drill. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, and hand or manual hammer type drill will not be allowed, except as permitted by COTR where working area space is limited.2.Holes shall be located to avoid interference with structural members such as beams or grade beams. Holes shall be laid out in advance and drilling done only after approval by COTR. If the Contractor considers it necessary to drill through structural members, this matter shall be referred to COTR for approval.3.Waterproof membrane shall not be penetrated. Pipe floor penetration block outs shall be provided outside the extents of the waterproof membrane.G.Interconnection of Instrumentation or Control Devices: Generally, electrical and pneumatic interconnections are not shown but must be provided.H.Minor Piping: Generally, small diameter pipe runs from drips and drains, water cooling, and other service are not shown but must be provided.I.Protection and Cleaning: 1.Equipment and materials shall be carefully handled, properly stored, and adequately protected to prevent damage before and during installation, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the COTR. Damaged or defective items in the opinion of the COTR, shall be replaced. 2.Protect all finished parts of equipment, such as shafts and bearings where accessible, from rust prior to operation by means of protective grease coating and wrapping. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. Pipe openings, equipment, and plumbing fixtures shall be tightly covered against dirt or mechanical injury. At completion of all work thoroughly clean fixtures, exposed materials and equipment. J.Concrete and Grout: Concrete and shrink compensating grout 25 MPa (3000 psi) minimum, shall be used for all pad or floor mounted equipment. Gages, thermometers, valves and other devices shall be installed with due regard for ease in reading or operating and maintaining said devices. Thermometers and gages shall be located and positioned to be easily read by operator or staff standing on floor or walkway provided. Servicing shall not require dismantling adjacent equipment or pipe work.K.Interconnection of Controls and Instruments: Electrical interconnection is generally not shown but shall be provided. This includes interconnections of sensors, transmitters, transducers, control devices, control and instrumentation panels, instruments and computer workstations. Comply with NFPA-70.L.Many plumbing systems interface with the HVAC control system. See the HVAC control points list and section 23 09 23 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS FOR HVACM. Work in Existing Building: 1.Perform as specified in Article, OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS, Article, ALTERATIONS, and Article, RESTORATION of the Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS for relocation of existing equipment, alterations and restoration of existing building(s). 2.As specified in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS, make alterations to existing service piping at times that will cause the least interfere with normal operation of the facility. N.Work in bathrooms, restrooms, housekeeping closets: All pipe penetrations behind escutcheons shall be sealed with plumbers putty. P.Inaccessible Equipment:1.Where the Government determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, equipment shall be removed and reinstalled or remedial action performed as directed at no additional cost to the Government.2.The term "conveniently accessible" is defined as capable of being reached without the use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as electrical conduit, motors, fans, pumps, belt guards, transformers, high voltage lines, piping, and ductwork.3.2 TEMPORARY PIPING AND EQUIPMENTA.Continuity of operation of existing facilities may require temporary installation or relocation of equipment and piping. Temporary equipment or pipe installation or relocation shall be provided to maintain continuity of operation of existing facilities.B.The Contractor shall provide all required facilities in accordance with the requirements of phased construction and maintenance of service. All piping and equipment shall be properly supported, sloped to drain, operate without excessive stress, and shall be insulated where injury can occur to personnel by contact with operating facilities. The requirements of Para. 3.1 shall apply.C.Temporary facilities and piping shall be completely removed and any openings in structures sealed. Necessary blind flanges and caps shall be provided to seal open piping remaining in service.3.3 RIGGINGA.Openings in building structures shall be planned to accommodate design scheme.B.Alternative methods of equipment delivery may be offered and will be considered by Government under specified restrictions of phasing and service requirements as well as structural integrity of the building.C.All openings in the building shall be closed when not required for rigging operations to maintain proper environment in the facility for Government operation and maintenance of service. D.Contractor shall provide all facilities required to deliver specified equipment and place on foundations. Attachments to structures for rigging purposes and support of equipment on structures shall be Contractor's full responsibility.E.Contractor shall check all clearances, weight limitations and shall provide a rigging plan designed by a Registered Professional Engineer. All modifications to structures, including reinforcement thereof, shall be at Contractor's cost, time and responsibility.F.Rigging plan and methods shall be referred to COTR for evaluation prior to actual work.3.4 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A.Where hanger spacing does not correspond with joist or rib spacing, use structural steel channels secured directly to joist and rib structure that will correspond to the required hanger spacing, and then suspend the equipment and piping from the channels. Holes shall be drilled or burned in structural steel only with the prior written approval of the COTR. B.The use of chain pipe supports, wire or strap hangers; wood for blocking, stays and bracing, or hangers suspended from piping above shall not be permitted. Rusty products shall be replaced.C.Hanger rods shall be used that are straight and vertical. Turnbuckles for vertical adjustments may be omitted where limited space prevents use. A minimum of 15 mm (1/2inch) clearance between pipe or piping covering and adjacent work shall be provided. D.For horizontal and vertical plumbing pipe supports, refer to the International Plumbing Code (IPC), latest edition, and these specifications.E.Overhead Supports:1.The basic structural system of the building is designed to sustain the loads imposed by equipment and piping to be supported overhead.2.Provide steel structural members, in addition to those shown, of adequate capability to support the imposed loads, located in accordance with the final approved layout of equipment and piping.3.Tubing and capillary systems shall be supported in channel troughs.F. Floor Supports:1.Provide concrete bases, concrete anchor blocks and pedestals, and structural steel systems for support of equipment and piping. Concrete bases and structural systems shall be anchored and doweled to resist forces under operating and seismic conditions (if applicable) without excessive displacement or structural failure.2.Bases and supports shall not be located and installed until equipment mounted thereon has been approved. Bases shall be sized to match equipment mounted thereon plus 50 mm (2 inch) excess on all edges. Structural drawings shall be reviewed for additional requirements. Bases shall be neatly finished and smoothed, shall have chamfered edges at the top, and shall be suitable for painting.3.All equipment shall be shimmed, leveled, firmly anchored, and grouted with epoxy grout. Anchor bolts shall be placed in sleeves, anchored to the bases. Fill the annular space between sleeves and bolts with a grout material to permit alignment and realignment.For seismic anchoring, refer to Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS. 3.5 LUBRICATION A.All equipment and devices requiring lubrication shall be lubricated prior to initial operation. All devices and equipment shall be field checked for proper lubrication.B.All devices and equipment shall be equipped with required lubrication fittings. A minimum of one liter (one quart) of oil and 0.5 kg (one pound) of grease of manufacturer's recommended grade and type for each different application shall be provided. All materials shall be delivered to COTR in unopened containers that are properly identified as to application.C.A separate grease gun with attachments for applicable fittings shall be provided for each type of grease applied.D.All lubrication points shall be accessible without disassembling equipment, except to remove access plates.E.All lubrication points shall be extended to one side of the equipment.3.6 Plumbing systems DEMOLITIONA.Rigging access, other than indicated on the drawings, shall be provided after approval for structural integrity by the COTR. Such access shall be provided without additional cost or time to the Government. Approved protection from dust and debris shall be provided at all times for the safety of personnel.B.Work shall be confined to the immediate area concerned; maintain cleanliness and minimize dust. Dust and debris shall not be permitted to accumulate in the area. All flame cutting shall be performed to maintain the fire safety integrity. Adequate fire extinguishing facilities shall be available at all times. All work shall be performed in accordance with recognized fire protection standards. Inspections will be made by personnel of the VA Medical Center, and the Contractor shall follow all directives of the COTR with regard to rigging, safety, fire safety, and maintenance of operations.C.Unless specified otherwise, all piping, wiring, conduit, and other devices associated with the equipment not re-used in the new work shall be completely removed from Government property. This includes all concrete equipment pads, pipe, valves, fittings, insulation, and all hangers including the top connection and any fastenings to building structural systems. All openings shall be sealed after removal of equipment, pipes, ducts, and other penetrations in roof, walls, floors, in an approved manner and in accordance with plans and specifications where specifically covered. Structural integrity of the building system shall be maintained. Reference shall also be made to the drawings and specifications of the other disciplines in the project for additional facilities to be demolished or handled.D.All valves including gate, globe, ball, butterfly and check, all pressure gages and thermometers with wells shall remain Government property and shall be removed and delivered to COTR and stored as directed. The Contractor shall remove all other material and equipment, devices and demolition debris under these plans and specifications. Such material shall be removed from Government property expeditiously and shall not be allowed to accumulate.E.Asbestos Insulation Removal: Conform to Section 02 82 11, TRADITIONAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT.3.7 CLEANING AND PAINTINGA.Prior to final inspection and acceptance of the plant and facilities for beneficial use by the Government, the plant facilities, equipment and systems shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted. Refer to Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.B.In addition, the following special conditions apply:Cleaning shall be thorough. Solvents, cleaning materials and methods recommended by the manufacturers shall be used for the specific tasks. All rust shall be removed prior to painting and from surfaces to remain unpainted. Scratches, scuffs, and abrasions shall be repaired prior to applying prime and finish coats. The following Material And Equipment shall NOT be painted::a.Motors, controllers, control switches, and safety switches.b.Control and interlock devices.c.Regulators.d.Pressure reducing valves.e.Control valves and thermostatic elements.f.Lubrication devices and grease fittings.g.Copper, brass, aluminum, stainless steel and bronze surfaces.h.Valve stems and rotating shafts.i.Pressure gages and thermometers.j.Glass.k.Name plates.3.Control and instrument panels shall be cleaned and damaged surfaces repaired. Touch-up painting shall be made with matching paint obtained from manufacturer or computer matched.5.Temporary Facilities: Apply paint to surfaces that do not have existing finish coats.6.The final result shall be a smooth, even-colored, even-textured factory finish on all items. The entire piece of equipment shall be repainted, if necessary, to achieve this.3.8 IDENTIFICATION SIGNSA.Laminated plastic signs, with engraved lettering not less than 5 mm (3/16-inch) high, shall be provided that designates equipment function, for all equipment, switches, motor controllers, relays, meters, control devices, including automatic control valves. Nomenclature and identification symbols shall correspond to that used in maintenance manual, and in diagrams specified elsewhere. Attach by chain, adhesive, or screws.B.Factory Built Equipment: Metal plate, securely attached, with name and address of manufacturer, serial number, model number, size, performance shall be placed on factory built equipment.C.Pipe Identification: Refer to Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.3.9 STARTUP AND TEMPORARY OPERATION A.Start up of equipment shall be performed as described in the equipment specifications. Vibration within specified tolerance shall be verified prior to extended operation. Temporary use of equipment is specified in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, TEMPORARY USE OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. 3.10 OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS A.Prior to the final inspection, all required tests shall be performed as specified in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, TESTS and submit the test reports and records to the COTR. B.Should evidence of malfunction in any tested system, or piece of equipment or component part thereof, occur during or as a result of tests, make proper corrections, repairs or replacements, and repeat tests at no additional cost to the Government. C.When completion of certain work or system occurs at a time when final control settings and adjustments cannot be properly made to make performance tests, then make performance tests such systems respectively during first actual seasonal use of respective systems following completion of work. 3.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALSA.Provide four bound copies. The Operations and maintenance manuals shall be delivered to COTR not less than 30 days prior to completion of a phase or final inspection.B.All new and temporary equipment and all elements of each assembly shall be included.C.Data sheet on each device listing model, size, capacity, pressure, and other information shall be included.D.Manufacturer’s installation, maintenance, repair, and operation instructions for each device shall be included. Assembly drawings and parts lists shall also be included. A summary of operating precautions and reasons for precautions shall be included in the Operations and Maintenance Manual.E.Lubrication instructions, type and quantity of lubricant shall be included.F.Schematic diagrams and wiring diagrams of all control systems corrected to include all field modifications shall be included.Set points of all interlock devices shall be listed.H.Trouble-shooting guide for the control system troubleshooting guide shall be inserted into the Operations and Maintenance Manual.I.The combustion control system sequence of operation corrected with submittal review comments shall be inserted into the Operations and Maintenance Manual.J.Emergency procedures.3.12 INSTRUCTIONS TO VA PERSONNELInstructions shall be provided in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, of Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. E N D SECTION 22 05 19GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPINGPART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section describes the requirements for pressure gages.1.2 RELATED WORK Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES. B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 2.Pressure Gages.4.Product certificates for each type of gaugeC.Operations and Maintenance manual shall include: 1.System Description2.Major assembly block diagrams3.Troubleshooting and preventive maintenance guidelines4.Spare parts information.D.Shop Drawings shall include the following: 1.One line, wiring and terminal diagrams including terminals identified, protocol or communication modules, and Ethernet connections.1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.American National Standards Institute (ANSI): American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): (Copyrighted Society)B40.1-05Gauges-Pressure Indicating Dial Type-Elastic D.International Code Council (ICC):IPC12International Plumbing Code1.5 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATIONA.The electronic documentation and copies of the Operations and Maintenance Manual, approved submittals, shop drawings, and other closeout documentation shall be prepared by a computer software program complying with Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended (29 U.S.C 794d). The manufacturer or vendor of the software used to prepare the electronic documentation shall have a Voluntary Product Accessibility Template made available for review and included as part of the Operations and Maintenance Manual or closeout documentation. All available accessibility functions listed in the Voluntary Accessibility Template shall be enabled in the prepared electronic files. As Adobe Acrobat is a common industry format for such documentation, following the document, "Creating Accessible Adobe PDF files, A Guide for Document Authors" that is maintained and made available by Adobe free of charge is recommended.”B.Four sets of manufacturer’s literature and data updated to include submittal review comments and any equipment substitutions.C.Four sets of operation and maintenance data updated to include submittal review comments shall be inserted into a three ring binder. All aspects of system operation and maintenance procedures, including piping isometrics, wiring diagrams of all circuits, a written description of system design, control logic, and sequence of operation shall be included in the operation and maintenance manual. The operations and maintenance manual shall include troubleshooting techniques and procedures for emergency situations. Notes on all special systems or devices such as interlocks shall be included. A List of recommended spare parts (manufacturer, model number, and quantity) shall be furnished. Information explaining any special knowledge or tools the Government will be required to employ shall be inserted into the As-Built documentation.PART 2 – PRODUCTS2.5 PRESSURE GAGES FOR WATER USAGE A.ANSI B40.1 all metal case 114 mm (41/2 inches) diameter, bottom connected throughout, graduated as required for service, and identity labeled. Range shall be 0 to 1375 kPa (0 to 200 psi) gauge.B.The pressure element assembly shall be bourdon tube. The mechanical movement shall be lined to pressure element and connected to pointer. C.The dial shall be non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in kPa and psi.D.The pointer shall be dark colored metal.E.The window shall be glass.F.The ring shall be brass or stainless steel.G.The accuracy shall be grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Direct mounted pressure gages shall be installed in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position. B.Valves and snubbers shall be installed in piping for each pressure gage.D.Pressure gages shall be installed where indicated on the drawings E N D -SECTION 22 05 23GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPINGPART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.This section describes the requirements for general-duty valves for domestic water and sewer systems.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING. B.Section 22 07 11, PLUMBING INSULATION.1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES. B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Valves. 2.Backflow Preventers. 4.Backwater Valves5.All items listed in Part 2 - Products. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A536-84(R 2004) Standard Specification for Ductile Iron CastingsC.American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE)ASSE 1012-09Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric VentASSE 1013-11Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow PreventersD.International Code Council (ICC)IPC-2012International Plumbing CodeD.Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS):SP-25-08Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and UnionsSP-67-02a (R 2004) Butterfly Valve of the Single flange Type (Lug Wafer)SP-70-11Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.SP-72-10Ball Valves With Flanged or Butt Welding For General PurposeSP-80-08Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.SP-110-10Ball Valve Threaded, Socket Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA.Valves shall be prepared for shipping as follows:1.Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.2.Protect threads, flange faces, and weld ends.3.Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.4.Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces5.Block check valves in either closed or open position.B.Valves shall be prepared for storage as follows:1.Maintain valve end protection.2.Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature.C.A sling shall be used for large valves. The sling shall be rigged to avoid damage to exposed parts. Hand wheels or stems shall not be used as lifting or rigging points.PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES A.Asbestos packing and gaskets are prohibited.B.Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc shall not be permitted.C.Valves in insulated piping shall have 50 mm or DN50 (2 inch) stem extensions and extended handles of non-thermal conductive material that allows operating the valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing the insulation. Memory stops shall be fully adjustable after insulation is applied.D.Ball valves, pressure regulating valves, gate valves, globe valves, and plug valves used to supply potable water shall meet the requirements of NSF 61, Annex G.1.All inline devices installed on the domestic service lines or building distribution system downstream of the water main and before end point devices and is in contact with the water intended for human ingestion shall comply with the Safe Drinking Water Act and National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Standard 61, including Annex G to provide lead-free water (not containing more than 0.25 percent lead). 2.Inline devices include water meters, building valves, check valves, meter stops, fittings, backflow preventers, etc. E.Shutoff: 1.Cold, Hot and Re-circulating Hot Water: a.50 mm or DN50 (2 inches) and smaller: Ball, MSS SP-72, SP-110, Ball valve shall be full port three piece or two piece with a union design with adjustable stem package. Threaded stem designs are not allowed. The ball valve shall have a SWP rating of 1035 kPa (150 psig) and a CWP rating of 4140 kPa (600 psig). The body material shall be Bronze ASTM B584, Alloy C844. The ends shall be solder, F.Balancing: 1.Hot Water Re-circulating, 80 mm or DN80 (3 inches) and smaller manual balancing valve shall be of bronze body, brass ball construction with glass and carbon filled TFE seat rings and designed for positive shutoff. The manual balancing valve shall have differential pressure read-out ports across the valve seat area. The read out ports shall be fitting with internal EPT inserts and check valves. The valve body shall have 8 mm or DN8 NPT (?” NPT) tapped drain and purge port. The valves shall have memory stops that allow the valve to close for service and then reopened to set point without disturbing the balance position. All valves shall have calibrated nameplates to assure specific valve settings.G.Check: 1.Check valves less than 80 mm or DN80 (3 inches) and smaller) shall be class 125, bronze swing check valves with non-metallic Buna-N disc. The check valve shall meet MSS SP-80 Type 4 standard. The check valve shall have a CWP rating of 1380 kPa (200 psig). The check valve shall have a Y pattern horizontal body design with bronze body material conforming to ASTM B 62, solder joints, and PTFE or TFE disc.H.Globe: 1.80 mm or DN80 (3 inches) or smaller: Class 150, bronze globe valve with non-metallic disc. The globe valve shall meet MSS SP-80, Type 2 standard. The globe valve shall have a CWP rating of 2070 kPa (300 psig). The valve material shall be bronze with integral seal and union ring bonnet conforming to ASTM B 62 with solder ends, copper-silicon bronze stem, TPFE or TFE disc, malleable iron hand wheel.2.3 BACKWATER VALVE A.The backwater valve shall have a cast iron body, automatic type ABS valve seat and flapper which are slightly open during periods of non-operation. The cleanout shall be extended to the finish floor and fit with a threaded countersunk plug. A clamping device shall be included when the cleanout extends through the waterproofing membrane.2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A.A backflow prevention assembly shall be installed at any point in the plumbing system where the potable water supply comes in contact with a potential source of contamination. The backflow prevention assembly shall be ASSE 1013 listed and certified.B.Reduced pressure backflow preventers shall be installed in the following applications.1. Chemical dispensing unit.2.Atmospheric Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001a.Hose bibs and sinks with threaded outlets.b.Disposers. C.The reduced pressure principle backflow prevention assembly shall be ASSE listed 1013 with full port OS&Y gate valves and an integral relief monitor switch. The main body and access cover shall be epoxy coated duct iron conforming to ASTM A536 grade 4. The seat ring and check valve shall be Noryl (NSF listed). The stem shall be stainless steel conforming to ASTM A276. The seat disc elastomer shall be EPDM. The checks and the relief valve shall be accessible for maintenance without removing the device from the line. An epoxy coated wye type strainer with flanged connections shall be installed on the inlet.D.The atmospheric vacuum breaker shall be ASSE listed 1001. The main body shall be either cast bronze. All internal polymers shall be NSF listed. The seat disc elastomer shall be silicone. The device shall be accessible for maintenance without removing the device from the service line. The installation shall not be in a concealed or inaccessible location or where the venting of water from the device during normal operation is deemed objectionable.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 eXAMINATION Valve interior shall be examined for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Special packing materials shall be removed, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.Valves shall be operated in positions from fully open to fully closed. Guides and seats shall be examined and made accessible by such operations.Threads on valve and mating pipe shall be examined for form and cleanliness. Mating flange faces shall be examined for conditions that might cause leakage. Bolting shall be checked for proper size, length, and material. Gaskets shall be verified for proper size and that its material composition is suitable for service and free from defects and damage.Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.Valves shall be located for easy access and shall be provide with separate support. Valves shall be accessible with access doors when installed inside partitions or above hard ceilings.Valves shall be installed in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipeValves shall be installed in a position to allow full stem movement.Check valves shall be installed for proper direction of flow and as follows:1.Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 3.3 ADJUSTING A.Valve packing shall be adjusted or replaced after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves shall be replaced if persistent leaking occurs. E N D -SECTION 22 07 11PLUMBING INSULATIONPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.Field applied insulation for thermal efficiency and condensation control for 1.Plumbing piping and equipment.2.Re-insulation of plumbing piping and equipment after asbestos abatement.B.Definitions 1.ASJ: All service jacket, white finish facing or jacket. 2.Air conditioned space: Space having air temperature and/or humidity controlled by mechanical equipment. 3.Cold: Equipment or piping handling media at design temperature of 16 degrees C (60 degrees F) or below. 4.Concealed: Piping above ceilings and in chases, interstitial space, and pipe spaces. 5.Exposed: Piping and equipment exposed to view in finished areas including mechanical equipment rooms. Shafts, chases, interstitial spaces, and pipe basements are not considered finished areas.6.FSK: Foilscrimkraft facing. 7.Hot: Plumbing equipment or piping handling media above 41 degrees C (105 degrees F). 8.Density: kg/m3 - kilograms per cubic meter (Pcf - pounds per cubic foot). 9.Thermal conductance: Heat flow rate through materials.a.Flat surface: Watts per square meter (BTU per hour per square foot). b.Pipe or Cylinder: Watts per square meter (BTU per hour per linear foot). 10. Thermal Conductivity (k): Watt per meter, per degree C (BTU per inch thickness, per hour, per square foot, per degree F temperature difference). 11. Vapor Retarder (Vapor Barrier): A material which retards the transmission (migration) of water vapor. Performance of the vapor retarder is rated in terms of permeance (perms). For the purpose of this specification, vapor retarders shall have a maximum published permeance of 0.1 perms and vapor barriers shall have a maximum published permeance of 0.001 perms. 12. HWR: Hot water recirculation.13. CW: Cold water.14. HW: Hot water.15. PVDC: Polyvinylidene chloride vapor retarder jacketing, white.1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 02 82 11, TRADITIONAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT: Insulation containing asbestos material.B. Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING: Mineral fiber and bond breaker behind sealant. C. Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING: General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division 22. D. Section 22 05 23, GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING: Hot and cold water piping.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Refer to article QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING.B.Criteria: ply with NFPA 90A, particularly paragraphs 4.3.3.1 through 4.3.3.3 and 4.3.11.2.6 parts of which are quoted as follows:4.3.3.1 Pipe and duct insulation and coverings, duct linings, vapor retarder facings, adhesives, fasteners, tapes, and supplementary materials added to air ducts, plenums, panels, and duct silencers used in duct systems, unless otherwise provided for in 4.3.3.1.1 or 4.3.3.1.2, shall have, in the form in which they are used, a maximum flame spread index of 25 without evidence of continued progressive combustion and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM 5 84 for Standard Test Method of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials or with ANSI/UL 723 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. Pipe and duct insulation and coverings, duct linings and their adhesives, and tapes shall use the specimen preparation and mounting procedures of ASTM E 2231, Standard Practice for Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Pipe and Duct Insulation Materials to Assess Surface Burning Characteristics. 4.3.3.1.1 The flame spread index and smoke developed index requirements of 4.3.3.1 shall not apply to air duct weatherproof coverings where they are located entirely outside of a building, do not penetrate a wall or roof, and do not create an exposure hazard.4.3.3.3 Coverings and linings for air ducts, pipes, plenums, and panels including all pipe and duct insulation materials shall not flame, glow, smolder, or smoke when tested in accordance with, ASTM C 411, Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of High-Temperature Thermal Insulation, at the temperature to which they are exposed in service. In no case shall the test temperature be below 250 degrees F.4.3.11.2.6 Materials within a ceiling plenum exposed to the airflow shall be noncombustible or comply with the following.4.3.11.2.6.2 Pneumatic tubing for control systems shall be listed as having a maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or less, an average optical density of 0.15 or less, and a maximum flame spread of 5 feet or less when tested in accordance with ANSI/UL 1820, Standard for Safety Fire Test of Pneumatic Tubing for Flame and Smoke Characteristics.4.3.11.2.6.3 Non-metallic fire sprinkler piping shall be listed as having a maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or less, an average optical density of 0.15 or less, and a maximum flame spread distance of 5 feet or less when tested in accordance of 5 feet or less when tested in accordance with ANSI/UL 1887, Standard for Safety Fire Test of Plastic Sprinkler Pipe for Visible Flame and Smoke Characteristics.4.3.11.2.6.7 Smoke detectors shall not be required to meet the provisions of this section. 2. Test methods: ASTM E84, UL 723, or NFPA 255. 3.Specified k factors are at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F) mean temperature unless stated otherwise. Where optional thermal insulation material is used, select thickness to provide thermal conductance no greater than that for the specified material. For pipe, use insulation manufacturer's published heat flow tables. For domestic hot water supply and return, run out insulation and condensation control insulation, no thickness adjustment need be made. a.Unless otherwise noted, pipe insulation shall have a K value insulation conductivity Btu inch/hour-ft2 degrees F (W/M degrees C) in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1-2010.4. All materials shall be compatible and suitable for service temperature, and shall not contribute to corrosion or otherwise attack surface to which applied in either the wet or dry state. C. Every package or standard container of insulation or accessories delivered to the job site for use must have a manufacturer's stamp or label giving the name of the manufacturer and description of the material. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Shop Drawings: 1.All information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications and ASTM, federal and military specifications.a.Insulation materials: Specify each type used and state surface burning characteristics. b.Insulation facings and jackets: Each type used. c.Insulation accessory materials: Each type used. d.Manufacturer's installation and fitting fabrication instructions for flexible unicellular insulation. e.Make reference to applicable specification paragraph numbers for coordination. C. Samples: 1.Each type of insulation: Minimum size 100 mm (4 inches) square for board/block/ blanket; 150 mm (6 inches) long, full diameter for round types. 2.Each type of facing and jacket: Minimum size 100 mm (4 inches square). 3.Each accessory material: Minimum 120 ML (4 ounce) liquid container or 120 gram (4 ounce) dry weight for adhesives, cement, and mastic. Statement of compliance with National Architectural and Industrial Maintenance Rule for VOC levels on Adhesives, Mastics, and Coatings for the State of West Virginia.Statement of compliance with Ozone Transport Commission for VOC levels on Adhesives, Mastics, and Coatings for the State of West Virginia.1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALStore materials in clean and dry environment, pipe covering jackets shall be clean and unmarred. Place adhesives in original containers. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions as required by printed instructions of manufacturers of adhesives, mastics and finishing cements. Insulation that becomes wet shall be replaced; drying of insulation is not acceptable.1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only. B.Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.): LP535E (2)-99Plastic Sheet (Sheeting): Plastic Strip; Poly (Vinyl Chloride) and Poly (Vinyl Chloride - Vinyl Acetate), Rigid.C.Military Specifications (Mil. Spec.): MILA3316C (2)-90Adhesives, FireResistant, Thermal InsulationMILA24179A (1)-87Adhesive, Flexible UnicellularPlasticThermal Insulation MILC19565C (1)-88Coating Compounds, Thermal Insulation, Fire-and Water-Resistant, Vapor-BarrierMILC20079H-87Cloth, Glass; Tape, Textile Glass; and Thread, Glass and Wire-Reinforced Glass D.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A167-04 Standard Specification for Stainless and HeatResisting ChromiumNickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip B209-10Standard Specification for Aluminum and AluminumAlloy Sheet and Plate C411-11Standard test method for HotSurface Performance of HighTemperature Thermal Insulation C449-07Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber HydraulicSetting Thermal Insulating and Finishing CementC533-11Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation C534-11 Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular FormC547-11 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber pipe Insulation C55207 Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal InsulationC553-11 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial ApplicationsC585-10Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System) R (1998)C612-10 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal InsulationC1126-10Standard Specification for Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation C1136-10 Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal InsulationD166810Standard Specification for Glass Fabrics (Woven and Treated) for Roofing and Waterproofing E84-12 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsE11912Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials E13611Standard Test Methods for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 degrees C (1380 F)E.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 101-12 Life Safety CodeF.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL):723-08UL Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials G.Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry (MSS):SP58-2009Pipe Hangers and Supports Materials, Design, and ManufacturePART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MINERAL FIBER or fiber glass A.ASTM C553 (Blanket, Flexible) Type I, Class B-5, Density 32 kg/m3 (2 pcf), k = 0.04 (0.27) at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F), for use at temperatures up to 204 degrees C (400 degrees F)ASTM C547 (Pipe Fitting Insulation and Preformed Pipe Insulation), Class 1, k = 0.037 (0.26) at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F), for use at temperatures up to 230 degrees C (450 degrees F)with an all service vapor retarder jacket with polyvinyl chloride premolded fitting covering. 2.2 MINERAL WOOL OR REFRACTORY ply with Standard ASTM C612, Class 3, 450 degrees C (850 degrees F).2.3 RIGID CELLULAR PHENOLIC FoamA.Preformed (molded) pipe insulation, ASTM C1126, type III, grade 1, k = 0.021(0.15) at 10 degrees C (50 degrees F), for use at temperatures up to 121 degrees C (250 degrees F) with vapor retarder and all service vapor retarder jacket with polyvinyl chloride premolded fitting covering.B.Equipment Insulation, ASTM C 1126, type II, grade 1, k = 0.021 (0.15) at 10 degrees C (50 degrees F), for use at temperatures up to 121 degrees C (250 degrees F) with rigid cellular phenolic insulation and covering, and all service vapor retarder jacket.2.4 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR THERMALASTM C177, C518, k = 0.039 (0.27) at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F), flame spread not over 25, smoke developed not over 50, for temperatures from minus 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) to 93 degrees C (200 degrees F). No jacket required. 2.5 INSULATION FACINGS AND JACKETSA.Vapor Retarder, higher strength with low water permeance = 0.02 or less perm rating, Beach puncture 50 units for insulation facing on pipe insulation jackets. Facings and jackets shall be all service type (ASJ) or PVDC Vapor Retarder jacketing. B.ASJ jacket shall be white kraft bonded to 0.025 mm (1 mil) thick aluminum foil, fiberglass reinforced, with pressure sensitive adhesive closure. Comply with ASTM C1136. Beach puncture 50 units, Suitable for painting without sizing. Jackets shall have minimum 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) lap on longitudinal joints and minimum 75mm (3 inch) butt strip on end joints. Butt strip material shall be same as the jacket. Lap and butt strips shall be self-sealing type with factory-applied pressure sensitive adhesive.C.Vapor Retarder medium strength with low water vapor permeance of 0.02 or less perm rating), Beach puncture 25 units: FoilScrimKraft (FSK) or PVDC vapor retarder jacketing type for concealed ductwork and equipment. D.Field applied vapor barrier jackets shall be provided, in addition to the specified facings and jackets, on all interior piping, exposed to outdoor air (i.e.; in ventilated attics, piping in ventilated (not air conditioned) spaces, etc.) and conveying fluids below ambient temperature. The vapor barrier jacket shall consist of a multi-layer laminated cladding with a maximum water vapor permeance of 0.001 perms. The minimum puncture resistance shall be 35 cm-kg (30 inch-pounds) for interior locations and 92 cm-kg (80 inch-pounds) for exposed locations or where the insulation is subject to damage.E.Glass Cloth Jackets: Presized, minimum 0.18 kg per square meter (7.8 ounces per square yard), 2000 kPa (300 psig) bursting strength with integral vapor retarder where required or specified.Factory composite materials may be used providedG.Pipe fitting insulation covering (jackets): Fitting covering shall be pre-molded to match shape of fitting and shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conforming to Fed Spec L-P-335, composition A, Type II Grade GU, and Type III, minimum thickness 0.7 mm (0.03 inches). Provide color matching vapor retarder pressure sensitive tape.2.6 pipe covering protection saddlesA.Cold pipe support: Pre-molded pipe insulation 180 degrees (half-shells) on bottom half of pipe at supports. Material shall be cellular glass. Nominal Pipe Size and Accessories Material (Insert Blocks)Nominal Pipe Size mm (inches)Insert Blocks mm (inches)Up through 125 (5)150 (6) longB.Warm or hot pipe supports: Pre-molded pipe insulation (180 degree half-shells) on bottom half of pipe at supports. Material shall be cellular glass. Insulation at supports shall have same thickness as adjacent insulation. 2.7 adhesive, Mastic, CementA.Mil. Spec. MILA3316, Class 1: Jacket and lap adhesive and protective finish coating for insulation. B.Mil. Spec. MILA3316, Class 2: Adhesive for laps and for adhering insulation to metal surfaces. C.Mil. Spec. MILA24179, Type II Class 1: Adhesive for installing flexible unicellular insulation and for laps and general use. D.Mil. Spec. MILC19565, Type I or Type II: Vapor barrier compound for indoor use. E.ASTM C449: Mineral fiber hydraulicsetting thermal insulating and finishing cement. F.Other: Insulation manufacturers' published recommendations. 2.8 Mechanical FastenersA.Pins, anchors: Welded pins, or metal or nylon anchors with galvanized steel or fiber washer, or clips. Pin diameter shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. B.Staples: Outward clinching galvanized steel C.Wire: 1.3 mm thick (18 gage) soft annealed galvanized or 1.9 mm (14 gage) copper clad steel or nickel copper alloy. D.Bands: 13 mm (1/2 inch) nominal width, brass, galvanized steel, aluminum or stainless steel.2.9 Reinforcement and Finishes A.Glass fabric, open weave: ASTM D1668, Type III (resin treated) and Type I (asphalt treated). B.Glass fiber fitting tape: Mil. Spec MILC20079, Type II, Class 1.C.Tape for Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: As recommended by the insulation manufacturer. D.Hexagonal wire netting: 25 mm (one inch) mesh, 0.85 mm thick (22 gage) galvanized steel. E.Corner beads: 50 mm (2 inch) by 50 mm (2 inch), 0.55 mm thick (26 gage) galvanized steel; or, 25 mm (1 inch) by 25 mm (1 inch), 0.47 mm thick (28 gage) aluminum angle adhered to 50 mm (2 inch) by 50 mm (2 inch) Kraft paper.F.PVC fitting cover: Fed. Spec LP535, Composition A, 1186 Type II, Grade GU, with Form B Mineral Fiber insert, for media temperature 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) to 121 degrees C (250 degrees F). Below 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) and above 121 degrees C (250 degrees F). Provide double layer insert. Provide color matching vapor barrier pressure sensitive tape.2.10 Firestopping MaterialOther than pipe insulation, refer to Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.2.11 flame and smokeUnless shown otherwise all assembled systems shall meet flame spread 25 and smoke developed 50 rating as developed under ASTM, NFPA and UL standards and specifications. See paragraph 1.3 "Quality Assurance".PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.Required pressure tests of piping joints and connections shall be completed and the work approved by the Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative (COTR) for application of insulation. Surface shall be clean and dry with all foreign materials, such as dirt, oil, loose scale and rust removed. B.Except for specific exceptions, insulate all specified piping (pipe, fittings, valves, accessories). Insulate each pipe individually. Do not use scrap pieces of insulation where a full length section will fit. C.Where removal of insulation of piping and equipment is required to comply with Section 02?82?11, TRADITIONAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT and such areas shall be reinsulated to comply with this specification. D.Insulation materials shall be installed in a first class manner with smooth and even surfaces, with jackets and facings drawn tight and smoothly cemented down at all laps. Insulation shall be continuous through all sleeves and openings,. Vapor retarders shall be continuous and uninterrupted throughout systems with operating temperature 16 degrees C (60 degrees F) and below. Lap and seal vapor barrier over ends and exposed edges of insulation. Anchors, supports and other metal projections through insulation on cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed for a minimum length of 150 mm (6 inches). E.Install vapor stops at all insulation terminations on either side of valves, pumps and equipment and particularly in straight lengths of pipe insulation.F.Insulation on hot piping and equipment shall be terminated square at items not to be insulated, access openings and nameplates. Cover all exposed raw insulation with white sealer or jacket material. G.Plumbing work not to be insulated: 1.Piping and valves of fire protection system. 2.Chromium plated brass piping. 3.Water piping in contact with earth. 4.Small horizontal cold water branch runs in partitions to individual fixtures may be without insulation for maximum distance of 900 mm (3 feet). H.Apply insulation materials subject to the manufacturer's recommended temperature limits. Apply adhesives, mastic and coatings at the manufacturer's recommended minimum coverage.I.Elbows, flanges and other fittings shall be insulated with the same material as is used on the pipe straights. Use of polyurethane spray-foam to fill a PVC elbow jacket is prohibited on cold applications.J.Firestop Pipe insulation:1.Provide firestopping insulation at fire and smoke barriers through penetrations. Fire stopping insulation shall be UL listed as defines in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.2.Pipe penetrations requiring fire stop insulation including, but not limited to the following:a.Pipe risers through floorsb.Pipe chase walls and floorsc.Smoke partitionsd.Fire partitions1.All interior piping conveying fluids exposed to outdoor air (i.e. in attics, ventilated (not air conditioned) spaces, etc.) below ambient air temperature..3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATIONA. Molded Mineral Fiber Pipe and Tubing Covering: 1.Fit insulation to pipe, aligning longitudinal joints. Seal longitudinal joint laps and circumferential butt strips by rubbing hard with a nylon sealing tool to assure a positive seal. Staples may be used to assist in securing insulation. Seal all vapor retarder penetrations on cold piping with a generous application of vapor barrier mastic. Provide inserts and install with metal insulation shields at outside pipe supports. 2.Contractor's options for fitting, flange and valve insulation: a.Insulating and finishing cement for sizes less than 100 mm (4 inches) operating at surface temperature of 16 degrees C (61 degrees F) or more. b.Factory pre-molded, one piece PVC covers with mineral fiber, (Form B), inserts. Provide two insert layers for pipe temperatures below 4 degrees C (40 degrees F), or above 121 degrees C (250 degrees F). Secure first layer of insulation with twine. Seal seam edges with vapor barrier mastic and secure with fitting tape. c.Factory molded, ASTM C547 or field mitered sections, joined with adhesive or wired in place. For hot piping finish with a smoothing coat of finishing cement. For cold fittings, 16 degrees C (60 degrees F) or less, vapor seal with a layer of glass fitting tape imbedded between two 2 mm (1/16 inch) coats of vapor barrier mastic. d.Fitting tape shall extend over the adjacent pipe insulation and overlap on itself at least 50 mm (2 inches).3.Nominal thickness in millimeters and inches specified in the schedule at the end of this section. B.Rigid Cellular Phenolic Foam:1.Rigid closed cell phenolic insulation may be provided for piping and equipment for temperatures up to 121 degrees C (250 degrees F).2.Note the NFPA 90A burning characteristics requirements of 25/50 in paragraph 1.3.B3.Provide secure attachment facilities such as welding pins.4.Apply insulation with joints tightly drawn together 5.Apply adhesives, coverings, neatly finished at fittings, and valves.6.Final installation shall be smooth, tight, neatly finished at all edges.7.Minimum thickness in millimeters (inches) specified in the schedule at the end of this section. 8.Condensation control insulation: Minimum 25 mm (1.0 inch) thick for all pipe sizes.a.Plumbing piping as follows:2)Waste piping from electric water coolers to drainage system.1) Cold water piping.C.Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation: 1.Apply insulation and fabricate fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and finish with two coats of weather resistant finish as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. 2.Pipe and tubing insulation: a.Use proper size material. Do not stretch or strain insulation.b.To avoid undue compression of insulation, provide cork stoppers or wood inserts at supports as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. Insulation shields are specified under Section 22 05?11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING.c.Where possible, slip insulation over the pipe or tubing prior to connection, and seal the butt joints with adhesive. Where the slipon technique is not possible, slit the insulation and apply it to the pipe sealing the seam and joints with contact adhesive. Optional tape sealing, as recommended by the manufacturer, may be employed. Make changes from mineral fiber insulation in a straight run of pipe, not at a fitting. Seal joint with tape. 3.Apply sheet insulation to flat or large curved surfaces with 100 percent adhesive coverage. For fittings and large pipe, apply adhesive to seams only. 4.Pipe insulation: nominal thickness in millimeters (inches as specified in the schedule at the end of this section. 3.3 PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULEProvide insulation for piping systems as scheduled below: Insulation Thickness Millimeters (Inches)Nominal Pipe Size Millimeters (Inches)Operating Temperature Range/ServiceInsulation MaterialLess than 25 (1)25 – 32 (1 – 1?)38 – 75 (1? - 3) 100 (4) and Above38-60 degrees C (100-140 degrees F) (Domestic Hot Water Supply and Return)Mineral Fiber (Above ground piping only)38 (1.5)38 (1.5)50 (2.0)50 (2.0)38-60 degrees C (100-140 degrees F) (Domestic Hot Water Supply and Return)Rigid Cellular Phenolic Foam (Above ground piping only)38 (1.5)38 (1.5)50 (2.0)50 (2.0)38-60 degrees C (100-140 degrees F) (Domestic Hot Water Supply and Return)Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal (Above ground piping only)38 (1.5)38 (1.5) ---- ---- E N D SECTION 22 11 00FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTIONPART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.Domestic water systems, including piping, equipment and all necessary accessories as designated in this section.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING: Penetrations in rated enclosures B.Section 09 91 00, PAINTING: Preparation and finish painting and identification of piping systems. C.Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING. D.Section 22 07 11, PLUMBING INSULATION: Pipe Insulation.1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1. All items listed in Part 2 - Products. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.American National Standards Institute (ANSI): American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): (Copyrighted Society)A13.1Scheme for Identification of Piping SystemsB16.3-2011Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 150 and 300B16.92007Factory-Made Wrought Butt Welding FittingsB16.11-2011Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and ThreadedB16.12-2009 Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings B16.15-2006 Cast Copper Alloy Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250B16.18-2001 (R2005)Cast Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings B16.22-2012Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure FittingsB16.51-2011Copper and Copper Alloy Press-Connect Fittings NSF/ANSI 61-2012Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects C.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A47/A47M-99(2009)Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings A53/A53M-12Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and SeamlessA183-03(2009)Carbon Steel Track Bolts and NutsA269–10Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General ServiceA312/A312M-12Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel PipesA536-84(2009)Ductile Iron CastingsA733-03(2009)e1Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe NipplesB32-08Solder MetalB61-08Steam or Valve Bronze CastingsB62-09Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal CastingsB75/B75M-11Seamless Copper TubeB88-09Seamless Copper Water TubeB584-12aCopper Alloy Sand Castings for General ApplicationsB687-99(2011)Brass, Copper, and Chromium-Plated Pipe NipplesD1785-12Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120D2000-12Rubber Products in Automotive ApplicationsD4101-11Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion MaterialsD2564-04(2009) e1Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and FittingsE1120-08Liquid ChlorineE1229-08Calcium Hypochlorite D.American Water Works Association (AWWA):C110/A21.10-12Ductile Iron and Gray IronC151/A21.51-09Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally CastC153/A21.53-11Ductile-Iron Compact FittingsC20308Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel and Tape - Hot AppliedC213-07Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior & Exterior of Steel Water PipelinesC65105Disinfecting Water Mains E.American Welding Society (AWS): A5.8/A5.8M-2011Filler Metals for BrazingF.International Plumbing Code International Plumbing Code – 2012G. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE):ANSI/ASSE 1001-2008Pipe Applied Atmospheric Type Vacuum BreakersANSI/ASSE 1010-2004Water Hammer Arresters ANSI/ASSE 1018-2001Trap Seal Primer Valves – Potable Water SuppliedANSI/ASSE 1020-2004Pressure Vacuum Breaker AssemblyH.Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI): PDI WH-201 2010Water Hammer Arrestor1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA.All castings used for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, etc., shall be date stamped for quality assurance and traceability.All inline devices installed on the domestic service lines or building distribution system downstream of the water main and before end point devices and is in contact with the water intended for human ingestion shall comply with the Safe Drinking Water Act and National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Standard 61, including Annex G to provide lead free water (not containing more than 0.25 percent lead).Inline devices include water meters, building valves, check valves, meter stops, fittings, backflow preventers, etc.1.6 SPARE PARTSA.For mechanical pressed sealed fittings provide tools required for each pipe size used at the facility.PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ABOVE GROUND (INTERIOR) WATER PIPING A.Pipe: Copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L, drawn. B.Fittings for Copper Tube: 1.Wrought copper or bronze castings conforming to ANSI B16.18 and B16.22. Unions shall be bronze, MSS SP72 & SP 110, Solder or braze joints. Use 95/5 tin and antimony for all soldered joints.2.Mechanical press-connect fittings for copper pipe and tube shall conform to the material and sizing requirements of ASME B16.51, NSF/ANSI 61 approved, 2 inch (50 mm)size and smaller mechanical press-connect fittings, double pressed type, with EPDM (ethylene propylene diene monomer) non-toxic synthetic rubber sealing elements and un-pressed fitting identification feature.3.Mechanically formed tee connection: Form mechanically extracted collars in a continuous operation by drilling pilot hole and drawing out tube surface to form collar, having a height of not less than three times the thickness of tube wall. Adjustable collaring device shall insure proper tolerance and complete uniformity of the joint. Notch and dimple joining branch tube in a single process to provide free flow where the branch tube penetrates the fitting. Braze joints. C.Adapters: Provide adapters for joining screwed pipe to copper tubing. D.Solder: ASTM B32 Composition Sb5 HA or HB. Provide noncorrosive flux.E.Brazing alloy: AWS A5.8, Classification BCuP. 2.2 EXPOSED WATER PIPING A.Finished Room: Use full iron pipe size chrome plated brass piping for exposed water piping connecting fixtures, casework, cabinets, and equipment when not concealed by apron including those furnished by the Government or specified in other sections. 1.Pipe: Fed. Spec. WWP351, standard weight. 2.Fittings: ANSI B16.15 cast bronze threaded fittings with chrome finish, (125 and 250). 3.Nipples: ASTM B 687, Chromium-plated. 4.Unions: Mss SP-72, SP-110, Brass or Bronze with chrome finish. Unions 65 mm (21/2 inches) and larger shall be flange type with approved gaskets. B.Unfinished Rooms, Mechanical Rooms: Chromeplated brass piping is not required. Paint piping systems as specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING. 2.4 STRAINERS A.Provide on inlet side of indicating and control instruments and equipment subject to sediment damage and where shown on drawings. Strainer element shall be removable without disconnection of piping. B.Water: Basket or "Y" type with easily removable cover and brass strainer basket. C.Body: Smaller than 80 mm (3 inches), brass or bronze; 80 mm (3 inches) and larger, cast iron or semisteel. 2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A.Provide dielectric couplings or unions between ferrous and nonferrous pipe. 2.6 STERILIZATION CHEMICALSA.Hypochlorites ASTM E1120-08B.Liquid Chlorine ASTM E1229-082.7 WATER HAMMER ARRESTER:A.Closed copper tube chamber with permanently sealed 410 kPa (60 psig) air charge above a Double O-ring piston. Two high heat Buna-N 0-rings pressure packed and lubricated with FDA approved silicone compound. All units shall be designed in accordance with ASSE 1010 for sealed wall installations without an access panel. Size and install in accordance with Plumbing and Drainage Institute requirements (PDI WH 201). Provide water hammer arrestors at: 1.All solenoid valves.2.All groups of two or more flush valves.3.All quick opening or closing valves.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.General: Comply with the International Plumbing Code and the following: 1.Install branch piping for water from the piping system and connect to all fixtures, valves, cocks, outlets, casework, cabinets and equipment, including those furnished by the Government or specified in other sections. 2.Pipe shall be round and straight. Cutting shall be done with proper tools. Pipe, except for plastic shall be reamed to full size after cutting. 3.All pipe runs shall be laid out to avoid interference with other work. 4.Install union and shut-off valve on pressure piping at connections to equipment.5.Pipe Hangers, Supports and Accessories:a.All piping shall be supported per the International Plumbing Code.b.Shop Painting and Plating: Hangers, supports, rods, inserts and accessories used for pipe supports shall be shop coated with red lead or zinc chromate primer paint. Electroplated copper hanger rods, hangers and accessories may be used with copper tubing.c.Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates, Supports, Hangers:1)Solid or split unplated cast iron.2)All plates shall be provided with set screws.3)Pipe Hangers: Height adjustable clevis type.4)Adjustable Floor Rests and Base Flanges: Steel.5)Concrete Inserts: "Universal" or continuous slotted type.6)Hanger Rods: Mild, low carbon steel, fully threaded or Threaded at each end with two removable nuts at each end for positioning rod and hanger and locking each in place.7)Riser Clamps: Malleable iron or steel.8)Rollers: Cast iron.9)Self-drilling type expansion shields shall be "Phillips" type, with case hardened steel expander plugs.10)Hangers and supports utilized with insulated pipe and tubing shall have 180 degree (min.) metal protection shield Centered on and welded to the hanger and support. The shield shall be 4 inches in length and be 16 gauge steel. The shield shall be sized for the insulation.11)Miscellaneous Materials: As specified, required, directed or as noted on the drawings for proper installation of hangers, supports and accessories. If the vertical distance exceeds 6 m (20 feet) for cast iron pipe additional support shall be provided in the center of that span. Provide all necessary auxiliary steel to provide that support.12)With the installation of each flexible expansion joint, provide piping restraints for the upstream and downstream section of the piping at the flexible expansion joint. Provide calculations supporting the restraint length design and type of selected restraints.6.Install chrome plated cast brass escutcheon with set screw at each wall, floor and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork.7.Penetrations:a.Fire Stopping: Where pipes pass through fire partitions, fire walls, smoke partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases as specified in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. Completely fill and seal clearances between raceways and openings with the fire stopping materials. b.Waterproofing: At floor penetrations, completely seal clearances around the pipe and make watertight with sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.8.Mechanical press-connect fittings for copper pipe and tube shall conform to the material and sizing requirements of ASME B16.51, NSF/ANSI 61 approved, 2 inch (50 mm)size and smaller mechanical press-connect fittings, double pressed type, with EPDM (ethylene propylene diene monomer) non-toxic synthetic rubber sealing elements and un-pressed fitting identification feature.B.Piping shall conform to the following: 1.Domestic Water: a.Grade all lines to facilitate drainage. Provide drain valves at bottom of risers and all low points in system. Design domestic hot water circulating lines with no traps. b.Connect branch lines at bottom of main serving fixtures below and pitch down so that main may be drained through fixture. Connect branch lines to top of main serving only fixtures located on floor above. 3.2 TESTS A.General: Test system either in its entirety or in sections. Submit testing plan to Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative (COTR) 14 days prior to test date.B.Potable Water System: Test after installation of piping and domestic water heaters, but before piping is concealed, before covering is applied, and before plumbing fixtures are connected. Fill systems with water and maintain hydrostatic pressure of 690 kPa (100 psi) gage for two hours. No decrease in pressure is allowed. Provide a pressure gage with a shutoff and bleeder valve at the highest point of the piping being tested. C.All Other Piping Tests: Test new installed piping under 1 1/2 times actual operating conditions and prove tight.3.3 STERILIZATION A.After tests have been successfully completed, thoroughly flush and sterilize the interior domestic water distribution system in accordance with AWWA C651. B.Use liquid chlorine or hypochlorites for sterilization. E N D -SECTION 22 13 00FACILITY SANITARY and vent pipingPART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section pertains to sanitary sewer and vent systems, including piping, equipment and all necessary accessories as designated in this section.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING: Penetrations in rated enclosures.B.Section 09 91 00, PAINTING: Preparation and finish painting and identification of piping systems. C.Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING: Pipe Hangers and Supports, Materials Identification.D.Section 22 07 11, PLUMBING INSULATION: Pipe Insulation.E.Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants: Sealant products.1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES. B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Piping. 3.Cleanouts.4.All items listed in Part 2 - Products.C.Detailed shop drawing of clamping device and extensions when required in connection with the waterproofing membrane or the floor drain. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): (Copyrighted Society)A112A13.1-07Scheme for Identification of Piping SystemsB16.311Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300.B16.411Standard for Grey Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250B16.1209Cast Iron Threaded Drainage FittingsB16.15-11Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings, Classes 125 and 250C.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A47/A47M-99 (R 2004)Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum Coated, by the Hot Dip ProcessA53/A53M-10Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black And Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated, Welded and SeamlessA74-09Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and FittingsA183-03 (2009)Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and NutsA536-84(R 2009)Standard Specification for Ductile Iron CastingsB32-08Standard Specification for Solder MetalB75-11Standard Specification for Seamless Copper TubeB306-02Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV)B584-11Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General ApplicationsC564-11Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and FittingsD2000-12Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive ApplicationsD2564-04 (2009) elStandard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and FittingsD2665-11Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and FittingsD.International Code Council:IPC-2012International Plumbing CodeE.Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI):301-05Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications310-04Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping ApplicationsF.American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE):1018-01Trap Seal Primer Valves – Potable, Water SuppliedG.Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI):PDI WH-201 2007Water Hammer ArrestorPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SANITARY waste, drain, and vent PIPING A.Cast iron waste, drain, and vent pipe and fittings1.Cast iron waste, drain, and vent pipe and fittings shall be used for the following applications:c.interior waste and vent piping above grade.2.Cast iron Pipe shall be bell and spigot or hubless (plain end or no-hub or hubless). 3.The material for all pipe and fittings shall be cast iron soil pipe and fittings and shall conform to the requirements of CISPI Standard 301, ASTM A-888, or ASTM A-74.4.Joints for hubless pipe and fittings shall conform to the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Couplings for hubless joints shall conform to CISPI 310. Joints for hub and spigot pipe shall be installed with compression gaskets conforming to the requirements of ASTM Standard C-564 or be installed with lead and oakum. B.Copper Tube, (DWV):1.Copper DWV tube sanitary waste, drain and vent pipe may be used for piping above ground, except for urinal drains. 2.The copper DWV tube shall be drainage type, drawn temper conforming to ASTM B306.3.The copper drainage fittings shall be cast copper or wrought copper conforming to ASME B16.23 or ASME 16.29.4.The joints shall be lead free, using a water flushable flux, and conforming to ASTM B32. 2.2 EXPOSED WASTE PIPING A.Full iron pipe size chrome plated brass piping shall be used in finished rooms for exposed waste piping connecting fixtures, casework, cabinets, and equipment when not concealed by apron including those furnished by the Government or specified in other sections. 1.The Pipe shall meet Fed. Spec. WWP351, standard weight. 2.The Fittings shall conform to ANSI B16.15, cast bronze threaded fittings with chrome finish, (125 and 250). 3.Nipples shall conform to ASTM B 687, Chromium-plated. 4.Unions shall be brass or bronze with chrome finish. Unions 65 mm (21/2 inches) and larger shall be flange type with approved gaskets. B.In unfinished Rooms such as mechanical Rooms, Chromeplated brass piping is not required. The pipe materials specified under the paragraph “Sanitary Waste, Drain, and Vent Piping” can be used. The sanitary pipe in unfinished rooms shall be painted as specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.2.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGSA.Transition pipe couplings shall join piping with small differences in outside diameters or different materials. End connections shall be of the same size and compatible with the pipes being joined. The transition coupling shall be elastomeric, sleeve type reducing or transition pattern and include shear and corrosion resistant metal, tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. The transition coupling sleeve coupling shall be of the following material:1.For cast iron soil pipes, the sleeve material shall be rubber conforming to ASTM C564.2.For dissimilar pipes, the sleeve material shall be PVC conforming to ASTM D5926, or other material compatible with the pipe materials being joined.B.The dielectric fittings shall conform to ASSE 1079 with a pressure rating of 860 kPa (125 psig) at a minimum temperature of 82°C (180°F). The end connection shall be solder joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.C.Dielectric flange insulating kits shall be of non conducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges with a pressure rating of 1035 kPa (150 psig). The gasket shall be neoprene or phenolic. The bolt sleeves shall be phenolic or polyethylene. The washers shall be phenolic with steel backing washers.D.The di-electric nipples shall be electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545 with a pressure rating of 2070 kPa (300 psig) at 107°C (225°F). The end connection shall be male threaded. The lining shall be inert and noncorrosive propylene.2.4 CLEANOUTS A.Cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe, up to 150 mm (6 inches); 150 mm (6-inches) for 200 mm (8-inches) pipe; and 200 mm (8-inch) for 250 mm (10-inch) pipe and larger.. Cleanouts shall be easily accessible and shall be gastight and watertight. Minimum clearance of 600 mm (24 inches) shall be provided for clearing a clogged sanitary line. B.Floor cleanouts shall be gray iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, gray iron cover conforming to ASME A112.36.2M. A gray iron ferrule with hubless, socket, inside calk or spigot connection and counter sunk, taper-thread, brass or bronze closure plug shall be included. The frame and cover material and finish shall be nickel-bronze copper alloy with a square shape. The cleanout shall be vertically adjustable for a minimum of 50 mm (2 inches). When a waterproof membrane is used in the floor system, clamping collars shall be provided on the cleanouts. Cleanouts shall consist of wye fittings and eighth bends with brass or bronze screw plugs. Cleanouts in the resilient tile floors, quarry tile and ceramic tile floors shall be provided with square top covers recessed for tile insertion. In the carpeted areas, carpet cleanout markers shall be provided. Two way cleanouts shall be provided where indicated on drawings. C.Cleanouts shall be provided at or near the base of the vertical stacks with the cleanout plug located approximately 600 mm (24 inches) above the floor. If there are no fixtures installed on the lowest floor, the cleanout shall be installed at the base of the stack. The cleanouts shall be extended to the wall access cover. Cleanout shall consist of sanitary tees. Nickelbronze square frame and stainless steel cover with minimum opening of 150 by 150 mm (6 by 6 inches) shall be furnished at each wall cleanout. Where the piping is concealed, a fixture trap or a fixture with integral trap, readily removable without disturbing concealed pipe, shall be accepted as a cleanout equivalent providing the opening to be used as a cleanout opening is the size required.D.In horizontal runs above grade, cleanouts shall consist of cast brass tapered screw plug in fitting or caulked/hubless cast iron ferrule. Plain end (hubless) piping in interstitial space or above ceiling may use plain end (hubless) blind plug and clamp. 2.6 TRAPS A. Traps shall be provided on all sanitary branch waste connections from fixtures or equipment not provided with traps. Exposed brass shall be polished brass chromium plated with nipple and set screw escutcheons. Concealed traps may be rough cast brass or same material as pipe connected to. Slip joints are not permitted on sewer side of trap. Traps shall correspond to fittings on cast iron soil pipe or steel pipe respectively, and size shall be as required by connected service or fixture.2.8 WATERPROOFING A.A sleeve flashing device shall be provided at points where pipes pass through membrane waterproofed floors or walls. The sleeve flashing device shall be manufactured, cast iron fitting with clamping device that forms a sleeve for the pipe floor penetration of the floor membrane. A galvanized steel pipe extension shall be included in the top of the fitting that will extend 50 mm (2 inches) above finished floor and galvanized steel pipe extension in the bottom of the fitting that will extend through the floor slab. A waterproof caulked joint shall be provided at the top hub.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Pipe INSTALLATION A.The pipe installation shall comply with the requirements of the International Plumbing Code (IPC) and these specifications. B.Branch piping shall be installed for waste from the respective piping systems and connect to all fixtures, valves, cocks, outlets, casework, cabinets and equipment, including those furnished by the Government or specified in other sections. C.Pipe shall be round and straight. Cutting shall be done with proper tools. Pipe shall be reamed to full size after cutting. D.All pipe runs shall be laid out to avoid interference with other work. E.The piping shall be installed above accessible ceilings where possible.F.The piping shall be installed to permit valve servicing or operation.G.Unless specifically indicated on the drawings, the minimum slope shall be 2 percent slope.H.The piping shall be installed free of sags and bends.I.Seismic restraint shall be installed where required by code. J.Changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping shall be made using appropriate branches, bends and long sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short sweep quarter bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Long turn double wye branch and eighth bend fittings shall be used if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Proper size of standard increaser and reducers shall be used if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. Use of combination wye-fittings or cross tees in the plumbing sanitary system are prohibited.L.Cast iron piping shall be installed according to CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,” Chapter IV, “Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings”M.Aboveground copper tubing shall be installed according to CDA’s “Copper Tube Handbook”.3.2 joint constructionA.Hub and spigot, cast iron piping with gasket joints shall be joined in accordance with CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook” for compression joints.B.Hub and spigot, cast iron piping with caulked joints shall be joined in accordance with CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook” for lead and oakum calked joints.C.Hubless or No-hub, cast iron piping shall be joined in accordance with CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook” for hubless piping coupling joints.D.For threaded joints, thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. The threads shall be cut full and clean using sharp disc cutters. Threaded pipe ends shall be reamed to remove burrs and restored to full pipe inside diameter. Pipe fittings and valves shall be joined as follows:1.Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is required by the pipe service2.Pipe sections with damaged threads shall be replaced with new sections of pipe.E.Copper tube and fittings with soldered joints shall be joined according to ASTM B828. A water flushable, lead free flux conforming to ASTM B813 and a lead free alloy solder conforming to ASTM B32 shall be used.3.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGSA.Transition coupling shall be installed at pipe joints with small differences in pipe outside diameters. B.Dielectric fittings shall be installed at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.3.4 Pipe Hangers, Supports and Accessories:A. All piping shall be supported according to the International Plumbing Code (IPC), Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING, and these specifications. Where conflicts arise between these the code and Section 22 05 11, the most restrictive or the requirement that specifies supports with highest loading or shortest spacing shall apply.B.Hangers, supports, rods, inserts and accessories used for pipe supports shall be shop coated with zinc chromate primer paint. Electroplated copper hanger rods, hangers and accessories may be used with copper tubing.C.Horizontal piping and tubing shall be supported within 300 mm (12 inches) of each fitting or coupling.D.Horizontal cast iron piping shall be supported with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum hanger rod diameters:1.40 mm or DN40 to 50 mm or DN50 (NPS 1-1/2 inch to NPS 2 inch): 1500 mm (60 inches) with 10 mm (3/8 inch) rod.2.80 mm or DN 80 (NPS 3 inch): 1500 mm (60 inches) with 13 mm (? inch) rod.3.100 mm or DN100 to 125 mm or DN125 (NPS 4 to NPS 5): 1500 mm (60 inches) with 16 mm (5/8 inch) rod.4. 150 mm or DN150 to 200 mm or DN200 (NPS 6 inch to NPS 8 inch): 1500 mm (60 inches) with 19 mm (? inch) rod.E.The maximum spacing for plastic pipe shall be 1.22 m (4 feet).F.Vertical piping and tubing shall be supported at the base, at each floor, and at intervals no greater than 4.57 m (15 feet).G.In addition to the requirements in Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING, Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates, Supports, Hangers shall have the following characteristics:1.Solid or split unplated cast iron.2.All plates shall be provided with set screws.3.Height adjustable clevis type pipe hangers.4.Adjustable floor rests and base flanges shall be steel.5.Hanger rods shall be low carbon steel, fully threaded or threaded at each end with two removable nuts at each end for positioning rod and hanger and locking each in place.7.Riser clamps shall be malleable iron or steel.8.Rollers shall be cast iron.9.See Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING, for requirements on insulated pipe protective shields at hanger supports.H.Miscellaneous materials shall be provided as specified, required, directed or as noted on the drawings for proper installation of hangers, supports and accessories. If the vertical distance exceeds 6 m (20 feet) for cast iron pipe additional support shall be provided in the center of that span. All necessary auxiliary steel shall be provided to provide that support.I.Cast escutcheon with set screw shall be provided at each wall, floor and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork.J.Penetrations:1.Fire Stopping: Where pipes pass through fire partitions, fire walls, smoke partitions, or floors, a fire stop shall be installed that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases as specified in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. Clearances between raceways and openings shall be completely filled and sealed with the fire stopping materials. 2.Water proofing: At floor penetrations, clearances shall be completely sealed around the pipe and make watertight with sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.K.Piping shall conform to the following: 1.Waste and Vent Drain to main stacks: Pipe SizeMinimum Pitch 80 mm or DN 80 (3 inches) and smaller2 percent 100 mm or DN 100 (4 inches) and larger1 percent 2.Sanitary vents shall not connect to exhaust vents. 3.5 TESTS A.Sanitary waste and drain systems shall be tested either in its entirety or in sections. B.Waste System tests shall be conducted before fixtures are connected. A water test or air test shall be conducted, as directed. 1.If entire system is tested for a water test, tightly close all openings in pipes except highest opening, and fill system with water to point of overflow. If the waste system is tested in sections, tightly plug each opening except highest opening of section under test, fill each section with water and test with at least a 3 m (10 foot) head of water. In testing successive sections, test at least upper 3 m (10 feet) of next preceding section so that each joint or pipe except upper most 3 m (10 feet) of system has been submitted to a test of at least a 3 m (10 foot) head of water. Water shall be kept in the system, or in portion under test, for at least 15 minutes before inspection starts. System shall then be tight at all joints. 2.For an air test, an air pressure of 35 kPa (5 psig) gage shall be maintained for at least 15 minutes without leakage. A force pump and mercury column gage shall be used for the air test.3.After installing all fixtures and equipment, open water supply so that all p-traps can be observed. For 15 minutes of operation, all p-traps shall be inspected for leaks and any leaks found shall be corrected. 3.Final Tests: Either one of the following tests may be used. a.Smoke Test: After fixtures are permanently connected and traps are filled with water, fill entire drainage and vent systems with smoke under pressure of 1.3 kPa (1 inch of water) with a smoke machine. Chemical smoke is prohibited. b.Peppermint Test: Introduce (2 ounces) of peppermint into each line or stack. E N D -SECTION 22 40 00PLUMBING FIXTURESPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONPlumbing fixtures, associated trim and fittings necessary to make a complete installation from wall or floor connections to rough piping, and certain accessories. 1.2 RELATED WORKA.Sealing between fixtures and other finish surfaces: Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.B.Flush panel access doors: Section 08 31 13, ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES. C.Through bolts: Section 10 21 13, TOILET COMPARTMENTS.D.Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING.1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B.Submit plumbing fixture information in an assembled brochure, showing cuts and full detailed description of each fixture. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.American National Standard Institute (ANSI): The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):A112.6.1M92(R2012)Floor Affixed Supports for OfftheFloor Plumbing Fixtures for Public UseA112.19.1M-08 Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures A112.19.2M08Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures C.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A276-2010 Stainless and HeatResisting Steel Bars and Shapes WW-P-541-E/GEN Plumbing Fixtures with Amendment 1D.National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): NAAMM AMP 500-505Metal Finishes Manual (1988) E.American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE):F.National Sanitation Foundation (NSF)/American National Standards Institute (ANSI):61-2012 Drinking Water System Components-Health EffectsG.American with Disabilities Act (A.D.A) Section 4-19.4 Exposed Pipes and Surfaces H.Environmental Protection Agency EPA PL 93-523 1974; A 1999) Safe Drinking Water Act.I.International Building Code, ICC IPBC 2012. PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 STAINLESS STEELA.Corrosion-resistant Steel (CRS):1.Plate, Sheet and Strip: CRS flat products shall conform to chemical composition requirements of any 300 series steel specified in ASTM A276.2.Finish: Exposed surfaces shall have standard polish (ground and polished) equal to NAAMM finish Number 4.B.Die-cast zinc alloy products are prohibited.2.2 STOPS A.Provide lockshield loose key or screw driver pattern angle stops, straight stops or stops integral with faucet, with each compression type faucet whether specifically called for or not, including sinks in wood and metal casework. Locate stops centrally above or below fixture in accessible location. B.Furnish keys for lock shield stops to Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative (COTR).C.Supply from stops not integral with faucet shall be chrome plated copper flexible tubing or flexible stainless steel with inner core of non-toxic polymer.D.Supply pipe from wall to valve stop shall be rigid threaded IPS copper alloy pipe, i.e. red brass pipe nipple, chrome plated where exposed. 2.3 ESCUTCHEONS Heavy type, chrome plated, with set screws. Provide for piping serving plumbing fixtures and at each wall, ceiling and floor penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. 2.4 LAMINAR FLOW CONTROL DEVICEA.Smooth, bright stainless steel or satin finish, chrome plated metal laminar flow device shall provide non-aeration, clear, coherent laminar flow that will not splash in basin. Device shall also have a flow control restrictor and have vandal resistant housing.B.Flow Control Restrictor:1.Capable of restricting flow from 95 ml/s to 110 ml/s (1.5 gpm to 1.7 gpm) for lavatories; 125 ml/s to 140 ml/s (2.0 gpm to 2.2 gpm) for sinks P-502: and 170 ml/s to 190 ml/s (2.75 gpm to 3.0 gpm) for rinse sinks or as specified.pensates for pressure fluctuation maintaining flow rate specified above within 10 percent between 170 kPa and 550 kPa (25 psi and 80 psi).3.Operates by expansion and contraction, eliminates mineral/sediment build-up with self-cleaning action, and is capable of easy manual cleaning.2.5 CARRIERS A.ASME/ANSI A112.6.1M, with adjustable gasket faceplate chair carriers for wall hung closets with auxiliary anchor foot assembly, hanger rod support feet, and rear anchor tie down. B.ASME/ANSI A112.6.1M, lavatory, chair carrier for thin wall construction. All lavatory chair carriers shall be capable of supporting the lavatory with a 250-pound vertical load applied at the front of the fixture. 2.6 WATER CLOSETS A.(P103) Water Closet (Wall Hung, ASME/ANSI A112.19.2M, Figure 9) office, elongated bowl, siphon jet 4.9 L (1.28 gallons) per flush, wall outlet. Top of rim shall be between 406 mm and 432 mm (16 inches and 17 inches) above finished floor. ADA mounted water closet shall have rim set 457 mm (18 inches) above finished floor.1.Seat: Institutional/Industrial, extra heavy duty, chemical resistant, solid plastic, open front less cover for elongated bowls, integrally molded bumpers, concealed check hinge with stainless steel post. Seat shall be posture contoured body design. Color shall be white. 2.Fittings and Accessories: Gaskets neoprene; bolts with chromium plated caps nuts and washers. 3.Flush valve: Large chloramines resistant diaphragm, semi-red brass valve body, exposed chrome plated, nonhold open ADA approved side oscillating handle, water saver design 4.9 L (1.28 gallons) per flush with maximum 10 percent variance, 25 mm (1 inch) screwdriver back check angle stop with vandal resistant cap, adjustable tailpiece, a high back pressure vacuum breaker, spud coupling for 38 mm (1 1/2 inches) top spud, wall and spud flanges, and sweat solder adapter with cover tube and set screw wall flange. Valve body, cover, tailpiece and control stop shall be in conformance with ASTM alloy classification for semi-red brass. Seat bumpers shall be integral part of flush valve. Set centerline of inlet 292 mm (11 1/2 inches) above rim. 2.7 LAVATORIESA.Dimensions for lavatories are specified, Length by width (distance from wall) and depth.B.Brass components in contact with water shall contain no more than 0.25 percent lead content by dry weight.C. (P402) Lavatory (Elbow Control, ASME/ANSI A112.19.2M, Figure 16) straight back, approximately 508 mm by 457 mm (20 inches by 18 inches) and a 102 mm (4 inches) maximum apron, first quality vitreous china. Punching for faucet on 203 mm (8 inches) centers. Set with rim 864 mm (34 inches) above finished floor. Product shall bear the Water Sense Label.1.Faucet: Solid cast brass construction with washer-less ceramic disc mixing cartridge type and centrally exposed rigid gooseneck spout with outlet 127-152 mm (5-6 inches) above rim. Provide laminar flow control device. One hundred millimeters (4 inches) elbow handles on faucets shall be cast, formed or drop forged copper alloy. Faucet, wall and floor escutcheons shall be either copper alloy or CRS. Exposed metal parts, including exposed part under valve handle when in open position, shall have a smooth bright finish. 2.Drain: Cast or wrought brass with flat grid strainer and offset tailpiece, chrome plated finish. Stops: Angle type, See paragraph 2.2. StopsTrap: Cast copper alloy, 38 mm by 32 mm (1 1/2 inches by 1 1/4 inches) P-trap. Adjustable with connected elbow and 1.4 mm thick (17 gauge) tubing extensions to wall. Exposed metal trap surfaces and connection hardware shall be chrome plated with a smooth bright finish. Set trap parallel to wall.Provide cover for drain, stops and trap per A.D.A 4-19.4.D.(P-414) Lavatory (Wrist Control, ASME/ANSI A112.19.2M, Figure 16) straight back, approximately 508 mm by 457 mm (20 inches by 18 inches) and a 102 mm (4 inches) minimum apron, first quality vitreous china. Punching for faucet shall be on 203 mm (8 inches) centers. Set rim 864 mm (34 inches) above finished floor. Product shall bear the Water Sense Label.1.Faucet: Solid cast brass construction with washerless ceramic mixing cartridge type and centrally exposed rigid gooseneck spout with outlet 102 mm to 127 mm (4 inches to 5 inches) above rim. Provide laminar flow control device. One hundred two millimeter (4-inch) wrist blade type, handles on faucets shall be cast, formed or drop forged copper alloy. Faucet, wall and floor escutcheons shall be either copper alloy or CRS. Exposed metal parts, including exposed part under valve handle when in open position, shall be chrome plated with a smooth bright finish.2.Drain: Cast or wrought brass with flat grid strainer, offset tailpiece, chrome plated. 3.Stops: Angle type. See paragraph 2.2.Stops 4.Trap: Cast copper alloy, 38 mm by 32 mm (1 1/2 inches by 1 1/4 inches)Ptrap. Adjustable with connected elbow and 1.4 mm thick (17 gauge) tubing extension to wall. Exposed metal trap surface, and connection hardware shall be chrome plated with a smooth bright finish. Set trap parallel to the wall.5.Provide cover for drain, stops and trap per A.D.A 4-19.4.6.Mounting Height: Provide clear floor space underneath in accordance with ADA Section 305 and knee and toe clearance in accordance with ADA Section 306, but no more than 860 mm (34 inches) from the floor to top of rim.E.(P417) Lavatory (Counter Mounted ASME/ANSI A112.19.2M, Figure 25) vitreous china, selfrimming, approximately 483 mm (19 inches) in diameter with punching for faucet on 102 mm (4 inches) centers. Mount unit in countertop. 1.Faucet: Solid cast brass construction, Single handle deck type, 203 mm (8 inches) maximum center, gooseneck spout with outlet 127 to 178 mm (5 to 7 inches) above rim, 152 mm (6 inches) lever handle. Control shall be washer-less ceramic disc mixing cartridge type. Provide laminar flow control device, high temperature limit stop and vandal proof screws. 2.Drain: Cast or wrought brass with flat grid strainer, offset tailpiece, chrome plated. 3.Stops: Angle type. See paragraph 2.2. Stops4.Trap: Cast copper alloy, 38 mm by 32 mm (1 1/2 inches by 1 1/4 inches)Ptrap, adjustable with connected elbow and 1.4 mm thick (17 gauge) tubing extension to wall. Set trap parallel to the wall. Exposed metal trap surface and connection hardware shall be chrome plated with a smooth bright finish.5.Provide cover for drain, stops and trap per A.D.A 4-19.4.2.8 SINKS A.Dimensions for sinks are specified, length by width (distance from wall) and depth.B.(P502) Service Sink (Corner, Floor Mounted) stain resistant terrazzo, 711 mm by 711 mm by 305 mm (28 inches by 28 inches by 12 inches) with 152 mm (6 inches) drop front. Terrazzo, composed of marble chips and white Portland cement, shall develop compressive strength of 20684 kPa (3000 psi) seven days after casting. Provide extruded aluminum cap on front side.1.Faucet: Solid brass construction, combination faucet with replaceable monel seat, removable replacement unit containing all parts subject to wear, integral stops, mounted on wall above sink. Spout shall have a pail hook, 19 mm (3/4 inch) hose coupling threads, vacuum breaker, and top or bottom brace to wall. Fourarm handles on faucets shall be cast, formed, or drop forged copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be either forged copper alloy or CRS. Exposed metal parts, including exposed part under valve handle when in open position, shall have a smooth bright finish. Provide 914 mm (36 inches) hose with wall hook. Centerline of rough in is 1219 mm (48 inches) above finished floor.2.Drain: Seventy six millimeter (3 inches) cast brass drain with nickel bronze strainer.3.Trap: P-trap, drain through floor.4.Accessories:a.24 inches long by 3 inches wide, stainless steel with three rubber tool grips.b.Stainless steel wall guards on two sides.C.(P529) Sink (CRS, Single Compartment, Counter Top ASME/ANSI A112.19.2M, Kitchen Sinks, Figure 5) self rimming, back faucet ledge, undercoated, approximately 381 mm by 457 mm (15 inches by 18 inches) with single compartment inside dimensions approximately 406 mm by 483 mm by 191 mm (16 inches by 19 inches by 7 1/2 inches) deep. Shall be minimum of 1.3 mm thick (18 gauge) CRS. Corners and edges shall be well rounded:1.Faucet: Solid brass construction, deck mounted combination faucet with monel or ceramic seats, removable replacement unit containing all parts subject to ware, swivel gooseneck spout with approximately 203 mm (8 inches) reach with spout outlet 152 mm (6 inches above deck and 102 mm (4 inches) wrist blades. Faucet shall be polished chrome plated. 2.Drain: Drain plug with cup strainer, stainless steel. Trap: Cast copper alloy 38 mm (1 1/2 inches) Ptrap with cleanout plug. Provide wall connection and escutcheon. PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Fixture Setting: Opening between fixture and floor and wall finish shall be sealed as specified under Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.B.Supports and Fastening: Secure all fixtures, equipment and trimmings to partitions, walls and related finish surfaces. Exposed heads of bolts and nuts in finished rooms shall be hexagonal, polished chrome plated brass with rounded tops.C.Through Bolts: For free standing marble and metal stud partitions refer to Section 10 21 13, TOILET COMPARTMENTS.D.Toggle Bolts: For hollow masonry units, finished or unfinished.E.Expansion Bolts: For brick or concrete or other solid masonry. Shall be 6 mm (1/4 inch) diameter bolts, and to extend at least 76 mm (3 inches) into masonry and be fitted with loose tubing or sleeves extending into masonry. Wood plugs, fiber plugs, lead or other soft metal shields are prohibited.F.Power Set Fasteners: May be used for concrete walls, shall be 6 mm (1/4 inch) threaded studs, and shall extend at least 32 mm (1 1/4 inches) into wall.G.Tightly cover and protect fixtures and equipment against dirt, water and chemical or mechanical injury.H.Where water closet waste pipe has to be offset due to beam interference, provide correct and additional piping necessary to eliminate relocation of water closet.I.Do not use aerators on lavatories and sinks.3.2 CLEANINGAt completion of all work, fixtures, exposed materials and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 23 05 11COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.The requirements of this Section apply to all sections of Division 23. B.Definitions:1.Exposed: Piping, ductwork, and equipment exposed to view in finished rooms. 2.Option or optional: Contractor's choice of an alternate material or method. 3.COTR: Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative.RELATED WORK Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTSB. Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES C.Section 02 82 11, TRADITIONAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT D.Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS E.Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING F.Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS G.Section 09 91 00, PAINTING H.Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS EQUIPMENTI.Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING and EQUIPMENTJ.Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, and BALANCING FOR HVACK.Section 23 07 11, HVAC INSULATIONL.Section 23 09 23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVACM.Section 23 21 13, HYDRONIC PIPING N.Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS and CASINGS O.Section 23 36 00, AIR TERMINAL UNITS P.Section 23 37 00, AIR OUTLETS and INLETS Q.Section 23 82 00, CONVECTION HEATING and COOLING UNITS R.Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS S.Section 26 05 19, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Mechanical, electrical and associated systems shall be safe, reliable, efficient, durable, easily and safely operable and maintainable, easily and safely accessible, and in compliance with applicable codes as specified. The systems shall be comprised of high quality institutional-class and industrial-class products of manufacturers that are experienced specialists in the required product lines. All construction firms and personnel shall be experienced and qualified specialists in industrial and institutional HVAC B.Flow Rate Tolerance for HVAC Equipment: Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.C.Equipment Vibration Tolerance:1.Refer to Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING and EQUIPMENT. Equipment shall be factory-balanced to this tolerance and re-balanced on site, as necessary.2.After HVAC air balance work is completed and permanent drive sheaves are in place, perform field mechanical balancing and adjustments required to meet the specified vibration tolerance.D.Products Criteria:1.Standard Products: Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least 3 years (or longer as specified elsewhere). The design, model and size of each item shall have been in satisfactory and efficient operation on at least three installations for approximately three years. However, digital electronics devices, software and systems such as controls, instruments, shall be the current generation of technology and basic design that has a proven satisfactory service record of at least three years. See other specification sections for any exceptions and/or additional requirements.2.All items furnished shall be free from defects that would adversely affect the performance, maintainability and appearance of individual components and overall assembly.3.Conform to codes and standards as required by the specifications. Conform to local codes, if required by local authorities if the local codes are more stringent than those specified. Refer any conflicts to the Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative (COTR).4.Multiple Units: When two or more units of materials or equipment of the same type or class are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer.5.Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use components made by others, assume complete responsibility for the final assembled product.6.Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast integrally with equipment, stamped or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment.7.Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used.E.Equipment Service Organizations: 1.HVAC: Products and systems shall be supported by service organizations that maintain a complete inventory of repair parts and are located within 50 miles to the site. F.HVAC Mechanical Systems Welding: Before any welding is performed, contractor shall submit a certificate certifying that welders comply with the following requirements:1.Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications".ply with provisions of ASME B31 series "Code for Pressure Piping".3.Certify that each welder has passed American Welding Society (AWS) qualification tests for the welding processes involved, and that certification is current.G.Execution (Installation, Construction) Quality:1.Apply and install all items in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Refer conflicts between the manufacturer's instructions and the contract drawings and specifications to the COTR for resolution. Provide written hard copies or computer files of manufacturer’s installation instructions to the COTR at least two weeks prior to commencing installation of any item. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations is a cause for rejection of the material.2.Provide complete layout drawings required by Paragraph, SUBMITTALS. Do not commence construction work on any system until the layout drawings have been approved.H.Upon request by Government, provide lists of previous installations for selected items of equipment. Include contact persons who will serve as references, with telephone numbers and e-mail addresses.1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, and with requirements in the individual specification sections. B.Contractor shall make all necessary field measurements and investigations to assure that the equipment and assemblies will meet contract requirements.C.If equipment is submitted which differs in arrangement from that shown, provide drawings that show the rearrangement of all associated systems. Approval will be given only if all features of the equipment and associated systems, including accessibility, are equivalent to that required by the contract.D.Prior to submitting shop drawings for approval, contractor shall certify in writing that manufacturers of all major items of equipment have each reviewed drawings and specifications, and have jointly coordinated and properly integrated their equipment and controls to provide a complete and efficient installation.E.Submittals and shop drawings for interdependent items, containing applicable descriptive information, shall be furnished together and complete in a group. Coordinate and properly integrate materials and equipment in each group to provide a completely compatible and efficient.F.Layout Drawings: 1.Submit complete consolidated and coordinated layout drawings for all new systems, and for existing systems that are in the same areas. 2.The drawings shall include plan views, elevations and sections of all systems and shall be on a scale of not less than 1:32 (3/8-inch equal to one foot). Clearly identify and dimension the proposed locations of the principal items of equipment. The drawings shall clearly show locations and adequate clearance for all equipment, piping, valves, control panels and other items. Show the access means for all items requiring access for operations and maintenance. Provide detailed layout drawings of all piping and duct systems.3.Do not install equipment foundations, equipment or piping until layout drawings have been approved. 4.In addition, for HVAC systems, provide details of the following:a..Interstitial space.b.Hangers, inserts, supports, and bracing. c.Pipe sleeves. d.Duct or equipment penetrations of floors, walls, ceilings, or roofs.G.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Submit under the pertinent section rather than under this section. 1.Equipment and materials identification. 2.Fire-stopping materials. 3.Hangers, inserts, supports and bracing. Provide load calculations for variable spring and constant support hangers. 4.Wall, floor, and ceiling plates. H.HVAC Maintenance Data and Operating Instructions: 1.Maintenance and operating manuals in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, INSTRUCTIONS, for systems and equipment. 2.Provide a listing of recommended replacement parts for keeping in stock supply, including sources of supply, for equipment. Include in the listing belts for equipment: Belt manufacturer, model number, size and style, and distinguished whether of multiple belt sets. I.Provide copies of approved HVAC equipment submittals to the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Subcontractor. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.American National Standard Institute (ANSI): B31.12010Power Piping C.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC): Section IX-2013Welding and Brazing Qualifications Code for Pressure Piping:B31.1-2010Power PipingD.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A36/A36M-08Standard Specification for Carbon Structural SteelA575-96(2007)Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades E84-12Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials E11912Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials E.Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc: SP582009Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design and Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation SP 69-2003Pipe Hangers and Supports-Selection and ApplicationSP 127-2001Bracing for Piping Systems, Seismic – Wind – Dynamic, Design, Selection, ApplicationFNational Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-11National Electrical Code90A12Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 10112Life Safety Code 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Protection of Equipment: 1.Equipment and material placed on the job site shall remain in the custody of the Contractor until phased acceptance, whether or not the Government has reimbursed the Contractor for the equipment and material. The Contractor is solely responsible for the protection of such equipment and material against any damage.2.Place damaged equipment in first class, new operating condition; or, replace same as determined and directed by the COTR. Such repair or replacement shall be at no additional cost to the Government.3.Protect interiors of new equipment and piping systems against entry of foreign matter. Clean both inside and outside before painting or placing equipment in operation.a.Cap or plug openings in equipment, piping, duct, and conduit systems, to exclude dirt and other foreign material. Do not use rags, wool, cotton, paper, waste, or similar materials for plugging.4.Existing equipment and piping being worked on by the Contractor shall be under the custody and responsibility of the Contractor and shall be protected as required for new work.B.Cleanliness of Piping and Equipment Systems:1.Exercise care in storage and handling of equipment and piping material to be incorporated in the work. Remove debris arising from cutting, threading and welding of piping.2.Piping systems shall be flushed, blown or pigged as necessary to deliver clean systems.3.Clean interior of all tanks prior to delivery for beneficial use by the Government.4.Contractor shall be fully responsible for all costs, damage, and delay arising from failure to provide clean systems.1.7 JOB CONDITIONS – work in existing BuildingA.Building Operation: Government employees will be continuously operating and managing all facilities, including temporary facilities, that serve the medical center. B.Maintenance of Service: Schedule all work to permit continuous service as required by the medical center. C.Phasing of Work: Comply with all requirements shown on drawings or specified.D.Building Working Environment: Maintain the architectural and structural integrity of the building and the working environment at all times. Maintain the interior of building at 18 degrees C (65 degrees F) minimum. Limit the opening of doors, windows or other access openings to brief periods as necessary for rigging purposes. No storm water or ground water leakage permitted. Provide daily cleanup of construction and demolition debris on all floor surfaces and on all equipment being operated by VA. E.Acceptance of Work for Government Operation: As new facilities are made available for operation and these facilities are of beneficial use to the Government, inspections will be made and tests will be performed. Based on the inspections, a list of contract deficiencies will be issued to the Contractor. After correction of deficiencies as necessary for beneficial use, the COTR will process necessary acceptance and the equipment will then be under the control and operation of Government personnel.FTemporary Facilities: Refer to Article, TEMPORARY PIPING AND EQUIPMENT in this section.PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FACTORY-ASSEMBLED PRODUCTSA.Provide maximum standardization of components to reduce spare part requirements.B.Manufacturers of equipment assemblies that include components made by others shall assume complete responsibility for final assembled unit.1.All components of an assembled unit need not be products of same manufacturer.2.Constituent parts that are alike shall be products of a single manufacturer.ponents shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for intended service.4.Contractor shall guarantee performance of assemblies of components, and shall repair or replace elements of the assemblies as required to deliver specified performance of the complete assembly.ponents of equipment shall bear manufacturer's name and trademark, model number, serial number and performance data on a name plate securely affixed in a conspicuous place, or cast integral with, stamped or otherwise permanently marked upon the components of the equipment.D.Major items of equipment, which serve the same function, must be the same make and model. Exceptions will be permitted if performance requirements cannot be met.2.2 COMPATIBILITY OF RELATED EQUIPMENT Equipment and materials installed shall be compatible in all respects with other items being furnished and with existing items so that the result will be a complete and fully operational plant that conforms to contract requirements.2.5 LIFTING ATTACHMENTS Provide equipment with suitable lifting attachments to enable equipment to be lifted in its normal position. Lifting attachments shall withstand any handling conditions that might be encountered, without bending or distortion of shape, such as rapid lowering and braking of load.with VA standard detail 15050-22.DWG.2.8 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS IDENTIFICATION A.Use symbols, nomenclature and equipment numbers specified, shown on the drawings and shown in the maintenance manuals. Identification for piping is specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING. B.Interior (Indoor) Equipment: Engraved nameplates, with letters not less than 48 mm (3/16inch) high of brass with blackfilled letters, or rigid black plastic with white letters specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING permanently fastened to the equipment. Identify unit components such as coils, filters, fans, etc. C.Control Items: Label all temperature and humidity sensors, controllers and control dampers. Identify and label each item as they appear on the control diagrams. D.Valve Tags and Lists: Valve tags: Engraved black filled numbers and letters not less than 13 mm (1/2inch) high for number designation, and not less than 6.4 mm(1/4inch) for service designation on 19 gage 38 mm (11/2 inches) round brass disc, attached with brass "S" hook or brass chain. Valve lists: Typed or printed plastic coated card(s), sized 216 mm(81/2 inches) by 280 mm (11 inches) showing tag number, valve function and area of control, for each service or system. Punch sheets for a 3ring notebook.Provide detailed plan for each floor of the building indicating the location and valve number for each valve. Identify location of each valve with a color coded thumb tack in ceiling.2.9 FIRESTOPPING Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING specifies an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases where penetrations occur for piping and ductwork. Refer to Section 23 07 11, HVAC INSULATION, for firestop pipe and duct insulation. 2.10 GALVANIZED REPAIR COMPOUNDMil. Spec. DODP21035B, paint form. 2.11 hvac PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND RESTRAINTS A.Vibration Isolators: Refer to Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.B.Pipe Supports: Comply with MSS SP58. Type Numbers specified refer to this standard. For selection and application comply with MSS SP69. Refer to Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS, for miscellaneous metal support materials and prime coat painting requirements. C.Attachment to Concrete Building Construction:1.Concrete insert: MSS SP-58, Type 18. 2.Selfdrilling expansion shields and machine bolt expansion anchors: Permitted in concrete not less than 102 mm (four inches) thick when approved by the COTR for each job condition.3.Powerdriven fasteners: Permitted in existing concrete or masonry not less than 102 mm (four inches) thick when approved by the COTR for each job condition. D.Attachment to Steel Building Construction: 1.Welded attachment: MSS SP58, Type 22. 2.Beam clamps: MSS SP-58, Types 20, 21, 28 or 29. Type 23 Cclamp may be used for individual copper tubing up to 23mm (7/8inch) outside diameter. E.NOT USEDF.Attachment to existing structure: Support from existing floor/roof frame. /G.Attachment to Wood Construction: Wood screws or lag bolts. H.Hanger Rods: Hotrolled steel, ASTM A36 or A575 for allowable load listed in MSS SP58. For piping, provide adjustment means for controlling level or slope. Types 13 or 15 turnbuckles shall provide 38 mm (11/2 inches) minimum of adjustment and incorporate locknuts. Allthread rods are acceptable. I.Hangers Supporting Multiple Pipes (Trapeze Hangers): Galvanized, cold formed, lipped steel channel horizontal member, not less than 41 mm by 41 mm (15/8 inches by 15/8 inches), 2.7 mm (No. 12 gage), designed to accept special spring held, hardened steel nuts. Not permitted for steam supply and condensate piping. 1.Allowable hanger load: Manufacturers rating less 91kg (200 pounds). 2.Guide individual pipes on the horizontal member of every other trapeze hanger with 6 mm (1/4inch) Ubolt fabricated from steel rod. Provide Type 40 insulation shield, secured by two 13 mm (1/2inch) galvanized steel bands, or preinsulated calcium silicate shield for insulated piping at each hanger. J.Supports for Piping Systems:1.Select hangers sized to encircle insulation on insulated piping. Refer to Section 23 07 11, HVAC. INSULATION for insulation thickness. To protect insulation, provide Type 39 saddles for roller type supports or preinsulated calcium silicate shields. Provide Type 40 insulation shield or preinsulated calcium silicate shield at all other types of supports and hangers including those for preinsulated piping.2.Piping Systems (MSS SP58): a.Standard clevis hanger: Type 1; provide locknut. b.Riser clamps: Type 8. c.Wall brackets: Types 31, 32 or 33. d.Roller supports: Type 41, 43, 44 and 46. e.Saddle support: Type 36, 37 or 38. f.Turnbuckle: Types 13 or 15. Preinsulate.g.Ubolt clamp: Type 24. h.Copper Tube: 1)Hangers, clamps and other support material in contact with tubing shall be painted with copper colored epoxy paint, plastic coated or taped with non adhesive isolation tape to prevent electrolysis.2)For vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser clamps.3)For supporting tube to strut: Provide epoxy painted pipe straps for copper tube or plastic inserted vibration isolation clamps.4)Insulated Lines: Provide pre-insulated calcium silicate shields sized for copper tube.i.Supports for plastic piping: As recommended by the pipe manufacturer with black rubber tape extending one inch beyond steel support or clamp. K. Pre-insulated Calcium Silicate Shields:1.Provide 360 degree water resistant high density 965 kPa (140 psi) compressive strength calcium silicate shields encased in galvanized metal.2.Pre-insulated calcium silicate shields to be installed at the point of support during erection.3.Shield thickness shall match the pipe insulation.4.The type of shield is selected by the temperature of the pipe, the load it must carry, and the type of support it will be used with.a.Shields for supporting chilled or cold water shall have insulation that extends a minimum of 1 inch past the sheet metal. Provide for an adequate vapor barrier in chilled lines.b.The pre-insulated calcium silicate shield shall support the maximum allowable water filled span as indicated in MSS-SP 69. To support the load, the shields may have one or more of the following features: structural inserts 4138 kPa (600 psi) compressive strength, an extra bottom metal shield, or formed structural steel (ASTM A36) wear plates welded to the bottom sheet metal jacket.Shields may be used on steel clevis hanger type supports, roller supports or flat surfaces.L.Seismic Restraint of Piping and Ductwork: Refer to Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS. Comply with MSS SP-127.2.12 PIPE PENETRATIONSA.Install sleeves during construction for other than blocked out floor openings for risers in mechanical bays. B.To prevent accidental liquid spills from passing to a lower level, provide the following: 1.For sleeves: Extend sleeve 25 mm (one inch) above finished floor and provide sealant for watertight joint. 2.For blocked out floor openings: Provide 40 mm (11/2 inch) angle set in silicone adhesive around opening. 3.For drilled penetrations: Provide 40 mm (11/2 inch) angle ring or square set in silicone adhesive around penetration. C.Penetrations are not allowed through beams or ribs, but may be installed in concrete beam flanges. Any deviation from these requirements must receive prior approval of COTR. D.Sheet Metal, Plastic, or Moistureresistant Fiber Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through floors, interior walls, and partitions, unless brass or steel pipe sleeves are specifically called for below.E.Galvanized Steel or an alternate Black Iron Pipe with asphalt coating Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through concrete beam flanges, except where brass pipe sleeves are called for. Provide sleeve for pipe passing through floor of mechanical rooms. Except in mechanical rooms, connect sleeve with floor plate. F.Brass Pipe Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through quarry tile, terrazzo or ceramic tile floors. Connect sleeve with floor plate. G.Sleeve Clearance: Sleeve through floors, walls, partitions, and beam flanges shall be one inch greater in diameter than external diameter of pipe. Sleeve for pipe with insulation shall be large enough to accommodate the insulation. Interior openings shall be caulked tight with fire stopping material and sealant to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and gases. H.Sealant and Adhesives: Shall be as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS. 2.13 Duct penetrations A.Provide curbs for roof mounted piping and equipment. Curbs shall be 18 inches high with continuously welded seams, built-in cant strip, interior baffle with acoustic insulation, curb bottom, hinged curb adapter.B.Provide firestopping for openings through fire and smoke barriers, maintaining minimum required rating of floor, ceiling or wall assembly. See section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.2.14 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS A.Furnish, and turn over to the COTR, tools not readily available commercially, that are required for disassembly or adjustment of equipment and machinery furnished. B.Grease Guns with Attachments for Applicable Fittings: One for each type of grease required for each equipment. C.Tool Containers: Hardwood or metal, permanently identified for intended service and mounted, or located, where directed by the COTR. D.Lubricants: A minimum of 0.95 L (one quart) of oil, and 0.45 kg (one pound) of grease, of equipment manufacturer's recommended grade and type, in unopened containers and properly identified as to use for each different application. 2.15 WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES A.Material and Type: Chrome plated brass or chrome plated steel, one piece or split type with concealed hinge, with set screw for fastening to pipe, or sleeve. Use plates that fit tight around pipes, cover openings around pipes and cover the entire pipe sleeve projection. B.Thickness: Not less than 2.4 mm (3/32inch) for floor plates. For wall and ceiling plates, not less than 0.64 mm (0.025-inch) for up to 80 mm (3inch pipe), 0.89 mm (0.035-inch) for larger pipe. C.Locations: Use where pipe penetrates floors, walls and ceilings in exposed locations, in finished areas only. Provide a watertight joint in spaces where brass or steel pipe sleeves are specified. 2.16 ASBESTOSMaterials containing asbestos are not permitted.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ARRANGEMENT AND INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING A.Coordinate location of piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, ductwork and equipment. Locate piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, ductwork and equipment clear of windows, doors, openings, light outlets, and other services and utilities. Prepare equipment layout drawings to coordinate proper location and personnel access of all facilities. Submit the drawings for review as required by Part 1. Follow manufacturer's published recommendations for installation methods not otherwise specified. B.Operating Personnel Access and Observation Provisions: Select and arrange all equipment and systems to provide clear view and easy access, without use of portable ladders, for maintenance and operation of all devices including, but not limited to: all equipment items, valves, filters, strainers, transmitters, sensors, control devices. All gages and indicators shall be clearly visible by personnel standing on the floor or on permanent platforms. Do not reduce or change maintenance and operating space and access provisions that are shown on the drawings. C.Equipment and Piping Support: Coordinate structural systems necessary for pipe and equipment support with pipe and equipment locations to permit proper installation.D.Location of pipe sleeves, trenches and chases shall be accurately coordinated with equipment and piping locations.E.Cutting Holes:1.Cut holes through concrete and masonry by rotary core drill. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, and hand or manual hammer type drill will not be allowed, except as permitted by COTR where working area space is limited.2.Locate holes to avoid interference with structural members such as beams or grade beams. Holes shall be laid out in advance and drilling done only after approval by COTR. If the Contractor considers it necessary to drill through structural members, this matter shall be referred to COTR for approval.3.Do not penetrate membrane waterproofing.F.Interconnection of Instrumentation or Control Devices: Generally, electrical interconnections are not shown but must be provided.G.Minor Piping: Generally, small diameter pipe runs from drips and drains, water cooling, and other service are not shown but must be provided.H.Electrical Interconnection of Controls and Instruments: This generally not shown but must be provided. This includes interconnections of sensors, transmitters, transducers, control devices, control and instrumentation panels, and instruments. Comply with NFPA-70.I.Protection and Cleaning: 1.Equipment and materials shall be carefully handled, properly stored, and adequately protected to prevent damage before and during installation, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the COTR. Damaged or defective items in the opinion of the COTR, shall be replaced. 2.Protect all finished parts of equipment, such as shafts and bearings where accessible, from rust prior to operation by means of protective grease coating and wrapping. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. Tightly cover and protect fixtures and equipment against dirt, water chemical, or mechanical injury. At completion of all work thoroughly clean fixtures, exposed materials and equipment. J.Concrete and Grout: Use concrete and shrink compensating grout 25 MPa (3000 psi) minimum,.K.Install gages, thermometers, valves and other devices with due regard for ease in reading or operating and maintaining said devices. Locate and position thermometers and gages to be easily read by operator or staff standing on floor or walkway provided. Servicing shall not require dismantling adjacent equipment or pipe work. L. Install grounding rings on motor shaft.M.Work in Existing Building: 1.Perform as specified in Article, OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS, Article, ALTERATIONS, and Article, RESTORATION of the Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS for relocation of existing equipment, alterations and restoration of existing building(s). 2.As specified in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS, make alterations to existing service piping at times that will least interfere with normal operation of the facility. 3.Cut required openings through existing masonry and reinforced concrete using diamond core drills. Use of pneumatic hammer type drills, impact type electric drills, and hand or manual hammer type drills, will be permitted only with approval of the COTR. Locate openings that will least effect structural slabs, columns, ribs or beams. Refer to the COTR for determination of proper design for openings through structural sections and opening layouts approval, prior to cutting or drilling into structure. After COTR's approval, carefully cut opening through construction no larger than absolutely necessary for the required installation. NSwitchgear/Electrical Equipment Drip Protection: Every effort shall be made to eliminate the installation of pipe above electrical and telephone switchgear. If this is not possible, encase pipe in a second pipe with a minimum of joints. Installation of piping, ductwork, leak protection apparatus or other installations foreign to the electrical installation shall be located in the space equal to the width and depth of the equipment and extending from to a height of 1.8 m (6 ft.) above the equipment of to ceiling structure, whichever is lower (NFPA 70).O.Inaccessible Equipment:1.Where the Government determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, equipment shall be removed and reinstalled or remedial action performed as directed at no additional cost to the Government.2.The term "conveniently accessible" is defined as capable of being reached without the use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as motors, fans, pumps, belt guards, transformers, high voltage lines, piping, and ductwork.3.2 TEMPORARY PIPING AND EQUIPMENTA.Continuity of operation of existing facilities will generally require temporary installation or relocation of equipment and piping.B.The Contractor shall provide all required facilities in accordance with the requirements of phased construction and maintenance of service. All piping and equipment shall be properly supported, sloped to drain, operate without excessive stress, and shall be insulated where injury can occur to personnel by contact with operating facilities. The requirements of Paragraph 3.1 apply.C.Temporary facilities and piping shall be completely removed and any openings in structures sealed. Provide necessary blind flanges and caps to seal open piping remaining in service.3.3 RIGGINGA.Design is based on application of available equipment. Openings in building structures are planned to accommodate design scheme.B.Alternative methods of equipment delivery may be offered by Contractor and will be considered by Government under specified restrictions of phasing and maintenance of service as well as structural integrity of the building.C.Close all openings in the building when not required for rigging operations to maintain proper environment in the facility for Government operation and maintenance of service. D.Contractor shall provide all facilities required to deliver specified equipment and place on foundations. Attachments to structures for rigging purposes and support of equipment on structures shall be Contractor's full responsibility. Upon request, the Government will check structure adequacy and advise Contractor of recommended restrictions.E.Contractor shall check all clearances, weight limitations and shall offer a rigging plan designed by a Registered Professional Engineer. All modifications to structures, including reinforcement thereof, shall be at Contractor's cost, time and responsibility.F.Rigging plan and methods shall be referred to COTR for evaluation prior to actual work.G.Restore building to original condition upon completion of rigging work.3.4 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A.Where hanger spacing does not correspond with joist or rib spacing, use structural steel channels secured directly to joist and rib structure that will correspond to the required hanger spacing, and then suspend the equipment and piping from the channels. Drill or burn holes in structural steel only with the prior approval of the COTR. B.Use of chain, wire or strap hangers; wood for blocking, stays and bracing; or, hangers suspended from piping above will not be permitted. Replace or thoroughly clean rusty products and paint with zinc primer. C.Use hanger rods that are straight and vertical. Turnbuckles for vertical adjustments may be omitted where limited space prevents use. Provide a minimum of 15 mm (1/2inch) clearance between pipe or piping covering and adjacent work. D.HVAC Horizontal Pipe Support Spacing: Refer to MSS SP69. Provide additional supports at valves, strainers, inline pumps and other heavy components. Provide a support within one foot of each elbow. E.HVAC Vertical Pipe Supports: 1.Up to 150 mm (6inch pipe), 9 m (30 feet) long, bolt riser clamps to the pipe below couplings, or welded to the pipe and rests supports securely on the building structure. 2.Vertical pipe larger than the foregoing, support on base elbows or tees, or substantial pipe legs extending to the building structure. F.Overhead Supports:1.The basic structural system of the building is designed to sustain the loads imposed by equipment and piping to be supported overhead.2.Provide steel structural members, in addition to those shown, of adequate capability to support the imposed loads, located in accordance with the final approved layout of equipment and piping.3.Tubing and capillary systems shall be supported in channel troughs.G.Floor Supports:1.Provide concrete bases, concrete anchor blocks and pedestals, and structural steel systems for support of equipment and piping. Anchor and dowel concrete bases and structural systems to resist forces under operating and seismic conditions (if applicable) without excessive displacement or structural failure.2.Do not locate or install bases and supports until equipment mounted thereon has been approved. Size bases to match equipment mounted thereon plus 50 mm (2 inch) excess on all edges. Refer to structural drawings. Bases shall be neatly finished and smoothed, shall have chamfered edges at the top, and shall be suitable for painting.3.All equipment shall be shimmed, leveled, firmly anchored, and grouted with epoxy grout. Anchor bolts shall be placed in sleeves, anchored to the bases. Fill the annular space between sleeves and bolts with a granular material to permit alignment and realignment.For seismic anchoring, refer to Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS. 3.5 MECHANICAL DEMOLITIONA.Rigging access, other than indicated on the drawings, shall be provided by the Contractor after approval for structural integrity by the COTR. Such access shall be provided without additional cost or time to the Government. Where work is in an operating plant, provide approved protection from dust and debris at all times for the safety of plant personnel and maintenance of plant operation and environment of the plant.B.In an operating facility, maintain the operation, cleanliness and safety. Government personnel will be carrying on their normal duties of operating, cleaning and maintaining equipment and operation. Confine the work to the immediate area concerned; maintain cleanliness and wet down demolished materials to eliminate dust. Do not permit debris to accumulate in the area to the detriment of operations. Perform all flame cutting to maintain the fire safety integrity of the building. Adequate fire extinguishing facilities shall be available at all times. Perform all work in accordance with recognized fire protection standards. Inspection will be made by personnel of the VA Medical Center, and Contractor shall follow all directives of the COTR with regard to rigging, safety, fire safety, and maintenance of operations.pletely remove all piping, wiring, conduit, and other devices associated with the equipment not to be re-used in the new work. This includes all pipe, valves, fittings, insulation, and all hangers including the top connection and any fastenings to building structural systems. Seal all openings, after removal of equipment, pipes, ducts, and other penetrations in roof, walls, floors, in an approved manner and in accordance with plans and specifications where specifically covered. Structural integrity of the building system shall be maintained. Reference shall also be made to the drawings and specifications of the other disciplines in the project for additional facilities to be demolished or handled.D.All valves including gate, globe, ball, butterfly and check, all pressure gages and thermometers with wells shall remain Government property and shall be removed and delivered to COTR and stored as directed. The Contractor shall remove all other material and equipment, devices and demolition debris under these plans and specifications. Such material shall be removed from Government property expeditiously and shall not be allowed to accumulate.E.Asbestos Insulation Removal: Conform to Section 02 82 11, TRADITIONAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT.3.6 CLEANING AND PAINTINGA.Prior to final inspection and acceptance of the facilities for beneficial use by the Government, the equipment and systems shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted. Refer to Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.B.In addition, the following special conditions apply:Cleaning shall be thorough. Use solvents, cleaning materials and methods recommended by the manufacturers for the specific tasks. Remove all rust prior to painting and from surfaces to remain unpainted. Repair scratches, scuffs, and abrasions prior to applying prime and finish coats. Material And Equipment Not To Be Painted Includes:b.Control and interlock devices.c.Regulators.d.Pressure reducing valves.e.Control valves and thermostatic elements.f.Lubrication devices and grease fittings.g.Copper, brass, aluminum, stainless steel and bronze surfaces.h.Valve stems and rotating shafts.i.Pressure gauges and thermometers.j.Glass.k.Name plates.3.Control and instrument panels shall be cleaned, damaged surfaces repaired, and shall be touched-up with matching paint obtained from panel manufacturer.4.Pumps, motors, steel and cast iron bases, and coupling guards shall be cleaned, and shall be touched-up with the same color as utilized by the pump manufacturer 5.Temporary Facilities: Apply paint to surfaces that do not have existing finish coats.7.Final result shall be smooth, even-colored, even-textured factory finish on all items. Completely repaint the entire piece of equipment if necessary to achieve this.3.7 IDENTIFICATION SIGNSA.Provide laminated plastic signs, with engraved lettering not less than 5?mm (3/16-inch) high, designating functions, for all equipment, switches, relays, meters, control devices, including automatic control valves. Nomenclature and identification symbols shall correspond to that used in maintenance manual, and in diagrams specified elsewhere. Attach by chain, adhesive, or screws.B.Factory Built Equipment: Metal plate, securely attached, with name and address of manufacturer, serial number, model number, size, performance.3.9 LUBRICATION A.Lubricate all devices requiring lubrication prior to initial operation. Field-check all devices for proper lubrication.B.Equip all devices with required lubrication fittings or devices. Provide a minimum of one liter (one quart) of oil and 0.5 kg (one pound) of grease of manufacturer's recommended grade and type for each different application; also provide 12 grease sticks for lubricated plug valves. Deliver all materials to COTR in unopened containers that are properly identified as to application.C.Provide a separate grease gun with attachments for applicable fittings for each type of grease applied.D.All lubrication points shall be accessible without disassembling equipment, except to remove access plates.3.10 STARTUP AND TEMPORARY OPERATION Start-up equipment as described in equipment specifications. Verify that vibration is within specified tolerance prior to extended operation. Temporary use of equipment is specified in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, TEMPORARY USE OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. 3.11 OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS A.Prior to the final inspection, perform required tests as specified in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS and submit the test reports and records to the COTR. B.Should evidence of malfunction in any tested system, or piece of equipment or component part thereof, occur during or as a result of tests, make proper corrections, repairs or replacements, and repeat tests at no additional cost to the Government. C.When completion of certain work or system occurs at a time when final control settings and adjustments cannot be properly made to make performance tests, then make performance tests for heating systems and for cooling systems respectively during first actual seasonal use of respective systems following completion of work. 3.12 INSTRUCTIONS TO VA PERSONNELProvide in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, of Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. E N D SECTION 23 05 41NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENTPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTIONNoise criteria, seismic restraints for equipment , vibration tolerance and vibration isolation for HVAC and plumbing work. 1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS: Seismic requirements for non-structural equipmentB.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC : General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division 23. C.Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS and CASINGS: requirements for flexible duct connectors, sound attenuators and sound absorbing duct lining.D.SECTION 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, and BALANCING FOR HVAC: requirements for sound and vibration tests. E.SECTION 23 37 00, AIR OUTLETS and INLETS: noise requirements for G-grilles. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA.Refer to article, QUALITY ASSURANCE in specification Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC.B.Noise Criteria:1.Noise levels in all 8 octave bands due to equipment and duct systems shall not exceed following NC levels:Type Of RoomNC LEVELBathrooms and Toilet Rooms40Conference Rooms35Corridors40Examination Rooms35Waiting Areas40Offices, Large Open 40Offices, Small Private 352.For equipment which has no sound power ratings scheduled on the plans, the contractor shall select equipment such that the fore-going noise criteria, local ordinance noise levels, and OSHA requirements are not exceeded. Selection procedure shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, Chapter 8, Sound and Vibration.3.An allowance, not to exceed 5db, may be added to the measured value to compensate for the variation of the room attenuating effect between room test condition prior to occupancy and design condition after occupancy which may include the addition of sound absorbing material, such as, furniture. This allowance may not be taken after occupancy. The room attenuating effect is defined as the difference between sound power level emitted to room and sound pressure level in room.4.In absence of specified measurement requirements, measure equipment noise levels three feet from equipment and at an elevation of maximum noise generation.C.Seismic Restraint Requirements: 1.Equipment: a.All mechanical equipment not supported with isolators external to the unit shall be securely anchored to the structure. Such mechanical equipment shall be properly supported to resist a horizontal force of 20 percent of the weight of the equipment furnished. b.All mechanical equipment mounted on vibration isolators shall be provided with seismic restraints capable of resisting a horizontal force of 50 percent of the weight of the equipment furnished.2.Piping: Refer to specification Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC .3.Ductwork: Refer to specification Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS.1.4 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with specification Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data:1.Vibration isolators: a.Floor mountings b.Hangers 2.Bases. 3. Seismic restraint provisions and bolting.C.Seismic Requirements: Submittals are required for all equipment anchors, supports and seismic restraints. Submittals shall include weights, dimensions, standard connections, and manufacturer's certification that all specified equipment will withstand seismic Lateral Force requirements as shown on drawings.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE): 2013 Fundamentals Handbook, Chapter 8, Sound and VibrationC.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A123/A123M-12Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel ProductsA307-12Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile StrengthD2240-05(2010)Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer HardnessD.Manufacturers Standardization (MSS):SP-58-2009Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design and ManufactureE.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):29 CFR 1910.95Occupational Noise ExposureF.American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): ASCE 7-10 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.G.American National Standards Institute / Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (ANSI/SMACNA): 001-2008Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems, 3rd Edition.H.International Code Council (ICC): 2012 IBCInternational Building Code.I.Department of Veterans Affairs (VA): H-18-8 2010Seismic Design Requirements.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 GENERAL RequirementsA.Type of isolatorand minimum static deflection shall be as required for each specific equipment application as recommended by isolator or equipment manufacturer but subject to minimum requirements indicated herein and in the schedule on the drawings.B.Elastometric Isolators shall comply with ASTM D2240 and be oil resistant neoprene with a maximum stiffness of 60 durometer and have a straight-line deflection curve.C.Uniform Loading: Select and locate isolators to produce uniform loading and deflection even when equipment weight is not evenly distributed. D.Color code isolators by type and size for easy identification of capacity. 2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A.Floor Mountings:1.Spring Isolators (Type S): Shall be free-standing, laterally stable and include acoustical friction pads and leveling bolts. Isolators shall have a minimum ratio of spring diameter-to-operating spring height of 1.0 and an additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of rated deflection.2.Pads (Type D), Washers (Type W), and Bushings (Type L): Pads shall be natural rubber or neoprene waffle, neoprene and steel waffle, or reinforced duck and neoprene. Washers and bushings shall be reinforced duck and neoprene. Washers and bushings shall be reinforced duck and neoprene. Size pads for a maximum load of 345 kPa (50 pounds per square inch).B.Hangers: Shall be combination neoprene and springs unless otherwise noted and shall allow for expansion of pipe.bination Neoprene and Spring (Type H): Vibration hanger shall contain a spring and double deflection neoprene element in series. Spring shall have a diameter not less than 0.8 of compressed operating spring height. Spring shall have a minimum additional travel of 50 percent between design height and solid height. Spring shall permit a 15 degree angular misalignment without rubbing on hanger box.2.Hanger supports for piping 50 mm (2 inches) and larger shall have a pointer and scale deflection indicator.3.Hangers used in seismic applications shall be provided with a neoprene and steel rebound washer installed ?’ clear of bottom of hanger housing in operation to prevent spring from excessive upward travel2.5 SOUND ATTENUATING UNITS Refer to specification Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS and CASINGS.PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Vibration Isolation:1.No metal-to-metal contact will be permitted between fixed and floating parts.2.Provide heat shields where elastomers are subject to temperatures over 38 degrees C (l00 degrees F).B.Inspection and Adjustments: Check for vibration and noise transmission through connections, piping, ductwork, foundations, and walls. Adjust, repair, or replace isolators as required to reduce vibration and noise transmissions to specified levels.3.2 ADJUSTING A.Adjust vibration isolators after piping systems are filled and equipment is at operating weight.B.Adjust active height of spring isolators.- - - E N D - - -SELECTION GUIDE FOR VIBRATION ISOLATORSEQUIPMENTON GRADE20FT FLOOR SPAN30FT FLOOR SPAN40FT FLOOR SPAN50FT FLOOR SPANBASE TYPEISOL TYPEMIN DEFLBASE TYPEISOL TYPEMIN DEFLBASE TYPEISOL TYPEMIN DEFLBASE TYPEISOL TYPEMIN DEFLBASE TYPEISOL TYPEMIN DEFL------NOTES:SECTION 23 05 93TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVACPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.Testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) of heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) systems. TAB includes the following: 1.Planning systematic TAB procedures. 2.Design Review Report.3.Systems Inspection report.4.Duct Air Leakage test report.5.Systems Readiness Report.6.Balancing air and water distribution systems; adjustment of total system to provide design performance; and testing performance of equipment and automatic controls. 7.Vibration and sound measurements. 8.Recording and reporting results. B.Definitions: 1.Basic TAB used in this Section: Chapter 38, "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing" of 2011 ASHRAE Handbook, "HVAC Applications". 2.TAB: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing; the process of checking and adjusting HVAC systems to meet design objectives. 3.AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. 4.NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. 5.Hydronic Systems: Includes and heating hot water. 6.Air Systems: Includes all supply air, return air, exhaust air and relief air systems. 7.Flow rate tolerance: The allowable percentage variation, minus to plus, of actual flow rate from values (design) in the contract documents. 8.COTR: Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC: General Mechanical Requirements.B.Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT: Noise and Vibration Requirements.C.Section 23 07 11, HVAC INSULATION: Piping and Equipment Insulation.D.Section 23 36 00, AIR TERMINAL UNITS: Terminal Units Performance.E.Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS: Duct Leakage.F.Section 23 09 23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC: Controls and Instrumentation Settings.G.Section 23 82 00, CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITSH.Section 23 37 00, AIR OUTLETS AND INLETSI.Section 23 21 13, HYDRONIC PIPING1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA.Refer to Articles, Quality Assurance and Submittals, in Section 23?05?11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC. B.Qualifications:1.TAB Agency: The TAB agency shall be a subcontractor of the General Contractor and shall report to and be paid by the General Contractor.2.The TAB agency shall be either a certified member of AABC or certified by the NEBB to perform TAB service for HVAC, water balancing and vibrations and sound testing of equipment. The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the agency loses subject certification during this period, the General Contractor shall immediately notify the COTR and submit another TAB firm for approval. Any agency that has been the subject of disciplinary action by either the AABC or the NEBB within the five years preceding Contract Award shall not be eligible to perform any work related to the TAB. All work performed in this Section and in other related Sections by the TAB agency shall be considered invalid if the TAB agency loses its certification prior to Contract completion, and the successor agency’s review shows unsatisfactory work performed by the predecessor agency.3.TAB Specialist: The TAB specialist shall be either a member of AABC or an experienced technician of the Agency certified by NEBB. The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the Specialist loses subject certification during this period, the General Contractor shall immediately notify the COTR and submit another TAB Specialist for approval. Any individual that has been the subject of disciplinary action by either the AABC or the NEBB within the five years preceding Contract Award shall not be eligible to perform any duties related to the HVAC systems, including TAB. All work specified in this Section and in other related Sections performed by the TAB specialist shall be considered invalid if the TAB Specialist loses its certification prior to Contract completion and must be performed by an approved successor.4.TAB Specialist shall be identified by the General Contractor within 60 days after the notice to proceed. The TAB specialist will be coordinating, scheduling and reporting all TAB work and related activities and will provide necessary information as required by the COTR. The responsibilities would specifically include:a.Shall directly supervise all TAB work.b.Shall sign the TAB reports that bear the seal of the TAB standard. The reports shall be accompanied by report forms and schematic drawings required by the TAB standard, AABC or NEBB. c.Would follow all TAB work through its satisfactory completion.d.Shall provide final markings of settings of all HVAC adjustment devices.e.Permanently mark location of duct test ports.5.All TAB technicians performing actual TAB work shall be experienced and must have done satisfactory work on a minimum of 3 projects comparable in size and complexity to this project. Qualifications must be certified by the TAB agency in writing. The lead technician shall be certified by AABC or NEBBC.Test Equipment Criteria: The instrumentation shall meet the accuracy/calibration requirements established by AABC National Standards or by NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems and instrument manufacturer. Provide calibration history of the instruments to be used for test and balance purpose.D.Tab Criteria: 1.One or more of the applicable AABC, NEBB or SMACNA publications, supplemented by ASHRAE Handbook "HVAC Applications" Chapter 38, and requirements stated herein shall be the basis for planning, procedures, and reports. 2.Flow rate tolerance: Following tolerances are allowed. For tolerances not mentioned herein follow ASHRAE Handbook "HVAC Applications", Chapter 38, as a guideline. Air Filter resistance during tests, artificially imposed if necessary, shall be at least 100 percent of manufacturer recommended change over pressure drop values for pre-filters and after-filters. a.Air handling unit and all other fans, cubic meters/min (cubic feet per minute): Minus 0 percent to plus l0 percent. b.Air terminal units (maximum values): Minus 2 percent to plus l0 percent. c.Individual room air outlets and inlets, and air flow rates not mentioned above: Minus 5 percent to plus l0 percent except if the air to a space is 100 CFM or less the tolerance would be minus 5 to plus 5 percent. 3.Systems shall be adjusted for energy efficient operation as described in PART 3. 4.Typical TAB procedures and results shall be demonstrated to the COTR for one air distribution system (including all fans, three terminal units, three rooms randomly selected by the COTR) as follows: a.When field TAB work begins. b.During each partial final inspection and the final inspection for the project if requested by VA. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES.B.Submit names and qualifications of TAB agency and TAB specialists within 60 days after the notice to proceed. Submit information on three recently completed projects and a list of proposed test equipment. C.For use by the COTR staff, submit one complete set of applicable AABC or NEBB publications that will be the basis of TAB work.D.Submit Following for Review and Approval: 1.Design Review Report within 90 days for conventional design projects after the system layout on air and water side is completed by the Contractor.2.Systems inspection report on equipment and installation for conformance with design.3.Duct Air Leakage Test Report.4.Systems Readiness Report.5.Intermediate and Final TAB reports covering flow balance and adjustments, performance tests, vibration tests and sound tests.6.Include in final reports uncorrected installation deficiencies noted during TAB and applicable explanatory comments on test results that differ from design requirements. E.Prior to request for Final or Partial Final inspection, submit completed Test and Balance report for the area.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The following publications form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the reference thereto. In text the publications are referenced to by the acronym of the organization. B.American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE): 2011 HVAC Applications ASHRAE Handbook, Chapter 38, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing and Chapter 48, Noise and Vibration ControlC.Associated Air Balance Council (AABC): 2002AABC National Standards for Total System BalanceD.National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB): 7th Edition 2005Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, Balancing of Environmental Systems2nd Edition 2006 Procedural Standards for the Measurement of Sound and Vibration3rd Edition 2009 ........Procedural Standards for Whole Building Systems Commissioning of New ConstructionE.Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): 3rd Edition 2002HVAC SYSTEMS Testing, Adjusting and BalancingPART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLUGS Provide plastic plugs to seal holes drilled in ductwork for test purposes.2.2 INSULATION REPAIR MATERIAL See Section 23 07 11, HVAC INSULATION. Provide for repair of insulation removed or damaged for TAB work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A.Refer to TAB Criteria in Article, Quality Assurance. B.Obtain applicable contract documents and copies of approved submittals for HVAC equipment and automatic control systems. 3.2 design review reportThe TAB Specialist shall review the Contract Plans and specifications and advise the COTR of any design deficiencies that would prevent the HVAC systems from effectively operating in accordance with the sequence of operation specified or prevent the effective and accurate TAB of the system. The TAB Specialist shall provide a report individually listing each deficiency and the corresponding proposed corrective action necessary for proper system operation.3.3 systems inspection reportA.Inspect equipment and installation for conformance with design. B.The inspection and report is to be done after air distribution equipment is on site and duct installation has begun, but well in advance of performance testing and balancing work. The purpose of the inspection is to identify and report deviations from design and ensure that systems will be ready for TAB at the appropriate time. C.Reports: Follow check list format developed by AABC, NEBB or SMACNA, supplemented by narrative comments,. Check for conformance with submittals. Verify that diffuser and register sizes are correct. Check air terminal unit installation including their duct sizes and routing. 3.4 duct air leakage test reportTAB Agency shall perform the leakage test as outlined in "Duct leakage Tests and Repairs" in Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS and CASINGS for TAB agency’s role and responsibilities in witnessing, recording and reporting of deficiencies.3.5 system readiness reportA.The TAB Contractor shall measure existing air and water flow rates associated with existing systems utilized to serve renovated areas where indicated on drawings. Submit report of findings to COTRB.Inspect each System to ensure that it is complete including installation and operation of controls. Submit report to COTR in standard format.C.Verify that all items such as ductwork piping, ports, terminals, connectors, etc., that is required for TAB are installed. Provide a report to the COTR.3.6 tab reportsA.Submit an intermediate report for 50 percent of systems and equipment tested and balanced to establish satisfactory test results.B.The TAB contractor shall provide raw data immediately in writing to the COTR if there is a problem in achieving intended results before submitting a formal report.C.If over 20 percent of readings in the intermediate report fall outside the acceptable range, the TAB report shall be considered invalid and all contract TAB work shall be repeated and re-submitted for approval at no additional cost to the Government.D.Do not proceed with the remaining systems until intermediate report is approved by the COTR.3.7 TAB PROCEDURES A.Tab shall be performed in accordance with the requirement of the Standard under which TAB agency is certified by either AABC or NEBB.B.General: During TAB all related system components shall be in full operation. Fan and pump rotation, motor loads and equipment vibration shall be checked and corrected as necessary before proceeding with TAB. Set controls and/or block off parts of distribution systems to simulate design operation of variable volume air or water systems for test and balance work. Coordinate TAB procedures with existing systems and any phased construction completion requirements for the project. Provide TAB reports for pre construction air and water flow rate for each phase of the project prior to partial final inspections of each phase of the project. Return existing areas outside the work area to pre constructed conditions.Allow 14 days time in construction schedule for TAB and submission of all reports for an organized and timely correction of deficiencies.E.Air Balance and Equipment Test: Include terminal units, and , room diffusers/outlets/inlets. 1.Artificially load air filters by partial blanking to produce air pressure drop of manufacturer’s recommended pressure drop. 2.Adjust fan speeds to provide design air flow. Vbelt drives, including fixed pitch pulley requirements, are specified in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC.3.Test and balance systems in all specified modes of operation, including variable volume, economizer, and fire emergency modes. Verify that dampers and other controls function properly. 4.Variable air volume (VAV) systems: a.Coordinate TAB, including system volumetric controls, with Section 23 09 23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC.b.Section 23 36 00, AIR TERMINAL UNITS, specifies that maximum and minimum flow rates (heating and cooling) for air terminal units (ATU) be factory set. Check and readjust ATU flow rates if necessary. Balance air distribution from ATU on full cooling maximum scheduled cubic meters per minute (cubic feet per minute). Reset room thermostats and check ATU operation from maximum to minimum cooling, to the minimum to maximum heating mode, and back to cooling. Record and report the heating duct leaving air temperature when the ATU is in the maximum heating mode. Record and report outdoor air flow rates under all operating conditions (The test shall demonstrate that the minimum outdoor air ventilation rate shall remain constant under all operating conditions). c.Adjust operating pressure control setpoint to maintain the design flow to each space with the lowest setpoint. 5.Record final measurements for air handling equipment performance data sheets. F.Water Balance and Equipment Test: : 1.Adjust flow rates for finned tube radiation. 2.Record final measurements for hydronic equipment on performance data sheets. 3.9 SOUND TESTING A.Perform and record required sound measurements in accordance with Paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE in Section 23 05 41, NOISE and VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING and EQUIPMENT. 1.Take readings in rooms, approximately fifteen (15) percent of all rooms. The COTR may designate the specific rooms to be tested. B.Take measurements with a calibrated sound level meter and octave band analyzer of the accuracy required by AABC or NEBB. C.Sound reference levels, formulas and coefficients shall be according to ASHRAE Handbook, "HVAC Applications", Chapter 48, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL.D.Determine compliance with specifications as follows: 1.When sound pressure levels are specified, including the NC Criteria in Section 23 05 41, NOISE and VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING and EQUIPMENT: a.Reduce the background noise as much as possible by shutting off unrelated audible equipment. b.Measure octave band sound pressure levels with specified equipment "off." c.Measure octave band sound pressure levels with specified equipment "on." d.Use the DIFFERENCE in corresponding readings to determine the sound pressure due to equipment. DIFFERENCE:012345 to 910 or MoreFACTOR:10743210Sound pressure level due to equipment equals sound pressure level with equipment "on" minus FACTOR. e.Plot octave bands of sound pressure level due to equipment for typical rooms on a graph which also shows noise criteria (NC) curves.2.When sound power levels are specified: a.Perform steps 1.a. thru 1.d., as above. b.For indoor equipment: Determine room attenuating effect, i.e., difference between sound power level and sound pressure level. Determined sound power level will be the sum of sound pressure level due to equipment plus the room attenuating effect. c.For outdoor equipment: Use directivity factor and distance from noise source to determine distance factor, i.e., difference between sound power level and sound pressure level. Measured sound power level will be the sum of sound pressure level due to equipment plus the distance factor. Use // 10 meters (30 feet) // 13 meters (40 feet) // 16 meters (50 feet) // for sound level location.E.Where measured sound levels exceed specified level, the installing contractor or equipment manufacturer shall take remedial action approved by the COTR and the necessary sound tests shall be repeated.F.Test readings for sound testing could go higher than 15 percent if determination is made by the COTR based on the recorded sound data.3.10 Marking of SettingsFollowing approval of Tab final Report, the setting of all HVAC adjustment devices including valves, splitters and dampers shall be permanently marked by the TAB Specialist so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. Style and colors used for markings shall be coordinated with the COTR. 3.11 identification of test portsThe TAB Specialist shall permanently and legibly identify the location points of duct test ports. If the ductwork has exterior insulation, the identification shall be made on the exterior side of the insulation. All penetrations through ductwork and ductwork insulation shall be sealed to prevent air leaks and maintain integrity of vapor barrier.3.12 PhasingA.Phased Projects: Testing and Balancing Work to follow project with areas shall be completed per the project phasing. Upon completion of the project all areas shall have been tested and balanced per the contract documents.B.Existing Areas: Systems that serve areas outside of the project scope shall not be adversely affected. Measure existing parameters where shown to document system capacity. E N D SECTION 23 07 11HVAC INSULATIONPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.Field applied insulation for thermal efficiency and condensation control for 1.HVAC piping and ductwork.2.Re-insulation of HVAC piping, ductwork and equipment, and equipment after asbestos abatement.B.Definitions 1.ASJ: All service jacket, white finish facing or jacket. 2.Air conditioned space: Space having air temperature and/or humidity controlled by mechanical equipment. 3.Cold: Equipment, ductwork or piping handling media at design temperature of 16 degrees C (60 degrees F) or below. 4.Concealed: Ductwork and piping above ceilings and in chases, interstitial space, and pipe spaces. 5.Exposed: Piping, ductwork, and equipment exposed to view in finished areas including and electrical equipment rooms. Shafts, chases, interstitial spaces, unfinished attics, crawl spaces and pipe basements are not considered finished areas.6.FSK: Foilscrimkraft facing. 7.Hot: HVAC Ductwork handling air at design temperature above 16 degrees C (60 degrees F);HVAC equipment or piping handling media above 41 degrees C (105 degrees F). 8.Density: kg/m3 - kilograms per cubic meter (Pcf - pounds per cubic foot). 9.Runouts: Branch pipe connections up to 25-mm (one-inch) nominal size to fan coil units or reheat coils for terminal units.10.Thermal conductance: Heat flow rate through materials.a.Flat surface: Watt per square meter (BTU per hour per square foot). b.Pipe or Cylinder: Watt per square meter (BTU per hour per linear foot). 11.Thermal Conductivity (k): Watt per meter, per degree C (BTU per inch thickness, per hour, per square foot, per degree F temperature difference).12.Vapor Retarder (Vapor Barrier): A material which retards the transmission (migration) of water vapor. Performance of the vapor retarder is rated in terms of permeance (perms). For the purpose of this specification, vapor retarders shall have a maximum published permeance of 0.1 perms and vapor barriers shall have a maximum published permeance of 0.001 perms. 18.HS: Hot water heating supply.19.HR: Hot water heating return.20.PVDC: Polyvinylidene chloride vapor retarder jacketing, white.21.COTR: Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 02 82 11, TRADITIONAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT: Insulation containing asbestos material. B.Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING: Mineral fiber and bond breaker behind sealant. C.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC: General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division 23. D.Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING and EQUIPMENTE.Section 23 21 13, HYDRONIC PIPING: Hot water piping. F.Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS: Ductwork, plenum and fittings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Refer to article QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC.B.Criteria: ply with NFPA 90A, particularly paragraphs 4.3.3.1 through 4.3.3.6, and 4.3.11.2.6 parts of which are quoted as follows:4.3.3.1 Pipe and duct insulation and coverings, duct linings, vapor retarder facings, adhesives, fasteners, tapes, and supplementary materials added to air ducts, plenums, panels, and duct silencers used in duct systems, unless otherwise provided for in 4.3.3.1.1 or 4.3.3.1.2, shall have, in the form in which they are used, a maximum flame spread index of 25 without evidence of continued progressive combustion and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM 5 84 for Standard Test Method of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials or with ANSI/UL 723 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. Pipe and duct insulation and coverings, duct linings and their adhesives, and tapes shall use the specimen preparation and mounting procedures of ASTM E 2231, Standard Practice for Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Pipe and Duct Insulation Materials to Assess Surface Burning Characteristics.4.3.3.1.1 The flame spread index and smoke developed index requirements of 4.3.3.1 shall not apply to air duct weatherproof coverings where they are located entirely outside of a building, do not penetrate a wall or roof, and do not create an exposure hazard.4.3.3.1.2 Smoke detectors required by 6.4.4 shall not be required to meet flame spread index or smoke developed index requirements.4.3.3.2 Closure systems for use with rigid and flexible air ducts tested in accordance with ANSI/UL 181, Standard for Safety Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors, shall have been tested, listed, and used in accordance with the conditions of their listings, in accordance with one of the following:(1)ANSI/UL 181A, Standard for Safety Closure Systems for Use with Rigid Air Ducts and Air Connectors(2)ANSI/UL 181B, Standard for Safety Closure Systems for Use with Flexible Air Ducts and Air Connectors4.3.3.3 Coverings and linings for air ducts, pipes, plenums, and panels including all pipe and duct insulation materials shall not flame, glow, smolder, or smoke when tested in accordance with, ASTM C 411, Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of High-Temperature Thermal Insulation, at the temperature to which they are exposed in service. In no case shall the test temperature be below 121 degrees C (250 degrees F). 4.3.3.4 Air duct coverings shall not extend through walls or floors that are required to be fire stopped or required to have a fire resistance rating, unless such coverings meet the requirements of NFPA 80, Standard for Fire Doors and other Opening Protectives.4.3.3.5* Air duct linings shall be interrupted at fire dampers to prevent interference with the operation of devices.4.3.3.6 Air duct coverings shall not be installed so as to conceal or prevent the use of any service opening.4.3.11.2.6 Materials within a ceiling plenum exposed to the airflow shall be noncombustible or comply with the following.4.3.11.2.6.1 Electrical wires and cables and optical fiber cables shall be listed as having a maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or less, an average optical density of 0.15 or less, and a maximum flame spread distance of 1.5 m (5 ft) or less when tested in accordance with NFPA 262, Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces, or shall be installed in metal raceways, metal sheathed cable, or totally enclosed non-ventilated busway.4.3.11.2.6.2 Pneumatic tubing for control systems shall be listed as having a maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or less, an average optical density of 0.15 or less, and a maximum flame spread distance of 1.5 m (5 ft) or less when tested in accordance with ANSI/UL 1820, Standard for Safety Fire Test of Pneumatic Tubing for Flame and Smoke Characteristics.4.3.11.2.6.3 Non-metallic fire sprinkler piping shall be listed as having a maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or less, an average optical density of 0.15 or less, and a maximum flame spread distance of 1.5 m (5 ft) or less when tested in accordance with ANSI/UL 1887, Standard for Safety Fire Test of Plastic Sprinkler Pipe for Visible Flame and Smoke Characteristics.4.3.11.2.6.4 Optical-fiber and communication raceways shall be listed as having a maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or less, an average optical density of 0.15 or less, and a maximum flame spread distance of 1.5 m (5 ft) or less when tested in accordance with ANSI/UL 2024, Standard for Safety Optical-Fiber and Communications Cable Raceway.4.3.11.2.6.5 Loudspeakers and recessed lighting fixtures, and other electrical equipment with combustible enclosures, including their assemblies and accessories, cable trays, and other discrete products shall be permitted in the ceiling cavity plenum where listed as having a maximum peak optical density of 0.5 or less, an average optical density of 0.15 or less, and a peak heat release rate of 100 kW or less when tested in accordance with UL 2043, Standard for Safety Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and Their Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces.4.3.11.2.6.6 Supplementary materials for air distribution systems shall be permitted when complying with the provisions of 4.3.3.4.3.11.2.6.7 Smoke detectors shall not be required to meet the provisions of this section. 2.Test methods: ASTM E84, UL 723, or NFPA 255. 3.Specified k factors are at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F) mean temperature unless stated otherwise. Where optional thermal insulation material is used, select thickness to provide thermal conductance no greater than that for the specified material. For pipe, use insulation manufacturer's published heat flow tables. For run out insulation and condensation control insulation, no thickness adjustment need be made. 4.All materials shall be compatible and suitable for service temperature, and shall not contribute to corrosion or otherwise attack surface to which applied in either the wet or dry state. C.Every package or standard container of insulation or accessories delivered to the job site for use must have a manufacturer's stamp or label giving the name of the manufacturer and description of the material. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES.B.Shop Drawings: 1.All information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications and ASTM, federal and military specifications.a.Insulation materials: Specify each type used and state surface burning characteristics. b.Insulation facings and jackets: Each type used. Make it clear that white finish will be furnished for exposed ductwork, casings and equipment. c.Insulation accessory materials: Each type used. d.Manufacturer's installation and fitting fabrication instructions for flexible unicellular insulation. e.Make reference to applicable specification paragraph numbers for coordination. C.Samples: 1.Each type of insulation: Minimum size 100 mm (4 inches) square for board/block/ blanket; 150 mm (6 inches) long, full diameter for round types. 2.Each type of facing and jacket: Minimum size 100 mm (4 inches square). 3.Each accessory material: Minimum 120 ML (4 ounce) liquid container or 120 gram (4 ounce) dry weight for adhesives / cement / mastic.Statement of compliance with National Architectural and Industrial Maintenance Rule for VOC levels on Adhesives, Mastics, and Coatings for the State of West Virginia.Statement of compliance with Ozone Transport Commission for VOC levels on Adhesives, Mastics, and Coatings for the State of West Virginia.1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALA.Store materials in clean and dry environment, pipe covering jackets shall be clean and unmarred. Place adhesives in original containers. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions as required by printed instructions of manufacturers of adhesives, mastics and finishing cements. Where insulation must be stored outdoors, provide polyethylene film cover for protection. Insulation that becomes wet shall be replaced; drying of insulation is not acceptable.1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only. B.Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.): LP535E (2)- 99Plastic Sheet (Sheeting): Plastic Strip; Poly (Vinyl Chloride) and Poly (Vinyl Chloride - Vinyl Acetate), Rigid.C.Military Specifications (Mil. Spec.): MILA3316C (2)-90Adhesives, FireResistant, Thermal InsulationMILA24179A (1)-87Adhesive, Flexible UnicellularPlasticThermal Insulation MILC19565C (1)-88Coating Compounds, Thermal Insulation, Fire-and Water-Resistant, Vapor-BarrierMILC20079H-87Cloth, Glass; Tape, Textile Glass; and Thread, Glass and Wire-Reinforced Glass D.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A16799(2009)Standard Specification for Stainless and HeatResisting ChromiumNickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip B20910Standard Specification for Aluminum and AluminumAlloy Sheet and Plate C411-10Standard test method for HotSurface Performance of HighTemperature Thermal Insulation C44907Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber HydraulicSetting Thermal Insulating and Finishing CementC53311Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation C53411Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular FormC547-10Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber pipe Insulation C55212bStandard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal InsulationC553-11Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial ApplicationsC585-10Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System) R (1998)C612-10Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal InsulationC1126-12Standard Specification for Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation C1136-10Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal InsulationD166897a (2006)Standard Specification for Glass Fabrics (Woven and Treated) for Roofing and Waterproofing E84-12cStandard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsE11912acStandard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials E.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 90A-12Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems101-12Life Safety CodeF.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL):723UL Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials with Revision of 09/08G.Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry (MSS):SP58-2009Pipe Hangers and Supports Materials, Design, and ManufacturePART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MINERAL FIBER or fiber glass A.ASTM C612 (Board, Block), Class 1 or 2, density 48 kg/m3 (3 pcf), k = 0.037 (0.26) at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F), external insulation for temperatures up to 204 degrees C (400 degrees F) with foil scrim (FSK) facing.B.ASTM C553 (Blanket, Flexible) Type I, Class B-5, Density 32 kg/m3 (2 pcf), k = 0.04 (0.27) at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F), for use at temperatures up to 204 degrees C (400 degrees F) with foil scrim (FSK) facing.C.ASTM C547 (Pipe Fitting Insulation and Preformed Pipe Insulation), Class 1, k = 0.037 (0.26) at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F), for use at temperatures up to 230 degrees C (450 degrees F) with an all service vapor retarder jacket with polyvinyl chloride premolded fitting covering.2.2 RIGID CELLULAR PHENOLIC FoamA.Preformed (molded) pipe insulation, ASTM C1126, type III, grade 1, k = 0.021(0.15) at 10 degrees C (50 degrees F), for use at temperatures up to 121 degrees C (250 degrees F) with all service vapor retarder jacket with polyvinyl chloride premolded fitting covering.B.Equipment and Duct Insulation, ASTM C 1126, type II, grade 1, k = 0.021 (0.15) at 10 degrees C (50 degrees F), for use at temperatures up to 121 degrees C (250 degrees F) with rigid cellular phenolic insulation and covering, and all service vapor retarder jacket.2.3 CELLULAR GLASS closed-ply with Standard ASTM C177, C518, density 120 kg/m3 (7.5 pcf) nominal, k = 0.033 (0.29) at 240 degrees C (75 degrees F).B.Pipe insulation for use at temperatures up to 200 degrees C (400 degrees F) with all service vapor retarder jacket.2.4 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR THERMALASTM C177, C518, k = 0.039 (0.27) at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F), flame spread not over 25, smoke developed not over 50, for temperatures from minus 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) to 93 degrees C (200 degrees F). No jacket required. 2.5 INSULATION FACINGS AND JACKETSA.Vapor Retarder, higher strength with low water permeance = 0.02 or less perm rating, Beach puncture 50 units for insulation facing on exposed ductwork, casings and equipment, and for pipe insulation jackets. Facings and jackets shall be all service type (ASJ) or PVDC Vapor Retarder jacketing. B.ASJ jacket shall be white kraft bonded to 0.025 mm (1 mil) thick aluminum foil, fiberglass reinforced, with pressure sensitive adhesive closure. Comply with ASTM C1136. Beach puncture 50 units, Suitable for painting without sizing. Jackets shall have minimum 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) lap on longitudinal joints and minimum 75 mm (3 inch) butt strip on end joints. Butt strip material shall be same as the jacket. Lap and butt strips shall be self-sealing type with factory-applied pressure sensitive adhesive.C.Vapor Retarder medium strength with low water vapor permeance of 0.02 or less perm rating), Beach puncture 25 units: FoilScrimKraft (FSK) or PVDC vapor retarder jacketing type for concealed ductwork and equipment. D.Glass Cloth Jackets: Presized, minimum 0.18 kg per square meter (7.8 ounces per square yard), 2000 kPa (300 psig) bursting strength with integral vapor retarder where required or specified. E.Factory composite materials may be used provided that they have been tested and certified by the manufacturer.F.Pipe fitting insulation covering (jackets): Fitting covering shall be premolded to match shape of fitting and shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conforming to Fed Spec L-P-335, composition A, Type II Grade GU, and Type III, minimum thickness 0.7 mm (0.03 inches). Provide color matching vapor retarder pressure sensitive tape.2.7 pipe covering protection saddlesA.Cold pipe support: Premolded pipe insulation 180 degrees (half-shells) on bottom half of pipe at supports. Material shall be cellular glass of the same thickness as adjacent insulation. Nominal Pipe Size and Accessories Material (Insert Blocks)Nominal Pipe Size mm (inches)Insert Blocks mm (inches)Up through 125 (5)150 (6) longB.Warm or hot pipe supports: Premolded pipe insulation (180 degree half-shells) on bottom half of pipe at supports. Material shall be cellular glass or calcium silicate. Insulation at supports shall have same thickness as adjacent insulation. 2.8adhesive, Mastic, CementA.Mil. Spec. MILA3316, Class 1: Jacket and lap adhesive and protective finish coating for insulation. B.Mil. Spec. MILA3316, Class 2: Adhesive for laps and for adhering insulation to metal surfaces. C.Mil. Spec. MILA24179, Type II Class 1: Adhesive for installing flexible unicellular insulation and for laps and general use. D.Mil. Spec. MILC19565, Type I or Type II: Vapor barrier compound for indoor use. E.ASTM C449: Mineral fiber hydraulicsetting thermal insulating and finishing cement. Products shall comply with the National Architectural and Industrial Maintenance (AIM) Rule for VOC levels for the State of West Virginia.G.Products shall comply with the Ozone Transport Commission limits for VOC levels for the State of West Virginia.H.Other: Insulation manufacturers' published recommendations. 2.9 Mechanical FastenersA.Pins, anchors: Welded pins, or metal or nylon anchors with galvanized steelcoated or fiber washer, or clips. Pin diameter shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. B.Staples: Outward clinching monel or galvanized steel. C.Wire: 1.3 mm thick (18 gage) soft annealed galvanized or 1.9 mm (14 gage) copper clad steel or nickel copper alloy. D.Bands: 13 mm (0.5 inch) nominal width, brass, galvanized steel, aluminum or stainless steel.2.10 Reinforcement and Finishes A.Glass fabric, open weave: ASTM D1668, Type III (resin treated) and Type I (asphalt treated). B.Glass fiber fitting tape: Mil. Spec MILC20079, Type II, Class 1.C.Tape for Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: As recommended by the insulation manufacturer. D.Hexagonal wire netting: 25 mm (one inch) mesh, 0.85 mm thick (22 gage) galvanized steel. E.Corner beads: 50 mm (2 inch) by 50 mm (2 inch), 0.55 mm thick (26 gage) galvanized steel; or, 25 mm (1 inch) by 25 mm (1 inch), 0.47 mm thick (28 gage) aluminum angle adhered to 50 mm (2 inch) by 50 mm (2 inch) Kraft paper.F.PVC fitting cover: Fed. Spec LP535, Composition A, 1186 Type II, Grade GU, with Form B Mineral Fiber insert, for media temperature 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) to 121 degrees C (250 degrees F). Below 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) and above 121 degrees C (250 degrees F). Provide double layer insert. Provide color matching vapor barrier pressure sensitive tape.2.11 Firestopping MaterialOther than pipe and duct insulation, refer to Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.2.12 flame and smokeUnless shown otherwise all assembled systems shall meet flame spread 25 and smoke developed 50 rating as developed under ASTM, NFPA and UL standards and specifications. See paragraph 1.3 "Quality Assurance".PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.Required pressure tests of duct and piping joints and connections shall be completed and the work approved by the COTR for application of insulation. Surface shall be clean and dry with all foreign materials, such as dirt, oil, loose scale and rust removed. B.Except for specific exceptions, insulate entire specified piping (pipe, fittings, valves, accessories) and duct systems. Insulate each pipe and duct individually. Do not use scrap pieces of insulation where a full length section will fit. C.Where removal of insulation of piping, ductwork and equipment is required to comply with Section 02?82?11, TRADITIONAL ASBESTOS ABATEMENT and such areas shall be reinsulated to comply with this specification. D.Insulation materials shall be installed in a first class manner with smooth and even surfaces, with jackets and facings drawn tight and smoothly cemented down at all laps. Insulation shall be continuous through all sleeves and openings, except at fire dampers (NFPA 90A). Vapor retarders shall be continuous and uninterrupted throughout systems with operating temperature 16 degrees C (60 degrees F) and below. Lap and seal vapor retarder over ends and exposed edges of insulation. Anchors, supports and other metal projections through insulation on cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed for a minimum length of 150 mm (6 inches). E.Install vapor stops at all insulation terminations on either side of valves and equipment and particularly in straight lengths of pipe insulation.F.Insulation on hot piping shall be terminated square at items not to be insulated, access openings and nameplates. Cover all exposed raw insulation with white sealer or jacket material. G.Insulate flow meters.1.In hot piping: Unions, flexible connectors, control valves, PRVs, safety valves and discharge vent piping, vacuum breakers, thermostatic vent valves, steam traps 20 mm (3/4 inch) and smaller. Insulate piping to within approximately 75 mm (3 inches) of uninsulated items. H.Apply insulation materials subject to the manufacturer's recommended temperature limits. Apply adhesives, mastic and coatings at the manufacturer's recommended minimum coverage.I.Elbows, flanges and other fittings shall be insulated with the same material as is used on the pipe straights. The elbow/ fitting insulation shall be field-fabricated, mitered or factory prefabricated to the necessary size and shape to fit on the elbow/ fitting. Use of polyurethane spray-foam to fill a PVC elbow jacket is prohibited on cold applications.J.Firestop Pipe and Duct insulation:1.Provide firestopping insulation at fire and smoke barriers through penetrations. Fire stopping insulation shall be UL listed as defines in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.2.Pipe and duct penetrations requiring fire stop insulation including, but not limited to the following:a.Pipe risers through floorsb.Pipe or duct chase walls and floorsc.Smoke partitionsd.Fire partitionsK.Provide vapor barrier jackets over insulation as follows:3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATIONA.Mineral Fiber Board: 1.Faced board: Apply board on pins spaced not more than 300 mm (12 inches) on center each way, and not less than 75 mm (3 inches) from each edge of board. In addition to pins, apply insulation bonding adhesive to entire underside of horizontal metal surfaces. Butt insulation edges tightly and seal all joints with laps and butt strips. After applying speed clips cut pins off flush and apply vapor seal patches over clips.2.Plain board: a.Insulation shall be scored, beveled or mitered to provide tight joints and be secured to equipment with bands spaced 225 mm (9 inches) on center for irregular surfaces or with pins and clips on flat surfaces. Use corner beads to protect edges of insulation. 3.Exposed, unlined ductwork and equipment in unfinished areas, electrical equipment rooms, and interstitial spaces:a.50 mm (2 inch) thick insulation faced with ASJ (white all service jacket): Hot and Cold Supply air duct. . b. 50 mm (2 inch) thick insulation faced with ASJ: Return air duct.B.Flexible Mineral Fiber Blanket: 1.Adhere insulation to metal with 75 mm (3 inch) wide strips of insulation bonding adhesive at 200 mm (8 inches) on center all around duct. Additionally secure insulation to bottom of ducts exceeding 600 mm (24 inches) in width with pins welded or adhered on 450 mm (18 inch) centers. Secure washers on pins. Butt insulation edges and seal joints with laps and butt strips. Staples may be used to assist in securing insulation. Seal all vapor retarder penetrations with mastic. Sagging duct insulation will not be acceptable. Install firestop duct insulation where required.2.Hot and Cold Supply air ductwork to be insulated includes main and branch ducts to room supply outlets, and the bodies of ceiling outlets to prevent condensation. Insulate sound attenuator units, coil casings and damper frames. 3.Concealed hot and cold supply air ductwork, including interstitial space: 50 mm (2inch) thick insulation faced with FSK.3.Concealed return air duct, including interstitial space: 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) thick, insulation faced with FSK. a.In interstitial spaces (where not subject to damage): 40 mm (1-1/2 inch thick insulation faced with FSK. C.Molded Mineral Fiber Pipe and Tubing Covering: 1.Fit insulation to pipe or duct, aligning longitudinal joints. Seal longitudinal joint laps and circumferential butt strips by rubbing hard with a nylon sealing tool to assure a positive seal. Staples may be used to assist in securing insulation. Seal all vapor retarder penetrations on cold piping with a generous application of vapor barrier mastic. Provide inserts and install with metal insulation shields at outside pipe supports. 2.Contractor's options for fitting, flange and valve insulation: a.Insulating and finishing cement for sizes less than 100 mm (4 inches) operating at surface temperature of 16 degrees C (61 degrees F) or more. b.Factory premolded, one piece PVC covers with mineral fiber, (Form B), inserts. Provide two insert layers for pipe temperatures below 4 degrees C (40 degrees F), or above 121 degrees C (250 degrees F). Secure first layer of insulation with twine. Seal seam edges with vapor barrier mastic and secure with fitting tape. c.Factory molded, ASTM C547 or field mitered sections, joined with adhesive or wired in place. For hot piping finish with a smoothing coat of finishing cement. For cold fittings, 16 degrees C (60 degrees F) or less, vapor seal with a layer of glass fitting tape imbedded between two 2 mm (1/16 inch) coats of vapor barrier mastic. d.Fitting tape shall extend over the adjacent pipe insulation and overlap on itself at least 50 mm (2 inches).3.Nominal thickness in millimeters and inches specified in the schedule at the end of this section.D.Rigid Cellular Phenolic Foam:1.Rigid closed cell phenolic insulation may be provided for piping, ductwork and equipment for temperatures up to 121 degrees C (250 degrees F).2.Note the NFPA 90A burning characteristics requirements of 25/50 in paragraph 1.3.B3.Provide secure attachment facilities such as welding pins.4.Apply insulation with joints tightly drawn together 5.Apply adhesives, coverings, neatly finished at fittings, and valves.6.Final installation shall be smooth, tight, neatly finished at all edges.7.Minimum thickness in millimeters (inches) specified in the schedule at the end of this section.8.Condensation control insulation: Minimum 25 mm (1.0 inch) thick for all pipe sizes.E.Cellular Glass Insulation: 1.Pipe and tubing, covering nominal thickness in millimeters and inches as specified in the schedule at the end of this section.F.Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation: 1.Apply insulation and fabricate fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and finish with two coats of weather resistant finish as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. 2.Pipe and tubing insulation: a.Use proper size material. Do not stretch or strain insulation.b.To avoid undue compression of insulation, provide cork stoppers or wood inserts at supports as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. Insulation shields are specified under Section 23?05?11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC.c.Where possible, slip insulation over the pipe or tubing prior to connection, and seal the butt joints with adhesive. Where the slipon technique is not possible, slit the insulation and apply it to the pipe sealing the seam and joints with contact adhesive. Optional tape sealing, as recommended by the manufacturer, may be employed. Make changes from mineral fiber insulation in a straight run of pipe, not at a fitting. Seal joint with tape. 3.Apply sheet insulation to flat or large curved surfaces with 100 percent adhesive coverage. For fittings and large pipe, apply adhesive to seams only. 4.Pipe insulation: nominal thickness in millimeters (inches as specified in the schedule at the end of this section.3.3 PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULEProvide insulation for piping systems as scheduled below: Insulation Thickness Millimeters (Inches)Nominal Pipe Size Millimeters (Inches)Operating Temperature Range/ServiceInsulation MaterialLess than 25 (1)25 – 32 (1 – 1?)38 – 75 (1? - 3) 100 (4) and Above38-94 degrees C (100-200 degrees F) HS, HRMineral Fiber (Above ground piping only)38 (1.5)38 (1.5)50 (2.0)50 (2.0)38-99 degrees C(100-211 degrees F) HS, HRRigid Cellular Phenolic Foam38 (1.5)38 (1.5)50 (2.0)50 (2.0)38-94 degrees C (100-200 degrees F) HS, HR)Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal (Above ground piping only)38 (1.5)38 (1.5) ---- ---- E N D SECTION 23 09 23DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVACPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.Provide a direct-digital control system as indicated on the project documents, point list, interoperability tables, drawings and as described in these specifications. Include a complete and working direct-digital control system. Include all engineering, programming, controls and installation materials, installation labor, start-up, training, final project documentation and warranty.The direct-digital control system(s) shall consist of high-speed, and peer-to-peer network of DDC controllers. Provide a remote user using a standard web browser to access the control system graphics and change adjustable setpoints with the proper password.The direct-digital control system shall be native BACnet. All new controllers, devices and components shall be listed by BACnet Testing Laboratories. All new controller, devices and components shall be accessible using a Web browser interface and shall communicate exclusively using the ASHRAE Standard 135 BACnet communications protocol without the use of gateways, unless otherwise allowed by this Section of the technical specifications, specifically shown on the design drawings and specifically requested otherwise by the VA.The work administered by this Section of the technical specifications shall include all labor, materials, special tools, equipment, enclosures, power supplies, software, software licenses, Project specific software configurations and database entries, interfaces, wiring, installation, labeling, engineering, calibration, documentation, submittals, testing, verification, training services, permits and licenses, transportation, shipping, handling, administration, supervision, management, insurance, Warranty, specified services and items required for complete and fully functional Controls Systems.The control systems shall be designed such that each mechanical system shall operate under stand-alone mode. The contractor administered by this Section of the technical specifications shall provide controllers for each mechanical system. In the event of a network communication failure, or the loss of any other controller, the control system shall continue to operate independently. Failure of the ECC shall have no effect on the field controllers, including those involved with global strategies.The control system shall accommodate 1 Engineering Control Center and the control system shall accommodate 5 web-based Users simultaneously, and the access to the system should be limited only by operator password.Some products are furnished but not installed by the contractor administered by this Section of the technical specifications. The contractor administered by this Section of the technical specifications shall formally coordinate in writing and receive from other contractors formal acknowledgements in writing prior to submission the installation of the products. These products include the following:Control valves.Flow switches.Sensor wells and sockets in piping.Terminal unit controllers.Some products are installed but not furnished by the contractor administered by this Section of the technical specifications. The contractor administered by this Section of the technical specifications shall formally coordinate in writing and receive from other contractors formal acknowledgements in writing prior to submission the procurement of the products. These products include the following:Factory-furnished accessory thermostats and sensors furnished with unitary equipment.Some products are not provided by, but are nevertheless integrated with the work executed by, the contractor administered by this Section of the technical specifications. The contractor administered by this Section of the technical specifications shall formally coordinate in writing and receive from other contractors formal acknowledgements in writing prior to submission the particulars of the products. These products include the following:Fire alarm systems. If zoned fire alarm is required by the project-specific requirements, this interface shall require multiple relays, which are provided and installed by the fire alarm system contractor, to be monitored.Terminal units’ velocity sensorsE. Responsibility Table:Work/Item/SystemFurnishInstallLow Voltage WiringLine PowerControl system low voltage and communication wiring 23 09 2323 09 2323 09 23N/ATerminal units2323N/A26Controllers for terminal units23 09 232323 09 2316LAN conduits and raceway23 09 2323 09 23N/AN/AAutomatic dampers (not furnished with equipment)23 09 2323N/AN/AAutomatic damper actuators 23 09 2323 09 2323 09 2323 09 23Manual valves2323N/AN/AAutomatic valves23 09 232323 09 2323 09 23Pipe insertion devices and taps, flow and pressure stations.2323N/AN/AThermowells23 09 2323N/AN/AControl Relays23 09 2323 09 2323 09 23N/APower distribution system monitoring interfaces23 09 2323 09 2323 09 2326All control system nodes, equipment, housings, enclosures and panels.23 09 2323 09 2323 09 2326Fire/Smoke Dampers232328 31 0028 31 00Smoke Dampers232328 31 0028 31 00Fire Dampers2323N/AN/AFire Alarm shutdown relay interlock wiring28282826Control system monitoring of fire alarm smoke control relay 282823 09 2328Fire-fighter’s smoke control station (FSCS) 28282828Starters, HOA switches2323N/A26This facility’s existing direct-digital control system is manufactured by Johnson Controls, and its ECC is located at Building 503. The existing system’s top-end communications is via an Ethernet local area network. The existing system’s ECC and top-end controllers were installed in 2011. The contractor administered by this Section of the technical specifications shall observe the capabilities, communication network, services, spare capacity of the existing control system and its ECC prior to beginning work.1. Tie the new controllers into the existing system.2.Provide an extension of the existing automatic control system serving Building 500 to serve new associated systems.This campus has standardized on an existing standard ASHRAE Standard 135, BACnet/IP Control System supported by a preselected controls service company. This entity is referred to as the “Control System Integrator” in this Section of the technical specifications. The Control system integrator is responsible for ECC system graphics and expansion. It also prescribes control system-specific verification procedures to the contractor administered by this Section of the technical specification. It lastly provides limited assistance to the contractor administered by this Section of the technical specification in its verification work.The General Contractor of this project shall directly hire the Control System Integrator in a contract separate from the contract procuring the controls contractor administered by this Section of the technical specifications.The contractor administered by this Section of the technical specifications shall coordinate all work with the Control System Integrator. The contractor administered by this Section of the technical specifications shall integrate the ASHRAE Standard 135, BACnet/IP control network(s) with the Control System Integrator’s area control through an Ethernet connection provided by the Control System Integrator.The contractor administered by this Section of the technical specifications shall provide a peer-to-peer networked, stand-alone, distributed control system. This direct digital control (DDC) system shall include one portable operator terminal - laptop, one digital display unit, microprocessor-based controllers, instrumentation, end control devices, wiring, piping, software, and related systems. This contractor is responsible for all device mounting and wiring. Responsibility Table:Item/TaskSection 23 09 23 contactorControl system integratorVAECC expansionXECC programmingXDevices, controllers, control panels and equipmentXPoint addressing: all hardware and software points including setpoint, calculated point, data point(analog/ binary), and reset schedule pointXPoint mappingXNetwork ProgrammingXECC GraphicsXController programming and sequencesXIntegrity of LAN communicationsXElectrical wiringXOperator system trainingXLAN connections to devicesXLAN connections to ECCXIP addressesXOverall system verificationXController and LAN system verificationXUnitary standalone systems including Finned Tube Radiation, may be equipped with integral controls furnished and installed by the equipment manufacturer or field mounted. Refer to equipment specifications and as indicated in project documents. Application of standalone unitary controls is limited to at least those systems wherein remote monitoring, alarm and start-up are not necessaryD.The direct-digital control system shall start and stop equipment, move (position) damper actuators and valve actuators, and vary speed of equipment to execute the mission of the control system. Use electricity as the motive force for all damper and valve actuators.1.2 RELATED WORKA. Section 23 21 13, Hydronic Piping.B.Section 23 31 00, HVAC Ducts and Casings.C.Section 23 36 00, Air Terminal Units.D.Section 26 05 19, Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (600 Volts and Below).E.Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.F.Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.G.Section 26 09 23, Lighting Controls. H.Section 26 27 26, Wiring Devices. I.Section 28 31 00, Fire Detection and Alarm.1.2 definitionA.Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical problem; A prescribed set of well-defined rules or processes for the solution of a problem in a finite number of steps.B.ARCNET: ANSI/ATA 878.1 - Attached Resource Computer Network. ARCNET is a deterministic LAN technology; meaning it's possible to determine the maximum delay before a device is able to transmit a message.C.Analog: A continuously varying signal value (e.g., temperature, current, velocity etc.D.BACnet: A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks , ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135. This communications protocol allows diverse building automation devices to communicate data over and services over a network.E.BACnet/IP: Annex J of Standard 135. It defines and allows for using a reserved UDP socket to transmit BACnet messages over IP networks. A BACnet/IP network is a collection of one or more IP sub-networks that share the same BACnet network number.F.BACnet Internetwork: Two or more BACnet networks connected with routers. The two networks may use different LAN technologies.G.BACnet Network: One or more BACnet segments that have the same network address and are interconnected by bridges at the physical and data link layers.H.BACnet Segment: One or more physical segments of BACnet devices on a BACnet network, connected at the physical layer by repeaters.I.BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD): A communications device which broadcasts BACnet messages to all BACnet/IP devices and other BBMDs connected to the same BACnet/IP network.J.BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBs): BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBs) are collections of one or more BACnet services. These are prescribed in terms of an "A" and a "B" device. Both of these devices are nodes on a BACnet internetwork. K.BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL). The organization responsible for testing products for compliance with the BACnet standard, operated under the direction of BACnet International.L.Baud: It is a signal change in a communication link. One signal change can represent one or more bits of information depending on type of transmission scheme. Simple peripheral communication is normally one bit per Baud. (e.g., Baud rate = 78,000 Baud/sec is 78,000 bits/sec, if one signal change = 1 bit).M.Binary: A two-state system where a high signal level represents an "ON" condition and an "OFF" condition is represented by a low signal level.N.BMP or bmp: Suffix, computerized image file, used after the period in a DOS-based computer file to show that the file is an image stored as a series of pixels. O.Bus Topology: A network topology that physically interconnects workstations and network devices in parallel on a network segment.P.COTR: Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative.Q.Control Unit (CU): Generic term for any controlling unit, stand-alone, microprocessor based, digital controller residing on secondary LAN or Primary LAN, used for local controls or global controls R.Deadband: A temperature range over which no heating or cooling is supplied, i.e., 22-25 degrees C (72-78 degrees F), as opposed to a single point change over or overlap).S.Device: a control system component that contains a BACnet Device Object and uses BACnet to communicate with other devices.T.Device Object: Every BACnet device requires one Device Object, whose properties represent the network visible properties of that device. Every Device Object requires a unique Object Identifier number on the BACnet internetwork. This number is often referred to as the device instance.U.Device Profile: A specific group of services describing BACnet capabilities of a device, as defined in ASHRAE Standard 135-2008, Annex L. Standard device profiles include BACnet Operator Workstations (B-OWS), BACnet Building Controllers (B-BC), BACnet Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC), BACnet Application Specific Controllers (B-ASC), BACnet Smart Actuator (B-SA), and BACnet Smart Sensor (B-SS). Each device used in new construction is required to have a PICS statement listing which service and BIBBs are supported by the device.V.Diagnostic Program: A software test program, which is used to detect and report system or peripheral malfunctions and failures. Generally, this system is performed at the initial startup of the system.W.Direct Digital Control (DDC): Microprocessor based control including Analog/Digital conversion and program logic. A control loop or subsystem in which digital and analog information is received and processed by a microprocessor, and digital control signals are generated based on control algorithms and transmitted to field devices in order to achieve a set of predefined conditions.X.Distributed Control System: A system in which the processing of system data is decentralized and control decisions can and are made at the subsystem level. System operational programs and information are provided to the remote subsystems and status is reported back to the Engineering Control Center. Upon the loss of communication with the Engineering Control Center, the subsystems shall be capable of operating in a stand-alone mode using the last best available data.Y.Download: The electronic transfer of programs and data files from a central computer or operation workstation with secondary memory devices to remote computers in a network (distributed) system.Z.DXF: An AutoCAD 2-D graphics file format. Many CAD systems import and export the DXF format for graphics interchange. AA.Electrical Control: A control circuit that operates on line or low voltage and uses a mechanical means, such as a temperature sensitive bimetal or bellows, to perform control functions, such as actuating a switch or positioning a potentiometer.BB.Electronic Control: A control circuit that operates on low voltage and uses a solid-state components to amplify input signals and perform control functions, such as operating a relay or providing an output signal to position an .Engineering Control Center (ECC): The centralized control point for the intelligent control network. The ECC comprises of personal computer and connected devices to form a single workstation. DD.Ethernet: A trademark for a system for exchanging messages between computers on a local area network using coaxial, fiber optic, or twisted-pair cables.EE.Firmware: Firmware is software programmed into read only memory (ROM) chips. Software may not be changed without physically altering the chip.FF.Gateway: Communication hardware connecting two or more different protocols. It translates one protocol into equivalent concepts for the other protocol. In BACnet applications, a gateway has BACnet on one side and non-BACnet (usually proprietary) protocols on the other side. Gateway is not an acceptable option for VA healthcare facilities.GG.GIF: Abbreviation of Graphic interchange format. HH.Graphic Program (GP): Program used to produce images of air handler systems, fans, chillers, pumps, and building spaces. These images can be animated and/or color-coded to indicate operation of the equipment.II.Graphic Sequence of Operation: It is a graphical representation of the sequence of operation, showing all inputs and output logical blocks.JJ.I/O Unit: The section of a digital control system through which information is received and transmitted. I/O refers to analog input (AI, digital input (DI), analog output (AO) and digital output (DO). Analog signals are continuous and represent temperature, pressure, flow rate etc, whereas digital signals convert electronic signals to digital pulses (values), represent motor status, filter status, on-off equipment etc.KK.I/P: a method for conveying and routing packets of information over LAN paths. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) conveys information to “sockets” without confirmation of receipt. Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) establishes "sessions", which have end-to-end confirmation and guaranteed sequence of delivery. LL.JPEG: A standardized image compression mechanism stands for Joint Photographic Experts Group, the original name of the committee that wrote the standard.MM.Local Area Network (LAN): A communication bus that interconnects operator workstation and digital controllers for peer-to-peer communications, sharing resources and exchanging information.work Repeater: A device that receives data packet from one network and rebroadcasts to another network. No routing information is added to the protocol.OO.MS/TP: Master-slave/token-passing (ISO/IEC 8802, Part 3). It is not an acceptable LAN option for VA health-care facilities. It uses twisted-pair wiring for relatively low speed and low cost communication. PP.Native BACnet Device: A device that uses BACnet as its primary method of communication with other BACnet devices without intermediary gateways. A system that uses native BACnet devices at all levels is a native BACnet system.work Number: A site-specific number assigned to each network segment to identify for routing. This network number must be unique throughout the BACnet internetwork.RR.Object: The concept of organizing BACnet information into standard components with various associated properties. Examples include analog input objects and binary output objects.SS.Object Identifier: An object property used to identify the object, including object type and instance. Object Identifiers must be unique within a device.TT.Object Properties: Attributes of an object. Examples include present value and high limit properties of an analog input object. Properties are defined in ASHRAE 135; some are optional and some are required. Objects are controlled by reading from and writing to object properties.UU.Operating system (OS): Software, which controls the execution of computer application programs.VV.PCX: File type for an image file. When photographs are scanned onto a personal computer they can be saved as PCX files and viewed or changed by a special application program as Photo Shop.WW. Peripheral: Different components that make the control system function as one unit. Peripherals include monitor, printer, and I/O unit. XX.Peer-to-Peer: A networking architecture that treats all network stations as equal partners- any device can initiate and respond to communication with other devices. YY.PICS: Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement, describing the BACnet capabilities of a device. All BACnet devices have published PICS.ZZ.PID: Proportional, integral, and derivative control, used to control modulating equipment to maintain a setpoint. AAA. Repeater: A network component that connects two or more physical segments at the physical layer.BBB. Router: a component that joins together two or more networks using different LAN technologies. Examples include joining a BACnet Ethernet LAN to a BACnet MS/TP LAN. CCC.Sensors: devices measuring state points or flows, which are then transmitted back to the DDC system.DDD.Thermostats?: devices measuring temperatures, which are used in control of standalone or unitary systems and equipment not attached to the DDC system.1.4 quality assuranceA.Criteria: 1.Single Source Responsibility of subcontractor: The Contractor shall obtain hardware and software supplied under this Section and delegate the responsibility to a single source controls installation subcontractor. The controls subcontractor shall be responsible for the complete design, installation, and verification of the system. The controls subcontractor shall be in the business of design, installation and service of such building automation control systems similar in size and complexity.2.Equipment and Materials: Equipment and materials shall be cataloged products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production and installation of HVAC control systems. Products shall be manufacturer’s latest standard design and have been tested and proven in actual use.3.The controls subcontractor shall provide a list of no less than five similar projects which have building control systems as specified in this Section. These projects must be on-line and functional such that the Department of Veterans Affairs (VA) representative would observe the control systems in full operation.4.The controls subcontractor shall have in-place facility within 50 miles with technical staff, spare parts inventory for the next five (5) years, and necessary test and diagnostic equipment to support the control systems. 5.The controls subcontractor shall have minimum of three years experience in design and installation of building automation systems similar in performance to those specified in this Section. Provide evidence of experience by submitting resumes of the project manager, the local branch manager, project engineer, the application engineering staff, and the electronic technicians who would be involved with the supervision, the engineering, and the installation of the control systems. Training and experience of these personnel shall not be less than three years. Failure to disclose this information will be a ground for disqualification of the supplier.6.Provide a competent and experienced Project Manager employed by the Controls Contractor. The Project Manager shall be supported as necessary by other Contractor employees in order to provide professional engineering, technical and management service for the work. The Project Manager shall attend scheduled Project Meetings as required and shall be empowered to make technical, scheduling and related decisions on behalf of the Controls Contractor. B.Codes and Standards:1.All work shall conform to the applicable Codes and Standards.2.Electronic equipment shall conform to the requirements of FCC Regulation, Part 15, Governing Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Interference, and be so labeled. 1.5 performanceA.The system shall conform to the following: 1.Graphic Display: The system shall display up to four (4) graphics on a single screen with a minimum of twenty (20) dynamic points per graphic. All current data shall be displayed within ten (10) seconds of the request.2.Graphic Refresh: The system shall update all dynamic points with current data within eight (8) seconds. Data refresh shall be automatic, without operator intervention.3.Object Command: The maximum time between the command of a binary object by the operator and the reaction by the device shall be two(2) seconds. Analog objects shall start to adjust within two (2) seconds.4.Object Scan: All changes of state and change of analog values shall be transmitted over the high-speed network such that any data used or displayed at a controller or work-station will be current, within the prior six (6) seconds.5.Alarm Response Time: The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm to when it is annunciated at the workstation shall not exceed (10) seconds.6.Program Execution Frequency: Custom and standard applications shall be capable of running as often as once every (5) seconds. The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.7.Multiple Alarm Annunciations: All workstations on the network shall receive alarms within five (5) seconds of each other.8.Performance: Programmable Controllers shall be able to execute DDC PID control loops at a selectable frequency from at least once every one (1) second. The controller shall scan and update the process value and output generated by this calculation at this same frequency.9.Reporting Accuracy: Listed below are minimum acceptable reporting end-to-end accuracies for all values reported by the specified system:Measured VariableReported AccuracySpace temperature ±0.5C (±1F)Ducted air temperature±0.5C [±1F]Air flow (terminal) ±10% of reading Carbon Dioxide (CO2)±50 ppmAir pressure (space)±0.3 Pa [±0.001"w.c.]Electrical Power±0.5% of reading 10.Control stability and accuracy: Control sequences shall maintain measured variable at setpoint within the following tolerances:Controlled VariableControl AccuracyRange of MediumAir Pressure±50 Pa (±0.2 in. w.g.)0–1.5 kPa (0–6 in. w.g.)Air Pressure±3 Pa (±0.01 in. w.g.)-25 to 25 Pa(-0.1 to 0.1 in. w.g.)Airflow±10% of full scaleSpace Temperature±1.0?C (±2.0?F)Duct Temperature±1.5?C (±3?F)11.Extent of direct digital control: control design shall allow for at least the points indicated on the points lists on the drawings.1.6 WarrantyA.Labor and materials for control systems shall be warranted for a period as specified under Warranty in FAR clause 52.246-21.B.Control system failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no cost or reduction in service to the Government. The system includes all computer equipment, transmission equipment, and all sensors and control devices.C.Controls and Instrumentation subcontractor shall be responsible for temporary operations and maintenance of the control systems during the construction period until final training of facility operators and acceptance of the project by VA.1.7 SUBMITTALSA.Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer’s literature and data for all components including the following:1.A wiring diagram for each type of input device and output device including DDC controllers, modems, repeaters, etc. Diagram shall show how the device is wired and powered, showing typical connections at the digital controllers and each power supply, as well as the device itself. Show for all field connected devices, including but not limited to, control relays, motor starters, electric or electronic actuators, and temperature pressure, flow and humidity sensors and transmitters.2.A diagram of each terminal strip, including digital controller terminal strips, terminal strip location, termination numbers and the associated point names.3.Control dampers and control valves schedule, including the size and pressure drop.4.Catalog cut sheets of all equipment used. This includes, but is not limited to software (by manufacturer and by third parties), DDC controllers, panels, peripherals, and associated components, and auxiliary control devices such as sensors, actuators, and control dampers. When manufacturer’s cut sheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product, the data specifically applicable to the project shall be highlighted. Each submitted piece of literature and drawings should clearly reference the specification and/or drawings that it supposed to represent.5.Sequence of operations for each HVAC system and the associated control diagrams. Equipment and control labels shall correspond to those shown on the drawings.6.Color prints of proposed graphics with a list of points for display. 7.Furnish a BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) for each BACnet-compliant device.8.Schematic wiring diagrams for all control, communication and power wiring. Label all cables and ports with computer manufacturers’ model numbers and functions. Show all interface wiring to the control system. 9.An instrumentation list for each controlled system. Each element of the controlled system shall be listed in table format. The table shall show element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data sheet number.10.Riser diagrams of wiring between central control unit and all control panels.11.Scaled plan drawings showing routing of LAN and locations of control panels, controllers, routers, and larger controlled devices.12.Construction details for all installed conduit, cabling, raceway, cabinets, and similar. Construction details of all penetrations and their protection.13.Quantities of submitted items may be reviewed but are the responsibility of the contractor administered by this Section of the technical specifications.C.Product Certificates: Compliance with Article, QUALITY ASSURANCE.D.Licenses: Provide licenses for all software residing on and used by the Controls Systems and transfer these licenses to the Government prior to completion.E.As Built Control Drawings: 1.Furnish three (3) copies of as-built drawings for each control system. The documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final completion.2.Furnish one (1) stick set of applicable control system prints for each mechanical system for wall mounting. The documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final completion.3.Furnish one (1) CD-ROM in CAD DWG and/or .DXF format for the drawings noted in subparagraphs above. F.Operation and Maintenance (O/M) Manuals):1.Submit in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, in Specification Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.2.Include the following documentation:a.General description and specifications for all components, including logging on/off, alarm handling, producing trend reports, overriding computer control, and changing set points and other variables.b.Detailed illustrations of all the control systems specified for ease of maintenance and repair/replacement procedures, and complete calibration procedures.c.One copy of the final version of all software provided including operating systems, programming language, software, and graphics software.plete troubleshooting procedures and guidelines for all systems.plete operating instructions for all systems.f.Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for all system components including a schedule of tasks for inspection, cleaning and calibration. Provide a list of recommended spare parts needed to minimize downtime.g.Training Manuals: Submit the course outline and training material to the COTR for approval three (3) weeks prior to the training to VA facility personnel. These persons will be responsible for maintaining and the operation of the control systems, including programming. The COTR reserves the right to modify any or all of the course outline and training material.h.Licenses, guaranty, and other pertaining documents for all equipment and systems. G.Submit Performance Report to COTR prior to final inspection.1.8 INSTRUCTIONSA.Instructions to VA operations personnel: Perform in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, in Specification Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, and as noted below. Contractor shall also video tape instruction sessions noted below. First Phase: Formal instructions to the VA facilities personnel for a total of 16 hours, given in multiple training sessions (each no longer than four hours in length), conducted sometime between the completed installation and prior to the performance test period of the control system, at a time mutually agreeable to the Contractor and the VA.Second Phase: This phase of training shall comprise of on the job training during start-up, checkout period, and performance test period. VA facilities personnel will work with the Contractor’s installation and test personnel on a daily basis during start-up and checkout period. During the performance test period, controls subcontractor will provide 8 hours of instructions, given in multiple training sessions (each no longer than four hours in length), to the VA facilities personnel.The O/M Manuals shall contain approved submittals as outlined in Article 1.7, SUBMITTALS. The Controls subcontractor will review the manual contents with VA facilities personnel during second phase of training.Training shall be given by direct employees of the controls system subcontractor.1.9 project CONDITIONS (Environmental Conditions of Operation)A.The ECC and peripheral devices and system support equipment shall be designed to operate in ambient condition of 20 to 35C (65 to 90F) at a relative humidity of 20 to 80% non-condensing.B.All electronic equipment shall operate properly with power fluctuations of plus 10 percent to minus 15 percent of nominal supply voltage.C.Sensors and controlling devices shall be designed to operate in the environment, which they are sensing or controlling. 1.10 applicable publicationsA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):Standard 135-10BACNET Building Automation and Control NetworksC.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):B16.18-12Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.B16.22-12Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.D.American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM):B32-08Standard Specification for Solder MetalB88-09Standard Specifications for Seamless Copper Water TubeB88M-09Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric)B280-08Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Field ServiceD2737-12aStandard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic TubingE.Federal Communication Commission (FCC):Rules and Regulations Title 47 Chapter 1-2001 Part 15: Radio Frequency Devices.F.Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):802.3-11Information Technology-Telecommunications and Information Exchange between Systems-Local and Metropolitan Area Networks- Specific Requirements-Part 3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access method and Physical Layer SpecificationsG.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):70-11National Electric Code90A-12Standard for Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems H.Underwriter Laboratories Inc (UL):94-10Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts and Devices and Appliances294-10Access Control System Units 486A/486B-10Wire Connectors 555S-11Standard for Smoke Dampers916-10Energy Management Equipment1076-10Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALSA.Use new products that the manufacturer is currently manufacturing and that have been installed in a minimum of 25 installations. Spare parts shall be available for at least five years after completion of this contract.2.2 Controls System ArchitectureA.General1.The Controls Systems shall consist of multiple Nodes and associated equipment connected by industry standard digital and communication network arrangements.2.The building controllers and principal communications network equipment shall be standard products of recognized major manufacturers available through normal PC and computer vendor channels – not "Clones" assembled by a third-party subcontractor.3.The networks shall, at minimum, comprise, as necessary, the following:work computer processing, data storage and BACnet-compliant communication equipment.b.BACnet-compliant routers, bridges, switches, hubs, modems, interfaces and similar communication equipment.c.Active processing BACnet-compliant building controllers connected to other BACNet-compliant controllers together with their power supplies and associated equipment.d.Addressable elements, sensors, transducers and end devices.e.Third-party equipment interfaces as described and required by the Contract Documents.f.Other components required for a complete and working Control Systems as specified.B.The Specifications for the individual elements and component subsystems shall be minimum requirements and shall be augmented as necessary by the Contractor to achieve both compliance with all applicable codes, standards and to meet all requirements of the Contract Documents.work Architecture1.The Controls communication network shall utilize BACnet communications protocol operating over a standard Ethernet LAN and operate at a minimum speed of 100 Mb/sec.2.The networks shall utilize only copper and optical fiber communication media as appropriate and shall comply with applicable codes, ordinances and regulations.3.All necessary telephone lines, ISDN lines and internet Service Provider services and connections will be provided by the VA.D.Third Party Interfaces:1.The contractor administered by this Section of the technical specifications shall include necessary hardware, equipment, software and programming to allow data communications between the controls systems and building systems supplied by other trades.2.Other manufacturers and contractors supplying other associated systems and equipment shall provide their necessary hardware, software and start-up at their cost and shall cooperate fully with the contractor administered by this Section of the technical specifications in a timely manner and at their cost to ensure complete functional integration.2.3 COMMUNICATIONA.Control products, communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers shall comprise a BACnet internetwork. Controller and operator interface communication shall conform to ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2010, BACnet.1.The Data link / physical layer protocol (for communication) acceptable to the VA throughout its facilities is Ethernet (ISO 8802-3) and BACnet/IP.2.The ARCNET data link / physical protocol may be used in new BACnet sub-networks in VA non-healthcare and non-lab (i.e., business and cemetery) facilities.3.The MS/TP data link / physical layer protocol is not acceptable to the VA in any new BACnet network or sub-network in its healthcare or lab facilities. B.Each controller shall have a communication port for connection to an operator interface.C.Project drawings indicate remote buildings or sites to be connected by a nominal 56,000 baud modem over voice-grade telephone lines. In each remote location a modem and field device connection shall allow communication with each controller on the internetwork as specified in Paragraph D.D.Internetwork operator interface and value passing shall be transparent to internetwork architecture.1.An operator interface connected to a controller shall allow the operator to interface with each internetwork controller as if directly connected. Controller information such as data, status, reports, system software, and custom programs shall be viewable and editable from each internetwork controller.2.Inputs, outputs, and control variables used to integrate control strategies across multiple controllers shall be readable by each controller on the internetwork. Program and test all cross-controller links required to execute specified control system operation. An authorized operator shall be able to edit cross-controller links by typing a standard object address.E.System shall be expandable to at least twice the required input and output objects with additional controllers, associated devices, and wiring. Expansion shall not require operator interface hardware additions or software revisions.F.Controllers with real-time clocks shall use the BACnet Time Synchronization service. The system shall automatically synchronize system clocks daily from an operator-designated device via the internetwork. The system shall automatically adjust for daylight savings and standard time as applicable.2.4 Engineering COntrol Center (ECC)The new HVAC system shall tie into the existing ECC.2.5 NETWORK AND DEVICE NAMING work Numbers1.BACnet network numbers shall be based on a "facility code, network" concept. The "facility code" is the VAMC’s or VA campus’ assigned numeric value assigned to a specific facility or building. The "network" typically corresponds to a "floor" or other logical configuration within the building. BACnet allows 65535 network numbers per BACnet internet work. 2.The network numbers are thus formed as follows: "Net #" = "FFFNN" where:a.FFF= Facility code (see below)b.NN= 00-99This allows up to 100 networks per facility or buildingB.Device Instances1.BACnet allows 4194305 unique device instances per BACnet internet work. Using Agency's unique device instances are formed as follows: "Dev #" = "FFFNNDD" wherea.FFF and N are as above andb.DD= 00-99, this allows up to 100 devices per network.2.Note Special cases, where the network architecture of limiting device numbering to DD causes excessive subnet works. The device number can be expanded to DDD and the network number N can become a single digit. In NO case shall the network number N and the device number D exceed 4 digits. 3.Facility code assignments:4.000-400Building/facility number5.Note that some facilities have a facility code with an alphabetic suffix to denote wings, related structures, etc. The suffix will be ignored. Network numbers for facility codes above 400 will be assigned in the range 000-399.C.Device Names1.Name the control devices based on facility name, location within a facility, the system or systems that the device monitors and/or controls, or the area served. The intent of the device naming is to be easily recognized. Names can be up to 254 characters in length, without embedded spaces. Provide the shortest descriptive, but unambiguous, name. For example, in building #123 prefix the number with a “B” followed by the building number, if there is only one chilled water pump "CHWP-1", a valid name would be "B123.CHWP. 1.STARTSTOP". If there are two pumps designated "CHWP-1", one in a basement mechanical room (Room 0001) and one in a penthouse mechanical room (Room PH01), the names could be "B123.R0001.CHWP.1. STARTSTOP" or "B123.RPH01.CHWP.1.STARTSTOP". In the case of unitary controllers, for example a VAV box controller, a name might be "B123.R101.VAV". These names should be used for the value of the "Object_Name" property of the BACnet Device objects of the controllers involved so that the BACnet name and the EMCS name are the same.2.6 BACnet DEVICESA.All BACnet Devices – controllers, routers, actuators and sensors shall conform to BACnet Device Profiles and shall be BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) -Listed as conforming to those Device Profiles. Protocol Implementation Conformance Statements (PICSs), describing the BACnet capabilities of the Devices shall be published and available of the Devices through links in the BTL website.1.BACnet Building Controllers, historically referred to as NACs, shall conform to the BACnet B-BC Device Profile, and shall be BTL-Listed as conforming to the B-BC Device Profile. The Device’s PICS shall be submitted.2.BACnet Advanced Application Controllers shall conform to the BACnet B-AAC Device Profile, and shall be BTL-Listed as conforming to the B-AAC Device Profile. The Device’s PICS shall be submitted.3.BACnet Application Specific Controllers shall conform to the BACnet B-ASC Device Profile, and shall be BTL-Listed as conforming to the B-ASC Device Profile. The Device’s PICS shall be submitted.4.BACnet Smart Actuators shall conform to the BACnet B-SA Device Profile, and shall be BTL-Listed as conforming to the B-SA Device Profile. The Device’s PICS shall be submitted.5.BACnet Smart Sensors shall conform to the BACnet B-SS Device Profile, and shall be BTL-Listed as conforming to the B-SS Device Profile. The Device’s PICS shall be submitted.6.BACnet routers shall conform to the BACnet B-OTH Device Profile, and shall be BTL-Listed as conforming to the B-OTH Device Profile. The Device’s PICS shall be submitted.2.7 CONTROLLERSGeneral. Provide an adequate number of BTL-Listed B-BC building controllers and an adequate number of BTL-Listed B-AAC advanced application controllers to achieve the performance specified in the Part 1 Article on “System Performance.” Each of these controllers shall meet the following requirements. The controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements.The building controller shall share data with the existing ECC and the other networked building controllers. The advanced application controller shall share data with its building controller and the other networked advanced application controllers.The operating system of the controller shall manage the input and output communication signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow for central monitoring and alarms.Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-time clock.5.The controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall: a.assume a predetermined failure mode, andb.generate an alarm notification. 6.The controller shall communicate with other BACnet devices on the internetwork using the BACnet Read (Execute and Initiate) and Write (Execute and Initiate) Property services. munication.a.Each controller shall reside on a BACnet network using the ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol for its communications. Each building controller also shall perform BACnet routing if connected to a network of custom application and application specific controllers.b.The controller shall provide a service communication port using BACnet Data Link/Physical layer protocol for connection to a portable operator’s terminal.8.Keypad. A local keypad and display shall be provided for each controller. The keypad shall be provided for interrogating and editing data. Provide a system security password shall be available to prevent unauthorized use of the keypad and display. 9.Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. All wiring connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable.10.Memory. The controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 72 hours.11.The controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage. Controller operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).Provide BTL-Listed B-ASC application specific controllers for each piece of equipment for which they are constructed. Application specific controllers shall communicate with other BACnet devices on the internetwork using the BACnet Read (Execute) Property service.Each B-ASC shall be capable of stand-alone operation and shall continue to provide control functions without being connected to the network. Each B-ASC will contain sufficient I/O capacity to control the target munication. Each controller shall reside on a BACnet network using the ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol for its communications. Each building controller also shall perform BACnet routing if connected to a network of custom application and application specific controllers.Each controller shall have a BACnet Data Link/Physical layer compatible connection for a laptop computer or a portable operator’s tool. This connection shall be extended to a space temperature sensor port where shown.Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. All wiring connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable.5.Memory. The application specific controller shall use nonvolatile memory and maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss.6.Immunity to power and noise. Controllers shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80%. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5-120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).7.Transformer. Power supply for the ASC must be rated at a minimum of 125% of ASC power consumption and shall be of the fused or current limiting type.C.Direct Digital Controller Software1.The software programs specified in this section shall be commercially available, concurrent, multi-tasking operating system and support the use of software application that operates under DOS or Microsoft Windows.2.All points shall be identified by up to 30-character point name and 16-character point descriptor. The same names shall be used at the ECC.3.All control functions shall execute within the stand-alone control units via DDC algorithms. The VA shall be able to customize control strategies and sequences of operations defining the appropriate control loop algorithms and choosing the optimum loop parameters. 4.All controllers shall be capable of being programmed to utilize stored default values for assured fail-safe operation of critical processes. Default values shall be invoked upon sensor failure or, if the primary value is normally provided by the central or another CU, or by loss of bus communication. Individual application software packages shall be structured to assume a fail-safe condition upon loss of input sensors. Loss of an input sensor shall result in output of a sensor-failed message at the existing ECC. Each ACU and RCU shall have capability for local readouts of all functions. The UCUs shall be read remotely.5.All DDC control loops shall be able to utilize any of the following control modes:a.Two position (on-off, slow-fast) control.b.Proportional control.c.Proportional plus integral (PI) control.d.Proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID) control. All PID programs shall automatically invoke integral wind up prevention routines whenever the controlled unit is off, under manual control of an automation system or time initiated program.e.Automatic tuning of control loops.6.System Security: Operator access shall be secured using individual password and operator’s name. Passwords shall restrict the operator to the level of object, applications, and system functions assigned to him. A minimum of six (6) levels of security for operator access shall be provided. 7.Application Software: The controllers shall provide the following programs as a minimum for the purpose of optimizing energy consumption while maintaining comfortable environment for occupants. All application software shall reside and run in the system digital controllers. Editing of the application shall occur at the existing ECC or via a portable operator’s terminal, when it is necessary, to access directly the programmable unit.Night Setback/Morning Warm up Control: The system shall provide the ability to automatically adjust set points for this mode of operation. Optimum Start/Stop (OSS): Optimum start/stop program shall automatically be coordinated with event scheduling. The OSS program shall start HVAC equipment at the latest possible time that will allow the equipment to achieve the desired zone condition by the time of occupancy, and it shall also shut down HVAC equipment at the earliest possible time before the end of the occupancy period and still maintain desired comfort conditions. The OSS program shall consider both outdoor weather conditions and inside zone conditions. The program shall automatically assign longer lead times for weekend and holiday shutdowns. The program shall poll all zones and shall select the warmest and coolest zones. These shall be used in the start time calculation. The program shall meet the local code requirements for minimum outdoor air while the building is occupied. Modification of assigned occupancy start/stop times shall be possible via the existing ECC.e.Alarm Reporting: The operator shall be able to determine the action to be taken in the event of an alarm. Alarms shall be routed to the existing ECC based on time and events. An alarm shall be able to start programs, login the event, print and display the messages. The system shall allow the operator to prioritize the alarms to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator’s response to critical alarms. A minimum of six (6) priority levels of alarms shall be provided for each point.f.Remote Communications: The system shall have the ability to dial out in the event of an alarm to the existing ECC and alpha-numeric pagers. The alarm message shall include the name of the calling location, the device that generated the alarm, and the alarm message itself. The operator shall be able to remotely access and operate the system using dial up communications. Remote access shall allow the operator to function the same as local access.g.Maintenance Management (PM): The program shall monitor equipment status and generate maintenance messages based upon the operators defined equipment run time, starts, and/or calendar date limits. A preventative maintenance alarm shall be printed indicating maintenance requirements based on pre-defined run time. Each preventive message shall include point description, limit criteria and preventative maintenance instruction assigned to that limit. A minimum of 480-character PM shall be provided for each component of units such as air handling units. 2.8 sensors (air AND water)A.Sensors’ measurements shall be read back to the DDC system, and shall be visible by the existing ECC.B.Temperature Sensors shall be electronic, vibration and corrosion resistant for wall, immersion, and/or duct mounting. Provide all remote sensors as required for the systems.1.Temperature Sensors: thermistor type for terminal units and Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) with an integral transmitter type for all other sensors.a.Duct sensors shall be rigid or averaging type as shown on drawings. Averaging sensor shall be a minimum of 1 linear ft of sensing element for each sq ft of cooling coil face area.b.Immersion sensors shall be provided with a separable well made of stainless steel, bronze or monel material. Pressure rating of well is to be consistent with the system pressure in which it is to be installed.c.Space sensors shall be equipped with in-space User set-point adjustment, override switch, numerical temperature display on sensor cover, and communication port. Match room thermostats. Provide a tooled-access cover.1)Public space sensor: setpoint adjustment shall be only through the existing ECC or through the DDC system’s diagnostic device/laptop. Do not provide in-space User set-point adjustment. Provide an opaque keyed-entry cover if needed to restrict in-space User set-point adjustment.e.Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.f.Output Signal: 4-20 ma.g.4-20 ma continuous output signal.C.Static Pressure Sensors: Non-directional, temperature compensated. 1.4-20 ma output signal.2.0 to 5 inches wg for duct static pressure range.3.0 to 0.25 inch wg for Building static pressure range. D. Flow switches:1.Shall be either paddle or differential pressure type.a.Paddle-type switches (liquid service only) shall be UL Listed, SPDT snap-acting, adjustable sensitivity with NEMA 4 enclosure.b.Differential pressure type switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap acting, NEMA 4 enclosure, with scale range and differential suitable for specified application. 2.9 Control cablesA.General:1.Ground cable shields, drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Comply with Sections 27 05 26 and 26 05 26.2.Cable conductors to provide protection against induction in circuits. Crosstalk attenuation within the System shall be in excess of -80 dB throughout the frequency ranges specified.3.Minimize the radiation of RF noise generated by the System equipment so as not to interfere with any audio, video, data, computer main distribution frame (MDF), telephone customer service unit (CSU), and electronic private branch exchange (EPBX) equipment the System may service.4.The as-installed drawings shall identify each cable as labeled, used cable, and bad cable pairs. 5.Label system’s cables on each end. Test and certify cables in writing to the VA before conducting proof-of-performance testing. Minimum cable test requirements are for impedance compliance, inductance, capacitance, signal level compliance, opens, shorts, cross talk, noise, and distortion, and split pairs on all cables in the frequency ranges used. Make available all cable installation and test records at demonstration to the VA. All changes (used pair, failed pair, etc.) shall be posted in these records as the change occurs.6.Power wiring shall not be run in conduit with communications trunk wiring or signal or control wiring operating at 100 volts or less. B.Analogue control cabling shall be not less than No. 18 AWG solid, with thermoplastic insulated conductors as specified in Section 26 05 21.C.Copper digital communication cable between the existing ECC and the B-BC and B-AAC controllers shall be 100BASE-TX Ethernet, Category 5e or 6, not less than minimum 24 American Wire Gauge (AWG) solid, Shielded Twisted Pair (STP) or Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP), with thermoplastic insulated conductors, enclosed in a thermoplastic outer jacket, as specified in Section 27 05 11.1.Other types of media commonly used within IEEE Std 802.3 LANs (e.g., 10Base-T and 10Base-2) shall be used only in cases to interconnect with existing media.D.Optical digital communication fiber, if used, shall be Multimode or Singlemode fiber, 62.5/125 micron for multimode or 10/125 micron for singlemode micron with SC or ST connectors as specified in TIA-568-C.1. Terminations, patch panels, and other hardware shall be compatible with the specified fiber and shall be as specified in Section 27 05 11. Fiber-optic cable shall be suitable for use with the 100Base-FX or the 100Base-SX standard (as applicable) as defined in IEEE Std 802.3.2.10 THERMOSTATS A.Room thermostats controlling unitary standalone heating devices not connected to the DDC system shall have two modes of operation (heating – off. Wall mounted thermostats shall have brushed aluminum finish, no visible setpoint range and no visible temperature display and external adjustment:1.Electronic Thermostats: Solid-state, microprocessor based, programmable to daily, weekend, and holiday schedules.a.Public Space Thermostat: Public space thermostat shall have a thermistor sensor and shall not have a visible means of set point adjustment. Adjustment shall be via the digital controller to which it is connected. b.Battery replacement without program loss. 2.11 FINAL CONTROL ELEMENTS AND OPERATORSA.Fail Safe Operation: Control valves and dampers shall provide "fail safe" operation in either the normally open or normally closed position as required for freeze, moisture, and smoke or fire protection.B.Spring Ranges: Range as required for system sequencing and to provide tight shut-off.C.Power Operated Control Dampers: Factory fabricated, balanced type dampers. All modulating dampers shall be opposed blade type and gasketed. Blades for two-position, duct-mounted dampers shall be parallel, airfoil (streamlined) type for minimum noise generation and pressure drop.1.Leakage: Maximum leakage in closed position shall not exceed 7 L/S (15 CFMs) differential pressure for outdoor air and exhaust dampers and 200 L/S/ square meter (40 CFM/sq. ft.) at 50 mm (2 inches) differential pressure for other dampers.2.Frame shall be galvanized steel channel with seals as required to meet leakage criteria.3.Blades shall be galvanized steel or aluminum, 200 mm (8 inch) maximum width, with edges sealed as required. 4.Bearing shall be nylon, bronze sleeve or ball type.5.Hardware shall be zinc-plated steel. Connected rods and linkage shall be non-slip. Working parts of joints shall be brass, bronze, nylon or stainless steel.6.Maximum air velocity and pressure drop through free area the dampers:a.Smoke damper in air handling unit: 305 meter per minute (1000 fpm).b.Duct mounted damper: 600 meter per minute (2000 fpm). c.Maximum static pressure loss: 50 Pascal (0.20 inches water gage).D.Smoke Dampers and Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers: Dampers and operators are specified in Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS. Control of these dampers is specified under this Section.1.Two position water valves shall be line size.E.Pressure Independent Control Valves: 1.Valves shall be rated for a minimum of 150 percent of system operating pressure at the valve location but not less than 4320 kPa (600 psig) for valves 25 mm (1-inch) and smaller and not less than 2880 kPa for valves greater than 25 mm (1-inch).2.Valves 50 mm (2 inches) and smaller shall be forged brass body with threaded or flare connections, chrome plated ball and stem.3.Valves 60 mm (2 1/2 inches) and larger shall be bronze or iron body with flanged connections.4.PTEF or stainless steel seats except for valves controlling media above 100 degrees C (210 degrees F), which shall have stainless steel seats, Viton O-rings, and stainless steel springs.5.Flow characteristics:a.Position versus flow relation shall be equal percentage for water flow control and provide constant desired flow regardless of system pressure variations.b.Control shall be floating point, non-spring multi-function technology.6.Valve shall be provided with manual override feature. 7.Maximum pressure drop: Modulating water flow control, with a maximum pressure differential range of 5 to 40 psid with leakage of less than 0.01 percent of rated valve capacity at 360 kPa (50 psi) differential.F.Damper and Valve Operators and Relays:Electric operator shall provide full modulating control of dampers and valves. A linkage and pushrod shall be furnished for mounting the actuator on the damper frame internally in the duct or externally in the duct or externally on the duct wall, or shall be furnished with a direct-coupled design. Metal parts shall be aluminum, mill finish galvanized steel, or zinc plated steel or stainless steel. Provide actuator heads which allow for electrical conduit attachment. The motors shall have sufficient closure torque to allow for complete closure of valve or damper under pressure. Provide multiple motors as required to achieve sufficient close-off torque.a.Minimum valve close-off pressure shall be equal to the system pump’s dead-head pressure, minimum 50 psig for valves smaller than 4 inches.2.Electronic damper operators: Metal parts shall be aluminum, mill finish galvanized steel, or zinc plated steel or stainless steel. Provide actuator heads which allow for electrical conduit attachment. The motors shall have sufficient closure torque to allow for complete closure of valve or damper under pressure. Provide multiple motors as required to achieve sufficient close-off torque.a.VAV Box actuator shall be mounted on the damper axle or shall be of the air valve design, and shall provide complete modulating control of the damper. The motor shall have a closure torque of 35-inch pounds minimum with full torque applied at close off to attain minimum leakage.3.See drawings for required control operation.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA.General:1.Examine project plans for control devices and equipment locations; and report any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions to COTR for resolution before proceeding for installation.2.Install equipment, piping, wiring /conduit parallel to or at right angles to building lines.3.Install all equipment and piping in readily accessible locations. Do not run tubing and conduit concealed under insulation or inside ducts.4.Mount control devices, tubing and conduit located on ducts and apparatus with external insulation on standoff support to avoid interference with insulation.5.Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.6.Run tubing and wire connecting devices on or in control cabinets parallel with the sides of the cabinet neatly racked to permit tracing. 7.Install equipment level and plum.B.Electrical Wiring Installation:1.All wiring cabling shall be installed in conduits. Install conduits and wiring in accordance with Specification Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. Conduits carrying control wiring and cabling shall be dedicated to the control wiring and cabling: these conduits shall not carry power wiring. Provide plastic end sleeves at all conduit terminations to protect wiring from burrs.2.Install analog signal and communication cables in conduit and in accordance with Specification Section 26 05 19. Install digital communication cables in conduit and in accordance with Specification Section 27 05 11, Communications Horizontal Cabling.3.Install conduit and wiring between operator workstation(s), digital controllers, electrical panels, indicating devices, instrumentation, miscellaneous alarm points, thermostats, and relays as shown on the drawings or as required under this section. 4. Install all electrical work required for a fully functional system and not shown on electrical plans or required by electrical specifications. Where low voltage (less than 50 volt) power is required, provide suitable Class B transformers.5.Install all system components in accordance with local Building Code and National Electric Code.a.Splices: Splices in shielded and coaxial cables shall consist of terminations and the use of shielded cable couplers. Terminations shall be in accessible locations. Cables shall be harnessed with cable ties.b.Equipment: Fit all equipment contained in cabinets or panels with service loops, each loop being at least 300 mm (12 inches) long. Equipment for fiber optics system shall be rack mounted, as applicable, in ventilated, self-supporting, code gauge steel enclosure. Cables shall be supported for minimum sag.c.Cable Runs: Keep cable runs as short as possible. Allow extra length for connecting to the terminal board. Do not bend flexible coaxial cables in a radius less than ten times the cable outside diameter.d.Use vinyl tape, sleeves, or grommets to protect cables from vibration at points where they pass around sharp corners, through walls, panel cabinets, etc.6.Conceal cables, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduits and piping are exposed.7.Permanently label or code each point of all field terminal strips to show the instrument or item served. Color-coded cable with cable diagrams may be used to accomplish cable identification.8.Grounding: ground electrical systems per manufacturer’s written requirements for proper and safe operation.C.Install Sensors and Controls:1.Temperature Sensors:a.Install all sensors and instrumentation according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Temperature sensor locations shall be readily accessible, permitting quick replacement and servicing of them without special skills and tools.b.Calibrate sensors to accuracy specified, if not factory calibrated.c.Use of sensors shall be limited to its duty, e.g., duct sensor shall not be used in lieu of room sensor.d.Install room sensors permanently supported on wall frame. e.Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for the environment within which the sensor operates. Separate extended-bulb sensors form contact with metal casings and coils using insulated standoffs.f.All pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in wells.g.All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their conduits or in the wall to stop air transmitted from other areas affecting sensor reading. h.Permanently mark terminal blocks for identification. Protect all circuits to avoid interruption of service due to short-circuiting or other conditions. Line-protect all wiring that comes from external sources to the site from lightning and static electricity.2.Actuators:a.Mount and link damper and valve actuators according to manufacturer’s written instructions.b.Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed position.c.Check operation of valve/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates valve smoothly in both open and closed position. D.Installation of network:1.Ethernet:a.The network shall employ Ethernet LAN architecture, as defined by IEEE 802.3. The Network Interface shall be fully Internet Protocol (IP) compliant allowing connection to currently installed IEEE 802.3, Compliant Ethernet Networks.b.The network shall directly support connectivity to a variety of cabling types. As a minimum provide the following connectivity: 100 Base TX (Category 5e cabling) for the communications between the ECC and the B-BC and the B-AAC controllers.2.Third party interfaces: Contractor shall integrate real-time data from building systems by other trades and databases originating from other manufacturers as specified and required to make the system work as one system. E.Installation of digital controllers and programming:1.Provide a separate digital control panel for each major piece of equipment. Points used for control loop reset such as space temperature could be located on any of the remote control units.2.Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and trend logging. There shall be a minimum of 25 percent of available memory free for future use.3.System point names shall be modular in design, permitting easy operator interface without the use of a written point index.4.Provide software programming for the applications intended for the systems specified, and adhere to the strategy algorithms provided. 5.Provide graphics for each piece of equipment and floor plan in the building. This includes each terminal unit, etc. These graphics shall show all points dynamically as specified in the point list.3.2 SYSTEM VALIDATION AND DEMONSTRATIONA.As part of final system acceptance, a system demonstration is required (see below). Prior to start of this demonstration, the contractor is to perform a complete validation of all aspects of the controls and instrumentation system.B.Validation1.Prepare and submit for approval a validation test plan including test procedures for the performance verification tests. Test Plan shall address all specified functions interacting with the existing ECC and all specified sequences of operation. Explain in detail actions and expected results used to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this specification. Explain the method for simulating the necessary conditions of operation used to demonstrate performance of the system. Test plan shall include a test check list to be used by the Installer’s agent to check and initial that each test has been successfully completed. Deliver test plan documentation for the performance verification tests to the COTR 30 days prior to start of performance verification tests. Provide draft copy of operation and maintenance manual with performance verification test.2.After approval of the validation test plan, installer shall carry out all tests and procedures therein. Installer shall completely check out, calibrate, and test all connected hardware and software to insure that system performs in accordance with approved specifications and sequences of operation submitted. Installer shall complete and submit Test Check List.C.Demonstration1.System operation and calibration to be demonstrated by the installer in the presence of the Engineer or COTR on random samples of equipment as dictated by the Engineer or COTR. Should random sampling indicate improper validation, the COTR reserves the right to subsequently witness complete calibration of the system at no addition cost to the Government.2.Demonstrate to authorities that all required safeties and life safety functions are fully functional and complete.3.Make accessible, personnel to provide necessary adjustments and corrections to systems as directed by balancing agency.4.The following witnessed demonstrations of field control equipment shall be included:a.Observe HVAC systems in shut down condition. Check dampers and valves for normal position.b.Test application software for its ability to communicate with digital controllers, existing operator workstation, and uploading and downloading of control programs.c.Demonstrate the software ability to edit the control program off-line.d.Demonstrate reporting of alarm conditions for each alarm and ensure that these alarms are received at the assigned location, including operator workstations.e.Demonstrate ability of software program to function for the intended applications-trend reports, change in status etc.f.Demonstrate via graphed trends to show the sequence of operation is executed in correct manner, and that the HVAC systems operate properly through the complete sequence of operation, e.g., seasonal change, occupied/unoccupied mode, and warm-up condition.g.Demonstrate hardware interlocks and safeties functions, and that the control systems perform the correct sequence of operation after power loss and resumption of power loss.h.Prepare and deliver to the VA graphed trends of all control loops to demonstrate that each control loop is stable and the set points are maintained. i.Demonstrate that each control loop responds to set point adjustment and stabilizes within one (1) minute. Control loop trend data shall be instantaneous and the time between data points shall not be greater than one (1) minute. 5.Witnessed demonstration of existing ECC functions shall consist of:a.Running each specified report.b.Display and demonstrate each data entry to show site specific customizing capability. Demonstrate parameter changes.c.Step through penetration tree, display all graphics, demonstrate dynamic update, and direct access to graphics.d.Execute digital and analog commands in graphic mode.e.Demonstrate DDC loop precision and stability via trend logs of inputs and outputs (6 loops minimum).f.Demonstrate EMS performance via trend logs and command trace.g.Demonstrate scan, update, and alarm responsiveness.h.Demonstrate spreadsheet/curve plot software, and its integration with database.i.Demonstrate digital system configuration graphics with interactive upline and downline load, and demonstrate specified diagnostics.j.Demonstrate multitasking by showing dynamic curve plot, and graphic construction operating simultaneously via split screen.k.Demonstrate class programming with point options of beep duration, beep rate, alarm archiving, and color banding.----- END -----SECTION 23 21 13HYDRONIC PIPINGPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.Water piping to connect HVAC equipment, including the following: 1.Heating hot water and drain piping. 2.Extension of domestic water makeup piping. 1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.B.Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES. C.Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS: Seismic restraints for piping.D.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC : General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division 23.E.Section 23 07 11, HVAC & BOILER PLANT INSULATION: Piping insulation.F.Section 23 82 00, CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS: Finned Tube Radiation.G.Section 23 09 23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC: Temperature and pressure sensors and valve operators.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC , which includes welding qualifications. B.Submit prior to welding of steel piping a certificate of Welder’s certification. The certificate shall be current and not more than one year old.1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Pipe and equipment supports. 2.Pipe and tubing, with specification, class or type, and schedule. 3.Pipe fittings, including miscellaneous adapters and special fittings. 4.Flanges, gaskets and bolting. 5.Valves of all types. 6.Strainers. 7.Flexible connectors for water service. 8.Pipe alignment guides. 9.Expansion joints. 10.All specified hydronic system components. 11.Water flow measuring devices. 12.Gages. 13.Thermometers and test wells. 14.Seismic bracing details for piping. C.Submit the welder’s qualifications in the form of a current (less than one year old) and formal certificate. D.Coordination Drawings: Refer to Article, SUBMITTALS of Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC and . E.AsBuilt Piping Diagrams: Provide drawing as follows for heating hot water system and other piping systems and equipment. 1.One wallmounted stick file with complete set of prints. Mount stick file in the Mechanical room along with control diagram stick file.2.One complete set of reproducible drawings. 3.One complete set of drawings in electronic Autocad and pdf format. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. American National Standards Institute, Inc.B.American Society of Mechanical Engineers/American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ASME/ANSI): B1.20.1-83(R2006)Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)B16.411Gray Iron Threaded FittingsB16.18-01Cast Copper Alloy Solder joint Pressure fittings B16.23-11Cast Copper Alloy Solder joint Drainage fittings B40.100-05Pressure Gauges and Gauge AttachmentsC.American National Standards Institute, Inc./Fluid Controls Institute (ANSI/FCI): 70-2-2006Control Valve Seat LeakageD.American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):B16.1-10Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged FittingsB16.3-2011Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Class 150 and 300B16.42011Gray Iron Threaded Fittings: (Class 125 and 250) B16.5-2009Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS ? through NPS 24 Metric/Inch StandardB16.9-07Factory Made Wrought Butt Welding FittingsB16.11-11Forged Fittings, Socket Welding and ThreadedB16.18-12Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure FittingsB16.22-12Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.B16.2411Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged FittingsB16.3909Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe UnionsB16.42-11Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged FittingsB31.112Power PipingE.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A47/A47M-99 (2009)Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings A53/A53M-12Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless A106/A106M-08 (A106)Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for HighTemperature ServiceA12604 (2009)Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings A18303 (2009)Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts A216/A216M-12Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High Temperature Service A234/A234M-11aPiping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service A30710Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile StrengthA53684 (2009)Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings A615/A615M-12Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete ReinforcementA653/A 653M-11Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) By the Hot-Dip ProcessB3208Standard Specification for Solder Metal B6209Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings B8809Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube B209-10Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate C177-10 Standard Test Method for Steady State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus C533-11Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation C552-12bCellular Glass Thermal Insulation D1784-11Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) CompoundD1785-12Poly (Vinyl Chloride0 (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120 D2241-09Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure Rated Pipe (SDR Series)D3350-12Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings MaterialsF43912Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 F441/F441M-12Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80 F477-10Elastomeric Seals Gaskets) for Joining Plastic PipeF.American Water Works Association (AWWA): C110-12Ductile Iron and Grey Iron Fittings for WaterC203-03Coal Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipe Lines Enamel and Tape Hot AppliedG.American Welding Society (AWS): B2.1-09-ADD1Standard Welding Procedure SpecificationH.Copper Development Association, Inc. (CDA): CDA A4015-06Copper Tube HandbookI.Expansion Joint Manufacturer’s Association, Inc. (EJMA):EMJA-2003Expansion Joint Manufacturer’s Association Standards, Ninth EditionJ.Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fitting Industry, Inc.: SP-6711Butterfly Valves SP-7011Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends SP-7111Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded EndsSP-8008Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves SP-8511Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded EndsSP-11010Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared EndsSP-12510Gray Iron and Ductile Iron In-line, Spring Loaded, Center-Guided Check ValvesK.National Sanitation Foundation/American National Standards Institute, Inc. (NSF/ANSI): 14-11Plastic Piping System Components and Related Materials 50-2012Equipment for Swimming Pools, Spas, Hot Tubs and other Recreational Water Facilities – Evaluation criteria for materials, components, products, equipment and systems for use at recreational water facilities 61-2012Drinking Water System Components – Health EffectsL.Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association: TEMA 9th Edition, 2007 1.6 Spare partsA.For mechanical pressed sealed fittings provide tools required for each pipe size used at the facility.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS, PIPE SLEEVES, AND WALL AND CEILING PLATES A.Provide in accordance with Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC . 2.2 PIPE AND TUBING A. Heating Hot Water, and Vent Piping: 1.Steel: ASTM A53 Grade B, seamless or ERW, Schedule 40.2.Copper water tube option: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. B.Pipe supports, including insulation shields, for above ground piping: Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC .2.3 FITTINGS FOR STEEL PIPE A.50 mm (2 inches) and Smaller: Screwed or welded joints. 1.Butt welding: ASME B16.9 with same wall thickness as connecting piping.2.Forged steel, socket welding or threaded: ASME B16.11. 3.Screwed: 150 pound malleable iron, ASME B16.3. 125 pound cast iron, ASME B16.4, may be used in lieu of malleable iron. Bushing reduction of a single pipe size, or use of close nipples, is not acceptable. 4.Unions: ASME B16.39. 5.Water hose connection adapter: Brass, pipe thread to 20 mm (3/4 inch) garden hose thread, with hose cap nut.2.4 FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBING A.Joints: 1.Solder Joints: Joints shall be made up in accordance with recommended practices of the materials applied. Apply 95/5 tin and antimony on all copper piping.2.Mechanically formed tee connection in water and drain piping: Form mechanically extracted collars in a continuous operation by drilling pilot hole and drawing out tube surface to form collar, having a height of not less than three times the thickness of tube wall. Adjustable collaring device shall insure proper tolerance and complete uniformity of the joint. Notch and dimple joining branch tube in a single process to provide free flow where the branch tube penetrates the fitting. B.Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.24. C.Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.18 cast copper or ANSI/ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper.2.5 FITTINGS FOR PLASTIC PIPING A.Schedule 40, socket type for solvent welding. B.Schedule 40 PVC drain piping: Drainage pattern. 2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A.Provide where copper tubing and ferrous metal pipe are joined. B.50 mm (2 inches) and Smaller: Threaded dielectric union, ASME B16.39. C.65 mm (2 1/2 inches) and Larger: Flange union with dielectric gasket and bolt sleeves, ASME B16.42. D.Temperature Rating, 99 degrees C (210 degrees F). E.Contractor’s option: On pipe sizes 2” and smaller, screwed end brass ball valves or dielectric nipples may be used in lieu of dielectric unions.2.7 SCREWED JOINTS A.Pipe Thread: ANSI B1.20. B.Lubricant or Sealant: Oil and graphite or other compound approved for the intended service. 2.8 VALVES A.Asbestos packing is not acceptable. B.All valves of the same type shall be products of a single manufacturer. C.Provide chain operators for valves 150 mm (6 inches) and larger when the centerline is located 2400 mm (8 feet) or more above the floor or operating platform. D.Shut-Off Valves1.Ball Valves (Pipe sizes 2” and smaller): MSS-SP 110, screwed or solder connections, brass or bronze body with chrome-plated ball with full port and Teflon seat at 2760 kPa (400 psig) working pressure rating. Provide stem extension to allow operation without interfering with pipe insulation.E.Globe and Angle Valves 1.Globe Valvesa.50 mm (2 inches) and smaller: MSSSP 80, bronze, 1034 kPa (150 lb.) Globe valves shall be union bonnet with metal plug type disc. 2.Angle Valves: a.50 mm (2 inches) and smaller: MSSSP 80, bronze, 1034 kPa (150 lb.) Angle valves shall be union bonnet with metal plug type disc. F.Check Valves1.Swing Check Valves: a.50 mm (2 inches) and smaller: MSSSP 80, bronze, 1034 kPa (150 lb.), 45 degree swing disc. G.Water Flow Balancing Valves: For flow regulation and shutoff. Valves shall be line size rather than reduced to control valve size.1. Ball or Globe style valve. 2.A dual purpose flow balancing valve and adjustable flow meter, with bronze or cast iron body, calibrated position pointer, valved pressure taps or quick disconnects with integral check valves and preformed polyurethane insulating enclosure. 3.Provide a readout kit including flow meter, readout probes, hoses, flow charts or calculator, and carrying case.H.Automatic Balancing Control Valves: Factory calibrated to maintain constant flow (plus or minus five percent) over system pressure fluctuations of at least 10 times the minimum required for control. Provide standard pressure taps and four sets of capacity charts. Valves shall be line size and be one of the following designs: 1.Gray iron (ASTM A126) or brass body rated 1205 kPa (175 psig) at 93 degrees C (200 degrees F), with stainless steel piston and spring. 2.Brass or ferrous body designed for 2067 kPa (300 psig) service at 121 degrees C (250 degrees F), with corrosion resistant, tamper proof, selfcleaning piston/spring assembly that is easily removable for inspection or replacement. bination assemblies containing ball type shutoff valves, unions, flow regulators, strainers with blowdown valves and pressure temperature ports shall be acceptable. 4.Provide a readout kit including flow meter, probes, hoses, flow charts and carrying case. I.Two-way automatic control valves. Pressure independent type as specified in Section 23 09 23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC.2.9 WATER FLOW MEASURING DEVICES A.Minimum overall accuracy plus or minus three percent over a range of 70 to 110 percent of design flow. Select devices for not less than 110 percent of design flow rate. B.Venturi Type: Bronze, steel, or cast iron with bronze throat, with valved pressure sensing taps upstream and at the throat. C.Wafer Type Circuit Sensor: Cast iron wafertype flow meter equipped with readout valves to facilitate the connecting of a differential pressure meter. Each readout valve shall be fitted with an integral check valve designed to minimize system fluid loss during the monitoring process. D.SelfAveraging Annular Sensor Type: Brass or stainless steel metering tube, shutoff valves and quickcoupling pressure connections. Metering tube shall be rotatable so all sensing ports may be pointed downstream when unit is not in use. E.Flow Measuring Device Identification: 1.Metal tag attached by chain to the device. 2.Include meter or equipment number, manufacturer's name, meter model, flow rate factor and design flow rate in gpm. F.Portable Water Flow Indicating Meters: 1.Minimum 150 mm (6 inch) diameter dial, forged brass body, berylliumcopper bellows, designed for 1205 kPa (175 psig) working pressure at 121 degrees C (250 degrees F). 2.Bleed and equalizing valves. 3.Vent and drain hose and two 3000 mm (10 feet) lengths of hose with quick disconnect connections. 4.Factory fabricated carrying case with hose compartment and a bound set of capacity curves showing flow rate versus pressure differential. 5.Provide one portable meter for each range of differential pressure required for the installed flow devices.2.10 STRAINERS A.Y Type. 1.Screens: Bronze, monel metal or 188 stainless steel, free area not less than 21/2 times pipe area, with perforations as follows: 1.1 mm (0.045 inch) diameter perforations. 2.11 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS FOR WATER SERVICE A.Flanged Spool Connector:1.Single arch or multiple arch type. Tube and cover shall be constructed of chlorobutyl elastomer with full faced integral flanges to provide a tight seal without gaskets. Connectors shall be internally reinforced with high strength synthetic fibers impregnated with rubber or synthetic compounds as recommended by connector manufacturer, and steel reinforcing rings.2.Working pressures and temperatures shall be 1137 kPa (165psig) at 121 degrees C (250 degrees F).3.Provide ductile iron retaining rings and control units.B.Mechanical Pipe Couplings:See other fittings specified under Part 2, PRODUCTS.2.11PIPE ANCHORS Unless otherwise indicated, provide anchors consisting of steel collars, clamps or similar devices welded to pipe and structural framing of building.2.12EXPANSION JOINTSA.Optional Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints1.Contractor may substitute flexible hose expansion joints for expansion loops shown on Contract Documents.2.Manufacturer shall be responsible for sizing the flexible hose expansion joint and provide anchor and guide locations.3.Provide manufactured assembly with two flexible-metal-hose legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center section of flexible hose; with inlet and outlet elbow fittings, corrugated-metal inner hoses, and braided outer sheaths.4.Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints for Copper Piping: Copper-alloy fittings with solder joint end connections.a. 50 mm (2-inch) and Smaller: Bronze hoses and single braid bronze sheaths with 3100 kPa at 21 degree C (450 psig at 70 degree F) and 2340 kPa at 232 degree C (340 psig at 450 degree F) ratings.2.12PIPE GUIDESProvide guide with cast steel or cast iron segmented spider secured to the pipe and free to move axially in a segmented steel cylinder anchored to structure. Guide size shall be large enough to permit pipe insulation to be continuous and of uniform thickness.2.13 HYDRONIC SYSTEM COMPONENTS A.Air Purger: Cast iron or fabricated steel, 861 kPa (125 psig) water working pressure, for inline installation. B.Automatic Air Vent Valves (where shown): Cast iron or semisteel body, 1034 kPa (150 psig) working pressure, stainless steel float, valve, valve seat and mechanism, minimum 15 mm (1/2 inch) water connection and 6 mm (1/4 inch) air outlet. Air outlet shall be piped to the nearest floor drain. 2.15 GAGES, PRESSURE AND COMPOUND A.ASME B40.100, Accuracy Grade 1A, (pressure, vacuum, or compound for air, oil or water), initial midscale accuracy 1 percent of scale (Qualify grade), metal or phenolic case, 115 mm (41/2 inches) in diameter, 6 mm (1/4 inch) NPT bottom connection, white dial with black graduations and pointer, clear glass or acrylic plastic window, suitable for board mounting. Provide red "set hand" to indicate normal working pressure. B.Provide brass lever handle union cock. Provide brass/bronze pressure snubber for gages in water service. C.Range of Gages: Provide range equal to at least 130 percent of normal operating range. 2.16 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PROVISIONS A.Pete's Plug: 6 mm (1/4 inch) MPT by 75 mm (3 inches) long, brass body and cap, with retained safety cap, nordel selfclosing valve cores, permanently installed in piping where shown, or in lieu of pressure gage test connections shown on the drawings.B.Provide one each of the following test items to the Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative (COTR): 1.6 mm (1/4 inch) FPT by 3 mm (1/8 inch) diameter stainless steel pressure gage adapter probe for extra long test plug. PETE'S 500 XL is an example. 2.90 mm (31/2 inch) diameter, one percent accuracy, compound gage, –—100 kPa (30 inches) Hg to 700 kPa (100 psig) range. 3.0 - 104 degrees C (220 degrees F) pocket thermometer onehalf degree accuracy, 25 mm (one inch) dial, 125 mm (5 inch) long stainless steel stem, plastic case. 2.17 THERMOMETERS anic liquid filled type, red or blue column, clear plastic window, with 150 mm (6 inch) brass stem, straight, fixed or adjustable angle as required for each in reading. No mercury allowed.B. Case: Chrome plated brass or aluminum with enamel finish. C. Scale: Not less than 225 mm (9 inches), range as described below, two degree graduations. D.Separable Socket (Well): Brass, extension neck type to clear pipe insulation. E.Scale ranges:1.Hot Water : -1 – 116 degrees C (30-240 degrees F).2.18 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL Refer to Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC.PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A.The drawings show the general arrangement of pipe and equipment but do not show all required fittings and offsets that may be necessary to connect pipes to equipment, finned tube radiation, etc., and to coordinate with other trades. Provide all necessary fittings, offsets and pipe runs based on field measurements and at no additional cost to the Government. Coordinate with other trades for space available and relative location of HVAC equipment and accessories to be connected on ceiling grid. Pipe location on the drawings shall be altered by contractor where necessary to avoid interferences and clearance difficulties.B.Store materials to avoid excessive exposure to weather or foreign materials. Keep inside of piping relatively clean during installation and protect open ends when work is not in progress. C.Support piping securely. Refer to PART 3, Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC.D.Install piping generally parallel to walls and column center lines, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Space piping, including insulation, to provide 25 mm (one inch) minimum clearance between adjacent piping or other surface. Unless shown otherwise, slope drain piping down in the direction of flow not less than 25 mm (one inch) in 12 m (40 feet). Provide eccentric reducers to keep bottom of sloped piping flat. E.Locate and orient valves to permit proper operation and access for maintenance of packing, seat and disc. Generally locate valve stems in overhead piping in horizontal position. Provide a union adjacent to one end of all threaded end valves. Provide reducers between pipes and control valves as required to connect to pipe sizes shown on the drawing. F.Offset equipment connections to allow valving off for maintenance and repair with minimal removal of piping. Provide flexibility in equipment connections and branch line takeoffs with 3elbow swing joints where noted on the drawings. G.Tee water piping runouts or branches into the side of mains or other branches. Avoid bull-head tees, which are two return lines entering opposite ends of a tee and exiting out the common side. H.Provide manual or automatic air vent at all piping system high points and drain valves at all low points. Install piping to floor drains from all automatic air vents.I.Connect piping to equipment as shown on the drawings. Install components furnished by others such as: 1.Flow elements (orifice unions), control valve bodies, flow switches, pressure taps with valve, and wells for sensors. J.Thermometer Wells: In pipes 65 mm (21/2 inches) and smaller increase the pipe size to provide free area equal to the upstream pipe area. K.Firestopping: Fill openings around uninsulated piping penetrating floors or fire walls, with firestop material. For firestopping insulated piping refer to Section 23 07 11, HVAC INSULATION. L.Where copper piping is connected to steel piping, provide dielectric connections.3.2 PIPE JOINTS A.Welded: Beveling, spacing and other details shall conform to ASME B31.1 and AWS B2.1. See Welder’s qualification requirements under "Quality Assurance" in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC. . B.Screwed: Threads shall conform to ASME B1.20; joint compound shall be applied to male threads only and joints made up so no more than three threads show. Coat exposed threads on steel pipe with joint compound, or red lead paint for corrosion protection. C.125 Pound Cast Iron Flange (Plain Face): Mating flange shall have raised face, if any, removed to avoid overstressing the cast iron flange. D.Solvent Welded Joints: As recommended by the manufacturer.3.3 PIPE ANCHORSSecure anchors directly to structural framing of building. Before making installation, submit anchor details, location and method of securing to building for review by Engineer.3.4 EXPANSION JOINTSA.Optional Flexible-Hose Expansion Joint1.Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.2.Manufacturer shall size loop and provide location of anchors and guide.3.5 PIPE GUIDESA.Wherever expansion loops are installed, provide concentric type pipe alignment guides. B.Locate and install guides as indicated in accordance with the standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturer’s Association.C.Pipe supports shall not be considered a guide.D.Provide guides where required to permit line movement without buckling and misalignment.E.Secure guides directly to structural framing of floors or roof or to their supporting members.F.Obtain COTR’s review of guide details, location and method of securing to building before proceeding with installation of guides.3.6 seismic bracing ABOVEGROUND PIPINGProvide in accordance with Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS. 3.7 LEAK TESTING ABOVEGROUND PIPINGA.Inspect all joints and connections for leaks and workmanship and make corrections as necessary, to the satisfaction of the COTR. Tests may be either of those below, or a combination, as approved by the COTR. B.An operating test at design pressure, and for hot systems, design maximum temperature. C.A hydrostatic test at 1.5 times design pressure. For water systems the design maximum pressure would usually be the static head, or expansion tank maximum pressure, plus pump head. Factory tested equipment (coils, etc.) need not be field tested. Isolate equipment where necessary to avoid excessive pressure on mechanical seals and safety devices. 3.8 FLUSHING AND CLEANING PIPING SYSTEMS A.Water Piping: Clean systems as recommended by the suppliers of chemicals. 1.Initial flushing: Remove loose dirt, mill scale, metal chips, weld beads, rust, and like deleterious substances without damage to any system component. Provide temporary piping or hose to bypass coils, control valves, and other factory cleaned equipment unless acceptable means of protection are provided and subsequent inspection of hideout areas takes place. Isolate or protect clean system components, including pumps and pressure vessels, and remove any component which may be damaged. Open all valves, drains, vents and strainers at all system levels. Remove plugs, caps, spool pieces, and components to facilitate early debris discharge from system. Sectionalize system to obtain debris carrying velocity of 1.8 m/S (6 feet per second), if possible. Connect deadend supply and return headers as necessary. Flush bottoms of risers. Install temporary strainers where necessary to protect downstream equipment. Supply and remove flushing water and drainage by various type hose, temporary and permanent piping and Contractor's booster pumps. Flush until clean as approved by the COTR. 2.Cleaning: Using products supplied, circulate systems at normal temperature to remove adherent organic soil, hydrocarbons, flux, pipe mill varnish, pipe joint compounds, iron oxide, and like deleterious substances not removed by flushing, without chemical or mechanical damage to any system component. Removal of tightly adherent mill scale is not required. Keep isolated equipment which is "clean" and where deadend debris accumulation cannot occur. Sectionalize system if possible, to circulate at velocities not less than 1.8 m/S (6 feet per second). Circulate each section for not less than four hours. Blowdown all strainers, or remove and clean as frequently as necessary. Drain and prepare for final flushing. 3.Final Flushing: Return systems to conditions required by initial flushing after all cleaning solution has been displaced by clean makeup. Flush all dead ends and isolated clean equipment. Gently operate all valves to dislodge any debris in valve body by throttling velocity. Flush for not less than one hour. 3.9 WATER TREATMENT A.Close and fill system as soon as possible after final flushing to minimize corrosion. B.Charge existing systems back in the Mechanical Room with chemicals needed to make up for the newly flushed piping system specified. C.Utilize this activity, by arrangement with the COTR, for instructing VA operating personnel. 3.10 OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TEST AND INSTRUCTION A.Refer to PART 3, Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC .B.Adjust red set hand on pressure gages to normal working pressure. E N D SECTION 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.Ductwork and accessories for HVAC including the following: 1.Supply air, return air, and exhaust air systems. B.Definitions: 1.SMACNA Standards as used in this specification means the HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. 2.Seal or Sealing: Use of liquid or mastic sealant, with or without compatible tape overlay, or gasketing of flanged joints, to keep air leakage at duct joints, seams and connections to an acceptable minimum. 3.Duct Pressure Classification: SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. 4.Exposed Duct: Exposed to view in a finished room. 1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING: Fire Stopping Material.. B.Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS: Seismic Reinforcing.C.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC: General Mechanical Requirements. . D.Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING and EQUIPMENT: Noise Level Requirements.. E.Section 23 07 11, HVAC INSULATION: Duct Insulation. F. Section 23 09 23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC: Duct Mounted Instrumentation. G.Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, and BALANCING FOR HVAC: Testing and Balancing of Air Flows. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Refer to article, QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC. B.Fire Safety Code: Comply with NFPA 90A. C.Duct System Construction and Installation: Referenced SMACNA Standards are the minimum acceptable quality.D.Duct Sealing, Air Leakage Criteria, and Air Leakage Tests: Ducts shall be sealed as per duct sealing requirements of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual for duct pressure classes shown on the drawings.E.Duct accessories exposed to the air stream, such as dampers of all types (except smoke dampers) and access openings, shall be of the same material as the duct or provide at least the same level of corrosion resistance. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES. B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Rectangular ducts: a.Schedules of duct systems, materials and selected SMACNA construction alternatives for joints, sealing, gage and reinforcement. c.Sealants and gaskets. d.Access doors. 2.Round duct construction details: a.Manufacturer's details for duct fittings. c.Sealants and gaskets. d.Access sections. e.Installation instructions. 3.Volume dampers. 4.Upper hanger attachments. 5.Fire dampers, fire doors, and smoke dampers with installation instructions.6.Sound attenuators, including pressure drop and acoustic performance. 7.Insulated flexible ducts and clamps, with manufacturer's installation instructions. 8.Flexible connections. 9.Instrument test fittings. 10COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC. C.Coordination Drawings: Refer to article, SUBMITTALS, in Section 23 05 11 – Common Work Results for HVAC.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):ASCE7-05Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures C.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A653-11Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, ZincCoated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip processA1011-12bStandard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot rolled, Carbon, structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High StrengthB20910Standard Specification for Aluminum and AluminumAlloy Sheet and PlateE84-12cStandard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building MaterialsD.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 90A-12Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems E.Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): 2nd Edition – 2005HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible 1st Edition - 1985HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual F.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 18108FactoryMade Air Ducts and Air Connectors 55506 Standard for Fire Dampers PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCT MATERIALS AND SEALANTS A.General: Except for systems specified otherwise, construct ducts, casings, and accessories of galvanized sheet steel, ASTM A653, coating G90; or, aluminum sheet, ASTM B209, alloy 1100, 3003 or 5052.B.Joint Sealing: Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, paragraph S1.9. 1.Sealant: Elastomeric compound, gun or brush grade, maximum 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed (dry state) compounded specifically for sealing ductwork as recommended by the manufacturer. Generally provide liquid sealant, with or without compatible tape, for low clearance slip joints and heavy, permanently elastic, mastic type where clearances are larger. Oil base caulking and glazing compounds are not acceptable because they do not retain elasticity and bond. 2.Tape: Use only tape specifically designated by the sealant manufacturer and apply only over wet sealant. Pressure sensitive tape shall not be used on bare metal or on dry sealant. 3.Gaskets in Flanged Joints: Soft neoprene. C.Approved factory made joints may be used. 2.2 DUCT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION A.Regardless of the pressure classifications outlined in the SMACNA Standards, fabricate and seal the ductwork in accordance with the following pressure classifications: SYSTEMPRESSURE RATING(INCHES- W.G.)PRESSURE RATING(PASCALS)Supply Air Downstream of AHU-17Return Air Downstream of Exhaust Air Downstream of Fans 2500Return Air Upstream of Exhaust Air Upstream of Fans (-)2(-)500B.Seal Class: All ductwork shall receive Class A SealC.Round Ducts: Furnish duct and fittings made by the same manufacturer to insure good fit of slip joints. When submitted and approved in advance, round duct, with size converted on the basis of equal pressure drop, may be furnished in lieu of rectangular duct design shown on the drawings. 1.Elbows: Diameters 80 through 200 mm (3 through 8 inches) shall be two sections die stamped, all others shall be gored construction, maximum 18 degree angle, with all seams continuously welded or standing seam. Coat galvanized areas of fittings damaged by welding with corrosion resistant aluminum paint or galvanized repair compound.2.Provide bell mouth, conical tees or taps, laterals, reducers, and other low loss fittings as shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. 3.Ribbed Duct Option: Lighter gage round duct and fittings may be furnished provided certified tests indicating that the rigidity and performance is equivalent to SMACNA standard gage ducts are submitted. a.Ducts: Manufacturer's published standard gage, G90 coating, spiral lock seam construction with an intermediate standing rib.b.Fittings: May be manufacturer's standard as shown in published catalogs, fabricated by spot welding and bonding with neoprene base cement or machine formed seam in lieu of continuous welded seams. D.Casings and Plenums: Construct in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Section 6, including curbs, access doors, pipe penetrations, eliminators and drain pans. Access doors shall be hollow metal, insulated, with latches and door pulls, 500 mm (20 inches) wide by 1200 - 1350 mm (48 54 inches) high. Provide view port in the doors where shown. Provide drain for outdoor air louver plenum. Outdoor air plenum shall have exterior insulation. Drain piping shall be routed to the nearest floor drain.E.Volume Dampers: Single blade or opposed blade, multilouver type as detailed in SMACNA Standards. Refer to SMACNA Detail Figure 7-4 for Single Blade and Figure 7-5 for Multi-blade Volume Dampers. F.Duct Hangers and Supports: Refer to SMACNA Standards Section IV. Avoid use of trapeze hangers for round duct. 2.3 DUCT ACCESS DOORS, PANELS AND SECTIONS A.Provide access doors, sized and located for maintenance work, upstream, in the following locations: 1.Each fire damper (for link service), smoke damper and automatic control damper.B.Openings shall be as large as feasible in small ducts, 300 mm by 300 mm (12 inch by 12 inch) minimum where possible. Access sections in insulated ducts shall be doublewall, insulated. Transparent shatterproof covers are preferred for uninsulated ducts. 1.For rectangular ducts: Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards (Figure 7-2). 2.For round duct: Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards (Figure 7-3). 2.4 FIRE DAMPERS A.Galvanized steel, interlocking blade type, UL listing and label, 11/2 hour rating, 70 degrees C (160 degrees F) fusible line, 100 percent free opening with no part of the blade stack or damper frame in the air stream. B.Minimum requirements for fire dampers: 1.The damper frame may be of design and length as to function as the mounting sleeve, thus eliminating the need for a separate sleeve, as allowed by UL 555. Otherwise provide sleeves and mounting angles, minimum 1.9 mm (14 gage), required to provide installation equivalent to the damper manufacturer's UL test installation. 2.Submit manufacturer's installation instructions conforming to UL rating test. 2.5 INSULATED FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT A.General: Factory fabricated, complying with NFPA 90A for connectors not passing through floors of buildings. Insulated flexible ducts shall not penetrate any fire or smoke barrier which is required to have a fire resistance rating of one hour or more. Insulated flexible duct length shall not exceed 1.5 m (5 feet). Provide insulated acoustical air duct connectors in supply air duct systems and elsewhere as shown. B.Insulated flexible ducts shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., complying with UL 181. Ducts larger than 200 mm (8 inches) in diameter shall be Class 1. Ducts 200 mm (8 inches) in diameter and smaller may be Class 1 or Class 2. C.Insulated flexible ducts shall be factory made including mineral fiber insulation with maximum C factor of 0.25 at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F) mean temperature, encased with a low permeability moisture barrier outer jacket, having a puncture resistance of not less than 50 Beach Units. Acoustic insertion loss shall not be less than 3 dB per 300 mm (foot) of straight duct, at 500 Hz, based on 150 mm (6 inch) duct, of 750 m/min (2500 fpm). D.Application Criteria: 1.Temperature range: -18 to 93 degrees C (0 to 200 degrees F) internal. 2.Maximum working velocity: 1200 m/min (4000 feet per minute). 3.Minimum working pressure, inches of water gage: 2500 Pa (10 inches) positive, 500 Pa (2 inches) negative. E.Duct Clamps: 100 percent nylon strap, 80 kg (175 pounds) minimum loop tensile strength manufactured for this purpose or stainless steel strap with cadmium plated worm gear tightening device. Apply clamps with sealant and as approved for UL 181, Class 1 installation. 2.6 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS Where duct connections are made to air terminal unitsinstall a noncombustible flexible connection of 822 g (29 ounce) neoprene coated fiberglass fabric approximately 150 mm (6 inches) wide. Burning characteristics shall conform to NFPA 90A. Securely fasten flexible connections to round ducts with stainless steel or zinccoated iron draw bands with worm gear fastener. For rectangular connections, crimp fabric to sheet metal and fasten sheet metal to ducts by screws 50 mm (2 inches) on center. Fabric shall not be stressed other than by air pressure. Allow at least 25 mm (one inch) slack to insure that no vibration is transmitted. 2.7 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALRefer to Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. 2.8 SEISMIC RESTRAINT FOR DUCTWORKRefer to Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS.2.9 DUCT MOUNTED Thermometer (air) A.Stem Type Thermometers: ASTM E1, 7 inch scale, red appearing organic material (no mercury allowed) lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish and clear glass or polycarbonate window, brass stem, 2 percent of scale accuracy to ASTM E77 scale calibrated in degrees Fahrenheit. B.Thermometer Supports:1.Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as required, and with cap and chain.2.Flange: 3 inch outside diameter reversible flange, designed to fasten to sheet metal air ducts, with brass perforated stem.2.10 DUCT MOUNTED TEmperature sensor (AIR) Refer to Section 23 09 23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC. 2.11 INSTRUMENT TEST FITTINGS A.Manufactured type with a minimum 50 mm (two inch) length for insulated duct, and a minimum 25 mm (one inch) length for duct not insulated. Test hole shall have a flat gasket for rectangular ducts and a concave gasket for round ducts at the base, and a screw cap to prevent air leakage. B.Provide instrument test holes at each duct or casing mounted temperature sensor or transmitter, and at entering and leaving side of each heating coil and cooling coil. part 3 - execution3.1 INSTALLATION ply with provisions of Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC, particularly regarding coordination with other trades and work in existing buildings. B.Fabricate and install ductwork and accessories in accordance with referenced SMACNA Standards: 1.Drawings show the general layout of ductwork and accessories but do not show all required fittings and offsets that may be necessary to connect ducts to equipment, diffusers, grilles, etc., and to coordinate with other trades. Fabricate ductwork based on field measurements. Provide all necessary fittings and offsets at no additional cost to the Government. Coordinate with other trades for space available and relative location of HVAC equipment and accessories on ceiling grid. Duct sizes on the drawings are inside dimensions which shall be altered by Contractor to other dimensions with the same air handling characteristics where necessary to avoid interferences and clearance difficulties. 2.Provide duct transitions, offsets and connections to dampers, coils, and other equipment in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Section II. Provide streamliner, when an obstruction cannot be avoided and must be taken in by a duct. Repair galvanized areas with galvanizing repair compound. 3.Provide bolted construction and tierod reinforcement in accordance with SMACNA Standards. 4.Construct casings, eliminators, and pipe penetrations in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Chapter 9. Design casing access doors to swing against air pressure so that pressure helps to maintain a tight seal. C.Install duct hangers and supports in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Chapter 5. D.Install fire dampers, smoke dampers and combination fire/smoke dampers in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to conform to the installation used for the rating test. Install fire dampers, smoke dampers and combination fire/smoke dampers at locations indicated and where ducts penetrate fire rated and/or smoke rated walls, shafts and where required by the Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative (COTR). Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges per UL and NFPA. Demonstrate resetting of fire dampers and operation of smoke dampers to the COTR.E.Seal openings around duct penetrations of floors and fire rated partitions with fire stop material as required by NFPA 90A. F.Insulated flexible duct installation: Refer to SMACNA Standards, Chapter 3. Ducts shall be continuous, single pieces not over 1.5 m (5 feet) long (NFPA 90A), as straight and short as feasible, adequately supported. Centerline radius of bends shall be not less than two duct diameters. Make connections with clamps as recommended by SMACNA. Clamp per SMACNA with one clamp on the core duct and one on the insulation jacket. Insulated flexible ducts shall not penetrate floors, or any chase or partition designated as a fire or smoke barrier, including corridor partitions fire rated one hour or two hour. Support ducts SMACNA Standards. G.Where diffusers, registers and grilles cannot be installed to avoid seeing inside the duct, paint the inside of the duct with flat black paint to reduce visibility. H.Control Damper Installation: 1.Provide necessary blankoff plates required to install dampers that are smaller than duct size. Provide necessary transitions required to install dampers larger than duct size. 2.Assemble multiple sections dampers with required interconnecting linkage and extend required number of shafts through duct for external mounting of damper motors. 3.Provide necessary sheet metal baffle plates to eliminate stratification and provide air volumes specified. Locate baffles by experimentation, and affix and seal permanently in place, only after stratification problem has been eliminated. 4.Install all damper control/adjustment devices on stand-offs to allow complete coverage of insulation.I.Air Flow Measuring Devices (AFMD): Install units with minimum straight run distances, upstream and downstream as recommended by the manufacturer. J.Protection and Cleaning: Adequately protect equipment and materials against physical damage. Place equipment in first class operating condition, or return to source of supply for repair or replacement, as determined by COTR. Protect equipment and ducts during construction against entry of foreign matter to the inside and clean both inside and outside before operation and painting. When new ducts are connected to existing ductwork, clean both new and existing ductwork by mopping and vacuum cleaning inside and outside before operation. 3.2 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTS AND REPAIR A.Ductwork leakage testing shall be performed by the Testing and Balancing Contractor directly contracted by the General Contractor and independent of the Sheet Metal Contractor.B.Ductwork leakage testing shall be performed for the entire air distribution system (including all supply, return, and exhaust ductwork), section by section, including fans, coils and filter sections. C.Test procedure, apparatus and report shall conform to SMACNA Leakage Test manual. The maximum leakage rate allowed is 4 percent of the design air flow rate.D.All ductwork shall be leak tested first before enclosed in a shaft or covered in other inaccessible areas.E.All tests shall be performed in the presence of the COTR and the Test and Balance agency. The Test and Balance agency shall measure and record duct leakage and report to the COTR and identify leakage source with excessive leakage.F.If any portion of the duct system tested fails to meet the permissible leakage level, the Contractor shall rectify sealing of ductwork to bring it into compliance and shall retest it until acceptable leakage is demonstrated to the COTR.G.All tests and necessary repairs shall be completed prior to insulation or concealment of ductwork.H.Make sure all openings used for testing flow and temperatures by TAB Contractor are sealed properly.3.3 ductwork exposed to wind velocity Provide additional support and bracing to all exposed ductwork installed on the roof or outside the building to withstand wind velocity of__145__km/h (_90_mph). 3.4 testing, adjusting and balancing (tab)Refer to Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, and BALANCING FOR HVAC.3.5 operating and performance testsRefer to Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC. E N D SECTION 23 36 00AIR TERMINAL UNITSPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION Air terminal units, air flow control valves.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS: Seismic restraints for equipment.B.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC: General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division 23.C.Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT: Noise requirements.D.Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS: Ducts and flexible connectors.E.Section 23 09 23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC: Valve operators.F.Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC: Flow rates adjusting and balancing.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE Refer to Paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Air Terminal Units: Submit test data. 2.Air flow control valves. C.Certificates: pliance with paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE. pliance with specified standards. D.Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit in accordance with paragraph, INSTRUCTIONS, in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI)/(ARI): 88008Air Terminals Addendum to ARI 888-98 incorporated into standard posted 15th December 2002C.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):90A-09Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating SystemsD.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 18108Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors E.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): C 665-06Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing 1.6 GUARANTY In accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 General A.Labeling: Control box shall be clearly marked with an identification label that lists such information as nominal CFM, maximum and minimum factory-set airflow limits, coil type and coil connection orientation, where applicable.B.Factory calibrate air terminal units to air flow rate indicated. All settings including maximum and minimum air flow shall be field adjustable.C.Dampers with internal air volume control: See section 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS and CASINGS.D.Terminal Sound Attenuators: See Section 23 31 00 (HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS). 2.2 AIR TERMINAL UNITS (BOXES) A.General: Factory built, pressure independent units, factory setfield adjustable air flow rate, suitable for dual duct applications. Clearly show on each unit the unit number and factory set air volumes corresponding to the contract drawings. Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC work assumes factory set air volumes. Coordinate flow controller sequence and damper operation details with the drawings and Section 23 09 23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC. All air terminal units shall be brand new products of the same manufacturer.B.Capacity and Performance: The Maximum Capacity of a dual duct terminal unit shall not exceed 566 Liters/second (1,200 CFM.) C.Sound Power Levels: Acoustic performance of the air terminal units shall be based on the design noise levels for the spaces stipulated in Section 23 05 41 (Noise and Vibration Control for HVAC Piping and Equipment). Equipment schedule shall show the sound power levels in all octave bands. Terminal sound attenuators shall be provided, as required, to meet the intent of the design.D.Casing: Unit casing shall be constructed of galvanized steel no lighter than 0.85 mm (22 Gauge). Provide hanger brackets for attachment of supports. 1.Access panels (or doors): Provide panels large enough for inspection, adjustment and maintenance without disconnecting ducts, and for cleaning heating coils attached to unit, even if there are no moving parts. Panels shall be insulated to same standards as the rest of the casing and shall be secured and gasketed airtight. It shall require no tool other than a screwdriver to remove. 2.Total leakage from casing: Not to exceed 2 percent of the nominal capacity of the unit when subjected to a static pressure of 750 Pa (3 inch WG), with all outlets sealed shut and inlets fully open. 3.Octopus connector: Factory installed, lined air distribution terminal. Provide where flexible duct connections are shown on the drawings connected directly to terminals. Provide butterfly-balancing damper, with locking means in connectors with more than one outlet. Octopus connectors and flexible connectors are not permitted in the Surgical Suite. E.Construct dampers and other internal devices of corrosion resisting materials which do not require lubrication or other periodic maintenance. 1.Damper Leakage: Not greater than 2 percent of maximum rated capacity, when closed against inlet static pressure of 1 kPa (4 inch WG). F.Provide multi-point velocity pressure sensors with external pressure taps.1.Provide direct reading air flow rate table pasted to box.G.Provide static pressure tubes.H.Externally powered DDC variable air volume controller and damper actuator to be furnished under Section 23 09 23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC for factory mounting on air terminal units. The DDC controller shall be electrically actuated.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Work shall be installed as shown and according to the manufacturer’s diagrams and recommendations.B.Handle and install units in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. C.Support units rigidly so they remain stationary at all times. Crossbracing or other means of stiffening shall be provided as necessary. Method of support shall be such that distortion and malfunction of units cannot occur.D.Locate air terminal units to provide a straight section of inlet duct for proper functioning of volume controls. See VA Standard Detail. 3.2 OPERATIONAL TEST Refer to Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION. E N D SECTION 23 37 00AIR OUTLETS AND INLETSPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Air Outlets and Inlets: Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS: Seismic Reinforcing..B.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC: General Mechanical Requirements.C.Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT: Noise Level Requirements.D.Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC: Testing and Balancing of Air Flows.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Refer to article, QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC. B.Fire Safety Code: Comply with NFPA 90A. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES. B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1.Diffusers, registers, grilles and accessories. C.Coordination Drawings: Refer to article, SUBMITTALS, in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B.Air Diffusion Council Test Code: 1062 GRD-84Certification, Rating, and Test Manual 4th Edition C.American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):ASCE7-05Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures D.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A16799 (2009)Standard Specification for Stainless and HeatResisting ChromiumNickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip B20910Standard Specification for Aluminum and AluminumAlloy Sheet and PlateE.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 90A-12Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems F.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 18108UL Standard for Safety FactoryMade Air Ducts and ConnectorsPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTSRefer to Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC. 2.2 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS A.Materials: 1.Steel. Provide manufacturer's standard gasket. 2.Exposed Fastenings: The same material as the respective inlet or outlet. 3.Contractor shall review all ceiling drawings and details and provide all ceiling mounted devices with appropriate dimensions and trim for the specific locations.B.Performance Test Data: In accordance with Air Diffusion Council Code 1062GRD. Refer to Section 23 05 41, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT for NC criteria. C.Air Supply Outlets: 1.Ceiling Diffusers (Type D-1): Suitable for surface mounting, exposed Tbar or special tile ceilings, offwhite finish, square neck connection as shown on the drawings. Provide plaster frame for units in plaster ceilings. b.Square, louver face type: Square neck, removable core for 1, 2, 3, or 4 way directional pattern as indicated and fixed horizontal air pattern held tight to the ceiling. Provide equalizing or control grid, continuous gasket, and opposed blade damper. Frame suitable for mounting in the type of ceiling in which the diffuser is installed.D.Return and Exhaust Registers (Type R-1) and Grilles (Type G-1): Provide opposed blade damper without removable key operator for registers; provide without opposed blade damper for grilles: 1.Finish: Offwhite baked enamel. 2.Standard Type: Fixed vertical face bars set at 30 to 45 degrees, with deflecting vanes set on 20 mm (3/4 inch) centers, and approximately 30 mm (11/4 inch) margin. 3. Plaster frame.4. Continuous gasket.part 3 - execution3.1 INSTALLATION ply with provisions of Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC , particularly regarding coordination with other trades and work in existing buildings. B.Protection and Cleaning: Protect equipment and materials against physical damage. Place equipment in first class operating condition, or return to source of supply for repair or replacement, as determined by Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative. Protect equipment during construction against entry of foreign matter to the inside and clean both inside and outside before operation and painting. 3.2 testing, adjusting and balancing (tab)Refer to Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.3.3 operating and performance testsRefer to Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC. E N D SECTION 23 82 00CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITSPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION Radiant ceiling panels , unit heaters, cabinet unit heaters, convectors and finned-tube radiation1.2 RELATED WORKA.Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS: Seismic restraints for equipment.B.Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC: General mechanical requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division 23.C.Section 23 05 41, NOISE and VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING and EQUIPMENT: Noise requirements.D.Section 23 21 13, HYDRONIC PIPING: Heating hot water and chilled water piping.E.Section 23 31 00, HVAC DUCTS and CASINGS: Ducts and flexible connectors.F.Section 23 09 23, DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC: Valve operators.G.Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, and BALANCING FOR HVAC: Flow rates adjusting and balancing.1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE Refer to Paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES.B.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Finnedtube radiation. C.Certificates: pliance with paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE. pliance with specified standards. D.Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit in accordance with paragraph, INSTRUCTIONS, in Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):90A-12Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems70-11National Electrical Code C.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 18113Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors 199511Heating and Cooling Equipment 1.6 GUARANTY In accordance with FAR clause 52.246-21 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.7 FINNEDTUBE RADIATION A.Ratings: Certified under the I=B=R program of the Gas Appliance Manufacturer’s Association.B.Enclosures: 1.6 mm (l6 gage) steel, sloping top, designed for wall mounting. Provide baked enamel finish in standard manufacturer's colors as selected by the Architect. End plates and corner pieces shall be dieformed with round edges and fit flush with enclosure surface. Where continuous walltowall installations are shown on the drawings provide all fillers, corner fittings, sleeves, end caps and other accessories, which shall have the same profile as the basic unit. Provide access panels or extensions where required for access to valves, or traps shown on the drawings.C.Hydronic Heating Elements: Steel pipe or nonferrous tubing with fins mechanically bonded by mechanical expansion of the tube. Elements shall be positively positioned fronttoback with provisions for silent horizontal expansion and contraction. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Work shall be installed as shown and according to the manufacturer’s diagrams and recommendations.B.Handle and install units in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. C.Support units rigidly so they remain stationary at all times. Crossbracing or other means of stiffening shall be provided as necessary. Method of support shall be such that distortion and malfunction of units cannot occur.D.Install fiberglass blanket insulation with a minimum R value of 8 above hydronic radiant panels.3.2 OPERATIONAL TEST Refer to Section 23 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC.3.3 STARTup and testing Coordinate the startup and contractor testing schedules with the Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative. Provide a minimum of 7 days prior notice.3.4 demonstration and training A.Provide services of manufacturer’s technical representative for four hours to instruct VA personnel in operation and maintenance of units. E N D SECTION 26 05 11REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS PART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section applies to all sections of Division 26.B.Furnish and install electrical systems, materials, equipment, and accessories in accordance with the specifications and drawings. C.Conductor ampacities specified or shown on the drawings are based on copper conductors, with the conduit and raceways sized per NEC. Aluminum conductors are prohibited. 1.2 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTSA.The International Building Code (IBC), National Electrical Code (NEC), Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) codes and standards are the minimum requirements for materials and installation.B.The drawings and specifications shall govern in those instances where requirements are greater than those stated in the above codes and standards.1.3 TEST STANDARDSA.All materials and equipment shall be listed, labeled, or certified by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) to meet Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), standards where test standards have been established. Materials and equipment which are not covered by UL standards will be accepted, providing that materials and equipment are listed, labeled, certified or otherwise determined to meet the safety requirements of a NRTL. Materials and equipment which no NRTL accepts, certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe, will be considered if inspected or tested in accordance with national industrial standards, such as ANSI, NEMA, and NETA. Evidence of compliance shall include certified test reports and definitive shop drawings.B.Definitions:1.Listed: Materials and equipment included in a list published by an organization that is acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction and concerned with evaluation of products or services, that maintains periodic inspection of production or listed materials and equipment or periodic evaluation of services, and whose listing states that the materials and equipment either meets appropriate designated standards or has been tested and found suitable for a specified purpose.2.Labeled: Materials and equipment to which has been attached a label, symbol, or other identifying mark of an organization that is acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction and concerned with product evaluation, that maintains periodic inspection of production of labeled materials and equipment, and by whose labeling the manufacturer indicates compliance with appropriate standards or performance in a specified manner.3.Certified: Materials and equipment which:a.Have been tested and found by a NRTL to meet nationally recognized standards or to be safe for use in a specified manner.b.Are periodically inspected by a NRTL.c.Bear a label, tag, or other record of certification.4.Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory: Testing laboratory which is recognized and approved by the Secretary of Labor in accordance with OSHA regulations.1.4 QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES) A.Manufacturer’s Qualifications: The manufacturer shall regularly and currently produce, as one of the manufacturer's principal products, the materials and equipment specified for this project, and shall have manufactured the materials and equipment for at least three years.B.Product Qualification:1.Manufacturer's materials and equipment shall have been in satisfactory operation, on three installations of similar size and type as this project, for at least three years.2.The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a list of installations where the materials and equipment have been in operation before approval.C.Service Qualifications: There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or trained by the manufacturer which will render satisfactory service to this installation within eight hours of receipt of notification that service is needed. Submit name and address of service organizations.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.Applicable publications listed in all Sections of Division 26 are the latest issue, unless otherwise noted.B.Products specified in all sections of Division 26 shall comply with the applicable publications listed in each section.1.6 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTSA.Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items, and for which replacement parts shall be available.B.When more than one unit of the same class or type of materials and equipment is required, such units shall be the product of a single manufacturer.C.Equipment Assemblies and Components:ponents of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer.2.Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which include components made by others, shall assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit.ponents shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the intended service.4.Constituent parts which are similar shall be the product of a single manufacturer.D.Factory wiring and terminals shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on all wiring diagrams.E.When Factory Testing Is Specified:1.The Government shall have the option of witnessing factory tests. The Contractor shall notify the Government through the COTR a minimum of 15 working days prior to the manufacturer’s performing the factory tests.2.Four copies of certified test reports shall be furnished to the COTR two weeks prior to final inspection and not more than 90 days after completion of the tests.3.When materials and equipment fail factory tests, and re-testing and re-inspection is required, the Contractor shall be liable for all additional expenses for the Government to witness re-testing.1.7 variations from contract requirementsA.Where the Government or the Contractor requests variations from the contract requirements, the connecting work and related components shall include, but not be limited to additions or changes to branch circuits, circuit protective devices, conduits, wire, feeders, controls, panels and installation methods.1.8 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PROTECTIONA.Materials and equipment shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical damage, vermin, dirt, corrosive substances, fumes, moisture, cold and rain.1.Store materials and equipment indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. 2.During installation, equipment shall be protected against entry of foreign matter, and be vacuum-cleaned both inside and outside before testing and operating. Compressed air shall not be used to clean equipment. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside equipment.3.Damaged equipment shall be repaired or replaced, as determined by the COTR.4.Painted surfaces shall be protected with factory installed removable heavy kraft paper, sheet vinyl or equal.5.Damaged paint on equipment shall be refinished with the same quality of paint and workmanship as used by the manufacturer so repaired areas are not obvious.1.9 WORK PERFORMANCEA.All electrical work shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC), NFPA 70B, NFPA 70E, OSHA Part 1910 subpart J – General Environmental Controls, OSHA Part 1910 subpart K – Medical and First Aid, and OSHA Part 1910 subpart S – Electrical, in addition to other references required by contract.B.Job site safety and worker safety is the responsibility of the Contractor.C.Electrical work shall be accomplished with all affected circuits or equipment de-energized. When an electrical outage cannot be accomplished in this manner for the required work, the following requirements are mandatory:1.Electricians must use full protective equipment (i.e., certified and tested insulating material to cover exposed energized electrical components, certified and tested insulated tools, etc.) while working on energized systems in accordance with NFPA 70E.2.Before initiating any work, a job specific work plan must be developed by the Contractor with a peer review conducted and documented by the COTR and Medical Center staff. The work plan must include procedures to be used on and near the live electrical equipment, barriers to be installed, safety equipment to be used, and exit pathways.3.Work on energized circuits or equipment cannot begin until prior written approval is obtained from the COTR.D.For work that affects existing electrical systems, arrange, phase and perform work to assure minimal interference with normal functioning of the facility. Refer to Article OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS under Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.E.New work shall be installed and connected to existing work neatly, safely and professionally. Disturbed or damaged work shall be replaced or repaired to its prior conditions, as required by Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.F.Coordinate location of equipment and conduit with other trades to minimize interference.1.10 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTSA.Equipment location shall be as close as practical to locations shown on the drawings.B.Working clearances shall not be less than specified in the NEC.C.Inaccessible Equipment:1.Where the Government determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not readily accessible for operation and maintenance, the equipment shall be removed and reinstalled as directed at no additional cost to the Government.2."Readily accessible” is defined as being capable of being reached quickly for operation, maintenance, or inspections without the use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as, but not limited to, motors, pumps, belt guards, transformers, piping, ductwork, conduit and raceways.1.11 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATIONA.In addition to the requirements of the NEC, install an identification sign which clearly indicates information required for use and maintenance of items such as panelboards, cabinets, motor controllers, fused and non-fused safety switches, separately enclosed circuit breakers, and motor control assemblies, control devices and other significant equipment.B.Identification signs for Normal Power System equipment shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core with engraved lettering. Identification signs for Essential Electrical System (EES) equipment, as defined in the NEC, shall be laminated red phenolic resin with a white core with engraved lettering. Lettering shall be a minimum of 12 mm (1/2 inch) high. Identification signs shall indicate equipment designation, rated bus amperage, voltage, number of phases, number of wires, and type of EES power branch as applicable. Secure nameplates with screws.C.Install adhesive arc flash warning labels on all equipment as required by NFPA 70E. Label shall indicate the arc hazard boundary (inches), working distance (inches), arc flash incident energy at the working distance (calories/cm2), required PPE category and description including the glove rating, voltage rating of the equipment, limited approach distance (inches), restricted approach distance (inches), prohibited approach distance (inches), equipment/bus name, date prepared, and manufacturer name and address.1.12 SUBMITTALSA.Submit to the COTR in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B.The Government's approval shall be obtained for all materials and equipment before delivery to the job site. Delivery, storage or installation of materials and equipment which has not had prior approval will not be permitted.C.All submittals shall include six copies of adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings, test reports, certifications, samples, and other data necessary for the Government to ascertain that the proposed materials and equipment comply with drawing and specification requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for approval shall be legible and clearly identify specific materials and equipment being submitted.D.Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies which consist of more than one item or component shall be made for the system or assembly as a whole. Partial submittals will not be considered for approval.1.Mark the submittals, "SUBMITTED UNDER SECTION__________________".2.Submittals shall be marked to show specification reference including the section and paragraph numbers.3.Submit each section separately.E.The submittals shall include the following:rmation that confirms compliance with contract requirements. Include the manufacturer's name, model or catalog numbers, catalog information, technical data sheets, shop drawings, manuals, pictures, nameplate data, and test reports as required.3.Elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams for communication and signal systems, control systems, and equipment assemblies. All terminal points and wiring shall be identified on wiring diagrams.4.Parts list which shall include information for replacement parts and ordering instructions, as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.F.Maintenance and Operation Manuals: 1.Submit as required for systems and equipment specified in the technical sections. Furnish in hardcover binders or an approved equivalent.2.Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words "MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUAL," the name and location of the system, material, equipment, building, name of Contractor, and contract name and number. Include in the manual the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing the system or equipment and the local representatives for the material or equipment.3.Provide a table of contents and assemble the manual to conform to the table of contents, with tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.4.The manuals shall include:a.Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of the equipment.b.A control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown.c.Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.d.Installation instructions.e.Safety precautions for operation and maintenance.f.Diagrams and illustrations.g.Periodic maintenance and testing procedures and frequencies, including replacement parts numbers.h.Performance data.i.Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers. Emphasis shall be placed on the use of special tools and instruments. The list shall indicate sources of supply, recommended spare and replacement parts, and name of servicing organization.j.List of factory approved or qualified permanent servicing organizations for equipment repair and periodic testing and maintenance, including addresses and factory certification qualifications.G.Approvals will be based on complete submission of shop drawings, manuals, test reports, certifications, and samples as applicable.H.After approval and prior to installation, furnish the COTR with one sample of each of the following:1.A minimum 300 mm (12 inches) length of each type and size of wire and cable along with the tag from the coils or reels from which the sample was taken. The length of the sample shall be sufficient to show all markings provided by the manufacturer.2.Each type of conduit coupling, bushing, and termination fitting. 3.Conduit hangers, clamps, and supports. 4.Duct sealing compound. 5.Each type of receptacle, toggle switch, lighting control sensor, outlet box, manual motor starter, device wall plate, engraved nameplate, wire and cable splicing and terminating material, and branch circuit single pole molded case circuit breaker.1.13 SINGULAR NUMBER A.Where any device or part of equipment is referred to in these specifications in the singular number (e.g., "the switch"), this reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation as shown on the drawings.1.14 Acceptance Checks and TestsA.The Contractor shall furnish the instruments, materials, and labor for tests.B.Where systems are comprised of components specified in more than one section of Division 26, the Contractor shall coordinate the installation, testing, and adjustment of all components between various manufacturer’s representatives and technicians so that a complete, functional, and operational system is delivered to the Government.C.When test results indicate any defects, the Contractor shall repair or replace the defective materials or equipment, and repeat the tests. Repair, replacement, and retesting shall be accomplished at no additional cost to the Government.1.15 WARRANTYA.All work performed and all equipment and material furnished under this Division shall be free from defects and shall remain so for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the entire installation by the Contracting Officer for the Government.1.16 instructionA.Instruction to designated Government personnel shall be provided for the particular equipment or system as required in each associated technical specification section.B.Furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the specified equipment and system, including pertinent safety requirements. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the installation, and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance procedures.C.A training schedule shall be developed and submitted by the Contractor and approved by the COTR at least 30 days prior to the planned training.---END---SECTION 26 05 19LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLESPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies the furnishing, installation, connection, and testing of the electrical conductors and cables for use in electrical systems rated 600 V and below, indicated as cable(s), conductor(s), wire, or wiring in this section.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING: Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of fire-resistant rated construction.B.Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: Requirements that apply to all sections of Division 26.C.Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.D.Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduits for conductors and cables.1.3 qualITY ASSURANCEA.Refer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES), in Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.1.4 FACTORY TESTSA.Conductors and cables shall be thoroughly tested at the factory per NEMA to ensure that there are no electrical defects. Factory tests shall be certified. 1.5 SUBMITTALSA.Submit six copies of the following in accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.1.Shop Drawings:a.Submit sufficient information to demonstrate compliance with drawings and specifications.b.Submit the following data for approval:1)Electrical ratings and insulation type for each conductor and cable.2)Splicing materials and pulling lubricant.2.Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit the following. a.Certification by the manufacturer that the conductors and cables conform to the requirements of the drawings and specifications.b.Certification by the Contractor that the conductors and cables have been properly installed, adjusted, and tested.1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are reference in the text by designation only.B.American Society of Testing Material (ASTM):D2301-10Standard Specification for Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating TapeD2304-10Test Method for Thermal Endurance of Rigid Electrical Insulating MaterialsD3005-10Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating TapeC.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):WC 70-09Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical EnergyD.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):70-11National Electrical Code (NEC)E.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):44-10Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables83-08Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables467-07Grounding and Bonding Equipment486A-486B-03Wire Connectors486C-04Splicing Wire Connectors486D-05Sealed Wire Connector Systems486E-09Equipment Wiring Terminals for Use with Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors514B-04Conduit, Tubing, and Cable FittingsPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 conductors and CABLESA.Conductors and cables shall be in accordance with NEMA, UL, as specified herein, and as shown on the drawings.B.All conductors shall be copper.C.Single Conductor and Cable:1.No. 12 AWG: Minimum size, except where smaller sizes are specified herein or shown on the drawings.2.No. 8 AWG and larger: Stranded.3.No. 10 AWG and smaller: Solid; except shall be stranded for final connection to motors, transformers, and vibrating equipment.4.Insulation: THHN-THWN and XHHW-2. XHHW-2 shall be used for isolated power systems.D.Color Code:1.No. 10 AWG and smaller: Solid color insulation or solid color coating.2.No. 8 AWG and larger: Color-coded using one of the following methods:a.Solid color insulation or solid color coating.b.Stripes, bands, or hash marks of color specified.c.Color using 19 mm (0.75 inches) wide tape. 4.For modifications and additions to existing wiring systems, color coding shall conform to the existing wiring system.5.Conductors shall be color-coded as follows:208/120 VPhase480/277 VBlackABrownRedBOrangeBlueCYellowWhiteNeutralGray ** or white with colored (other than green) tracer.6.Lighting circuit “switch legs”, and 3-way and 4-way switch “traveling wires,” shall have color coding that is unique and distinct (e.g., pink and purple) from the color coding indicated above. The unique color codes shall be solid and in accordance with the NEC. Coordinate color coding in the field with the COTR.7.Color code for isolated power system wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC.2.2 SPLICESA.Splices shall be in accordance with NEC and UL.B.Above Ground Splices for No. 10 AWG and Smaller:1.Solderless, screwon, reusable pressure cable type, with integral insulation, approved for copper and aluminum conductors.2.The integral insulator shall have a skirt to completely cover the stripped conductors.3.The number, size, and combination of conductors used with the connector, as listed on the manufacturer's packaging, shall be strictly followed.C.Above Ground Splices for No. 8 AWG to No. 4/0 AWG:pression, hex screw, or bolt clamptype of high conductivity and corrosionresistant material, listed for use with copper and aluminum conductors.2.Insulate with materials approved for the particular use, location, voltage, and temperature. Insulation level shall be not less than the insulation level of the conductors being joined.3.Splice and insulation shall be product of the same manufacturer.4.All bolts, nuts, and washers used with splices shall be zinc-platedsteel.D.Above Ground Splices for 250 kcmil and Larger:1.Long barrel “butt-splice” or “sleeve” type compression connectors, with minimum of two compression indents per wire, listed for use with copper and aluminum conductors.2.Insulate with materials approved for the particular use, location, voltage, and temperature. Insulation level shall be not less than the insulation level of the conductors being joined.3.Splice and insulation shall be product of the same manufacturer.2.3 CONNECTORS and terminationsA.Mechanical type of high conductivity and corrosionresistant material, listed for use with copper and aluminum conductors.B.Long barrel compression type of high conductivity and corrosionresistant material, with minimum of two compression indents per wire, listed for use with copper and aluminum conductors.C.All bolts, nuts, and washers used to connect connections and terminations to bus bars or other termination points shall be zinc-plated steel.2.4 CONTROL WIRINGA.Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in these specifications, control wiring shall be as specified herein, except that the minimum size shall be not less than No. 14 AWG.B.Control wiring shall be sized such that the voltage drop under in-rush conditions does not adversely affect operation of the controls.2.5 WIRE LUBRICATING COMPOUNDA.Lubricating compound shall be suitable for the wire insulation and conduit, and shall not harden or become adhesive.B.Shall not be used on conductors for isolated power systems.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAl A.Install conductors in accordance with the NEC, as specified, and as shown on the drawings.B.Install all conductors in raceway systems.C.Splice conductors only in outlet boxes, junction boxes, pullboxes, manholes, or handholes.D.Conductors of different systems (e.g., 120 V and 277 V) shall not be installed in the same raceway.E.Install cable supports for all vertical feeders in accordance with the NEC. Provide split wedge type which firmly clamps each individual cable and tightens due to cable weight.F.In panelboards, cabinets, wireways, switches, enclosures, and equipment assemblies, neatly form, train, and tie the conductors with non-metallic ties.G.For connections to motors, transformers, and vibrating equipment, stranded conductors shall be used only from the last fixed point of connection to the motors, transformers, or vibrating equipment.H.Use expanding foam or non-hardening duct-seal to seal conduits entering a building, after installation of conductors.I.Conductor and Cable Pulling:1.Provide installation equipment that will prevent the cutting or abrasion of insulation during pulling. Use lubricants approved for the cable.2.Use nonmetallic pull ropes.3.Attach pull ropes by means of either woven basket grips or pulling eyes attached directly to the conductors.4.All conductors in a single conduit shall be pulled simultaneously.5.Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.J.No more than three branch circuits shall be installed in any one conduit.K.When stripping stranded conductors, use a tool that does not damage the conductor or remove conductor strands.3.3 SPLICE and termination INSTALLATIONA.Splices and terminations shall be mechanically and electrically secure, and tightened to manufacturer’s published torque values using a torque screwdriver or wrench.B.Where the Government determines that unsatisfactory splices or terminations have been installed, replace the splices or terminations at no additional cost to the Government.3.4 conductor identificationA.When using colored tape to identify phase, neutral, and ground conductors larger than No. 8 AWG, apply tape in half-overlapping turns for a minimum of 75 mm (3 inches) from terminal points, and in junction boxes, and pullboxes. Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Where cable markings are covered by tape, apply tags to cable, stating size and insulation type.3.5 FEEDER conductor IDENTIFICATIONA.In each interior pullbox, install brass tags on all feeder conductors to clearly designate their circuit identification and voltage. The tags shall be the embossed type, 40 mm (1-1/2 inches) in diameter and 40 mils thick. Attach tags with plastic ties. 3.6 existIng conductorsA.Unless specifically indicated on the plans, existing conductors shall not be reused. 3.7 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATIONA.Unless otherwise specified in other sections, install control wiring and connect to equipment to perform the required functions as specified or as shown on the drawings. B.Install a separate power supply circuit for each system, except where otherwise shown on the drawings.3.8 CONTROL wiring IDENTIFICATIONA.Install a permanent wire marker on each wire at each termination.B.Identifying numbers and letters on the wire markers shall correspond to those on the wiring diagrams used for installing the systems.C.Wire markers shall retain their markings after cleaning.3.9 Acceptance Checks and Tests A.Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. In addition, include the following:1.Visual Inspection and Tests: Inspect physical condition.2.Electrical tests:a.After installation but before connection to utilization devices, such as fixtures, motors, or appliances, test conductors phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground resistance with an insulation resistance tester. Existing conductors to be reused shall also be tested. b.Applied voltage shall be 500 V DC for 300 V rated cable, and 1000 V DC for 600 V rated cable. Apply test for one minute or until reading is constant for 15 seconds, whichever is longer. Minimum insulation resistance values shall not be less than 25 megohms for 300 V rated cable and 100 megohms for 600 V rated cable.c.Perform phase rotation test on all three-phase circuits.---END---SECTION 26 05 26GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies the furnishing, installation, connection, and testing of grounding and bonding equipment, indicated as grounding equipment in this section. B.“Grounding electrode system” refers to grounding electrode conductors and all electrodes required or allowed by NEC, as well as made, supplementary, and lightning protection system grounding electrodes.C.The terms “connect” and “bond” are used interchangeably in this section and have the same meaning.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: Requirements that apply to all sections of Division 26. B.Section 26 05 19, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: Low-voltage conductors.C.Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduit and boxes.1.3 qualITY ASSURANCEA.Refer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES), in Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.1.4 SUBMITTALSA.Submit six copies of the following in accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.1.Shop Drawings:a.Submit sufficient information to demonstrate compliance with drawings and specifications.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by designation only. B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):B1-07Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper WireB3-07Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper WireB8-11Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or SoftC.Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):81-83IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System Part 1: Normal MeasurementsD.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-11National Electrical Code (NEC) 70E-12National Electrical Safety Code99-12Health Care FacilitiesE.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 44-10 ThermosetInsulated Wires and Cables83-08 ThermoplasticInsulated Wires and Cables467-07 Grounding and Bonding Equipment PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS A.Equipment grounding conductors shall be insulated stranded copper, except that sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid copper. Insulation color shall be continuous green for all equipment grounding conductors, except that wire sizes No. 4 AWG and larger shall be identified per NEC.B.Bonding conductors shall be bare stranded copper, except that sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be bare solid copper. Bonding conductors shall be stranded for final connection to motors, transformers, and vibrating equipment. C.Conductor sizes shall not be less than shown on the drawings, or not less than required by the NEC, whichever is greater.D.Insulation: THHN-THWN and XHHW-2. XHHW-2 shall be used for isolated power systems.2.2 ground connectionsA.Above Grade:1.Bonding Jumpers: Listed for use with aluminum and copper conductors. For wire sizes No. 8 AWG and larger, use compression-type connectors. For wire sizes smaller than No. 8 AWG, use mechanical type lugs. Connectors or lugs shall use zinc-plated steel bolts, nuts, and washers. Bolts shall be torqued to the values recommended by the manufacturer.2.Connection to Building Steel: Exothermic-welded type connectors.3.Connection to Grounding Bus Bars: Listed for use with aluminum and copper conductors. Use mechanical type lugs, with zinc-plated steel bolts, nuts, and washers. Bolts shall be torqued to the values recommended by the manufacturer.4.Connection to Equipment Rack and Cabinet Ground Bars: Listed for use with aluminum and copper conductors. Use mechanical type lugs, with zinc-plated steel bolts, nuts, and washers. Bolts shall be torqued to the values recommended by the manufacturer.2.3 equipment rack and cabinet ground barsA.Provide solid copper ground bars designed for mounting on the framework of open or cabinet-enclosed equipment racks. Ground bars shall have minimum dimensions of 6.3 mm (0.25 inch) thick x 19 mm (0.75 inch) wide, with length as required or as shown on the drawings. Provide insulators and mounting brackets.2.4 ground terminal blocksA.At any equipment mounting location (e.g., backboards and hinged cover enclosures) where rack-type ground bars cannot be mounted, provide mechanical type lugs, with zinc-plated steel bolts, nuts, and washers. Bolts shall be torqued to the values recommended by the manufacturer.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A.Install grounding equipment in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as specified herein. B.System Grounding: 1.Secondary service neutrals: Ground at the supply side of the secondary disconnecting means and at the related transformer. 2.Separately derived systems (transformers downstream from the service entrance): Ground the secondary neutral. C.Equipment Grounding: Metallic piping, building structural steel, electrical enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, and other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits, shall be bonded and grounded. D.For patient care area electrical power system grounding, conform to NFPA 99 and NEC. 3.2 INACCESSIBLE GROUNDING CONNECTIONSA.Make grounding connections, which are normally buried or otherwise inaccessible, by exothermic weld.3.5 raceway A.Conduit Systems:1.Ground all metallic conduit systems. All metallic conduit systems shall contain an equipment grounding conductor. 2.Nonmetallic conduit systems, except non-metallic feeder conduits that carry a grounded conductor from exterior transformers to interior or building-mounted service entrance equipment, shall contain an equipment grounding conductor.3.Metallic conduit that only contains a grounding conductor, and is provided for its mechanical protection, shall be bonded to that conductor at the entrance and exit from the conduit.4.Metallic conduits which terminate without mechanical connection to an electrical equipment housing by means of locknut and bushings or adapters, shall be provided with grounding bushings. Connect bushings with a equipment grounding conductor to the equipment ground bus.B.Feeders and Branch Circuits: Install equipment grounding conductors with all feeders, and power and lighting branch circuits. C.Boxes, Cabinets, Enclosures, and Panelboards: 1.Bond the equipment grounding conductor to each pullbox, junction box, outlet box, device box, cabinets, and other enclosures through which the conductor passes (except for special grounding systems for intensive care units and other critical units shown). 2.Provide lugs in each box and enclosure for equipment grounding conductor termination.D.Wireway Systems:1.Bond the metallic structures of wireway to provide electrical continuity throughout the wireway system, by connecting a No. 6 AWG bonding jumper at all intermediate metallic enclosures and across all section junctions.2.Install insulated No. 6 AWG bonding jumpers between the wireway system, bonded as required above, and the closest building ground at each end and approximately every 16 M (50 feet).3.Use insulated No. 6 AWG bonding jumpers to ground or bond metallic wireway at each end for all intermediate metallic enclosures and across all section junctions.4.Use insulated No. 6 AWG bonding jumpers to ground cable tray to column-mounted building ground plates (pads) at each end and approximately every 15 M (49 feet).E.Receptacles shall not be grounded through their mounting screws. Ground receptacles with a jumper from the receptacle green ground terminal to the device box ground screw and a jumper to the branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. F.Ground lighting fixtures to the equipment grounding conductor of the wiring system. Fixtures connected with flexible conduit shall have a green ground wire included with the power wires from the fixture through the flexible conduit to the first outlet box. G.Fixed electrical appliances and equipment shall be provided with a ground lug for termination of the equipment grounding conductor. 3.6 corrosion inhibitorsA.When making grounding and bonding connections, apply a corrosion inhibitor to all contact surfaces. Use corrosion inhibitor appropriate for protecting a connection between the metals used.3.7 CONDUCTIVE PIPING A.Bond all conductive piping systems, interior and exterior, to the grounding electrode system. Bonding connections shall be made as close as practical to the equipment ground bus. B.In operating rooms and at intensive care and coronary care type beds, bond the medical gas piping and medical vacuum piping at the outlets directly to the patient ground bus. ---END---SECTION 26 05 33RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMSPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of conduit, fittings, and boxes, to form complete, coordinated, grounded raceway systems. Raceways are required for all wiring unless shown or specified otherwise.B.Definitions: The term conduit, as used in this specification, shall mean any or all of the raceway types specified.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING: Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of fire rated construction.B.Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS: Sealing around conduit penetrations through the building envelope to prevent moisture migration into the building.C.Section 09 91 00, PAINTING: Identification and painting of conduit and other devices.D.Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one section of Division 26.E.Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.1.3 qualITY ASSURANCERefer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS, in Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.1.4 SUBMITTALSIn accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS, submit the following:A.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Showing each cable type and rating. The specific item proposed and its area of application shall be identified on the catalog cuts.B.Shop Drawings:1.Size and location of main feeders.2.Size and location of panels and pull-boxes.3.Layout of required conduit penetrations through structural elements.C.Certifications: 1.Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the following certifications to the COTR: a.Certification by the manufacturer that the material conforms to the requirements of the drawings and specifications. b.Certification by the contractor that the material has been properly installed. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by designation only.B.American National Standards Institute (ANSI):C80.1-05Electrical Rigid Steel ConduitC80.3-05Steel Electrical Metal TubingC80.6-05Electrical Intermediate Metal ConduitC.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):70-08National Electrical Code (NEC)D.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):1-05Flexible Metal Conduit 5-04Surface Metal Raceway and Fittings6-07Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel50-95Enclosures for Electrical Equipment360-093Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit467-07Grounding and Bonding Equipment514A-04Metallic Outlet Boxes514B-04Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings514C-96Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes and Covers 651-05Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings651A-00Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit797-07Electrical Metallic Tubing1242-06Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit - SteelE.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):TC-2-03Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and ConduitTC-3-04PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and TubingFB1-07Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing and CablePART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALA.Conduit Size: In accordance with the NEC, but not less than 0.5 in [13 mm] unless otherwise shown. Where permitted by the NEC, 0.5 in [13 mm] flexible conduit may be used for tap connections to recessed lighting fixtures.B.Conduit: 1.Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Shall conform to UL 797 and ANSI C80.3. Maximum size not to exceed 4 in [105 mm] and shall be permitted only with cable rated 600 V or less.2.Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit: Shall conform to UL 360.3.Surface metal raceway: Shall conform to UL 5.C.Conduit Fittings: 1.Electrical metallic tubing fittings: a.Fittings and conduit bodies shall meet the requirements of UL 514B, ANSI C80.3, and NEMA FB1.b.Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.c.Setscrew couplings and connectors: Use setscrews of case-hardened steel with hex head and cup point, to firmly seat in wall of conduit for positive grounding.d.Indent-type connectors or couplings are prohibited.e.Die-cast or pressure-cast zinc-alloy fittings or fittings made of "pot metal" are prohibited.4.Flexible steel conduit fittings:a.Conform to UL 514B. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.b.Clamp-type, with insulated throat.5.Liquidtight flexible metal conduit fittings:a.Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and NEMA FB1.b.Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.c.Fittings must incorporate a threaded grounding cone, a steel or plastic compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Connectors shall have insulated throats.6.Surface metal raceway fittings: As recommended by the raceway manufacturer. Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, conduit entry fittings, accessories, and other fittings as required for complete system.7.Expansion and deflection couplings:a.Conform to UL 467 and UL 514B.b.Accommodate a 0.75 in [19 mm] deflection, expansion, or contraction in any direction, and allow 30 degree angular deflections.c.Include internal flexible metal braid, sized to guarantee conduit ground continuity and a low-impedance path for fault currents, in accordance with UL 467 and the NEC tables for equipment grounding conductors.d.Jacket: Flexible, corrosionresistant, watertight, moisture and heat-resistant molded rubber material with stainless steel jacket clamps.D.Conduit Supports:1.Parts and hardware: Zinccoat or provide equivalent corrosion protection.2.Individual Conduit Hangers: Designed for the purpose, having a preassembled closure bolt and nut, and provisions for receiving a hanger rod.3.Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers: Not less than 1.5 x 1.5 in [38 mm x 38 mm], 12-gauge steel, cold-formed, lipped channels; with not less than 0.375 in [9 mm] diameter steel hanger rods.4.Solid Masonry and Concrete Anchors: Selfdrilling expansion shields, or machine bolt expansion.E.Outlet, Junction, and Pull Boxes:1.UL-50 and UL-514A.2.Cast metal where required by the NEC or shown, and equipped with rustproof boxes.3.Sheet metal boxes: Galvanized steel, except where otherwise shown.4.Flush-mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with raised covers so that the front face of raised cover is flush with the wall. Surface-mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with surface-style flat or raised covers.Wireways: Equip with hinged covers, except where removable covers are shown. Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for a complete system.PART 3 EXECUTION3.1 PENETRATIONSA.Cutting or Holes:1.Cut holes in advance where they should be placed in the structural elements, such as ribs or beams. Obtain the approval of the COTR prior to drilling through structural elements.2.Cut holes through concrete and masonry in new and existing structures with a diamond core drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammers, impact electric, hand, or manual hammer-type drills are not allowed, except where permitted by the COTR as required by limited working space.B.Firestop: Where conduits, wireways, and other electrical raceways pass through fire partitions, fire walls, smoke partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases as specified in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.C.Waterproofing: At floor, exterior wall, and roof conduit penetrations, completely seal clearances around the conduit and make watertight, as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERALA.In accordance with UL, NEC, as shown, and as specified herein.B.Essential (Emergency) raceway systems shall be entirely independent of other raceway systems, except where shown on drawings.C.Install conduit as follows:1.In complete mechanically and electrically continuous runs before pulling in cables or wires.2.Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein, installation of all conduits shall be concealed within finished walls, floors, and ceilings. 3.Flattened, dented, or deformed conduit is not permitted. Remove and replace the damaged conduits with new undamaged material.4.Assure conduit installation does not encroach into the ceiling height head room, walkways, or doorways.5.Cut square, ream, remove burrs, and draw up tight.6.Independently support conduit at 8 ft [2.4 M] on centers. Do not use other supports, i.e., suspended ceilings, suspended ceiling supporting members, lighting fixtures, conduits, mechanical piping, or mechanical ducts.7.Support within 12 in [300 mm] of changes of direction, and within 12 in [300 mm] of each enclosure to which connected.8.Close ends of empty conduit with plugs or caps at the roughin stage until wires are pulled in, to prevent entry of debris.9.Conduit installations under fume and vent hoods are prohibited.10.Secure conduits to cabinets, junction boxes, pull-boxes, and outlet boxes with bonding type locknuts. For rigid and IMC conduit installations, provide a locknut on the inside of the enclosure, made up wrench tight. Do not make conduit connections to junction box covers.11.Conduit bodies shall only be used for changes in direction, and shall not contain splices.D.Conduit Bends:1.Make bends with standard conduit bending machines.2.Conduit hickey may be used for slight offsets and for straightening stubbed out conduits.3.Bending of conduits with a pipe tee or vise is prohibited.E.Layout and Homeruns:1.Install conduit with wiring, including homeruns, as shown on drawings.2.Deviations: Make only where necessary to avoid interferences and only after drawings showing the proposed deviations have been submitted approved by the COTR.3.3 CONCEALED WORK INSTALLATION A.Above Furred or Suspended Ceilings and in Walls:1.Conduit for conductors 600 V and below: EMT. Mixing different types of conduits indiscriminately in the same system is prohibited.2.Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.3.Connect recessed lighting fixtures to conduit runs with maximum 6 ft [1.8 M] of flexible metal conduit extending from a junction box to the fixture.4.Tightening setscrews with pliers is prohibited.3.4 EXPOSED WORK INSTALLATIONA.Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, exposed conduit is only permitted in mechanical and electrical rooms.B.Conduit for Conductors 600 V and Below: EMT. Mixing different types of conduits indiscriminately in the system is prohibited.C.Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.D.Install horizontal runs close to the ceiling or beams and secure with conduit straps.E.Support horizontal or vertical runs at not over 8 ft [2.4 M] intervals.F.Surface metal raceways: Use only where shown.G.Painting:1.Paint exposed conduit as specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.2.Paint all conduits containing cables rated over 600 V safety orange. Refer to Section 09 91 00, PAINTING for preparation, paint type, and exact color. In addition, paint legends, using 2 in [50 mm] high black numerals and letters, showing the cable voltage rating. Provide legends where conduits pass through walls and floors and at maximum 20ft [6 M] intervals in between.3.5 MOTORS AND VIBRATING EQUIPMENTA.Use flexible metal conduit for connections to motors and other electrical equipment subject to movement, vibration, misalignment, cramped quarters, or noise transmission. 3.6 EXPANSION JOINTSA.Conduits 3 in [75 mm] and larger that are secured to the building structure on opposite sides of a building expansion joint require expansion and deflection couplings. Install the couplings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.B.Provide conduits smaller than 3 in [75 mm] with junction boxes on both sides of the expansion joint. Connect conduits to junction boxes with sufficient slack of flexible conduit to produce 5 in [125 mm] vertical drop midway between the ends. Flexible conduit shall have a bonding jumper installed. In lieu of this flexible conduit, expansion and deflection couplings as specified above for conduits 15 in [375 mm] and larger are acceptable.C.Install expansion and deflection couplings where shown.3.7 CONDUIT SUPPORTS, INSTALLATION A.Safe working load shall not exceed one-quarter of proof test load of fastening devices.B.Use pipe straps or individual conduit hangers for supporting individual conduits.C.Support multiple conduit runs with trapeze hangers. Use trapeze hangers that are designed to support a load equal to or greater than the sum of the weights of the conduits, wires, hanger itself, and 200 lbs [90 kg]. Attach each conduit with Ubolts or other approved fasteners.D.Support conduit independently of junction boxes, pull-boxes, fixtures, suspended ceiling Tbars, angle supports, and similar items.E.Fasteners and Supports in Solid Masonry and Concrete:1.New Construction: Use steel or malleable iron concrete inserts set in place prior to placing the concrete.2.Existing Construction:a.Steel expansion anchors not less than 0.25 in [6 mm] bolt size and not less than 1.125 in [28 mm] embedment.b.Power set fasteners not less than 0.25 in [6 mm] diameter with depth of penetration not less than 3 in [75 mm].c.Use vibration and shock-resistant anchors and fasteners for attaching to concrete ceilings.F.Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts. G.Bolts supported only by plaster or gypsum wallboard are not acceptable.H.Metal Structures: Use machine screw fasteners or other devices specifically designed and approved for the application.I.Attachment by wood plugs, rawl plug, plastic, lead or soft metal anchors, or wood blocking and bolts supported only by plaster is prohibited.J.Chain, wire, or perforated strap shall not be used to support or fasten conduit.K.Spring steel type supports or fasteners are prohibited for all uses except horizontal and vertical supports/fasteners within walls.L.Vertical Supports: Vertical conduit runs shall have riser clamps and supports in accordance with the NEC and as shown. Provide supports for cable and wire with fittings that include internal wedges and retaining collars.3.8 BOX INSTALLATION A.Boxes for Concealed Conduits:1.Flush-mounted.2.Provide raised covers for boxes to suit the wall or ceiling, construction, and finish.B.In addition to boxes shown, install additional boxes where needed to prevent damage to cables and wires during pulling-in operations. C.Remove only knockouts as required and plug unused openings. Use threaded plugs for cast metal boxes and snapin metal covers for sheet metal boxes.D.Outlet boxes mounted backtoback in the same wall are prohibited. A minimum 24 in [600 mm] center-to-center lateral spacing shall be maintained between boxes. E.Minimum size of outlet boxes for ground fault interrupter (GFI) receptacles is 4 in [100 mm] square x 2.125 in [55 mm] deep, with device covers for the wall material and thickness involved.F.Stencil or install phenolic nameplates on covers of the boxes identified on riser diagrams; for example "SIGFA JB No. 1." G.On all branch circuit junction box covers, identify the circuits with black marker. E N D SECTION 26 09 23LIGHTING CONTROLSPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTIONThis section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of the lighting controls. 1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General requirements that are common to more than one section of Division 26. B.Section 26 05 19, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and wiring. C.Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground fault currents. D.Section 26 27 26, WIRING DEVICES: Wiring devices used for control of the lighting systems.1.3 qualITY ASSURANCERefer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS, in Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.1.4 SUBMITTALSA.In accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS, submit the following: B.Product Data: For each type of lighting control, submit the following information.1.Manufacturer’s catalog data.2.Wiring schematic and connection diagram.3.Installation details.C.Manuals: Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings companion copies of complete maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets, and information for ordering replacement parts. Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the final updated maintenance and operating manuals, including any changes, to the Resident Engineer.D.Certifications: 1.Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following certifications to the Resident Engineer: a.Certification by the Contractor that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by designation only.B.Green Seal (GS):GC-12Occupancy SensorsC.Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA):IESNA LM-48Guide for Calibration of Photoelectric Control DevicesD.National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)C136.10American National Standard for Roadway Lighting Equipment-Locking-Type Photocontrol Devices and Mating Receptacles - Physical and Electrical Interchangeability and TestingICS-1Standard for Industrial Control and Systems General RequirementsICS-2..................Standard for Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contractors, and Overload Relays Rated Not More than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC: Part 8 - Disconnect Devices for Use in Industrial Control EquipmentICS-6Standard for Industrial Controls and Systems EnclosuresE.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 20Standard for General-Use Snap Switches773Standard for Plug-In Locking Type Photocontrols for Use with Area Lighting773ANonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control98Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches917.....................Clock Operated SwitchesPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORSA.Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a power supply and relay unit, suitable for the environmental conditions in which installed.1.Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied; with a 1 to 15 minute adjustable time delay for turning lights off.2.Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.3.Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20A ballast load at 120V and 277V, for 13A tungsten at 120V, and for 1 hp at 120V.4.Mounting:a.Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.b.Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.5.Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation of the sensor.6.Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.7.Manual/automatic selector switch.8.Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc [21.5 to 2152 lx]; keep lighting off when selected lighting level is present.9.Faceplate for Wall-Switch Replacement Type: Refer to wall plate material and color requirements for toggle switches, as specified in Section 26 27 26, WIRING DEVICES.B.Dual-technology Type: Ceiling mounting; combination PIR and ultrasonic detection methods, field-selectable.1.Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.2.Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch [150mm] minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. [232 sq. cm], and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches [305 mm] in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s [305 mm/s].PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A.Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer's instructions and as shown on the drawings or specified.B.Aiming for wall-mounted and ceiling-mounted motion sensor switches shall be per manufacturer’s recommendations. C.Set occupancy sensor "on" duration to 15 minutes.3.2 Acceptance Checks and TestsA.Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.B.Upon completion of installation, conduct an operating test to show that equipment operates in accordance with requirements of this section. C.Test for full range of dimming ballast and dimming controls capability. Observe for visually detectable flicker over full dimming range. D.Test occupancy sensors for proper operation. Observe for light control over entire area being covered.3.3 Follow-Up VerificationUpon completion of acceptance checks and tests, the Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that the lighting control devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function. E N D SECTION 26 27 26WIRING DEVICESPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies the furnishing, installation, connection, and testing of wiring devices.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General electrical requirements that are common to more than one section of Division 26.B.Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduit and boxes. C.Section 26 05 19, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: Cables and wiring.D.Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground fault currents.E.Section 26 51 00, INTERIOR LIGHTING: Fluorescent ballasts and LED drivers for use with manual dimming controls.1.3 qualITY ASSURANCEA.Refer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES), in Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.1.4 SUBMITTALSA.Submit six copies of the following in accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.1.Shop Drawings:a.Submit sufficient information to demonstrate compliance with drawings and specifications.b.Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, construction materials, grade, and termination information.2.Manuals: a.Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance and operating manuals, including technical data sheets and information for ordering replacement parts.b.If changes have been made to the maintenance and operating manuals originally submitted, submit updated maintenance and operating manuals two weeks prior to the final inspection.3.Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit the following. a.Certification by the manufacturer that the wiring devices conform to the requirements of the drawings and specifications.b.Certification by the Contractor that the wiring devices have been properly installed and adjusted.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.B.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):70-11National Electrical Code (NEC)99-12Health Care FacilitiesC.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):WD 1-10General Color Requirements for Wiring DevicesWD 6-08 Wiring Devices – Dimensional SpecificationsD.Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL):5-11Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings20-10General-Use Snap Switches231-07Power Outlets467-07Grounding and Bonding Equipment498-07Attachment Plugs and Receptacles943-11Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters 1449-07Surge Protective Devices1472-96Solid State Dimming ControlsPART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 RECEPTACLESA.General: All receptacles shall comply with NEMA, NFPA, UL, and as shown on the drawings.1.Mounting straps shall be plated steel, with break-off plaster ears and shall include a self-grounding feature. Terminal screws shall be brass, brass plated or a copper alloy metal.2.Receptacles shall have provisions for back wiring with separate metal clamp type terminals (four minimum) and side wiring from four captively held binding screws.B.Duplex Receptacles: Hospital-grade, single phase, 20 ampere, 120 volts, 2-pole, 3-wire, NEMA 5-20R, with break-off feature for two-circuit operation. 1.Bodies shall be ivory in color. 2.Duplex Receptacles on Emergency Circuit:a.In rooms without emergency powered general lighting, the emergency receptacles shall be of the selfilluminated type.3.Ground Fault Interrupter Duplex Receptacles: Shall be an integral unit, hospital-grade, suitable for mounting in a standard outlet box, with end-of-life indication and provisions to isolate the face due to improper wiring.a.Ground fault interrupter shall be consist of a differential current transformer, solid state sensing circuitry and a circuit interrupter switch. Device shall have nominal sensitivity to ground leakage current of 4-6 milliamperes and shall function to interrupt the current supply for any value of ground leakage current above five milliamperes (+ or – 1 milliampere) on the load side of the device. Device shall have a minimum nominal tripping time of 0.025 second.b.Ground Fault Interrupter Duplex Receptacles (not hospital-grade) shall be the same as ground fault interrupter hospital-grade receptacles except for the hospital-grade listing.4.Safety Type Duplex Receptacles:a.Bodies shall be gray in color.1)Shall permit current to flow only while a standard plug is in the proper position in the receptacle.2)Screws exposed while the wall plates are in place shall be the tamperproof type.5.Duplex Receptacles (not hospital grade): Shall be the same as hospital grade duplex receptacles except for the hospital grade listing and as follows.a.Bodies shall be brown nylon.C.Receptacles; 20, 30, and 50 ampere, 250 Volts: Shall be complete with appropriate cord grip plug.D.Weatherproof Receptacles: Shall consist of a duplex receptacle, mounted in box with a gasketed, weatherproof, cast metal cover plate and cap over each receptacle opening. The cap shall be permanently attached to the cover plate by a spring-hinged flap. The weatherproof integrity shall not be affected when heavy duty specification or hospital grade attachment plug caps are inserted. Cover plates on outlet boxes mounted flush in the wall shall be gasketed to the wall in a watertight manner. 2.2 TOGGLE SWITCHESA.Toggle switches shall be totally enclosed tumbler type with nylon bodies. Handles shall be ivory in color unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings.1.Switches installed in hazardous areas shall be explosion-proof type in accordance with the NEC and as shown on the drawings. 2.Shall be single unit toggle, butt contact, quiet AC type, heavyduty general-purpose use with an integral self-grounding mounting strap with break-off plasters ears and provisions for back wiring with separate metal wiring clamps and side wiring with captively held binding screws.3.Switches shall be rated 20 amperes at 120-277 Volts AC.2.3 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORSManufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products by one of the following:Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.Sensor Switch, Inc.Watt Stopper.General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox.Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA?70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg?F.Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120?V, 1200-VA fluorescent at 277?V, and 800-W incandescent."WS1" and "WS2" in "Wall-Switch Sensor Tag WS1" and "Wall-Switch Sensor Tag WS2" paragraphs below are a suggested marking system on Drawings when detectors with different sensor characteristics are required.Wall-Switch Sensor Tag OS:Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft.Sensing Technology: Dual technology PIR and ultrasonic or microphonics.Switch Type: SP, manual "on," automatic "off."Voltage: Match the circuit voltage.Retain one of two "off" time-delay subparagraphs below.Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes.Concealed "off" time-delay selector at 30 seconds, and 5, 10, and 20 minutes.Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.2.3 WALL PLATESA.Wall plates for switches and receptacles shall be type 302 stainless steel. Oversize plates are not acceptable. B.For receptacles or switches mounted adjacent to each other, wall plates shall be common for each group of receptacles or switches.C.In areas requiring tamperproof wiring devices, wall plates shall be type 302 stainless steel, and shall have tamperproof screws and beveled edges.D.Duplex Receptacles on Emergency Circuit: Wall plates shall be red nylon with the word "EMERGENCY" engraved in 6 mm (1/4 inch) white letters.PART 3 EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC and as shown as on the drawings.B.Install wiring devices after wall construction and painting is complete.C.The ground terminal of each wiring device shall be bonded to the outlet box with an approved green bonding jumper, and also connected to the branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.D.Outlet boxes for toggle switches and manual dimming controls shall be mounted on the strike side of doors. E.Provide barriers in multigang outlet boxes to comply with the NEC.F.Coordinate the electrical work with the work of other trades to ensure that wiring device flush outlets are positioned with box openings aligned with the face of the surrounding finish material. Pay special attention to installations in cabinet work, and in connection with laboratory equipment.G.Exact field locations of floors, walls, partitions, doors, windows, and equipment may vary from locations shown on the drawings. Prior to locating sleeves, boxes and chases for roughing-in of conduit and equipment, the Contractor shall coordinate exact field location of the above items with other trades. H.Install wall switches 1.2 M (48 inches) above floor, with the toggle OFF position down.I.Install wall dimmers 1.2 M (48 inches) above floor.J.Install receptacles 450 mm (18 inches) above floor, and 152 mm (6 inches) above counter backsplash or workbenches. Install specific-use receptacles at heights shown on the drawings.K.Install vertically mounted receptacles with the ground pin up. Install horizontally mounted receptacles with the ground pin to the right.L.When required or recommended by the manufacturer, use a torque screwdriver. Tighten unused terminal screws.M.Label device plates with a permanent adhesive label listing panel and circuit feeding the wiring device.3.2 Acceptance Checks and Tests A.Perform manufacturer’s required field checks in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. In addition, include the following:1.Visual Inspection and Tests:a.Inspect physical and electrical condition.b.Vacuum-clean surface metal raceway interior. Clean metal raceway exterior.c.Test wiring devices for damaged conductors, high circuit resistance, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems using a portable receptacle tester. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new, and retest as specified above.d.Test GFCI receptacles.2.Healthcare Occupancy Tests:a.Test hospital grade receptacles for retention force per NFPA 99.SECTION 26 51 00INTERIOR LIGHTINGPART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION:A.This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of the interior lighting systems. The terms “lighting fixture,” “fixture,” and “luminaire” are used interchangeably.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 01 74 19, CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT: Disposal of lamps.B.Section 02 41 00, DEMOLITION: Removal and disposal of lamps and ballasts.C.Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: Requirements that apply to all sections of Division 26.D.Section 26 05 19, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES: Low-voltage conductors. E.Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground fault currents. 1.3 qualITY ASSURANCEA.Refer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES), in Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.1.4 SUBMITTALSA.Submit six copies of the following in accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.1.Shop Drawings:a.Submit the following information for each type of lighting fixture designated on the LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE, arranged in order of lighting fixture designation.b.Material and construction details, include information on housing and optics system. c.Physical dimensions and description.d.Wiring schematic and connection diagram.e.Installation details.f.Energy efficiency data.g.Photometric data based on laboratory tests complying with IES Lighting Measurements testing and calculation guides.h.Lamp data including lumen output (initial and mean), color rendition index (CRI), rated life (hours), and color temperature (degrees Kelvin).i.Ballast/driver data including ballast type, starting method, ambient temperature, ballast factor, sound rating, system watts, and total harmonic distortion (THD).j.For LED lighting fixtures, submit US DOE LED Lighting Facts label, and IES L70 rated life.2.Manuals: a.Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete maintenance and operating manuals, including technical data sheets, wiring diagrams, and information for ordering replacement parts.b.If changes have been made to the maintenance and operating manuals originally submitted, submit updated maintenance and operating manuals two weeks prior to the final inspection.3.Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit the following. a.Certification by the Contractor that the interior lighting systems have been properly installed and tested.1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by designation only. B.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):C635-07Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel CeilingsC.Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):40 CFR 261Identification and Listing of Hazardous WasteD.Federal Communications Commission (FCC):CFR Title 47, Part 15Radio Frequency DevicesCFR Title 47, Part 18Industrial, Scientific, and Medical EquipmentE.Illuminating Engineering Society (IES):LM-79-08Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting ProductsLM-80-08Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light SourcesLM-82-12Characterization of LED Light Engines and LED Lamps for Electrical and Photometric Properties as a Function of TemperatureF.Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):C62.41-91Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power CircuitsG.International Code Council (ICC):IBC-12International Building CodeH.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-11National Electrical Code (NEC)101-12Life Safety Code I.National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):SSL-1-10Electronic Drivers for LED Devices, Arrays, or SystemsJ.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 924-12Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment1598-08Luminaires1574-04.................Track Lighting Systems2108-04.................Low-Voltage Lighting Systems8750-09.................Light Emitting Diode (LED) Light Sources for Use in Lighting ProductsPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURESA.Shall be in accordance with NFPA, UL, as shown on drawings, and as specified.B.Sheet Metal: 1.Shall be formed to prevent warping and sagging. Housing, trim and lens frame shall be true, straight (unless intentionally curved), and parallel to each other as designed. 2.Wireways and fittings shall be free of burrs and sharp edges, and shall accommodate internal and branch circuit wiring without damage to the wiring. 3.When installed, any exposed fixture housing surface, trim frame, door frame, and lens frame shall be free of light leaks. 4.Hinged door frames shall operate smoothly without binding. Latches shall function easily by finger action without the use of tools. C.Ballasts/Drivers and lamps shall be serviceable while the fixture is in its normally installed position. Ballasts/drivers shall not be mounted to removable reflectors or wireway covers unless so specified. D.Mechanical Safety: Lighting fixture closures (lens doors, trim frame, hinged housings, etc.) shall be retained in a secure manner by captive screws, chains, aircraft cable, captive hinges, or fasteners such that they cannot be accidentally dislodged during normal operation or routine maintenance. E.Metal Finishes: 1.The manufacturer shall apply standard finish (unless otherwise specified) over a corrosion-resistant primer, after cleaning to free the metal surfaces of rust, grease, dirt and other deposits. Edges of pre-finished sheet metal exposed during forming, stamping or shearing processes shall be finished in a similar corrosion resistant manner to match the adjacent surface(s). Fixture finish shall be free of stains or evidence of rusting, blistering, or flaking, and shall be applied after fabrication. 2.Interior light reflecting finishes shall be white with not less than 85 percent reflectances, except where otherwise shown on the drawing. 3.Exterior finishes shall be as shown on the drawings. F.Lighting fixtures shall have a specific means for grounding metallic wireways and housings to an equipment grounding conductor. 2.2 LED exit light fixturesA.Exit light fixtures shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA and UL.B.Housing and door shall be die-cast aluminum.C.For general purpose exit light fixtures, door frame shall be hinged, with latch. For vandal-resistant exit light fixtures, door frame shall be secured with tamper-resistant screws. D.Finish shall be satin or fine-grain brushed aluminum.E.There shall be no radioactive material used in the fixtures.F.Fixtures:1.Inscription panels shall be cast or stamped aluminum a minimum of 2.25 mm (0.090 inch) thick, stenciled with 150 mm (6 inch) high letters, baked with red color stable plastic or fiberglass. Lamps shall be luminous Light Emitting Diodes (LED) mounted in center of letters on red color stable plastic or fiberglass.2.Double-Faced Fixtures: Provide double-faced fixtures where required or as shown on drawings. 3.Directional Arrows: Provide directional arrows as part of the inscription panel where required or as shown on drawings. Directional arrows shall be the "chevron-type" of similar size and width as the letters and meet the requirements of NFPA 101.G.Voltage: Multi-voltage (120 – 277V).2.3led light fixturesA.General:1.LED light fixtures shall be in accordance with IES, NFPA, UL, as shown on the drawings, and as specified.2.LED light fixtures shall be Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)-compliant.3.LED drivers shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:a.Minimum efficiency: 85% at full load.b.Minimum Operating Ambient Temperature: -20? C. (-4? F.)c.Input Voltage: 120 - 277V (±10%) at 60 Hz.d.Integral short circuit, open circuit, and overload protection.e.Power Factor: ≥ 0.95.f.Total Harmonic Distortion: ≤ 20%.ply with FCC 47 CFR Part 15.4.LED modules shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:ply with IES LM-79 and LM-80 requirements.b.Minimum CRI?80 and color temperature 3000??K unless otherwise specified in LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE. c.Minimum Rated Life: 50,000 hours per IES L70.d.Light output lumens as indicated in the LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE.5. LED light fixtures shall be Design Light Consortium (DLC) Listed.B.LED Downlights:1.Housing, LED driver, and LED module shall be products of the same manufacturer.C.LED Troffers:1.LED drivers, modules, and reflector shall be accessible, serviceable, and replaceable from below the ceiling.2.Housing, LED driver, and LED module shall be products of the same manufacturer.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer's instructions, and as shown on the drawings or specified. B.Align, mount, and level the lighting fixtures uniformly.C.Wall-mounted fixtures shall be attached to the studs in the walls, or to a 20 gauge metal backing plate that is attached to the studs in the walls. Lighting fixtures shall not be attached directly to gypsum board.D.Lighting Fixture Supports: 1.Shall provide support for all of the fixtures. Supports may be anchored to channels of the ceiling construction, to the structural slab or to structural members within a partition, or above a suspended ceiling. 2.Shall maintain the fixture positions after cleaning and relamping. 3.Shall support the lighting fixtures without causing the ceiling or partition to deflect. 4.Hardware for recessed fixtures: a.Where the suspended ceiling system is supported at the four corners of the fixture opening, hardware devices shall clamp the fixture to the ceiling system structural members, or plaster frame at not less than four points in such a manner as to resist spreading of the support members and safely lock the fixture into the ceiling system. b.Where the suspended ceiling system is not supported at the four corners of the fixture opening, hardware devices shall independently support the fixture from the building structure at four points. 5.Hardware for surface mounting fixtures to suspended ceilings:a.In addition to being secured to any required outlet box, fixtures shall be bolted to a grid ceiling system at four points spaced near the corners of each fixture. The bolts shall be not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) secured to channel members attached to and spanning the tops of the ceiling structural grid members. Non-turning studs may be attached to the ceiling structural grid members or spanning channels by special clips designed for the purpose, provided they lock into place and require simple tools for removal. b.In addition to being secured to any required outlet box, fixtures shall be bolted to ceiling structural members at four points spaced near the corners of each fixture. Pre-positioned 6 mm (1/4 inch) studs or threaded plaster inserts secured to ceiling structural members shall be used to bolt the fixtures to the ceiling. In lieu of the above, 6 mm (1/4 inch) toggle bolts may be used on new or existing ceiling provided the plaster and lath can safely support the fixtures without sagging or cracking.// 7.Surface mounted lighting fixtures: a.Fixtures shall be bolted against the ceiling independent of the outlet box at four points spaced near the corners of each unit. The bolts (or studclips) shall be minimum 6 mm (1/4 inch) bolt, secured to main ceiling runners and/or secured to cross runners. Nonturning studs may be attached to the main ceiling runners and cross runners with special nonfriction clip devices designed for the purpose, provided they bolt through the runner, or are also secured to the building structure by 12 gauge safety hangers. Studs or bolts securing fixtures weighing in excess of 25 kg (56 pounds) shall be supported directly from the building structure. b.Where ceiling cross runners are installed for support of lighting fixtures, they must have a carrying capacity equal to that of the main ceiling runners and be rigidly secured to the main runners. c.Fixtures less than 6.8 kg (15 pounds) in weight and occupying less than 3715 sq cm (two square feet) of ceiling area may, when designed for the purpose, be supported directly from the outlet box when all the following conditions are met. 1)Screws attaching the fixture to the outlet box pass through round holes (not keyhole slots) in the fixture body. 2)The outlet box is attached to a main ceiling runner (or cross runner) with approved hardware. 3)The outlet box is supported vertically from the building structure.d.Fixtures mounted in open construction shall be secured directly to the building structure with approved bolting and clamping devices. 8.Single or double pendantmounted lighting fixtures: a.Each stem shall be supported by an approved outlet box mounted swivel joint and canopy which holds the stem captive and provides spring load (or approved equivalent) dampening of fixture oscillations. Outlet box shall be supported vertically from the building structure. 9.Outlet boxes for support of lighting fixtures (where permitted) shall be secured directly to the building structure with approved devices or supported vertically in a hung ceiling from the building structure with a nine gauge wire hanger, and be secured by an approved device to a main ceiling runner or cross runner to prevent any horizontal movement relative to the ceiling.E.Furnish and install the new lamps as specified for all lighting fixtures installed under this project, and for all existing lighting fixtures reused under this project.F.The electrical and ceiling trades shall coordinate to ascertain that approved lighting fixtures are furnished in the proper sizes and installed with the proper devices (hangers, clips, trim frames, flanges, etc.), to match the ceiling system being installed.G.Bond lighting fixtures to the grounding system as specified in Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.H.At completion of project, replace all defective components of the lighting fixtures at no cost to the Government. I.Dispose of lamps per requirements of Section 01 74 19, CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT, and Section 02 41 00, DEMOLITION.3.2 Acceptance Checks and Tests A.Perform the following:1.Visual Inspection:a.Verify proper operation by operating the lighting controls.b.Visually inspect for damage to fixtures, lenses, reflectors, diffusers, and louvers. Clean fixtures, lenses, reflectors, diffusers, and louvers that have accumulated dust, dirt, or fingerprints during construction.3.3 Follow-Up Verification A. Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, the Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that the lighting systems are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function.---END---SECTION 27 05 11 REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONSPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This Section, Requirements for Communications Installations, applies to all sections of Division 27.B.Furnish and install communications cabling, systems, equipment, and accessories in accordance with the specifications and drawings. Capacities and ratings of, cable, and other items and arrangements for the specified items are shown on drawings.1.2 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTSA.References to industry and trade association standards and codes are minimum installation requirement standards.B.Drawings and other specification sections shall govern in those instances where requirements are greater than those specified in the above standards.1.3 QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES) A.Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer shall regularly and presently produce, as one of the manufacturer's principal products, the equipment and material specified for this project, and shall have manufactured the item for at least three years.B.Product Qualification:1.Manufacturer's product shall have been in satisfactory operation, on three installations of similar size and type as this project, for approximately three years.2.The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a list of installations where the products have been in operation before approval.1.4 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTSA.Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items, for which replacement parts shall be available.B.When more than one unit of the same class of equipment is required, such units shall be the product of a single manufacturer.C.Equipment Assemblies and Components:ponents of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer.2.Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which include components made by others, shall assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit.ponents shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the intended service.4.Constituent parts which are similar shall be the product of a single manufacturer.D.Factory wiring shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on all wiring diagrams.E.When Factory Testing Is Specified:1.The Government shall have the option of witnessing factory tests. The contractor shall notify the VA through the Resident Engineer a minimum of 15 working days prior to the manufacturers making the factory tests.2.Four copies of certified test reports containing all test data shall be furnished to the Resident Engineer prior to final inspection and not more than 90 days after completion of the tests.3.When equipment fails to meet factory test and re-inspection is required, the contractor shall be liable for all additional expenses, including expenses of the Government.1.5 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTSWhere variations from the contract requirements are requested in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS and Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, the connecting work and related components shall include, but not be limited to additions or changes to branch circuits, circuit protective devices, conduits, wire, feeders, controls, panels and installation methods.1.6 EQUIPMENT PROTECTIONA.Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical damage, dirt, moisture, cold and rain:1.During installation, enclosures, equipment, controls, controllers, circuit protective devices, and other like items, shall be protected against entry of foreign matter; and be vacuum cleaned both inside and outside before testing and operating and repainting if required.2.Damaged equipment shall be, as determined by the Resident Engineer, placed in first class operating condition or be returned to the source of supply for repair or replacement.3.Painted surfaces shall be protected with factory installed removable heavy kraft paper, sheet vinyl or equal.4.Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be refinished with the same quality of paint and workmanship as used by the manufacturer so repaired areas are not obvious.1.7 WORK PERFORMANCEA.Job site safety and worker safety is the responsibility of the contractor.B.For work on existing stations, arrange, phase and perform work to assure communications service for other buildings at all times. Refer to Article OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS under Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.C.New work shall be installed and connected to existing work neatly and carefully. Disturbed or damaged work shall be replaced or repaired to its prior conditions, as required by Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.D.Coordinate location of equipment and pathways with other trades to minimize interferences. See the GENERAL CONDITIONS.1.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS A.Equipment location shall be as close as practical to locations shown on the drawings.B.Inaccessible Equipment:1.Where the Government determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, the equipment shall be removed and reinstalled as directed at no additional cost to the Government.2."Conveniently accessible" is defined as being capable of being reached without the use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as, but not limited to, motors, pumps, belt guards, transformers, piping, ductwork, conduit and raceways.1.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATIONA.Install an identification sign which clearly indicates information required for use and maintenance of equipment.B.Nameplates shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core with engraved lettering, a minimum of 6 mm (1/4 inch) high. Secure nameplates with screws. Nameplates that are furnished by manufacturer as a standard catalog item, or where other method of identification is herein specified, are exceptions.1.10 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B.The Government's approval shall be obtained for all equipment and material before delivery to the job site. Delivery, storage, or installation of equipment or material which has not had prior approval will not be permitted at the job site.C.All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings, and other data necessary for the Government to ascertain that the proposed equipment and materials comply with specification requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for approval shall be legible and clearly identify equipment being submitted.D.Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies which consist of more than one item or component shall be made for the system or assembly as a whole. Partial submittals will not be considered for approval.1.Mark the submittals, "SUBMITTED UNDER SECTION__________________".2.Submittals shall be marked to show specification reference including the section and paragraph numbers.3.Submit each section separately.E.The submittals shall include the following:rmation that confirms compliance with contract requirements. Include the manufacturer's name, model or catalog numbers, catalog information, technical data sheets, shop drawings, pictures, nameplate data and test reports as required.2.Elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams for communication and signal systems, control system and equipment assemblies. All terminal points and wiring shall be identified on wiring diagrams.3.Parts list which shall include those replacement parts recommended by the equipment manufacturer, quantity of parts, current price and availability of each part.F.Manuals: Submit in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.1.Maintenance and Operation Manuals: Submit as required for systems and equipment specified in the technical sections. Furnish four copies, bound in hardback binders, (manufacturer's standard binders) or an approved equivalent. Furnish one complete manual as specified in the technical section but in no case later than prior to performance of systems or equipment test, and furnish the remaining manuals prior to contract completion.2.Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words "MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUAL," the name and location of the system, equipment, building, name of Contractor, and contract number. Include in the manual the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing the system or equipment and the local representatives for the system or equipment.3.Provide a "Table of Contents" and assemble the manual to conform to the table of contents, with tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.4.The manuals shall include:a.Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of the equipment.b.A control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown.c.Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.d.Installation and maintenance instructions.e.Safety precautions.f.Diagrams and illustrations.g.Testing methods.h.Performance data.i.Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers. Emphasis shall be placed on the use of special tools and instruments. The list shall indicate sources of supply, recommended spare parts, and name of servicing organization.j.Appendix; list qualified permanent servicing organizations for support of the equipment, including addresses and certified qualifications.G.Approvals will be based on complete submission of manuals together with shop drawings.H.After approval and prior to installation, furnish the Resident Engineer with one sample of each of the following:1.A 300 mm (12 inch) length of each type and size of wire and cable along with the tag from the coils of reels from which the samples were taken. 2.Each type of conduit and pathway coupling, bushing and termination fitting. 3.Raceway and pathway hangers, clamps and supports. 4.Duct sealing compound. 1.11 SINGULAR NUMBER Where any device or part of equipment is referred to in these specifications in the singular number (e.g., "the switch"), this reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation as shown on the drawings.1.12 TRAININGA.Training shall be provided in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, of Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.B.Training shall be provided for the particular equipment or system as required in each associated specification.C.A training schedule shall be developed and submitted by the contractor and approved by the Resident Engineer at least 30 days prior to the planned training.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 SELECTION OF MATERIALA. All materials selected for use by installation contractor must be approved by VA Telecommunications personnel prior to installation.2.2 HORIZONTAL CABLEA. a Four (4) UTP 24 AWG and shall be of a type designed to support Category 6 communications (250 mega-Hertz [mHz] or above).PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 CABLE DESCRIPTION FOR STATION CABLES:All cables will be Unshielded Twisted 4-Pair, rated Cat 6 or higher. Data cable sheath shall be “Dark Blue” in color.Voice cable sheath shall be “Gray” in color.Wireless Network sheath shall be "Bright Green" in color.Nurse Call System sheath shall be "Light Green" in color.Get Well Network sheath shall be "Bright Orange" in color.Biomedical Systems and Badge Access System sheath shall be "Purple" in color.All cables must be one continuous run between work station and communications closet – NO SPLICES.All cables will be installed in conduit from wall jack to ceiling and stubbed out above false ceiling and run in cable trays or other designated cable support to telecom closets.3.2 TERMINATING COPPER CABLE - IN COMMUNICATION ROOMAll data cables will be terminated onto CAT-6 rated patch panels...RJ45.Data cables will be terminated using EIA/TIA-568B wiring configuration.Data cables will be terminated into patch panels mounted on a standard 19” data rackAll voice cables will be terminated into CAT-5e rated patch panels and terminated into standard 19” data rack. 110 Blocks may be used when already installed in an existing closet. All cables will be numerically labeled at both ends of terminations.3.3 TERMINATING COPPER CABLE - AT WORK STATIONAll data cables will be terminated on CAT-6 rated RJ-45 Jack inserts, using EIA/TIA-568B wiring configuration. All data jack inserts will be Black in color.All voice cables will be terminated onto RJ-11 Jack inserts using standard USOC wiring configuration. All voice jack inserts will be Office White in color.All jack inserts will be installed unto flush wall mounted face plates. Face plates shall be Office White in color. Each face plate will be a 4-port configuration. Each work station will be wired with 2-data cables and 1-voice cable.A communications outlet will installed every walls designated as administrative floor space.*Note: In areas designated for systems furniture, communications cabling will be installed into the furniture onto faceplates mounted onto the prefabricated cutouts on system furniture baseboards. Cables will be pulled down inside walls in areas best determined suitable to feed entire sections with minimal wall penetrations or entry points into furniture. Cables in most of these cases will need to be pulled and set aside for later installation into furniture once furniture has been installed. 3.4 CABLE LABELING (NUMBERS ONLY)All cables will be numbered sequentially and mechanically stenciled with black ink – NOT HAND WRITTEN. Cable number labels will be placed at both ends of each cable, on patch panels, and wall mounted face plates.If cable numbers already exists in communications rooms, number labeling sequence will be a continuation of existing cable numbers already in place on data patch panels and voice cables.3.5 CABLE MANAGEMENTA. All cables will be home run from each work-station area to the designated communications room. B. All cables will be suspended in ceiling using J-type hooks or placed in cable trays.C. In office areas all cables will be installed inside conduit. Conduit will be run from wall jack to extend above false ceiling where conduit maybe stubbed out. (Unless security specifications require enclosed conduit for entire cable run)D. All wall penetrations made above ceilings through fire rated walls must be sealed with fire rated materials. If existing conduits are used and fire stopper material is removed from conduits, conduits will be resealed with rated materials once cables are installed.E. Cables in communication rooms will be neatly run into rack compatible cable management systems raceways. 3.6 DEMOLISHING OLD CABLEA. All old or unused telecommunications data and voice cable is to be removed from the station wall jack through the ceiling into the telecommunications closet and removed from patch panels and 110 blocks. 3.7 TESTING CABLEA. All cables installed must be tested and verified for full 100Mb transmission speed and continuity to verify that all pairs are functional to support voice and data systems. Test results must be printed and provided to VA Telecommunications personnel prior to acceptance of the work that was performed- E N D SECTION 27 05 26GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMSPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTION A.This section specifies general grounding and bonding requirements of telecommunication installations for equipment operations. B.“Grounding electrode system” refers to all electrodes required by NEC, as well as including made, supplementary, telecommunications system grounding electrodes.The terms “connect” and “bond” are used interchangeably in this specification and have the same meaning.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Section 27 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS: General electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one section of Division 27. 1.3 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 27 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS. B.Shop Drawings: 1.Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.2.Include the location of system grounding electrode connections and the routing of aboveground and underground grounding electrode conductors. C.Test Reports: Provide certified test reports of ground resistance. D.Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the Resident Engineer:1.Certification that the materials and installation is in accordance with the drawings and specifications.2.Certification, by the Contractor, that the complete installation has been properly installed and tested. 1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSPublications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. A.American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):B1-2001Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper WireB8-2004Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or SoftB.Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):81-1983IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground SystemC.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 702005National Electrical Code (NEC) Telecommunications Industry Association, (TIA)J-STO-607-A-2002Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for TelecommunicationsE. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 442005 ThermosetInsulated Wires and Cables832003 ThermoplasticInsulated Wires and Cables4672004 Grounding and Bonding Equipment 486A-486B-2003 Wire Connectors PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS A.Equipment grounding conductors shall be UL 83 insulated stranded copper, except that sizes 6 mm? (10 AWG) and smaller shall be solid copper. Insulation color shall be continuous green for all equipment grounding conductors, except that wire sizes 25 mm? (4 AWG) and larger shall be permitted to be identified per NEC.B.Bonding conductors shall be ASTM B8 bare stranded copper, except that sizes 6 mm? (10 AWG) and smaller shall be ASTM B1 solid bare copper wire. C.Isolated Power System: Type XHHW-2 insulation with a dielectric constant of 3.5 or less. Telecom System Grounding Riser Conductor: Telecommunications Grounding Riser shall be in accordance with J STO-607A. Use a minimum 50mm? (1/0 AWG) insulated stranded copper grounding conductor unless indicated otherwise.2.2 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTSComponents shall meet or exceed UL 467 and be clearly marked with the manufacturer, catalog number, and permitted conductor size(s).2.3 ground connectionsA.Above Grade:1.Bonding Jumpers: compression type connectors, using zinc-plated fasteners and external tooth lockwashers.2.Ground Busbars: Two-hole compression type lugs using tin-plated copper or copper alloy bolts and nuts.3.Rack and Cabinet Ground Bars: one-hole compression-type lugs using zinc-plated or copper alloy fasteners.B. Cable Shields: Make ground connections to multipair communications cables with metallic shields using shield bonding connectors with screw stud connection.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A.Ground in accordance with the NEC, as shown on drawings, and as hereinafter specified. B.System Grounding: 1.Secondary service neutrals: Ground at the supply side of the secondary disconnecting means and at the related transformers. 2.Separately derived systems (transformers downstream from the service entrance): Ground the secondary neutral. 3.Isolation transformers and isolated power systems shall not be system grounded. C.Equipment Grounding: Metallic structures (including ductwork and building steel), enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, and other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits shall be bonded and grounded. 3.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMBond telecommunications system grounding equipment to the electrical grounding electrode system.Furnish and install all wire and hardware required to properly ground, bond and connect communications raceway, cable tray, metallic cable shields, and equipment to a ground source.Ground bonding jumpers shall be continuous with no splices. Use the shortest length of bonding jumper possible.Provide ground paths that are permanent and continuous with a resistance of 1 ohm or less from raceway, cable tray, and equipment connections to the building grounding electrode. The resistance across individual bonding connections shall be 10 milli ohms or less. Above-Grade Grounding Connections: When making bolted or screwed connections to attach bonding jumpers, remove paint to expose the entire contact surface by grinding where necessary; thoroughly clean all connector, plate and other contact surfaces; and apply an appropriate corrosion inhibitor to all surfaces before joining.Bonding Jumpers:Use insulated ground wire of the size and type shown on the Drawings or use a minimum of 16 mm? (6 AWG) insulated copper wire.Assemble bonding jumpers using insulated ground wire terminated with compression connectors.Use compression connectors of proper size for conductors specified. Use connector manufacturer’s compression tool.G.Bonding Jumper Fasteners:1.Conduit: Fasten bonding jumpers using screw lugs on grounding bushings or conduit strut clamps, or the clamp pads on push-type conduit fasteners. When screw lug connection to a conduit strut clamp is not possible, fasten the plain end of a bonding jumper wire by slipping the plain end under the conduit strut clamp pad; tighten the clamp screw firmly. Where appropriate, use zinc-plated external tooth lockwashers.2.Wireway and Cable Tray: Fasten bonding jumpers using zinc-plated bolts, external tooth lockwashers, and nuts. Install protective cover, e.g., zinc-plated acorn nuts on any bolts extending into wireway or cable tray to prevent cable damage.3.Ground Plates and Busbars: Fasten bonding jumpers using two-hole compression lugs. Use tin-plated copper or copper alloy bolts, external tooth lockwashers, and nuts.4.Unistrut and Raised Floor Stringers: Fasten bonding jumpers using zinc-plated, self-drill screws and external tooth lockwashers.3.3 COMMUNICATIONS cable groundingA.Bond all metallic cable sheaths in multipair communications cables together at each splicing and/or terminating location to provide 100 percent metallic sheath continuity throughout the communications distribution system.1.At terminal points, install a cable shield bonding connector provide a screw stud connection for ground wire. Use a bonding jumper to connect the cable shield connector to an appropriate ground source like the rack or cabinet ground bar. 2.Bond all metallic cable shields together within splice closures using cable shield bonding connectors or the splice case grounding and bonding accessories provided by the splice case manufacturer. When an external ground connection is provided as part of splice closure, connect to an approved ground source and all other metallic components and equipment at that location.3.4 communIcations raceway grounding Conduit: Use insulated 16 mm? (6 AWG) bonding jumpers to ground metallic conduit at each end and to bond at all intermediate metallic enclosures.3.5 ground resistance A.Grounding system resistance to ground shall not exceed 5 ohms. Make necessary modifications or additions to the grounding electrode system for compliance without additional cost to the Government. Final tests shall assure that this requirement is met.B.Resistance of the grounding electrode system shall be measured using a four-terminal fall-of-potential method as defined in IEEE 81. Ground resistance measurements shall be made before the electrical distribution system is energized and shall be made in normally dry conditions not less than 48 hours after the last rainfall. Resistance measurements of separate grounding electrode systems shall be made before the systems are bonded together below grade. The combined resistance of separate systems may be used to meet the required resistance, but the specified number of electrodes must still be provided. E N D SECTION 27 05 33RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMSPART 1 GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of conduit, fittings, and boxes to form complete, coordinated, raceway systems. Raceways are required for all communications cabling unless shown or specified otherwise.B.Definitions: The term conduit, as used in this specification, shall mean any or all of the raceway types specified.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of fire rated construction: Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.B.Identification and painting of conduit and other devices: Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.C.General electrical requirements and items that is common to more than one section of Division 27: Section 27 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS.1.3 SUBMITTALSIn accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, furnish the following:A.Shop Drawings:1.Size and location of panels and pull boxes2.Layout of required conduit penetrations through structural elements.3.The specific item proposed and its area of application shall be identified on the catalog cuts.B.Certification: Prior to final inspection, deliver to the COTR four copies of the certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications and has been properly installed.1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):70-05National Electrical Code (NEC)C.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):1-03Flexible Metal Conduit 5-01Surface Metal Raceway and Fittings6-03Rigid Metal Conduit50-03Enclosures for Electrical Equipment360-03Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit467-01Grounding and Bonding Equipment514A-01Metallic Outlet Boxes514B-02Fittings for Cable and Conduit514C-05Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes and Covers 651-02Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit651A-03Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit797-03Electrical Metallic Tubing1242-00Intermediate Metal ConduitD.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):TC-3-04PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and TubingFB1-03Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing and CablePART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALA.Conduit Size: In accordance with the NEC, but not less than 13 mm (1/2?inch) unless otherwise shown. Where permitted by the NEC, 13 mm (1/2 inch) flexible conduit may be used for tap connections to recessed lighting fixtures.B.Conduit: 1.Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Shall Conform to UL 797, ANSI C80.3. Maximum size not to exceed 105 mm (4?inch) and shall be permitted only with cable rated 600 volts or less.C.Conduit Fittings: Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows: Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable. 1.Electrical metallic tubing fittings: a.Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and ANSI/ NEMA FB1.b.Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.c.Couplings and connectors: Concrete tight and rain tight, with connectors having insulated throats. Use gland and ring compression type couplings and connectors for conduit sizes 50 mm (2 inches) and smaller. Use set screw type couplings with four set screws each for conduit sizes over 50 mm (2 inches). Use set screws of case-hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in wall of conduit for positive grounding.d.Indent type connectors or couplings are prohibited.e.Die-cast or pressure-cast zinc-alloy fittings or fittings made of "pot metal" are prohibited.D.Conduit Supports:1.Parts and hardware: Zinccoat or provide equivalent corrosion protection.2.Individual Conduit Hangers: Designed for the purpose, having a preassembled closure bolt and nut, and provisions for receiving a hanger rod.3.Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers: Not less than 38 mm by 38 mm (11/2 by 11/2 inch), 12 gage steel, cold formed, lipped channels; with not less than 9 mm (3/8 inch) diameter steel hanger rods.4.Solid Masonry and Concrete Anchors: Selfdrilling expansion shields, or machine bolt expansion.E.Outlet, Junction, and Pull Boxes:1.UL-50 and UL-514A.2.Cast metal where required by the NEC or shown, and equipped with rustproof boxes.3.Sheet metal boxes: Galvanized steel, except where otherwise shown.4.Flush mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with raised covers so that front face of raised cover is flush with the wall. Surface mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with surface style flat or raised covers.F. Wireways: Equip with hinged covers, except where removable covers are shown.PART 3 EXECUTION3.1 PENETRATIONSA.Cutting or Holes:1.Locate holes in advance where they are proposed in the structural sections such as ribs or beams. Obtain the approval of the COTR prior to drilling through structural sections.2.Cut holes through concrete and masonry in new and existing structures with a diamond core drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, hand or manual hammer type drills are not allowed, except where permitted by the COTR as required by limited working space.B.Fire Stop: Where conduits, wireways, and other communications raceways pass through fire partitions, fire walls, smoke partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases as specified in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING, with rock wool fiber or silicone foam sealant only. Completely fill and seal clearances between raceways and openings with the fire stop material.C.Waterproofing: At floor, exterior wall, and roof conduit penetrations, completely seal clearances around the conduit and make watertight as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERALA.Install conduit as follows:1.In complete runs before pulling in cables or wires.2.Flattened, dented, or deformed conduit is not permitted. Remove and replace the damaged conduits with new undamaged material.3.Assure conduit installation does not encroach into the ceiling height head room, walkways, or doorways.4.Cut square with a hacksaw, ream, remove burrs, and draw up tight.5.Mechanically continuous.6.Independently support conduit at 8’0” on center. Do not use other supports i.e., (suspended ceilings, suspended ceiling supporting members, lighting fixtures, conduits, mechanical piping, or mechanical ducts).7.Support within 300 mm (1 foot) of changes of direction, and within 300 mm (1 foot) of each enclosure to which connected.8.Close ends of empty conduit with plugs or caps at the roughin stage to prevent entry of debris, until wires are pulled in.9.Conduit installations under fume and vent hoods are prohibited.10.Secure conduits to cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes and outlet boxes with bonding type locknuts. For rigid and IMC conduit installations, provide a locknut on the inside of the enclosure, made up wrench tight. Do not make conduit connections to junction box covers.11.Flashing of penetrations of the roof membrane is specified in Section 07 60 00, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL.12.Do not use aluminum conduits in wet locations.13.Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein, all conduits shall be installed concealed within finished walls, floors and ceilings. B.Conduit Bends:1.Make bends with standard conduit bending machines.2.Conduit hickey may be used for slight offsets, and for straightening stubbed out conduits.3.Bending of conduits with a pipe tee or vise is prohibited.C.Layout and Homeruns:1.Deviations: Make only where necessary to avoid interferences and only after drawings showing the proposed deviations have been submitted approved by the COTR .3.3 CONCEALED WORK INSTALLATION A.Furred or Suspended Ceilings and in Walls:1.Conduit for conductors above 600 volts:a.Rigid steel or rigid aluminum.b.Aluminum conduit mixed indiscriminately with other types in the same system is prohibited.2.Conduit for conductors 600 volts and below:a.Rigid steel, or EMT. Different type conduits mixed indiscriminately in the same system is prohibited.3.Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.4.Connect recessed lighting fixtures to conduit runs with maximum 1800 mm (six feet) of flexible metal conduit extending from a junction box to the fixture.5.Tightening set screws with pliers is prohibited.3.4 EXPOSED WORK INSTALLATIONA.Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, exposed conduit is only permitted in mechanical and electrical rooms.B.Conduit for conductors above 600 volts:1.Rigid steel or rigid aluminum. 2.Aluminum conduit mixed indiscriminately with other types in the same system is prohibited.C.Conduit for Conductors 600 volts and below:1.Rigid steel, IMC, rigid aluminum, or EMT. Different type of conduits mixed indiscriminately in the system is prohibited.D.Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.E.Install horizontal runs close to the ceiling or beams and secure with conduit straps.F.Support horizontal or vertical runs at not over 2400 mm (eight foot) intervals.G.Surface metal raceways: Use only where shown.H.Painting:1.Paint exposed conduit as specified in Section09 91 00, PAINTING.2.Paint all conduits containing cables rated over 600 volts safety orange. Refer to Section 09 91 00, PAINTING for preparation, paint type, and exact color. In addition, paint legends, using 50 mm (two inch) high black numerals and letters, showing the cable voltage rating. Provide legends where conduits pass through walls and floors and at maximum 6000 mm (20 foot) intervals in between.3.5 EXPANSION JOINTSA.Conduits 75 mm (3 inches) and larger, that are secured to the building structure on opposite sides of a building expansion joint, require expansion and deflection couplings. Install the couplings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.B.Provide conduits smaller than 75 mm (3 inches) with junction boxes on both sides of the expansion joint. Connect conduits to junction boxes with sufficient slack of flexible conduit to produce 125 mm (5 inch) vertical drop midway between the ends. Flexible conduit shall have a copper green ground bonding jumper installed. In lieu of this flexible conduit, expansion and deflection couplings as specified above for 375 mm (15 inches) and larger conduits are acceptable.C.Install expansion and deflection couplings where shown.3.6 CONDUIT SUPPORTS, INSTALLATION A.Safe working load shall not exceed 1/4 of proof test load of fastening devices.B.Use pipe straps or individual conduit hangers for supporting individual conduits. Maximum distance between supports is 2.5 m (8 foot) on center.C.Support multiple conduit runs with trapeze hangers. Use trapeze hangers that are designed to support a load equal to or greater than the sum of the weights of the conduits, wires, hanger itself, and 90 kg (200 pounds). Attach each conduit with Ubolts or other approved fasteners.D.Support conduit independently of junction boxes, pull boxes, fixtures, suspended ceiling Tbars, angle supports, and similar items.E.Fasteners and Supports in Solid Masonry and Concrete:1.New Construction: Use steel or malleable iron concrete inserts set in place prior to placing the concrete.2.Existing Construction:a.Steel expansion anchors not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) bolt size and not less than 28 mm (11/8 inch) embedment.b.Power set fasteners not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) diameter with depth of penetration not less than 75 mm (3 inches).c.Use vibration and shock resistant anchors and fasteners for attaching to concrete ceilings.F.Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts are permitted. G.Bolts supported only by plaster or gypsum wallboard are not acceptable.H.Metal Structures: Use machine screw fasteners or other devices specifically designed and approved for the application.I.Attachment by wood plugs, rawl plug, plastic, lead or soft metal anchors, or wood blocking and bolts supported only by plaster is prohibited.J.Chain, wire, or perforated strap shall not be used to support or fasten conduit.K.Spring steel type supports or fasteners are prohibited for all uses except: Horizontal and vertical supports/fasteners within walls.L.Vertical Supports: Vertical conduit runs shall have riser clamps and supports in accordance with the NEC and as shown. Provide supports for cable and wire with fittings that include internal wedges and retaining collars.3.7 BOX INSTALLATION A.Boxes for Concealed Conduits:1.Flush mounted.2.Provide raised covers for boxes to suit the wall or ceiling, construction and finish.B.In addition to boxes shown, install additional boxes where needed to prevent damage to cables and wires during pulling in operations. C.Remove only knockouts as required and plug unused openings. Use threaded plugs for cast metal boxes and snapin metal covers for sheet metal boxes.D.Stencil or install phenolic nameplates on covers of the boxes identified on riser diagrams; for example "SIGFA JB No. 1". 3.8 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CONDUITA.Install the communication raceway system as shown on drawings.B.Minimum conduit size of 19 mm (3/4 inch), but not less than the size shown on the drawings.C.All conduit ends shall be equipped with insulated bushings.D.All 100 mm (four inch) conduits within buildings shall include pull boxes after every two 90 degree bends. Size boxes per the NEC.E.Vertical conduits/sleeves through closets floors shall terminate not less than 75 mm (3 inches) below the floor and not less than 75 mm (3 inches) below the ceiling of the floor below.F.Terminate conduit runs to/from a backboard in a closet or interstitial space at the top or bottom of the backboard. Conduits shall enter communication closets next to the wall and be flush with the backboard.G.Were drilling is necessary for vertical conduits, locate holes so as not to affect structural sections such as ribs or beams.H.All empty conduits located in communication closets or on backboards shall be sealed with a standard nonhardening duct seal compound to prevent the entrance of moisture and gases and to meet fire resistance requirements.I.Conduit runs shall contain no more than four quarter turns (90 degree bends) between pull boxes/backboards. Minimum radius of communication conduit bends shall be as follows (special long radius):Sizes of ConduitTrade SizeRadius of Conduit Bendsmm, Inches3/4150 (6)1230 (9)1-1/4350 (14)1-1/2430 (17)2525 (21)2-1/2635 (25)3775 (31)3-1/2900 (36)41125 (45)J.Furnish and install 19 mm (3/4 inch) thick fire retardant plywood specified in Section 06 10 00, ROUGH CARPENTRY on the wall of communication closets where shown on drawings . Mount the plywood with the bottom edge 300 mm (one foot) above the finished floor.K.Furnish and pull wire in all empty conduits. (Sleeves through floor are exceptions). E N D SECTION 27?41?41MASTER ANTENNA TV EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS -- EXTENSIONPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies the furnishing, installing and testing of a complete and operating extension of an existing master antenna TV system, and associated equipment. B.Interface the master antenna system extension with the existing systems and distribute the television signals to all locations indicated.1.2 RELATED WORKA.Section 27?05?11, REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS for general requirements that are common to all sections of Division 27.1.3 system descriptionA.The MATV Extension system shall provide adjacent channel operation of the 35 television channels currently distributed at the site.B.The MATV Extension system shall receive the VHF and converted UHF TV channel signals from the existing MATV System and shall process and distribute them to the designated TV outlets indicated on the drawings. C.The Contractor is not responsible for the condition of the signals of the existing MATV system. However, the Contractor is required to optimize the TV signals without compromising the existing MATV system. If trouble is found in the exiting system, notify the Resident Engineer in writing of the nature of troubles, and the expected effect on the signals in the extension system.D.The system shall include but not be limited to: interface cabinet; necessary combiners and filters; distribution amplifiers; cable and connectors; and necessary passive devices such as splitters, directional couplers, TV outlets and taps.E.System layout that loops the RF cable from room to room is not acceptable. Each floor or ward distribution system shall be a “tap” design where each room’s TV outlet is fed from a directional multi-tap provided from a centrally located (usually in the corridor) lateral trunkline cable. Each ward or floor lateral trunkline cable shall be connected to a vertical trunkline riser cable in the associated signal closet. Each vertical riser trunkline cable shall be connected to the headend output. Distribution (floor or riser) amplifiers shall be provided to satisfy system’s TV outlet signal level requirements.F.The MATV Extension system shall connect TV receivers as follows: 1.Standard CATV capable TV receivers to the designated TV outlets in day rooms, waiting rooms, recreation rooms, and other non-patient areas.1.4 performance requirementsA.The signal level of each channel at each TV outlet shall be ± 10 dBmV, plus or minus 5 dB across 75 Ohms:B.The MATV Extension system shall meet the following minimum parameters at each TV outlet. The signal quality at the interface point shall not be less than the stated minimum parameters:1.Signal-To-Noise Ratio: -44 dB2.Cross Modulation: -46 dB3.Hum Modulation: -55 dB4.Return Loss: -14 dB5.Isolation (outlet-outlet): 24 dB6.Visual to Aural Carrier Ratio: 13 dB to 17 dB below visual7.Impedance: 75 ohms1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA.Manufacturer Qualifications:1.The manufacturer shall have had experience with three or more installations of systems of comparable size and complexity as regards to coordinating, engineering, testing, and supervising. Each of these installations shall have been in successful operation for one or more years.2.Prior to review of submittals, Department of Veterans Affairs (VA) reserves the right to:a.Have the manufacturer submit a list of locations of similar installations.b.Inspect any of these installations and question the user concerning the installations without the presence of the supplier.B.Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this project:1.Testing Personnel: An employee of the installer, certified by National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) as Video Security Systems Level III technician.C.Standards and Testing: All supplies, materials or equipment shall be listed, labeled, or certified by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to comply with referenced UL Standards.1.6 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01?33?23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES and Section 27?05?11, REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS.1.Submittals shall also be marked to show specification reference including the section and paragraph number.2.Concurrent Review: For Architect-Engineer projects, submit additional three copies of submittals.B.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the quantity, make and model number of each item.C.Shop Drawings:1.Narrative description of system. 2.A List of the equipment to be furnished. The quantity, make, and model number of each item is required.3.Interface cabinet layout drawing, as it is to be installed.4.Equipment technical literature detailing the electrical and technical characteristics of each item of equipment to be furnished.5.Engineering drawings of the system, showing calculated signal levels at each input and output point in the system with the proposed signal levels at each tap off point, and signal level at each TV outlet jack.6.Detailed schematics of subsystems, assemblies and subassemblies to component level, clearly presented, to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.D.Field Quality Assurance: 1.Test Plan: Submit the test plan prior to pretesting for evaluation and approval.2.List of test equipment.3.Letter certifying that the Contractor understands the requirements of the SAMPLES 4.Letter certifying that the Contractor understands the requirements of Part 3 concerning tests.5.Submit test reports.E.Test Equipment List: Unless otherwise stated, the test equipment shall not be considered part of the system. Test equipment shall be of accuracy better than the parameters to be tested, and shall have a calibration tag of an acceptable calibration service dated not more than 12 months prior to the test. The list shall include the make, model number of the following type of equipment as a minimum:1.Spectrum Analyzer2.Signal Level Meter3.Volt-ohm Meter4.Color TV Receiver5.Hospital grade pillow Speaker, with TV remote control cable terminating in the multi pin connector.F.Pretesting Certification: After the system has been installed, aligned, balanced, pretested and found to meet the requirements of this specification, submit a letter to the Resident Engineer certifying that the system is ready for the formal acceptance test. Include a copy of the pretest measurements with the certification.G.As-Installed Wiring Diagrams: Five working days prior to the acceptance test, deliver four complete sets of as-installed wiring diagrams of the system(s). The diagrams shall show all inputs and outputs of electronic and passive equipment correctly identified according to the markers installed on the interconnecting cables. The wiring diagrams shall show the signal levels of the visual and aural carriers of each TV channel at the input and output of all electronic equipment, beginning and end of each distribution line and the TV outlets.H.Guarantee Period Services: List the entities that will certify the system and who will perform the guarantee period services. The listing shall include a company brochure, and name - title - normal and emergency telephone numbers of the individuals providing the services.1.7 GUARANTEE PERIOD SERVICESA.Furnish and guarantee maintenance service for the system using authorized representatives of the Contractor performing the installation of work of this Section, for a period of one year after acceptance of the installation by the VA.B.Maintenance service shall include the following: 1.Monthly preventive maintenance of equipment, minimum. Coordinate time of the maintenance with the VAMC, Chief Engineering Service.2.Responding to calls within 4 hours of notification of system troubles. 3.Repairing and replacing parts and equipment as necessary to keep the system in optimum operating condition and proper working order. 4.Furnishing tools, test instruments, and parts required.C.Work Not Included: Maintenance service shall not include the performance of any work due to improper use, accidents, or negligence for which the Contractor is not directly responsible.1.8 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in text by basic designation only.B.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):70-05National Electrical Code780-04Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems99-05Standard for Health Care FacilitiesC.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1410-97 (R01)Television Receivers and High-Voltage Video Products1069-01 (R06)Standard for Hospital Signaling and Nurse Call Equipment1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA.Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in manufacturer's original unopened containers, clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name and equipment model identification number.B.Storage and Handling: Store and protect equipment in a manner which will preclude damage.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALSA.Master antenna TV equipment shall be new and the current model of a standard product of an original equipment manufacturer whose main business is the manufacture for sale of the items of equipment specified, and which complies with the following: 1.Maintains a factory production line for the item submitted.2.Maintains a stock of replacement parts for the item submitted.3.Maintains engineering drawings, specifications, and operating manuals for the items submitted.4.Has published and distributed descriptive literature and equipment specifications on each item of equipment offered.2.2 EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITYWhen electrically associated with other equipment; the total system shall be designed and installed so that the combination of equipment actually employed does not produce undesirable effects such as signal distortion, noise pulses, glitches, hum bars, transients, ghosting, tilting, and flutter.2.3 general equipment requirementsA.Active component equipment shall consist of solid state components, be rated for continuous duty service, comply with the requirements of FCC Docket No. 21006 and be provided with "F" connectors unless otherwise specified.B.Passive distribution equipment shall be provided with "F" connectors unless otherwise specified.C.Trunk, branch and interconnecting coaxial cables and unused ports/taps shall be terminated with a 75 ohm terminating resistor designed for MATV cable systems without adapters.D.Service Conditions: Intercommunications equipment shall be capable of operating continuously in the following environmental condition without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of service:1.Input Voltage: 120 V rms plus or minus 10 percent.2.Input Frequency: 60 Hz.3.Ambient Temperature: Zero to 40 degrees C.4.Humidity: 0 to 80 percent relative, non-condensing.5.Antennas and their supports shall withstand adverse environmental conditions and 161 km/h (100 mph) winds without damage.E.Equipment shall be rated for continuous duty.2.4 DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENTA.Amplifier, Broadband: The broadband amplifier shall provide 35 adjacent TV channel operation with separate adjustable gain and slope controls. It shall be UL approved with integral lightning/surge protection. 1.Frequency Response: plus or minus 1.5 dB, 54-300 MHz2.Noise Figure: 10 dB Max.3.Output Capability: 45 dBmV minimum, 35 channels4.Cross Modulation: minus 46 dB5.Gain Control Range: 10 dB6.Slope Control: 0-8 dB @ 300 MHzB.Splitter/Mixer: The splitter/mixer shall be ruggedized construction in a radiation proof metal housing. It shall provide multiple isolated outputs from a single input, or conversely, a single output from multiple isolated inputs.1.Bandpass: 5-300 MHz2.Tap-Tap Isolation: 17 dB3.Splitting Loss:a.2-Way: 4 dB Max.b.4-Way: 7.5 dB Max.c.8-Way: 12 dB Max. C.Directional Coupler: The directional coupler shall be encased in a ruggedized radiation proof metal housing.1.Outputs: 1 each2.Insertion Loss: 1.3 dB Max.3.Tap Loss: 8 dB minimum 4.Isolation Tap-Output: 25 dB Minimum5.Bandpass: 5-300 MHz D.Directional Multi-Tap: The multi-tap shall be a directional coupler type and encased in a ruggedized radiation-proof metal housing. It shall come in multiple tap values.1.Tap Loss: 10 dB minimum 2.Bandpass: 5-300 MHz 3.Insertion Loss: 3.7 dB maximum4.Isolation: Tap to output: 28 dB5.Isolation: Tap to tap: 23 dB 6.Outputs: Two, Four & Eight7.Match: 14 dB Receiver Wall Outlet:1.The TV receiver wall outlet shall consist of an RF jack.When installed with a duplex AC outlet, a partitioned 100 x 100 mm (4" X 4") or 50 x 100 (2" x 4") steel outlet box shall be used.2.The wall outlet shall be fed from a directional coupler or be a directional coupler.2.5COAXIAL CABLEA.The coaxial cable shall be an RG-11 double shielded, certified 100% sweep tested by the manufacturer by tags on each reel. The tags and a two foot sample shall be delivered to the COTR prior to installation. The cable shall be able to pass the frequency spectrum from 5 to 890 MHz.1.Center Conductor: 18 AWG copper-clad steel2.Dielectric: Foam3.Jacket: Black PVC or PE, UL 1685 Type CATV or CM4.Temperature Rating: 80 degrees C5.Impedance: 75 OhmB.Attenuation for the following frequencies at a maximum indicated dB per 30 m (100 feet):1.7 MHz: 0.62.54 MHz: 1.83.216 MHz: 3.54.470 MHz: 4.7 5.890 MHz: 7.0C.Coaxial Cable Terminators: These units shall be metal housed precision types in the frequency ranges selected.1.Frequency:a.5-890 MHz.b.200-1500 MHz.c.3000-5000 MHz.2.Power Blocking: As required, 1.5:1 Max.3.Return Loss: 25 dB.4.Connectors: "F", unless otherwise indicated.5.Impedance: 75 Ohms, unless otherwise indicated.2.6 TV RECEIVER CONNECTIONSA.Coaxial Cable: Provide one connecting cable for each TV outlet in the MATV system plus 10% spares. The cable shall connect the TV receiver to the RF jack. 1.Length: 1800 mm (6 feet).2.Cable: RG-6 double shielded type. 3.Connector: Snap-on "F" at MATV outlet end and screw-on "F" at receiver end. Receiver Matching Transformer: Provide 75 to 300 Ohm matching transformers, in a quantity equal to 10% of the TV wall outlets. The matching transformer shall have metal case or other means to reduce local pickup (ghosting) at the TV receiver input.1.Insertion loss: UHF - 1.5 dB, VHF - 0.5 dB.2.Return loss: UHF - 12 dB, VHF - 20 dB.3.Balance: UHF - 30 dB, VHF - 35 d. Receiver Ceiling/Wall Mount:1.Install mounts where indicated, using factory made accessories, braces and back plates, as needed for secure mounting.2.The mount shall be able to be swiveled, tilted and locked, and be adjustable in width for 480 mm (19") TV receivers. 3.The installation of mounts shall be approved by the Resident Engineer. Allow at least 1980 mm (78 inches) headroom under the mount when installed in a location where personnel may walk directly under it.2.7 RF CONNECTORS:A."F" Connectors: Screw type coupling for quick connect/disconnect of coaxial cable terminations. Crimp on integral ferrule connector designed to fit the coaxial cable furnished. 1.Working Voltage: 500 V.2.Frequency Range: 0 to 890 MHz.3.Impedance: 75 Ohms.B."UHF" Connectors: Screw type coupling for quick connect/disconnect of coaxial cable terminations. It shall be a crimp on connector designed to fit the coaxial cable furnished. 1.Working Voltage: 500 V.2.Frequency Range: 0 to 890 MHz.3.Impedance: 75 Ohms.C."BNC" Connectors: Bayonet locking coupling for quick connect/disconnect of coaxial cable terminations.1.Working Voltage: 500 V.2.Frequency Range: 0-890 MHz.3.Impedance: 75 Ohms.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATIONA.Install equipment according to NFPA 70, accepted industry standards of good practice, the requirements of this specification, and in a manner which does not constitute a safety hazard:ply with NECA 1.B.Insure that installation personnel understand the requirements of this specification.C.Install suitable filters, traps, and pads for minimizing interference and for balancing the amplifiers and distribution system:1.Filters, splitters, couplers, tap-offs, matching transformers and TV wall outlets shall be able to pass color TV channels in the frequency bands selected, in the directions specified, with low loss, and high isolation and with minimum delay of the color subcarrier frequency. 2.Install all equipment necessary to meet the requirements of Part 2 paragraph "Equipment Compatibility" and the system performance standards.D.Connect passive equipment according to the manufacturer's specification to insure correct termination, isolation impedance match, and signal level balance at each outlet.E.Identification: Cables shall be labeled with permanent markers at the terminals of the electronic and passive equipment. The lettering on the cables shall correspond with the lettering on the as-installed diagrams.F.Outlet Installation: Where TV receivers are installed adjacent to each other in bedrooms, install MATV outlets for each receiver.G.Cable Terminations: 1.All lines shall be terminated in a suitable manner to facilitate future expansion of the MATV system. There shall be a minimum of one spare output at each distribution point on each floor.2.Terminating resistors shall be used to terminate unused branches, outlets and unused equipment ports of the system and shall be devices designed for the purpose of terminating coaxial cable carrying TV signals in MATV systems.3.Equipment installed outdoors shall be weatherproof or installed in weatherproof enclosures with hinged doors and locks with 2 keys.3.2 SYSTEM cabling:A.Install cabling in raceway, and cable tray, except within cabinets. Conceal raceway and cables, except in unfinished spaces. MATV cables shall not be installed in AC power conduits:1.Cable in raceway shall be NFPA Type CMG.2.Cable in cable tray in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceiling spaces, shall be NFPA Type CMP.B.Raceway and boxes shall be as specified in Section 27?05?33, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.C.Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain non-terminated elements. Make terminations only at outlets, equipment terminals, and in terminal cabinets. Cables may not be spliced:1.Connectors shall be installed using the connector manufacturer's approved crimping tool.D.Cold-weather installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps may not be used.3.3. AC PowerA.Connect branch AC circuits which supply power to the MATV system to a single panel board and shall clearly indicate on the directory in the panel board that the circuits supply power to the system.B.Install a 120 volt AC branch circuit, wired to a separate breaker, from the power panel to each equipment cabinet:1.Provide AC power outlets that are convenient to each item of equipment in the equipment cabinet and to each TV receiver wall outlet.3.4 GROUNDINGA.Ground installed equipment in accordance with the Section 27?05?26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS to eliminate shock hazards and to minimize ground loops, noise pickup, or other interferences:1.Ground wires for equipment shall be at least No. 14 AWG stranded copper wire.2.Ground wires for equipment cabinets or racks shall be at least No. 10 AWG stranded copper wire. 3.5 Equipment AssemblyA.Equipment installed indoors shall be installed in equipment cabinets so as to be accessible for maintenance without interference to other nearby equipment.B.Equipment shall be installed with sufficient vertical separation to insure adequate air circulation. Any cabinet, in which the ambient temperature shall exceed 45 degrees C at the top, shall be equipped with a quiet thermostatically controlled fan. The cabinet shall be designed to provide air flow around equipment.C.Cables shall enter the equipment cabinets in such a manner that doors shall open and close without disturbing or damaging the cables.3.6 TESTSA.Pretesting:1.Upon completing installation of the MATV system extension, align, balance and completely pretest the entire MATV system. After pre-testing and only after pre-testing, the system shall be formally tested in the presence of a Government representative.2.Verify (utilizing the approved spectrum analyzer and signal level meter) that the system is fully operational and meets all system performance requirements of this specification.3.Measure and record the visual and aural carrier levels of each channel at each of the following points:a.Head-end signal level and signal-to-noise ratio for each TV channel specified. b.Distribution amplifier inputs and outputs. c.Last outlet or splitter of each feeder. d.A random sampling of 25% of TV outlets, selected by the Resident Engineer.4.After pretest measurements are made, the system shall be left to "burn-in" until the final inspection is completed.5.A copy of the recorded system pretest measurements and the written certification that the system is ready for the formal acceptance test shall be submitted to the Resident Engineer. B.Acceptance Testing:1.Notify the Resident Engineer in writing seven days after the pre-test has been completed and 30 days prior to the date acceptance testing is expected to begin. Test system in the presence of a Government Representative. Verify that the total system meets the requirements of the specification and complies with all appropriate standards listed in this specification.2.The notification of the acceptance test shall include the expected length of the test in days.3.The acceptance test shall be performed on a "go/no-go" basis. Only those operator adjustments required to show proof-of-performance shall be allowed. The test shall demonstrate and verify that the installed MATV system does comply with the operational and technical requirements of this specification under operating conditions. The MATV system shall be rated as either acceptable or unacceptable at the conclusion of the rest. Failure of any part of the system which precludes completion of system testing, which cannot be repaired in four (4) hours, shall be cause for terminating the test of the MATV system. Repeated failures which result in a cumulative time of eight (8) hours to effect repairs shall cause the entire MATV system to be declared unacceptable. Retesting of the entire MATV system shall be rescheduled at the convenience of the Government.C.Acceptance Test Procedure:1.Inspection:a.The Government representative will tour major areas to insure that MATV systems are completely and properly installed in place, and are operationally ready for proof-of-performance testing. Failure of the MATV system to meet the installation requirements of this specification shall be grounds for terminating all testing. b.The MATV system diagrams, as-installed drawings, equipment manuals, AUTO CAD Disks, and pretest measurements shall be reviewed before testing is resumed.2.Interface Point Test:a.Signal Level Test: After the inspection, the MATV signals at the interface point shall be tested to verify that it meets performance requirements utilizing the spectrum analyzer or signal level meter.b.Receiver Test: Following the Signal Level Test, a standard television color receiver shall be connected to the interface point test tap output with suitable attenuator pad(s). View each TV channel to verify that there are no visible signal distortions such as intermodulation (windshield wiper effect), ghosting, and beats on any channel.3.Distribution System Testing:a.Using a spectrum analyzer or signal level meter, and a TV receiver, check the first and last outlet in each feeder of the MATV distribution system, to verify that the distribution system meets performance requirements. Test functions of TV outlets that are controlled by a Nurse Call Pillow Speaker, at the same time.b.Test a random sample of at least 25% of the TV outlets, selected by the Resident Engineer, for signal level and for picture quality with a color receiver; unless incorrect levels indicate that a wider sample should be taken.4.Revise as-installed wiring diagrams to show adjustments made during acceptance testing.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 27 51 19SOUND MASKING SYSTEMPART 1 - GENERAL1.1APPLICABLE PROVISIONS OF THE CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION #1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, GOVERN WORK IN THIS SECTION.1.2DESCRIPTION OF WORKA.The work of this Section consists of the provision of all plant, materials, labor and equipment and the like necessary and/or required for the complete execution of all Sound Masking System and related work for this project, as required by the schedules, and keynotes and drawings.B.Functional Requirements of Systems:1.Distribute sound masking to all areas as indicated on the drawings.2.Distribute paging signals to all areas as indicated on the drawings.3.Distribute background music signals to all areas as indicated on the drawings.C.All active electronic components shall be conveniently accessible for service. Systems using above-ceiling active electronics are not permitted.D. Definitions:1.Privacy Index: According to American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard E1130.2.Octave and 1/3-Octave Bands: Centered on ANSI/ISO preferred frequencies.3.Sound Level Meter and Filter Set: Calibrated ANSI Type 1 or Type 2.4.Pink Noise: Constant energy in constant percentage (e.g. 1/1 or 1/3 octave) frequency bands, random or pseudo-random noise.5.SPL: Sound pressure level in dB re 0.00002 Pa (0.0002 microbar).6.ISO: International Standards Organization7.NEC: National Electrical Code8.UL: Underwriters Laboratories1.3SUBMITTALSA.General:1.Delivery Schedule:a.By date specified for delivery of bid package provide:1)Qualifications/References.2)Certifications (including certificate of bonding, if required by COTR).3)Shop drawings.4)Bill of materials.5)Manufacturer product data sheets.1.4JOB CONDITIONSA.Sequencing and Scheduling:1.Coordinate work with adjacent work of other trades to facilitate construction and prevent conflicts.2.Afford other trades reasonable opportunity for installation of work and for the storage of materials.3.Refuse: Remove all refuse from the job site to the satisfaction of the COTR.1.5WARRANTYA.Warrant all equipment to be free of faulty workmanship and defects and from damage due to contamination by construction dust and debris for a minimum period of one year from date of final acceptance for control modules and five years from date of final acceptance for loudspeakers.1.6SERVICE CONTRACT (NOT USED)1.7TRAININGA.The Owner may assign personnel to participate with the contractor during installation. Without delaying the work, familiarize the Owner's personnel with the installation, equipment, and maintenance.B.During tests and adjustments, permit the Owner's personnel to observe. When feasible explain the significance of each test.C.Provide sufficient training to personnel selected by the Owner on operation and basic maintenance of all systems and equipment. Explain operation of control systems, set-up and operation of individual pieces of equipment, and functions of overall systems.1.8INSPECTIONA.Notify the Architect of any defects in work by other trades affecting installation.PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1GENERALA.The loudspeakers shall be direct field, radiating directly into the space. B.The sound masking and paging/music system shall have controllers that power one controllable zones. The system shall provide:1.One wall-mounted controller, with one or more zones and one or more line level audio inputs.2.Four uncorrelated noise sources per zone. The signals to adjacent loudspeakers shall be uncorrelated.3.Direct field loudspeakers that automatically sequence the four noise channels and that are mounted either in office ceiling tiles or other enclosures.4.Cat 3/5/6 preterminated cable assemblies.2.2LABELSA.Except where otherwise specified, label each item of control equipment as shown on drawings.1.Controllers: Constructed of engraved and filled anodized aluminum plates. Minimum 1/8” plate thickness. Dry transfer or other types of adhesive labels not acceptable.2.Identification Panel: Install panel with 1/8”-high engraved characters. Clearly identify the Project, System Installation Contractor, and Project Architect. B. Identify all wires and cables at every connection point to controllers with reference number keyed to the as-built wiring diagrams.C.Room numbers appear on the contract documents for reference only. All labels shall reflect the Owner’s final room designations.D.Cable Markers:1.High-grade PVC clip-on or permanent-type cable markers with permanent markings, or printed vinyl tape protected by clear shrink tubing or adhesive wrap. 2.Acceptable Product:2.3MANUFACTURERSA.Basis of Design Manufacturer: Speech Privacy Systems, 1100 Jupiter #121 Plano, Texas 75074. (866) 557-8438. 2.4RANDOM NOISE GENERATOR AND CONTROLLERA.4 Channel Generator/Controller with Remote Control1.Wall mountable Random Noise Generator with 4 uncorrelated outputs.2.Built-in infrared receiver for controlling output level. Output level adjustable in 3 dB steps over a minimum range of 9 decibels, and off. All outputs controlled simultaneously with provided remote control.3.Two available fixed output spectra specifically matched to provided loudspeakers for distributing acoustical background sound spectrum appropriate for spaces with or without partial height partitions. Spectrum selection not accessible to user control.4.Minimum Performance Requirements:a.Supply Voltage: 110 VAC using provided UL listed 12 volt modular power supply. b.Maximum Power Consumption: 6 Wattsc.Output Voltage: 10 volts RMS, each channeld.(Optional) Paging Input: 600 ohm line bridging, differentiale.Minimum Output Power: Sufficient to drive the emitters (loudspeakers) to specified background sound pressure level.f.Maximum Dimensions: 8” X 8” X 1.5”.g.Basis of Design Products:1)VoiceArrest? Model VA-30 (max. 30 emitters).2.5DISTRIBUTED EMITTERSA. Miniature self-contained ceiling mounted loudspeaker/enclosure/baffle system.1.Designed specifically for distributing sound in background sound systems and combined background sound/paging systems. Wide dispersion to maximize spatial uniformity of sound in the area of coverage.2.Convenient twist and lock retaining ring construction to minimize installation time and provide a secure attachment to ceiling tiles or other mounting surface.3.Built in signal logic to automatically select correct channel of distribution.4.All connections via RJ45 data-style connectors for quick installation.5.Eye loop for securing unit with safety wire6.Dimensions: 3 5/16” baffle diameter, 2 ?” height.7.Weight: 5.6 oz maximum.8.Basis of Design Products:a.VoiceArrest? Model VA-SE Emitter2.6LOUDSPEAKER CABLINGA.CAT3, CAT5, or CAT6 patch cables terminated with RJ45 connector at each end.1.Unshielded stranded twisted pair construction.2.Meet EIA/TIA Standard 568B 3.AWG #24 stranded conductors with overall plenum-rated jacket.4.Basis of Design Products:a.VoiceArrest? Model VA-Cxxx (xxx=length) Plenum-Rated Emitter Cable Assembly b.Approved equalPART 3 - EXECUTION3.1GENERALA.All types of equipment installed by competent workers at locations shown on the drawings in strict accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions.B.All equipment except portable equipment firmly held in place. This shall include loudspeakers, enclosures, amplifiers, cables, etc. Fastenings and supports adequate to support their loads with a safety factor of at least three unless otherwise stated.C.Take such precautions as necessary to prevent and guard against electro-magnetic and electro-static hum and to install the equipment so as to provide safety for the operator.3.2GENERATOR/CONTROLLERA. Locate Generator/Controllers as shown on drawings, and near an available 110VAC receptacle. B.Locate at a convenient location for operation from floor level.C.Mount Generator/Controller and Processor securely to wall or other vertical surface with screws or mounting brackets provided. D.Attach line level and loudspeaker cables connecting to controllers securely with suitable strain-relief clamps. E.Identify all loudspeaker home run wires and cables at termination and connection points with approved cable markers. Label each cable with cable marker keyed to a wiring schedule indicating the corresponding area of building served. Designate building floor level and zone, and whether area served is open plan, enclosed offices, circulation or other.3.3LOUDSPEAKERS (IN CEILING TILES)A.Cut hole in center of each ceiling tile using the hole saw provided or similar. B.Taking care not to visibly distort tile, slip provided locking collar on back of loudspeaker and firmly tighten against ceiling.C.Connect cabling to loudspeakers with system live, starting at controller end of distribution lines. Connect line from output of operating controller set to maximum output to socket designated as input on loudspeaker. Verify operation of each loudspeaker by listening before tile is finally installed in ceiling. If loudspeaker does not operate, fault may be in lines or defective loudspeakers upstream of inoperative unit: correct before continuing. Note that inadvertent connection of line to output of loudspeaker rather than to input will cause some downstream loudspeakers (up to 4 loudspeakers after misconnected unit) to be rendered inoperative.3.4LOUDSPEAKER CABLINGA.Cabling routed within return air plenums shall be plenum-rated unless installed in conduit.B.Using a CAT cable tester, test all field fabricated cables, before installation, for open circuits, shorts, crossed pairs, reversed pairs, split pairs and proper pin-out.C.Install signal cables secured to ceiling hanger support or building structure electrical requirements. Cabling shall not contact ceiling tiles or inhibit their removal for access to the plenum. Provide adequate service loop for convenient access to loudspeaker.3.5SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTSA.Precaution:1.Test and adjust the system while personnel who occupy or will occupy the coverage area are not present (if possible) and before initial occupancy. Thereafter, leave system off until completion of final adjustments and acceptance tests.2.The precautions ensure that occu?pants are not subjected to incorrectly installed or adjusted noise levels or spectra.B.Initial Test and Adjustments: Perform the following tests and adjustments:1.Loudspeaker Operation: Listen directly below each installed emitter to confirm it is operating.2.Replace any defective emitters or cabling, or otherwise correct cause for any emitters found to be operating outside this range.3.Buzzes, Rattles, and Distortion: With system operating at maximum level, listen for any buzzes, rattles, and objectionable distortion in all areas covered. Correct all causes of these defects.4.Control Settings: Adjust all spectrum and level controls for normal operation. Using the remote control adjust average initial levels in open plan areas to approximately 45 dBA at normal occupant’s locations and in closed offices or rooms to approximately 42 dBA.5.Reports: Submit certification that the installation is complete and ready for checkout as specified under SUBMITTALS in PART 1 - GENERAL.3.6FINAL ADJUSTMENTS AND ACCEPTANCE TESTSA.Demonstrate to the COTR that the system is fully operable and installed in compliance with the terms of the specifications in all contract documents.- - - E N D - - -SECTION 27 52 23NURSE CALLPART 1 - GENERAL1.1 SECTION SUMMARYA.Work covered by this document includes design, engineering, labor, material and products, equipment warranty and system guarantee, training and services for, and incidental to, the complete installation of new devices to an existing Hill-Rom NaviCare system and fully operating National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) – Life Safety Code 101.3-2 (a) Labeled and (b) Listed, Emergency Service Nurse-Call and associated equipment (here-in-after referred to as the System) provided in approved locations indicated on the contract drawings. These items shall be tested and certified capable of receiving, distributing, interconnecting and supporting Nurse-Call System.B.Work shall be complete, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), National Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL – i.e. Underwriters Laboratory [UL]) Listed and Labeled; and VA Central Office (VACO), Telecommunications Voice Engineering (TVE 005OP3B) tested, certified and ready for operation.C.The System shall be delivered free of engineering, manufacturing, installation, and functional defects. It shall be designed, engineered and installed for ease of operation, maintenance, and testing.D.The term “provide”, as used herein, shall be defined as: designed, engineered, furnished, installed, certified, tested, and guaranteed by the Contractor.E.Specification Order of Precedence: In the event of a conflict between the text of this document and the Project’s Contract Drawings outlined and/or cited herein; THE TEXT OF THIS DOCUMENT TAKES PRECEDENCE. HOWEVER, NOTHING IN THIS DOCUMENT WILL SUPERSEDE APPLICABLE EMERGENCY LAWS AND REGULATIONS, SPECIFICALLY NATIONAL AND/OR LOCAL LIFE AND PUBLIC SAFETY CODES. The Local Fire Marshall and/or VA Public Safety Officer are the only authorities that may modify this document’s EMERGENCY CODE COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS, on a case by case basis, in writing and confirmed by VA’s Project Manager (PM), Resident Engineer (RE) and TVE-005OP3B. The VA PM is the only approving authority for other amendments to this document that may be granted, on a case by case basis, in writhing with technical concurrencies by VA’s PM, COTR, TVE-005OP3B and identified Facility Project Personnel.F.The Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) and Contractor shall ensure that all management, sales, engineering and installation personnel have read and understand the requirements of this specification before the system is designed, engineered, delivered and provided. The Contractor shall furnish a written statement stating this requirement as a part of the technical submittal that includes each name and certification, including the OEMs. The Contractor is cautioned to obtain in writing, all approvals for system changes relating to the published contract specifications and drawings, from the PM and/or the COTR before proceeding with the change.1.2 RELATED SECTIONSA.01 33 23 – Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.B.07 84 00 – Firestopping.C.26 05 19 – Low – Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (600 Volts and Below).D.27 05 33 – Raceways and Boxes for Communications Systems.1.3 DEFINITIONA.Provide: Design, engineer, furnish, install, connect complete, test, certify and guarantee.B.Work: Materials furnished and completely installed.C.Review of contract drawings: A service by the engineer to reduce the possibility of materials being ordered which do not comply with contract documents. The engineer's review shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for dimensions or compliance with the contract documents. The reviewer's failure to detect an error does not constitute permission for the Contractor to proceed in error.D.Headquarters (aka VACO) Technical Review, for National and VA Communications and Security, Codes, Frequency Licensing Standards, Guidelines and Compliance:Office of Telecommunications Special Communications Team (005OP3B)1335 East West Highway – 3rd Floor Silver Spring, Maryland 20910,(O) 301-734-0350, (F) 301-734-0360E.EngineerF.Owner G.General Contractor (GC)H.Contractor: Systems Contractor; you; successful bidder.1.4 REFERENCESA.The installation shall comply fully with all governing authorities, laws and ordinances, regulations, codes and standards, including, but not limited to:1.United States Federal Law:a.Departments of:1)Commerce, Consolidated Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 15 – Under the Information Technology Management Reform Act (Public Law 104-106), the Secretary of Commerce approves standards and guidelines that are developed by the:a)Chapter II, National Institute of Standards Technology (NIST – formerly the National Bureau of Standards). Under Section 5131 of the Information Technology Management Reform Act of 1996 and the Federal Information Security Management Act of 2002 (Public Law 107-347), NIST develops – Federal Information Processing Standards Publication (FIPS) 140-2—Security Requirements for Cryptographic Modules.b)Chapter XXIII, National Telecommunications and Information Administration (NTIA – aka ‘Red Book’) Chapter 7.8 / 9; CFR, Title 47 Federal communications Commission (FCC) Part 15, Radio Frequency Restriction of Use and Compliance in “Safety of Life” Functions & Locations.2) FCC - Communications Act of 1934, as amended, CFR, Title 47 – Telecommunications, in addition to Part 15 – Restrictions of use for Part 15 listed Radio Equipment in Safety of Life / Emergency Functions / Equipment/ Locations (also see CFR, Title 15 – Department of Commerce, Chapter XXIII – NTIA):a)Part 15 – Restrictions of use for Part 15 listed Radio Equipment in Safety of Life / Emergency Functions / Equipment/Locations.b)Part 58 – Television Broadcast Service.c)Part 90 – Rules and Regulations, Appendix C.3)Health, (Public Law 96-88), CFR, Title 42, Chapter IV Health & Human Services, CFR, Title 46, Subpart 1395(a)(b) JCAHO “a hospital that meets JCAHO accreditation is deemed to meet the Medicare conditions of Participation by meeting Federal Directives:”a)All guidelines for Life, Personal and Public Safety; and, Essential and Emergency Communications.4)Labor, CFR, Title 29, Part 1910, Chapter XVII - Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), Occupational Safety and Health Standard:a)Subpart 7 - Definition and requirements (for a NRTL – 15 Labatory’s, for complete list, contact ():1)UL:a)44-02 – Standard for Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cablesb)65 – Standard for Wired Cabinetsc)83-03 – Standard for Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables.d)467-01 – Standard for Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipmente)468 – Standard for Grounding and Bonding Equipment.f)486A-01 – Standard for Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductorsg)486C-02 – Standard for Splicing Wire Connectors.h)486D-02 – Standard for Insulated Wire Connector Systems for Underground Use or in Damp or Wet Locationsi)486E-00 – Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for Use with Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors.j)493-01 – Standard for Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch Circuit Cablek)514B-02 – Standard for Fittings for Cable and Conduitl)1069 – Hospital Signaling and Nurse Call Equipmentm)1449 – Standard for Transient Voltage Surge Suppressorsn)1479-03 – Standard for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stopso)1666 – Standard for Wire/Cable Vertical (Riser) Tray Flame Testsp)1863 – Standard for Safety, Communications Circuits Accessoriesq)60950-1/2 – Information Technology Equipment – Safety2)Communications Certifications Labatory (CCL): same tests as for UL.3)Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc. (ITSNA formerly Edison Testing Labatory [ETL]): same tests as for UL. b)Subpart 35 – Compliance with NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code.c)Subpart 36 - Design and construction requirements for exit routes.d)Subpart 268 - Telecommunications.e)Subpart 305 - Wiring methods, components, and equipment for general use.4)Department of Transportation, CFR, Title 49 (Public Law 89-670), Part 1, Subpart C – Federal Aviation Administration (FAA):a)Standards AC 110/460-ID & AC 707 / 460-2E – Advisory Circulars for Construction of Antenna Towersb)Forms 7450 and 7460-2 – Antenna Construction Registration.5)Veterans Affairs (Public Law No. 100-527), CFR, Title 38, Volumes I & II:a)Office of Telecommunications:1)Handbook 6100 – Telecommunications.a)Spectrum Management FCC & NTIA Radio Frequency Compliance and Licensing Programb)Special Communications Proof of Performance Testing, VACO Compliance and Life Safety Certification(s)b)Office of Cyber and Information Security (OCIS):1)Handbook 6500 - Information Security Program.2)Wireless and Handheld Device Security Guideline Version 3.2, August 15, 2005.c)VA’s National Center for Patient Safety – Veterans Health Administration Warning System, Failure of Medical Alarm Systems using Paging Technology to Notify Clinical Staff, July 2004.d)VA’s Center for Engineering Occupational Safety and Health, concurrence with warning identified in VA Directive 7700.e)Office of Construction and Facilities Management (CFM):1)Master Construction Specifications (PG-18-1).2)Standard Detail and CAD Standards (PG-18-4).3)Equipment Guide List (PG-18-5).4)Electrical Design Manual for VA Facilities (PG 18-10), Articles 7 & 85)Minimum Requirements of A/E Submissions (PG 18-15):a)Volume B, Major New Facilities, Major Additions; and Major Renovations, Article VI, Paragraph Bb)Volume C - Minor and NRM Projects, Article III, Paragraph Sc)Volume E - Request for Proposals Design/Build Projects, Article II, Paragraph F6)Mission Critical Facilities Design Manual (Final Draft – 2007)7)Life Safety Protected Design Manual (Final Draft – 2007)8)Solicitation for Offerors (SFO) for Lease Based Clinics – (05-2009)b.Federal Specifications (Fed. Specs.):1)A-A-59544-00 - Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation).2.National Codes: a.American Institute of Architects (AIA): Guidelines for Healthcare Facilitiesb.American National Standards Institute/Electronic Industries Association/Telecommunications Industry Association (ANSI/EIA/TIA):1)568-B - Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standards:a)B-1 – General Requirementsb)B-2 – Balanced Twisted-Pair Cable Systemsc)B-3 - Fiber Optic Cable Systems2)569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces3)606 – Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Communications Buildings4)607 – Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications5)REC 127-49 – Power Supplies6)RS 270 – Tools, Crimping, Solderless Wiring Devices, Recommended Procedures for User Certificationc. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1)Standard 17.4 – Guide for Emergency Personneld.American Society of Testing Material (ASTM):1)D2301-04 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape.e.Building Industries Communications Services Installation (BICSI):1)All standards for smart building wiring, connections and devices for commercial and medical facilities.2)Structured Building Cable Topologies.3)In consort with ANSI/EIA/TIA.f.Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):1)SO/TR 21730:2007 - Use of mobile wireless communication and computing technology in healthcare facilities - Recommendations for electromagnetic compatibility (management of unintentional electromagnetic interference) with medical devices.2)0739-5175/08/?2008 IEEE – Medical Grade – Mission Critical – Wireless Networks3)C62.41 – Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuitsg.NFPA: 1)70 - National Electrical Code (current date of issue) – Articles 517, 645 & 800.2)75 - Standard for Protection of Electronic Computer Data-Processing Equipment3)77 – Recommended Practice on Static Electricity4)99 - Healthcare Facilities5)101 - Life Safety Code3.State Hospital Code(s)4.Local Town, City and/or County Codes5.Accreditation Organization(s):a. Joint Commission on Accreditation of Hospitals Organization (JCAHO) – Section VI, Part 3a – Operating Features1.5 QUALIFICATIONSA.The Contractor shall submit certified documentation that they have been an authorized distributor and service organization for the OEM for a minimum of three (3) years. The Contractor shall be authorized by the OEM to pass thru the OEM’s warranty of the installed equipment to VA. In addition, the OEM and Contractor shall accept complete responsibility for the design, installation, certification, operation, and physical support for the System. This documentation, along with the System Contractor and OEM certifications must be provided in writing as part of the Contractor’s Technical submittal. B.The Contractor’s Communications Technicians assigned to the System shall be fully trained, qualified, and certified by the OEM on the engineering, installation, operation, and testing of the System. The Contractor shall provide formal written evidence of current OEM certification(s) for the installer(s) as a part of the submittal or to the COTR before being allowed to commence work on the System. C.The Contractor shall display all applicable national, state and local licenses. D.The Contractor shall submit copy (s) of Certificate of successful completion of OEM’s installation/training school for installing technicians of the System’s Nurse Call and/or Code Blue equipment being proposed.1.6 CODES AND PERMITSA.Provide all necessary permits and schedule all inspections as identified in the contract’s milestone chart, so that the system is proof of performance tested, certified and approved by VA and ready for operation on a date directed by the Owner.B.The contractor is responsible to adhere to all codes described herein and associated contractual, state and local codes.1.7 SCHEDULINGA.After the award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a detailed schedule (aka milestone chart) using “Microsoft Project” software or equivalent. The Contractor Project Schedule (CPS) shall indicate detailed activities for the projected life of the project. The CPS shall consist of detailed activities and their restraining relationships. It will also detail manpower usage throughout the project.B.It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate all work with the other trades for scheduling, rough-in, and finishing all work specified. The owner will not be liable for any additional costs due to missed dates or poor coordination of the supplying contractor with other trades.1.8 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND EQUIPMENT DATA SUBMITTALS (aka TECHNICAL SUBMITTAL[s]) (Note: The Contractor is encouraged, but not required, to submit separate technical submittal(s) outlining alternate technical approach(s) to the system requirements stated here-in as long as each alternate technical document(s) is complete, separate, and submitted in precisely the same manner as outlined herein. VA will review and rate each received alternate submittal, which follows this requirement, in exactly the same procedure as outlined herein. Partial, add-on, or addenda type alternates will not be accepted or reviewed.)A.Submit at one time within 10 days of contract awarding, drawings and product data on all proposed equipment and system. Check for compliance with contract documents and certify compliance with Contractor's "APPROVED" stamp and signature. B.Support all submittals with descriptive materials, i.e., catalog sheets, product data sheets, diagrams, and charts published by the manufacturer. These materials shall show conformance to specification and drawing requirements. C.Where multiple products are listed on a single cut-sheet, circle or highlight the one that you propose to use. Provide a complete and through equipment list of equipment expected to be installed in the system, with spares, as a part of the submittal. Special Communications (TVE-005OP3B) will not review any submittal that does not have this list. D.Provide four (4) copies to the PM for technical review. The PM will provide a copy to the offices identified in Paragraph 1.3.C & D, at a minimum for compliance review as described herein where each responsible individual(s) shall respond to the PM within 10 days of receipt of their acceptance or rejection of the submittal(s). E.Provide interconnection methods, conduit (where not already installed), junction boxes (J-Boxes), cable, interface fixtures and equipment lists for the: ENR(s) ( aka DMARC), TER, TCR, MCR, MCOR, PCR, ECR, Stacked Telecommunications Rooms (STR), Nurses Stations (NS), Head End Room (HER), Head End Cabinet (HEC), Head End Interface Cabinet (HEIC) and approved TCO locations TIP interface distribution layout drawing, as they are to be installed and interconnected to teach other (REFER TO APPENDIX B – SUGGESTED TELECOMMUNI-CAITONS ONE LINE TOPOLOGY pull-out drawing). F.Equipment technical literature detailing the electrical and technical characteristics of each item of equipment to be furnished. G.Engineering drawings of the System, showing calculated of expected signal levels at the headend input and output, each input and output distribution point, and signal level at each telecommunications outlet. H.Surveys Required as a Part of The Technical Submittal:1.The Contractor shall provide the following System surveys that depict various system features and capacities required in addition to the on-site survey requirements described herein (see Specification Paragraph 2.4.3). Each survey shall be in writing and contain the following information (the formats are suggestions and may be used for the initial Technical Submittal Survey requirements), as a minimum:a.Nurse Call Cable System Design Plan:1)An OEM and contractor designed functioning Nurse Call System cable plan shall be provided as a part of the technical proposal. A specific functioning Nurse Call: cable, interfaces, J-boxes and back boxes shall coincide with the total growth items as described herein. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to provide the Systems’ entire Nurse Call cable and accessory requirements and engineer a functioning Nurse Call distribution system and equipment requirement plan of the following paragraph(s), at a minimum: 2)The required Nurse Call Equipment Locations:EQUIPPED ITEMCAPACITYGROWTHMaster StationsDome LightsCorridorOtherEmergency StationsBathToiletShowerSupervisory LocationsTeam Work AreaCentral Control CabinetLocationPower Supply(s)UPS(s)3)The required Nurse Call Connections: The Contractor shall clearly and fully indicate this category for each item identified herein as a part of the technical submittal. For this purpose, the following definitions and sample connections are provided to detail the system’s capability:EQUIPPED ITEMCAPACITYGROWTHCentral Control CabinetLocationPower Supply(s)UPS(s)Electrical Power Panel(s)1.9PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS (AS BUILTS)A.Throughout progress of the Work, maintain an accurate record of changes in Contract Documents. Upon completion of Work, transfer recorded changes to a set of Project Record Documents.B.The floorplans shall be marked in pen to include the following:1.Each device specific locations with UL labels affixed.2.Conduit locations.3.Each interface and equipment specific location.4.Head-end equipment and specific location.5.Wiring diagram.6.Labeling and administration documentation.7.Warranty certificate.8.System test results.1.10WARRANTIES / GUARANTYA.The Contractor shall warrant the installation to be free from defect in material and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from the date of acceptance of the project by the owner. The Contractor shall agree to remedy covered defects within four (4) hours of notification of major failures or within twenty-four (24) hours of notification for individual station related problems.B.The Contractor shall agree to grantee the system according to the guidelines outlined in Article 4 herein.1.11USE OF THE SITEA.Use of the site shall be at the GC’s direction.B.Coordinate with the GC for lay-down areas for product storage and administration areas.C.Coordinate work with the GC and their sub-contractors.D.Access to buildings wherein the work is performed shall be directed by the GC.1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA.Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.B.Store products in original containers.C.Coordinate with the GC for product storage. There may be little or no storage space available on site. Plan to potentially store materials off site.D.Do not install damaged products. Remove damaged products from the site and replaced with new product at no cost to the Owner.1.13PROJECT CLOSE-OUTA.Prior to final inspection and acceptance of the work, remove all debris, rubbish, waste material, tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials from the project site and thoroughly clean your work area.B.Before the project closeout date, the Contractor shall submit:1.OEM Equipment Warranty Certificates.2.Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities such as the Low Voltage Certificate of Inspection.3.Project record documents.4.Instruction manuals and software that is a part of the system.5.System Guaranty Certificate.C.Contractor shall submit written notice that:1.Contract Documents have been reviewed.2.Project has been inspected for compliance with contract.3.Work has been completed in accordance with the contract.PART 2 – PRODUCTS / FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS2.1GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALSA.Furnish and install a complete and fully functional and operable Nurse Call System for each location shown on the contract drawings. B.Coordinate features and select interface components to form an integrated Nurse Call system. Match components and interconnections between the systems for optimum performance of specified functions. C.Equipment: Active electronic type shall use solid-state components, fully rated for continuous duty unless otherwise indicated. Select equipment for normal operation on input power usually supplied between 110 to 130 VAC, 60 Hz supplied from the Facility’s Electrical Power System.D.Meet all FCC requirements regarding equipment listing, low radiation and/or interference of RF signal(s). The system shall be designed to prevent direct pickup of signals from within and outside the building structure. 2.2SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONA.Furnish and install a complete and fully functional and operable Nurse Call System.B.The Contractor shall continually employ interfacing methods that are approved by the OEM and VA. At a minimum, an acceptable interfacing method requires not only a physical and mechanical connection, but also a matching of signal, voltage, and processing levels with regard to signal quality and impedance. C.The System Contractor shall connect the System ensuring that all NFPA and UL Critical Care and Life Safety Circuit and System separation guidelines are satisfied. D.System hardware shall consist of a standalone (separate) nurse call patient communications network comprised of nurse consoles, control stations, room and corridor dome lights, pull cord and/or emergency push button stations, wiring. And, other options such as, printer interfaces and as shown on drawings. All necessary equipment required to meet the intent of these specifications, whether or not enumerated within these specifications, shall be supplied and installed to provide a complete and operating nurse call patient communications network. It is not acceptable to utilize the telephone cable system for the control and distribution of nurse call signals and equipment.E.System firmware shall be the product of a reputable firmware OEM of record with a proven history of product reliability and sole control over all source code. Manufacturer shall provide, free of charge, product firmware/software upgrades for a period of two (2) years from date of acceptance by VA for any product feature enhancements. System configuration programming changes shall not require any exchange of parts.F.The Nurse Call Head End Equipment shall be located in Telecommunications Room. G.The System shall utilize microprocessor components for all signaling and programming circuits and functions. Self contained or on board system program memory shall be non-volatile and protected from erasure from power outages for a minimum of 12 hours.H.Provide a backup battery or a UPS for the System (including each distribution cabinet/point, CRT and Monitor) to allow normal operation and function (as if there was no AC power failure) in the event of an AC power failure or during input power fluctuations for a minimum of 30 minutes. I.The System is defined as Critical Service.1.Remote locations for the Nurse Call Annunciation:a.Team Work AreaJ.All passive distribution equipment shall meet or exceed -80 dB radiation shielding (aka RFI) shielding specifications and be provided with connectors specified by the OEM.K.All equipment face plates utilized in the system shall be stainless steel, anodized aluminum or UL approved cycolac plastic for the areas where provided.L.Noise filters and surge protectors shall be provided for each equipment interface cabinet, headend cabinet, control console and local and remote amplifier locations to insure protection from input primary AC power surges and to insure noise glitches are not induced into low voltage data circuits.M.Plug-in connectors shall be provided to connect all equipment, except coaxial cables. Coaxial cable distribution points shall use coaxial cable connections recommended by the cable OEM and approved by the system OEM. Base band cable systems shall utilize barrier terminal screw type connectors, at a minimum. As an alternate, crimp type connectors installed with a ratchet type installation tool are acceptable provided the cable dress, pairs, shielding, grounding, connections and labeling are the same as the barrier terminal strip connectors. Tape of any type, wire nuts or solder type connections are unacceptable and will not be approved.N.Audio Level Processing: The control equipment shall consist of audio mixer(s), volume limiter(s) and/or compressor(s), and power amplifier(s) to process, adjust, equalize, isolate, filter, and amplify each audio channel for each sub-zone in the system and distribute them into the System’s RF interfacing distribution trunks and amplification circuits. The use of telephone cable to distribute RF signals, carrying system or sub-system AC or DC voltage is not acceptable and will not be approved. Additionally, each control location shall be provided with the equipment required to insure the system can produce its designed audio channel capacity at each speaker identified on the contract drawings. The Contractor shall provide: one spare audio power amplifier, one spare audio mixer, one spare audio volume limiter and/or compressor, and one spare audio automatic gain adjusting device, and minimum RF equipment recommended by the OEM. O.Contractor is responsible for pricing all accessories and miscellaneous equipment required to form a complete and operating system. Unless otherwise noted in this Part, equipment quantities shall be as indicated on the drawings.P.System Performance:1.At a minimum, each distribution, interconnection, interface, terminating point and TCO shall be capable of supporting the Facility’s Nurse Call. 2.Each System Nurse Call location shall generate a minimum of distinct calls:a.Routine: single flashing dome lights & master station color and audio tone,b.Staff Assist: rapid flashing dome lights & master station color and audio tone,c.Emergency: Red flashing done lights & master station color and audio tone,d.Each generated call shall be cancelable at ONLY the originating location,2.3 MANUFACTURERSA.The products specified shall be new, FCC and UL Listed, labeled and produced by Hill-Rom NaviCare. B.Specifications contained herein as set forth in this document detail the salient operating and performance characteristics of equipment in order for VA to distinguish acceptable items of equipment from unacceptable items of equipment. When an item of equipment is offered or furnished for which there is a specification contained herein, the item of equipment offered or furnished shall meet or exceed the specification for that item of equipment.C.Equipment Standards and Testing:1.The System has been defined herein as connected to systems identified as Critical Service performing various Emergency Functions. Therefore, at a minimum, the system shall conform to all aforementioned National and/or Local Life Safety Codes (which ever are the more stringent), NFPA, NEC, this specification, JCAHCO Life Safety Accreditation requirements, and the OEM recommendations, instructions, and guidelines.2.All supplies and materials shall be listed, labeled or certified by UL or a NRTL where such standards have been established for the supplies, materials or equipment. 3.The provided equipment required by the System design and approved technical submittal must conform with each UL standard in effect for the equipment, as of the date of the technical submittal (or the date when the COTR approved system equipment necessary to be replaced) was technically reviewed and approved by VA. Where a UL standard is in existence for equipment to be used in completion of this contract, the equipment must bear the approved UL seal.4.Each item of electronic equipment to be provided under this contract must bear the approved UL seal or the seal of the testing laboratory that warrants the equipment has been tested in accordance with, and conforms to the specified standards. The placement of the UL Seal shall be a permanent part of the electronic equipment that is not capable of being transportable from one equipment item to another. 5. The hospital uses Navicare Nurse System.2.4 PRODUCTSA.General1.Contractor is responsible for pricing all accessories and miscellaneous equipment required to form a complete and operating system. The equipment quantities provided herein shall be as indicated on the drawings with the exception of the indicated spare equipment.2.Contractor Furnished Equipment List (CFEs):a.The Contractor is required to provide a list of the CFE equipment to be furnished. The quantity, make and model number of each item is required. Select the required equipment items quantities that will satisfy the needs of the system as described herein and with the OEM’s concurrence applied to the list(s), in writing. Item QuantityUnit1.As requiredInterface Panel(s)1.aAs requiredElectrical Supervision Trouble Enunciator1.a.1As requiredEquipment Back Box(s)1.bOTelephone 1.c0Public Address1.d0Radio Paging / Equipment1.e0Wireless / Equipment1.f.0Radio Pager / Equipment1.g0Wireless / Equipment1.f0Personal Communicator / Equipment2.As requiredLightning Arrestor3.As requiredHead End Equipment/Locations3.aAs requiredCabinet(s)3.a.1As requiredAC Power Conditioner & Filter3.a.2As requiredAC Power Strip3.a.3As requiredUPS3.a.4As requiredInterconnecting Wire/Cables3.a.5As requiredWire / Cable Connector(s)3.a.6As requiredWire / Cable Terminator(s)3.bAs requiredWire Management System3.b0Head End Function(s)3.b.10H7 Interface3.b.2As requiredNurse Locator3.b.3As requiredStaff Locator4. As requiredMaster Station(s)4.aAs requiredNurse Locator4.bAs requiredStaff Locator5.As requiredDistribution System(s)5.a0Staff Station5.a.10Equipment Back Box(s)5.b0Duty Station5.b.10Equipment Back Box(s)5.c0Code Blue Station5.c.10Equipment Back Box(s)5.c.20Remote Station(s)5.d0Patient Station(s)5.d.10Equipment Back Box(s)5.d.20Bed Interface(s)5.d.30Pillow Speaker5.d.40Push Button Cordset5.d.50Dummy Plugs5.d.60Bed Integrated Control5.d.70Lighting Interface Module5.d.80TV Control Interface5.d.90TV Control Jack5.d.100TV Interconnection Cables5.d.110HDTV Coaxial5.d.120HDTV/Nurses Call Interface/ Control5.d.130Auxiliary Mounting Interface5.eAs requiredEmergency Station(s)5.e.1As requiredEquipment Back Box(s)5.e.2As requiredToilet Emergency Station (waterproof)5.e.3As requiredShower Emergency Station (waterproof)5.e.4As requiredLavatory Emergency Station (waterproof)5.f.As requiredRoom Dome Light5.f.1As requiredEquipment Back Box(s)5.g0Other Dome Light(s)5.g.10Equipment Back Box(s)5.g.2As requiredCorridor Dome Light5.g.30Intersectional Dome Light5.hAs requiredSystem Cable(s)5.h.1As requiredCoaxial5.h.2As requiredSystem Pin5.h.3As requiredAudio5.h.4As requiredControl5.h.50Video5.i0System Connector(s)5.i.10Coaxial5.i.2As requiredSystem Pin5.i.2As requiredAudio5.i.3As requiredControl5.i.4As requiredVideo5.jAs requiredWire Management Required as described herein6.0Mental Health Unit7.0Blind Rehabilitation Unit 8.0Center for the Aging (aka Nursing Home Care Unit)9.0Oncology, Radiology, Dialysis, Units 10.On Hand Spares -Provide a separate system spares list as indicated in each equipment description.B.NS Room(s):Refer to CFM Physical Security Manual (07-2007) for VA Facilities, Chapters 9.3 & 1) and PG 18-10, EDM, Chapters 7- Table 7-1, 8 & Appendix B, Telecommunications One Line Topology for specific Room and TIP Connection Requirements.C.TER, SCC, PCR, STR, HER Rooms and Equipment:Refer to CFM Physical Security Manual (07-2007) for VA Facilities, Chapters 9.3 & 1) and PG 18-10, EDM, Chapters 7- Table 7-1, 8 & Appendix B, Telecommunications One Line Topology for specific Room and TIP Connection Requirements.D.Telecommunications Room(s) (TR):1.Locate the Nurse Call floor distribution equipment as required by system design and OEM direction. Provide secured and lockable cabinet/rack(s) as required.2.Head-End Equipment:a.Provide all required power supplies, communications hubs, network switches, intelligent controllers and other devices necessary to form a complete system. Head-end components may be rack mounted or wall mounted in an enclosed metal enclosure.b.Provide the head end equipment in the closest Telecommunications Room where the System is installed.c.Provide the System UPS inside the cabinet or in a separate cabinet adjacent to the head end cabinet that shall maintain a minimum of 30 minute battery back-up to all system components.d.Equipment Cabinet: Comply with TIA/EIA-310-D. Lockable, ventilated metal cabinet houses terminal strips, power supplies, amplifiers, system volume control, and other switching and control devices required for conversation channels and control functions. See Paragraph 2.5.E for the Cabinet’s minimum internal items that are in addition to the installed System equipment.e.Vertical Equipment Rack, Wall Mounted (to be included inside of the Equipment Cabinet) containing the following minimum items:1)36” (28RU) internal rack space, welded steel construction, minimum 20” usable depth, adjustable front mounting rails.2)Install the following products in rack provided by same manufacturer or as specified:a)Security screws w/ nylon isolation bushings.b)Textured blank panels.c)Custom mounts for components without rack mount kits.d)Security covers.e)Internal system ground copper buss (may be substituted with a bare #0 AWG copper wire or equivalent size copper mesh strip connected to ONLY THE FACILITY’S SIGNAL GROUNDING SYSTEM.f)Power Sequencer- rack-mounted power conditioner and (provide as-needed) delayed sequencer(s) with (2) unswitched outlets each and contact closure control inputs. Connect the conditioner to one of the dual duplex outlets.g)Two (2) each 120VAC @ 20A dual duplex outlets, connected via conduit to the nearest Electrical Service Panel that is supplied by the Facility’s Electrical System.h)One (1) each 120VAC @ 15A Power Distribution Strip(s). Connect each strip to the unstitched outlet on the power conditioner.E.Call Initiation, Annunciation and Response:1.Light and Tones:a.Calls may be initiated through:1)Toilet Emergency Station pull cord / push button.2)Shower Emergency Station pull cord.bOnce a call is initiated, it must be annunciated at the following locations:1)The Corridor and Room dome light associated with the initiating device.2) A local master control station indicating the call location and priority.c.All calls must be displayed until they are cleared by the nursing staff ONLY from the initiating device location.2.Voice: a.Calls may be initiated through:4)Toilet Emergency pull cord / push button station.5)Shower Emergency pull cord station.7)Push-button cordset.9)Master Station.3.Failure of voice intercom portion of system shall not interfere with visual and audible signal systems.4.All calls must be displayed on the master station until they are cleared by the nursing staff at ONLY the originating station. If multiple calls are received at the master station within a short period of time, they shall be stacked based on priority and wait time. If there are more calls than the master station screen can display at one time (four [4] minimum), the system must provide a simple scrolling feature. The nurse must be able to answer any call in any order at the master station. The nurse must also be able to forward calls to staff members. F.Reports:1.The system’s generated reports logging all calls, alarms, and response time. 2.Reports function shall be limited by passwords and security tier level access, so that only supervisors may access it when desired.3.Provide instructions to the owner on how to enable/disable the reporting functions.4.The Facility’s LAN/WAN IS NOT ALLOWED for Nurses Call main wiring that must be a “stand alone primary cable infrastructure.” Connections to the VA LAN/WAN will be allowed ONLY when the system has been demonstrated and certified by 005OP2B meeting the minimum guidelines and requirements of the Life Safety Code.G.System/Management Software:1.Provide and install system/management software on minimum of three (3) owner-provided computers. a. The management software shall at a minimum provide all historical reporting features of the system as well as real-time monitoring of events.b.The system software shall at a minimum provide the system’s operating and functioning parameters and script. The OEM shall provide VA with access to the software’s script writing and functions.2.Provide two (2) spare CD’s with the software installed and operable.3.Rights in Data: VA shall have the right to all script and programming language of system management software. If commercial off the shelf (COTS) or a memorandum of understanding (MOU) is required for follow-on maintenance, the Contractor is required to accomplish the COTS Survey document and the COTR is required to accomplish the COTS Acquisition document supplied in Part 5 Attachments herein. H.System Functional Station:1.Master Control: a.Simple Tone and Light:1)A visual / aural (tone only) system shall be provided, protected and located in the as indicated on the drawings. where surgery or procedures are not performed. The System shall include a push-button emergency station (pull cord) with an associated corridor dome light in each dressing room and toilet.2)The visual / aural (tone only) system shall also include a power supply and a visual / aural (tone only) display panel in the respective OPC receptionist area and as shown on the drawings. The visual / tone display panel shall generate audible and visual emergency signals to indicate the location of a placed call.3)The Visual Display Panel shall be a digital readout touch screen to visually announce the location of incoming calls placed in the System including room number and priority of the call. Identify each calling station with an individual displaya)It shall display a minimum of four incoming calls. Additional placed calls shall be stored in order of placement and priority.4)The visual / aural (tone only) system shall be installed according to the same Procedures, guidelines and standards outlined for a regular Nurse Call System for emergency NOT CODE BLUE OPERATION.5)Speakerphone and handset communication.6)Provide one (1) spare station for each ten (1) stations installed.b.Touch Screen:1)Provide a touch screen master station with 15” minimum monitor size.2)Speakerphone and handset communication.3)Provide one (1) spare station for each ten (1) stations installed.I.Distribution System: 1.The contractor shall provide the installation and testing requirements, provide the cables & interconnections:a.Each wire and cable used in the System shall be specifically OEM certified by tags on each reel and recommended and approved for installation in the Facility.b.The Contractor shall provide the COTR a 610?mm (2 foot) sample of each wire and/or cable actually employed in the System and each certification tag for approval before continuing with the installation as described herein.c.Copper Cables: for minimum technical standards and requirements for System voice and data cables.d.Line Level Audio and Microphone Cable:1)Line level audio and microphone cable for inside racks and conduit.2)Shielded, twisted pair Minimum 22AWG, stranded conductors and 24AWG drain wire with overall jacket.e.Speaker Level Audio (70.7Volt RMS):1)For use with 70.7V speaker circuits.2)18AWG stranded pair, minimum.f.All cabling shall be plenum rated.g.Provide one (1) spare 1,000 foot roll of approved System (not microphone) cable only.2.Raceways, Back Boxes and conduit:a.Provide the raceway and fittings:b.Each raceway that is open top, shall be: UL certified for telecommunications systems, partitioned with metal partitions in order to comply with NEC Parts 517 & 800 to “mechanically separate telecommunications systems of different service, protect the installed cables from falling out when vertically mounted and allow junction boxes to be attached to the side to interface “drop” type conduit cable feeds.c.Intercommunication System cable infrastructure: EMT or in J-hooks above accessible ceilings, 24 inches on center.d.Junction boxes shall be not less than 2-1/2 inches deep and 6 inches wide by 6 inches long.e.Flexible metal conduit is prohibited unless specifically approved by 005OP3B.f.System Conduit:1)The PA system is NFPA listed as Emergency / Public Safety Communication System which requires the entire system to be installed in a separate conduit system.2)The use of centralized mechanically partitioned wireways may be used to augment main distribution conduit on a case by case basis when specifically approved by VA Headquarters (005OP3B).3)Conduit Sleeves:a)The AE has made a good effort to identify where conduit sleeves through full-height and fire rated walls on the drawings, and has instructed the electrician to provide the sleeves as shown on the drawings.b)While the sleeves shown on the drawings will be provided by others, the contractor is responsible for installing conduit sleeves and fire-proofing where necessary. It is often the case, that due to field conditions, the nurse-call cable may have to be installed through an alternate route. Any conduit sleeves required due to field conditions or those omitted by the engineer shall be provided by the cabling contractor.g.Device Back Boxes:1)Furnish to the electrical contractor all back boxes required for the PA system devices.2)The electrical contractor shall install the back boxes as well as the system conduit. Coordinate the delivery of the back boxes with the construction schedule.3.UPS:a.Provide a backup battery or a UPS for the System to allow normal operation and function (as if there was no AC power failure) in the event of an AC power failure or during input power fluctuations for a minimum of 30 minutes.b.The Nurse Call Contractor shall not make any attachments or connection to the telephone system until specifically directed to do so, in writing, by the COTR.J.Installation Kit:1.General: The kit shall be provided that, at a minimum, includes all connectors and terminals, labeling systems, audio spade lugs, barrier strips, punch blocks or wire wrap terminals, heat shrink tubing, cable ties, solder, hangers, clamps, bolts, conduit, cable duct, and/or cable tray, etc., required to accomplish a neat and secure installation. All wires shall terminate in a spade lug and barrier strip, wire wrap terminal or punch block. Unfinished or unlabeled wire connections shall not be allowed. Turn over to the COTR all unused and partially opened installation kit boxes, coaxial, fiberoptic, and twisted pair cable reels, conduit, cable tray, and/or cable duct bundles, wire rolls, physical installation hardware. The following are the minimum required installation sub-kits:2.System Grounding:a.The grounding kit shall include all cable and installation hardware required. b.This includes, but is not limited to:2)Coaxial Cable Shields.3)Control Cable Shields.4)Data Cable Shields.5)Equipment Racks.6)Equipment Cabinets.7)Conduits.8)Cable Duct.9)Interduct.10)Power Panels.11)Connector Panels.12)Grounding Blocks.3.Coaxial Cable: The coaxial cable kit shall include all coaxial connectors, cable tying straps, heat shrink tubing, hangers, clamps, etc., required to accomplish a neat and secure installation.4.Wire and Cable: The wire and cable kit shall include all connectors and terminals, audio spade lugs, barrier straps, punch blocks, wire wrap strips, heat shrink tubing, tie wraps, solder, hangers, clamps, labels etc., required to accomplish a neat and orderly installation.5.Conduit, Cable Duct, and Cable Tray: The kit shall include all conduit, duct, trays, junction boxes, back boxes, cover plates, feed through nipples, hangers, clamps, other hardware required to accomplish a neat and secure conduit, cable duct, and/or cable tray installation in accordance with the NEC and this document.6.Equipment Interface: The equipment kit shall include any item or quantity of equipment, cable, mounting hardware and materials needed to interface the systems with the identified sub-system(s) according to the OEM requirements and this document.7.Labels: The labeling kit shall include any item or quantity of labels, tools, stencils, and materials needed to completely and correctly label each subsystem according to the OEM requirements, as-installed drawings, and this document.8.Documentation: The documentation kit shall include any item or quantity of items, computer discs, as installed drawings, equipment, maintenance, and operation manuals, and OEM materials needed to completely and correctly provide the system documentation as required by this document and explained herein.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 PROJECT MANAGEMENTA.Assign a single project manager to this project who will serve as the point of contact for the Owner, the General Contractor, and the Engineer.B.The Contractor shall be proactive in scheduling work at the hospital, specifically the Contractor will initiate and maintain discussion with the general contractor regarding the schedule for ceiling cover up and install cables to meet that schedule.C.Contact the Office of Telecommunications, Special Communications Team (005OP2B) at (301) 734-0350 to have a VA Certified Telecommunications COTR assigned to the project for telecommunications review, equipment and system approval and co-ordination with VA’s Spectrum Management and OCIS Teams.3.2 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADESA.Before beginning work, verify the location, quantity, size and access for the following:1.Primary AC power generator requirements.2.Junction boxes, wall boxes, wire troughs, conduit stubs and other related infrastructure for the systems.3.System components installed by others.4.Overhead supports and rigging hardware installed by others.B.Immediately notify the Owner, GC and Consultant(s) in writing of any discrepancies.3.3 NEEDS ASSESSMENTProvide a one-on-one meeting with the particular nursing manager of each unit affected by the installation of the new nurse call/code blue system. Review the floor plan drawing, educate the nursing manager with the functions of the equipment that is being provided and gather details specific to the individual units; coverage and priorities of calls; staffing patterns; and other pertinent details that will affect system programming and training.3.4 INSTALLATIONA.General:1.Execute work in accordance with National, State and local codes, regulations and ordinances.2.Install work neatly, plumb and square and in a manner consistent with standard industry practice. Carefully protect work from dust, paint and moisture as dictated by site conditions. The Contractor will be fully responsible for protection of his work during the construction phase up until final acceptance by the Owner.3.Install equipment according to OEM’s recommendations. Provide any hardware, adaptors, brackets, rack mount kits or other accessories recommended by OEM for correct assembly and installation.4.Secure equipment firmly in place, including receptacles, equipment racks, system cables, etc.a.All supports, mounts, fasteners, attachments and attachment points shall support their loads with a safety factor of at least 5:1.b.Do not impose the weight of equipment or fixtures on supports provided for other trades or systems.c.Any suspended equipment or associated hardware must be certified by the OEM for overhead suspension.d.The Contractor is responsible for means and methods in the design, fabrication, installation and certification of any supports, mounts, fasteners and attachments.5.Finishes for any exposed work such as plates, racks, panels, etc. shall be approved by the Architect, Owner and TVE 005OP3B.6.Coordinate cover plates with field conditions. Size and install cover plates as necessary to hide joints between back boxes and surrounding wall. Where cover plates are not fitted with connectors, provide grommeted holes in size and quantity required. Do not allow cable to leave or enter boxes without cover plates installed.7.Active electronic component equipment shall consist of solid state components, be rated for continuous duty service, comply with the requirements of FCC standards for telephone and data equipment, systems, and service.8.Color code all distribution wiring to conform to the Nurse Call Industry Standard, EIA/TIA, and this document, whichever is the more stringent. At a minimum, all equipment, cable duct and/or conduit, enclosures, wiring, terminals, and cables shall be clearly and permanently labeled according to and using the provided record drawings, to facilitate installation and maintenance. 9.Connect the System’s primary input AC power to the Facility’ AC power distribution system as shown on the plans or if not shown on the plans consult with COTR regarding a suitable circuit location prior to bidding.10.Product Delivery, Storage and Handling:a.Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in OEM's original unopened containers, clearly labeled with the OEM's name and equipment catalog numbers, model and serial identification numbers. The COTR may inventory the cable, patch panels, and related equipment.b.Storage and Handling: Store and protect equipment in a manner, which will preclude damage as directed by the COTR.11.Where TCOs are installed adjacent to each other, install one outlet for each instrument.12.Equipment installed outdoors shall be weatherproof or installed in weatherproof enclosures with hinged doors and locks with two keys.B.Equipment Racks/Cabinets:1.Fill unused equipment mounting spaces with blank panels or vent panels. Match color to equipment racks/cabinets.2.Provide security covers for all devices not requiring routine operator control.3.Provide vent panels and cooling fans as required for the operation of equipment within the OEM' specified temperature limits. Provide adequate ventilation space between equipment for cooling. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations regarding ventilation space between amplifiers.4.Provide insulated connections of the electrical raceway to equipment racks.5.Provide continuous raceway/conduit with no more than 40% fill between wire troughs and equipment racks/cabinets for all non-plenum-rated cable. Ensure each system is mechanically separated from each other in the wireway.6.Ensure a minimum of 36 inches around each cabinet and/or rack to comply with OSHA Safety Standards. Cabinets and/or Racks installed side by side – the 36” rule applies to around the entire assemblyC.Distribution Frames.1.A new stand-alone (i.e., self supporting, free standing) PA rack/frame may be provided in each TR to interconnect the TCR, PCR, SCC, NS, STRs & ECRs. Rack/frames shall be wired in accordance with industry standards and shall employ "latest state-of-the-art" modular cross-connect devices. The PA riser cable shall be sized to satisfy all voice/digital requirements plus not less than 50% spare (growth) capacity in each TR which includes a fiber optic backbone. 2.The frames/racks shall be connected to the TER/MCR system ground.D.Wiring Practice: The following practices shall be adhered to:ply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."2.Execute all wiring in strict adherence to the National Electrical Code, applicable local building codes and standard industry practices.3.Wiring shall be classified according to the following low voltage signal types:a.Balanced microphone level audio (below -20dBm) or Balanced line level audio (-20dBm to +30dBm)b.70V audio speaker level audio.c.Low voltage DC control or power (less than 48VDC)4.Where raceway is to be EMT (conduit), wiring of differing classifications shall be run in separate conduit. Where raceway is to be an enclosure (rack, tray, wire trough, utility box) wiring of differing classifications which share the same enclosure shall be mechanically partitioned and separated by at least four (4) inches. Where Wiring of differing classifications must cross, they shall cross perpendicular to one another.5.Do not splice wiring anywhere along the entire length of the run. Make sure cables are fully insulated and shielded from each other and from the raceway for the entire length of the run. 6.Do not pull wire through any enclosure where a change of raceway alignment or direction occurs. Do not bend wires to less than radius recommended by manufacturer.7.Replace the entire length of the run of any wire or cable that is damaged or abraided during installation. There are no acceptable methods of repairing damaged or abraided wiring.8.Use wire pulling lubricants and pulling tensions as recommended by the OEM.9.Use grommets around cut-outs and knock-outs where conduit or chase nipples are not installed.10.Do not use tape-based or glue-based cable anchors.11.Ground shields and drain wires to the Facility’s signal ground system as indicated by the drawings.12.Field wiring entering equipment racks shall be terminated as follows:a.Provide OEM directed service loops at harness break-outs and at plates, panels and equipment. Loops should be sufficient to allow plates, panels and equipment to be removed for service and inspection.b.Line level and speaker level wiring may be terminated inside the equipment rack using specified terminal blocks (see “Products.”) Provide 15% spare terminals inside each rack. Microphone level wiring may only be terminated at the equipment served.c.If specified terminal blocks are not designed for rack mounting, utilize ?” plywood or 1/8” thick aluminum plates/blank panels as a mounting surface. Do not mount on the bottom of the rack.d.Employ permanent strain relief for any cable with an outside diameter of 1” or greater.13.Use only balanced audio circuits unless noted otherwise directed and indicated on the drawings.14.Make all connections as follows:a.Make all connections using rosin-core solder or mechanical connectors appropriate to the application.b.For crimp-type connections, use only tools that are specified by the manufacturer for the application.c.Use only insulated spade lugs on screw terminals. Spade lugs shall be sized to fit the wire gauge. Do not exceed two lugs per terminal.d.Wire nuts, electrical tape or “Scotch Lock” connections are not acceptable for any application.15.Noise filters and surge protectors shall be provided for each equipment interface cabinet, switch equipment cabinet, control console, local, and remote active equipment locations to ensure protection from input primary AC power surges and noise glitches are not induced into low Voltage data circuits.16.Wires or cables previously approved to be installed outside of conduit, cable trays, wireways, cable duct, etc:a.Only when specifically authorized as described herein, will wires or cables be identified and approved to be installed outside of conduit. The wire or cable runs shall be UL rated plenum and OEM certified for use in air plenums.bWires and cables shall be hidden, protected, fastened and tied at 600 mm (24 in.) intervals, maximum, as described herein to building loser wire or cable fastening intervals may be required to prevents sagging, maintain clearance above suspended ceilings, remove unsightly wiring and cabling from view and discourage tampering and vandalism. Wire or cable runs, not provided in conduit, that penetrate outside building walls, supporting walls, and two hour fire barriers shall be sleeved and sealed with an approved fire retardant sealant.dWire or cable runs to system components installed in walls (i.e.: volume attenuators, circuit controllers, signal, or data outlets, etc.) may, when specifically authorized by the COTR, be fished through hollow spaces in walls and shall be certified for use in air plenum areas.eCompletely test all of the cables after installation and replace any defective cables. fWires or cables that are installed outside of buildings shall be in conduit, secured to solid building structures. If specifically approved, on a case by case basis, to be run outside of conduit, the wires or cables shall be installed, as described herein. The bundled wires or cables must: Be tied at not less than 460 mm (18 in.) intervals to a solid building structure; have ultra violet protection and be totally waterproof (including all connections). The laying of wires or cables directly on roof tops, ladders, drooping down walls, walkways, floors, etc. is not allowed and will not be approved.E.Cable Installation: 1.Support cable on maximum 2’-0” centers. Acceptable means of cable support are cable tray, j-hooks, and bridal rings. Velcro wrap cable bundles loosely to the means of support with plenum rated Velcro straps. Plastic tie wraps are not acceptable as a means to bundle cables. 2.Run cables parallel to walls.3.Install maximum of 10 cables in a single row of J-hooks. Provide necessary rows of J-hooks as required by the number of cables.4.Do not lay cables on top of light fixtures, ceiling tiles, mechanical equipment, or ductwork. Maintain at least 2’-0” clearance from all shielded electrical apparatus.5.All cables shall be tested after the total installation is fully complete. All test results are to be documented. All cables shall pass acceptable test requirements and levels. Contractor shall remedy any cabling problems or defects in order to pass or comply with testing. This includes the re-pull of new cable as required at no additional cost to the Owner.6.Ends of cables shall be properly terminated on both ends per industry and OEM’s recommendations.7.Provide proper temporary protection of cable after pulling is complete before final dressing and terminations are complete. Do not leave cable lying on floor. Bundle and tie wrap up off of the floor until you are ready to terminate.8.Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at outlets and terminals.9.Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Arrange on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Cables may not be spliced.10.Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding OEM's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.11.Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used.12.Cable shall not be run through structural members or be in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.13.Separation of Wires: (REFER TO RACEWAY INSTALLATION) Separate speaker-microphone, line-level, speaker-level, and power wiring runs. Install in separate raceways or, where exposed or in same enclosure, separate conductors at least 12 inches apart for speaker microphones and adjacent parallel power and telephone wiring. Separate other intercommunication equipment conductors as recommended by equipment manufacturer.14.Serve all cables as follows:a.Cover the end of the overall jacket with a 1” (minimum) length of transparent heat-shrink tubing. Cut unused insulated conductors 2” (minimum) past the heat-shrink, fold back over jacket and secure with cable-tie. Cut unused shield/drain wires 2” (minimum) past the Heatshrink and serve as indicated below.b.Cover shield/drain wires with heat-shrink tubing extending back to the overall jacket. Extend tubing ?” past the end of unused wires, fold back over jacket and secure with cable tie.c.For each solder-type connection, cover the bare wire and solder connection with heat-shrink tubing.F.Labeling: Provide labeling in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-606-A. All lettering for Nurse Call circuits shall be stenciled using thermal ink transfer process.1.Cable and Wires (Hereinafter referred to as “Cable”): Cables shall be labeled at both ends in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-606-A. Labels shall be permanent in contrasting colors. Cables shall be identified according to the System “Record Wiring Diagrams.”2.Equipment: System equipment shall be permanently labeled with contrasting plastic laminate or Bakelite material. System equipment shall be labeled on the face of the unit corresponding to its source.a. Clearly, consistently, logically and permanently mark switches, connectors, jacks, relays, receptacles and electronic and other equipment.b.Engrave and paint fill all receptacle panels using 1/8” (minimum) high lettering and contrasting paint.c.For rack-mounted equipment, use engraved Lamacoid labels with white 1/8” (minimum) high lettering on black background. Label the front and back of all rack-mounted equipment.3.Conduit, Cable Duct, and/or Cable Tray: The Contractor shall label all conduit, duct and tray, including utilized GFE, with permanent marking devices or spray painted stenciling a minimum of 3 meters (10 ft.) identifying it as the System. In addition, each enclosure shall be labeled according to this standard. 4.Termination Hardware: The Contractor shall label TCOs and patch panel connections using color coded labels with identifiers in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-606-A and the “Record Wiring Diagrams.”5.Where multiple pieces of equipment reside in the same rack group, clearly and logically label each indicating to which room, channel, receptacle location, etc. they correspond.6.Permanently label cables at each end, including intra-rack connections. Labels shall be covered by the same, transparent heat-shrink tubing covering the end of the overall jacket. Alternatively, computer generated labels of the type which include a clear protective wrap may be used.7.Contractor’s name shall appear no more than once on each continuous set of racks. The Contractor’s name shall not appear on wall plates or portable equipment.8.Ensure each OEM supplied item of equipment has appropriate UL Labels marked to a non-removal board in the unit. EQUIPMENT INSTALLED NOT BEARING THESE UL MARKS WILL NOT BE ALLOWED TO BE A PART OF THE SYSTEM. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BEAR ALL COSTS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE REPLACEMENT EQUIPMENT WITH APPROVED UL MARKS. G.Conduit and Signal Ducts: When the Contractor and/or OEM determines additional system conduits and/or signal ducts are required in order to meet the system minimum performance standards outlined herein, the contractor shall provide these items as follows:1.Conduit:a.The Contractor shall employ the latest installation practices and materials. The Contractor shall provide conduit, junction boxes, connectors, sleeves, weather heads, pitch pockets, and associated sealing materials not specifically identified in this document as GFE. Conduit penetrations of walls, ceilings, floors, interstitial space, fire barriers, etc., shall be sleeved and sealed. b.All cables shall be installed in separate conduit and/or signal ducts (exception from the separate conduit requirement to allow Nurse Call cables to be installed in partitioned cable tray with voice cables may be granted in writing by the COTR if requested). c.Conduit fill (including GFE approved to be used in the system) shall not exceed 40%. Each conduit end shall be equipped with a protective insulator or sleeve to cover the conduit end, connection nut or clamp, to protect the wire or cable during installation and remaining in the conduit. Electrical power conduit shall be installed in accordance with the NEC. AC power conduit shall be run separate from signal conduit.d. Ensure that Critical Care Nurse Call System (as identified by NEC Section 517) is completely separated and protected from all other systems.2.Signal Duct, Cable Duct, or Cable Tray:a.The Contractor shall use GFE signal duct, cable duct, and/or cable tray, when identified and approved by the COTR.b.Approved signal and/or cable duct shall be a minimum size of 100 mm x 100 mm (4 in. X 4 in.) inside diameter with removable tops or sides, as appropriate. Protective sleeves, guides or barriers are required on all sharp corners, openings, anchors, bolts or screw ends, junction, interface and connection points.c.Approved cable tray shall be fully covered, mechanically and physically partitioned for multiple electronic circuit use, and be UL certified and labeled for use with telecommunication circuits and/or systems. The COTR shall approve width and height dimensions.d.All cable junctions and taps shall be accessible. Provide an 8” X 8” X 4” (minimum) junction box attached to the cable duct or raceway for installation of distribution system passive equipment. Ensure all equipment and tap junctions are accessible3.5 CUTTING, CLEANING AND PATCHINGA.It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to keep their work area clear of debris and clean area daily at completion of work.B.It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to patch and paint any wall or surface that has been disturbed by the execution of this work.C.The Contractor shall be responsible for providing any additional cutting, drilling, fitting or patching required that is not indicated as provided by others to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly.D.The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate Contractor the Contractor’s consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.E.Where coring of existing (previously installed) concrete is specified or required, including coring indicated under unit prices, the location of such coring shall be clearly identified in the field and the location shall be approved by the Project Manager prior to commencement of coring work.3.6 FIREPROOFINGA.Where Nurse Call wires, cables and conduit penetrate fire rated walls, floors and ceilings, fireproof the opening. B.Provide conduit sleeves (if not already provided by electrical contractor) for cables that penetrate fire rated walls and Telecommunications Rooms floors and ceilings. After the cabling installation is complete, install fire proofing material in and around all conduit sleeves and openings. Install fire proofing material thoroughly and neatly. Seal all floor and ceiling penetrations. C.Use only materials and methods that preserve the integrity of the fire stopping system and its rating. D.Install fireproofing where low voltage cables are installed in the same manholes with high voltage cables; also cover the low voltage cables with arc proof and fireproof tape. E.Use approved fireproofing tape of the same type as used for the high voltage cables, and apply the tape in a single layer, one-half lapped or as recommended by the manufacturer. Install the tape with the coated side towards the cable and extend it not less than 25 mm (one inch) into each duct.F.Secure the tape in place by a random wrap of glass cloth tape.3.7 GROUNDINGA.Ground Nurse Call cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, commonmode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. B.Facility Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main room or area signal ground within the room (i.e. head end and telecommunications rooms) or area(s) and indicate each signal ground location on the drawings. C.Extend the signal ground to inside each equipment cabinet and/or rack. Ensure each cabinet and/or rack installed item of equipment is connected to the extended signal ground. Isolate the signal ground from power and major equipment grounding systems. D.Do not use “3rd or 4th” wire internal electrical system conductors for communications signal ground. E.Do Not “mix grounds” of different systems. F. Insure grounds of different systems are installed as to not violate OSHA Safety and NEC installation requirements for protection of personnel.PART 4 – TESTING / GUARANTY / TRAINING4.0 SYSTEM LISTINGThe Nurses Call System is NFPA listed as an “Emergency” Communication system. Therefore, the following testing and guaranty provisions are the minimum to be performed and provided by the contractor and Warranted by the OEM.4.1 PROOF OF PERFORMANCE TESTINGA.Intermediate Testing:1.After completion of 30 – 40% of the installation of a head end cabinet(s) and equipment, one master stations, local station, treatment rooms, and prior to any further work, this portion of the system must be pretested, inspected, and 1certified. Each item of installed equipment shall be checked to ensure appropriate UL Listing and Certification Labels are affixed as required by NFPA -Life Safety Code 101-3.2 (a) & (b), UL Nurse Call Standard 1069 and JCHCO evaluation guidelines, and proper installation practices are followed. The intermediate test shall include a full operational test.2.All inspections and tests shall be conducted by an OEM-certified contractor representative and witnessed by TVE-005OP3B if there is no local Government Representative that processes OEM and VA approved Credentials to inspect and certify the system. The results of the inspection will be officially recorded by the Government Representative and maintained on file by the COTR, until completion of the entire project. The results will be compared to the Acceptance Test results. An identical inspection may be conducted between the 65 - 75% of the system construction phase, at the direction of the COTR.B.Pretesting:1.Upon completing installation of the Nurse Call System, the Contractor shall align, balance, and completely pretest the entire system under full operating conditions.2.Pretesting Procedure:a.During the System Pretest the Contractor shall verify (utilizing approved test equipment) that the System is fully operational and meets all the System performance requirements of this standard.b.The Contractor shall pretest and verify that all PSM System functions and specification requirements are met and operational, no unwanted aural effects, such as signal distortion, noise pulses, glitches, audio hum, poling noise, etc. are present. At a minimum, each of the following locations shall be fully pretested:1)Central Control Cabinets2)Nurse Control Stationsa)Master Stationsb)Emergency Stations3)Dome Lightsa)Corridors4)STRs5)System interface locations6)System trouble reporting7)System electrical supervision8)UPS operation9)Primary AC Power Requirements3.The Contractor shall provide four (4) copies of the recorded system pretest measurements and the written certification that the System is ready for the formal acceptance test shall be submitted to the COTR.C.Acceptance Test:1.After the Nurse Call and/or Code Blue System has been pretested and the Contractor has submitted the pretest results and certification to the COTR, then the Contractor shall schedule an acceptance test date and give the COTR 15 working days written notice prior to the date the acceptance test is expected to begin. The System shall be tested in the presence of a TVE 005OP3B and OEM certified representatives. The System shall be tested utilizing the approved test equipment to certify proof of performance and Critical Service compliance. The tests shall verify that the total System meets all the requirements of this specification. The notification of the acceptance test shall include the expected length (in time) of the test.2.The acceptance test shall be performed on a "go-no-go" basis. Only those operator adjustments required to show proof of performance shall be allowed. The test shall demonstrate and verify that the installed System does comply with all requirements of this specification under operating conditions. The System shall be rated as either acceptable or unacceptable at the conclusion of the test. Failure of any part of the System that precludes completion of system testing, and which cannot be repaired in four (4) hours, shall be cause for terminating the acceptance test of the System. Repeated failures that result in a cumulative time of eight (8) hours to affect repairs shall cause the entire System to be declared unacceptable.3.Retesting of the entire System shall be rescheduled at the convenience of the Government and costs borne by the Contractor at the direction of the SRE. D.Acceptance Test Procedure:1.Physical and Mechanical Inspection:a.The TVE 005OP3B Representative will tour all major areas where the Nurse Call System and all sub-systems are completely and properly installed to insure they are operationally ready for proof of performance testing. A system inventory including available spare parts will be taken at this time. Each item of installed equipment shall be checked to ensure appropriate UL certification labels are affixed.b.The System diagrams, record drawings, equipment manuals, TIP Auto CAD Disks, intermediate, and pretest results shall be formally inventoried and reviewed.c.Failure of the System to meet the installation requirements of this specification shall be grounds for terminating all testing.2.Operational Test:a.After the Physical and Mechanical Inspection, the central terminating and nurse call master control equipment shall be checked to verify that it meets all performance requirements outlined herein. A spectrum analyzer and sound level meter may be utilized to accomplish this requirement.b.The distribution system shall be checked at each interface, junction, and distribution point, first, middle, and last intersectional, room, and bed dome light in each leg to verify that the nurse call distribution system meets all system performance standards.c.Additionally, each installed emergency, patient, staff, duty, panic station, intersectional, room, and bed dome light, power supply, code one, and remote annunciator panels shall be checked insuring they meet the requirements of this specification.d.Once these tests have been completed, each installed sub-system function shall be tested as a unified, functioning and fully operating system. The typical functions are: nurse follower, three levels of emergency signaling (i.e. flashing red emergency, flashing white patient emergency, flashing white or combination lights for staff emergency, separate flashing code blue), minimum of 10 minutes of UPS operation, memory saving, minimum of ten station audio paging, canceling emergency calls at each originating station only, and storage and prioritizing of calls.e.Individual Item Test: The TVE 005OP3B Representative will select individual items of equipment for detailed proof of performance testing until 100% of the System has been tested and found to meet the contents of this specification. Each item shall meet or exceed the minimum requirements of this document.3.Test Conclusion:a.At the conclusion of the Acceptance Test, using the generated punch list (or discrepancy list) the VA and the Contractor shall jointly agree to the results of the test, and reschedule testing on deficiencies and shortages with the COTR. Any retesting to comply with these specifications will be done at the Contractor's expense.b.If the System is declared unacceptable without conditions, all rescheduled testing expenses will be borne by the Contractor.E.Acceptable Test Equipment: The test equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor shall have a calibration tag of an acceptable calibration service dated not more than 12 months prior to the test. As part of the submittal, a test equipment list shall be furnished that includes the make and model number of the following type of equipment as a minimum:1.Spectrum Analyzer.2.Signal Level Meter.3.Volt-Ohm Meter.4.Sound Pressure Level (SPL) Meter.5.Oscilloscope.6.Patient Push Button Cord Test Set.4.2 SYSTEM GUARANTEE PERIOD OF SERVICEA.Contractor’s Responsibility:1.The Contractor shall guarantee that all provided material and equipment will be free from defects, workmanship and will remain so for a period of one year from date of final acceptance of the System by the VA. The Contractor shall provide OEM’s equipment warranty documents, to the COTR (If the Facility has taken procession of the building), that certifies each item of equipment installed conforms to OEM published specifications.2.The Contractor's maintenance personnel shall have the ability to contact the Contractor and OEM for emergency maintenance and logistic assistance, remote diagnostic testing, and assistance in resolving technical problems at any time. This contact capability shall be provided by the Contractor and OEM at no additional cost to the VA.3.All Contractor maintenance and supervisor personnel shall be fully qualified by the OEM and must provide two (2) copies of current and qualified OEM training certificates and OEM certification upon request.4.Additionally, the Contractor shall accomplish the following minimum requirements during the two year guaranty period:a.Response Time during the Two Year Guaranty Period:1)The COTR (If the system has been turned over to the Facility) is the Contractor’s ONLY OFFICIAL reporting and contact official for nurse call system trouble calls, during the guaranty period.2)A standard work week is considered 8:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. or as designated by the COTR, Monday through Friday exclusive of Federal Holidays.3)The Contractor shall respond and correct on-site trouble calls, during the standard work week to:a)A routine trouble call within one (1) working day of its report. A routine trouble is considered a trouble which causes one (1) master nurse control station, emergency station, or dome light to be inoperable.b)An emergency trouble call within four hours of its report. An emergency trouble is considered a trouble which causes a subsystem (ward), distribution point, terminal cabinet, or code one system to be inoperable at anytime.4)If a Nurse Call component failure cannot be corrected within four (4) hours (exclusive of the standard work time limits), the Contractor shall be responsible for providing alternate nurse call equipment. The alternate equipment/system shall be operational within a maximum of 20 hours after the four (4) hour trouble shooting time and restore the effected location operation to meet the System performance standards. If any major system trouble cannot be corrected within one working day, the Contractor shall furnish and install compatible substitute equipment returning the System or sub-system to full operational capability, as described herein, until repairs are complete.b.Required On-Site Visits during the Two Year Guaranty Period1)The Contractor shall visit, on-site, for a minimum of eight (8) hours, once every 12 weeks, during the guaranty period, to perform system preventive maintenance, equipment cleaning, and operational adjustments to maintain the System according the descriptions identified in this document.2)The Contractor shall arrange all Facility visits with the COTR prior to performing the required maintenance visits.3)Preventive maintenance shall be performed by the Contractor in accordance with the OEM's recommended practice and service intervals during non-busy time agreed to by the COTR and Contractor.4)The preventive maintenance schedule, functions and reports shall be provided to and approved by the COTR.5)The Contractor shall provide the COTR a type written report itemizing each deficiency found and the corrective action performed during each required visit or official reported trouble call. The Contractor shall provide the COTR with sample copies of these reports for review and approval at the beginning of the Acceptance Test. The following reports are the minimum required:a)The Contractor shall provide a monthly summary all equipment serviced during this guarantee period to COTR by the fifth (5th) working day after the end of each month. The report shall clearly and concisely describe the services rendered, parts replaced and repairs performed. The report shall prescribe anticipated future needs of the equipment and systems for preventive and predictive maintenance.b)The Contractor shall maintain a separate log entry for each item of equipment and each sub-system of the System. The log shall list dates and times of all scheduled, routine, and emergency calls. Each emergency call shall be described with details of the nature and causes of emergency steps taken to rectify the situation and specific recommendations to avoid such conditions in the future.6)The COTR shall convey to the Facility Engineering Officer, two (2) copies of actual reports for evaluation.a)The COTR shall ensure a copy of these reports is entered into the System’s official acquisition documents.b)The Facility Chief Engineer shall ensure a copy of these reports is entered into the System’s official technical record documents.B.Work Not Included: Maintenance and repair service shall not include the performance of any work due to improper use; accidents; other vendor, contractor, or owner tampering or negligence, for which the Contractor is not directly responsible and does not control. The Contractor shall immediately notify the COTR in writing upon the discovery of these incidents. The COTR will investigate all reported incidents and render4.3 TRAININGA.Provide thorough training of all nursing staff assigned to those nursing units receiving new networked nurse/patient communications equipment. This training shall be developed and implemented to address two different types of staff. Floor nurses/staff shall receive training from their perspective, and likewise, unit secretaries (or any person whose specific responsibilities include answering patient calls and dispatching staff) shall receive operational training from their perspective. A separate training room will be set up that allows this type of individualized training utilizing in-service training unit, prior to cut over of the new system.B.Provide the following minimum training times and durations:1.48 hours prior to opening for nursing staff (in 8-hour increments) – split evenly over 3 weeks and day and night shifts. Coordinate schedule with Owner.2.32 hours during the opening week for nursing staff – both day and night shifts.3.24 hours for supervisors and system administrators.5.0ATTACHMENTSA.The following items are required as a part of the system:1.COTS Documents:b.SOLICITATION/CONTRACT/ORDER FOR COMMERCIAL ITEMS1. REQUISITION NUMBER PAGE 1 OF 7OFFEROR TO COMPLETE BLOCKS 12, 17, 23, 24, & 30 2. CONTRACT NO.3. AWARD/EFFECTIVE DATE SEE BLOCK 31C4. ORDER NUMBER5. SOLICITATION NO. 6. SOLICITATION ISSUE DATE 7. FOR SOLICITATION INFORMATION CALL:a. NAMEb. TELEPHONE NUMBER (No collect calls)8. OFFER DUE DATE/ LOCAL TIME 03/25/04 @ 3:00 PM EDT 9. ISSUED BY:CODE 10. THIS ACQUISITION IS UNRESTRICTED FORMCHECKBOX SETASIDE: 100 % FOR FORMCHECKBOX SMALL BUSINESS HUBZONE SMALL BUSINESS 8(A)NAICS: 541511SIZE STANDARD: 11. DELIVERY FOR FOB DESTINATION UNLESS BLOCK IS MARKED SEE SCHEDULE12. DISCOUNT TERMS 13a. THIS CONTRACT IS A RATED ORDERUNDER DPAS (15 CFR 700)13b. RATING14. METHOD OF SOLICITATION FORMCHECKBOX RFQ FORMCHECKBOX IFB FORMCHECKBOX RFP 15. DELIVER TO CODE16. ADMINISTERED BYCODESee #9 above 17a. CONTRACTOR/ CODE OFFERORFACILITY CODE18a. PAYMENT WILL BE MADE BYCODE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA Department of Veterans Affairs FMS P.O. Box 149971 Austin, TX 78714-8971 TELEPHONE NO: 703.246-0392 17b. CHECK IF REMITTANCE IS DIFFERENT AND PUT SUCH ADDRESS IN OFFER18b. SUBMIT INVOICES TO ADDRESS SHOWN IN BLOCK 18a. UNLESS BLOCK BELOW IS CHECKED FORMCHECKBOX SEE ADDENDUM19. ITEM NO.20. SCHEDULE OF SUPPLIES/SERVICES21. QUANTITY22. UNIT23. UNIT PRICE24.AMOUNT See page 2 Use Reverse and/or (Attach Additional Sheets as Necessary) 25. ACCOUNTING AND APPROPRIATION DATA26. TOTAL AWARD AMOUNT (For Govt. Use Only) 27a. SOLICITATION INCORPORATES BY REFERENCE FAR 52.212-1, 52.212-4. FAR 52.212-3 AND 52.212-5 ARE ATTACHED. ADDENDA ARE ARE NOT ATTACHED. FORMCHECKBOX 27b. CONTRACT/PURCHASE ORDER INCORPORATES BY REFERENCE FAR 52.212-4, 52.227-14, 52.227-16, and 52.227-19. ADDENDA FORMCHECKBOX ARE ARE NOT ATTACHED. FORMCHECKBOX 28. CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO SIGN THIS DOCUMENT AND RETURN __1_ COPIES TO ISSUING OFFICE. CONTRACTOR AGREES TO FURNISH AND DELIVER ALL ITEMS SET FORTH OR OTHERWISE IDENTIFIED ABOVE AND ON ANY ADDITIONAL SHEETS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SPECIFIED HEREIN. 29. AWARD OF CONTRACT: REF. __________________OFFER DATED___ __________. YOUR OFFER ON SOLICITATION (BLOCK 5), INCLUDING ANY ADDITIONS OR CHANGES WHICH ARE SET FORTH HEREIN, IS ACCEPTED AS TO ITEMS: 30A. SIGNATURE OF OFFEROR/CONTRACTOR31a. UNITED STATES OF AMERICA (SIGNATURE OF CONTRACTING OFFICER) 30b. NAME AND TITLE OF SIGNER (Type or Print)30c. DATE SIGNED31b. NAME OF CONTRACTING OFFICER (Type or Print)31c. DATE SIGNED Contracting Officer AUTHORIZED FOR LOCAL REPRODUCTION PREVIOUS EDITION IS NOT USABLECOMPUTER-GENERATEDSTANDARD FORM 1449 (REV. 4/2002) Prescribed By GSA - FAR (48CFR) 53.21219. ITEM NO.20. SCHEDULE OF SUPPLIES/SERVICES21. QUANTITY22. UNIT23. UNIT PRICE24.AMOUNTThis Contract is Firm Fixed Price (FFP). The Contractor is required to provide the software, software license, and software maintenance services for the computer software identified below. Distribution of maintenance copies shall be accomplished by using an appropriate magnetic, electronic or printed media. Software maintenance includes periodic updates, enhancements and corrections to the software, and reasonable technical support, all of which are customarily provided by the Contractor to its customers. The name of the software is: Word 2008License Type: Perpetual or Term?????Software Manufacturer: MicrosoftGoverning Law. Federal law and regulations, including the Federal Acquisition Regulations (“FAR”), shall govern this Contract or Order (Contract/Order). Commercial license agreements may be made a part of this Contract/Order but only if both parties expressly make them an addendum. If the commercial license agreement is not made an addendum, it shall not apply, govern, be a part of or have any effect whatsoever on this Contract/Order; this includes, but is not limited to, any agreement embedded in the computer software (clickwrap) or any agreement that is otherwise delivered with or provided to the Government with the commercial computer software or documentation (shrinkwrap), or any other license agreement otherwise referred to in any document. If a commercial license agreement is made an addendum, only those provisions addressing data rights regarding the Government’s use, duplication and disclosure of data (e.g., restricted computer software) are included and made a part of this Contract/Order, and only to the extent that those provisions are not duplicative or inconsistent with Federal law, Federal regulation or the incorporated FAR clauses; those provisions in the commercial license agreement that do not address data rights regarding the Government’s use, duplication and disclosure of data shall not be included or made a part of the Contract/Order. Federal law and regulation, including without limitation, the Contract Disputes Act (41 U.S.C. §601-613), the Anti-Deficiency Act (31 U.S.C. §1341 et seq.), the Competition in Contracting Act (41 U.S.C. §251, et seq), the Prompt Payment Act (31 U.S.C. §3901, et seq.) and FAR clauses 52.212-4, 52.227-14, 52.227-19 shall supersede, control and render ineffective any inconsistent, conflicting or duplicative provision in any commercial license agreement. In the event of conflict between this clause and any provision in the Contract/Order or the commercial license agreement or elsewhere, the terms of this clause shall prevail. Claims of patent or copyright infringement brought against the Government as a party shall be defended by the U.S. Department of Justice (DOJ). 28 U.S.C. § 516. At the discretion of DOJ, the Contractor may be allowed reasonable participation in the defense of the litigation. Any additional changes to the Contract/Order must be made by contract modification (Standard Form 30). Nothing in this Contract/Order or any commercial license agreement shall be construed as a waiver of sovereign immunity.See also Addendum A and B attached hereto. 1Microsoft Word 2008 Software License, Part No. 9891-7069.Software may be installed on four separate personal computers and be used by any VA employee or support service contractor.Licenses are perpetual. 4EA$10,000.00$40,000.00212 months of Standard Microsoft Word Software Maintenance and Technical Support Services for the software being acquired under CLIN 1; Part No. 9891-7069. 4EA$2,500.00$10,000.00Total$50,000.00 32a. QUANTITY IN COLUMN 21 HAS BEEN FORMCHECKBOX RECEIVED FORMCHECKBOX INSPECTED FORMCHECKBOX ACCEPTED, AND CONFORMS TO THE CONTRACT, EXCEPT AS NOTED: 32b. SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED GOVT. REPRESENTATIVE32c. DATE32d. PRINTED NAME AND TITLE OF AUTHORIZED GOVERNMENT REPRESENTATIVE 32e. MAILING ADDRESS OF AUTHORIZED GOVERNMENT REPRESENTATIVE32f. TELEPHONE NO. OF AUTHORIZED GOVERNMENT REPRESENTATIVE 32g. E-MAIL OF AUTHORIZED GOVERNMENT REPRESENTATIVE 33. SHIP NUMBER34. VOUCHER NUMBER35. AMOUNT VERIFIED CORRECT FOR36. PAYMENT FORMCHECKBOX COMPLETE FORMCHECKBOX PARTIAL FORMCHECKBOX FINAL37. CHECK NUMBER FORMCHECKBOX PARTIAL FORMCHECKBOX FINAL 38. S/R ACCOUNT NUMBER 39. S/R VOUCHER NUMBER 40. PAID BY 41a. I CERTIFY THIS ACCOUNT IS CORRECT AND PROPER FOR PAYMENT42a. RECEIVED BY (Print) 41b. SIGNATURE AND TITLE OF CERTIFYING OFFICER41c. DATE 42b. RECEIVED AT (Location) 42c. DATE REC’D (YY/MM/DD)42d. TOTAL CONTAINERS STANDARD FORM 1449 (REV. 4/2002) BACKADDENDUM A –ADDITIONAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR CONTRACT # _______________or ORDER#________________A.1 Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) Incorporated by Reference. The Contractor agrees to comply with the following FAR clauses, which the Contracting Officer has indicated as being incorporated in this Contract/Order by reference, to implement provisions of law or executive orders applicable to acquisitions of this nature, to implement department policy or to clarify the Government’s requirement. Copies of clauses in full text will be provided on request. FAR Clauses can be viewed at . FAR 52.212-4, Contract Terms and Conditions-Commercial Items (Oct 2003)FAR 52.227-14, Rights in Data—General (Dec 2007), Alt IIIFAR 52.227-16, Additional Data Requirements (Jun 1987)FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (Dec 2007)A.2 Contracting Officer’s Authority. The Contracting Officer is the only person authorized to make or approve any changes in any of the requirements of this Contract, and notwithstanding any provisions contained elsewhere in this Contract/Order, the said authority remains solely within the Contracting Officer. In the event the Contractor makes any changes at the direction of any person other than the Contracting Officer, the changes will be considered to have been made without authority and no adjustment will be made in the contract price to cover any increase in costs incurred as a result thereof.A.3 VAAR 852.270-1 Representatives of Contracting Officers (APR 1984). The Contracting Officer reserves the right to designate representatives to act for him/her in furnishing technical guidance and advice or generally supervise the work to be performed under this Contract/Order. Such designation will be in writing and will define the scope and limitations of the designee’s authority. A copy of the designation shall be furnished the Contractor.A.4 VAAR 852.270-4 Commercial Advertising (NOV 1984). The Contractor will not advertise the award of this Contract/Order in his/her commercial advertising in such a manner as to state or imply that the Department of Veterans Affairs endorses a product, project or commercial line of endeavor.A.5 VAAR 852.237-70 Contractor Responsibilities (APR 1984) The Contractor shall obtain all necessary licenses and/or permits required to perform this work. He/she shall take all reasonable precautions necessary to protect persons and property from injury or damage during the performance of the Contract/Order. He/she shall be responsible for any injury to himself/herself, his/her employees, as well as for any damage to personal or public property that occurs during the performance of the Contract/Order that is caused by his/her employees fault or negligence, and shall maintain personal liability and property damage insurance having coverage for a limit as required by the laws of the state where services are performed. Further, it is agreed that any negligence of the Government, its officers, agents, servants and employees, shall not be the responsibility of the Contractor hereunder with the regard to any claims, loss, damage, injury, and liability resulting there from. A.6 Indemnification. The Contractor shall save and hold harmless and indemnify the Government against any and all liability claims, and cost of whatsoever kind and nature for injury to or death of any person or persons and for loss or damage to any Contractor property or property owned by a third party occurring in connection with or in any way incident to or arising out of the occupancy, use service, operation, or performance of work under the terms of the Contract/Order, resulting in whole or in part from the acts or omissions of the Contractor, any subcontractor, or any employee, agent, or representative of the Contractor or subcontractor. A.7 Government’s Liability. The Government shall not be liable for any injury to the Contractor's personnel or damage to the Contractor's property unless such injury or damage is due to negligence on the part of the Government and is recoverable under the Federal Torts Claims Act, or pursuant to other Federal statutory authority.A.10 Uniform Computer Information Transaction Act (UCITA). UCITA is not applicable to the Contract/Order.A.11 Software License and Software Maintenance Subscription and Technical Support.(1)Definitions.Licensee. The term “licensee” shall mean the U.S. Department of Veterans Affairs (“VA”) and is synonymous with “Government.” Licensor. The term “licensor” shall mean the software manufacturer of the computer software being acquired. The term “Contractor” is the company identified in Block 17a on the SF1449. If the Contractor is a reseller and not the Licensor, the Contractor remains responsible for performance under this Contract.Software. The term “software” shall mean the licensed computer software product(s) cited in the Schedule of Supplies (Page 2).Maintenance. The term “maintenance” is the process of enhancing and optimizing software, as well as remedying defects. It shall include all new fixes, patches, releases, updates, versions and upgrades, as further defined below. Technical Support. The term “technical support” refers to the range of services providing assistance for the software via the telephone, email, a website or otherwise. Release or Update. The term “release” or “update” are terms that refer to a revision of software that contains defect corrections, minor enhancements or improvements of the software’s functionality. This is usually designated by a change in the number to the right of the decimal point (e.g., from Version 5.3 to 5.4). An example of an update is the addition of new hardware.Version or Upgrade. The term “version” or “upgrade” are terms that refer to a revision of software that contains new or improved functionality. This is usually designated by a change in the number to the left of the decimal point (e.g., from Version 5.4 to 6).(2)License. Grant of License and Term. See also Addendum B.Unless otherwise stated in the Schedule of Supplies/Services, the software license provided to the Government is a perpetual, nonexclusive license to use the software.The license authorizes the Government to use the software in processing data for other federal agencies.If the licensed software requires a password (or license key) to be operational, it shall be delivered with the software media and have no expiration date. If the Government decides to outsource or contract its services, the Government may allow the outsourcer to use the licensed software solely to provide the services on its behalf. The outsourcer shall be bound by the provisions of this Contract relating to the use of the software.If the software is for use in a networked environment, as may be reflected by the number of servers or users described in the Contract/Order, the license grant provided by the Contractor includes the Government’s use of the software in such environment.Any dispute regarding the license grant or usage limitations shall be resolved in accordance with the Disputes Clause incorporated in FAR 52.212-4(d).If the Government purchases additional licenses, the terms and conditions for those additional licenses (including technical support and upgrade subscription) shall be the same as agreed to in this Contract/Order, unless negotiated otherwise by mutual agreement of the parties.The licensed software contains critical product functionality that meets the minimum needs of the Government and is the basis for the Government’s procurement of the software; consequently, the Contractor agrees that the Government has the right to successor products at no additional cost when functionality is later unbundled from the product licensed herein and bundled into a new or different product, provided the Government is current on maintenance. If the Contractor is a reseller for the computer software being acquired under this Contract/Order, it is permissible for the actual software manufacturer (Licensor) to deliver the software directly to the Government.All limitations of software usage are expressly stated in the SF 1449 and Addendum A and Addendum B. Software Maintenance Subscription and Technical Support. See also Addendum B.Software maintenance and technical support are included at the agreed upon price. However, if additional charges are assessed during the maintenance and technical support period as a result of negotiated changes in the license (e.g., CPU upgrades), the fee shall be by mutual agreement of the parties and any dispute thereof shall be resolved in accordance with the Disputes Clause incorporated herein at FAR 52.212-4(g).If the Government desires to continue software maintenance and support beyond the period identified in this Contract/Order, the Government will issue a separate contract or order to renew annual maintenance and technical support. Conversely, if an order or contract to renew software maintenance and technical support is not received, no assumption by the Contractor shall be made that it has been renewed. It shall not be automatically renewed. Unless otherwise agreed, for any new additional software that may be licensed, the Contractor shall provide for software maintenance and technical support for the first year of the license at no additional cost.Unless otherwise agreed, the Contractor shall provide VA with software maintenance, which includes periodic updates, upgrades, enhancements and corrections to the software, and reasonable technical support, all of which are customarily provided by the Contractor to its customers so as to cause the software to perform according to its specifications, documentation or demonstrated claims. Any telephone support provided by Contractor shall be at no additional cost.All technical support services will be provided in a timely manner in accordance with the Contractor’s customary practice. However, prolonged delay in resolving software problems will be noted in the Government’s various past performance records on the Contractor (e.g., ).If the Government allows the maintenance and/or technical support to lapse and subsequently wishes to reinstate maintenance and technical support, any reinstatement fee charged shall not exceed the amounts that would have been charged if the Government had not allowed it to lapse. A.12 Disabling Software Code. The Government requires delivery of computer software that does not contain any code that will, upon the occurrence or the nonoccurrence of any event, disable the software. Such code includes but is not limited to a computer virus, restrictive key, node lock, time-out or other function, whether implemented by electronic, mechanical, or other means, which limits or hinders the use or access to any computer software based on residency on a specific hardware configuration, frequency of duration of use, or other limiting criteria. If any such code is present, the Contractor agrees to indemnify the Government for all damages suffered as a result of a disabling caused by such code, and the Contractor agrees to remove such code upon the Government’s request at no extra cost to the Government. Inability of the Contractor to remove the disabling software code will be considered an inexcusable delay and a material breach of contract, and the Government may exercise its right to terminate for cause. In addition, the Government is permitted to remove the code as it deems appropriate and charge the Contractor for consideration for the time and effort in removing the code.A.13 Disaster Recovery Clause. Government hereby certifies to Contractor that it has a bona fide disaster plan with respect to the computer software programs used in its operations. The Contract/Order authorizes the Government's operation to maintain a second copy of software on tape for use at loading at sites that are not live (e.g. subscription-based disaster recovery services) for the sole purpose of duplicating or mirroring the software environment of the "primary" licenses at the designated licensed site and as described herein. Additionally, use of the software at the contingency sites must not include general access or any processing for program development or production. Contractor shall permit operation and testing of all licensed programs at the contingency sites as designated by the Government without prior approval and at no additional cost to the Government solely for the purpose of maintaining or implementing disaster recovery readiness including continuity of business operations. CPU’s, MIPS or MSU’s at these contingency sites are excluded from the total CPU’s, MIPS or MSU’s count included elsewhere in the Contract/Order and are not separately billable. Activation of operations at a contingency site shall be at Government's discretion. Government is authorized to install all software at the contingency sites for testing, problem resolution purposes, and to ensure there will be no operational delays in association with transition of workload from the designated licensed site to the contingency sites. Use of the software at the contingency sites in the event of a disaster shall continue until such time as normal processing can be resumed at the "primary" site regardless of the duration required. Nothing in the Contract/Order diminishes the Government's rights in accordance with the data rights clause(s). Any license keys, codes, or passwords required by the Contractor in order to use the software at the contingency sites shall be provided to the Government within 10 days of the Government’s request.A.14 NOTICE OF THE FEDERAL ACCESSIBILITY LAW AFFECTING ALL ELECTRONIC AND INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY PROCUREMENTS (SECTION 508)On August 7, 1998, Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 was amended to require that when Federal departments or agencies develop, procure, maintain, or use Electronic and Information Technology, that they shall ensure it allows Federal employees with disabilities to have access to and use of information and data that is comparable to the access to and use of information and data by other Federal employees.Section 508 required the Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board (Access Board) to publish standards setting forth a definition of electronic and information technology and the technical and functional criteria for such technology to comply with Section 508. These standards have been developed were published with an effective date of December 21, 2000. Federal departments and agencies must develop all Electronic and Information Technology requirements to comply with the standards found in 36 CFR 1194 .___*____ in performing this contract. (Fill in Section Number and Title)ADDENDUM B – STATEMENT OF WORK FOR CONTRACT #_____________________________ or ORDER#________________B.1 License. BROADLY DESCRIBE COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT AND HOW VA INTENDS TO USE THE SOFTWARE, HOW ITS LICENSED, WHAT THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO DO, ETC. TO GET YOU STARTED: The Department of Veterans Affairs (VA) has a need for the computer software identified on the Schedule of Supplies/Services (page 2) (software media and license) and software support services. The software will be installed onto multiple servers at the ITAC in Austin Texas for support/training/staging of the _____________________ Project. These are processor-based licenses that allow for unlimited users utilizing the processor(s). Contractor shall grant the Government the necessary license to accommodate this need. VA may move the software to any other location or hardware at any time. B.2 Maintenance. The Contractor will provide software maintenance services, which includes periodic updates, enhancements and corrections to the software, and reasonable technical support, all of which are customarily provided by the Contractor to its customers so as to cause the software to perform according to its specifications, documentation or demonstrated claims. Add detailed, specific maintenance and support information here. The Contractor will distribute maintenance updates or releases by using an appropriate magnetic, electronic, or printed media to the address in Block 15 of page one, but to the attention of Joe Smith. Alternatively, the Contractor may offer access to maintenance copies through its website. All maintenance services will be provided in a timely manner in accordance with the Contractor’s customary practice. However, prolonged delay in resolving software problems will be noted in the Government’s various past performance records on the Contractor (e.g., ). 2. MOU3. Risk AssessmentDepartment ofVeterans AffairsMemorandumDate:(current date) From:Director (XXXXX)AddressAddressAddressSubj:VA Headquarters (VACO) Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) for Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Part 15 Listed “Non-Regulated Equipment Wireless Operations”To:Department of Veterans AffairsOffice of Telecommunications (005OP)Spectrum Management (005OP2H3)Telecommunications Voice Engineering (005OP2H2)1335 East West Highway, 3rd FloorSilver Spring, Maryland 204201.We have received the subject VACO MOU (signed copy attached), and are pleased to provide the following information and comments for your review that includes our risks and risk-mitigation factors that prompted our Facility’s decision:a.RISK ASSESSMENT AND MITIGATION:(1)Background:(a)(name) VAMC (here-in-after referred to as “the Facility”) has used (OEM Mdl Nr?) for over 10 years to allow nurses in the telemetry studio to communicate with nurses at the patients’ bedside. This communication medium is a vital patient safety tool that allows for rapid response to the development of a potentially fatal arrhythmia such as ventricular tachycardia. The only information the telemetry technician states on the phone is “bed 109-2 Smith has an alarm for XXXXX.” ?Last four is never communicated.? In terms of the pager we have limited the information on the pager to sector, bed number and last name. ?We must include the last name as occasionally the patients are moved without the knowledge of the telemetry technician, if we were to have a patient mix up the page must contain the last name for safety reasons. ?Facility Management Services (FMS) has restricted paging access to the telemetry system only. Because pager access is restricted, only an administrator from Technology and Information Management (TIM) or FMS can troubleshoot a pager malfunction.VAMC (City), (State – ZIP Code), Unregulated FCC Equipment Use, Risk Assessment and Mitigation, Page Two(b)Because the phones are used 24X7 and have exceeded their life expectancy, many of them have begun to fail which creates a need to purchase newer models that will continue to insure system integrity.(c)Our Facility has been prevented from purchasing replacement phones because VACO now has updated security and Information Technology (IT) connection controls along with continuing FCC Part 15 restrictions (described in the attached MOU) on devices of which these wireless phones are but one example. These updated security and connection controls are in place to address risks related life safety, information security, personal privacy and IT system integrity. The FCC restrictions continue to warn against the use of “non-regulated radio / wireless based equipment in safety of life locations and functions.” Of note, these controls are intended to prevent use of these devices in areas especially where a code-blue annunciation might occur, yet our devices have been used in such areas for over 10 years and so far has not prevented a code-blue annunciation from happening.(d)Because the Facility does not have a near-term alternative to the current wireless phones, it now faces a set of competing risks. On the one hand are the risks of privacy, connection and interference or security breach(s) that are behind the controls in place for these devices. On the other hand are risks to patient safety if the current phones were to fail and telemetry nurses would lose the ability to rapidly communicate with nurses at the bedside. Our Facility does have a Life Safety approved Nurses Call / Code Blue hardwired system that is installed in those affected areas as the primary Code Blue Enunciation media.(2)SECURITY:(a)NEC provides a proprietary scrambling algorithm that is applied to handset registration / authentication and all communications. Every time a (OEM Mdl Nr?) user enters a designated area within the systems’ coverage; an automatic user authentication process is performed to confirm the device is authorized for service on the system. This information is scrambled using a proprietary coding scheme to prevent duplication. All voice conversations are also scrambled to enhance security. (b)The (OEM Mdl Nr?) has several built in security features in each of the wireless handsets are administered through the Facility’s Telephone Private Branch Exchange (PBX) administration tool; therefore, the PBX Administrator has full control over the (OEM Mdl Nr?) wireless phones, if one gets lost or stolen it can be disabled immediately. Because of this feature you cannot purchase a similar wireless phone and have it work on our network. These phones have a 50 ft radius from the Zone radio frequency (RF) transceiver; they can only be used within the hospital as there is no handoff via other cellular networks.(c)These items are not NIST FIPS compliant; but based on the aforementioned facts, we feel patient / staff privacy and HIPAA instructions have been and will continue to be met. (d)Our Facility will work with (OEM) and VACO’s Office of Cyber Security (Name and Phone Nr) to secure the appropriate NIST FIPS certifications will allow VA to issue a Official Approvals from the onset in the IT equipment / system procurement process. VAMC (City), (State – ZIP Code), Unregulated FCC Equipment Use, Risk Assessment and Mitigation, Page Three(3)RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) INTERFERENCE:(a)(OEM) engineers provided us with extensive information on the potential for RF along with electromagnetic (EM) interference to medical equipment within our Facility from the (OEM System) Wireless radio transceivers.1)Field Experience: Since introduction of the (OEM System) Wireless product in 1996, NEC has installed this system at many health care institutions across the spectrum of medical departments. In all this time there have been zero reports of either suspected or actual RF and EM interference. This includes the experience using these devices at Portland VAMC and our continued testing documentation is available for review if requested.2)Potential interference called Near Field Coupling: In these cases, an EM field emanating from one device may cause another device within its field area to malfunction. Typically the distances for these fields are less than six (6) inches. In attempts to mitigate these sources of interference, standards have been put in place, namely IEC 60601. This standard calls for devices susceptible to interference to provide shielding against fields of up to three (3) Volts per Meter. In contrast, the (OEM System) wireless products are classified under the FCC Part 15 rules as Class B unlicensed devices, and as such must meet very tight restrictions regarding field emissions of a maximum of from 100 to 500 micro (?) Volts per Meter across the band of RFs from 30 Hz to 18 gHz. Thus, any medical device even marginally meeting the IEC Standard has not had problems with any near field emissions.3)Potential phenomenon known as Far Field Induced RFI: should be considered when studying RF and EM interference sources. In this case, a part of the device subject to interference (e.g., a wire, probe, or the casing itself) can inadvertently act as a receiving antenna for a signal transmitted from another device within close proximity (within 6 to 18 inches, depending on the source power levels). To realize this type of interference, the source transmitter power must be fairly strong to conduct through the inefficient nature of the unintended antenna of the receiving device, and the material acting as the antenna must be of a shape and length that matches or is a near multiple of the wavelength of the transmitted RF signal. Finally, this unintentional antenna must not have the typical shielding between it and the subject device’s electronics, which if present would prevent such a received signal from causing interference. In the case of the (OEM System) Wireless transmission, which operates between 1,920 mHz and 1,930 mHz, a probe or such piece of any medical device measuring at about six (6) inches would match the wavelength of the RF carrier, and if not properly shielded from the units electronics may indeed conduct the RF energy within. However, even in this case, one must consider the power level at the so-called antenna receiving the signal. The average output of the (OEM Mdl Nr?) handset is approximately 10 mili (m) Watts when in use. This very low power, even further reduced by the distance between any handset in use and the subject receiving equipment, considered along with the high loss of the “antenna”, results in a very low probability of actual interference. These facts, along with the standard procedures of your engineering department’s efforts to check the medical equipment for such shielding and filtering defects, should mitigate this potential source.4)Potential interference between intentional radiators operating in the RF band. Known as either in-band or out-of-band interference, these are cases where a transmitter broadcasts a signal of significant power at the other device’s receiver to either overload the receiving radio or mix with the subject’s transmitted signal to cause an interfered signal to be received. In-band interference VAMC (City), (State – ZIP Code), Unregulated FCC Equipment Use, Risk Assessment and Mitigation, Page Fourin the Unlicensed PCS band of which the (OEM System) Wireless system operates is prevented by the FCC rules requiring our equipment to monitor the carrier on which a device intends to transmit on before doing so, so as to sense any current use by another device. If such a signal is received during monitoring, we move to another carrier and try again. This protocol has been demonstrated many times within the FCC labs as well as at many industry trade shows where 5 or more vendors with U-PCS devices have operated in booths close to each other without interference. As for out-of-band interference, because of the extremely low power our devices operate with and the very strict out-of-band emission requirements placed upon the U-PCS devices, and the additional factor of a wide separation in the operating frequencies of our system and the typical radio telemetry equipment used in many hospital environments, such interference is very remote and would require extremely close proximity of the two devices.5)All of our (OEM Mdl Nr?) are FCC listed and has not interfered with other traffic within the same band. We expect the FCC listed (OEM Mdl Nr?) equipment will perform in the same manner.(b)Our Facility will work with (OEM) and VACO’s Spectrum Management (005OP2H3) to find a RF band that can be utilized for this operation that will allow VA to issue a formal and Official Radio Use Permit that will negate the “unregulated equipment use” issues. (4)CONNECTION TO IT/CABLE NETWORKS:(a)Each item or system that attaches to a VA IT Network (telephone or data) must be Department of Commerce’s National Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 60950-1/2; Information Technology Equipment - Safety listed and bears UL’s mark. 1) Paragraph 1.1.1; Equipment Covered by this Standard specifically identifies these systems / networks as one affected system. 2)Paragraph 1.1.2; Additional Requirements further identifies this requirement for electomedical applications with physical connections to the patient be met.(b)This requirement is paramount since the Facility’s Telephone PABX and associated system is listed by the National Fire Protection Association as Critical Service. Additionally, since it carries our Code Blue Radio and Overhead Audio Paging Signals, VA elevates it to Life Safety Service.(c)Presently the (OEM Mdl Nr?) wireless phones are UL Listed but does not have the aforementioned specific UL certification. Our Facility is working with (The OEM) in this arena to have them meet or exceed this UL requirement. In the meantime we will abide within the confines outlined in the attached MOU for insuring an approved IT Network / System connection is maintained until the appropriate UL certification has been obtained allowing it to be directly connected to our telephone system.b.The Facility Director after careful review of the attached MOU and consultation with the Facility’s CIO, (OEM) engineers, Biomedical and NFPA Engineers, ISO, HIPAA / Privacy Officer, Clinical Staff and JACHAO Officials has decided this risk-benefit analysis strongly favors purchasing replacement (OEM Mdl Nr) phones.VAMC (City), (State – ZIP Code), Unregulated FCC Equipment Use, Risk Assessment and Mitigation, Page Four2.Please feel free to contact me concerning the contents of this document.DIRECTOR’s NAME IN CAPScc:Office of General ConsulOffice of Telecommunications (05)VA Enterprise Infrastructure Engineering Telecommunications Engineering and DesignOffice of Cyber SecurityAttachment: VACO MOU- - - E N D - - -SECTION 28 05 11REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY INSTALLATIONSPART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This Section, Requirements for Electronic Safety and Security Installations, applies to all sections of Division 28.B.Furnish and install electronic safety and security cabling, systems, equipment and accessories in accordance with the specifications and drawings. Capacities and ratings of, cable and other items and arrangements for the specified items are shown on drawings.1.2 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTSA.References to industry and trade association standards and codes are minimum installation requirement standards.B.Drawings and other specification sections shall govern in those instances where requirements are greater than those specified in the above standards.1.3 QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES) A.Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer shall regularly and presently produce, as one of the manufacturer's principal products, the equipment and material specified for this project, and shall have manufactured the item for at least three years.B.Product Qualification:1.Manufacturer's product shall have been in satisfactory operation, on three installations of similar size and type as this project, for approximately three years.2.The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a list of installations where the products have been in operation before approval.C.Service Qualifications: There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or trained by the manufacturer which will render satisfactory service to this installation within eight hours of receipt of notification that service is needed. Submit name and address of service organizations.1.4 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTSA.Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items, for which replacement parts shall be available.B.When more than one unit of the same class of equipment is required, such units shall be the product of a single manufacturer.C.Equipment Assemblies and Components:ponents of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer.2.Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which include components made by others, shall assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit.ponents shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the intended service.4.Constituent parts which are similar shall be the product of a single manufacturer.D.Factory wiring shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on all wiring diagrams.E.When Factory Testing Is Specified:1.The Government shall have the option of witnessing factory tests. The contractor shall notify the VA through the COTR a minimum of 15 working days prior to the manufacturers making the factory tests.2.Four copies of certified test reports containing all test data shall be furnished to the COTR prior to final inspection and not more than 90 days after completion of the tests.3.When equipment fails to meet factory test and re-inspection is required, the contractor shall be liable for all additional expenses, including expenses of the Government.1.5 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTSWhere variations from the contract requirements are requested in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS and Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, the connecting work and related components shall include, but not be limited to additions or changes to branch circuits, circuit protective devices, conduits, wire, feeders, controls, panels and installation methods.1.6 EQUIPMENT PROTECTIONA.Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical damage, dirt, moisture, cold and rain:1.During installation, enclosures, equipment, controls, controllers, circuit protective devices, and other like items, shall be protected against entry of foreign matter; and be vacuum cleaned both inside and outside before testing and operating and repainting if required.2.Damaged equipment shall be, as determined by the COTR, placed in first class operating condition or be returned to the source of supply for repair or replacement.3.Painted surfaces shall be protected with factory installed removable heavy kraft paper, sheet vinyl or equal.4.Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be refinished with the same quality of paint and workmanship as used by the manufacturer so repaired areas are not obvious.1.7 WORK PERFORMANCEA.Job site safety and worker safety is the responsibility of the contractor.B.For work on existing stations, arrange, phase and perform work to assure electronic safety and security service for other buildings at all times. Refer to Article OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS under Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.C.New work shall be installed and connected to existing work neatly and carefully. Disturbed or damaged work shall be replaced or repaired to its prior conditions, as required by Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.D.Coordinate location of equipment and conduit with other trades to minimize interferences. See the GENERAL CONDITIONS.1.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS A.Equipment location shall be as close as practical to locations shown on the drawings.B.Inaccessible Equipment:1.Where the Government determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, the equipment shall be removed and reinstalled as directed at no additional cost to the Government.2."Conveniently accessible" is defined as being capable of being reached without the use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as, but not limited to, motors, pumps, belt guards, transformers, piping, ductwork, conduit and raceways.1.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATIONA.Install an identification sign which clearly indicates information required for use and maintenance of equipment.B.Nameplates shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core with engraved lettering, a minimum of 6 mm (1/4 inch) high. Secure nameplates with screws. Nameplates that are furnished by manufacturer as a standard catalog item, or where other method of identification is herein specified, are exceptions.1.10 SUBMITTALSA.Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B.The Government's approval shall be obtained for all equipment and material before delivery to the job site. Delivery, storage or installation of equipment or material which has not had prior approval will not be permitted at the job site.C.All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings and other data necessary for the Government to ascertain that the proposed equipment and materials comply with specification requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for approval shall be legible and clearly identify equipment being submitted.D.Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies which consist of more than one item or component shall be made for the system or assembly as a whole. Partial submittals will not be considered for approval.1.Mark the submittals, "SUBMITTED UNDER SECTION__________________".2.Submittals shall be marked to show specification reference including the section and paragraph numbers.3.Submit each section separately.E.The submittals shall include the following:rmation that confirms compliance with contract requirements. Include the manufacturer's name, model or catalog numbers, catalog information, technical data sheets, shop drawings, pictures, nameplate data and test reports as required.2.Elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams for communication and signal systems, control system and equipment assemblies. All terminal points and wiring shall be identified on wiring diagrams.3.Parts list which shall include those replacement parts recommended by the equipment manufacturer, quantity of parts, current price and availability of each part.F.Manuals: Submit in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.1.Maintenance and Operation Manuals: Submit as required for systems and equipment specified in the technical sections. Furnish four copies, bound in hardback binders, (manufacturer's standard binders) or an approved equivalent. Furnish one complete manual as specified in the technical section but in no case later than prior to performance of systems or equipment test, and furnish the remaining manuals prior to contract completion.2.Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words "MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUAL," the name and location of the system, equipment, building, name of Contractor, and contract number. Include in the manual the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing the system or equipment and the local representatives for the system or equipment.3.Provide a "Table of Contents" and assemble the manual to conform to the table of contents, with tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.4.The manuals shall include:a.Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of the equipment.b.A control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown.c.Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.d.Installation and maintenance instructions.e.Safety precautions.f.Diagrams and illustrations.g.Testing methods.h.Performance data.i.Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers. Emphasis shall be placed on the use of special tools and instruments. The list shall indicate sources of supply, recommended spare parts, and name of servicing organization.j.Appendix; list qualified permanent servicing organizations for support of the equipment, including addresses and certified qualifications.G.Approvals will be based on complete submission of manuals together with shop drawings.H.After approval and prior to installation, furnish the COTR with one sample of each of the following:1.A 300 mm (12 inch) length of each type and size of wire and cable along with the tag from the coils of reels from which the samples were taken. 2.Each type of conduit and pathway coupling, bushing and termination fitting. 3.Conduit hangers, clamps and supports. 4.Duct sealing compound. 1.11 SINGULAR NUMBER Where any device or part of equipment is referred to in these specifications in the singular number (e.g., "the switch"), this reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation as shown on the drawings.1.12 TRAININGA.Training shall be provided in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, of Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.B.Training shall be provided for the particular equipment or system as required in each associated specification.C.A training schedule shall be developed and submitted by the contractor and approved by the COTR at least 30 days prior to the planned training.- E N D SECTION 28 05 13CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITYPART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of the conductors and cables for electronic safety and security.1.2 RELATED WORKB.Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of time rated construction: Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.C.General electrical requirements that are common to more than one section in Division 28: Section 28 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY INSTALLATIONS.D.Conduits for cables and wiring: Section 28 05 33, RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY.1.3 SUBMITTALSA.In accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, furnish the following:1.Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Showing each cable type and rating.2.Certificates: Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver to the COTR four copies of the certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications and has been properly installed.1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are reference in the text by the basic designation only.B.American Society of Testing Material (ASTM):D2301-04Standard Specification for Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape C.Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):A-A-59544-00Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation)D.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):70-05National Electrical Code (NEC)E.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):44-02Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables83-03Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables467-01Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment486A-01Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors486C-02Splicing Wire Connectors486D-02Insulated Wire Connector Systems for Underground Use or in Damp or Wet Locations486E-00Equipment Wiring Terminals for Use with Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors493-01Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch Circuit Cable514B-02Fittings for Cable and Conduit1479-03Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire StopsPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTROL WIRING A.Unless otherwise specified in other sections of these specifications, control wiring shall be as specified for power and lighting wiring, except the minimum size shall be not less than No. 14 AWG.B.Control wiring shall be large enough so that the voltage drop under inrush conditions does not adversely affect operation of the controls.2.2 COMMUNICATION AND SIGNAL WIRINGA.Shall conform to the recommendations of the manufacturers of the communication and signal systems; however, not less than what is shown.B.Wiring shown is for typical systems. Provide wiring as required for the systems being furnished.C.Multiconductor cables shall have the conductors color coded.2.3 WIRE LUBRICATING COMPOUNDA.Suitable for the wire insulation and conduit it is used with, and shall not harden or become adhesive.B.Shall not be used on wire for isolated type electrical power systems.2.4 FIREPROOFING TAPEA.The tape shall consist of a flexible, conformable fabric of organic composition coated one side with flameretardant elastomer.B.The tape shall be selfextinguishing and shall not support combustion. It shall be arc-proof and fireproof.C.The tape shall not deteriorate when subjected to water, gases, salt water, sewage, or fungus and be resistant to sunlight and ultraviolet light.D.The finished application shall withstand a 200-ampere arc for not less than 30 seconds.E.Securing tape: Glass cloth electrical tape not less than 0.18 mm (7?mils) thick, and 19 mm (3/4 inch) wide.PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAl A.Splice cables and wires only in outlet boxes, junction boxes, or pull boxes.B.Seal cable and wire entering a building from underground, between the wire and conduit where the cable exits the conduit, with a non-hardening approved compound.C.Wire Pulling:1.Provide installation equipment that will prevent the cutting or abrasion of insulation during pulling of cables.2.Use ropes made of nonmetallic material for pulling feeders.3.Attach pulling lines for feeders by means of either woven basket grips or pulling eyes attached directly to the conductors, as approved by the COTR.4.Pull in multiple cables together in a single conduit. 3.2 SPLICE INSTALLATIONA.Splices and terminations shall be mechanically and electrically secure. B.Where the Government determines that unsatisfactory splices or terminations have been installed, remove the devices and install approved devices at no additional cost to the Government.3.3 CONTROL, COMMUNICATION AND SIGNAL WIRING INSTALLATIONA.Unless otherwise specified in other sections, install wiring and connect to equipment/devices to perform the required functions as shown and specified. B.Except where otherwise required, install a separate power supply circuit for each system so that malfunctions in any system will not affect other systems.C.Where separate power supply circuits are not shown, connect the systems to the nearest panelboards of suitable voltages, which are intended to supply such systems and have suitable spare circuit breakers or space for installation.D.Install a red warning indicator on the handle of the branch circuit breaker for the power supply circuit for each system to prevent accidental deenergizing of the systems.E.System voltages shall be 120 volts or lower where shown on the drawings or as required by the NEC.3.4 CONTROL, COMMUNICATION AND SIGNAL SYSTEM IDENTIFICATIONA.Install a permanent wire marker on each wire at each termination.B.Identifying numbers and letters on the wire markers shall correspond to those on the wiring diagrams used for installing the systems.C.Wire markers shall retain their markings after cleaning.D.In each manhole and handhole, install embossed brass tags to identify the system served and function.3.5 exisitng wiringUnless specifically indicated on the plans, existing wiring shall not be reused for the new installation. Only wiring that conforms to the specifications and applicable codes may be reused. If existing wiring does not meet these requirements, existing wiring may not be reused and new wires shall be installed. E N D SECTION 28 05 33RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITYPART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of conduit, fittings, and boxes to form complete, coordinated, raceway systems. Raceways are required for all electronic safety and security cabling unless shown or specified otherwise.B.Definitions: The term conduit, as used in this specification, shall mean any or all of the raceway types specified.1.2 RELATED WORK A.Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of fire rated construction: Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.B.Identification and painting of conduit and other devices: Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.C.General electrical requirements and items that is common to more than one section of Division 28: Section 28 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY INSTALLATIONS.1.3 SUBMITTALSIn accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, furnish the following:A.Shop Drawings:1.Size and location of main feeders; 2.Size and location of panels and pull boxes3.Layout of required conduit penetrations through structural elements.4.The specific item proposed and its area of application shall be identified on the catalog cuts.B.Certification: Prior to final inspection, deliver to the COTR four copies of the certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications and has been properly installed.1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.B.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):70-05National Electrical Code (NEC)C.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):1-03Flexible Metal Conduit 5-01Surface Metal Raceway and Fittings6-03Rigid Metal Conduit50-03Enclosures for Electrical Equipment360-03Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit467-01Grounding and Bonding Equipment514A-01Metallic Outlet Boxes514B-02Fittings for Cable and Conduit514C-05Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes and Covers 651-02Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit651A-03Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit797-03Electrical Metallic Tubing1242-00Intermediate Metal ConduitD.National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):TC-3-04PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and TubingFB1-03Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing and CablePART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 MATERIALA.Conduit Size: In accordance with the NEC, but not less than 13 mm (1/2?inch) unless otherwise shown. Where permitted by the NEC, 13 mm (1/2 inch) flexible conduit may be used for tap connections to recessed lighting fixtures.B.Conduit: 4.Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Shall Conform to UL 797, ANSI C80.3. Maximum size not to exceed 105 mm (4?inch) and shall be permitted only with cable rated 600 volts or less.C.Conduit Fittings: 1.Electrical metallic tubing fittings: a.Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and ANSI/ NEMA FB1.b.Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.c.Couplings and connectors: Concrete tight and rain tight, with connectors having insulated throats. Use gland and ring compression type couplings and connectors for conduit sizes 50 mm (2 inches) and smaller. Use set screw type couplings with four set screws each for conduit sizes over 50 mm (2 inches). Use set screws of case-hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in wall of conduit for positive grounding.d.Indent type connectors or couplings are prohibited.e.Die-cast or pressure-cast zinc-alloy fittings or fittings made of "pot metal" are prohibited.D.Conduit Supports:1.Parts and hardware: Zinccoat or provide equivalent corrosion protection.2.Individual Conduit Hangers: Designed for the purpose, having a preassembled closure bolt and nut, and provisions for receiving a hanger rod.3.Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers: Not less than 38 mm by 38 mm (11/2 by 11/2 inch), 12 gage steel, cold formed, lipped channels; with not less than 9 mm (3/8 inch) diameter steel hanger rods.4.Solid Masonry and Concrete Anchors: Selfdrilling expansion shields, or machine bolt expansion.E.Outlet, Junction, and Pull Boxes:1.UL-50 and UL-514A.2.Cast metal where required by the NEC or shown, and equipped with rustproof boxes.3.Sheet metal boxes: Galvanized steel, except where otherwise shown.4.Flush mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with raised covers so that front face of raised cover is flush with the wall. Surface mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with surface style flat or raised covers.F. Wireways: Equip with hinged covers, except where removable covers are shown.PART 3 EXECUTION3.1 PENETRATIONSA.Cutting or Holes:1.Locate holes in advance where they are proposed in the structural sections such as ribs or beams. Obtain the approval of the COTR prior to drilling through structural sections.2.Cut holes through concrete and masonry in new and existing structures with a diamond core drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, hand or manual hammer type drills are not allowed, except where permitted by the COTR as required by limited working space.B.Fire Stop: Where conduits, wireways, and other electronic safety and security raceways pass through fire partitions, fire walls, smoke partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases as specified in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING, with rock wool fiber or silicone foam sealant only. Completely fill and seal clearances between raceways and openings with the fire stop material.3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERALA.Install conduit as follows:1.In complete runs before pulling in cables or wires.2.Flattened, dented, or deformed conduit is not permitted. Remove and replace the damaged conduits with new undamaged material.3.Assure conduit installation does not encroach into the ceiling height head room, walkways, or doorways.4.Cut square with a hacksaw, ream, remove burrs, and draw up tight.5.Mechanically continuous.6.Independently support conduit at 8’0” on center. Do not use other supports i.e., (suspended ceilings, suspended ceiling supporting members, lighting fixtures, conduits, mechanical piping, or mechanical ducts).7.Support within 300 mm (1 foot) of changes of direction, and within 300 mm (1 foot) of each enclosure to which connected.8.Close ends of empty conduit with plugs or caps at the roughin stage to prevent entry of debris, until wires are pulled in.9.Conduit installations under fume and vent hoods are prohibited.10.Secure conduits to cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes and outlet boxes with bonding type locknuts. For rigid and IMC conduit installations, provide a locknut on the inside of the enclosure, made up wrench tight. Do not make conduit connections to junction box covers.11.Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein, all conduits shall be installed concealed within finished walls, floors and ceilings. B.Conduit Bends:1.Make bends with standard conduit bending machines.2.Conduit hickey may be used for slight offsets, and for straightening stubbed out conduits.3.Bending of conduits with a pipe tee or vise is prohibited.C.Layout and Homeruns:1.Install conduit with wiring, including homeruns, as shown.2.Deviations: Make only where necessary to avoid interferences and only after drawings showing the proposed deviations have been submitted approved by the COTR.D.Fire Alarm:1.Fire alarm conduit shall be painted red (a red “top-coated” conduit from the conduit manufacturer may be used in lieu of painted conduit) in accordance with the requirements of Section 28 31 00, Fire Detection and Alarm. 3.3 CONCEALED WORK INSTALLATION A.Furred or Suspended Ceilings and in Walls:1.Conduit for conductors above 600 volts:a.Rigid steel or rigid aluminum.b.Aluminum conduit mixed indiscriminately with other types in the same system is prohibited.2.Conduit for conductors 600 volts and below:a.Rigid steel, IMC, rigid aluminum, or EMT. Different type conduits mixed indiscriminately in the same system is prohibited.3.Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.4.Connect recessed lighting fixtures to conduit runs with maximum 1800 mm (six feet) of flexible metal conduit extending from a junction box to the fixture.5.Tightening set screws with pliers is prohibited.3.4 EXPOSED WORK INSTALLATIONA.Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, exposed conduit is only permitted in mechanical and electrical rooms.B.Conduit for conductors above 600 volts:1.Rigid steel or rigid aluminum. 2.Aluminum conduit mixed indiscriminately with other types in the same system is prohibited.C.Conduit for Conductors 600 volts and below:1.Rigid steel, IMC, rigid aluminum, or EMT. Different type of conduits mixed indiscriminately in the system is prohibited.D.Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.E.Install horizontal runs close to the ceiling or beams and secure with conduit straps.F.Support horizontal or vertical runs at not over 2400 mm (eight foot) intervals.G.Surface metal raceways: Use only where shown.H.Painting:1.Paint exposed conduit as specified in Section09 91 00, PAINTING.2.Paint all conduits containing cables rated over 600 volts safety orange. Refer to Section 09 91 00, PAINTING for preparation, paint type, and exact color. In addition, paint legends, using 50 mm (two inch) high black numerals and letters, showing the cable voltage rating. Provide legends where conduits pass through walls and floors and at maximum 6000 mm (20 foot) intervals in between.3.5 EXPANSION JOINTSA.Conduits 75 mm (3 inches) and larger, that are secured to the building structure on opposite sides of a building expansion joint, require expansion and deflection couplings. Install the couplings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.B.Provide conduits smaller than 75 mm (3 inches) with junction boxes on both sides of the expansion joint. Connect conduits to junction boxes with sufficient slack of flexible conduit to produce 125 mm (5 inch) vertical drop midway between the ends. Flexible conduit shall have a copper green ground bonding jumper installed. In lieu of this flexible conduit, expansion and deflection couplings as specified above for 375 mm (15 inches) and larger conduits are acceptable.C.Install expansion and deflection couplings where shown.3.6 CONDUIT SUPPORTS, INSTALLATION A.Safe working load shall not exceed 1/4 of proof test load of fastening devices.B.Use pipe straps or individual conduit hangers for supporting individual conduits. Maximum distance between supports is 2.5 m (8 foot) on center.C.Support multiple conduit runs with trapeze hangers. Use trapeze hangers that are designed to support a load equal to or greater than the sum of the weights of the conduits, wires, hanger itself, and 90 kg (200 pounds). Attach each conduit with Ubolts or other approved fasteners.D.Support conduit independently of junction boxes, pull boxes, fixtures, suspended ceiling Tbars, angle supports, and similar items.E.Fasteners and Supports in Solid Masonry and Concrete:1.New Construction: Use steel or malleable iron concrete inserts set in place prior to placing the concrete.2.Existing Construction:a.Steel expansion anchors not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) bolt size and not less than 28 mm (11/8 inch) embedment.b.Power set fasteners not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) diameter with depth of penetration not less than 75 mm (3 inches).c.Use vibration and shock resistant anchors and fasteners for attaching to concrete ceilings.F.Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts are permitted. G.Bolts supported only by plaster or gypsum wallboard are not acceptable.H.Metal Structures: Use machine screw fasteners or other devices specifically designed and approved for the application.I.Attachment by wood plugs, rawl plug, plastic, lead or soft metal anchors, or wood blocking and bolts supported only by plaster is prohibited.J.Chain, wire, or perforated strap shall not be used to support or fasten conduit.K.Spring steel type supports or fasteners are prohibited for all uses except: Horizontal and vertical supports/fasteners within walls.L.Vertical Supports: Vertical conduit runs shall have riser clamps and supports in accordance with the NEC and as shown. Provide supports for cable and wire with fittings that include internal wedges and retaining collars.3.7 BOX INSTALLATION A.Boxes for Concealed Conduits:1.Flush mounted.2.Provide raised covers for boxes to suit the wall or ceiling, construction and finish.B.In addition to boxes shown, install additional boxes where needed to prevent damage to cables and wires during pulling in operations. C.Remove only knockouts as required and plug unused openings. Use threaded plugs for cast metal boxes and snapin metal covers for sheet metal boxes.D.Outlet boxes in the same wall mounted backtoback are prohibited. A minimum 600 mm (24 inch), center-to-center lateral spacing shall be maintained between boxes.) E.Minimum size of outlet boxes for ground fault interrupter (GFI) receptacles is 100 mm (4 inches) square by 55 mm (21/8 inches) deep, with device covers for the wall material and thickness involved.F.Stencil or install phenolic nameplates on covers of the boxes identified on riser diagrams; for example "SIGFA JB No. 1". G.On all Branch Circuit junction box covers, identify the circuits with black marker.3.8 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY CONDUITA.Install the electronic safety and security raceway system as shown on drawings.B.Minimum conduit size of 19 mm (3/4 inch), but not less than the size shown on the drawings.C.All conduit ends shall be equipped with insulated bushings.D.All 100 mm (four inch) conduits within buildings shall include pull boxes after every two 90 degree bends. Size boxes per the NEC.E.Vertical conduits/sleeves through closets floors shall terminate not less than 75 mm (3 inches) below the floor and not less than 75 mm (3 inches) below the ceiling of the floor below.F.Terminate conduit runs to/from a backboard in a closet or interstitial space at the top or bottom of the backboard. Conduits shall enter communication closets next to the wall and be flush with the backboard.G.Where drilling is necessary for vertical conduits, locate holes so as not to affect structural sections such as ribs or beams.H.All empty conduits located in communications closets or on backboards shall be sealed with a standard nonhardening duct seal compound to prevent the entrance of moisture and gases and to meet fire resistance requirements.I.Conduit runs shall contain no more than four quarter turns (90 degree bends) between pull boxes/backboards. Minimum radius of communication conduit bends shall be as follows (special long radius):Sizes of ConduitTrade SizeRadius of Conduit Bendsmm, Inches?150 (6)1230 (9)1-1/4350 (14)1-1/2430 (17)2525 (21)2-1/2635 (25)3775 (31)3-1/2900 (36)41125 (45)J.Furnish and install 19 mm (3/4 inch) thick fire retardant plywood specified in on the wall of communication closets where shown on drawings . Mount the plywood with the bottom edge 300 mm (one foot) above the finished floor.K.Furnish and pull wire in all empty conduits. (Sleeves through floor are exceptions). E N D SECTION 28 31 00FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 DESCRIPTIONA.This section of the specifications includes the furnishing, installation, and connection of the fire alarm equipment to form a complete coordinated system ready for operation. It shall include, but not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, control units, fire safety control devices, and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified. The fire alarm system shall not be combined with other systems such as building automation, energy management, security, etc.B.Fire alarm systems shall comply with requirements of the most recent VA FIRE PROTECTION DESIGN MANUAL and NFPA 72 unless variations to NFPA 72 are specifically identified within these contract documents by the following notation: "variation". The design, system layout, document submittal preparation, and supervision of installation and testing shall be provided by a technician that is certified NICET level III or a registered fire protection engineer. The NICET certified technician shall be on site for the supervision and testing of the system. Factory engineers from the equipment manufacturer, thoroughly familiar and knowledgeable with all equipment utilized, shall provide additional technical support at the site as required by the COTR or his authorized representative. Installers shall have a minimum of 2 years experience installing fire alarm systems.C.Fire alarm signals:1.Building 500 shall have an automatic digitized voice fire alarm signal with emergency manual voice override to notify occupants to evacuate. The digitized voice message shall identify the area of the building (smoke zone) from which the alarm was initiated.1.2 SCOPEA.A fully addressable fire alarm system as an extension of an existing Building 500 addressable fire alarm system shall be designed and installed in accordance with the specifications and drawings. Device location and wiring runs shown on the drawings are for reference only unless specifically dimensioned. Actual locations shall be in accordance with NFPA 72 and this specification.B.All existing fire alarm equipment, wiring, devices and sub-systems that are not shown to be reused shall be removed. All existing fire alarm conduit not reused shall be removed.C.Basic Performance:1.Alarm and trouble signals from each building fire alarm control panel shall be digitally encoded by UL listed electronic devices onto a multiplexed communication system.2.Response time between alarm initiation (contact closure) and recording at the main fire alarm control unit (appearance on alphanumeric read out) shall not exceed 5 seconds.3.Notification appliance circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class B in accordance with NFPA 72.1.3 RELATED WORKA. Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.Requirements for procedures for submittals. B.Section 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING. Requirements for fire proofing wall penetrations. C.Section 21 13 13 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS. Requirements for sprinkler systems1.4 SUBMITTALSA.General: Submit 5 copies in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, and Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.B.Drawings:1.Prepare drawings using AutoCAD Release 14 software or newer and include all contractors information. Layering shall be by VA criteria as provided by the Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative (COTR). Bid drawing files on AutoCAD will be provided to the Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The contractor shall be responsible for verifying all critical dimensions shown on the drawings provided by VA.2.Floor plans: Provide locations of all devices (with device number at each addressable device corresponding to control unit programming), appliances, panels, equipment, junction/terminal cabinets/boxes, risers, electrical power connections, individual circuits and raceway routing, system zoning; number, size, and type of raceways and conductors in each raceway; conduit fill calculations with cross section area percent fill for each type and size of conductor and raceway. Only those devices connected and incorporated into the final system shall be on these floor plans. Do not show any removed devices on the floor plans. Show all interfaces for all fire safety functions.3.Detailed wiring diagrams: Provide for control panels, modules, power supplies, electrical power connections, auxiliary relays and annunciators showing termination identifications, size and type conductors, circuit boards, LED lamps, indicators, adjustable controls, switches, ribbon connectors, wiring harnesses, terminal strips and connectors, spare zones/circuits. Diagrams shall be drawn to a scale sufficient to show spatial relationships between components, enclosures and equipment configuration.4.Two weeks prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall deliver to the COTR 3 sets of as-built drawings and one set of the as-built drawing computer files using AutoCAD 2007 or later. Asbuilt drawings floor plans) shall show all new and/or existing conduit used for the fire alarm system.C.Manuals:1.Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets for all items used in the system, power requirements, device wiring diagrams, dimensions, and information for ordering replacement parts.a.Wiring diagrams shall have their terminals identified to facilitate installation, operation, expansion and maintenance.b.Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnections between the items of equipment.c.Include complete listing of all software used and installation and operation instructions including the input/output matrix chart.d.Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the information required to properly operate, inspect, test and maintain the equipment and system. Provide all manufacturer's installation limitations including but not limited to circuit length limitations.plete listing of all digitized voice messages.f.Provide standby battery calculations under normal operating and alarm modes. Battery calculations shall include the magnets for holding the doors open for one minute.g.Provide a replacement parts list with current prices. Include a list of recommended spare parts, tools, and instruments for testing and maintenance purposes.2.Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver 4 copies of the final updated maintenance and operating manual to the COTR.a.The manual shall be updated to include any information necessitated by the maintenance and operating manual approval.plete "As installed" wiring and schematic diagrams shall be included that shows all items of equipment and their interconnecting wiring. Show all final terminal identifications.plete listing of all programming information, including all control events per device including an updated input/output matrix.d.Certificate of Installation as required by NFPA 72 for each building. The certificate shall identify any variations from the National Fire Alarm Code.e.Certificate from equipment manufacturer assuring compliance with all manufacturers installation requirements and satisfactory system operation.D.Certifications:1.Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit the technician's NICET level III fire alarm certification as well as certification from the control unit manufacturer that the proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized representative of the major equipment manufacturer. Include in the certification the names and addresses of the proposed supervisor of installation and the proposed performer of contract maintenance. Also include the name and title of the manufacturer’s representative who makes the certification.2.Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from either the control unit manufacturer or the manufacturer of each component (e.g., smoke detector) that the components being furnished are compatible with the control unit.3.Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major equipment manufacturer that the wiring and connection diagrams meet this specification, UL and NFPA 72 requirements.1.5 WarrantyAll work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall be free from defects and shall remain so for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the entire installation by the Contracting Officer.1.6 GUARANTY PERIOD SERVICESA.Contractor shall provide all necessary test equipment, parts and labor to perform required inspection, testing, maintenance and repair.B.All inspection, testing, maintenance and permanent records required by NFPA 72, and recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be provided by the contractor. Work shall include operation of all reused existing equipment connected to the fire alarm system. Maintenance and testing shall be performed in accordance with NFPA 72. A computerized preventive maintenance schedule shall be provided and shall describe the protocol for preventive maintenance of equipment. The schedule shall include a systematic examination, adjustment and cleaning of all equipment.D.Non-included Work: Repair service shall not include the performance of any work due to improper use, accidents, or negligence for which the contractor is not responsible.E.The contractor shall maintain a log at the Building 500 fire alarm control unit. The log shall list the date and time of all examinations and trouble calls, condition of the system, and name of the technician. Each trouble call shall be fully described, including the nature of the trouble, necessary correction performed, and parts replaced.1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONSA.The publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in text by the basic designation only and the latest editions of these publications shall be applicable.B.National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):NFPA 13 ................Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2013 editionNFPA 70National Electrical Code (NEC), 2012 editionNFPA 72National Fire Alarm Code and Signaling Code, 2013 editionNFPA 90AStandard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, 2012 editionNFPA 101?Life Safety Code?, 2012 editionC.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Fire Protection Equipment Directory D.Factory Mutual Research Corp (FM): Approval Guide, 2013E.American National Standards Institute (ANSI):S3.41Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal, 1990 edition, reaffirmed 2008F.International Code Council, International Building Code (IBC), 2012 edition PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS, GENERALA.All equipment and components shall be new and the manufacturer's current model. All equipment shall be tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or Factory Mutual Research Corporation for use as part of a fire alarm system. The authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall certify that the installation complies with all manufacturers’ requirements and that satisfactory total system operation has been achieved.2.2 CONDUIT, BOXES, AND WIREA.Conduit shall be as follows:1.All new conduits shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 70.2.Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area.3.All new conduits shall be 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum.B.Wire:1.Wiring shall be in accordance with NEC article 760, Section 28 05 13, CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY, and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. All wires shall be color coded. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG for initiating device circuits and 14 AWG for notification device circuits.C.Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes, and Cabinets:1.Shall be galvanized steel in accordance with UL requirements.2.All boxes shall be sized and installed in accordance with NFPA 70.3.covers shall be repainted red in accordance with Section 09 91 00, PAINTING and shall be identified with white markings as "FA" for junction boxes and as "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM" for cabinets and terminal boxes. Lettering shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch (19 mm) high.4.Terminal boxes and cabinets shall have a volume 50 percent greater than required by the NFPA 70. Minimum sized wire shall be considered as 14 AWG for calculation purposes.5.Terminal boxes and cabinets shall have identified pressure type terminal strips and shall be located at the base of each riser. Terminal strips shall be labeled as specified or as approved by the COTR.2.3 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNITA.General:1.Extend the existing Edwards EST3 fire alarm system protecting Building 500. The head end EST3 fire alarm control panel is located in Room GA-104, in the basement of Building 500.2.All circuits shall be monitored for integrity.3.Visually and audibly annunciate any trouble condition including, but not limited to main power failure, grounds and system wiring derangement.4.Transmit digital alarm information to the main fire alarm control unit.B.Circuit Supervision: Each alarm initiating device circuit, signaling line circuit, and notification appliance circuit, shall be supervised against the occurrence of a break or ground fault condition in the field wiring. These conditions shall cause a trouble signal to sound in the control unit until manually silenced by an off switch.C.Trouble signals:1.Arrange the trouble signals for automatic reset (nonlatching).2.System trouble switch off and on lamps shall be visible through the control unit door.2.4 ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCESA.Speakers:1.Shall operate on either 25 VRMS or 70.7 VRMS with field selectable output taps from 0.5 to 2.0W and originally installed at the 1/2 watt tap. Speakers shall provide a minimum sound output of 80 dBA at 10 feet (3,000 mm) with the 1/2 watt tap.2.Frequency response shall be a minimum of 400 HZ to 4,000 HZ.3.Four inches (100 mm) or 8 inches (200 mm) cone type speakers ceiling mounted with white colored baffles in areas with suspended ceilings and wall mounted in areas without ceilings.B.Strobes:1.Xenon flash tube type minimum 15 candela in toilet rooms and 75 candela in all other areas with a flash rate of 1 HZ. Strobes shall be synchronized where required by the National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72).2.Backplate shall be red with 1/2 inch (13 mm) permanent red letters. Lettering to read "Fire", be oriented on the wall or ceiling properly, and be visible from all viewing directions.3.Each strobe circuit shall have a minimum of 20 percent spare capacity.4.Strobes may be combined with the audible notification appliances specified herein.2.5 SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTSA.Provide spare and replacement parts as follows:1.Fire alarm strobes - 12.Fire alarm speakers - 1B.Spare and replacement parts shall be in original packaging and submitted to the COTR.C.Provide to the VA, all hardware, software, programming tools, license and documentation necessary to permanently modify the fire alarm system on site. The minimum level of modification includes addition and deletion of devices, circuits, zones and changes to system description, system operation, and digitized evacuation and instructional messages.PART 3 - EXECUTION3.1 INSTALLATION:A.Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 70, 72, 90A, and 101 as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer. Fire alarm wiring shall be installed in conduit. All conduit and wire shall be installed in accordance with, Section 28 05 13 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY, and all penetrations of smoke and fire barriers shall be protected as required by Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.B.All conduits, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas.C.All new and reused exposed conduits shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 91 00, PAINTING to match surrounding finished areas and red in unfinished areas. D.Existing devices that are reused shall be properly mounted and installed. Where devices are installed on existing shallow backboxes, extension rings of the same material, color and texture of the new fire alarm devices shall be used. Mounting surfaces shall be cut and patched in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Restoration, and be repainted in accordance with Section 09 91 00, PAINTING as necessary to match existing.E.All fire detection and alarm system devices, control units and remote annunciators shall be flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas. Exact locations are to be approved by the COTR.F.Strobes shall be flush wall mounted with the bottom of the unit located 80 inches (2,000 mm) above the floor or 6 inches (150 mm) below ceiling, whichever is lower. Locate and mount to maintain a minimum 36 inches (900 mm) clearance from side obstructions.3.2 TESTSA.Provide the service of a NICET level III, competent, factorytrained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. Make all adjustments and tests in the presence of the COTR.B.When the systems have been completed and prior to the scheduling of the final inspection, furnish testing equipment and perform the following tests in the presence of the COTR. When any defects are detected, make repairs or install replacement components, and repeat the tests until such time that the complete fire alarm system meets all contract requirements. After the system has passed the initial test and been approved by the COTR, the contractor may request a final inspection.1.Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation.2.Test the insulation on all installed cable and wiring by standard methods as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. 3.Open each alarm initiating and notification circuit to see if trouble signal actuates.4.Ground each alarm initiation and notification circuit and verify response of trouble signals.3.3 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCEA.Prior to final acceptance a minimum 30 day "burnin" period shall be provided. The purpose shall be to allow equipment to stabilize and potential installation and software problems and equipment malfunctions to be identified and corrected. During this diagnostic period, all system operations and malfunctions shall be recorded. Final acceptance will be made upon successful completion of the "burnin" period and where the last 14 days is without a system or equipment malfunction.B.At the final inspection a factory trained representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall repeat the tests in Article 3.3 TESTS and those required by NFPA 72. In addition the representative shall demonstrate that the systems function properly in every respect. The demonstration shall be made in the presence of a VA representative.3.4 INSTRUCTIONA.Furnish the services of a competent instructor for instructing personnel in the programming requirements necessary for system expansion. Such programming shall include addition or deletion of devices, zones, indicating circuits and printer/display text.- - - E N D - - -ATTACHMENTSContractor Emergency Response PosturesAlthough the variety of emergencies that could occur at the Medical Center are infinite, there are only five basic response postures the Medical Center will execute to help preserve the safety and well being of patients, staff, and visitors.Lock inLock downShelter in placeEvacuationDeep Shelter (Duck, cover, and hold)These response postures will normally be directed by the Incident Commander, but it is vital that each staff member be prepared to direct patients and staff in their area to take the necessary response posture in the event you are the first to see or recognize an emergency situation.Utilizing the guidelines below, each Service shall complete enclosure (1) making specific plans for how their staff will implement the response postures. Service Chief’s are to address the main work spaces they are responsible for and shall conduct 2 Service specific drills annually.I. “Lock In” This is a posture taken in response to an event that occurs outside of your building on campus or off campus. The key components of a “lock in” are:1. Lock all exterior doors.2. Pull all shades/blinds where available and remain clear of windows where possible.3. No one is allowed to leave or enter the building.4. Police Service will activate Code White and restrict access to the campus.5. Normal routines inside your building may continue.Below are examples of when we may “lock in”:A violent incident at the new Mental Health Building where the perpetrator was on the loose: All other buildings would lock in, preventing the perpetrator from entering their spaces.The Credit Union is robbed and the perpetrator is on the loose. All buildings would lock in and the Police Service would activate a Code White to secure the campus.The Incident Commander will secure from a lock in after the Police Service has determined, to the best of their ability that a threat no longer exists.It is important to note that staff will not be permitted to enter or leave the building for any reason during a lock in. Please make sure that you have a contingency plan for any family responsibilities you may have.Lock in will be ended via standard emergency communication means.II. “Lock down”Lockdown is a response posture taken when there is a violent incident in your building or in the immediate vicinity around your building. The key components of a “lock down” include:1. If you are in an open space, gather all patients and visitors in your vicinity and get behind the nearest door you can lock.2. If you are in an office space, quickly lock your door.3. Once safely behind a locked door, turn off the lights and slide a communication card (Green for Okay, Red for assistance needed) under your door. Kneel or sit on the floor and position yourself behind furniture and out of the line of sight from the door or window.4. Police will activate Code White and respond aggressively with overwhelming force.Key points to remember during “lock down”:1. It is not uncommon for a person committing violent acts to use all means possible to expose more potential victims. If the fire alarm sounds while you are in lock down, you must personally make the decision to evacuate or remain in lockdown. The prevailing thoughts are that minus smoke, heat, or flames you are safer remaining locked down.2. Public Address announcements are suspect when violent intruder(s) are in the building. A PA announcement may be coerced or made by the perpetrator. Do not follow PA instructions during lock down.3. Attempts to get you to unlock your door, either verbally or through knocks are to be considered suspect. You may recognize the voice asking “Open up, let me in”, but you do not know if that person is acting in response to coercion.4. Do not, under any case, rush a police officer during their response to a violent incident. The officer is required to consider every person a potential suspect while responding to a violent act. You are a suspect until cleared by police. If you see a police officer approaching get against a wall, stay still, and raise your hands so they are in plain view. In no case should you put your hand in your pocket or make any other action which could give the appearance of reaching for a weapon. Once cleared, the officer will direct you where to go and what to do.Lock down will be ended by a police officer, firefighter, or other agency official unlocking your door.III. Shelter in PlaceAn order to Shelter in Place by the Incident Commander will be issued when there is an environmental condition outside of your building that is potentially harmful. The overall purpose of sheltering in place is to keep the “bad” air out and the good air in. The following actions shall be taken when directed to Shelter in Place:1. FMS will stop the exchange of air flow in Bldg 500 HVAC’s to minimize the drawing in of outside air.2. All staff with window Air Conditioning units shall turn them off immediately.3. All staff is to close all doors and windows in your space.4. No one is allowed to enter or leave the building.5. Persons outside when Shelter in Place is ordered should report to the chapel, Bldg 117 for isolation Shelter in Place.6. The Police Service shall restrict access to the campus during Shelter in Place.7. Communication during shelter in place will be via normal emergency channels.All staff is cautioned not to allow any person who is outside at the time Shelter in Place is set into any building other than the chapel. There is a potential that people who were outside may have been contaminated by the source that resulted in the call to Shelter in Place.IV. EvacuationThe Medical Center has two primary evacuation plans; horizontal and vertical. Horizontal evacuations are the initial response to an order to evacuate and are covered through the fire plan. This emergency response deals with vertical evacuations only. All staff is required to be familiar with this and horizontal evacuation procedures.A full vertical evacuation may only be authorized by the Incident Commander. Please keep in mind the Incident Commander is staffed only in emergencies; it is not a job title or position. In a fire or unsafe building scenario, the Incident Commander may very well be the Fire Department or Police Supervisor.The goal of an order to evacuate is to remove all patients, visitors, and staff as swiftly as possible from harm’s way. However, our responsibility to our patients requires us to modify the normal evacuation protocol. Unless you are in imminent danger, or the below process would put you in immediate danger, the following actions shall be taken by staff not delegated specific duties during a vertical evacuation:6B Staff: Even numbered rooms report to 5A, odd number rooms report to 5C to expedite the evacuation of inpatients.*4B Staff: Report to 4A and 4C to expedite the evacuation of inpatients.*3A Staff: Report to 3B to expedite the evacuation of inpatients.*3C Staff: Report to Bldg 501 (Long Term Care) to expedite the evacuation of inpatients.2nd floor staff: Report to Bldg 501 (Long Term Care) to expedite the evacuation of inpatients.1st floor staff: Assist all patients and visitors in evacuating the building.*Evacuchairs and evacusleds are located in strategic places throughout the Medical Center to assist in the evacuation of people who are unable to make it down the stairs themselves.All Services: Designate a primary and secondary staff member to take your “Go Bag” to your Service muster area. Designate a primary and secondary staff member to take a muster and report to the Command Post via FMS vehicles and/or a runner. Service Chief’s are reminded they are responsible for the contents of their “Go Bags” including maintaining functional batteries.FMS Service: Dispatch three vehicles to designated locations to facilitate muster reports and communication between the Incident Command Team and evacuated staff/patients. Begin assigning drivers to vehicles and report transportation capability to the Command Post ASAP.Fire Department: Determine the suitability of utilizing the elevators and communicate accordingly with all inpatient wards. Provide oversight and direct the Medical Center evacuation. Set up triage tarps/tents as required at the most suitable location.Police Service: Restrict campus access as directed by the Incident Commander.A&MM: Report to external triage with the four travel bags and triage cart.Pharmacy: Report to external triage with the four travel bags.Home Health Care: Dispatch staff with laptop and printers to area hospitals.All staff: Be alert to assist patients and visitors during an evacuation.Tenant Commands/Little Eagle Day Care: The Medical Center will attempt to provide transportation or alternate safe sites on campus as requested, however our number one responsibility is to provide for our patients, visitors, and staff. Tenant Commands and Little Eagle should have transportation and COOP plans that are independent of Medical Center resources.After Evacuating:1. Upon exiting the building, all staff not assigned other duties shall report to their Services designated muster area to facilitate personnel accountability.2. Further direction and guidance will be issued by your Service Chief or his/her designated representative. V. Deep Shelter/Duck, Cover, and HoldThis response will be utilized whenever tornado warnings are in effect and/or a tornado has been spotted within 20 miles of the Medical Center campus or an individual CBOC. The purpose of this response is to provide patients, staff, and visitors the highest protection available in the event of a tornado. The key components of Deep Shelter include:The safest place to be in the event of a tornado is the basement.If you are unable to make it to the basement, you should seek shelter on the lowest floor possible.Regardless of what floor you are on, seek shelter in an interior space without windows. Close all doors leading to rooms with windows.Patient wards should move all patients from the rooms to an interior hall.Wherever you are, if you hear a tornado (Sounds similar to a loud, unrelenting locomotive), Duck, cover, and hold:- Duck under a desk or other furniture.- Cover all vital organs and tuck your chin to your chest.- Hold onto a solid piece of furniture or other sturdy anchor.. If a tornado strikes your building, be very cautious when you exit. Always remember the structure of the building may have been damaged and there will be dangerous debris everywhere.See attached document: Signed ICRA Documents.See attached document: Demo Dwgs 05-22-13.See attached document: Updated dwgs - sami 10-15-13. ................
................

In order to avoid copyright disputes, this page is only a partial summary.

Google Online Preview   Download